Siep C710617 05i Ga700 TM en

GA700 Series
AC Drive for Industrial Applications

Technical Manual
Model: GA70Cxxxxxxxx
Type: 200 V Class: 0.55 to 110 kW
400 V Class: 0.55 to 630 kW
HTML
This Page Intentionally Blank
2 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

Table of Contents
i. Preface and General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
i.1 Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
About Registered Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
i.2 Using the Product Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Explanation of Signal Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Warning Label Content and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
i.3 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exclusion of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1. Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2 Verifying the Drive Model and Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
How to Read the Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 Features and Advantages of Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2. Mechanical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3 Installation Position and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Install Single Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Install Drives Side-by-Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
External Heatsink Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.4 Moving the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Instructions on Drive Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.5 Drive Watt Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
200 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
400 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remove the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reattach the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.7 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operate the Keypad from a Remote Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Connect the Keypad from a Remote Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.8 Removing/Reattaching Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.10 Installation Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 3

Standard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
External Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3. Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.2 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.3 Main Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motor and Main Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Wire Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Protection of Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.5 Control Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Control Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Control Circuit Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.6 Control I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Pulse Train Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Set Input Signals for MFAI Terminals A1 to A3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Set MFAI Terminal A3 to PTC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Set Output Signals for MFAO Terminals FM, AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switch ON Termination Resistor for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.8 External Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Drive Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Interlock Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.9 Braking Resistor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Install a Braking Resistor: ERF-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Install a Braking Resistor Unit: LKEB-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Install a Braking Unit Connection: CDBR-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Connect Braking Units in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dynamic Braking Option Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.10 Drive Wiring Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installing a Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installing a Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Residual Current Monitor/Device
(RCM/RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.11 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Install an Electromagnetic Contactor (MC) at the Input Side of the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay on the Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.12 Improve the Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Connect an AC Reactor or a DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.13 Prevent Switching Surge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.14 Decrease Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Connect a Noise Filter to the Input Side (Primary Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Connect a Noise Filter to the Output Side (Secondary Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.15 Protect the Drive during Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection for UL Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3.16 Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.17 Motor Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Precautions for Existing Standard Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Precaution When You Use IE3 Premium Efficiency Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Precautions for PM Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Precautions for Specialized Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Notes on the Power Transmission Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4. Startup Procedure and Test Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

4.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.2 Keypad Components and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Indicator LEDs and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Keypad Mode and Menu Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.3 LED Status Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.4 Start-up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Flowchart A: Connect and Run the Motor with Minimum Setting Changes . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Sub-Chart A-1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sub-Chart A-2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Subchart A-3: EZ Open Loop Vector Control Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.5 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Check before Energizing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Check after You Energize the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Make the Initial Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.6 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Home Screen Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Show the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Set Custom Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Show Custom Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Set the Monitors to Show as a Bar Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Show Monitors as Bar Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Set the Monitors to Show as Analog Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Display Monitors as an Analog Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Set Monitoring Items to be Shown as a Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Show Monitor Items as a Trend Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Change Parameter Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Examine User Custom Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Save a Backup of Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Write Backed-up Parameters to the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Delete Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Check Modified Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Restore Modified Parameters to Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Show Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Set the Keypad Language Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Set the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Set Parameters Using the Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Disable the Initial Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Start Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Configuring the Data Log Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Set Backlight to Automatically Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Show Information about the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Show Information about the Communication Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Write Automatically Backed-up Parameters to the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific Applications (Application
Presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.8 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Auto-Tuning for PM Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Auto-Tuning in EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Control Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Precautions before Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.9 Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
No-Load Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Do a No-Load Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Actual-Load Test Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Do an Actual-Load Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.10 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Open Loop Vector Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Closed Loop Vector Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Open Loop Vector Control for PM Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Closed Loop Vector Control Method for PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.11 Test Run Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5. Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.2 European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.3 United Kingdom Conformity Assessed Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.4 UL Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Area of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
UL Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.5 China RoHS Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.6 对应中国RoHS指令 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
本产品中含有有害物质的信息 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5.7 Safe Disable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Safe Disable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
6. Network Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

6.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
6.2 Field Bus Network Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
6.3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configure Master/Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Communication with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
MEMOBUS/Modbus Drive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Examples of Messages for Commands/Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Communications Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
7.4 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
7.6 Parameter Setting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Fault and Power Loss Occur at the Same Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Fault Occurs Without Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Typical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
The Parameter Settings Will Not Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
The Motor Does Not Rotate After Entering Run Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
The Motor Is Too Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is Too Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
The Drive Frequency Reference Is Different than the Controller Frequency Reference
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
The Motor Speed Is Not Stable When Using a PM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is Irregular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Braking Is Enabled. . . . . . . 398
The Load Falls When a Brake Is Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when You Energize the
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) Trips During Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery. . . . . . . 399
Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
PID Output Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
The Motor Rotates after the Drive Output Is Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
The Motor Is Making an Audible Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
The Motor Will Not Restart after a Loss of Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
8. Periodic Inspection and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

8.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
8.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Recommended Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Recommended Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Part Replacement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Monitors that Display the Lifespan of Drive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
8.4 Replace Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans by Drive Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fan Replacement (Procedure A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fan Replacement (Procedure B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fan Replacement (Procedure C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fan Replacement (Procedure D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Fan Replacement (Procedure E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Fan Replacement (Procedure F). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fan Replacement (Procedure G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fan Replacement (Procedure H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
8.5 Replace the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
About the Control Circuit Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Replace the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
8.6 Replace the Keypad Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8.7 Storage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
9. Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
9.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
9.2 Disposal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
10. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

10.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10.2 Drive Duty Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10.3 Model-Specific Specifications (200 V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
10.4 Model-Specific Specifications (400 V Class) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10.5 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
10.6 Drive Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Carrier Frequency Settings and Rated Current Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
10.7 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Drive Models and Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
IP00/IP20/UL Open Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
IP20/UL Type1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
10.8 Knock-Out Hole Dimensions (IP20/UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Models and Dimensions of Knock-Out Hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
10.9 Peripheral Devices and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11. Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
11.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
11.2 How to Read the Parameter List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Icons and Terms that Identify Parameters and Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
11.3 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
11.4 A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
11.5 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
b3: Speed Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
b4: Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

b5: PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
b7: Droop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
b8: Energy Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
b9: Zero Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
11.6 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
C1: Accel & Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
C2: S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C5: Auto Speed Regulator (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
11.7 d: Reference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
d1: Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
d2: Reference Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
d3: Jump Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
d5: Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
d6: Field Weakening /Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
d7: Offset Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
11.8 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
E2: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
E4: Motor 2 Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
E5: PM Motor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
E9: Motor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
11.9 F: Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
F1: PG Option Setup (Encoder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
F2: Analog Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
F3: Digital Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
F4: Analog Monitor Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
F5: Digital Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
F6: Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
F7: Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
11.10 H: Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
H1: Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
H2: Multi-function Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
H3: Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
H4: Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
H5: Modbus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
H7: Virtual MFIO selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
11.11 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
L1: Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
L2: Power Loss Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
L4: Speed Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
L5: Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
L9: Drive Protection 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
11.12 n: Special Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
n1: Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
n2: Auto Freq Regulator (AFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
n3: High Slip/Overexcite Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

n4: Adv Open Loop Vector Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
n5: Feed Forward Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
n6: Online Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
n7: EZ Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
n8: PM Motor Control Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
11.13 o: Keypad-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
o1: Keypad Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
o2: Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
o3: Copy Keypad Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
o4: Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
o5: Log Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
11.14 q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
q1-01 to qx-xx: Reserved for DriveWorksEZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
11.15 r: DWEZ Connection 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
r1-01 to r1-40: DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 (Upper / Lower) . . . . . . . 606
11.16 T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
T0: Tuning Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
T1: InductionMotor Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
T3: ASR and Inertia Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
T4: EZ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
11.17 U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
U1: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
U2: Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
U3: Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
U4: Maintenance Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
U5: PID Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
U6: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
U8: DriveWorksEZ Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Ud: Control Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
11.18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method
Selection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
11.19 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with E3-01 [Motor 2 Control
Mode Selection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
11.20 Parameters Changed by E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
11.21 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Three-Phase 200 V Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Three-Phase 400 V Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
12. Parameter Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

12.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
12.2 A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
12.3 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
b3: Speed Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
b4: Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
b5: PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
b7: Droop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
b8: Energy Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
b9: Zero Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
12.4 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

C1: Accel & Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
C2: S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR: Automatic Speed Regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
12.5 d: References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
d1: Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
d2: Reference Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
d3: Jump Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
d5: Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
d6: Field Weakening /Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
d7: Offset Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
12.6 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
E5: PM Motor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
E9: Motor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
12.7 F: Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
F1: Encoder Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
F2: Analog Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
F3: Digital Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
F4: Analog Monitor Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
F5: Digital Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
F6, F7: Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
12.8 H: Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
H1: Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Multi-Function Digital Input Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
H2: Multi-function Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
MFDO Setting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
H3: Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
H4: Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
H5: Memobus/Modbus Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
H6: Pulse Train Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
H7: Virtual MFIO Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
12.9 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
L1: Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
L2: Power Loss Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
L4: Speed Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
L5: Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
L9: Drive Protection 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
12.10 n: Special Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
n1: Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
n2: Auto Freq Regulator (AFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
n3: High Slip Braking (HSB) and Overexcitation Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
n4: Adv Open Loop Vector Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
n5: Feed Forward Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
n6: Online Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
n7: EZ Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
n8: PM Motor Control Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

12.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
o1: Keypad Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
o2: Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
o3: Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
o4: Maintenance Mon Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
o5: Log Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
12.12 T: Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
T0: Tuning Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
T3: ASR and Inertia Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
T4: EZ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

i
Preface and General Precautions
This chapter gives information about important safety precautions for the use of this product.
Failure to obey these precautions can cause serious injury or death, or damage to the product or
related devices and systems. Yaskawa must not be held responsible for any injury or equipment
damage as a result of the failure to observe these precautions and instructions.
i.1 Receiving.................................................................................................................... 14
i.2 Using the Product Safely........................................................................................ 16
i.3 Warranty Information .............................................................................................. 19

i.1 Receiving
i.1 Receiving
These instructions contain the information necessary to use the product correctly. Read and understand the safety
information and precautions before you start to use the product.
◆ Glossary
Phrase Definition
AOLV Advanced Open Loop Vector Control
AOLV/PM Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors
CLV Closed Loop Vector Control
CL-V/f Closed Loop V/f Control
CLV/PM Closed Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors
Drive YASKAWA AC Drive GA700
EDM External Device Monitor
EZOLV EZ Open Loop Vector Control
HD Heavy Duty
IPM motor Interior Permanent Magnet Motor
MFAI Multi-Function Analog Input
MFAO Multi-Function Analog Output
MFDI Multi-Function Digital Input
MFDO Multi-Function Digital Output
ND Normal Duty
OLV Open Loop Vector Control
OLV/PM Open Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors
PM motor Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (generic name for IPM motors and SPM motors)
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SPM motor Surface Permanent Magnet Motor
V/f V/f Control
■ Icons to Identify Screw Shapes

Table i.1 Icons to Identify Screw Shapes
Icon Screw Shape Icon Screw Shape
Phillips/slot combo (+/-) Hex self-locking nut
Slotted (-) Hex socket cap (WAF: 5 mm)
Minus (-) Hex socket cap (WAF: 6 mm)
Hex bolt (cross-slotted) Hex socket cap (WAF: 8 mm)
Hex bolt (slotted)
◆ About Registered Trademarks

• CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation (CIA).
• CC-Link is a registered trademark of CC-Link Partner Association.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA).
• EtherCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH.
• EtherNet/IP is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA).
• LonWorks and LonTalk are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
• MECHATROLINK-I, MECHATROLINK-II, and MECHATROLINK-III are registered trademarks of
MECHATROLINK Members Association (MMA).

i.1 Receiving
• Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA.

• PROFIBUS-DP and PROFINET are registered trademarks of PROFIBUS International.
• Other company names and product names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.

i.2 Using the Product Safely

◆ Explanation of Signal Words
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before you install, operate, or do maintenance on the drive.
Install the drive as specified by this manual and local codes.
The symbols in this section identify safety messages in this manual. If you do not obey these safety messages,
the hazards can cause serious injury, death, or damage to the products and related equipment and systems.
These identifier words categorize and emphasize important safety precautions in these instructions.
DANGER
This signal word identifies a hazard that will cause serious injury or death if you do not prevent
it.
WARNING
This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause death or serious injuries if you do not
prevent it.
CAUTION
This signal word identifies a hazard that can cause minor or moderate injuries if you do not
prevent it.
NOTICE
This signal word identifies a property damage message that is not related to personal injury.
◆ Section Safety
General Precautions
• Some figures in the instructions include options and drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the drive. Replace covers and shields before
operation. Use options and drives only as specified by the instructions.
• The figures in this manual are examples only. All figures do not apply to all products included in this manual.
• Yaskawa can change the products, specifications, and content of the instructions without notice to make the product and/or the instructions better.
• If you damage or lose these instructions, contact a Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office on the rear cover of the manual, and tell them the document
number on the front cover to order new copies.
DANGER
Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual.
If you ignore the safety messages in this manual, it will cause serious injury or death. The manufacturer is not
responsible for injuries or damage to equipment.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a
minimum. The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge
indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc. When all
indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure
that the drive is safe.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.

WARNING
Crush Hazard
Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set
parameters.
If you do not test the system, it can cause damage to equipment or serious injury or death.
Sudden Movement Hazard
Before you do a test run, make sure that the setting values for virtual input and output function
parameters are correct. Virtual input and output functions can have different default settings
and operation than wired input and output functions.
Incorrect function settings can cause serious injury or death.
Remove all personnel and objects from the area around the drive, motor, and machine and
attach covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before you energize the drive.
If personnel are too close or if there are missing parts, it can cause serious injury or death.
Examine the I/O signals and internal sequence with the engineer who made the DriveWorksEZ
program before you operate the drive.
If you do not know how the drive will operate, it can cause serious injury or death. When you use DriveWorksEZ
to make custom programming, the drive I/O terminal functions change from factory settings and the drive will
not operate as written in this manual.
Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry.
Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause serious injury or death, will cause damage to the drive, and
will void the warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modifications of the product made by the user.
Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the drive.
If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized.
If you touch the internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive or
operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and
make sure that all indicators are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to
find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of the problem, contact Yaskawa
before you energize the drive or peripheral devices.
If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or
death.
Damage to Equipment
Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive. Operate the drive in the specified
range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate.
Voltages that are higher than the permitted nameplate tolerance can cause damage to the drive.
Fire Hazard
Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this
manual. The drive is suitable for circuits that supply not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class), 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive.
If the drive or covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.

NOTICE
Use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation and windings
applicable for use with an AC drive.
If the motor does not have the correct insulation, it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation
deterioration.
Damage to Equipment
When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures.
If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not do a withstand voltage test or use a megohmmeter or megger insulation tester on the
drive.
These tests can cause damage to the drive.
Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts.
You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.
Do not use steam or other disinfectants to fumigate wood for packaging the drive. Use
alternative methods, for example heat treatment, before you package the components.
Gas from wood packaging fumigated with halogen disinfectants, for example fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
or DOP gas (phthalic acid ester), can cause damage to the drive.
◆ Warning Label Content and Location

The drive warning label is in the location shown in Figure i.1. Use the drive as specified by this information.
A - Warning label
Figure i.1 Warning Label Content and Location

i.3 Warranty Information

◆ Exclusion of Liability
• This product is not designed and manufactured for use in life-support machines or systems.
• Contact a Yaskawa representative or your Yaskawa sales representative if you are considering the application of
this product for special purposes, such as machines or systems used for passenger cars, medicine, airplanes and
aerospace, nuclear power, electric power, or undersea relaying.
WARNING
Injury to Personnel
When you use this product in applications where its failure could cause the loss of human life, a
serious accident, or physical injury, you must install applicable safety devices.
If you do not correctly install safety devices, it can cause serious injury or death.


1
Receiving
This chapter gives information about the different drive models and features, and how to
examine the drive when you receive it.
1.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 22

1.2 Verifying the Drive Model and Nameplate.......................................................... 23
1.3 Features and Advantages of Control Methods................................................. 27

1.1 Section Safety
1.1 Section Safety

DANGER

1.2 Verifying the Drive Model and Nameplate

Please examine these items after receiving the drive:
• Examine the drive for damage. Immediately contact the shipping company if the drive is damaged. The
Yaskawa warranty does not cover damage from shipping.
• Verify the drive model number to make sure that you received the correct model. Verify the model number in
the "MODEL" section of the drive nameplate to make sure that you received the correct model.
• If you received a product different than you ordered or a product with a defect, contact Yaskawa or your nearest
sales representative.
◆ Nameplate
Receiving
1
A- Hardware revision G- Protection design

B- Weight H- Serial number
C- Drive software version I- Lot number
D- The address of the head office of Yaskawa J- Output specifications
Electric Corporation K- Input specifications
E - Accreditation standards L- Drive model
F - Surrounding air temperature
Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example
◆ How to Read the Model Number

Use the information in Figure 1.2 and Table 1.1 to read the drive model numbers.
Figure 1.2 Drive Model

Table 1.1 Model Number Details

No. Description
1 Drive
2 Product series
3 Region code
• A: Japan
• B: China
• C: Europe
• D: India
• K: Korea
• T: Asia (Singapore and Taiwan)
• U: Americas
4 Input power supply voltage

• 2: Three-Phase AC 200 V Class
• 4: Three-Phase AC 400 V Class
5 Rated output current

Note:
Refer to the tables for the rated output current by model.
6 EMC noise filter
• A: No internal EMC filter
• B: Internal category C3 EMC filter
7 Enclosure protection design

• A: IP00
• B: IP20
• W: IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting
8 Environmental specification (Reserved)
9 Design revision order
10 Control circuit terminal board (Reserved)
11 Option (connector CN5-A) (Reserved)
12 Option (connector CN5-B) (Reserved)
13 Option (connector CN5-C) (Reserved)
14 Keypad (Reserved)
15 Special applications (Reserved)
■ Rated Output Current

Table 1.2 to Table 1.4 give the rated output current values.
Note:
• These output current values are applicable for drives that operate at standard specifications.
• Derate the output current in applications that:
–Increase the carrier frequency
–Have high ambient temperature
–Install drives side-by-side.
• Use C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] to select Normal Duty rating (ND) or Heavy Duty rating (HD).
Table 1.2 Three-Phase AC 200 V Class
Heavy Duty Rating (HD)
Normal Duty Rating (ND)
[C6-01 = 0]
[C6-01 = 1]
(Default)
Model
Maximum Applicable Motor Maximum Applicable Motor
Rated Output Current Rated Output Current
Output Output
kW A kW A
2004 0.55 3.2 0.75 3.5
2006 0.75 5 1.1 6
2010 1.5 8 2.2 9.6
2012 2.2 11 3 12.2
2018 3 14 4 17.5
2021 4 17.5 5.5 21
2030 5.5 25 7.5 30


[C6-01 = 0]
[C6-01 = 1]
(Default)
Model
Output Output
A A
kW kW
2042 7.5 33 11 42
2056 11 47 15 56
2070 15 60 18.5 70
2082 18.5 75 22 82
2110 22 88 30 110
2138 30 115 37 138
2169 37 145 45 169
2211 45 180 55 211
2257 55 215 75 257
2313 75 283 90 313
2360 90 346 110 360
2415 110 415 - -
Table 1.3 Three-Phase AC 400 V Class (Input Voltage < 460 V)

E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] < 460

[C6-01 = 0]
Model [C6-01 = 1]
(Default)
Maximum Applicable Motor Rated Output Current Maximum Applicable Motor Rated Output Current
Output Output
A A
kW kW
4002 0.55 1.8 0.75 2.1
4004 1.1 3.4 1.5 4.1
4005 1.5 2.2
Receiving
4.8 5.4
4007 2.2 5.5 3.0 7.1
4009 3.0 7.2 4.0 8.9
4012 4.0 9.2 5.5 11.9 1

4018 5.5 14.8 7.5 17.5
4023 7.5 18 11 23.4
4031 11 24 15 31
4038 15 31 18.5 38
4044 18.5 39 22 44
4060 22 45 30 59.6
4075 30 60 37 74.9
4089 37 75 45 89.2
4103 45 91 55 103
4140 55 112 75 140
4168 75 150 90 168
4208 90 180 110 208
4250 110 216 132 250
4296 132 260 160 296
4371 160 304 200 371
4389 200 371 220 389
4453 220 414 250 453
4568 250 453 315 568

E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] < 460

[C6-01 = 0]
Model [C6-01 = 1]
(Default)
Maximum Applicable Motor Rated Output Current Maximum Applicable Motor Rated Output Current
Output Output
kW A kW A
4675 315 605 355 675
4810 400 720 450 810
4930 450 810 500 930
4H11 500 930 560 1090
4H12 560 1090 630 1200
Table 1.4 Three-Phase AC 400 V Class (Input Voltage ≥ 460 V)

E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] ≥ 460

[C6-01 = 0]
Model [C6-01 = 1]
(Default)

Output Output
A A
HP HP
4002 3/4 1.6 1 2.1
4004 1 2.1 2 3.4
4005 2 3.4 3 4.8
4007 3 4.8 4 6.9
4009 4 6.9 5 7.6
4012 5 7.6 7 1/2 11
4018 7 1/2 11 10 14
4023 10 14 15 21
4031 15 21 20 27
4038 20 27 25 34
4044 25 34 30 40
4060 30 40 40 52
4075 40 52 50 65
4089 50 65 60 77
4103 60 77 75 96
4140 75 96 100 124
4168 100 124 125 156
4208 125 156 150 180
4250 150 180 200 240
4296 200 240 250 302
4371 250 302 300 361
4389 300 361 350 414
4453 350 414 400 477
4568 400 477 450 515
4675 - - - -
4810 450 720 525 810
4930 525 810 600 930
4H11 600 930 675 1090
4H12 675 1090 750 1200

1.3 Features and Advantages of Control Methods

This drive has 9 available control methods from which you can select for different applications. Table 1.5, Table
1.6 and Table 1.7 give information about the features of each control method.
Table 1.5 V/f and CL-V/f Features and Advantages of Control Methods
Control Method Open Loop V/f Control V/f Control with Encoder
Notes
Selection (V/f) (CL-V/f)
Controlled Motor Induction Motor -
Parameter Settings A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 1 -
Closed loop V/f control with speed

Basic Control V/f -
correction
General-purpose variable speed control to High-precision speed control with encoders

Main Applications -
connect more than one motor to one drive. on machines
PG Option Card Not necessary Necessary (PG-B3 or PG-X3) -
Maximum Output Frequency 590 Hz 400 Hz -
This is the range of variable control.

Speed Control Range 1:40 1:40 When you connect and operate motors in this mode,
think about the increase in motor temperature.
This is the motor torque that the drive can supply at

low speed during start-up and the related output
frequency (rotation speed).
Starting Torque 150% / 3 Hz 150% / 3 Hz
When a large quantity of torque is necessary at low
speed, you must think about drive capacity and motor
capacity.
Rotational and Line-to-Line Resistance Rotational and Line-to-Line Resistance

Auto-Tuning *1 (usually not necessary) (usually not necessary) Automatically tunes electrical motor parameters.
Controls maximum motor torque to prevent damage to

Torque Limits *1 No No
machines and loads.
Directly controls motor torque to control tension and

Torque Control *1 No No
other parameters.
Droop Control *1 No No Sets load torque slip for motors. Distributes motor
loads.
Locks servos without an external position controller to

Zero Servo Control *1 No No prevent movement caused by external force.
Receiving
Immediately estimates (or detects) motor speed and
Speed Search *1 Yes - direction when coasting to a stop to quickly start-up
the drive without stopping the motor.
Automatically adjusts the voltage that the drive applies

Automatic Energy-saving
Control *1
Yes Yes to the motor to maximize motor efficiency for small
and large loads. 1
Increases motor loss to let the motor decelerate faster
High Slip Braking (HSB) *1 Yes Yes than usual without a braking resistor. Motor
characteristics have an effect on this function.
Compensates effects of the system inertia to increase

Feed Forward Control *1 No No
the speed precision when the load changes.
Quickly and safely stops the motor during power loss

and automatically starts operation at the previous
KEB Ride-Thru Function *1 Yes Yes speed when the drive applies power again without
coasting the motor.
Overexcitation Deceleration Sets the V/f higher than the setting value during
*1 Yes Yes deceleration to increase motor loss and decrease
deceleration time.
Overvoltage Suppression Adjusts speed during regeneration to prevent

Yes Yes
Function *1 *2 overvoltage.
*1 Note these points when you use this function:

• When you can decouple the motor and machine for a test run, use Rotational Auto-Tuning. You must make adjustments to the
control in the range where there is no vibration in the machine after Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Motor loss increases during overexcitation braking and high-slip braking. Use a maximum braking frequency of 5% ED and a
maximum braking time of 90 seconds. After you start high-slip braking, you cannot restart the motor until it stops. Use
overexcitation braking to decelerate over a shorter time at a pre-determined speed.
*2 Do not use this function with hoist application.

Table 1.6 OLV, CLV and AOLV Features and Advantages of Control Methods
Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Advanced Open Loop Vector
Control Method Control *1 Notes
Selection (OLV) (CLV) (AOLV)
Controlled Motor Induction Motor -
A1-02 = 2
Parameter Settings A1-02 = 3 A1-02 = 4 -
(Default)
Basic Control Open Loop Current Vector Closed Loop Current Vector Open Loop Current Vector -
Control Control Control
Sensorless vector control with

• General-purpose variable speed Very high-performance control speed control
control with motor encoders • General-purpose variable speed
Main Applications • Applications in which high Example: High-precision speed control -
performance is necessary control, torque control, torque • Applications in which high
without machine encoders limits performance is necessary
without machine encoders
PG Option Card Not necessary Necessary (PG-B3 or PG-X3) Not necessary -
Maximum Output 590 Hz 400 Hz 120 Hz -

Frequency
This is the range of variable control.

Speed Control Range 1:200 1:1500 1:200 When you connect and operate motors in
this mode, think about the increase in
motor temperature.
This is the motor torque that the drive can

supply at low speed during start-up and the
related output frequency (rotation speed).
Starting Torque 200% / 0.3 Hz *2 200% / 0 min-1 *2 200% / 0.3 Hz *2
When a large quantity of torque is
necessary at low speed, you must think
about drive capacity and motor capacity.
Rotational, Stationary, and Line- Rotational, Stationary, and Line- Rotational, Stationary, and Line- Automatically tunes electrical motor
Auto-Tuning *3
to-Line Resistance to-Line Resistance to-Line Resistance parameters.
Controls maximum motor torque to

Torque Limits *3 Yes Yes Yes
prevent damage to machines and loads.
Torque Control *3 No Yes Yes (Although NOT low speeds of Directly controls motor torque to control
approximately 10% or less) tension and other parameters.
Droop Control *3 No Yes Yes Sets load torque slip for motors.
Distributes motor loads.
Locks servos without an external position

Zero Servo Control *3 No Yes No controller to prevent movement caused by
external force.
Immediately estimates (or detects) motor

speed and direction when coasting to a
Speed Search *3 Yes - Yes
stop to quickly start-up the drive without
stopping the motor.
Automatically adjusts the voltage that the

Automatic Energy- Yes Yes No drive applies to the motor to maximize
saving Control *3
motor efficiency for small and large loads.
Increases motor loss to let the motor

High Slip Braking decelerate faster than usual without a
(HSB) *3 No No No braking resistor. Motor characteristics have
an effect on this function.
Feed Forward Control Compensates effects of the system inertia

*3 No Yes Yes to increase the speed precision when the
load changes.
Quickly and safely stops the motor during

power loss and automatically starts
KEB Ride-Thru Yes Yes Yes operation at the previous speed when the
Function *3
drive applies power again without coasting
the motor.
Sets the V/f higher than the setting value

Overexcitation
Deceleration *3 Yes Yes Yes during deceleration to increase motor loss
and decrease deceleration time.
Overvoltage
Suppression Function Yes Yes Yes Adjusts speed during regeneration to
*3 *4 prevent overvoltage.
*1 If you operate the drive at a frequency lower than n4-70 [Speed Command Comp @ Low Freq] (default setting: 1.00 Hz), the motor
can rotate at a frequency about 1/2 of n4-70. Set E1-09 > 0 [Minimum Output Frequency > 0] to not let the motor to rotate at a lower
frequency than the n4-70 setting. When the frequency reference ≤ E1-09, the drive output will turn OFF.
*2 Select the drive capacity and motor capacity correctly for the application.


• For vector control, use a 1:1 drive to motor ratio. You cannot use vector control if you connect more than one motor to one drive.
Select a drive capacity so that the motor rated current is 50% to 100% of the drive rated current. If the carrier frequency is too
high, the drive rated current is derated.
• Motor loss increases during overexcitation braking and high-slip braking. Use a maximum braking frequency of 5% ED and a
maximum braking time of 90 seconds. After you start high-slip braking, you cannot restart the motor until it stops. Use
overexcitation braking to decelerate over a shorter time at a pre-determined speed.
• Acceleration and deceleration have priority over torque limits in Open Loop Vector Control during acceleration and deceleration
(soft start changes). The drive will not operate until the speed is at the minimum frequency or the reverse direction of motor
rotation when the motor speed decreases because of torque limits during constant speed control. Set L7-07 = 1 [Torque Limit
during Accel/Decel = Proportional & Integral control] to enable torque limits during acceleration/deceleration (for winding
applications).
Table 1.7 OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM and EZOLV Features and Advantages of Control Methods
PM Open Loop Vector PM Advanced Open PM Closed Loop Vector EZ Open Loop Vector
Control Method Control Loop Vector Control Control Notes
Selection
(OLV/PM) (AOLV/PM) (CLV/PM) (EZOLV)
Induction Motors/PM
Controlled Motors/SynRM
Motor PM motor (Synchronous -
Reluctance Motors)
Parameter Settings A1-02 = 5 A1-02 = 6 A1-02 = 7 A1-02 = 8 -
PM Open Loop Vector PM Open Loop Current PM Closed Loop Current

Open Loop Current Vector
Basic Control Control (no speed Vector Control (with speed Vector Control (with speed Control -
controller) controller) controller)
• General-purpose variable • General-purpose variable

speed control for PM
speed control for IPM Very high-performance PM
motors motors motor control with motor Low-speed torque
Main Applications • Applications in which a encoders applications -
• Applications in which
high level of high-precision speed Example: Torque control Example: Fans and pumps
responsiveness and
accurate speed control control and torque limits and torque limits
are necessary.
are not necessary.
PG Option Card Not necessary Not necessary Necessary (PG-X3) Not necessary -
Maximum Output
590 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 120 Hz -
Frequency
Receiving
This is the range of variable
control.
Speed Control 1:20 AM
Range 1:20 AM 1:1500 1:100 When you connect and operate
1:100 *1 *2
motors in this mode, think about
the increase in motor temperature.
This is the motor torque that the

drive can supply at low speed
1
during start-up and the related
100% / 5% speed output frequency (rotation speed).
Starting Torque 100% / 5% speed 200% / 0 min-1 *3 100% / 1% speed
200% / 0 min-1 *1 *3 When a large quantity of torque is
necessary at low speed, you must
think about drive capacity and
motor capacity.
Stationary, Stator
Stationary, Stator Stationary, Stator Resistance, Z-phase, Automatically tunes electrical
Auto-Tuning *4 Resistance, Rotational, High Resistance, Rotational, High Line-to-Line Resistance
Rotational, High Frequency motor parameters.
Frequency Injection Frequency Injection Injection
Controls maximum motor torque to

Torque Limits *4 No Yes Yes Yes prevent damage to machines and
loads.
Directly controls motor torque to

Torque Control *4 No Yes *5 Yes No control tension and other
parameters.
Sets load torque slip for motors.

Droop Control *4 No No Yes No
Distributes motor loads.
Locks servos without an external

Zero Servo position controller to prevent
No No Yes No
Control *4 movement caused by external
force.
Immediately estimates (or detects)

Yes (Although NOT motor speed and direction when
operation in the reverse
Speed Search *4 Yes Yes Yes direction of the Run coasting to a stop to quickly start-
up the drive without stopping the
command)
motor.
Automatically adjusts the voltage

Automatic Energy- that the drive applies to the motor
saving Control *4 No Yes (IPM motors only) Yes (IPM motors only) Yes to maximize motor efficiency for
small and large loads.

PM Open Loop Vector PM Advanced Open PM Closed Loop Vector EZ Open Loop Vector
Control Method Control Loop Vector Control Control
Selection Notes
(OLV/PM) (AOLV/PM) (CLV/PM) (EZOLV)
Induction Motors/PM
Controlled PM motor Motors/SynRM -
Motor (Synchronous
Reluctance Motors)
Increases motor loss to let the

motor decelerate faster than usual
High Slip Braking No (induction motor- No (induction motor- No (induction motor- No without a braking resistor. Motor
(HSB) Activate specific function) specific function) specific function)
characteristics have an effect on
this function.
Compensates effects of the system

Feed Forward
Control *4 No Yes Yes No inertia to increase the speed
precision when the load changes.
Quickly and safely stops the motor

during power loss and
KEB Ride-Thru Yes Yes Yes Yes automatically starts operation at the
Function *4 previous speed when the drive
applies power again without
coasting the motor.
Sets the V/f higher than the setting

Overexcitation No (induction motor- No (induction motor- No (induction motor- value during deceleration to
No
Deceleration specific function) specific function) specific function) increase motor loss and decrease
deceleration time.
Overvoltage
Suppression Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjusts speed during regeneration
to prevent overvoltage.
Function *4 *6
Sensorless Zero Enables zero speed control using

No Yes (IPM motors only) - No high frequency injection on IPM
Speed Control *4
motors.
*1 Sets n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled]. When you use a non-Yaskawa PM motor, do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
*2 Speed control range of 1:100 is Instantaneous operation range. Correctly select the drive and motor capacity for continuous
operation.
*3 Correctly select the drive and motor capacity.
• For vector control, use a 1:1 drive to motor ratio. You cannot use vector control if you connect more than one motor to one drive.
Select a drive capacity so that the motor rated current is 50% to 100% of the drive rated current. If the carrier frequency is too
high, the drive rated current is derated.
*5 Torque control at zero speed is only available with IPM motors. To enable torque control with IPM motors at zero speed, set n8-57 =
1.
Note:
When you set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High Frequency Injection] and n8-57 = 1, do High Frequency Injection Auto-
Tuning.

2
Mechanical Installation
This chapter gives information about the correct environment and clearances to install the drive.
2.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 32

2.2 Installation Environment ........................................................................................ 34
2.3 Installation Position and Clearances .................................................................. 35
2.4 Moving the Drive....................................................................................................... 38
2.5 Drive Watt Loss......................................................................................................... 40
2.6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad....................................................................... 44
2.7 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device............................... 45
2.8 Removing/Reattaching Covers............................................................................. 50
2.9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type........................................................................ 55
2.10 Installation Methods ................................................................................................ 56

2.1 Section Safety
2.1 Section Safety

WARNING
Fire Hazard
Do not put flammable or combustible materials on top of the drive and do not install the drive
near flammable or combustible materials. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible
material.
Flammable and combustible materials can start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or cooler to decrease the
temperature around the drive. Make sure that the intake air temperature to the drive is 50 °C (122
°F) or less for IP00/UL Open Type or IP20/UL Open Type drives, and 40 °C (104 °F) or less for
IP20/UL Type 1 drives.
If the air temperature is too hot, the drive can become too hot and cause a fire and serious injury or death.
Crush Hazard
Only approved personnel can operate a crane or hoist to move the drive.
If unapproved personnel operate a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.
Before you hang the drive vertically, use screws to correctly attach the drive front cover and
other drive components.
If you do not secure the front cover, it can fall and cause minor injury.
When you use a crane or hoist to lift the drive during installation or removal, prevent more than
1.96 m/s2 (0.2 G) vibration or impact.
Too much vibration or impact can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.
When you lift the drive during installation or removal, do not try to turn the drive over and do not
ignore the hanging drive.
If you move a hanging drive too much or if you ignore it, the drive can fall and cause serious injury or death.
Use a crane or hoist to move large drives when necessary.
If you try to move a large drive without a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
NOTICE
Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive
during drive installation. Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the
temporary cover before start-up.
Unwanted objects inside of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
Damage to Equipment

2.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
Install vibration-proof rubber on the base of the motor or use the frequency jump function in the
drive to prevent specific frequencies that vibrate the motor.
Motor or system resonant vibration can occur in fixed speed machines that are converted to variable speed. Too
much vibration can cause damage to equipment.
You can use the drive with an explosion-proof motor, but the drive is not explosion-proof. Install
the drive only in the environment shown on the nameplate.
If you install the drive in a dangerous environment, it can cause damage to the drive.
Do not lift the drive with the covers removed.
If the drive does not have covers, you can easily cause damage to the internal parts of the drive.
2

2.2 Installation Environment
2.2 Installation Environment

The installation environment is important for the lifespan of the product and to make sure that the drive
performance is correct. Make sure that the installation environment aligns with these specifications.
Environment Conditions
Area of Use Indoors
Power Supply Overvoltage Category III
IP00/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)

IP20/UL Type 1: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; front side: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Surrounding Air
IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; back side: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Temperature
• When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range.
• Do not let the drive freeze.
• You can use IP00/UL Open Type drives and IP20/UL Open Type drives at a maximum of 60 °C (140 °F) when you derate the output current.
• You can use IP20/UL Type 1 drives at a maximum of 50 °C (122 °F) when you derate the output current.
95% RH or less
Humidity
Do not let condensation form on the drive.
Storage Temperature -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) (short-term temperature during transportation)
Pollution degree 2 or less

Install the drive in an area without:
• Oil mist, corrosive or flammable gas, or dust
• Metal powder, oil, water, or other unwanted materials
Surrounding Area • Radioactive or flammable materials.
• Harmful gas or fluids
• Salt
• Direct sunlight
Keep wood and other flammable materials away from the drive.
1000 m (3281 ft) Maximum

Note:
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m (3281 ft to 13123 ft).
Altitude It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• When you install the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• When you install the drive between 2000 m to 4000 m (6562 ft to 13123 ft) and ground the neutral point on the power supply.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if you will not ground the neutral point.
• 10 Hz to 20 Hz:
2004 to 2415, 4002 to 4675: 1 G (9.8 m/s2, 32.15 ft/s2)
4810 to 4H12: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)
Vibration *1
• 20 Hz to 55 Hz:
2004 to 2211, 4002 to 4168: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)
2257 to 2415, 4208 to 4H12: 0.2 G (2.0 m/s2, 6.56 ft/s2)
Installation Orientation Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.
*1 This drive passed the vibration test with a logarithmic sweep as specified by EN 60068-2-6 and JIS C60068-2-6. If the internal
components of the drive vibrate too much, it can cause damage to the drive even when the vibration frequency is in the specification.
If the drive components vibrate, improve the installation environment to decrease vibration.
• Put the motor on a rubber pad to decrease vibration.
• Reinforce the structure of the installation.
NOTICE: Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive during drive installation.
Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before start-up. Unwanted objects inside
of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
Do not put drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive. Shield the drive from electrical interference if
components must be near the drive. Electrical interference can cause the drive or devices around the drive to function incorrectly.

2.3 Installation Position and Clearances

Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.
Note:
Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for more information about installing drive models on their side.
Figure 2.1 Installation Orientation
◆ Install Single Drive

Use the clearances specified in Figure 2.2 to install the drive. Make sure that there is sufficient space for wiring
and airflow to cool the drive.
A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum C - 120 mm (4.7 in) minimum above and below
B - 30 mm (1.2 in) minimum on each side D - Airflow direction
Figure 2.2 Installation Clearances for One Drive
2
◆ Install Drives Side-by-Side
You can install drive models 2004xB to 2082xB and 4002xB to 4044xB side-by-side.
When you install other drives side-by-side, make sure that you keep the necessary clearances between the drives
for single drive installation.
To install these models side-by-side, make sure that there is sufficient space as shown in Figure 2.3. Set L8-35 = 1
[Installation Method Selection = Side-by-Side Mounting].
Derate the output current to align with the ambient temperature. Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient
Temperature on page 474 for more information.

A - 50 mm (2 in) minimum C - 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum between each drive

B - 30 mm (1.2 in) minimum on each side D - 120 mm (4.7 in) minimum above and below
Figure 2.3 Installation Clearances for More than One Drive (Side-by-Side)
Note:
• When you do side-by-side installations of drives that have different dimensions, align the tops of the drives. This will make it easier to
replace the cooling fans.
• Remove the top protective covers of all drives when you mount IP20/UL Type 1 drives side-by-side.
Figure 2.4 IP20/UL Type 1 Drives Installed Side-by-Side
◆ External Heatsink Installation

The optional External Heatsink Installation Kit will let you install the drive with the cooling fins, which are the
main heat-dissipating component of the drive, external to the enclosure panel.
Table 2.1 shows the model numbers for the drive and the attachment. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative to make an order.
Table 2.1 External Heatsink Installation Kit (Optional)
Heatsink External Mounting Kit Model
Drive Model
(No.)
2004 - 2042 900-193-209-001

4002 - 4023 (100-203-229)
2056 900-193-209-002
4031, 4038 (100-203-230)
2070, 2082 900-193-209-003

4044, 4060 (100-203-231)
2110 - 2415
*1
4075 - 4H12

*1 When you install models 4075 to 4H12 with external heatsink installation, use the mounting brackets supplied with the drive.
Optional attachments are not necessary.
Refer to “External Heatsink Installation Kit Instruction Manual (TOxP C720600 03)” for more information about how to do an
external heatsink installation. You can download manuals from the Yaskawa product and technical information website shown on the
back cover of this manual.
2

2.4 Moving the Drive

Obey local laws and regulations when you move and install this product.
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Tighten terminal cover screws and hold the case safely when you move the drive. If the drive or
covers fall, it can cause moderate injury.
Drive Weight Persons Necessary to Move the Drive
< 15 kg (33 lbs.) 1
≥ 15 kg (33 lbs.) 2 + using appropriate lifting equipment
Refer to Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive on page 38 for information about how to use suspension
systems, wires, or hanging metal brackets to move the drive.
◆ Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive

Use the hanging brackets attached to the drive to temporarily lift the drive when you install the drive to a control
panel or wall or when you replace the drive. Do not let the drive stay vertically or horizontally suspended or move
the drive over a long distance while it is suspended.
Before you install the drive, make sure that you read these precautions:
WARNING! Crush Hazard. Before you hang the drive vertically, use screws to correctly attach the drive front cover and other
drive components. If you do not secure the front cover, it can fall and cause minor injury.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. When you use a crane or hoist to lift the drive during installation or removal, prevent more than 1.96
m/s2 (0.2 G) vibration or impact. Too much vibration or impact can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. When you lift the drive during installation or removal, do not try to turn the drive over and do not
ignore the hanging drive. If you move a hanging drive too much or if you ignore it, the drive can fall and cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. When you install the drive, do not hold the front cover. Install the drive with holding the heatsink. If
you hold the front cover, the cover will come off and the drive will fall, then it can cause injury.
◆ Instructions on Drive Suspension

The procedures in this section show you how to use wires to suspend the drive.
Model Suspension Method
2110 - 2415
Vertical Suspension
4075 - 4H12
2138 - 2415
Allows horizontal suspension
4089 - 4H12
■ Vertical Suspension
To vertically suspend the drive with the hanging brackets, follow this procedure to lift the drive:
1. Put wire through the 2 holes in the hanging brackets.
A - Suspension angle of at least 50 degrees B - Hanging bracket (2)
Figure 2.5 Vertical Suspension

2. Use a crane to gradually wind up the wire. Visually make sure that there is sufficient tension in the wire,
then lift the drive to its correct location.
3. Prepare the control panel for installation, then lower the drive.
Note:
When you lower the drive, stop before the drive touches the floor, then slowly lower it the remaining distance.
■ Horizontal Suspension
If a horizontal suspension is required in the installation environment, hang the drive through the following steps.
Put the drive on the ground horizontally. Connect wires to the 4 hanging brackets and use a crane to lift the drive.
NOTICE: When you attach a horizontal lifting cable or chain to the drive, use a jig or pad between the wire and the drive. The
wire can scratch the drive and cause damage to the drive.
A - Hanging bracket (4)
Figure 2.6 Horizontal Suspension

2.5 Drive Watt Loss
2.5 Drive Watt Loss

◆ 200 V Class
Table 2.2 Drive Watt Loss (Heavy Duty)
The rated output Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model current
kHz W W W
A
2004 3.2 8 35 18 53
2006 5 8 37 26 63
2010 8 8 44 43 87
2012 11 8 50 61 111
2018 14 8 47 82 129
2021 17.5 8 56 105 161
2030 25 8 74 174 248
2042 33 8 88 183 271
2056 47 8 112 267 379
2070 60 8 145 373 518
2082 75 8 179 478 657
2110 88 8 155 563 718
2138 115 8 212 680 892
2169 145 5 275 820 1095
2211 180 5 314 991 1305
2257 215 5 398 1252 1650
2313 283 5 502 1643 2145
2360 346 5 582 1978 2560
2415 415 5 644 2359 3003
Table 2.3 Drive Watt Loss (Normal Duty)

The rated output
Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model current
kHz W W W
A
2004 3.5 2 35 16 51
2006 6 2 38 25 63
2010 9.6 2 49 46 95
2012 12.2 2 56 62 118
2018 17.5 2 53 88 141
2021 21 2 75 125 200
2030 30 2 95 206 301
2042 42 2 129 227 356
2056 56 2 149 302 451
2070 70 2 177 403 580
2082 82 2 202 467 669
2110 110 2 192 631 823
2138 138 2 269 814 1083
2169 169 2 338 941 1279
2211 211 2 384 1131 1515
2257 257 2 519 1534 2053
2313 313 2 579 1794 2373

2.5 Drive Watt Loss
Model current
A kHz W W W
2360 360 2 655 2071 2726
2415 - - - - -
◆ 400 V Class
Table 2.4 Drive Watt Loss (Heavy Duty: < 460 V)
The rated output
Model current
kHz W W W
A
4002 1.8 8 38 15 53
4004 3.4 8 42 28 70
4005 4.8 8 46 37 83
4007 5.5 8 48 45 93
4009 7.2 8 37 61 98
4012 9.2 8 46 82 128
4018 14.8 8 65 140 205
4023 18 8 73 150 223
4031 24 8 101 211 312
4038 31 8 119 272 391
4044 39 8 148 354 502
4060 45 8 126 389 515
4075 60 8 165 527 692
4089 75 8 184 617 801
4103 91 8 237 779 1016
4140 112 5 300 956 1256
4168 150 5 486 1274 1760
4208 180 5 446 1432 1878
4250 216 5 558 1464 2022
4296 260 5 692 2061 2753
4371 304 5 824 2346 3170

2
4389 371 5 777 2212 2989
4453 414 2 963 2696 3659
4568 453 2 1086 3035 4121
4675 605 2 1328 3995 5323
4810 720 2 2009 5424 7433
4930 810 2 2030 6102 8132
4H11 930 2 2553 7092 9646
4H12 1090 2 2763 8197 10959
Table 2.5 Drive Watt Loss (Heavy Duty: ≥ 460 V)

The rated output
current Carrier Frequency Interior Unit Loss Cooling Fin Loss Total Loss
Model
kHz W W W
A
4002 1.6 8 38 15 53
4004 2.1 8 39 19 58
4005 3.4 8 43 30 73
4007 4.8 8 46 43 89
4009 6.9 8 35 63 98
4012 7.6 8 39 71 110

2.5 Drive Watt Loss
Model current
A kHz W W W
4018 11 8 53 110 163
4023 14 8 59 120 179
4031 21 8 85 192 277
4038 27 8 99 245 344
4044 34 8 124 320 444
4060 40 8 115 361 476
4075 52 8 147 477 624
4089 65 8 165 566 731
4103 77 8 206 700 906
4140 96 5 265 849 1114
4168 124 5 400 1073 1473
4208 156 5 405 1300 1705
4250 180 5 454 1174 1628
4296 240 5 664 2021 2685
4371 302 5 843 2499 3342
4389 361 5 745 2161 2906
4453 414 2 1024 2835 3859
4568 477 2 1183 3329 4512
4675 - - - - -
4810 720 2 2036 5778 7814
4930 810 2 2120 6563 8683
4H11 930 2 2690 7708 10398
4H12 1090 2 2866 8917 11783
Table 2.6 Drive Watt Loss (Normal Duty: < 460 V)

Model current
kHz W W W
A
4002 2.1 2 39 16 55
4004 4.1 2 44 33 77
4005 5.4 2 48 31 79
4007 7.1 2 52 44 96
4009 8.9 2 42 58 100
4012 11.9 2 57 84 141
4018 17.5 2 82 144 226
4023 23.4 2 108 185 293
4031 31 2 138 222 360
4038 38 2 145 270 415
4044 44 2 168 335 503
4060 59.6 2 157 444 601
4075 74.9 2 185 527 712
4089 89.2 2 212 665 877
4103 103 2 264 766 1030
4140 140 2 393 1126 1519
4168 168 2 574 1348 1922
4208 208 2 493 1465 1958
4250 250 2 686 1738 2424

2.5 Drive Watt Loss
Model current
A kHz W W W
4296 296 2 805 2155 2960
4371 371 2 1022 2553 3575
4389 389 2 867 2393 3260
4453 453 2 1086 3035 4121
4568 568 2 1429 3989 5418
4675 675 2 1526 4572 6098
4810 810 2 2314 6170 8484
4930 930 2 2330 7028 9358
4H11 1090 2 3003 8301 11304
4H12 1200 2 3169 9193 12362
Table 2.7 Drive Watt Loss (Normal Duty: ≥ 460 V)

The rated output
Model current
A kHz W W W
4002 2.1 2 39 16 55
4004 3 2 42 25 67
4005 4.8 2 45 28 73
4007 6.9 2 50 42 92
4009 7.6 2 35 49 84
4012 11 2 49 76 125
4018 14 2 64 112 176
4023 21 2 87 158 245
4031 27 2 109 188 297
4038 34 2 116 234 350
4044 40 2 137 296 433
4060 52 2 133 379 512
4075 65 2 156 450 606
4089 77 2 180 569 749
4103 96 2 229 698 927

2
4140 124 2 334 982 1316
4168 156 2 481 1199 1680
4208 180 2 429 1275 1704
4250 240 2 648 1643 2291
4296 302 2 817 2257 3074
4371 361 2 975 2561 3536
4389 414 2 873 2422 3295
4453 477 2 1183 3329 4512
4568 515 2 1320 3697 5017
4675 - - - - -
4810 810 2 2385 6626 9011
4930 930 2 2465 7613 10078
4H11 1090 2 3162 9020 12182
4H12 1200 2 3236 9931 13167

2.6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad
2.6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad

NOTICE: You must remove the keypad before you remove or reattach the front cover. Before you reattach the keypad, make
sure that you attach the front cover into position. If you keep the keypad connected to the drive when you remove the front
cover, it can cause an unsatisfactory connection and incorrect operation.
◆ Remove the Keypad

1. Push down the tab on the top of the keypad, then pull the keypad forward and remove it from the drive.
Figure 2.7 Remove the Keypad

2. Pull the keypad connector out from the drive horizontally, then put it in the holder.
Note:
Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab.
A - Holder C - Keypad connector

B - Hook
Figure 2.8 Move the Keypad Connector to the Holder
◆ Reattach the Keypad

Insert the keypad connector to its initial position. Put the bottom of the keypad into position first, then carefully
push on the top of the keypad until the hook clicks into place.
Figure 2.9 Reattach the Keypad

2.7 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device

◆ Operate the Keypad from a Remote Location
You can remove the keypad from the drive and connect it to a remote control extension cable 3 m (9.8 ft) long to
make operation easier when you cannot access the drive. It is not necessary to open or close the panel door to
operate a drive that is in a control panel. To order optional accessories, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Name Option Model Intended Use
WV001: 1 m (3.3 ft) To connect the keypad and drive.

Keypad Remote Cable
WV003: 3 m (9.8 ft) This option is an RJ-45, 8-pin straight-through UTP CAT5e cable.
Installation Support Set A 900-192-933-001 To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses screws.
To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses nut clamps.
Installation Support Set B 900-192-933-002
Use this option when weld studs are located in the control panel.
◆ Connect the Keypad from a Remote Location

Use the information in Table 2.8 to install the keypad in the best location for your application.
Table 2.8 Keypad Installation Method
Installation Method Features Necessary Tools and Installation Support Sets
Simplified installation is possible. Separate installation

Outside of the control panel Phillips screwdriver #2 (M3)
support sets are not necessary.
• Phillips screwdriver #2 (M3, M4)

• Installation support set A (for mounting with screws,
model: 900-192-933-001)
Inside of the control panel Keypad does not extend farther than the front of the
control panel. • Phillips screwdriver #2 (M3)
• Wrench (M4)
• Installation support set B (for mounting with nut
clamp, model: 900-192-933-002)
Note:
Installation support sets are sold separately. If there are weld studs inside the control panel, use installation support set B. Contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to make an order.
NOTICE: Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive during drive installation.
Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before start-up. Unwanted objects inside
of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
■ External Dimensions of Keypad

2
Figure 2.10 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Table 2.9 Exterior Dimensions (mm)
W H D D1 D2 R *1 W1 W2 H1 d
65 106 16 8.2 1.6 53.8 44 15 78 M3

*1 Minimum bending radius
■ Mount to the Outside of Control Panel

1. Use the dimensions in Figure 2.11 and Table 2.10 to cut an opening in the control panel for the keypad.
Figure 2.11 External/Face Mount Enclosure Panel Cut-Out Dimensions

Table 2.10 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions mm (in)
W H W1 H1 H2 H3 d
22 78 22 29 22 1 3.6
(0.89) (3.07) (0.89) (1.14) (0.89) (0.04) (0.14)
2. Remove the keypad and put the keypad connector in the holder on the front cover.
Note:
A - Keypad C - Holder
B - Keypad connector

3. Put the keypad on the outside of the control panel.
Use M3 screws (6 mm (0.2 in) depth cross-recessed pan head screws) to attach the keypad from the
inside. Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque:
• M3 screws: 0.49 N∙m to 0.73 N∙m (4.34 lbf∙in to 6.46 lbf∙in)
A - Keypad C - Enclosure panel

B - M3 screws D - Screw mounting holes
Figure 2.13 Mount to the Outside of Control Panel

4. Use the extension cable to connect the drive to the keypad.
A - Extension cable D - Keypad

B - Communications connector E - Cable connector
C - Drive
Figure 2.14 Connecting the Drive and Keypad with the Extension Cable
■ Mount to the Inside of Control Panel

Installation support sets A or B (sold separately) are necessary for Internal/Flush-Mount installation. To order
optional accessories, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The installation procedure and panel cut-out dimensions are the same for mounting brackets A and B.
• Use a gasket between the control panel and the keypad in environments with a large quantity of dust or other unwanted airborne
material.
1. Use the dimensions in Figure 2.15 and Table 2.11 to cut an opening in the control panel for the keypad.
2
Figure 2.15 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions to Attach Inside Control Panel

Table 2.11 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions mm (in)
W H W1 H1 d
64 + 0.5 130 45 105 + 0.5 4.8

(2.52 + 0.02) (5.12) (1.77) (4.13 + 0.02) (0.12)
2. Remove the keypad and put the keypad connector in the holder on the front cover.
Note:


3. Use the screws included with the mounting bracket, and attach the keypad to the mounting bracket.
Use the screws included with the installation support set to attach it. Tighten the screws to a correct
tightening torque:
A - Keypad C - M3 screws
B - Mounting bracket A D - Screw mounting holes
Figure 2.17 Attach Keypad to Mounting Bracket

4. Put the mounting bracket that has the attached keypad in the control panel, and use the screws to attach it
from the outside.
Use the screws included with the installation support set to attach it. Tighten the screws to a correct
tightening torque:
A - M4 screws B - Enclosure panel
Figure 2.18 Mount Mounting Bracket to the Interior of the Control Panel

5. Use the extension cable to connect the drive to the keypad.
A - Extension cable D - Keypad

B - Communications connector E - Cable connector
C - Drive
Figure 2.19 Connecting the Drive and Keypad with the Extension Cable
2

2.8 Removing/Reattaching Covers

This section gives information about how to remove and reattach the front cover and terminal cover for wiring
and inspection.
Different drive models have different procedures to remove and reattach the covers. Refer to Table 2.12 for more
information.
Table 2.12 Procedures to Remove Covers by Drive Model
Model Procedure Ref.
2004 - 2211
Procedure A 50
4002 - 4168
2257 - 2415
Procedure B 51
4208 - 4H12
◆ Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure A

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing,
disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum. The internal capacitor
stays charged after the drive is de-energized. The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases
below 50 Vdc. When all indicators are OFF, remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the
drive is safe. If you do work on the drive when it is energized, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock.
■ Remove the Front Cover

1. Remove the keypad and the keypad connector, then insert the end of the keypad connector that has the
tab into the keypad connector holder on the front cover.
Figure 2.20 Remove the Keypad and Keypad Connector
2. Loosen the front cover screws.
Figure 2.21 Loosen the Front Cover Screws

3. Push on the tab in the side of the front cover then pull the front cover forward to remove it from the drive.
Figure 2.22 Remove the Front Cover
■ Install the Front Cover

1. Wire the drive and other peripheral devices.
2. Reverse the steps to reattach the cover.
Note:
• Wire the grounding terminals first, main circuit terminals next, and control circuit terminals last.
• Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
• Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in).
Figure 2.23 Install the Front Cover
3. Reattach the keypad to the original position.
◆ Removing/Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not examine, connect, or disconnect wiring on an energized drive. Before servicing, 2
■ Remove the Front Cover

1. Remove the terminal cover, keypad, and keypad connector, then insert the end of the keypad connector
that has the tab into the keypad connector holder on the front cover.
A - Keypad C - Connector holder

Figure 2.24 Remove the Terminal Cover, Keypad, and Keypad Connector

2. Loosen the front cover screws.
Figure 2.25 Loosen the Front Cover Screws

3. Push on the four tabs found on each side of the front cover, then pull the front cover forward to remove it
from the drive.
A - Pull forward to remove the front cover. B - Unhook the tabs found on the sides of the front
cover.
Figure 2.26 Pull Forward to Remove the Front Cover

4. Remove the front cover from the drive.
Figure 2.27 Remove the Front Cover
■ Reattach the Front Cover

Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the front cover.
Note:
Wire the grounding terminals first, main circuit terminals next, and control circuit terminals last.
1. Move the front cover to connect the hooks at the top of the front cover to the drive.
A - Hooks
Figure 2.28 Reattach the Front Cover

2. Move the front cover until it clicks into position while pushing on the hooks on the left and right sides of the
front cover.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the front cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
Figure 2.29 Reattach the Front Cover

3. Reattach the keypad to the original position.
■ Remove the Terminal Cover

1. Loosen the screws on the terminal cover, then pull down on the cover.
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Loosen the cover screws. Do not fully remove them. If you fully remove the cover screws,
the terminal cover can fall and cause moderate injury.
Figure 2.30 Loosen the Terminal Cover Mounting Screws
2. Pull the terminal cover away from the drive.
Figure 2.31 Remove the Terminal Cover
■ Reattach the Terminal Cover

Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the terminal cover.
Note:
• Wire the grounding terminals first, main circuit terminals next, and control circuit terminals last.
• Make sure that you do not pinch wires or signal lines between the wiring cover and the drive before you reattach the cover.
• Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque:
–Models 2257 to 2415: 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in)
–Models 4208 to 4675: 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in)
–Models 4810 to 4H12: 1.96 N∙m to 2.53 N∙m (17.35 lbf∙in to 22.39 lbf∙in)

Figure 2.32 Reattach the Terminal Cover

2.9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type
2.9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type

The enclosure type of the drive is IP20/UL Open Type. You must install a UL Type 1 kit to change the enclosure
type to an enclosed, IP20/UL Type 1.
Install the kit before you wire the drive.
Different drives use different UL Type 1 kits. Refer to Table 2.13 to find the kit for your drive. Contact Yaskawa
or your nearest sales representative for more information about UL Type 1 kits.
Table 2.13 UL Type 1 Kits by Drive Model
Model Option Model
2004, 2006, 2010, 2012, 2018, 2021, 2030, 2042

900-192-121-001
4002, 4004, 4005, 4007, 4009, 4012, 4018, 4023
2056
900-192-121-002
4031, 4038
2070
900-192-121-003
4044, 4060
2082 900-192-121-004
2110
900-192-121-005
4075
2138
900-192-121-006
4089, 4103
2169
900-192-121-007
4140, 4168
2211 900-192-121-008
2257, 2313
900-192-121-009
4208, 4250, 4296
2360, 2415
900-192-121-010
4371, 4389
4453, 4568, 4675 900-192-121-011
2

2.10 Installation Methods

The drive installation methods include standard installation and external heatsink installation.
◆ Standard Installation
Refer to Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions on page 476 for more information about external dimensions
and installation methods.
◆ External Heatsink
Refer to Table 2.15, Table 2.16, and Table 2.17 for the panel cut-out dimensions for external heatsink installations.
An attachment is necessary to install drive models smaller than 2082 (200 V class) and 4060 (400 V class) with
the heatsink outside of the panel.
Note:
• The exterior mounting dimensions and installation dimensions for a standard installation are different than the dimensions for an
external heatsink installation.
• The shaded parts of the panel cut-out dimensions are the gasket dimensions. Make sure that the gasket is not smaller than the specified
dimension.
Table 2.14 External Heatsink Mount Kit
Drive Model Model
2004 - 2042
900-193-209-001
4002 - 4023
2056
900-193-209-002
4031, 4038
2070, 2082
900-193-209-003
4044, 4060
2110 - 2415
-
4075 - 4H12

2
Figure 2.33 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions

*1 Make threads inside the mounting screw holes on the panel.
Table 2.15 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (200 V Class)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
W H D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 A B d1
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2004 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2006 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2010 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2012 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)

Dimensions mm (in)
Model
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2018 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2021 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2030 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

2042 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
180 329 134 68 140 140 17 3 318 23.5 5 24.5 6 174 270
2056 *1 M5
(7.09) (12.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (0.67) (0.12) (12.52) (0.93) (0.20) (0.97) (0.24) (6.85) (10.63)
220 384 140 87 192 192 11 3 371 27 7 25 6 214 319

2070 *1 M6
(8.66) (15.12) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (0.43) (0.12) (14.61) (1.06) (0.28) (0.98) (0.24) (8.43) (12.56)
220 384 140 87 192 192 11 3 371 27 7 25 6 214 319

2082 *1 M6
(8.66) (15.12) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (0.43) (0.12) (14.61) (1.06) (0.28) (0.98) (0.24) (8.43) (12.56)
240 400 166 114 195 204 14.5 8 385 19.5 7.5 19.5 7.5 224 346
2110 M6
(9.45) (15.75) (6.54) (4.49) (7.68) (8.03) (0.57) (0.32) (15.16) (0.77) (0.30) (0.77) (0.30) (8.82) (13.62)
255 450 166 114 170 210 34.5 8 436 20 8 20 6 239 396
2138 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (8.27) (1.36) (0.32) (17.17) (0.79) (0.32) (0.79) (0.24) (9.41) (15.59)
264 543 186 149 190 220 29 8 527 19.5 8.5 20.5 7.5 248 487
2169 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (8.66) (1.14) (0.32) (20.75) (0.77) (0.34) (0.81) (0.30) (9.76) (19.17)
264 543 186 149 190 220 29 8 527 19.5 8.5 20.5 7.5 248 487
2211 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (8.66) (1.14) (0.32) (20.75) (0.77) (0.34) (0.81) (0.30) (9.76) (19.17)
312 700 260 160 218 263 39 8 675 33 12 32 13 296 610

2257 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (10.35) (1.54) (0.32) (26.56) (1.30) (0.47) (1.26) (0.51) (11.65) (24.02)
312 700 260 160 218 263 39 8 675 33 12 32 13 296 610

2313 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (10.35) (1.54) (0.32) (26.56) (1.30) (0.47) (1.26) (0.51) (11.65) (24.02)
440 800 254 218 370 310 23 12 773 31.5 14 31.5 13 416 710
2360 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (12.20) (0.91) (0.47) (30.43) (1.24) (0.55) (1.24) (0.51) (16.38) (27.95)
440 800 254 218 370 310 23 12 773 31.5 14 31.5 13 416 710
2415 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (12.20) (0.91) (0.47) (30.43) (1.24) (0.55) (1.24) (0.51) (16.38) (27.95)
*1 The attachment for external heatsink installation is necessary.

Table 2.16 Panel Cut-out Dimensions (Models 4002 to 4389)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4002 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4004 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 38 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4005 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4007 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4009 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4012 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4018 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
140 294 138 73 102 102 16 3 282 23 6 26 6 134 233

4023 *1 M5
(5.51) (11.57) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (0.63) (0.12) (11.10) (0.91) (0.24) (1.02) (0.24) (5.28) (9.17)
180 329 134 68 140 140 17 3 318 23.5 5 24.5 6 174 270
4031 *1 M5
(7.09) (12.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (0.67) (0.12) (12.52) (0.93) (0.20) (0.97) (0.24) (6.85) (10.63)
180 329 134 68 140 140 17 3 318 23.5 5 24.5 6 174 270
4038 *1 M5
(7.09) (12.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (0.67) (0.12) (12.52) (0.93) (0.20) (0.97) (0.24) (6.85) (10.63)
220 384 140 87 192 192 11 3 371 27 7 25 6 214 319

4044 *1 M6
(8.66) (15.12) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (0.43) (0.12) (14.61) (1.06) (0.28) (0.98) (0.24) (8.43) (12.56)

Dimensions mm (in)
Model
220 384 140 106 192 192 11 3 371 27 7 25 6 214 319

4060 *1 M6
(8.66) (15.12) (5.51) (4.17) (7.56) (7.56) (0.43) (0.12) (14.61) (1.06) (0.28) (0.98) (0.24) (8.43) (12.56)
240 400 166 114 195 204 14.5 8 385 19.5 7.5 19.5 7.5 224 346
4075 M6
(9.45) (15.75) (6.54) (4.49) (7.68) (8.03) (0.57) (0.32) (15.16) (0.77) (0.30) (0.77) (0.30) (8.82) (13.62)
255 450 166 114 170 210 34.5 8 436 20 8 20 6 239 396
4089 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (8.27) (1.36) (0.32) (17.17) (0.79) (0.32) (0.79) (0.24) (9.41) (15.59)
255 450 166 114 170 210 34.5 8 436 20 8 20 6 239 396
4103 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (8.27) (1.36) (0.32) (17.17) (0.79) (0.32) (0.79) (0.24) (9.41) (15.59)
264 543 186 149 190 220 29 8 527 19.5 8.5 20.5 7.5 248 487
4140 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (8.66) (1.14) (0.32) (20.75) (0.77) (0.34) (0.81) (0.30) (9.76) (19.17)
264 543 186 149 190 220 29 8 527 19.5 8.5 20.5 7.5 248 487
4168 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (8.66) (1.14) (0.32) (20.75) (0.77) (0.34) (0.81) (0.30) (9.76) (19.17)
312 700 260 160 218 263 39 8 675 33 12 32 13 296 610

4208 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (10.35) (1.54) (0.32) (26.56) (1.30) (0.47) (1.26) (0.51) (11.65) (24.02)
312 700 260 160 218 263 39 8 675 33 12 32 13 296 610

4250 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (10.35) (1.54) (0.32) (26.56) (1.30) (0.47) (1.26) (0.51) (11.65) (24.02)
312 700 260 160 218 263 39 8 675 33 12 32 13 296 610

4296 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (10.35) (1.54) (0.32) (26.56) (1.30) (0.47) (1.26) (0.51) (11.65) (24.02)
440 800 254 218 370 310 23 12 773 31.5 14 31.5 13 416 710
4371 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (12.20) (0.91) (0.47) (30.43) (1.24) (0.55) (1.24) (0.51) (16.38) (27.95)
440 800 254 218 370 310 23 12 773 31.5 14 31.5 13 416 710
4389 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (12.20) (0.91) (0.47) (30.43) (1.24) (0.55) (1.24) (0.51) (16.38) (27.95)
*1 The attachment for external heatsink installation is necessary.
2


Table 2.17 Panel Cut-out Dimensions (Models 4453 to 4675)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
W H D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 A B d1
510 1136 260 220 450 404 18 12 179 225 1110 34 15 34 15 486 1042
4453 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (15.91) (0.71) (0.47) (7.05) (8.86) (43.70) (1.34) (0.59) (1.34) (0.59) (19.13) (41.02)
510 1136 260 220 450 404 18 12 179 225 1110 34 15 34 15 486 1042
4568 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (15.91) (0.71) (0.47) (7.05) (8.86) (43.70) (1.34) (0.59) (1.34) (0.59) (19.13) (41.02)
510 1136 260 220 450 404 18 12 179 225 1110 34 15 34 15 486 1042
4675 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (15.91) (0.71) (0.47) (7.05) (8.86) (43.70) (1.34) (0.59) (1.34) (0.59) (19.13) (41.02)

2

Table 2.18 Panel Cut-out Dimensions (Models 4810 to 4H12)
Dimensions mm (in)
Mod
el
W H D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 A B d1
1363.
760 245 195 680 180 320 620 150 160 28 58 12 1332 32 16.8 34 15 736 1266
4810 8 M12
(29.9) (53.7) (9.65) (7.67) (26.8) (7.09) (12.6) (24.4) (5.91) (6.3) (1.1) (2.28) (0.47) (52.4) (1.26) (0.66) (1.34) (0.59) (29) (49.8)
1363.
760 8 245 195 680 180 320 620 150 160 28 58 12 1332 32 16.8 34 15 736 1266
4930 M12
(29.9) (9.65) (7.67) (26.8) (7.09) (12.6) (24.4) (5.91) (6.3) (1.1) (2.28) (0.47) (52.4) (1.26) (0.66) (1.34) (0.59) (29) (49.8)
(53.7)
760 1363. 245 195 680 180 320 620 150 160 28 58 12 1332 32 16.8 34 15 736 1266
4H11 8 M12
(29.9) (53.7) (9.65) (7.67) (26.8) (7.09) (12.6) (24.4) (5.91) (6.3) (1.1) (2.28) (0.47) (52.4) (1.26) (0.66) (1.34) (0.59) (29) (49.8)
1363.
760 245 195 680 180 320 620 150 160 28 58 12 1332 32 16.8 34 15 736 1266
4H12 8 M12
(29.9) (9.65) (7.67) (26.8) (7.09) (12.6) (24.4) (5.91) (6.3) (1.1) (2.28) (0.47) (52.4) (1.26) (0.66) (1.34) (0.59) (29) (49.8)
(53.7)


3
Electrical Installation
This chapter gives how to wire the control circuit terminals, motor, and power supply of the
drive.
3.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 64

3.2 Electrical Installation............................................................................................... 66
3.3 Main Circuit Wiring .................................................................................................. 71
3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure ................................................ 96
3.5 Control Circuit Wiring ...........................................................................................104
3.6 Control I/O Connections ....................................................................................... 115
3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC .................................................................................... 119
3.8 External Interlock ...................................................................................................120
3.9 Braking Resistor Installation...............................................................................121
3.10 Drive Wiring Protection ........................................................................................130
3.11 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection ....................................................131
3.12 Improve the Power Factor ....................................................................................133
3.13 Prevent Switching Surge......................................................................................134
3.14 Decrease Noise .......................................................................................................135
3.15 Protect the Drive during Failures .......................................................................137
3.16 Wiring Checklist .....................................................................................................141
3.17 Motor Application Precautions ...........................................................................143

3.1 Section Safety
3.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
Do not operate the drive when covers are missing. Replace covers and shields before you
operate the drive. Use the drive only as specified by the instructions.
Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the
drive. If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models 2xxxB/C and 4xxxB/C to comply
with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter.
If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral point, it can cause serious injury or death.
Crush Hazard
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety
regulations. The IEC/EN 61800-5-1 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to
automatically de-energize when the protective ground wire disconnects. You can also connect a
protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (copper wire) or 16
mm2 (aluminum wire). The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA in drive models;
• 2xxxB
• 2xxxC
• 4002B to 4371B
• 4002C to 4371C (with built-in EMC filter turned ON)
• 4389 to 4H12
If you do not obey the standards and regulations, it can cause serious injury or death.
When there is a DC component in the protective earthing conductor, the drive can cause a
residual current. When a residual current operated protective or monitoring device prevents
direct or indirect contact, always use a type B Residual Current Monitor/Residual Current
Device (RCM/RCD) as specified by IEC/EN 60755.
If you do not use the correct RCM/RCD, it can cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive. Tighten loose clothing
and remove all metal objects, for example watches or rings.
Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death.
Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect
connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire.

3.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Tighten screws at an angle in the specified range shown in this manual.
If you tighten the screws at an angle not in the specified range, you can have loose connections that can cause
damage to the terminal block or start a fire and cause serious injury or death.
Damage to Equipment
Fire Hazard
When you install a dynamic braking option, wire the components as specified by the wiring
diagrams.
Incorrect wiring can cause damage to braking components or serious injury or death.
NOTICE
Do not let unwanted objects, for example metal shavings or wire clippings, fall into the drive
during drive installation. Put a temporary cover over the drive during installation. Remove the
temporary cover before start-up.
Unwanted objects inside of the drive can cause damage to the drive.
Damage to Equipment
Select a motor that is compatible with the load torque and speed range. When 100% continuous
torque is necessary at low speed, use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor. When you
use a standard fan-cooled motor, decrease the motor torque in the low-speed range.
If you operate a standard fan-cooled motor at low speed and high torque, it will decrease the cooling effects and
can cause heat damage.
Obey the speed range specification of the motor as specified by the manufacturer. When you
must operate the motor outside of its specifications, contact the motor manufacturer.
If you continuously operate oil-lubricated motors outside of the manufacturer specifications, it can cause damage
to the motor bearings.
When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is longer than 100 m (328 ft),
make sure that the motor insulation voltage is sufficient or use an inverter-duty motor or vector-
duty motor with reinforced insulation.
Motor winding and insulation failure can occur. 3
Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual
(TOBPC72060001).
If you do not read and obey the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and
braking circuit.
Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral
devices.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
• Torque characteristics are different than when you operate the motor directly from line power. Make sure that you understand the load
torque characteristics for the application.
• The current rating of submersible motors is usually higher than the current rating of standard motors for a given motor power. Make
sure that the rated output current of the drive is equal to or more than the current rating of the motor. If the motor wire length is longer
than 100 m (328 ft), select the correct wire gauge to adjust for a loss in voltage and prevent loss of motor torque.
• Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

3.2 Electrical Installation

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. De-energize the drive and wait 5 minutes minimum until the Charge LED turns off.
Remove the front cover and terminal cover to do work on wiring, circuit boards, and other parts. Use terminals for their correct
function only. Incorrect wiring, incorrect ground connections, and incorrect repair of protective covers can cause death or
serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Correctly ground the drive before you turn on the EMC filter switch. If you touch electrical
equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use the terminals for the drive only for their intended purpose. Refer to the technical
manual for more information about the I/O terminals. Wiring and grounding incorrectly or modifying the cover may damage the
equipment or cause injury.
◆ Standard Connection Diagram

Wire the drive as specified by Standard Drive Connection Diagram on page 67.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Set the MFDI parameters before you close control circuit switches. Incorrect Run/Stop
circuit sequence settings can cause serious injury or death from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire the start/stop and safety circuits before you energize the drive. If you
momentarily close a digital input terminal, it can start a drive that is programmed for 3-Wire control and cause serious injury or
death from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a 3-Wire sequence, set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-Wire
Initialization] and make sure that b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN Command] (default). If you
do not correctly set the drive parameters for 3-Wire operation before you energize the drive, the motor can suddenly rotate
when you energize the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Check the I/O signals and the external sequences for the drive before you set the
Application Preset function. When you set the Application Preset function (A1-06 ≠ 0), it changes the I/O terminal functions for
the drive and it can cause equipment to operate unusually. This can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Install sufficient branch circuit short circuit protection as specified by applicable codes and this
manual. The drive is suitable for circuits that supply not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200
V Class), 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class). Incorrect branch circuit short circuit protection can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is longer than 100 m (328 ft), make sure that the
motor insulation voltage is sufficient or use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation. Motor winding
and insulation failure can occur.
Note:
Do not connect the AC control circuit ground to the drive enclosure. Failure to obey can cause incorrect control circuit operation.

■ Standard Drive Connection Diagram
3
Figure 3.1 Standard Drive Connection Diagram

*1 Set the wiring sequence to de-energize the drive with the fault relay output. If the drive outputs a fault during fault restart when you
use the fault restart function, set L5-02 = 1 [Fault Contact at Restart Select = Always Active] to de-energize the drive. Be careful
when you use a cut-off sequence. The default setting for L5-02 is 0 [Active Only when Not Restarting].
*2 When you install a DC reactor, you must remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2. Ground the DC reactor (option) on the
back of the mounting base. Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control panel.

*3 Models 2110 to 2415 and 4060 to 4H12 have a DC reactor.

*4 When you use a regenerative converter, regenerative unit, or braking unit, set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection =
Disable]. If L8-55 = 1 [Protection Enabled], the drive will detect rF [Braking Resistor Fault].
*5 When you use a regenerative converter, regenerative unit, braking unit, braking resistor, or braking resistor unit, set L3-04 = 0 [Stall
Prevention during Decel = Disabled]. If L3-04 = 1 [General Purpose], the drive could possibly not stop in the specified deceleration
time.
*6 When you use an ERF-type braking resistor, set L8-01 = 1 [3% ERF DB Resistor Protection = Enabled] and set a wiring sequence to
de-energize the drive with the fault relay output.
*7 When you connect a braking unit (CDBR series) or a braking resistor unit (LKEB series) to drive models 2110, 2138, and 4103,
make sure that you use wires that are in the range of the applicable gauges for the drive. A junction terminal is necessary to connect
wires that are less than the applicable gauge to the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information
about selection and installation of the junction terminal.
*8 Cooling fan wiring is not necessary for self-cooling motors.
*9 The number of terminals is different for different models.
• Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3: There are two screws for each terminal block on models 4453 to 4675. There are
four screws for each terminal block on models 4810 to 4H12.
• Terminal +3: Models 2169 to 2415 and 4208 to 4H12 only. There are two screws for each terminal block on models 4453 to 4675.
There are four screws for each terminal block on models 4810 to 4H12.
• Terminal +2: Models 2004 to 2082 and 4002 to 4044 only.
• Terminals +1, -: There are two screws for each terminal block on models 2169, 2211, 4140, 4168, and 4453 to 4675. There are four
screws for each terminal block on models 4810 to 4H12.
• Terminal B1: Models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 only.
*10 Connect peripheral options to terminals -, +1, +2, B1, and B2.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals B1, B2, -, +1, +2, and
+3. Do not connect an AC power supply lines to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and
serious injury or death from fire.
*11 Encoder circuit wiring (wiring to PG-B3 option) is not necessary for applications that do not use motor speed feedback.
*12 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF.
*13 To set the MFDI power supply (Sinking/Sourcing Mode or internal/external power supply), install or remove a jumper between
terminals SC-SP or SC-SN depending on the application.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between
terminals SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
• Sinking Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SP.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between
• Sourcing Mode, Internal power supply: Install the jumper to close the circuit between terminals SC-SN.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between
• External power supply: Remove the jumper from the MFDI terminals. It is not necessary to close the circuit between terminals SC-
SP and terminals SC-SN.
*14 The maximum output current capacity for terminals +V and -V on the control circuit is 20 mA.
NOTICE: Do not install a jumper between terminals +V, -V, and AC. A closed circuit between these terminals will cause
damage to the drive.
*15 DIP switches S1-1 to S1-3 set terminals A1 to A3 for voltage or current input. The default setting for S1-1 and S1-3 is voltage input
(“V” side). The default setting for S1-2 is current input (“I” side).
*16 DIP switch S4 sets terminal A3 for analog or PTC input. Set DIP switch S1-3 to the “V” side, and set H3-05 = 0 [Terminal A3 Signal
Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0)] to set terminal A3 for PTC input with DIP switch S4.
*17 Do not ground control circuit terminal AC or connect it to the drive chassis.
NOTICE: Do not ground the AC control circuit terminals and only connect the AC terminals according to the product
instructions. If you connect the AC terminals incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
*18 Connect the positive lead from an external 24 Vdc power supply to terminal PS and the negative lead to terminal AC.
NOTICE: Connect terminals PS and AC correctly for the 24 V power supply. If you connect the wires to the incorrect
terminals, it will cause damage to the drive.
*19 Use multi-function analog monitor outputs with analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. Do not use monitor
outputs with feedback-type signal devices.
*20 Jumper switch S5 sets terminals FM and AM for voltage or current output. The default setting for S5 is voltage output (“V” side).
*21 Set DIP switch S2 to “ON” to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
*22 Use only Sourcing Mode for Safe Disable input.
*23 Disconnect the wire jumpers between H1 and HC and H2 and HC to use the Safe Disable input.

■ Standard Connection Diagram for 6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives
3
Figure 3.2 Standard Drive Connection Diagram: 6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives

*1 Set the wiring sequence so the fault relay output de-energizes the drive. If the drive outputs a fault during fault restart when you use
the fault restart function, set L5-02 = 1 [Fault Contact at Restart Select = Always Active] to de-energize the drive. Be careful when
you use a cut-off sequence. The default setting for L5-02 is 0 [Active Only when Not Restarting].
*2 When you use a braking unit, set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable]. If L8-55 = 1 [Protection Enabled], the
drive will detect rF [Braking Resistor Fault].
*3 When you use a braking unit, set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled]. If L3-04 = 1 [General Purpose], the drive
could possibly not stop in the specified deceleration time.
*4 Cooling fan wiring is not necessary for self-cooling motors.
*5 The number of terminals is different for different models.
• Terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3: There are two terminals for each phase on the terminal block and there are two screws on each
terminal (four screws total for each phase) on models 4810 to 4H12.
• Terminals +3, -: There are four screws for each terminal block on models 4810 to 4H12.
*6 Use terminals - and +3 to connect options to the drive.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Only connect factory-recommended devices or circuits to drive terminals - and +3. Do not
connect AC power supply lines to these terminals. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the drive and serious injury or
death from fire.
*7 Encoder circuit wiring (wiring to PG-B3 option) is not necessary for applications that do not use motor speed feedback.
*8 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF.
*10 The maximum output current capacity for terminals +V and -V on the control circuit is 20 mA.
*11 DIP switches S1-1 to S1-3 set terminals A1 to A3 for voltage or current input. The default setting for S1-1 and S1-3 is voltage input
(“V” side). The default setting for S1-2 is current input (“I” side).
*12 DIP switch S4 sets terminal A3 for analog or PTC input. Set DIP switch S1-3 to the “V” side, and set H3-05 = 0 [Terminal A3 Signal
Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0)] to set terminal A3 for PTC input with DIP switch S4.
*13 Do not ground control circuit terminal AC or connect it to the drive chassis.
*14 Connect the positive lead from an external 24 Vdc power supply to terminal PS and the negative lead to terminal AC.
NOTICE: Connect terminals PS and AC correctly for the 24 V power supply. If you connect the wires to the incorrect
terminals, it will cause damage to the drive.
*16 Jumper switch S5 sets terminals FM and AM for voltage or current output. The default setting for S5 is voltage output (“V” side).
*17 Set DIP switch S2 to “ON” to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
*18 Use only Sourcing Mode for Safe Disable input.

3.3 Main Circuit Wiring

This section gives information about the functions, specifications, and procedures necessary to safely and
correctly wire the main circuit in the drive.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes. If
you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.
Note:
Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory drive performance.
◆ Motor and Main Circuit Connections

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2, +3, B1, or B2 to
the ground terminal. If you connect these terminals to earth ground, it can cause damage to the drive or serious injury or death.
Note:
The location of terminals are different for different drive models.
3
A - DC bus terminal D - Three-Phase Motor
B - Connect to the drive ground terminal. E - Use R, S, T for input power supply.
C - Ground the motor case. F - Input Protection (Fuses or Circuit Breakers)
Figure 3.3 Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

Note:
The location of terminals are different for different drive models.
A - DC bus terminal D - Three-Phase Motor

B - Connect to the drive ground terminal. E - Use terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
C - Ground the motor case. and T1/L31.
F - Input Protection (Fuses or Circuit Breakers)
Figure 3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions: 6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives
◆ Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block

Use Table 3.1 to find the correct main circuit terminal block figure for your drive.
Table 3.1 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block
Model Shape of Terminal *1 Figure
2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023 European terminal Figure 3.5
2056, 4031, 4038 European terminal Figure 3.6
2070, 2082 European terminal Figure 3.7
4044 European terminal Figure 3.8
2138, 4103 European terminal Figure 3.13
2169, 2211, 4140, 4168 European terminal Figure 3.14
2257, 2313, 4208 to 4296 Screw terminal Figure 3.15
2360, 2415, 4371, 4389 Screw terminal Figure 3.16
4453 - 4675 Screw terminal Figure 3.17
4810 - 4H12 Screw terminal Figure 3.18

*1 The ground terminal is a screw terminal.
Figure 3.5 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023)
Figure 3.6 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2056, 4031, 4038)
3
Figure 3.7 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2070, 2082)

Figure 3.8 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (4044)

3
Figure 3.13 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2138, 4103)

Note:
The terminals are different for different models:
• 2169, 2211: You cannot use terminal B2. Terminal symbol display “+3/B1” shows terminal +3.
• 4140, 4168: Terminal symbol display “+3/B1” shows terminal B1.
Figure 3.14 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2169, 2211, 4140, 4168)
Figure 3.15 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2257, 2313, 4208 - 4296)
R/L1 T/L3
Figure 3.16 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (2360, 2415, 4371, 4389)

Figure 3.17 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (4453 - 4675)
Figure 3.18 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block (4810 - 4H12)
◆ Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Refer to Table 3.2 for the functions of drive main circuit terminals.
Table 3.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Name
2004 - 2082 2110 - 2138 2169 - 2415 - Function

Model
4002 - 4044 4060 - 4168 4208 - 4675 4810 - 4H12
R/L1 3
S/L2 Main circuit power supply input
T/L3
To connect a commercial
power supply.
R1/L11
Main circuit power supply
S1/L12 -
input
T1/L13
U/T1
V/T2 Drive output To connect a motor.
W/T3
B1 To connect a braking
Braking resistor connection - resistor or braking resistor
B2 unit.

Terminal Name
2004 - 2082 2110 - 2138 2169 - 2415 - Function

Model
4002 - 4044 4060 - 4168 4208 - 4675 4810 - 4H12
+2 - To connect peripheral
• DC power supply input devices, for example:
(+1 and -)
+1 • DC power input
• DC reactor connection DC power supply input (+1
(+1 and +2) and -) • Braking Unit
-
• DC reactor
• DC power supply input (+1 and -)
Note:
• Braking unit connection (+3 and -)
Remove the jumper
+3 - between terminals +1
and +2 to connect a DC
reactor.
• 200 V: D class grounding (ground to 100 Ω or less)

To ground the drive.
• 400 V: C class grounding (ground to 10 Ω or less)
Note:
Use terminals - and B1 to connect a CDBR-type control unit to drive models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 that have built-in braking
transistors.
◆ Wire Selection
Select the correct wires for main circuit wiring.
Refer to Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 234 for wire gauges and tightening torques as
specified by European standards.
Refer to Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 262 for wire gauges and tightening torques as
specified by UL standards.
■ Wire Selection Precautions

WARNING! Crush Hazard.
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. The IEC/EN 61800-5-
1 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically de-energize when the protective ground wire
disconnects. You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (copper wire)
or 16 mm2 (aluminum wire). The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3.5 mA in drive models;
• 2xxxB
• 2xxxC
• 4002B to 4371B
• 4389 to 4H12
Think about line voltage drop before selecting wire gauges. Select wire gauges that drop the voltage by 2% or less
of the rated voltage. Increase the wire gauge and the cable length when the risk of voltage drops increases.
Calculate line voltage drop with this formula:
Line voltage drop (V) = × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × motor rated current (A) × 10-3.
■ Precautions during Wiring

• Use terminals B1 and - to connect braking units to drives that have built-in braking transistors (models 2004 to
2138 and 4002 to 4168). Use terminals +3 and - to connect braking units to drives that do not have built-in
braking transistors.
• Refer to “Yaskawa AC Drive Option Braking Unit, Braking Resistor Unit Instruction Manual
(TOBPC72060001)” for information about wire gauges and tightening torques to connect braking resistor units
or braking units.
• Use terminals +1 and - to connect a regenerative converter or regenerative unit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals +1 or -. Use terminals B1 and B2 for the braking resistor
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and
serious injury or death.

■ Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

• 2xxxB
• 2xxxC
• 4002B to 4371B
• 4389 to 4H12
Note:
• The recommended wire gauges are based on drive continuous current ratings with 75 °C (167 °F) 600 V class 2 heat-resistant indoor
PVC wire. Assume these conditions:
–Ambient temperature: 40 °C (104 °F) maximum
–Wiring distance: 100 m (328 ft) maximum
–Normal Duty rated current value
• Use terminals +1, +2, +3, -, B1, and B2 to connect a peripheral option such as a DC reactor or a braking resistor. Do not connect other
items to these terminals.
• Refer to the instruction manual for each device for recommended wire gauges to connect peripheral devices or options to terminals +1,
+2, +3, -, B1, and B2. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for the peripheral devices
or options are out of the range of the applicable gauges for the drive.
Three-Phase 200 V Class
Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Recomm. Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge Terminal Screw Tightening Torque
Model Terminal Length *2
mm2 *1) Size and Shape N∙m (lbf∙in)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2004 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5
2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2006 -, +1, +2 2.5

2.5 - 16
(2.5 - 16)
18 M5
2.3 - 2.5
(19.8 - 22)
3
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2010 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Recomm. Gauge (IP20 Applicable Gauge Length *2 Terminal Screw Tightening Torque
Model Terminal *1)
mm2 Size and Shape N∙m (lbf∙in)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2012 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2018 -, +1, +2 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2021 -, +1, +2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
4 - 10 1.2 - 1.5
6 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2030 -, +1, +2 10 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
10 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2042 -, +1, +2 16 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
10 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
2056 -, +1, +2 35 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 20 M6
(25 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 20 M6
(16) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 50 5 - 5.5
2070 -, +1, +2 50 20 M6
(35 - 50) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 20 M6
(25 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 25 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 20 M6
(16 - 25) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 50 5 - 5.5
2082 -, +1, +2 50 20 M6
(35 - 50) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 16 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 35 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 27 M6
(25 - 35) (71 - 80)
16 - 35 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 27 M6
(25 - 35) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 10 - 12
2110 -, +1 50 27 M8
(25 - 50) (89 - 107)
B1, B2 25
6 - 25
(6 - 25)
21 M6
3 - 3.5
(27 - 31)
3
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 50 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
16 - 50 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 10 - 12
2138 -, +1 70 27 M8
(50 - 70) (89 - 107)
6 - 35 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 35 21 M6
(6 - 35) (27 - 31)
25 5.4 - 6.0
25 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
2169 -, -, +1, +1 *3 *4 35 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
+3 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
35 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
2211 -, -, +1, +1 *3 *4 50 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
+3 *4 70 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
50 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
2257 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 35 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
2313 -, +1 95 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
2360 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
2415 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
*1 For IP20 protection, use wires that are in the range of applicable gauges.
*2 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown.
*3 Terminals - and +1 have two screws. The Recommended Gauge is the wire gauge for one terminal.
*4 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking unit (CDBR-series) to terminals - and +3.
Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4002 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4004 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
3
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5
2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4005 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4007 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4009 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4012 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4018 -, +1, +2 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 2.0 - 2.5

2.5 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4023 -, +1, +2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
4 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
6 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4031 -, +1, +2 10 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
10 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4038 -, +1, +2 16 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
10 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 10 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 18 M5
(6 - 10) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4044 -, +1, +2 25 18 M5
(6 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 6 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 6) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4060 -, +1 25 18 M5
(6 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
B1, B2 10
2.5 - 10
(2.5 - 10)
10 M4
1.5 - 1.7
(13.5 - 15)
3
10 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4075 -, +1 25 18 M5
(4 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4089 -, +1 35 20 M6
(16 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

B1, B2 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 50 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
16 - 50 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 10 - 12
4103 -, +1 50 27 M8
(50 - 70) (89 - 107)
6 - 35 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 25 21 M6
(6 - 35) (27 - 31)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
4140 -, -, +1, +1 *3 25 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
B1, B2 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
25 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
4168 -, -, +1, +1 *3 35 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
B1, B2 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
35 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4208 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 35 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
50 - 240 18 - 23
50 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4250 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
70 - 240 18 - 23
70 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4296 -, +1 95 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
4371 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
4389 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
+3 95 × 2P
50 - 95 × 2P
(-)
- M12
35
(310)
3
35 - 240 32 - 40
95 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4453 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
50 - 150 32 - 40
150 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4568 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
60 - 150 32 - 40
95 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4675 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
60 - 150 32 - 40
95 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35

120 × 2P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 150 × 4P 35
4810 -, +1 150 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 120 32 - 40
120 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35

120 × 2P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 150 × 4P 35
4930 -, +1 150 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
+3 95 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 120 32 - 40
120 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 4P × 2 35

95 × 4P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
4H11 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
+3 35 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 120 32 - 40
95 × 4P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 4P × 2 35

95 × 4P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
50 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
4H12 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
+3 50 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 120 32 - 40
95 × 4P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
*4 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking resistor unit (LKEB-series) to terminals B1 and B2.
6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class
Terminal
Recomm. Gauge *1 Applicable Gauge Screw Tightening Torque
Model Terminal
mm2 mm2 Size and N∙m (lbf∙in)
Shape
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

120 × 2P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4810 -, +1 150 × 4P 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 70 × 4P 70 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
120 × 2P 70 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

120 × 2P (×2) 95 - 150
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 M12 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P × 2 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4930 -, +1 150 × 4P 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 95 × 4P 70 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
3
120 × 2P 70 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

95 × 4P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4H11 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 35 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
95 × 4P 95 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)

Terminal
Model Terminal
Shape
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

95 × 4P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 4P × 2 50 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4H12 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 50 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
95 × 4P 95 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
*1 The wire gauges for drive models 4810 to 4H12 are the recommended wire gauges when you use these drive models as a 6-Phase/12-
Pulse drive.
*2 When you use drive models 4810 to 4H12 as a 6-Phase/12-Pulse drive, remove the common bus bars on the input terminals.
◆ Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and
motor terminals.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not connect main power supply wiring to drive motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Connect
main power supply wiring to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death
from fire.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that you align the phase order for the drive and motor when you connect the
motor to drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If the phase order is incorrect, it can cause the motor to run in reverse. If
the motor accidentally runs in reverse, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters, or leakage breakers (RCM/RCD) to the motor
circuit. If you connect these devices to the output circuits, it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.
■ Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

When the wiring between the drive and the motor is too long, voltage drop along the motor cable can decrease
motor torque, usually at low frequency output. If you connect motors in parallel with long motor cable, this is also
a problem. Drive output current increases when the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in
leakage current can cause overcurrent and decrease the precision of the current detection.
Use the values in Table 3.3 to adjust the drive carrier frequency. For systems that have 100 m (328 ft) or longer
motor wiring, if you use metal conduits or isolated cables for each phase, it will increase stray capacitance.
Table 3.3 Carrier Frequency against Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Wiring Distance Between the Drive
and Motor 50 m (164 ft) Maximum 100 m (328 ft) Maximum More than 100 m (328 ft)
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 kHz or less
Note:
• To set the carrier frequency in a drive that is operating more than one motor, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to
all connected motors.
• When A1-02 = 5, 6 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM], the maximum cable length is 100 m (328 ft).
• When you connect to a PM motor, it can be necessary to adjust the overcurrent detection. Refer to L8-27: Overcurrent Detection Gain
on page 953 for more information.
■ Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
• 2xxxB
• 2xxxC
• 4002B to 4371B
• 4389 to 4H12

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ground the neutral point on the power supply of drive models 2xxxB/C and 4xxxB/C to
comply with the EMC Directive before you turn on the EMC filter. If you turn ON the EMC filter, but you do not ground the neutral
point, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and use
the minimum length of ground wire. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause serious injury or death from dangerous electrical
potentials on the equipment chassis.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard.
Correctly ground the ground terminals. Obey federal and local electrical wiring codes for correct grounding methods. The
maximum grounding resistance is
• 200 V class: ground to 100 Ω or less
• 400 V class: ground to 10 Ω or less
If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded, it can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• Only use the drive grounding wire to ground the drive. Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or
large-current electrical equipment. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical
interference.
• To connect more than one drive to the same grounding circuit, follow the instructions in the instruction manual. Incorrect equipment
grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference.
When you connect more than one drive, refer to Figure 3.19. Do not loop the grounding wire.
Figure 3.19 Wiring More than One Drive
■ Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Before you wire the main circuit terminals, make sure that MCCB and MC are OFF. If you
touch electrical equipment when MCCB and MC are ON, it can cause serious injury or death.
■ Main Circuit Configuration
The figures in this section show the different schematics of the drive main circuit. The connections change when
the drive capacity changes. The DC power supply for the main circuit also supplies power to the control circuit.
Note:
Drive models 2004A to 2415A and 4002A to 4H12A do not have a built-in EMC filter.
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and 3
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential.
Incorrect wiring connections can cause damage to the drive.
Model Figure
2004 - 2082, 4002 - 4044 Figure 3.20
2110 - 2138, 4060 - 4168 Figure 3.21
2169 - 2415, 4208 - 4389 Figure 3.22
4453 - 4H12 Figure 3.23

Figure 3.20 Drive Main Circuit Configuration 1

3

*1 Drive models 4810 to 4H12 do not have EMC filter switches or EMC filters.
◆ Protection of Main Circuit Terminals

• Insulation Cap
When you wire the main circuit terminals, do not let cable ends go near terminals or the drive. If you use
crimped terminals, make sure that you also use insulation caps.
• Insulation Barrier

Insulation barriers are packaged with drive models 4810 to 4H12 for additional protection between terminals.
Use insulation barriers to make the wiring more reliable. Refer to Figure 3.24 for information about the
insulation barrier installation procedure.
Figure 3.24 Install the Insulation Barriers
◆ 6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives
■ Installing the Transformer
Install a 6-Phase/12-Pulse isolation transformer with output windings phase-shifted by 30 electrical degrees or
install a Hybrid 6-Phase topology on the power supply.
A- Main circuit power supply E - Braking resistor (optional)

B- Branch circuit protection F - CDBR braking unit (optional)
C- 6-Phase/12-Pulse isolation transformer G - Motor
D- Fuse
Figure 3.25 Standard 12-Pulse Input Main Circuit Terminal Connections

*1 Refer to local codes for correct branch circuit protection (BCP) on the primary side of the 6-Phase/12-Pulse transformer.
*2 Refer to 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class on page 140 for fuses for the secondary side of the 6-Phase/12-Pulse transformer.

A- Branch circuit protection E- Balancing reactor

B- Input reactor (optional) F- Braking resistor (optional)
C- Fuse G- CDBR braking unit (optional)
D- Delta to Wye transformer H- Motor
Figure 3.26 Main Circuit Terminal Connections, Standard Hybrid 12-Pulse System
3

3.4 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

The procedures to wire the main circuit terminal block are different for different drive models. Refer to Table 3.4
for procedures by drive model.
Table 3.4 Wiring Procedures for the Main Circuit Terminal Block
Model Procedure Ref.
2004 - 2211
Procedure A 96
4002 - 4168
2257 - 2415
Procedure B 99
4208 - 4720
Three-Phase Drives Procedure C 101

4810 - 4H12
6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives Procedure D 102
◆ Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure A

■ Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block
Read these notes before you wire the main circuit terminal block.
• Use UL-Listed, vinyl-coated insulated copper wires for operation with a continuous maximum permitted
temperature of 75 °C at 600 V.
• Remove all unwanted objects that are near the terminal block connections.
• Remove the insulation from the connection wires to the wire stripping lengths shown in the manual.
• Do not use bent or crushed wires. Remove the damaged end of the wire before you use it. Incorrect connections
can cause death or serious injury from fire.
• Do not solder stranded wire. Soldered wire connections can become loose over time and cause unsatisfactory
drive performance.
• If you use stranded wire, make sure that all of the wire strands are in the connection. Also, do not twist the
stranded wire too much. Incorrect connections can cause death or serious injury from fire.
• Put the wire all the way into the terminal block. Remove the insulation from the wire to the recommended wire
stripping length to fit the wire with insulation in the plastic housing.
• Use a torque driver, torque ratchet, or torque wrench for the screws. A slotted driver or a hex tool will be
necessary to wire the screw clamp terminal. Use applicable tools as specified by the recommended conditions in
the product manual.
• If you use power tools to tighten the terminal screws, use a low speed setting (300 to 400 r/min). Failure to obey
can cause damage to the terminal screws.
• Wire gauges on existing drive models to be replaced may not match wire gauge ranges on new drives. Refer to
the drive manuals for correct wire sizes.
• Do not tighten the terminal screws at an angle of 5 degrees or more. Failure to obey can cause damage to the
terminal screws.
• If you damage a terminal screw, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Figure 3.27 Permitted Angle

• Put the bit all the way into the hex socket to tighten the hex socket cap screw.

• When you tighten slotted screws, hold the straight-edge screwdriver perpendicularly to the screw. Make sure
that you align the end of the straight-edge screwdriver with the screw groove.
Figure 3.28 Tightening Slotted Screws

• After you connect the wires to the terminal block, lightly pull on the wires to make sure that they do not come
out of the terminals.
• Remove the correct section of the wiring cover to make wiring easier.
• Do not let strain on the wiring cause damage. Use a strain relief near the wiring to release the tension. Refer to
Figure 3.29 for an example.
A - Cable clamp
Figure 3.29 Strain Relief Example
Table 3.5 Recommended Wiring Tools
Bit Torque Driver Model
Screw Size Screw Shape Adapter Torque Wrench
Model Manufacturer (Tightening Torque)
TSD-M 3NM
M4 Bit SF-BIT-SL 1,0X4,0-70 PHOENIX CONTACT (1.2 - 3 N∙m N/A
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
Wire Gauge ≤
25 mm2 Wire Gauge ≤
(AWG 10):
TSD-M 3NM 25 mm2
(AWG 10): N/A
(1.2 - 3 N∙m
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
M5 *1 Bit SF-BIT-SL 1,2X6,5-70 PHOENIX CONTACT
Wire Gauge ≥
Wire Gauge ≥ 30 mm2
30 mm2
(AWG 8): 3
4.1 - 4.5 N∙m
(AWG 8): N/A
(36.3 - 39.8 lbf∙in) *2
*3
5 - 9 N∙m
Bit SF-BIT-HEX 5-50 PHOENIX CONTACT N/A (44.3 - 79.9 lbf∙in) *2
*3
M6
3 - 3.5 N∙m
Bit SF-BIT-SL 1,2X6,5-70 PHOENIX CONTACT N/A (26.6 - 31.0 lbf∙in) *2
*3
8 - 12 N∙m
M8 Bit SF-BIT-HEX 6-50 PHOENIX CONTACT N/A (70.8 - 106.2 lbf∙in) *2
*3
12 - 14 N∙m
*3
*1 When wiring drive models 2056, 4089, and smaller, select the correct tools for the wire gauge.
*2 Use 6.35 mm (0.25 in) bit socket holder.
*3 Use a torque wrench that can apply this torque measurement range.
■ Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

Remove the keypad and front cover before wiring the main circuit terminal block.

1. Pull the wiring cover away from the drive to remove it.
A - Wiring cover
Figure 3.30 Remove the Wiring Cover

2. Put the end of a prepared wire into the terminal block.
Figure 3.31 Install the Electrical Wire

Note:
If there is a jumper between terminals +1 and +2, loosen the terminal block screws and remove the jumper before wiring the
terminals.
3. Tighten the screws to the specified torque.
Figure 3.32 Tighten Terminal Block Screws

4. Examine the signal from the wired terminal and use a diagonal-cutting pliers to remove areas of the wiring
cover cutaway section.
To remove the wiring cover, cut off the portion shown in Figure 3.33.
A - Cutaway sections B - Cut this portion with a diagonal-cutting pliers
Figure 3.33 Clip the Cutaway Section of the Wiring Cover

Note:
• Different drive models have different wiring cover shapes.
• Only clip the section of the wiring cover that applies to the wired terminal. If you clip areas that do not apply to wired
terminals, the protective enclosure will not keep its IP20 protective level.
• Tightly hold the cutaway section when removing pieces of the cutaway section. Pieces of the cutaway section can fly out
and cause injury.
• Make sure that the clipped section does not cause damage to the wires.
• If you use wires that are not specified by Yaskawa, the protective enclosure could lose its IP20 protective level, although the
wiring cover is correct. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
5. Put the wiring cover in its initial position. Put the cables through the holes cut from the wiring cover.
Figure 3.34 Reattach the Wiring Cover

6. Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
◆ Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure B

Note:
• After the wiring, do not twist or shake the electrical wires too much.
• Be sure to use only wires with the correct size, stripped wire length, and tightening torque as specified by Yaskawa.
• Use tools that fit the shape of the screw head to tighten and loosen the terminal block screws.
• Make sure that there are no loose stranded wires or frayed wires after wiring is complete.

Remove the terminal cover before wiring the main circuit terminal block.
1. Remove the screws on the terminal block cover and pull the terminal block cover away from the drive. Pull
the wiring cover away from the drive to remove the wiring cover after removing the terminal block cover.
A - Terminal block cover B - Wiring cover

2. Remove the terminal block nut.
A - Nut
Figure 3.36 Remove the Terminal Block Nut
3. Wire the closed-loop crimp terminal to the main circuit terminal block.

4. Tighten the nut to the specified torque.
Figure 3.38 Tighten the Terminal Block Nut

Cut the areas shown in Figure 3.39.
B
A - Cutaway sections B - Use a diagonal-cutting pliers to clip this area.

Note:
• Clip only the areas from the wiring cover that apply to the wired terminal. If you clip areas that do not apply to wired
terminals, the drive will not keep its IP20 protective level.
• When you clip pieces of the cutaway section, tightly hold the cutaway section. Pieces of the cutaway section can fly out and
cause injury.
• Although the wiring cover is correct, if you use wires that are not specified by Yaskawa, the drive will not keep its IP20
protective level.
• When you use the recommended gauge for the electrical wires, it is not necessary to attach the wiring cover of the main
circuit power input terminal and the drive output terminal. When you use the applicable gauge for the electrical wires, attach
the wiring cover.
6. Attach the wiring cover and terminal block cover to their initial positions and tighten the screws on the
terminal block cover.

7. Put the terminal cover back in its initial position.
◆ Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure C

Note:
1. Remove the terminal block nut.
Note:
When you connect the drive to a three-phase power supply, do not remove the common bus bars. 3
When you remove the nuts, make sure that the common bus bars do not fall.
A - Nut B - Common bus bar



4. Install the insulation barriers included in the package between the main circuit terminals.

◆ Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure D

Note:


1. Remove the nuts on terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, and remove the common bus bars.
A - Common bus bar B - Nut
Figure 3.45 Remove Common Bus Bars

Figure 3.46 Install the Electrical Wires

3. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque.
3
4. Install the insulation barriers included in the package between the main circuit terminals.


3.5 Control Circuit Wiring

This section gives information about how to correctly wire the control circuit.
◆ Control Circuit Connection Diagram

Wire the drive control circuit as shown in Figure 3.49.
Figure 3.49 Control Circuit Connection Diagram

*1 Connect a 24 V Control power input supply to terminals PS-AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is
OFF.

*3 The output current capacity of the +V and -V terminals on the control circuit is 20 mA.
*4 Set DIP switches S1-1 to S1-3 to select between a voltage or current input signal to terminals A1 to A3. The default setting for S1-1
and S1-3 is voltage input (“V” side). The default setting for S1-2 is current input (“I” side).
*5 Do not ground the control circuit terminals AC or connect them to the drive chassis.
*6 Do not connect terminals PS and AC inversely. If you connect the wires to the incorrect terminals, it will cause damage to the drive.
*7 Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in the last drive when you use MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications.
*8 To use the internal power supply with the Safe Disable input, use sourcing mode.
◆ Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

Hx-xx parameters set functions for the multi-function input and output terminals.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire and test all control circuits to make sure that the control circuits operate
correctly. If you use a drive that has incorrect control circuit wiring or operation, it can cause death or serious injury.
■ Input Terminals
Refer to Table 3.6 for a list of input terminals and functions.

Table 3.6 Multi-function Input Terminals

Type Terminal Name (Default) Function (Signal Level)
MFDI selection 1
S1
(ON: Forward run OFF: Stop)
• Photocoupler
MFDI selection 2 • 24 V, 6 mA
S2
(ON: Reverse run OFF: Stop) Note:
MFDI selection 3 Install the wire jumpers between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the MFDI power supply
S3 (sinking/sourcing mode or internal/external power supply).
(External fault (N.O.)) • Sinking Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SP.
MFDI selection 4 NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between
S4
(Fault reset) terminals SC-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-
SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to
MFDI selection 5 the drive.
S5
(Multi-step speed reference 1)
Digital • Sourcing Mode: Install a jumper between terminals SC and SN.
Inputs MFDI selection 6
S6 NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between
(Multi-step speed reference 2) terminals SC-SP. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-
MFDI selection 7 SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to
S7
(Jog command)
the drive.
• External power supply: No jumper necessary between terminals SC-SN and terminals SC-SP.
MFDI selection 8
S8
(Baseblock command (N.O.))
SN MFDI power supply 0 V MFDI power supply, 24 V (maximum 150 mA)
SC MFDI selection common NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between
terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals SC-SP
SP MFDI power supply +24 Vdc
and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the
drive.
H1 Safe Disable input 1 Remove the jumper between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to use the Safe Disable input.
• 24 V, 6 mA
• ON: Normal operation
H2 Safe Disable input 2 • OFF: Coasting motor
Safe Disable • Internal impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input • OFF Minimum OFF time of 2 ms.
Safe Disable function common

HC Safe Disable function common NOTICE: Do not close the circuit between terminals HC and SN. A
closed circuit between these terminals will cause damage to the drive.
• Response frequency: 0 Hz to 32 kHz
• H level duty: 30% to 70%
Master frequency reference pulse train input
RP • H level voltage: 3.5 V to 13.2 V
(Master frequency reference)
• L level voltage: 0.0 V to 0.8 V
• Input impedance: 3 kΩ
+V Power supply for frequency setting 10.5 V (allowable current 20 mA maximum)
-V Power supply for frequency setting -10.5 V (allowable current 20 mA maximum)
MFAI1 Voltage input or current input

A1
(Master frequency reference) Select terminal A1 with DIP switch S1-1 and H3-01 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select].
Select terminal A2 with DIP switch S1-2 and H3-09 [Terminal A2 Signal Level Select]
Master MFAI2 • -10 V to +10 V/-100% to +100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
Frequency A2 • 0 V to 10 V/100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
Reference (Combined to terminal A1)
• 4 mA to 20 mA/100%, 0 mA to 20 mA/100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
• Voltage input or current input

Select using DIP switch S1-3 and H3-05 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select].
– -10 V to +10 V/-100% to +100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
MFAI3/PTC input
A3 – 0 V to 10 V/100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
(Auxiliary frequency reference)
– 4 mA to 20 mA/100%, 0 mA to 20 mA/100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
• PTC input (Motor Overheat Protection)
Set DIP switch S4 to “PTC” and set DIP switch S1-3 to “V” to set terminal A3 for PTC input.
AC Frequency reference common 0V
E (G) Connecting shielded cable -
■ Output Terminals
Refer to Table 3.7 and Table 3.8 for a list of Output terminals and functions.

Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals

N.O. output
MA
(Fault) • Relay output
Fault Relay • 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
N.C. output
Output MB • 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
(Fault)
• Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
MC Digital output common
M1 MFDO
• Relay output
M2 (During Run)
• 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
• 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
M3 MFDO
MFDO • Minimum load: 5 V, 10 mA (Reference value)
M4 (Zero Speed) Note:
Do not set functions that frequently switch ON/OFF to MFDO (M1 to M6) because this will
M5 MFDO decrease the performance life of the relay contacts. Yaskawa estimates switching life at
200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).
M6 (Speed Agree 1)
Table 3.8 Control Circuit Monitor Output Terminals

Pulse train output 32 kHz (maximum)

MP
(Output frequency) Refer to “Pulse Train Output” (page 115) for more information.
Analog monitor output 1 Select voltage or current output.

FM
(Output frequency) • 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100%
• -10 V to +10 V/-100% to +100%
Monitor Output
• 4 mA to 20 mA (Receiver recommended impedance: 250 Ω)
Analog monitor output 2
AM Note:
(Output current)
Select with jumper switch S5 and H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select] or H4-08
[Terminal AM Signal Level Select].
AC Monitor common 0V
■ External Power Supply Input Terminals

Refer to Table 3.9 for a list of the functions of the external power supply input terminals.
Table 3.9 External Power Supply Input Terminals
Type Terminal Name (Default) Function
Supplies backup power to the drive control circuit, keypad, and option board.
PS External 24 V power supply input
External Power Supply Input 21.6 VDC to 26.4 VDC, 700 mA
Terminals
AC External 24 V power supply ground 0V
Alarm Display When You Use External 24 V Power Supply

When you use an external 24 V power supply, the drive detects an alarm as shown in Table 3.10 if you set o2-23
[External 24V Powerloss Detection] and o2-26 [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Power] for the main circuit power
supply. Set the alarm display as necessary. 3
Table 3.10 Power Supply and Alarm Display

o2-23 o2-26
Main Circuit Power Supply External 24 V Power Supply [External 24V Powerloss [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Alarm Display
Detection] Power]
ON ON - - -
ON OFF 0 [Disabled] - -
1 [Enabled] - L24v [Loss of External Power 24

Supply]

o2-23 o2-26
Main Circuit Power Supply External 24 V Power Supply [External 24V Powerloss [Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Alarm Display
Detection] Power]
OFF ON - 0 [Disabled] “Ready” LED light flashes

quickly
- 1 [Enabled] EP24v [External Power 24V

Supply]
Operation When Using External 24 V Power Supply

To operate the drive, de-energize the main circuit power supply and connect an external 24 V power supply to
terminals PS-AC.
Function Operation Solution
Keypad The keypad operates the same as when the main circuit power supply
is ON. The drive will not detect oPr [Keypad Connection Fault]. -
Data Log The data log function operates the same as when the main circuit
power supply is ON. -
The operation is different for different drive software versions. *1
Communications by Communication Option Communication operates the same as when the main circuit power
or MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication supply is ON. -
Terminals
MFAI MFAI operates the same as when the main circuit power supply is -
ON.
MFAO MFAO operates the same as when the main circuit power supply is
ON. -
MFDI MFDI does not operate when the main circuit power supply of the Connect the external 24 V power supply to the MFDI
drive is OFF. selection common terminal (SC). *2
MFDO MFDO operates the same as when the main circuit power supply is
Multi-Function Photocoupler Output ON.
The operations of MFDO terminals and fault relay output terminals -
Fault Relay Output Terminal
set for H2-xx = E [Fault] are different for different drive software
versions. *3
Pulse Train Input Pulse train input operates the same as when the main circuit power
supply is ON. -
Pulse train output Pulse train output operates the same as when the main circuit power
-
supply is ON.
Encoder Option Speed Detection (PG-B3, Encoder options do not operate when the main circuit power supply of When you use an encoder, make sure that the drive main
PG-X3, PG-F3, PG-RT3) the drive is OFF. circuit power supply is ON. *4
The operation to detect encoder option-related faults is different for
different software versions.
Analog Input Option (AI-A3) Analog input options operate the same as when the main circuit power
-
supply is ON.
Analog Output Option (AO-A3) Analog output options operate the same as when the main circuit
power supply is ON. -
The operation is different for different drive software versions. *5
Digital Input Option (DI-A3) Digital input options do not operate when the main circuit power Connect the external 24 V power supply to the Input
supply of the drive is OFF. signal common terminal (SC). *2
Digital Output Option (DO-A3) Digital output options operate the same as when the main circuit
-
power supply is ON.
*1 When you use an external 24 V power supply, the operation of the data log function is different for different drive software versions.
On drives with software versions PRG: 09015 and later, you can continue the data log function.
Note:
The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version. You can also use U1-25
[SoftwareNumber FLASH] to identify the software version.
*2 When you use MFDI and a Digital Input option (DI-A3), wire the terminals as shown in Wiring MFDI Terminals on page 109 or
Wiring Digital Input Option (DI-A3) on page 109.
*3 When you use an external 24 V power supply, the operation of the MFDO terminals are different for different drive software
versions.
Note:
• Drive software versions PRG: 01028 and later
When the main circuit power supply of the drive turns off, and you remove the cause of a fault and do a fault reset from the
keypad, the fault relay output terminals and the MFDO terminals set for H2-xx = E, 10E [Fault] will change status.
• Drive software versions PRG: 01027 and earlier
When the main circuit power supply of the drive turns off, remove the cause of a fault and do a fault reset from the keypad. The
fault relay output terminals and the MFDO terminals set for H2-xx = E, 10E [Fault] will keep the same status as before the main
circuit power supply of the drive turned off. The fault code shown on the keypad will disappear.

*4 If the motor shaft can rotate while the 24 V control power supply is energized and the main circuit power supply is de-energized, re-
energize the 24 V control power supply and energize the main circuit power supply.
*5 When you use an external 24 V power supply, the operation of the Analog Output option is different for different drive software
versions. On drives with software versions PRG:09015 and later, the Analog Output option (AO-A3) can output the analog signals.
Note:
When you use an external 24 V power supply, if you de-energize the main circuit power supply, the encoder
option will not operate, even when you connect the external 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC. When you
use an encoder option, energize the drive main circuit power supply.
Note:
Yaskawa recommends that you use different external power supplies for the external power supply input terminals (PS-AC) and MFDI
selection common terminal (SC) / Input signal common terminal (SC).
Wiring MFDI Terminals
If you de-energize the main circuit power supply, the MFDI terminals will not operate, even when you connect the
external 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC. When you set N.O. functions to H1-xx [MFDI Function Select],
MFDI terminals always deactivate. When you set N.C. functions, MFDI terminals always activate. Connect the
external 24 V power supply to the MFDI selection common terminal (SC).
A - External power supply
Figure 3.50 Wiring MFDI Terminals

Wiring Digital Input Option (DI-A3)
If you de-energize the main circuit power supply, the Digital Input Option terminals will not operate, even when
you connect the external 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC. When you set N.O. functions to F3-xx [Terminal
Dx Function Selection], the input terminals on the digital input option always deactivate. When you set N.C.
functions, the input terminals on the digital input option always activate. Connect the external 24 V power supply
to the Input signal common terminal (SC).
A - External power supply C - Signal processor

B - Photocoupler
Figure 3.51 Wiring Digital Input Option (DI-A3)
■ Serial Communication Terminals

Refer to Table 3.11 for a list of serial communication terminals and functions.

Table 3.11 Serial Communication Terminals

Type Terminal Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)
D+ Communication input/output (+) MEMOBUS/Modbus communications

Use an RS-485 cable to connect the
drive. • RS-485
Note: • MEMOBUS/Modbus communication
protocol
Modbus Communication D- Communication output (-) Set DIP switch S2 to ON to enable
the termination resistor in the last • Maximum 115.2 kbps
drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus
network.
AC Shield ground 0V
◆ Control Circuit Terminal Configuration

The control circuit terminals are in the positions shown in Figure 3.52.
A- Terminal block (TB5) E - Terminal block (TB1)

B- Terminal block (TB2-3) F - Terminal block (TB3)
C- Terminal block (TB2-2) G - Terminal block (TB4)
D- Terminal block (TB2-1)
Figure 3.52 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement
■ Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

Use the tables in this section to select the correct wires. Use shielded wire to wire the control circuit terminal
block. Use crimp ferrules on the wire ends to make the wiring procedure easier and more reliable.
Table 3.12 Control Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques
Bare Wire Crimp Ferrule
Tightening
Terminal Block Terminal Screw Size Torque Recomm. Applicable Recomm. Applicable
N∙m (lbf∙in) Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG) mm2 (AWG)
TB1 S1 - S8, SN, SC, SP

• Stranded wire
TB2 M1 - M6, MA, MB, MC 0.2 - 1.0
0.75 (24 - 18) 0.5 0.25 - 0.5
+V, AC, -V, A1, A2, A3, FM, AM, - -
TB3
AC, MP, RP, AC (18) • Solid wire (20) (24 - 20)
0.2 - 1.5
(24 - 16)
E (G), SN, HC, H1, H2, PS, AC, D
TB4
+, D-
0.5 - 1.0 0.5 - 2 1.25

TB5 E (G) M3.5 - -
(4.4 - 8.9) (20 - 14) (12)
Crimp Ferrules
Attach an insulated sleeve when you use crimp ferrules. Refer to Table 3.13 for the recommended external
dimensions and model numbers of crimp ferrules.
Use the CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool made by PHOENIX CONTACT.

Figure 3.53 External Dimensions of Crimp Ferrules

Table 3.13 Crimp Ferrule Models and Sizes
Wire Gauge
Model L (mm) L1 (mm) φd1 (mm) φd2 (mm)
mm2 (AWG)
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-8YE 12.5 8 0.8 2.0
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-8TQ 12.5 8 0.8 2.0
AI 0.5-8WH,
0.5 (20) 14 8 1.1 2.5
AI 0.5-8OG
◆ Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized. If you touch the
internal components of an energized drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not let wire shields touch other signal lines or equipment. Insulate the wire shields with electrical tape or shrink
tubing. If you do not insulate the wire shields, it can cause a short circuit and damage the drive.
Note:
• Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, -, +1, +2, +3) and other high-power wiring. If control circuit wiring is adjacent to main circuit wiring, it can cause incorrect
operation of the drive and equipment from electrical interference.
• Isolate wiring for contact output terminals MA, MB, MC and M1-M6 from other control circuit wiring. If contact output terminal
wiring is adjacent to other control circuit wiring, it can cause incorrect operation of the drive and equipment from electrical
interference.
• Use a Class 2 power supply to connect external power to the control terminals. If the power supply for peripheral devices is incorrect, it
can cause a decrease in drive performance.
• Connect the shield of shielded cable to the applicable ground terminal. Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment
malfunction from electrical interference.
Correctly ground the drive terminals and complete main circuit wiring before you wire the control circuit.
Remove the keypad and front cover.
1. Push in on the tabs on the both sides of the LED status ring board to release the board from the bracket.
Pull the board forward to remove it.
NOTICE: When you remove the LED Status Board from the drive bracket, make sure that you temporarily install it in
the holding position provided on the drive. If you cause damage to the LED status ring board, the LEDs will not
function correctly.
Note:
You can temporarily store the LED status ring board with the temporary placement holes on the drive. The location of the
temporary placement holes is different on different drive models. 3
A - Drive front C - Temporary placement holes

B - LED status ring board
Figure 3.54 Remove the LED Status Ring Board



2. Refer to the figure and wire the control circuit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Tighten all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque. Connections that are too loose or
too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive. Incorrect connections can also cause death or
serious injury from fire.
Note:
• Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Incorrect equipment grounding
can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference.
• Do not use control circuit wiring that is longer than 50 m (164 ft) to supply the analog frequency reference from a remote
source. If the control circuit wiring is too long, it can cause unsatisfactory system performance.
A - Wire with a crimp ferrule attached, or C - When you do not use crimp ferrules, remove
unsoldered wire with the core wires lightly approximately 8.5 mm (0.33 in) of the covering
twisted at the end of the wire.
B - Pull back the shielding and lightly twist the end
with your fingers to keep the ends from fraying.
Figure 3.57 Wiring Procedure for the Control Circuit

Note:
• Do not solder the core wire. Soldered wiring connections can become loose and cause the drive to malfunction.
• Refer to Figure 3.58 for information to prepare terminal ends of the shielded wire.
• Prepare the wire ends of shielded twisted-pair wires as shown in Figure 3.58 to use an analog reference from an external
frequency setting potentiometer to set the frequency. Connect the shield to terminal E (G) of the drive.

A - Connect the shield to terminal E (G) of the drive. C - Insulate with electrical tape or shrink tubing.
B - Sheath
Figure 3.58 Prepare the Ends of Shielded Wire

3. Put the wires through the clearance in the wiring cover.
Figure 3.59 Control Circuit Wiring

4. On drive models 4810 to 4H12, wire the drive control circuit as shown in Figure 3.60 or Figure 3.61.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Use tubing or other protection for the wires to prevent damage to the wires at the
edges of the opening. If there is damage to the wires, it can cause incorrect operation.
Note:
When you wire the control circuit wiring outside the drive, use the slits on the sides of the drive and safety the wires with
cable ties. You can wire on either the left or right side.
Figure 3.60 Wiring Inside the Drive
A - Opening B - Slit to Safety Wires
Figure 3.61 Wiring Outside the Drive

5. Install the LED status ring board, front cover, and the keypad to their initial positions.

◆ Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board

The terminal board has switches to adapt the drive I/Os to the external control signals as shown in Figure 3.62.
Set the switches to select the functions for each terminal.
Figure 3.62 Locations of Switches

Table 3.14 I/O Terminals and Switches Functions
Position Switch Terminal Function Default
Enables and disables the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications

A DIP switch S2 - OFF
termination resistor.
FM: V (voltage output)

B Jumper Switch S5 FM, AM Sets terminals FM and AM to voltage or current output.
AM: V (voltage output)
DIP switch S1-1 A1 Sets the input signal type (voltage/current). V (voltage input)
C DIP switch S1-2 A2 Sets the input signal type (voltage/current). I (current input)
DIP switch S1-3 A3 Sets the input signal type (voltage/current). V (voltage input)
D DIP switch S4 A3 Sets MFAI or PTC input. AI (analog input)

3.6 Control I/O Connections

This section gives information about the settings for the listed control circuit I/O signals.
• MFDI (terminals S1 to S8)
• Pulse train output (terminal MP)
• MFAI (terminals A1 to A3)
• PTC input (terminal A3)
• MFAO (terminals FM, AM)
• MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (terminals D+, D-, AC)
◆ Set Sinking Mode/Sourcing Mode

Close the circuit between terminals SC-SP and SC-SN to set the sinking mode/sourcing mode and the internal/
external power supply for the MFDI terminals. The default setting for the drive is internal power supply sinking
mode.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not close the circuit between terminals SP-SN. If you close the circuits between terminals
SC-SP and terminals SC-SN at the same time, it will cause damage to the drive.
Mode Internal Power Supply (Terminal SN-SP) External 24 V power supply
Sinking Mode
(NPN)
Sourcing Mode
(PNP)
◆ Pulse Train Output

You can use pulse train monitor output terminal MP for sourcing mode or for sinking mode.
• Use for sourcing mode
The load impedance changes the voltage level of the pulse train output signal.
Load Impedance Output Voltage
RL(kΩ) VMP(V)
1.5 kΩ or more 5 V or more
4.0 kΩ or more 8 V or more
10 kΩ or more 10 V or more
Note:
Use the formula in Figure 3.63 to calculate the necessary load resistance (kΩ) to increase output voltage VMP(V).

A - Load Impedance
Figure 3.63 Wiring to Use Pulse Train Output in Sourcing Mode
• Use in sinking mode
The external power supply changes the voltage level of the pulse train output signal. Keep the voltage from an
external source between 10.8 Vdc to 16.5 Vdc. Adjust the load impedance to keep the current at 16 mA or
lower.
External Power Supply (V) Load Impedance (kΩ) Sinking current (mA)
10.8 Vdc to 16.5 Vdc 1.0 kΩ or more 16 mA maximum
A - External power supply C - Sinking current

B - Load Impedance
Figure 3.64 Wiring to Use Pulse Train Output in Sinking Mode
◆ Set Input Signals for MFAI Terminals A1 to A3

Use terminals A1 to A3 to input a voltage or a current signal. Set the signal type as shown in Table 3.15.
Figure 3.65 Location of DIP Switch S1

Table 3.15 MFAI Terminals A1 to A3 Signal Settings
DIP Switch Settings Parameter
Terminal Input Signal
Switch Setting No. Signal Level
V 0: 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)

Voltage input
(Default) 1: -10 V to +10 V/-100% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
A1 S1-1 H3-01
2: 4 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
Current input I
0: 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)

Voltage input V
1: -10 V to +10 V/-100% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
A2 S1-2 H3-09
I 2: 4 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)
Current input
(Default) 3: 0 mA to 20 mA/0% to 100% (input impedance: 250 Ω)

DIP Switch Settings Parameter

Terminal Input Signal
Switch Setting No. Signal Level
V 0: 0 V to 10 V/0% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)

Voltage input
(Default) 1: -10 V to +10 V/-100% to 100% (input impedance: 20 kΩ)
A3 S1-3 H3-05
Current input I
Note:
• Set H3-02, H3-10 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection, Terminal A2 Function Selection = Frequency Reference] to set A1 and A2 to
frequency reference. The drive will add the analog input values together to make the frequency reference.
• Use tweezers or a jig with a tip width of approximately 0.8 mm (0.03 in) to set DIP switches.
• Set DIP switch S4 to “AI” to use terminal A3 as an analog input (voltage/current) terminal. The default setting for DIP switch S4 is
“AI”.
◆ Set MFAI Terminal A3 to PTC Input

Set terminal A3 as an MFAI or as the PTC input for motor overload protection.
Use DIP switch S4 to set the input function.
Terminal DIP switch S4 Description
AI Functions as an MFAI terminal.

(Default) Set H3-06 [Terminal A3 Function Selection] to set the input function.
A3 Functions as the PTC input terminal.
PTC Set H3-06 = E [Motor Temperature (PTC Input)].
Set S1-3 to “V” for voltage input.
◆ Set Output Signals for MFAO Terminals FM, AM

Set the signal type for terminals AM and FM to voltage or current output. Use jumper switch S5 and H4-07, H4-
08 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select, Terminal AM Signal Level Select] to set the signal type.
3
Figure 3.67 Location of Jumper Switch S5

Parameter
Terminal Types of Output Signals Jumper Switch S5
No. Signal Level
Voltage output 0: 0 V to 10 V
(Default) 1: -10 V to +10 V
FM H4-07
Current output 2: 4 mA to 20 mA
Voltage output 0: 0 V to 10 V
(Default) 1: -10 V to +10 V
AM H4-08
Current output 2: 4 mA to 20 mA
◆ Switch ON Termination Resistor for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

When the drive is the last slave in a MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, set DIP switch S2 to the ON position.
This drive has a built-in termination resistor for the RS-485 interface.

Table 3.16 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Termination Resistor Setting
DIP Switch S2 Description
ON The built-in termination resistor is ON.
OFF (Default) The built-in termination resistor is OFF.

3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC
3.7 Connect the Drive to a PC

The drive has a mini-B type USB port.
You can use a USB cable (USB 2.0, type: A - mini-B) to connect the drive to a type-A USB port on a PC. After
you connect the drive to the PC, you can use Yaskawa DriveWizard Industrial software to monitor drive
performance and manage parameter settings.
C B
A - USB 2.0, type A - mini-B cable C - Type-A connector

B - Mini-B type connector D - PC
Figure 3.69 Connect to a PC (USB)

Yaskawa recommends that you use a USB cable with connectors connected with shielded wires.
Figure 3.70 Recommended USB Cable

3.8 External Interlock
3.8 External Interlock

For applications that will have unwanted effects on the system if the drive stops, make an interlock between fault
relay output (MA, MB, MC) and the MFDO Drive Ready signal.
◆ Drive Ready
When the drive is operating or is prepared to accept a Run command, the MFDO terminal to which Drive Ready
[H2-xx = 6] is set will enter the ON status.
In these conditions, Drive Ready is OFF and the drive ignores Run commands:
• The drive is de-energized
• During a fault
• There is problem with the control power supply
• There is a parameter setting error that will not let the drive run, although a Run command is entered
• An overvoltage or undervoltage fault occurs when the Run command is entered
• The drive is in Programming Mode.
◆ Interlock Circuit Example

Refer to Figure 3.71 for an example of how two drives that run one application use the Drive Ready and Fault
output signals to interlock with the controller.
Terminal Output Signal Parameter Settings for Output Signal
MA, MB, MC Fault -
M1-M2 Drive Ready H2-01 = 6
Figure 3.71 Interlock Circuit Example

3.9 Braking Resistor Installation

A braking resistor or braking resistor unit (dynamic braking option) helps stop the motor quickly and smoothly
when there is high load inertia. If you try to decelerate a motor in less time than usual for a coast to stop, the
motor will rotate faster than the synchronous speed that aligns with the set frequency. This will cause the motor to
become an induction generator. The inertia energy of the motor and regenerate to the drive and charge the drive
DC bus capacitor and increase the voltage. If the voltage is more than the overvoltage level, an ov [Overvoltage]
will occur. To prevent these overvoltage faults, a dynamic braking option is necessary.
WARNING!
Set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled] when you operate the drive with:
• a regenerative converter
• regenerative unit
• braking unit
• braking resistor
• braking resistor unit.
If you set the parameter incorrectly, the drive can decelerate for too long and cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual (TOBPC72060001). If you do not read and obey
the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit.
Note:
• Select the correct braking circuit size to dissipate the power that is necessary to decelerate the load in the correct time. Before you run
the drive, make sure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time.
• To install a dynamic braking option, set L8-01 = 0 [3% ERF DB Resistor Protection = Disabled].
connections. If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals, it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit and
NOTICE: Connect braking resistors to the drive as shown in the connection diagram examples. If you wire the braking circuits
incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive or equipment.
To connect a Yaskawa ERF series braking resistor to the drive, set L8-01 = 1 [Enabled].
To use a non-ERF type braking resistor, connect a thermal overload relay between the drive and the braking
resistor, and set a circuit to de-energize the drive at the trip contacts of the thermal overload relay.
◆ Install a Braking Resistor: ERF-Type

Connect the braking resistor to drive models 2004 to 2021 and 4002 to 4012 as shown in Figure 3.72.
When you use a braking resistor, set L8-01 = 1 [3% ERF DB Resistor Protection = Enabled] and set one of the
MFDO parameters H2-01 to H2-03 = D [MFDO Function Select = Braking Resistor Fault]. Use a sequence that
uses MFDO to de-energize the drive.
Figure 3.72 Install a Braking Resistor: ERF-Type
◆ Install a Braking Resistor Unit: LKEB-Type

Connect the braking resistor unit as shown in Figure 3.73. To install a braking resistor unit, set L8-01 = 0 [3%
ERF DB Resistor Protection = Disabled].
Models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 have a built-in braking transistor.
To prevent overheating the braking resistor unit, set a sequence to de-energize the drive at the trip contacts of the
thermal overload relay.

Figure 3.73 Install a Braking Resistor Unit: LKEB-Type
◆ Install a Braking Unit Connection: CDBR-Type

To install a CDBR-type braking unit, connect terminal +3 on the drive to terminal + on the braking unit, and
connect terminal - on the drive to terminal - on the braking unit. Terminal +2 on the drive is not necessary for
CDBR-type braking unit connections.
Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable].
Note:
• To install a CDBR-type braking unit to the drive models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 that have a built-in braking transistor, connect
drive terminal B1 to terminal + on the braking unit.
• A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking unit (CDBR-series) to drive models 2169, 2211, 4140, or 4168. To wire the
braking unit, install a junction terminal that can connect to wires in the range specified for the drive, peripheral devices, and options.
This table shows recommended junction terminals. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information about
selection and installation of the junction terminal.
Junction Terminal Model

Drive Model
Manufacturer: Mibu Denki Industrial Co., Ltd.
2169, 4140, 4168 DTK-200N × 2P *1
2211 DTK-300N × 2P *1
*1 The junction terminal must have two or more poles.
Figure 3.74 Install a Braking Unit: CDBR-Type/Braking Resistor Unit: LKEB-Type
■ Braking Unit Connection Wire Gauge (CDBR-Type)

To comply with IP20 when you connect the braking unit (CDBR-type) to drive models 2257 to 2415 or 4208 to
4675, refer to Table 3.17 and Table 3.18 to select the wires.

Table 3.17 200 V Class

Braking Unit Recomm. Gauge Applicable Gauge
Drive Model Drive Terminals Ref.
(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-2022D +3 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P Figure 3.75

(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P Figure 3.75
2257
+3 35 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P Figure 3.76
Applicable Gauge *1
- 35 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2 Figure 3.76
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35 Figure 3.75

(× 1)
Specified Wire Gauge - 35 35 Figure 3.75
2313
+3 50 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P Figure 3.76
Applicable Gauge *1
- 50 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2 Figure 3.76
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35 Figure 3.77

2360 (× 1)
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35 Figure 3.77

2415 (× 1)
*1 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use a braking unit other than Yaskawa braking unit (CDBR-type).
*2 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use the same wires for terminals - and +3.
(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-4045D +3 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P Figure 3.75

(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P Figure 3.75
4208
+3 35 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P Figure 3.76
Applicable Gauge *1
- 35 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2 Figure 3.76
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.75

(× 1)
4250
+3 50 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P Figure 3.76
Applicable Gauge *1
- 50 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2 Figure 3.76
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.75

(× 1)
4296
+3 70 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P Figure 3.76
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2 Figure 3.76 3
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.77
4371 (× 1)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.77

4389 (× 1)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.78

(× 1)
4453
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P Figure 3.80
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2 Figure 3.80
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35 Figure 3.78

(× 1)
4568
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P Figure 3.80
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2 Figure 3.80


(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 2P 35 × 2P Figure 3.79

(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 35 × 2P 35 × 2P Figure 3.79
4675
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P Figure 3.80
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2 Figure 3.80
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
(× 3)
- 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
Specified Wire Gauge
4810
+3 70 × 4P 70 - 150 × 4P -
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 70 - 150 × 4P *2 -
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
(× 3)
- 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
4930
+3 95 × 4P 70 - 150 × 4P -
Applicable Gauge *1
- 95 × 4P *2 70 - 150 × 4P *2 -
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
(× 3)
- 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
4H11
+3 35 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 × 4P × 2 -
Applicable Gauge *1
- 35 × 4P × 2 *2 35 - 150 × 4P × 2 *2 -
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
(× 3)
- 35 × 3P 35 × 3P -
4H12
+3 50 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 × 4P × 2 -
Applicable Gauge *1
- 50 × 4P × 2 *2 35 - 150 × 4P × 2 *2 -
*1 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use a braking unit that is not a Yaskawa braking unit (CDBR-type).
*2 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use the same wires for terminals - and +3.
■ Cutaway Section of the Wiring Cover

Examine the terminal symbols on the braking unit and use a nipper to clip the cutaway section of the
corresponding wiring cover.
Figure 3.75 Cutaway Sections

A - Cutaway section *1 B - Use a diagonal-cutting pliers to clip this area. 3
*1 Cut away either of the two portions: terminal - or terminal +3. You may cut away either portion.

■ Installing a Braking Unit Connection (CDBR-Type)

Remove the terminal cover before you connect the braking unit (CDBR-type) to the drive.
1. Remove the screws on the terminal block cover and pull the terminal block cover away from the terminal
block. Pull the wiring cover away from the drive to remove the wiring cover after removing the terminal
block cover.
A - Terminal block cover B - Wiring cover

Refer to Cutaway Section of the Wiring Cover on page 124 for more information.
Note:
• Different drive models have different wiring covers.
• Make sure that you hold the cutaway section tightly when you remove pieces of the cutaway section. Pieces of the cutaway
section can fly out and cause injury.
• When you use the recommended gauge for the electrical wires, it is not necessary to attach the wiring cover of the main
circuit power input terminal and the drive output terminal. If you use the applicable gauge for the electrical wires, you must
attach the wiring cover.

3. Put the wires through the holes that you cut out of the wiring cover.
A - Wire
Figure 3.83 Lead the Wire through the Wiring Cover

4. Crimp the closed-loop crimp terminal to the wire.
5. Remove the main circuit terminal block nut.
A - Nut

3
Figure 3.85 Connect the Wire


8. Attach the wiring cover and terminal block cover to their initial positions and tighten the screws on the
terminal block cover.

◆ Connect Braking Units in Parallel

To connect two or more braking units in parallel, refer to Figure 3.88 for wiring and connector selections.
Braking units have connectors to select master or slave. On the first braking unit, select the master side. On the
second unit and all subsequent units, select the slave side.
Figure 3.88 Connect Braking Units in Parallel
◆ Dynamic Braking Option Overload Protection

To prevent overheating the dynamic braking option, set a sequence to de-energize the drive at the trip contacts of
the thermal overload relay.

Figure 3.89 Power Supply Interrupt for Overheat Protection Example

WARNING! Fire Hazard. When you use a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact
output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor. Incorrect braking circuit protection
can cause the resistors to become too hot and cause serious injury or death.
3

3.10 Drive Wiring Protection
3.10 Drive Wiring Protection

◆ Installing a Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD)
If the drive output switches at high speeds, it causes high frequency leakage current. To prevent electrical shock
and fires caused by ground fault protection that is not sufficient, install an RCM/RCD.
Use a high frequency RCM/RCD at the power input side of the drive and make sure that each drive has a
minimum cumulative sensitivity amperage of 30 mA. The specialized breaker only detects the leakage current
from frequency bands that are dangerous to humans.
If a device does not have protection against high frequencies, high frequency leakage currents can cause the
device to malfunction. If you have a malfunction on a device that does not have protection, decrease the carrier
frequency of the drive, install a better breaker, or use an RCM/RCD with a minimum cumulative sensitivity
amperage of 200 mA for each drive.
These conditions can have an effect on leakage current:
• Drive capacity
• Carrier frequency
• Wiring distance and types of motor cables
• EMI/RFI filter
To prevent damage and injury to personnel and drives, use a high-frequency RCM/RCD that is rated for AC and
DC power supplies.
Note:
Yaskawa recommends these RCMs/RCDs, which are designed to operate with high frequencies:
• Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, NV series
• Schneider Electric, NS series
You can use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) as a replacement for an RCM/RCD that is upstream in the
power supply system.
◆ Installing a Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Residual Current Monitor/

Device (RCM/RCD)
Install a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a residual current monitor/device (RCM/RCD) for line
protection between the power supply and main circuit power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. The
MCCB or RCM/RCD gives overload protection and also prevent damage to the main circuit and the devices that
are wired to the main circuit.
Use the information in this section to select the correct MCCB or RCM/RCD and to safely connect the device.
• The capacity of the MCCB or RCM/RCD must be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current of the drive. Use an
MCCB or RCM/RCD as an alternative to overheat protection (150% for one minute at the rated output current)
to prevent drive faults.
• When you connect more than one drive or the drive and other device to an MCCB or RCM/RCD, refer to Figure
3.90, use a magnetic contactor (MC), and set a sequence that de-energizes the drive when it outputs errors.
A - Power supply B - Drive
Figure 3.90 Connect an MCCB

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Use an MCCB, RCM/RCD, or Magnetic Contactor (MC) to de-energize the drive before
you wire the main circuit terminal. If the main circuit terminal is energized during wiring, it will cause serious injury or death.

3.11 Dynamic Braking Option, Motor Protection

◆ Install an Electromagnetic Contactor (MC) at the Input Side of the Drive
You can use an MC as an alternative to a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) when:
• The protective functions of the drive have been triggered
• An emergency stop occurred, and the sequence de-energizes the drive.
If an MC on the input side of the drive (primary side) stops the drive, regenerative braking will not operate, and
the drive will coast to stop.
NOTICE: When you connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits, make sure that you
sequence them correctly. If the output motor circuit sequence is incorrect, it can cause damage to the drive.
Note:
• When machinery must not restart after recovery from a momentary power loss that occurred during run, install an MC at the input side
of the drive and set a sequence that does not automatically set the Run command to ON after recovery of power.
• When it is necessary to stop momentary power loss, for example to maintain a circuit that has momentary power loss, use a delayed-
release MC.
• Use an MC (magnetic contactor) to make sure that you can fully remove power to the drive when necessary. Wire the MC to open
when a fault output terminal is triggered.
■ Protect the Braking Resistor/Braking Resistor Unit

Use an MC on the input side (primary side) to prevent damage to the braking resistor/braking resistor unit.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. When you use a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact
output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor. Incorrect braking circuit protection
can cause the resistors to become too hot and cause serious injury or death.
◆ Installing a Thermal Overload Relay on the Drive Output

A thermal overload relay disconnects the power line to the motor during a motor overload condition to prevent
damage to the motor.
Install a thermal overload relay between the drive and motor in these conditions:
• When you operate more than one motor with one drive
• When you operate the motor directly from the power line with a power line bypass
When you operate one motor with one drive, it is not necessary to install a thermal overload relay. The drive has
electronic motor overload protection in the drive software.
Note:
• When you install a thermal overload relay, set parameter L1-01 = 0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled].
• Set up a sequence that will trip an external fault (coast to stop) for the contacts of the thermal overload relay. 3
■ General Precautions When Using Thermal Overload Relays
When you use a motor thermal overload relay on the drive output to prevent nuisance trips and overheating of the
motor at low speeds, be sure to think about these application precautions:
• Operation of a low speed motor
• When you operate more than one motor with one drive
• Length of the motor cables
• Nuisance tripping because of high drive carrier frequency
Operation of a Low Speed Motor
Usually, you use thermal overload relays on general-purpose motors (standard motors). When a drive drives a
general-purpose motor, the motor current is approximately 5% to 10% more than with a commercial power
supply. When a motor with a shaft-driven fan operates at low speeds, the cooling capacity decreases. This can
cause the motor to overheat when the load current is in the motor rated value. Enable the electronic thermal
protection in the drive when possible to prevent this problem.
The electronic thermal overload function uses the relation between the speed and heat characteristics in the
variable speed control range to simulate the cooling ability of general-purpose motors and forced-vented motors to
prevent damage to the motor.

When You Operate More than One Motor with One Drive
To disable the overload protection function of the electronic thermal protector of the drive, set L1-01 = 0 [Motor
Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled].
Note:
If you operate more than one motor from one drive, you cannot use the electronic thermal protection of the drive.
Length of the Motor Cables
If you use long motor cables with a high carrier frequency, the increased leakage current can cause nuisance
tripping of the thermal relay. To prevent this, decrease the carrier frequency or increase the tripping level of the
thermal overload relay.
Nuisance Tripping Because of High Drive Carrier Frequency
High carrier frequency PWM drives make current waveforms that can increase the temperature in overload relays.
It may be necessary to increase the trip level setting when encountering nuisance triggering of the relay.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Before you increase the detection level of the thermal relay, make sure that a secondary problem is
not the cause of the overload. Make sure that you know the local codes for electrical wiring, then adjust the electrothermal
settings. Incorrect thermal relay adjustment and incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.

3.12 Improve the Power Factor
3.12 Improve the Power Factor

◆ Connect an AC Reactor or a DC Reactor
AC reactors and DC reactors decrease surges in current and improve the power factor on the input side of the
drive.
Connect an AC reactor or a DC reactor to the input side (primary side) in these conditions:
• To decrease harmonic current or improve the power factor of the power supply
• When there is switching of phase advancing capacitor
• With a large capacity power supply transformer (600 kVA or more).
Note:
• You can use an AC reactor and DC reactor together.
• When you connect a thyristor converter (for example, a DC drive) to the same power supply system, use an AC reactor.
• The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the AC and DC reactors come in different shapes. Correctly
prepare the ends of the wiring.
• Ground the AC and DC reactors (option) on the back of the mounting base. Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control
panel.
■ Connect an AC Reactor
A - Power Supply C - AC reactor

B - MCCB D - Drive
Figure 3.91 AC Reactor Connection Example
■ Connect a DC Reactor
When you install a DC link choke, remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2. If you will not use a DC link
choke, do not remove the jumper. Refer to Figure 3.92 for an example of how to wire the DC reactor.
A - Power supply C - Drive

B - MCCB D - DC reactor
Figure 3.92 DC Reactor Connection Example

3.13 Prevent Switching Surge
3.13 Prevent Switching Surge

◆ Connect a Surge Protective Device
A surge protective device decreases the surge voltage generated when you switch an inductive load near the drive.
Inductive loads include:
• Magnetic contactors
• Electromagnetic relays
• Magnetic valves
• Solenoids
• Magnetic brakes.
Always use a surge protective device or diode with inductive loads.
Note:
Do not connect a surge protective device to the drive output side.

3.14 Decrease Noise
3.14 Decrease Noise

◆ Connect a Noise Filter to the Input Side (Primary Side)
High-speed switching makes noise in the drive output. This noise flows from the drive to the power supply, and
can have an effect on other equipment. Install a noise filter to the input side of the drive to decrease the quantity of
noise that flows to the power supply. A noise filter will also stop noise from entering the drive from the power
supply.
• Use a noise filter specially designed for drives.
• Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive.
A - Power Supply C - Drive

B - Input side (primary side) noise filter D - Other controller
Note:
The input side (primary side) noise filter model is LNFD-xx.
Figure 3.93 Example of Connecting the Noise Filter on the Input Side (Primary Side)
◆ Connect a Noise Filter to the Output Side (Secondary Side)

A noise filter on the output side of the drive decreases inductive noise and radio frequency interference.
Figure 3.94 shows an example of noise filter wiring.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors, LC/RC noise filters, or leakage breakers (RCM/RCD) to the motor
circuit. If you connect these devices to the output circuits, it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.
3
A - Power supply C - Noise filter on output side (secondary side)
B - Drive D - Motor
Figure 3.94 Example of Connecting the Noise Filter on the Output Side (Secondary Side)
Note:
Glossary
• Radio frequency interference:
Electromagnetic waves radiated from the drive and cables make noise through the full radio bandwidth that can have an effect on
nearby devices.
• Inductive noise:
The noise from electromagnetic induction can have an effect on the signal line and can cause the controller to malfunction.
■ Prevent Inductive Noise

In addition to installing a noise filter, you can also run all wiring through a grounded metal conduit to decrease
inductive noise occurring at the output side. Put the cables a minimum of 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the signal
line to prevent induced noise. Ground the cables to metal conduits.

3.14 Decrease Noise
A- Power supply E - Minimum of 30 cm (11.8 in) apart

B- Drive F - Controller
C- Shielded motor cable G - Signal line
D- Motor
Figure 3.95 Prevent Inductive Noise
■ Decrease Radio Frequency Interference

The drive, input lines, and output lines generate radio frequency interference. Use noise filters on input and output
sides and install the drive in a steel box to decrease radio frequency interference.
Note:
Keep the cable between the drive and motor as short as possible.
A- Steel box E - Noise filter

B- Power supply F - Shielded motor cable
C- Noise filter G - Motor
D- Drive
Figure 3.96 Decrease Radio Frequency Interference

3.15 Protect the Drive during Failures

◆ Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection for UL Listing
Use branch circuit protection to protect against short circuits and to maintain compliance with UL 61800-5-1.
Yaskawa recommends connecting semiconductor protection fuses on the input side for branch circuit protection.
Refer to Three-Phase 200 V Class on page 137 and Three-Phase 400 V Class on page 138 for more information
about recommended fuses.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. After the drive blows a fuse or trips an RCM/RCD, do not immediately energize the drive
or operate peripheral devices. Wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum and make sure that all indicators
are OFF. Then check the wiring and peripheral device ratings to find the cause of the problem. If you do not know the cause of
the problem, contact Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices. If you do not fix the problem before you
operate the drive or peripheral devices, it can cause serious injury or death.
• 200 V Class
Use the fuses specified in this document to prepare the drive for use on a circuit that supplies not more than
100,000 RMS and not more than 240 Vac when there is a short circuit in the power supply.
• 400 V Class
The built-in short circuit protection of the drive does not provide branch circuit protection. The user must provide
branch circuit protection as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), the Canadian Electric Code, Part I
(CEC), and local codes.
■ Three-Phase 200 V Class

Table 3.19 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection: 200 V Class (ND)
Semiconductor Protection Fuse
Maximum Applicable Motor Output Input Current Rating
Drive Model Rated Current
kW (HP) A
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann
2004 0.75 (0.75) 4.8 FWH-45B
2006 1.1 (1.5) 6.7 FWH-45B
2010 2.2 (3) 12.7 FWH-45B
FWH-50B
2012 3 (4) 17
FWH-80B *1
FWH-80B
2018 3.7 (5) 20.7
FWH-100B *1
FWH-80B
2021 5.5 (7.5) 30
FWH-100B *1
2030 7.5 (10) 40.3 FWH-125B
2042 11 (15) 52 FWH-150B

3
2056 15 (20) 78.4 FWH-200B
2070 18.5 (25) 96 FWH-225A
FWH-225A
2082 22 (30) 114
FWH-250A *1
FWH-225A
2110 30 (40) 111
FWH-250A *1
FWH-275A
2138 37 (50) 136
FWH-300A *1
FWH-275A
2169 45 (60) 164
FWH-350A *1
FWH-325A
2211 55 (75) 200
FWH-450A *1
2257 75 (100) 271 FWH-600A
2313 90 (125) 324 FWH-800A
2360 110 (150) 394 FWH-1000B
2415 - - -
*1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads.

Table 3.20 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection: 200 V Class (HD)
Maximum Applicable Motor Output Input Current Rating Semiconductor Protection Fuse
kW (HP) A Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann
2004 0.55 (0.5) 3.6 FWH-45B
2006 0.75 (1) 4.8 FWH-45B
2010 1.5 (2) 8.9 FWH-45B
FWH-50B
2012 2.2 (3) 12.7
FWH-80B *1
FWH-80B
2018 3 (4) 17
FWH-100B *1
FWH-80B
2021 3.7 (5) 20.7
FWH-100B *1
2030 5.5 (7.5) 30 FWH-125B
2042 7.5 (10) 40.3 FWH-150B
2056 11 (15) 58.2 FWH-200B
2070 15 (20) 78.4 FWH-225A
FWH-225A
2082 18.5 (25) 96
FWH-250A *1
FWH-225A
2110 22 (30) 82
FWH-250A *1
FWH-275A
2138 30 (40) 111
FWH-300A *1
FWH-275A
2169 37 (50) 136
FWH-350A *1
FWH-325A
2211 45 (60) 164
FWH-450A *1
2257 55 (75) 200 FWH-600A
2313 75 (100) 271 FWH-800A
2360 90 (125) 324 FWH-1000B
2415 110 (150) 394 FWH-1000B
■ Three-Phase 400 V Class

Maximum Applicable Motor Maximum Applicable Motor Semiconductor Protection
Output Output Input Current Rating Fuse
Drive Model
kW (HP) kW (HP) A Manufacturer: EATON/
Input Voltage < 460 V Input Voltage ≥ 460 V Bussmann
4002 0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) 2.5 FWH-50B
4004 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 4.7 FWH-50B
4005 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 6.7 FWH-50B
4007 3.0 (4) 3.0 (4) 8.9 FWH-60B
4009 4.0 (5) 3.7 (5) 11.7 FWH-60B
4012 5.5 (7.5) 5.5 (7.5) 15.8 FWH-60B
4018 7.5 (10) 7.5 (10) 21.2 FWH-80B
4023 11 (15) 11 (15) 30.6 FWH-90B
4031 15 (20) 15 (20) 41.3 FWH-150B
4038 18.5 (25) 18.5 (25) 50.5 FWH-200B
4044 22 (30) 22 (30) 59.7 FWH-200B
4060 30 (40) 30 (40) 58.3 FWH-225A
4075 37 (50) 37 (50) 71.5 FWH-250A
4089 45 (60) 45 (60) 86.5 FWH-275A


Drive Model kW (HP) kW (HP) A Manufacturer: EATON/
4103 55 (75) 55 (75) 105 FWH-275A
4140 75 (100) 75 (100) 142 FWH-300A
FWH-325A
4168 90 (125) 90 (125) 170
FWH-400A *1
4208 110 (150) 110 (150) 207 FWH-500A
4250 132 (175) 150 (200) 248 FWH-600A
4296 160 (200) 185 (250) 300 FWH-700A
4371 200 (250) 220 (300) 373 FWH-800A
4389 220 (300) 260 (350) 410 FWH-1000B
4453 250 (335) 300 (400) 465 FWH-1200B
4568 315 (400) 335 (450) 584 FWH-1200B
4675 355 (450) 370 (500) 657 FWH-1400A
4810 450 (603) 525 (700) 879 FWH-1200B
4930 500 (670) 600 (800) 922 FWH-1200B
4H11 560 (751) 675 (900) 1091 FWH-1600A
4H12 630 (845) 750 (1000) 1158 FWH-1600A
Drive Model
4002 0.55 (0.75) 0.55 (0.75) 1.9 FWH-50B
4004 1.1 (1.5) 0.75 (1) 3.5 FWH-50B
4005 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 4.7 FWH-50B
4007 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 6.7 FWH-60B
4009 3 (4) 3 (4) 8.9 FWH-60B
4012 4.0 (5) 3.7 (5) 11.7 FWH-60B
4018 5.5 (7.5) 5.5 (7.5) 15.8 FWH-80B
4023 7.5 (10) 7.5 (10) 21.2 FWH-90B
4031 11 (15) 11 (15) 30.6 FWH-150B 3

4038 15 (20) 15 (20) 41.3 FWH-200B
4044 18.5 (25) 18.5 (25) 50.5 FWH-200B
4060 22 (30) 22 (30) 43.1 FWH-225A
4075 30 (40) 30 (40) 58.3 FWH-250A
4089 37 (50) 37 (50) 71.5 FWH-275A
4103 45 (60) 45 (60) 86.5 FWH-275A
4140 55 (75) 55 (75) 105 FWH-300A
FWH-325A
4168 75 (100) 75 (100) 142
FWH-400A *1
4208 90 (125) 90 (125) 170 FWH-500A
4250 110 (150) 110 (150) 207 FWH-600A
4296 132 (175) 150 (200) 248 FWH-700A
4371 160 (200) 185 (250) 300 FWH-800A
4389 200 (250) 220 (300) 373 FWH-1000B
4453 220 (300) 260 (350) 410 FWH-1200B
4568 250 (335) 300 (400) 465 FWH-1200B


4675 315 (400) 335 (450) 584 FWH-1400A
4810 400 (536) 450 (600) 783 FWH-1200B
4930 450 (603) 525 (700) 830 FWH-1200B
4H11 500 (670) 600 (800) 976 FWH-1600A
4H12 560 (751) 675 (900) 1031 FWH-1600A
■ 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class

Table 3.23 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection: 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class
Semiconductor Protection Fuse Semiconductor Protection Fuse
Drive Model Drive Model
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann
4810 FWH-1000B 4H11 FWH-1200B
4930 FWH-1000B 4H12 FWH-1200B

3.16 Wiring Checklist

Wire the drive, examine these items, then do a test run.
Table 3.24 Power Supply Voltage
Checked No. Item to Check
1 The power supply voltage must be in the input voltage specification range of the drive.
Table 3.25 Main Circuit Wiring

1 • Put the power supply through a residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD) before it gets to the drive input. When you install an
RCM/RCD upstream in the power supply system, put the power supply through an RCM/RCD or molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
before it gets to the drive input.
• Connect an applicable RCM/RCD or MCCB.
2 Correctly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
3 Correctly wire the drive and motor together.

The motor lines and drive output terminals must align to make the correct phase order.
Note:
If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
4 Use 600 V heat-resistant indoor PVC wire for the power supply and motor lines.
Note:
Wire gauge recommendations assume use of 600 V class 2 heat-resistant indoor PVC wire.
5 Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit.

Note:
• When the wiring distance between the drive and the motor is long, use this formula for the voltage drop in the wire:
Motor rated voltage (V) × 0.02 ≥ √3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × motor rated current (A) × 10-3
• When the cable between the drive and motor is longer than 50 m (164 ft), use C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to decrease the
carrier frequency.
6 Correctly ground the drive.
7 Tighten the main circuit and grounding terminal screws of the drive to a correct tightening torque.
8 When you will operate more than one motor from one drive, set up overload protection circuits.
A - Power Supply C - oL1, oL2: Thermal overload relay
B - Drive
Note: 3
Set H1-03 = 25 [Terminal S3 Function Selection = External Fault (NC-Always-Coast)].
9 When you use a braking resistor or a braking resistor unit, install an electromagnetic contactor (MC).
Correctly install the resistor and make sure that overload protection uses the MC to shut off the power supply.
10 Make sure that you did not install phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, ELCBs, GFCIs, or RCM/RCDs on the output side of the
drive.
Table 3.26 Control Circuit Wiring

1 Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring.
2 Ground the shields of shielded wiring to terminal E (G).
3 For 3-Wire sequence, set parameters for MFDI terminals and wire control circuits.
4 Correctly install any options.
5 Examine the drive for other wiring errors.

Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
6 Tighten the control circuit terminal screws of the drive to a correct tightening torque.
7 Pick up all wire clippings.
8 Make sure that the wires on the terminal block do not touch other terminals or connections.

9 Make sure that you isolate the control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring in the control panel or in a duct.
10 Make sure that control circuit wiring is not longer than 50 m (164 ft).
11 Make sure that Safe Disable input wiring is not longer than 30 m (98 ft).

3.17 Motor Application Precautions

◆ Precautions for Existing Standard Motors
■ Low-Speed Range
When a drive operates a standard motor, it will lose more power compared to operating the motor with a
commercial power supply. In the low speed range, the temperature of the motor increases quickly because the
motor cannot decrease its temperature when the speed decreases. In these conditions, decrease the load torque of
the motor in the low-speed range. Figure 3.97 shows the permitted load characteristics for a Yaskawa standard
motor. When 100% continuous torque is necessary at low speeds, use a motor designed to operate with a drive.
A - 25% ED (or 15 min) C - 60% ED (or 40 min)

B - 40% ED (or 20 min) D - Continuous operation
Figure 3.97 Permitted Load Characteristics for a Yaskawa Standard Motors
■ Insulation Withstand Voltage

Consider motor voltage tolerance levels and motor insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V
or particularly long wiring distances. Use an insulated drive motor.
NOTICE: Use an inverter-duty motor or vector-duty motor with reinforced insulation and windings applicable for use with an AC
drive. If the motor does not have the correct insulation, it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation deterioration.
■ High-Speed Operation
If you operate a motor more than its rated speed, you can have problems with the motor bearing durability and
dynamic balance of the machine. Contact the motor or machine manufacturer.
■ Torque Characteristics 3
When you operate a motor with a drive, the torque characteristics are different than when you operate the motor
directly from line power. Make sure that you know about the load torque characteristics for your application.
■ Vibration
Vibrations could occur in the these conditions:
• Resonance with the natural frequency of machinery
Use caution if you add a variable-speed drive to applications that operate the motor from line power at a
constant speed. If resonance occurs, install shock-absorbing rubber around the base of the motor and enable the
Jump frequency control.
• The motor is not balanced
Use caution if the motor speed is more than the rated motor speed.
• Subsynchronous resonance
Subsynchronous resonance can occur with long motor shafts and in applications such as turbines, blowers, and
fans with high inertia loads.
Use Closed Loop Vector Control when these applications have subsynchronous resonance problems.

■ Audible Noise
The audible noise of the motor changes when the carrier frequency setting changes. When you use a high carrier
frequency, audible noise from the motor is equivalent to the motor noise generated when you operate from line
power. If you operate at speeds that are more than the rated rotation speed, the unwanted motor noise increases.
◆ Precaution When You Use IE3 Premium Efficiency Motors

IE3 motors have different motor characteristics from IE1 and other motors. Set the parameters as specified by the
motor characteristics. If you have a momentary power loss, and the drive detects oC [Overcurrent] or ov
[Overvoltage] during speed search after it restores power, set these parameters:
• b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] = default value × 2
• L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time] = default value × 2
• L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time] = default value × 2
◆ Precautions for PM Motors

• Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to use a non-Yaskawa PM motor.
• You cannot operate a PM motor from a commercial power supply. If you must operate from a commercial
power supply, use an induction motor.
• You cannot operate more than one PM motor from one drive. Use an induction motor and a variable-speed
control drive.
• In Open Loop Vector Control for PM motor (OLV/PM), the motor can operate in the reverse direction for 1/2
turn (electrical angle) at start up.
• The quantity of generated starting torque changes when the control method and motor type change. Verify the
starting torque, permitted load characteristics, impact load tolerance, and speed control range before you set up
the motor with the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to use a motor that does not meet
these specifications.
• In OLV/PM control, braking torque is always 125% or less when operating between 20% and 100% speed. A
braking resistor unit will not change the value. Braking torque is 50% or less when operating at 20% speed or
less.
• In OLV/PM control, the allowable load inertia moment is approximately 50 times higher than the motor inertia
moment. Use Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors for applications with a larger inertia moment.
• When you use a holding brake in OLV/PM control, release the brake before you start the motor. Failure to set
the correct timing can cause a decrease in speed. Do not use these configurations in applications with heavy
loads, for example conveyors or elevators.
• To restart a coasting motor that is rotating faster than 200 Hz in V/f Control, first use the Short Circuit Braking
function to stop the motor. A special braking resistor unit is necessary for Short Circuit Braking. Contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
To restart a coasting motor that is rotating slower than 200 Hz, use the Speed Search function.
If the motor cable is long, use Short Circuit Braking to stop the motor.
Note:
The Short Circuit Braking function uses the drive to forcefully cause a short across the motor wires to stop the motor before it has time
to coast to a stop.
• You can also use EZ Open Loop Vector Control (EZOLV) to operate synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM).
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information.
• After you replace a failed PM motor encoder, make sure that the motor can rotate and do Z Pulse Offset Tuning
or PM Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• If oC [Overcurrent], STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected], or LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] occur during
restart, try Speed Search again and use the Short Circuit Braking function when you start to adjust the motor.
◆ Precautions for Specialized Motors

■ Pole Change Motors
The rated current of pole change motors is different than standard motors. Check the maximum current of the
motor before you select a drive. Always stop the motor before you switch between the number of motor poles. If
you change the number of poles while the motor is rotating, the overvoltage from regeneration or the overcurrent
protection circuitry will make the motor coast to stop.

■ Submersible Motors
The rated current of a submersible motor is more than the rated current of a standard motor. Use a sufficiently
large motor cable that will not let voltage drop decrease the maximum torque level.
■ Explosion-Proof Motors
You must test the motor and the drive together for explosion-proof certification. You must also test existing
installations of explosion-proof motors. The drive is not designed for explosion-proof areas. Install the drive in a
safe location.
The encoder used with pressure-resistant explosion-proof motors is intrinsically safe. When wiring between the
drive and encoder, always connect through a specialized pulse coupler.
■ Geared Motors
The continuous speed range is different for different lubricating methods and manufacturers. For oil lubrication,
continuous operation in the low-speed range can cause burnout. Contact the manufacturer for more information
about applications where operating at more than the rated frequency is necessary.
■ Single-Phase Motors
Variable speed drives are not designed to operate with single-phase motors. The drive is for use with three-phase
motors only. If you use capacitors to start the motor, it can cause a high frequency current to flow to the capacitors
and can damage the capacitors. A split-phase start or a repulsion start can burn out the starter coils because the
internal centrifugal switch is not activated.
■ Motors with Brakes

If you use a drive to operate a motor that has a brake connected to the output side, low voltage levels can cause
the brake to possibly not release at start. Use a motor with a brake that has a dedicated source of power for the
brake. Connect the brake power supply to the power supply side of the drive. Motors with built-in brakes make
noise when operating at low speeds.
◆ Notes on the Power Transmission Mechanism

For power transmission machinery that uses oil to lubricate gearboxes, transmissions, or reduction gears, make
sure that you use precaution if you operate the machinery continuously at low speed. Oil does not lubricate the
system as well at low speeds. If you operate at frequencies higher than the rated frequency, it can cause problems
with the power transmission mechanism. These problems include audible noise, decreased service life, and
decreased durability.


4
Startup Procedure and Test Run
4.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................148
4.2 Keypad Components and Functions.................................................................149
4.3 LED Status Ring......................................................................................................155
4.4 Start-up Procedures ..............................................................................................157
4.5 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive...................................................161
4.6 Keypad Operation ..................................................................................................163
4.7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific Applications
(Application Presets).............................................................................................204
4.8 Auto-Tuning .............................................................................................................206
4.9 Test Run ....................................................................................................................215
4.10 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function).....................217
4.11 Test Run Checklist .................................................................................................224

4.1 Section Safety
4.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive in a lifting application, you must close
the brake if an input terminal triggers the Baseblock command to stop drive output.
If you enter the baseblock command, the motor will suddenly coast and the load will slip, which can cause
When you use the drive in a lifting application, you must also install external safety circuitry.
The drive does not have protection against accidental load drops in lifting applications. Install
electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms that are isolated from the drive circuitry.
If you do not use external safety circuitry, the drive could drop the load and cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE
Deactivate the Run command before you switch from Programming Mode to Drive Mode.
If you switch from Programming Mode to Drive Mode and there is an active Run command, the motor will
rotate and the equipment can suddenly start.

4.2 Keypad Components and Functions
Figure 4.1 Keypad

Table 4.1 Keypad Components and Functions
Symbol Name Function
Illuminates to show that the drive is operating the motor.

The LED turns OFF when the drive stops.
Flashes to show that:
• The drive is decelerating to stop.

• The drive received a Run command with a frequency reference of 0 Hz, but the drive is not set for zero speed control.
Flashes quickly to show that:
RUN LED
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals and is switching to REMOTE Mode while the drive is in LOCAL
A Mode.
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when the drive is not in Drive Mode.
• The drive received a Fast Stop command.
• The safety function shut off the drive output.
• You pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode.
• The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN
Command].
Illuminates when the drive detects a fault.

ALM LED
Flashes when the drive detects: 4
• Alarm
B
• Operation Errors
• A fault or alarm during Auto-Tuning
The light turns off during regular drive operation. There are no alarms or faults.
C microSD Card Slot The insertion point for a microSD card.
Function Keys The menu shown on the keypad sets the functions for function keys.
(F1, F2, F3) The name of each function is in the lower half of the display window.
D
Illuminated: The keypad controls the Run command (LOCAL Mode).

LO/RE LED OFF: The control circuit terminal or serial transmission device controls the Run command (REMOTE Mode).
E Note:
• LOCAL: Use the keypad to operate the drive. Use the keypad to enter Run/Stop commands and the frequency reference command.
• REMOTE: Use the control circuit terminals or serial transmission to operate the drive. Use the frequency reference source entered
in b1-01 and the Run command source selected in b1-02.

Symbol Name Function
Switches drive control for the Run command and frequency reference between the keypad (LOCAL) and an external source
(REMOTE).
Note:
LO/RE Selection Key • The LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Key continuously stays enabled after the drive stops in Drive Mode. If the application must not
F
switch from REMOTE to LOCAL because it will have a negative effect on system performance, set o2-01 = 0 [LO/RE Key
Function Selection = Disabled] to disable .
• The drive will not switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when it is receiving a Run command from an external source.
Stops drive operation.

Note:
STOP Key
G
Push to stop the motor. This will also apply when a Run command (REMOTE Mode) is active at an external Run command
source. To disable priority, set o2-02 = 0 [STOP Key Function Selection = Disabled].
Left Arrow Key • Moves the cursor to the left.

• Goes back to the previous screen.
Up Arrow Key/Down • Scrolls up or down to show the next item or the previous item.
Arrow Key • Selects parameter numbers, and increments or decrements setting values.
/
H
• Moves the cursor to the right.
Right Arrow Key (RESET)
• Continues to the next screen.
• Resets the drive to clear a fault.
ENTER Key • Enters parameter values and settings.

• Selects menu items to move between keypad displays.
• Selects each mode, parameter, and set value.
Starts the drive in LOCAL Mode.

RUN Key Starts the operation in Auto-Tuning Mode.
I Note:
Before you use the keypad to operate the motor, push on the keypad to set the drive to LOCAL Mode.
J USB Terminal For factory adjustment
K RJ-45 Connector Connects to the drive using an RJ-45 8-pin straight through UTP CAT5e extension cable or keypad connector.
Remove this cover to install or replace the clock battery.

L Clock Battery Cover Note:
You must supply the clock battery *1. It is not included with the keypad.
Shows the model number of the keypad and other information

M Note:
Nameplate • “REV” identifies the hardware and software version of the keypad.
• “FLASH” identifies the version of the flash memory.
*1 Refer to Replace the Keypad Battery on page 447 for information about the correct clock battery and the installation procedure.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If you change the control source when b1-07 = 1 [LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection =
Accept Existing RUN Command], the drive can start suddenly. Before you change the control source, remove all personnel from
the area around the drive, motor, and load. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death.
◆ LCD Display
Figure 4.2 LCD Display Indications

Table 4.2 LCD Display Indications and Meanings

Symbol Name Description
Shows the current time. Set the time on the default settings screen.
A Time display area Note:
The time display flashes when you use the data log function.
Shows direction of motor rotation.

• FWD: Shown when set to Forward run.
B Forward run/Reverse
• REV: Shown when set to Reverse run.
indication
Note:
In DriveWorksEZ operation, FWD or REV flash.
C Ready The screen will show Rdy when the drive is ready for operation or when the drive is running.
D Mode display area Shows the name of the current mode or screen.
Shows the current frequency reference source.

• KPD: keypad
Frequency reference source • AI: analog input terminal (terminals A1 to A3)
E indicator • COM: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
• OPT: option card
• RP: pulse train input terminal (terminal RP)
F Data display area Shows parameter values, monitor values, and details of the results of operations.
Function keys 1 to 3 (F1 to The function names shown in this area will change when the selected screen changes. Push one of the function keys
G
F3) to on the keypad to do the function.
◆ Indicator LEDs and Drive Status

LED Display Drive Status
Illuminated The drive is operating the motor.

Flashing • The drive received a Run command with a frequency reference of 0 Hz, but the drive is not set for zero speed
control.
• The drive received a DC Injection Braking command.
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals and is switching to REMOTE Mode while the
drive is in LOCAL Mode.
• The drive received a Run command from an external source and the drive is not in Drive Ready (READY)
condition.

RUN LED • The drive received a Fast Stop command.
• The safety function shut off the drive output.
Flashing Quickly • You pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode.
• The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard
Existing RUN Command].
• When b1-03 = 3 [Stopping Method Selection = Coast to Stop with Timer], the Run command is disabled then
enabled during the Run wait time.
• The voltage of the main circuit power supply decreased, and the 24 V power supply is supplying power only
the the drive.
OFF The motor is stopped.
Illuminated The drive detects a fault.

4
The drive detected one of the following:
• An alarm
ALM LED
• An oPE parameter setting error
Flashing
• A fault or error during Auto-Tuning
Note:
The digital characters displayed on the keypad will also flash.
OFF There are no drive faults or alarms.
LO/RE LED Illuminated The keypad controls the Run command (LOCAL Mode).
OFF The control circuit terminal or serial transmission device controls the Run command (REMOTE Mode).
■ LED Flashing Statuses

Refer to Figure 4.3 for information about the differences between flashing and “flashing quickly”.

Figure 4.3 LED Flashing Statuses
Figure 4.4 Relation between RUN indicator and Drive Operation

◆ Keypad Mode and Menu Displays

4
Figure 4.5 Keypad Functions and Display Levels

Note:
• Energize the drive with factory defaults to show the Initial Setup screen. Push [Home] to show the HOME screen.
–Select [No] from the [Show Initial Setup Screen] setting to not display the Initial Setup screen.
• Push from the Home screen to show drive monitors.
• Push to set d1-01 [Reference 1] when the Home screen shows U1-01 [Frequency Reference] in LOCAL Mode.
• The keypad will show [Rdy] when the drive is in Drive Mode. The drive is prepared to accept a Run command.
• Set b1-08 [Run Command Select in PRG Mode] to accept or reject a Run command from an external source while in Programming
Mode.
–Set b1-08 = 0 [Disregard RUN while Programming] to reject the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode
(default).
–Set b1-08 = 1 [Accept RUN while Programming] to accept the Run command from an external source while in Programming Mode.
–Set b1-08 = 2 [Allow Programming Only at Stop] to prevent changes from Drive Mode to Programming Mode while the drive is
operating.
Table 4.3 Drive Mode Screens and Functions
Mode Keypad Screen Function
Drive Mode Monitors Sets monitor items to display.
Parameters Changes parameter settings.
User Custom Parameters Shows the User Parameters.
Parameter Backup/Restore Saves parameters to the keypad as backup.
Programming Mode Modified Parameters/Fault Log Shows modified parameters and fault history.
Auto-Tuning Auto-Tunes the drive.
Initial Setup Screen Changes initial settings.
Diagnostic Tools Sets data logs and backlight.

4.3 LED Status Ring
4.3 LED Status Ring

The LED Status Ring on the drive cover shows the drive operating status.
A - ALM/ERR C - RUN
B - Ready
LED Status Description
Illuminated The drive detects a fault.
The drive detects:

• An alarm
• An oPE parameter setting error
A ALM/ERR Flashing *1
• An Auto-Tuning error
Note:
The LED will illuminate to identify a fault if the drive detects a fault and an alarm at the same time.
OFF There are no drive faults or alarms.
Illuminated The drive is operating or is prepared for operation.
Flashing *1 The drive is in STo [Safe Torque OFF] condition.
The voltage of the main circuit power supply dropped, and only the external 24 V power supply provides the power to
Flashing Quickly *1
the drive.
B Ready

• The drive detects a fault.
• There is no fault and the drive received a Run command, but the drive cannot operate. For example, in Programming
OFF
Mode or when is flashing.
Illuminated The drive is in regular operation.

Flashing *1 • The drive received a Run command with a frequency reference of 0 Hz, but the drive is not set for zero speed control.
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals and is switching to REMOTE Mode while the drive is
in LOCAL Mode.
• The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals when the drive is not in Drive Mode. 4
C RUN • The drive received a Fast Stop command.
• The safety function shuts off the drive output.
Flashing Quickly *1
• The user pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode.
• The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard
Existing RUN Command].
• The drive is set to coast-to-stop with timer (b1-03 = 3 [Stopping Method Selection = Coast to Stop with Timer]), and
the Run command is disabled then enabled during the Run wait time.
OFF The motor is stopped.
*1 Refer to Figure 4.6 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.
Figure 4.6 LED Flashing Statuses

4.3 LED Status Ring
Figure 4.7 Relation between RUN LED and Drive Operation

4.4 Start-up Procedures

This section gives the basic steps necessary to start up the drive.
Use the flowcharts in this section to find the most applicable start-up method for your application.
This section gives information about only the most basic settings.
Note:
Refer to the A1-06 section to use an Application Preset to set up the drive.
◆ Flowchart A: Connect and Run the Motor with Minimum Setting Changes
Flowchart A shows a basic start-up sequence to connect and run a motor with a minimum of setting changes.
Settings can change when the application changes.
Use the drive default parameter settings for basic applications where high precision is not necessary.

4
Figure 4.8 Basic Steps before Startup

◆ Sub-Chart A-1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure
Figure 4.9 Induction Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure

*1 When A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = AOLV], If you operate the drive at a frequency lower than n4-70 [Speed Command
Comp @ Low Freq] (default setting: 1.00 Hz), the motor can rotate at a frequency about 1/2 of n4-70. When you do a test run, set
E1-09 > 0 [Minimum Output Frequency > 0]. The recommended setting for E1-09 is 0.5 Hz.
*2 Be sure to release the holding brake before doing Inertia Tuning.
*3 In ASR Tuning, the drive will automatically tune Feed Forward control and KEB Ride-Thru 2 parameters.

◆ Sub-Chart A-2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure

Sub-Chart A-2 gives the basic steps to start up the drive for a PM motor.
Note:
1. Although Auto-Tuning will set parameters for speed control with an encoder, set F1-05 [PG 1 Rotation Selection] before starting
Auto-Tuning.
2. If you replace the encoder, do Z Pulse Offset Tuning.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set
parameters. If you do not test the system, it can cause damage to equipment or serious injury or death.

4
Figure 4.10 PM Motor Auto-Tuning and Test Run Procedure

*1 For Yaskawa PM motors (SMRA-series, SSR1-series, or SST4-series), set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection]. For PM motors from a
different manufacturer, set E5-01 = FFFF.
*2 Be sure to release the holding brake before doing Inertia Tuning.
*3 In ASR Tuning, the drive will automatically tune Feed Forward control and KEB Ride-Thru 2 parameters.

◆ Subchart A-3: EZ Open Loop Vector Control Test Run Procedure

Subchart A-3 gives the setup procedure to run a PM motor in EZ Open Loop Vector Control.
Figure 4.11 Procedure for Test Run of EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method

4.5 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive

◆ Check before Energizing the Drive
Examine the items in Table 4.4 before you energize the drive.
Table 4.4 Items to Check before Energizing the Drive
Items to Check Description
The voltage of the input power supply must be:

200 V class: three-phase 200 Vac to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz, 270 Vdc to 340 Vdc
400 V class: three-phase 380 Vac to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz, 510 Vdc to 680 Vdc
Input Power Supply Voltage
Correctly and safely wire power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3.
Correctly ground the drive and motor.
Connection between Drive Output Make sure that you connected drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to agree with motor terminals U,
Terminals and Motor Terminals V, and W without loosened screws.
Make sure that you connected the drive control circuit terminals in the correct sequence to agree with devices and switches without
Control Circuit Terminal Wiring loosened screws.
Control Circuit Terminal Status Turn OFF the inputs from all devices and switches connected to the drive control circuit terminals.
Connection between Machinery and Disengage all couplings and belts that connect the motor and machinery.
Motor
◆ Check after You Energize the Drive

Check the items in Table 4.5 after you energize the drive. The keypad display is different depending on drive
status.
Table 4.5 Display Status after You Energize the Drive
Status Display Description
• The data display area will show the Initial Setup screen or the HOME screen
• Energize the drive with factory defaults to show the Initial Setup screen. Select [No]
from the [Show Initial Setup Screen] settings to show the HOME screen without
showing the Initial Setup screen.

Initial Setup Screen
During Usual Operation or
HOME Screen
The display is different for different faults. Refer to “Troubleshooting” to remove the
cause of the fault. will illuminate.

Note:
When the Drive Detects a
Fault If the screen shows a different screen, do these steps to show the fault content again:
1. Push from the HOME screen.
2. Push (Home) from a different screen than the HOME screen.
◆ Make the Initial Settings

The keypad will show the Initial Setup screen when you energize the drive for the first time. You can set the date
and time and the keypad language. The Setup Wizard prepares the drive for operation, including setting the basic

parameters and doing Auto-Tuning. Refer to Set Parameters Using the Setup Wizard on page 189 for more
information.
Note:
If the keypad does not show the Initial Setup screen, select [Initial Setup] from the Main Menu to show the Initial Setup screen.
1. Make the initial settings for each item.
A - Language Selection C - Setup Wizard

B - Set Date/Time D - Show Initial Setup Screen
Note:
If you select [Yes] from the [Show Initial Setup Screen] setting, the keypad will show the Initial Setup screen each time the
drive is energized.
If you select [NO], the keypad will not show the Initial Setup screen each time the drive is energized, starting with the next
time.
2. Push [Home].
The display shows the HOME screen.

4.6 Keypad Operation

◆ Home Screen Display Selection
This section gives information about the content shown on the HOME screen and the functions that you can
control from the HOME screen.
■ View Monitors Shown in Home Screen

This figure shows monitor data in the data display area of the HOME screen.
• To change what the screen shows, change the setting for o1-40 [Home Screen Display Selection].
• When o1-40 = 0 [Custom Monitor], and there is more than one screen, use or to switch between
screens.

■ JOG Operation
Push to illuminate . Push and hold (JOG) to run the motor. Release (JOG) to stop the
motor.
■ Change Motor between Forward/Reverse Run

You can change the direction of motor rotation when operating the drive from the keypad. Push to illuminate
.
Push and hold (FWD/REV) to toggle the direction of motor rotation between forward and reverse. 4
■ Show the Standard Monitor
Push to show the standard monitor (Ux-xx). When you push (Home), the keypad goes back to the
home screen.
Note:
When a fault, minor fault, or an error occurs, push to show the content of the fault. Push again to show the standard monitor
(Ux-xx).
■ Change the Frequency Reference Value

1. Push to access the screen to change the frequency.
2. Push or to select the digit to change, then push or to change the value.
3. Push to keep the changes.

Note:
The HOME screen must show U1-01 [Frequency Reference] or you must set the keypad as the Run command source (REMOTE) to use
this function.
■ Show the Main Menu

Push to show the main menu. Push (Home) to go back to the HOME screen.
◆ Show the Monitor

This section shows how to show the standard monitors (Ux-xx).
1. Push (Home) to show the HOME screen.
Note:
• When the drive is in HOME Mode, the screen shows [Home] in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
• If [Home] is not shown on , push (Back) to show [Home] on .
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Monitors], then push .
4. Push or to select [Standard Monitor], then push .
5. Push or to select monitor group, then push .
6. Push or to change the monitor number to show the monitor item.

Note:
Push to go back to the previous page.

◆ Set Custom Monitors

You can select and register a maximum of 12 monitoring items to regularly show on the keypad.
This procedure shows how to set the motor speed to [Custom Monitor 1].
Note:
• The keypad will show [Home] in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active.
• If the keypad does not show [Home] on , push (Back) to show [Home] on .
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select [Custom Monitor], then push (Setup).
5. Push or to select [Custom Monitor 1], then push . 4
6. Push or to select the monitor number to register, then push .

Set the x-xx part of monitor Ux-xx. For example, to show monitor U1-05, set it to “105” as shown in this
figure.

The configuration procedure is complete.
◆ Show Custom Monitors

The procedure in this section shows how to show the registered custom monitors.
1. Push [Home] to show the HOME screen.
Note:
• If [Home] is not shown on , push [Back] to show [Home] on .
2. Push [Menu].
4. Push or to select [Custom Monitor], then push .
The keypad shows the selected monitor as shown in this figure.
• When there are a minimum of two screens, push or to switch between screens.
• If you registered only one custom monitor to [Custom Monitor 1], the screen will show only one monitor. If you
registered custom monitors only to [Custom Monitor 1] and [Custom Monitor 2], the screen will show only two
monitors.
◆ Set the Monitors to Show as a Bar Graph

The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as a bar graph.


Note:
2. Push [Menu].
4. Push or to select [Bar Graph], then push [Setup].
5. Push or to select the location to store the monitor, then push .

6. Push .

Set the x-xx part of monitor Ux-xx. For example, to show monitor U1-01 [Frequency Reference], set it to
"101" as shown in this figure.

◆ Show Monitors as Bar Graphs

The procedure in this section shows how to show a specific monitor as a bar graph. You can show a maximum of
three.
Note:
• If the screen does not show [Home] for , push (Back), and then push to show [Home].
2. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select [Display Bar Graph], then push .
The screen will show the monitors as shown in this figure.
◆ Set the Monitors to Show as Analog Gauges

The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as an analog gauge.
Note:
2. Push [Menu].

4. Push or to select [Analog Gauge], then push [Setup].
5. Push .


◆ Display Monitors as an Analog Gauge

The following explains how to display the contents selected for a monitor as an analog gauge.
4
Note:
• The keypad will [Home] in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active.
2. Push [Menu].

4. Push or to select [Analog Gauge], then push .
It will be displayed as follows.
◆ Set Monitoring Items to be Shown as a Trend Plot

You must set the items in this figure to display as a trend plot.
A - Monitor Parameter 1 (set with [Custom Monitor D - Trend Plot Time Scale
1]) E - Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum/Minimum Value
B - Monitor Parameter 2 (set with [Custom Monitor
2])
C - Trend Plot 2 Scale Maximum/Minimum Value
■ Select Monitor Items to Show as a Trend Plot

The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as a trend plot.
Note:
2. Push [Menu].

4. Push or to select [Trend Plot], then push [Setup].
5. Push or to select [Custom Monitor 1], then push .
6. Push .

8. Push or to select [Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value], then push .

9. Push or to select the specified digit, then push or to select the correct number.
• Push [Default] to set the parameters to factory defaults.

• Push [Min/Max] to move between the minimum value and maximum value.
11. Push or to select [Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value], then push .
• Push [Default] to set the parameters to factory defaults.

• Push [Min/Max] to move between the minimum value and maximum value.
14. Push [Back].

If necessary, use the same procedure to set [Custom Monitor 2].
■ Set the Time Scale for the Trend Plot Monitor

The procedure in this section shows how to set the time scale for the trend plot monitor.
Note:

2. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select [Trend Plot], then push (Setup).
5. Push or to select [Trend Plot Time Scale Setting], then push .

• Push (Default) to set the parameters to the factory default. 4

• Push (Min/Max) to move between the minimum value and maximum value.
◆ Show Monitor Items as a Trend Plot

The procedure in this section shows how to show the selected monitor data as a trend plot.


Note:
2. Push [Menu].
4. Push or to select [Trend Plot], then push .
The screen will show the monitors as shown in this figure.
Note:
Push [Hold] to switch between Pause and Restart for the monitor display. The “Hold (ENTER)” message flashes while you pause
monitoring.
◆ Change Parameter Setting Values

This example shows how to change the setting value for C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1]. Do the steps in this
procedure to set parameters for the application.
Note:
• If [Home] is not shown above the , push (Back).
2. Push (Menu).

3. Push or to select [Parameters], then push .
4. Push or to select [C Tuning], then push .
5. Push or to select [C1 Accel & Decel Time], then push .
6. Push or to select C1-01, then push .

4
• Push (Default) to set the parameter to factory default.
• Push (Min/Max) to show the minimum value or the maximum value on the display.
9. Continue to change parameters, then push (Back), (Home) to go back to the home screen
after you change all the applicable parameters.

◆ Examine User Custom Parameters

The User Custom Parameters show the parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to User Parameter
32]. This lets users to quickly access and change settings to these parameters.
Note:
The User Custom Parameters always show A1-06 [Application Selection] at the top of the list. The A2-01 to A2-32 settings change when
the A1-06 setting changes, which makes it easier to set and reference the necessary parameter settings.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [User Custom Parameters], then push .
4. Push or to show the parameter to examine.
5. To re-edit a parameter, push or , select the parameter to edit, then push .
6. Push or to select the digit, then push or to change the value.

7. When you are done changing the value, push .
The parameter setting procedure is complete.
◆ Save a Backup of Parameters

You can save a backup of the drive parameters to the keypad. The keypad can store parameter setting values for a
maximum of four drives in different storage areas. Backups of the parameter settings can save time when you set
parameters after you replace a drive. When you set up more than one drive, you can copy the parameter settings
from a drive that completed a test run to the other drives.
Note:
• Stop the motor before you back up parameters.
• The drive will not accept a Run command while it makes a backup.
• The DriveWorksEZ PC software password is necessary to back up qx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameter] and rx-xx [DWEZ Connection
Parameter]. If you enter an incorrect password, the drive detects PWEr [DWEZ Password Missmatch].

Note:
2. Push (Menu).

3. Push or to select [Parameter Backup/Restore], then push .
4
4. Push or to select the items to back up, then push .
5. Push or to select [Backup (drive → keypad)], then push .

6. Push or to select a memory location, then push .
The keypad shows “End” when the backup procedure completes successfully.
◆ Write Backed-up Parameters to the Drive

You can back up parameters on the keypad and write them to different drives.
Note:
• Always stop the drive before you start to restore the parameter backups.
• While you verify parameters, the drive will not accept Run commands.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select the item to restore, then push .
5. Push or to select [Restore (keypad → drive)], then push .

6. Push or to select the backed-up parameter data, then push .
The keypad will show the “End” message when the write process is complete.
Note:
The keypad display changes when the settings and conditions change.
A - A1-02 [Control Method Selection] settings D - Parameter backup data is not registered
B - o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] settings (2 E - Backup data does not contain the date
or 3 digits) Information
C - Presence of DriveWorksEZ parameter backup F - Backup date
◆ Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters

This procedure makes sure that the parameter setting values that you backed up in the keypad agree with the
parameter setting values in the drive.
Note:
• Always stop the drive before you start to verify the parameters.
• While you restore parameters, the drive will not accept Run commands.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select the item to verify, then push .
5. Push or to select [Verify (drive → keypad)], then push .
6. Push or to select the data to verify, then push .
The keypad shows “End” when the parameter settings backed up in the keypad agree with the parameter settings
copied to the drive.
Note:
The keypad shows vFyE [Parameters do not Match] when the parameter settings backed up in the keypad do not agree with the
parameter settings copied to the drive. Push one of the keys to return to the screen in Step 6.
◆ Delete Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad

This procedure deletes the parameters that you backed up to the keypad.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select the item to delete, then push .
5. Push or to select [Erase (backup data of keypad)], then push .
6. Push or to select the data to delete, then push .
◆ Check Modified Parameters

This procedure will show all parameters that are not at their default values. This is very useful when you replace a
drive. This lets you quickly access and re-edit changed parameters. When all parameters are at their default
values, the keypad will show “0 Parameters”.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Modified Param / Fault Log], then push .

4. Push or to select [Modified Parameters], then push .
5. Push .
6. Push or to show the parameter to examine.
7. To re-edit a parameter, push or , select the parameter to edit, then push .
The parameter revision procedure is complete.
◆ Restore Modified Parameters to Defaults

This procedure will set all parameters with changed values to their default settings.


Note:
2. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select [Modified Parameters], then push .
5. Push .

6. Push or to select the parameters to return to their default settings, then push .
7. Push (Default).

8. Push .
The modified parameters are now set to default values.
◆ Show Fault History

You can examine a maximum of 10 fault codes and dates and times that the faults occurred.
Note:
• To monitor the date and time of faults, you must first set the date and time on the keypad.
• If the keypad does not have a clock battery, you must set the date and time each time you energize the drive.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select [Fault Log], then push .
5. Push or to show the fault history you will examine.
◆ Auto-Tuning the Drive

Auto-Tuning uses motor characteristics to automatically set drive parameters.
Refer to the motor nameplate or the motor test report for the necessary information for Auto-Tuning.

Figure 4.12 Motor Nameplate (Example)

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Auto-Tuning, remove all personnel and objects from the area around the
drive, motor, and load. The drive and motor can start suddenly during Auto-Tuning and cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. During Auto-Tuning, the motor will receive high voltage when the motor is stopped. Do not
touch the motor until Auto-Tuning is complete. If you touch a motor that is energized, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning, disconnect the load from the motor. The load
can move suddenly and cause serious injury or death.
This procedure shows how to do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Auto-Tuning], then push .

4. Push .
5. Push or to select [Rotational Auto-Tuning], then push .
6. Follow the messages shown on the keypad to input the necessary Auto-Tuning data.
Example: Push or to select the specified digit, then push or to change the number.
Push to save the change and move to the next entry field.

7. Follow the messages shown on the keypad to do the next steps.
8. When the keypad shows the Auto-Tuning start screen, push .
Auto-Tuning starts.
When doing Rotational Auto-Tuning, the motor will stay stopped for approximately one minute with power
energized and then the motor will start to rotate.
9. When the keypad shows this screen after Auto-Tuning is complete for 1 or 2 minutes, push or .
The keypad will show a list of the changed parameters as the result of Auto-Tuning.
10. Push or in the parameter change confirmation screen to check the changed parameters, then
select [Auto-Tuning Successful] at the bottom of the screen and push .
To change a parameter again, push or to select the parameter to change, then push to show
the parameter setting screen.
Auto-Tuning is complete.
Note:
If the drive detects an error or you push before Auto-Tuning is complete, Auto-Tuning will stop and the keypad will show an
error code. Endx identifies that Auto-Tuning was successful with calculation errors. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-
Tuning again, or set the motor parameters manually. You can use the drive in the application if you cannot find the cause of the Endx
error. Er-xx identifies that Auto-Tuning was not successful. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again.
◆ Set the Keypad Language Display

The procedure in this section shows how to set the language shown on the keypad.


Note:
• If [Home] is not shown on , push (Back), to show [Home] on .
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Initial Settings], then push .
4. Push or to select [Language Selection], then push .
5. Push or to select the language, then push .

The procedure to set the keypad language is complete.
◆ Set the Date and Time

The procedure in this section shows how to set the date and time.
4
Note:
• Refer to Replace the Keypad Battery on page 447 for information about the battery installation procedure.
To set the drive to detect an alarm when the battery is dead or when the clock is not set, install the battery then set o4-24 = 1 [bAT
Detection selection = Enable (Alarm Detected)].
• If the keypad does not have a clock battery, you must set the date and time each time you energize the drive.

Note:

2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Initial Setup], then push .
4. Push or to select [Set Date/Time], and push .
5. Push or to select the format of date display, then push .
6. Push or to select the format of time display, then push .
7. Push or to select the Year/Month/Day, then push or to change the value.

9. Push or to select the hour or minute, then push or to change the value.
10. When you are done setting the time, push .
The procedure for setting the date and time is complete.
◆ Set Parameters Using the Setup Wizard

The Setup Wizard lets users follow simple messages on the keypad to set these basic parameters:
• Frequency Reference Source
• Input signal level
• Run command source
• Duty Rating
• Motor type
• Control Method Selection
• Maximum frequency
• Input/output settings
Note:

The Setup Wizard function will initialize all parameters before it sets the basic parameters.

Note:
2. Push [Menu].
3. Push or to select [Initial Setup], then push .

4. Push or to select [Setup Wizard], then push .
5. Push or to select [Yes], then push .

Note:
This operation will initialize all parameters.
6. Push or to select the item to set, then push .
7. For the next steps, follow the instructions shown on the keypad until the “Parameter Change Confirmation
Screen” is shown.
8. In the parameter change confirmation screen, push or to examine the changed parameter, then
select [Apply of each parameter] at the bottom of the screen and push .
Note:
To change a parameter again, push or to select the parameter to change, then push to show the parameter
setting screen.
The Setup Wizard procedure is complete.

◆ Disable the Initial Setup Screen

Do the steps in this procedure to not show the initial start-up screen when the drive is energized.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push / to select [Initial Setup], then push .
4. Push / to select [Show Initial Setup Screen], then push .

5. Push / to select [No], then push .
• [No]: The keypad will not show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized. 4
• [Yes]: The keypad will show the Initial Setup Screen when the drive is energized.
◆ Start Data Logging

The data log function saves drive status information. Monitors Ux-xx are the source of log information. The
procedure in this section shows how to start logging data.
There are two types of data log functions:
• Long-term data log: Saves data continuously over an extended time period. You can record a maximum of 10
monitors.
• Short-term data log: Saves data over a set length of time before and after the drive detects a trigger event with a
short sampling cycle. You can record a maximum of 4 monitors.
1. Make sure that a microSD card is inserted in the keypad.


Note:
• If the screen does not show [Home] for , push (Back) and then push to show [Home].
3. Push (Menu).
4. Push or to select [Diagnostic Tools], then push .
5. Push or to select [Data Logger], then push .
6. Push or to select [Yes] or [No], then push .
• [Yes]: Data logging starts.

• [No]: Data logging will not start.
If the drive was logging data when you entered the command, the keypad look like this:
• Long-term data log:
– Start time of the data log
– Elapsed time of the data log
• Short-term data log:

– Data log start time or trigger detection time
– Trigger detection count and the log processing status (Sampling or Recording)

◆ Configuring the Data Log Content

■ Set Type of Data Log
The procedure in this section shows how to set the type of data log.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select [Data Logger], then push (Setup).
4
5. Push or to select [Log Type], then push .
6. Push or to select the type of data log, then push .

The procedure to set the type of data log is complete.
■ Set the Sampling Time

The procedure in this section shows how to set the sampling time for data logging.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).
5. Push or to sselect [Trend Log Sampling Selection], then push .
6. Push or then push or to change the value.
Note:
The available sampling times are different for different data log types.

7. After you change the value, push .
The procedure to set the sampling time is complete.
■ Set the Sampling Time for a Trend Log

The procedure in this section shows how to set the sampling time for a trend log. When a trend log is set, it works
concurrently with the short-term data log to save the data before the trigger is detected.
Note:
This setting is displayed only when short-term data log is selected for the data log type.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).

5. Push or to sselect [Trend Log Sampling Selection], then push .

6. Push or to select the sampling time for the trend log, then push .
The procedure to set the sampling time for the trend log is complete.
■ Set Monitor to Log

The procedure in this section shows how to set the monitor for which to log data.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).
5. Push or to select [Log Monitor], then push .
6. Push or to select the save-destination monitor parameter, then push .

7. Push or to select the monitor number to be logged, then push .
■ Set the Trigger

The procedure in this section shows how to set the trigger for data logging.
Note:
This setting is available only when you select short-term data log as the data log type.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).

5. Push or to select [Log Trigger], then push .

6. Push or to select [Trigger Type Selection], then push .
7. Push or to select the type of trigger, then push .
Note:
There are no detection width or detection time settings for the analog trigger in the data log function. If variations in the
analog signal are a problem, select the digital trigger and use o5-16 = 66/67 [Digital Trigger Object = Comparator 1/2]. Use
H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] to H2–32 [Comparator 1 Filter Time] to set the conditions for the comparator
function.
8. Push or to select [Trigger Object], then push .
9. Push or to select the trigger target, then push .
Note:
If analog trigger is the trigger type, set the trigger target and trigger level.
10. Push or to select [Trigger Condition], then push .
11. Push or to select the trigger detections, then push .

12. Push or to select [Pre-Trigger Setting], then push .
13. Push or then push or to change the value.
14. After you change the value, push .
The procedure to set the trigger is complete.
◆ Set Backlight to Automatically Turn OFF

You can set the backlight of the keypad screen to automatically turn OFF after a set length of time since the last
key operation on the keypad. The procedure in this section shows how to turn ON and turn OFF the backlight.

Note:
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select [Backlight], then push .
5. Push or to select [ON] or [OFF], then push .
• [ON]: Backlight is always ON

• [OFF]: Backlight turns OFF after set length of time.
6. Push (Setup).
7. Push .
The procedure to set the backlight to turn OFF automatically is complete.
◆ Show Information about the Drive

The procedure in this section shows how to show the drive model, maximum applicable motor output (HD/ND),
rated output current (HD/ND), software version, and the serial number on the keypad.


Note:
2. Push [Menu].
4. Push or to select [Drive Information], then push .
The keypad will show the drive information.

A - Drive Series D - Drive software version
B - Maximum Applicable Motor Output (HD/ND) E - Serial number
C - Rated Output Current (HD/ND)
◆ Show Information about the Communication Option 4

When you install a JOHB-SMP3, Multi-protocol EtherNet option, the keypad can show information about the
option.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).

4. Push or to select [Comm. Option Information], then push .
The keypad shows the selected monitor as shown in this example figure.
Sym Name Description

bol
PROFINET protocol shows the station name. All other protocols show “JOHB-SMP3”.
Note:
A Station Name
With PROFINET, the screen shows the station name set on the PLC. If you do not set the station name, the screen shows “No Station
Name”.
B Protocol Shows the protocol set using the DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 option.
C MAC Address Shows the main MAC address of the JOHB-SMP3 option. Shows the same content as U4-76 to U4-78.
D IP Address Shows the IP (Internet Protocol) address assigned to the JOHB-SMP3 option. Shows the same content as U6-80 to U6-83. If there is no IP
address assigned to the JOHB-SMP3 option, this will show "000.000.000.000".
Shows the subnet mask assigned to the JOHB-SMP3 option. Shows the same content as U6-84 to U6-87. If there is no subnet mask assigned
E Subnet Mask to the JOHB-SMP3 option, this will show "000.000.000.000".
Shows the gateway address assigned to the JOHB-SMP3 option. Shows the same content as U6-88 to U6-91. If there is no gateway address
F Gateway Address
assigned to the JOHB-SMP3 option, this will show "000.000.000.000".
◆ Write Automatically Backed-up Parameters to the Drive

You can automatically back up parameters to the keypad connected to the drive and write those parameters to a
drive from the same drive series as specified by the settings of o3-06 [Auto Parameter Backup Selection] and o3-
07 [Auto Parameter Backup Interval].
Note:
• Set o3-06 = 1 [Auto Parameter Backup Selection = Enabled] in each drive to which you will write the parameters.
• This operation is not available when the parameters in the keypad and the parameters on the other drives are set to the same values.
1. Connect the keypad to the drive.


4

4.7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific Applications (Application Presets)
4.7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific

Applications (Application Presets)
The drive has application presets to set the necessary parameters for different applications to their best values. Use
A1-06 from [User Custom Parameters] on the Main menu to check the parameters that were automatically
changed by the application preset function.
Note:
Make sure that you set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] to initialize parameters
before you set A1-06.
This section shows the procedure to set an application preset.
Note:
2. Push (Menu).
3. Push or to select [Parameters], then push .
4. Push or to select [A Initialization Parameters], then push .
5. Push or to select [A1 Initialization], then push .
6. Push or to select A1-06, then push .

4.7 Automatic Parameter Settings Optimized for Specific Applications (Application Presets)
7. Push or to change the value, then push .
The parameter setting procedure is complete.

Note:
• For hoist applications, make sure that you do Auto-Tuning after you set A1-06.
• You cannot change the value set in A1-06. To select an application preset, first set A1-03 = 2220 to initialize parameters and then make
a selection to A1-06. If initializing all parameters will cause a problem, it is not necessary to change settings.
• When the drive changes to the A1-06 setting, it will also reset the parameters automatically registered to A2-17 to A2-32 [User
Parameters 17 to 32] when A2-33 = 1 [User Parameter Auto Selection = Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms].

4

4.8 Auto-Tuning
4.8 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning uses motor characteristics to automatically set drive parameters for vector control. Think about the
type of motor, drive control method, and the motor installation environment and select the best Auto-Tuning
method.
The keypad will show the messages with prompts to input the necessary parameter information. These prompts
are specified by the selected Auto-Tuning method and the control method setting in A1-02.
◆ Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

This section gives information about Auto-Tuning for induction motors. Auto-Tuning sets these parameters:
• Motor parameters E1-xx, E2-xx (E3-xx, E4-xx for motor 2)
• Speed feedback detection-use F1-xx (only with CLV)
Note:
Do Stationary Auto-Tuning if you cannot do Rotational Auto-Tuning. There can be large differences between the measured results and
the motor characteristics when Auto-Tuning is complete. Examine the parameters for the measured motor characteristics after you do
Stationary Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.6 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
Applicable Control Method
(A1-02 Setting)
Mode Parameter Settings Application Conditions and Benefits
V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4)
• When you can decouple the motor and load the

motor can rotate freely while Auto-Tuning.
• When operating motors that have fixed output
characteristics.
Rotational Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 0 x x x x x
• When it is necessary to use motors that have high-
precision control.
• When you cannot decouple the motor and load, but
the motor load is less than 30%.
• When you cannot decouple the motor and load, but

the motor load is more than 30%.
• When the information from the motor test report or
motor nameplate is not available.
With Stationary Auto-Tuning, the energized drive
stays stopped for approximately 1 minute. During
this time, the drive automatically measures the
Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 T1-01 = 1 - - x x x
necessary motor parameters.
• When operating the motor with a light load after
Auto-Tuning.
The drive can automatically calculate the motor
parameter settings necessary for torque control. Set
T1-12 = 1 [Test Mode Selection = Yes] to do a test
run after Auto-Tuning.
• After Auto-Tuning, the wiring distance between the

drive and motor changed by 50 m or more.
• When the wiring distance is 50 m or more in the V/f
Line-to-Line Resistance T1-01 = 2 Control mode. x x x x x
• When the motor output and drive capacity are
different.
■ Input Data for Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

To do Auto-Tuning, input data for the items in Table 4.7 that have an "x". Before starting Auto-Tuning, prepare
the motor test report or record the information on the motor nameplate as a reference.
Table 4.7 Input Data for Induction Motor Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Mode
(T1-01 Setting)
Input Data Parameter Unit
Stationary Auto-Tuning
Rotational Auto-Tuning Line-to-Line Resistance
1
(0) (2)
(1)
Motor Rated Power T1-02 kW x x x
Motor Rated Voltage T1-03 V x x -
Motor Rated Current T1-04 A x x x
Motor Base Frequency T1-05 Hz x x -
Number of Motor Poles T1-06 - x x -

4.8 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Mode
(T1-01 Setting)
Rotational Auto-Tuning Stationary Auto-Tuning Line-to-Line Resistance
1
(0) (2)
(1)
Motor Base Speed T1-07 min-1 x x -
Encoder Pulse Count (PPR) T1-08 - ○ *1 ○ *1 -
Motor No-Load Current T1-09 A - x -
Motor Rated Slip T1-10 Hz - ○ *2 -

Frequency
Motor Iron Loss T1-11 W ○ *3 - -
Test Mode Selection *4 T1-12 - - ○ *5 -
No-load voltage T1-13 V ○ *6 ○ *6 -
*1 Input this value when A1-02 = 3 [Control Method Selection = Closed Loop Vector].
*2 Shows 0 Hz as the default value. If you do not know the Motor Rated Slip Frequency, keep the setting at 0 Hz.
*3 Input this value when A1-02 = 0 or 1 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control or V/f Control w/ PG].
*4 If T1-12 = 1 [Test Mode Selection = Yes], when you run the motor in Drive Mode for the first time after Auto-Tuning, the drive will
automatically set E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] and E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current].
*5 Input this value when T1-10 [Motor Rated Slip Frequency] = 0 Hz.
*6 Set the same value to No-Load Voltage as T1-03 [Motor Rated Voltage] to get the same characteristics using Yaskawa 1000-Series
drives or other legacy models.
◆ Auto-Tuning for PM Motors

This section gives information about Auto-Tuning for PM motors. Auto-Tuning sets these parameters:
• Motor parameters E1-xx, E5-xx
• Speed feedback detection uses F1-xx (only with CLV/PM)
Table 4.8 Auto-Tuning for PM Motors
(A1-02 Setting)
OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM
(5) (6) (7)

motor nameplate is available.
Manual Entry w/ Motor Data
T2-01 = 0 • Rotational/Stationary Auto-Tuning that energizes x x x
Sheet
the motor is not done. Manually input the necessary
motor parameters.

Note:
PM Stationary Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 1 With Stationary Auto-Tuning, the energized drive x x x
stays stopped for approximately 1 minute. During
this time, the drive automatically measures the
necessary motor parameters.
PM Stationary Auto-Tuning for

• After Auto-Tuning, the wiring distance between the
drive and motor changed by 50 m (164 ft) or more. 4
T2-01 = 2 x x x
Stator Resistance • When the motor output and drive capacity are
different.
• When you do not know the encoder Z-pulse offset.

• When the encoder was replaced
• If you have compensated for the deviation from Z
Z-Pulse Offset (Pole Position) T2-01 = 3 phase (Δθ). - - x
Note:
The motor will rotate slowly while the drive
measures the encoder base position.

4.8 Auto-Tuning

(A1-02 Setting)
OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM
(5) (6) (7)

• When you can decouple the motor and load and the
Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF) T2-01 = 4 motor can rotate freely while Auto-Tuning. x x x
• The drive will automatically set the values
measured during Auto-Tuning to the motor
parameters.
• Automatically sets the control parameters that are

necessary to set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection
Method = High Frequency Injection] or n8-57 = 1
[HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled].
• Applicable to IPM motors only.
• Do Auto-Tuning with the motor connected to the
drive.
High Frequency Injection T2-01 = 5 Note: x x x
When you set n8-35 = 1 or n8-57 = 1, do High
Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning. Set the data on
the motor nameplate to the drive before you do
High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning. In High
Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning, the drive
energizes the stopped motor and automatically
adjusts the parameters.
■ Input Data for PM Motor Auto-Tuning

To do Auto-Tuning, input data for the items in Table 4.9 and Table 4.10 that have an "x". Before you start Auto-
Tuning, prepare the motor test report or record the information from the motor nameplate as a reference.
Table 4.9 Input Data for PM Motor Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Mode
(T2-01 Setting)
Input Data Parameter Unit PM Stationary Auto-

PM Stationary
Manual Entry w/ Motor Data Sheet Tuning for Stator
Auto-Tuning
(0) Resistance
(1)
(2)
Control Method A1-02 - 5, 6, 7 5 6, 7 5 6, 7 5, 6, 7

Selection
PM Motor Code Motor code of Yaskawa

Selection T2-02 - motor *1 FFFF *2 FFFF *2 - - -
PM Motor Type T2-03 - - - - x x -
PM Motor Rated Power T2-04 kW - x x x x -
PM Motor Rated Voltage T2-05 V - x x x x -
PM Motor Rated Current T2-06 A - x x x x x
PM Motor Base Frequency T2-07 Hz - x - x - -
Number of PM Motor Poles T2-08 - - x x x x -
PM Motor Base Speed T2-09 min-1 - - x - x -
PM Motor Stator Resistance T2-10 Ω/mΩ x x x - - -
PM Motor d-Axis Inductance T2-11 mH x x x - - -
PM Motor q-Axis Inductance T2-12 mH x x x - - -
Back-EMF Units Selection T2-13 - x x x - - -
Back-EMF Voltage Constant T2-14 *3 x x x - - -

(Ke)
Pull-In Current Level T2-15 % - - - x x -
Encoder Pulse Count (PPR) T2-16 - *4 - *4 - *4 -
Encoder Z-Pulse Offset for T2-17 Degrees *4 - *4 - *4 -

PM Motor
*1 Set the motor code for a Yaskawa PM motor.

*2 Set the motor code to FFFF for a PM motor from a different manufacturer.
*3 Changes when the value set in T2-13 changes.
*4 Input this value when A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = PM Closed Loop Vector Control].

4.8 Auto-Tuning
Table 4.10 Input Data for PM Motor Auto-Tuning

Auto-Tuning Mode
(T2-01 Setting)
Z-Pulse Offset (Pole Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF) High Frequency
Position) Injection
(4)
(3) (5)
Control Method
A1-02 - 7 5 6 7 5, 6, 7
Selection
PM Motor Code T2-02 - - - - - -

Selection
PM Motor Type T2-03 - - x x x -
PM Motor Rated Power T2-04 kW - x x x -
PM Motor Rated Voltage T2-05 V - x x x -
PM Motor Rated Current T2-06 A - x x x -
PM Motor Base
T2-07 Hz - x - - -
Frequency
Number of PM Motor T2-08 - - x x x -

Poles
PM Motor Base Speed T2-09 min-1 - - x x -
PM Motor Stator
T2-10 Ω/mΩ - - - - -
Resistance
PM Motor d-Axis
T2-11 mH - - - - -
Inductance
PM Motor q-Axis T2-12 mH - - - - -

Inductance
Back-EMF Units
Selection T2-13 - - - - - -
Back-EMF Voltage *1
T2-14 - - - - -
Constant (Ke)
Pull-In Current Level T2-15 % - x x x -
Encoder Pulse Count

(PPR) T2-16 - - - - x -
Encoder Z-Pulse Offset

for PM Motor T2-17 Degrees - - - - -

*1 Changes when the value set in T2-13 changes.
◆ Auto-Tuning in EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method

This section gives information about the Auto-Tuning mode for EZ Open Loop Vector Control. Auto-Tuning will
set the E9-xx parameters.
Table 4.11 EZ Tuning Mode Selection
Parameter Applicable Control Method
Mode Application Conditions and Benefits
Settings (A1-02 Setting)
• Applicable when driving an induction motor or a PM motor

EZOLV
4
Motor Parameter Setting T4-01 = 0 • Suitable for derating torque applications, for example fans and
pumps. (8)
• After Auto-Tuning, the wiring distance between the drive and

EZOLV
Line-to-Line Resistance T4-01 = 1 motor changed by 50 m or more.
(8)
• When the motor output and drive capacity are different.
■ Auto-Tuning Input Data in EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method

To do Auto-Tuning, input data for the items in Table 4.12 that have an "x". Before you start Auto-Tuning, prepare
the motor test report or record the information from the motor nameplate as a reference.
Table 4.12 Auto-Tuning Input Data in EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method
Auto-Tuning Mode
(T4-01 Setting)
Motor Parameter Line-to-Line
Setting Resistance
(0) (1)
Motor Type Selection T4-02 - x -
Motor Max Revolutions T4-03 min-1 x -

4.8 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Mode
(T4-01 Setting)
Motor Parameter Line-to-Line
Setting Resistance
(0) (1)
Motor Rated Revolutions T4-04 min-1 x -
Motor Rated Frequency T4-05 Hz x -
Motor Rated Voltage T4-06 V x -
Motor Rated Current (FLA) T4-07 A x x
PM Motor Rated Power (kW) T4-08 kW x x
Number of Motor Poles T4-09 - x -
◆ Control Tuning
To increase drive responsiveness and prevent hunting, use Auto-Tuning to automatically adjust the control-related
parameters.
These types of Auto-Tuning are available for the control system:
• Inertia Tuning
• ASR Tuning
• Deceleration Rate Tuning
• KEB Tuning
Note:
If you do Control Tuning, you cannot set H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection]. Do not do Control Tuning for applications that switch
between motor 1 and motor 2.
Table 4.13 Control Loop Tuning Selection
Applicable Control Method (A1-02 Value)
Application Conditions and AOLV/
Mode T3-00 Benefits V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
PM
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
• For Feed Forward Control

• When L2-29 = 1 [Kinetic Energy
Backup Method = Single Drive
Inertia Tuning 0 KEB Ride-Thru 2]. - - - x - - - x -
• When MFDI H1-xx = 7A [KEB
Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.C.)].
To let the set response frequency

ASR Tuning 1 (including Inertia Tuning) - - - x - - - x -
automatically adjust the ASR gain.
Deceleration To automatically adjust the

2 deceleration rate to prevent an ov x x x x x x x x x
Rate Tuning
[Overvoltage] fault.
• To automatically adjust parameter

settings to prevent an ov
[Overvoltage] fault with the KEB
KEB Tuning 3 Ride-Thru function. x x x x x x x x x
• When L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage
Suppression Select = Enabled].
Table 4.14 Input Data for Control Tuning

Auto-Tuning Mode
(T3-00 Value)
Input Data Parameters Unit
ASR (Speed
Inertia Tuning Regulator) Dec Rate Tuning KEB Tuning
(0) (2) (3)
(1)
Test Signal Frequency T3-01 Hz x x - -
Test Signal Amplitude T3-02 Rad x x - -
Motor Inertia T3-03 Kg∙m2 x x - -
System Response Frequency T3-04 Hz - x - -

4.8 Auto-Tuning
■ Inertia Tuning
Inertia Tuning uses the motor speed and torque reference to estimate the system inertia and automatically sets the
drive parameters related to the inertia ratio of the machinery and motor. Use Inertia Tuning for Feed Forward
control or when H1-xx = 7A [MFDI Function Select = KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.C.)].
Inertia tuning identifies the load inertia and optimizes the speed loop gain and feed forward gain to get a high
level of control capability. You can set the speed response without thinking about the load, which increases the
precision when synchronizing multiple drives. Since the motor can continue to operate during a power outage,
Inertia Tuning keeps the best ramp to stop deceleration curve for KEB Ride-Thru.
■ ASR Tuning
ASR Tuning estimates the motor load inertia and automatically sets the parameters. ASR Tuning also uses the
measured load inertia value to do an automatic adjustment after calculating the proportional gain of speed control
(ASR).
■ Deceleration Rate Tuning

Deceleration Rate Tuning automatically sets the deceleration rate to prevent an ov [Overvoltage] fault during
motor deceleration. Set C1-11 [Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq] first to automatically set parameters C1-02
[Deceleration Time 1] (high speed range) and C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4] (low speed range).
■ KEB Tuning
KEB Tuning automatically sets parameters used for the KEB Ride-Thru function and for the overvoltage
suppression function.
Control Tuning automatically sets the parameters in Table 4.15 to the best values.
Table 4.15 Parameters set in Control Tuning
Parameters Automatically
Inertia Tuning ASR Tuning Deceleration Rate Tuning KEB Tuning
Set
C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] - - x -
C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4] - - x *1 -
C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] - - - x *2

C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] - x - -
C5-17 [Motor Inertia] x x - -
C5-37 [Motor 2 Inertia] x x - -
C5-18 [Load Inertia Ratio] x x - -
C5-38 [Motor 2 Load Inertia

x x - -
Ratio]
L2-06 [Kinetic Energy Backup

- - - x *3
Decel Time]
L3-24 [Motor Accel Time @ x x - -

Rated Torque]
L3-25 [Load Inertia Ratio] x x - x

4
n5-02 [Motor Inertia Acceleration
x x - -
Time]
n5-03 [Feed Forward Control

x x - -
Gain]
*1 The drive automatically sets C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4] only when C1-11 [Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq] ≠ 0.
*2 When L2-29 = 0 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1], the drive will automatically adjust C1-09 [Fast
Stop Time] and will not adjust L2-06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time]. If the Fast Stop time must not change, do not do KEB
Tuning.
*3 When L2-29 = 1, 2, or 3 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2, System KEB Ride-Thru 1, or System
KEB Ride-Thru 2], the drive will automatically adjust L2-06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time].
◆ Precautions before Auto-Tuning

Examine the topics in this section before you start Auto-Tuning.
■ Prepare for Basic Auto-Tuning

• You must input data from the motor nameplate or motor test report to do Auto-Tuning. Make sure that this data
is available before you do Auto-Tuning.

4.8 Auto-Tuning
• For best performance, make sure that the drive input supply voltage is equal to or more than the motor rated
voltage.
Note:
Better performance is possible when you use a motor with a rated voltage that is less than the input supply voltage (by 20 V for 200 V
class models or by 40 V for 400 V class models). This is very important when you operate the motor at more than 90% of base speed,
where high torque precision is necessary. If the input power supply is equal to the motor rated voltage, the drive output voltage will not
be sufficient and performance will decrease.
• Push on the keypad to cancel Auto-Tuning.

• If a Safe Disable input signal is input to the drive during Auto-Tuning, Auto-Tuning measurements will not
complete successfully. If this occurs, cancel Auto-Tuning, then do it again.
• Table 4.16 shows the status of multi-function input/output terminals during Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.16 Status of Input/Output Terminals during Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning Type Mode Multi-Function Input Digital Output
Functions the same as during

Rotational Rotational Auto-Tuning Disabled
usual operation.
Keeps the status at the start of

Induction Motor Auto-Tuning Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 Disabled
Auto-Tuning.
Stationary
Line-to-Line Resistance Disabled Keeps the status at the start of
Auto-Tuning.
• PRG: 01028 and earlier:

Auto-Tuning.
Z-Pulse Offset (Pole Position) Disabled
• PRG: 01029 and later:
Rotational Functions the same as during
usual operation.

Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF) Disabled usual operation.
PM Motor Auto-Tuning
Manual Entry w/ Motor Data Keeps the status at the start of
Sheet Disabled Auto-Tuning.

Stationary PM Stationary Auto-Tuning Disabled
Auto-Tuning.
PM Stationary Auto-Tuning for Keeps the status at the start of

Disabled
Stator Resistance Auto-Tuning.
Motor Parameter Setting Disabled Keeps the status at the start of

Auto-Tuning.
EZ Tuning Stationary
Line-to-Line Resistance Disabled Auto-Tuning.

Inertia Tuning Disabled
usual operation.

ASR (Speed Regulator) Disabled
usual operation.
ASR and Inertia Tuning Rotational
Deceleration Rate Tuning Disabled Functions the same as during
usual operation.

KEB Tuning Disabled usual operation.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. Wire a sequence that will not let a multi-function output terminal open the holding brake during
Stationary Auto-Tuning. If the holding brake is open during Stationary Auto-Tuning, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning, disconnect the load from the motor. The load
can move suddenly and cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. Rotational Auto-Tuning rotates the motor at 50% or more of the motor rated frequency. Make
sure that there are no issues related to safety in the area around the drive and motor. Increased motor frequency can cause
■ Precautions before Rotational Auto-Tuning

• Before you do Rotational Auto-Tuning to prevent drive malfunction, uncouple the motor from the load. If you
do Rotational Auto-Tuning with the motor connected to a load that is more than 30% of the motor duty rating,
the drive will not correctly calculate the motor parameters and the motor can operate incorrectly.
• When the load is 30% or less of the motor duty rating, you can do Auto-Tuning with the motor connected to a
load.
• Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is released.

4.8 Auto-Tuning
• Make sure that external force from the machine will not cause the motor to rotate.
■ Precautions before Stationary Auto-Tuning

• Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is not open.
Automatically Set E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] and E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
If T1-12 = 1 [Test Mode Selection = Yes] when selecting Stationary Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set
motor parameters E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] and E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current] after Auto-Tuning is complete
when you use the motor for the first time in Drive Mode.
After Stationary Auto-Tuning is complete, use this procedures to do the operation in test mode:
1. Check the E2-02 and E2-03 values on the “Modified Parameters/Fault Log” screen or the “Parameters” screen.
2. Operate the motor in Drive Mode with these conditions:
• Make sure that you connect all wiring between the drive and motor
• Make sure that a mechanical brake on the motor shaft is not locked
• The maximum motor load must be 30% of the rated load.
• Keep a constant speed of 30% of E1-06 [Base Frequency] (default value = maximum frequency) or more
for 1 second or longer.
3. After the motor stops, check the E2-02 and E2-03 values on the “Modified Parameters/Fault Log” screen or
the “Parameters” screen again.
4. Make sure that the input data is correct.
When the settings in E2-02 and E2-03 are different than in step 1, the drive set the values automatically.
Note:
• If you cannot operate the motor with the conditions in step 2 for the first test run and if the values set in E2-02 and E2-03 are much
different than data in the official test report for the motor and the data listed in Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD on
page 637, these problems can occur:
–Motor vibrations or hunting
–Not sufficient torque
–Overcurrent
In elevator applications, there is a risk of the cage falling and causing personal injury.

Do one of these precautions to decrease the risk:
–After doing Stationary Auto-Tuning, operate the drive as specified by the conditions and procedure above.
–Set T1-12 = 0 [Test Mode Selection = No].
–Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• If you initialize the drive after completing Step 1, do the procedure beginning from Step 1 again.
• For general-purpose motors, the target value for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and the target rated current for E2-03 is 30% to 65%. Larger
capacity motors have a lower rated slip, and a smaller ratio for the no-load current rated current. Refer to Defaults by Drive Model and
Duty Rating ND/HD on page 637.
■ Precautions before Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance and Stator

Resistance Auto-Tuning 4
In V/f control, when the motor cable is 50 meters (164 feet) or longer, do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line
Resistance.
■ Precautions before Inertia Tuning and ASR Tuning

Before Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning, check these items:
• Do rotational motor parameter tuning or look at the motor test report or nameplate to enter the values manually.
• Make sure that the motor magnetic brake is released.
• Connect the motor and load.
• Make sure that the machine does not prevent reverse rotation. You cannot do Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning with
machines that prevent reverse rotation.

4.8 Auto-Tuning
• When the motor can rotate during Auto-Tuning, check for safety issues near the drive, motor, and machine.
Note:
If there are gears between the machine and motor shaft, Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning are possibly not applicable.
■ Precautions before Using Deceleration Rate Tuning and KEB Tuning

Before Deceleration Rate Tuning or KEB Tuning, check these items:
Note:
• Do not do Deceleration Rate Tuning if you use a braking resistor unit or a regenerative converter.
• Do Deceleration Rate Tuning and KEB Tuning with the load attached to the motor.
• Do not do Deceleration Rate Tuning or KEB Tuning for these applications:
In Deceleration Rate Tuning and KEB Tuning, the drive will automatically rotate the motor forward and accelerate and decelerate the
motor again and again.
–On a machine that does not let the motor rotate forward
–In applications with a small range of operation (trolleys and other such applications that can only move linearly)
–In elevator applications
–Applications where sudden acceleration and sudden deceleration are not applicable.
• To do KEB Tuning with the external main circuit capacitors connected to the drive, set L3-26 [Additional DC Bus Capacitors] then do
KEB Tuning.
• Do not do KEB Tuning or Deceleration Rate Tuning if the drive is set to use H1-xx = 16 [MFDI Function Select = Motor 2 Selection].
Failure to obey can cause an ov [Overvoltage] fault.

4.9 Test Run
4.9 Test Run

After you use the Setup Wizard to set the basic parameters and Auto-Tune the drive, the next step is to do a test
run.
WARNING! Crush Hazard. Test the system to make sure that the drive operates safely after you wire the drive and set
parameters. If you do not test the system, it can cause damage to equipment or serious injury or death.
◆ No-Load Test Run

Before connecting the motor to the machine, make sure that you check the operation status of the motor.
■ Precautions before Operation

Before rotating the motor, check these items:
• Check for safety issues near the drive, motor, and machine.
• Make sure that all emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are operating correctly.
■ Items to Check before Operation

Check these items before operation:
• Is the motor rotating in the forward direction?
• Is the motor rotating smoothly (no unusual sounds or unusual vibrations)?
• Does the motor accelerate/decelerate smoothly?
◆ Do a No-Load Test Run

Do these steps for a no-load test run:
1. Energize the drive, or push to show the HOME screen.
If [Home] is not shown on , push (Back) to show [Home] on .
2. Push to illuminate the LOCAL/REMOTE indicator.
3. Push to show d1-01 [Reference 1], and set it to 6.00 Hz.

4. Push .
The RUN indicator illuminates, and the motor runs at 6.00 Hz in the forward direction.
5. Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that the drive does not show a fault.
If the drive detects a fault, remove the cause.
A - Forward Rotation of Motor (Counter Clockwise Direction as Seen from Load Shaft) 4
6. Push to increase the frequency reference value.
Change the setting value in increments of 10 Hz if necessary and examine the response.
7. Each time you increase the setting value, use U1-03 [Output Current] to check the drive output current.
When the output current of the drive is not more than the motor rated current, the status is correct.
Ex.: 6 Hz → 20 Hz → 30 Hz → 40 Hz → 50 Hz → 60 Hz
8. Make sure that the motor rotates correctly, then push .
The RUN indicator will flash. When the motor stops, the indicator will go out.
◆ Actual-Load Test Run

Test the operation without a load, then connect the motor and machine to do a test run.
■ Precautions before Operation

Before rotating the motor, check these items:
• Check for safety issues near the drive, motor, and machine.

4.9 Test Run
• Make sure that all emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are operating correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is fully stopped.
• Connect the motor with the machine.
Make sure that there are no loose installation screws and that the motor load shafts and machine junctions are
correctly secured.
• Keep the keypad near you to push immediately if there is unusual or incorrect operation.
■ Items to Check before Operation

• Make sure that the direction of the machine operation is correct (The motor must rotate in the correct direction).
• Make sure that the motor accelerates and decelerates smoothly.
◆ Do an Actual-Load Test Run

Connect the motor and machine, then do the test run with the same procedure you used for the no-load test run.
• Make sure that U1-03 [Output Current] is not too high.
1. Energize the drive, or push (Home) to show the HOME screen.
If [Home] is not shown on , push (Back) to show [Home] on
2. Set d1-01 [Reference 1] to 6.00 Hz.
3. Push to illuminate the LOCAL/REMOTE indicator.
4. Push .
The RUN indicator illuminates, and the motor runs at 6.00 Hz in the forward direction.
5. Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction and that the drive does not show a fault.
If the drive detects a fault, remove the cause.
6. Push to increase the frequency reference value.
Change the setting value in increments of 10 Hz if necessary and examine the response.
7. Each time you increase the setting value, use U1-03 [Output Current] to check the drive output current.
When the output current of the drive is not more than the motor rated current, the status is correct.
Ex.: 6 Hz → 20 Hz → 30 Hz → 40 Hz → 50 Hz → 60 Hz
8. Make sure that the motor rotates correctly, then push .
The RUN indicator will flash. When the motor stops, the indicator will go out.
9. Change the frequency reference and direction of motor rotation, and make sure that there are no unusual
sounds or vibrations.
10. If there are hunting or oscillation errors caused by control function, adjust the settings to stop the errors.

4.10 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control Function)
4.10 Fine Tuning during Test Runs (Adjust the Control

Function)
This section gives information about the adjustment procedures to stop hunting or oscillation errors caused by the
control function during a test run. Adjust the applicable parameters as specified by your control method and drive
status.
• V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control on page 217
• Open Loop Vector Control Method on page 218
• Closed Loop Vector Control Method on page 220
• Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method on page 220
• Open Loop Vector Control for PM Motors on page 221
Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Motors on page 222
Closed Loop Vector Control Method for PM on page 223
• EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method on page 223
Note:
This section only lists frequently adjusted parameters. If you must adjust parameters that have a higher degree of precision, contact
Yaskawa.
◆ V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control

Table 4.17 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (V/f and CL-V/f)
Issue Parameter Number Possible Solutions Default Recommended Setting
• If torque is not sufficient with

heavy loads, decrease the
setting value.
• If hunting or oscillation occur
Hunting or oscillation in the n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain with light loads, increase the
middle speed range (10 Hz to 40 setting value. 1.00 0.10 - 2.00
Hz) Setting]
• If hunting occurs with a low-
inductance motor, for example
a motor with a larger frame
size or a high-frequency
motor, lower the setting value.
Hunting or oscillation in the high C4-25 [High-Speed Voltage

Adjust the setting value. 1 [Enabled] 0 [Disabled]

speed range (120 Hz or more) Compensation]
• If the volume of the motor

• The volume of the motor
excitation sound is too high. excitation sound is too high,
increase the carrier frequency.
• Hunting or oscillation in the C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
• If hunting or oscillation occur 1 (2 kHz) *1 1 to upper limit value
low speed range (10 Hz or Selection]
in the low or middle speed
lower), or in the middle speed
range (10 Hz to 40 Hz) range, decrease the carrier
frequency.
• If torque or speed response are

• Unsatisfactory motor torque slow, decrease the setting
and speed response C4-02 [Torque Compensation value. 200 ms *2 100 ms to 1000 ms
Delay Time]
• Hunting or oscillation • If hunting or oscillation occur,
increase the setting value.
• If torque is not sufficient in the

low speed range (10 Hz or
4
• Torque in the low speed range slower), increase the setting
(10 Hz or slower) is not C4-01 [Torque Compensation
sufficient. value. 1.00 0.50 - 1.50
Gain]
• Hunting or oscillation
with light loads, decrease the
setting value.
• If torque is not sufficient in the

• Torque in the low speed range low speed range (10 Hz or
(10 Hz or slower) is not • E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] slower), increase the setting • E1-08: 15.0 V *3
sufficient. • E1-10 [Minimum Output value. Default setting +/- 5 V *4
• E1-10: 9.0 V *3
• Large initial vibration at start Voltage] • If there is large initial
up. vibration at start up, decrease
the setting value
Set E2-01 [Motor Rated

In V/f control method, speed Current], E2-02 [Motor Rated
precision is unsatisfactory. C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain] Slip], and E2-03 [Motor No-Load 0.0 (no slip compensation) 0.5 - 1.5
Current], then adjust C3-01.
• C5-01 [ASR Proportional

In Closed Loop V/f control • Proportional gain = 0.10 to
Gain 1] • C5-01: 0.20
method, speed precision is Adjust C5-01, C5-02. 1.00
unsatisfactory. • C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] • C5-02: 0.200 s
*5 • Integral time = 0.100 to 2.000 s
*1 The default setting changes when the settings for C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] and o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
change.

*2 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
change.
*3 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change.
*4 Recommended settings are for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.
*5 In Closed Loop V/f Control, ASR only controls the output frequency. You cannot make a high-gain as in Closed Loop Vector control.
■ Precaution When You Use IE3 Premium Efficiency Motors

◆ Open Loop Vector Control Method

In Open Loop Vector Control, keep C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] at its default setting (1.00).
If you cannot get speed precision during regeneration in Open Loop Vector Control, set C3-04 = 1 [Slip
Compensation at Regen = Enabled Above 6 Hz].
Table 4.18 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 2 [OLV])
• To increase the speed of torque

or speed response, decrease
the setting value in 0.05-unit
n2-01 [Automatic Freq Regulator increments. 1.00 0.50 - 2.00
Gain]
• If hunting or oscillation occur,
decrease the setting value in
0.05-unit increments.
• To increase the speed of torque

or speed response, decrease
the setting value in 10 ms
• Unsatisfactory motor torque increments and examine the
and speed response response.
• Hunting or oscillation in the • If hunting or oscillation occur
mid-range speed range (10 Hz or if the load inertia is too
to 40 Hz) much, increase the setting
value in 50 ms increments and
n2-02 [Automatic Freq Regulator examine the response.
Time 1] 50 ms 50 ms to 2000 ms
Note:
Make sure that this parameter
setting is: n2-02 ≤ n2-03
[Automatic Freq Regulator
Time 2].
When you adjust n2-02, you
must also increase the C4-02
[Torque Compensation Delay
Time] value by the same ratio.


• If ov occurs, increase the

setting value in 50 ms
increments and examine the
response.
• If the response is not
sufficient, decrease the setting
examine the response.
n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator
Note: 750 ms 750 ms to 2000 ms
Time 2]
Make sure that this parameter
setting is: n2-02 [Automatic
Freq Regulator Time 1] ≤ n2-
03. When you adjust n2-03,
you must also increase the
C4-06 [Motor 2 Torque Comp
Delay Time] value by the
ov [Overvoltage] occurs when the same ratio.
drive stops accelerating, starts to
decelerate, or when there are • If ov occurs, increase the
large changes in the load. setting value in 10 ms
increments and examine the
response.
• If the response is not
sufficient, decrease the setting
C4-06 [Motor 2 Torque Comp Note: 150 ms 150 ms to 750 ms
Delay Time] Make sure that this parameter
setting is: C4-02 [Torque
Compensation Delay Time] ≤
C4-06.
When you adjust C4-06, you
must also increase the n2-03
Time 2] value by the same
ratio.

slow, decrease the setting
value in 2 ms increments.
increase the setting value in 10
ms increments.
• Unsatisfactory motor torque Note:
and speed response C4-02 [Torque Compensation Make sure that this parameter 20 ms *1 20 ms - 100 ms *1
Delay Time] setting is: C4-02 ≤ C4-06
• Hunting or oscillation
[Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay
Time].
When you adjust C4-02, you

must also increase the n2-02
Time 1] value by the same
ratio.
• If speed response is slow,

decrease the setting value in
• Speed response is slow. C3-02 [Slip Compensation Delay 10 ms increments. 200 ms *1 100 ms to 500 ms
• Speed is not stable. Time]
• If speed is not stable, increase
the value in 10 ms increments.
• If speed is too slow, increase

the setting value in 0.1 unit
increments.
Speed precision is unsatisfactory. C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain] 1.0 *2 0.5 - 1.5
• If speed is too fast, decrease
the setting value in 0.1 unit
increments. 4
• The volume of the motor • If the volume of the motor
excitation sound is too high,
excitation sound is too high. increase the carrier frequency.
C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
• Hunting or oscillation in the Selection] 1 (2 kHz) *3 0 to upper limit value
low speed range (10 Hz or the the low speed range,
lower)
decrease the carrier frequency.

slow, increase the setting
value.
• Torque in the low speed range
(10 Hz or lower) is not • If there is large initial
sufficient. • E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] vibration at start up, decrease
• E1-08: 11.0 V *2
• E1-10 [Minimum Output the setting value Default setting +/- 2 V *4
• Speed response is slow. • E1-10: 2.0 V *2
Voltage] Note:
• Large initial vibration at start
up. If you set the value too high,
the drive can output a large
torque reference although the
load is light.
*1 The default setting changes when the settings for A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
change.
*3 The default setting changes when the settings for C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] and o2-04 change.
*4 Recommended settings are for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.

■ Precaution When You Use IE3 Premium Efficiency Motors

◆ Closed Loop Vector Control Method

Table 4.19 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (CLV)
• High speed
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain • If torque or speed response are
slow, increase the setting value
1] in increments of 5.00. 20.00 10.00 - 50.00
• Low speed
• Unsatisfactory motor torque C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain decrease the setting value.
and speed response 2 (P)] *1
• Hunting or oscillation • High speed • If torque or speed response are
C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] slow, decrease the setting
• Low speed value. 0.500 s 0.300 s to 1.000 s
C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 2] • If hunting or oscillation occur,
*1 increase the setting value.

The drive cannot find ASR C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover Change the ASR proportional 0.0 Hz to maximum output
proportional gain or integral time gain and ASR integral time to 0.0 Hz
Frequency] *1 frequency
for low speed or high speed. conform to the output frequency.

value in increments of 0.010.
Hunting or oscillation C5-06 [ASR Delay Time] *1 • If the rigidity of the machine is 0.004 s 0.004 s to 0.020 s
unsatisfactory and vibration is
possible, increase the setting
value.
• If the volume of the motor

• The volume of the motor excitation sound is too high,
excitation sound is too high.
C6-02 [Carrier Frequency increase the carrier frequency.
• Hunting or oscillation in the 1 (2.0 kHz) *2 2.0 kHz to upper limit value
Selection] • If hunting or oscillation occur
low speed range (3 Hz or
lower) the the low speed range,
decrease the carrier frequency.
*1 Refer to the section on C5-xx parameters for more information about speed control (ASR).
change.
◆ Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method

Table 4.20 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (AOLV)
• Make sure that the output of

the drive and the motor are
• oS [Overspeed] occurs. T1-01 [Auto-Tuning Mode connected correctly. - 0
• Hunting or oscillation. Selection]
• Do Rotational Auto-Tuning
for a single motor.

The volume of the motor C6-02 [Carrier Frequency If the volume of the motor
excitation sound is too high, 1 (2 kHz) *1 1 to upper limit value
excitation sound is too high. Selection]
increase the carrier frequency.
• Decouple the motor and

machine and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning.
• If the motor speed is slow,
increase the value of E2-02 in
small increments Set to a value that is ±5% of the
Speed precision is unsatisfactory E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] (approximately 0.1% of the *2
current value.
default setting value).
• If the motor speed is fast,
decrease the value of E2-02 in
small increments
(approximately 0.1% of the
default setting value).

• High speed
slow, increase the setting
1] • C5-01 = 10.00
value in increments of 5.00. 10.00 - 50.00
• Low speed • C5-03 = 20.00
• Unsatisfactory motor torque C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain
2 (P)] *3 decrease the setting value.
and speed response
• Hunting or oscillation • High speed • If torque or speed response are
• Low speed value. 0.500 s 0.300 s to 1.000 s
C5-04 [ASR Proportional Gain • If hunting or oscillation occur,
2 (P)] *3 increase the setting value.
• C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover

Frequency] *4
• High speed • C5-07 = 0.0 Hz
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain • C5-01 = 10.00
The drive cannot find speed 1] Change the ASR proportional C5-07: 0.0 to maximum output
response for low speed or high gain and ASR integral time to • C5-02 = 0.500 s
C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] frequency
speed. conform to the output frequency. • C5-03 = 20.00
• Low speed
C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain • C5-04 = 0.500 s
2 (P)] *3
C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 2]

Hunting or oscillation C5-06 [ASR Delay Time] *4 • If the rigidity of the machine 0.004 s 0.004 s to 0.020 s
is unsatisfactory and vibration
is possible, increase the
setting value.
• Set E1-09 > 0.

Note:
When frequency reference
When you operate the drive at a E1-09 < 0, the drive output
• E1-09 [Minimum Output
frequency close to zero speed, the Frequency] will turn OFF. • E1-09 = 0.0 Hz • E1-09 = 0.5 Hz
motor rotates at a frequency • Decrease the setting value of
slightly higher than the frequency • n4-70 [Speed Command Comp n4-70 in 0.1 Hz increments. • n4-70 = 1.00 Hz • n4-70 = 0.50 Hz
reference. @ Low Freq]
Note:
If you set the value too low,
the motor can rotate in
reverse.
change.
*2 The default setting changes when the setting for o2-04 [Drive Model Selection] changes.
*3 Refer to the section on C5-xx parameters for more information about speed control (ASR).

*4 The best values for a no-load operation are different than the best values for actual loading operation.
◆ Open Loop Vector Control for PM Motors

Table 4.21 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 5 [OLV/PM])
• Check the settings for E1-06,

E1-04 [Base Frequency,
Maximum Output Frequency].
• Check the E5-xx and make
sure that you set all motor data
Unsatisfactory motor
performance
E1-xx parameters, E5-xx
parameters
correctly. - - 4
Note:
Do not set E5-05 [PM Motor
Resistance (ohms/phase)] to a
line-to-line resistance value.
• Do Auto-Tuning.
n8-55 [Motor to Load Inertia Adjust to align the load inertia

0 Near the load inertia ratio.
Ratio] ratio of the motor and machine.
n8-45 [Speed Feedback Detection Decrease the setting value in 0.80 -

Gain] increments of 0.05.
Unsatisfactory motor torque and
speed response Adjust the setting value.
Note:
C4-01 [Torque Compensation If you set this value too high, 0.00 1.00
Gain] it can cause
overcompensation and motor
oscillation.

n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Accel/ Increase the setting value in

Decel] increments of 5%. 50% -
Use DC Injection Braking at start.

• b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Note:
Current] • b2-02: 50% • b2-02: Adjust as necessary.
This can cause the motor to
• b2-03 [DC Inject Braking rotate in reverse for • b2-03: 0.00 s • b2-03: 0.5 s
• Oscillation when the motor Time at Start] approximately 1/8 of a turn at
starts. start.
• Motor stalls.
Increase the setting value.
Note:
n8-55 [Motor to Load Inertia When you operate a single
Ratio] motor or with a minimum 0 Near the load inertia ratio.
quantity of inertia, if you set
this value too high, it can
cause motor oscillation.
50%
Note:
There is too much current during n8-79 [Pull-in Current at When n8-79 = 0, the drive
Set n8-79 < n8-51. Decrease in increments of 5%.
deceleration. Deceleration] will apply the n8-51 setting to
the pull-in current during
deceleration.
n8-47 [Pull-in Current Comp Decrease the setting value in 5.0 s -

Filter Time] increments of 0.2 s.
n8-48 [Pull-in/Light Load Id Increase the setting value in

Current] increments of 5%. 30% -
Stalling or oscillation occurs
when you apply the load during Increase the setting value.
constant speed Note:
n8-55 [Motor to Load Inertia When you operate a single
motor or with a minimum 0 Near the load inertia ratio.
Ratio]
quantity of inertia, if you set
this value too high, it can
cause motor oscillation.
n8-45 [Speed Feedback Detection Increase the setting value in

Hunting or oscillation 0.80 -
Gain] increments of 0.05.
• Yaskawa motor
• Adjust the setting value. Set the motor code from the
• E5-09 [PM Back-EMF Vpeak
The drive detects STPo [Motor (mV/(rad/s))] • Examine the motor code on motor nameplate.
Step-Out Detected] fault when the motor nameplate or the *1 • Motor from another
the load is not too high. • E5-24 [PM Back-EMF L-L data sheet, then set correct manufacturer
Vrms (mV/rpm)]
values for E5-09 or E5-24. Set the values from the test
report.
The drive detected stalling or

STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] n8-62 [Output Voltage Limit Set to a value lower than the • 200.0 V
-
at high speed and maximum Level] actual input voltage. • 400.0 V
output voltage.
*1 The default setting changes when the settings for E5-01 [Motor Code Selection] and o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] change.
◆ Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Motors

Table 4.22 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 6 [AOLV/PM])
• High speed
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain slow, increase the setting value
1]
in increments of 5.00. 10.00 5.00 to 30.00 *1
• Low speed
2] decrease the setting value.
and speed response
• Hunting or oscillation • If torque or speed response are
• High speed
value. 0.500 s 0.300 s to 1.000 s *1
• Low speed • If hunting or oscillation occur,
The drive cannot find ASR C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover Change the ASR proportional
proportional gain or integral time gain and ASR integral time to 0.0% 0.0% to maximum rotation speed
Frequency]
If the rigidity of the machine is

Hunting or oscillation C5-06 [ASR Delay Time] possible, increase the setting 0.016 s 0.016 s to 0.035 s *1
E1-xx parameters, E5-xx Refer to the motor nameplate or

Step-out test report and set E1-xx or E5-xx - -
parameters correctly.

◆ Closed Loop Vector Control Method for PM

Table 4.23 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (CLV/PM)
• High speed
slow, increase the setting value
1]
• Low speed
and speed response
• High speed slow, decrease the setting
value. 0.500 s 0.300 to 1.000 s *1
• C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover

Frequency]
• High speed • C5-07 = 0.0 %
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain • C5-01 = 20.00
The drive cannot find speed 1] Change the ASR proportional
response for low speed or high gain and ASR integral time to • C5-02 = 0.500 s 0.0% to maximum rotation speed
speed. conform to the output frequency. • C5-03 = 20.00
• Low speed
C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain • C5-04 = 0.500 s
2]

Hunting or oscillation C5-06 [ASR Delay Time] possible, increase the setting 0.004 s 0.004 to 0.020 s *1
E1-xx parameters, E5-xx Refer to the motor nameplate or

Step-out test report and set E1-xx or E5-xx - -
parameters
correctly.
◆ EZ Open Loop Vector Control Method

Table 4.24 Parameters for Fine Tuning the Drive (A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV])
• High speed
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain slow, increase the setting value

1]
• Low speed
and speed response
• High speed
value. 0.500 s 0.300 s to 1.000 s *1
The drive cannot find ASR C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover Change the ASR proportional
proportional gain or integral time gain and ASR integral time to 0.0% 0.0% to maximum rotation speed
Frequency]

Hunting or oscillation C5-06 [ASR Delay Time]
possible, increase the setting 0.004 s 0.004 s to 0.020 s *1 4
Refer to the motor nameplate or

Step-out E9-xx parameters - -
test report and set E9-xx correctly.
Oscillation when the motor starts. n8-51 [Accel / Decel Pull-In Increase the setting value. 80% Increase in increments of 5%.
Current]
Motor stalls. L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] Increase the setting value. 200% Increase in increments of 10%.

4.11 Test Run Checklist

Examine the items in this checklist and check each item before a test run.
Checked No. Description
1 Correctly install and wire the drive as specified by this manual.
2 Energize the drive.
3 Set the voltage for the power supply in E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage].
Check the applicable items as specified by your control method.

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Correctly wire the start/stop and safety circuits before you energize the drive. If you
momentarily close a digital input terminal, it can start a drive that is programmed for 3-Wire control and cause serious injury or
death from moving equipment.
Table 4.25 V/f Control [A1-02 = 0] and Closed Loop V/f Control [A1-02 = 1]
Select the best V/f pattern for your application and motor characteristics.
4 Example: For a motor with a rated frequency of 60 Hz, set E1-03 = 1 [V/f Pattern Selection = Const Trq, 60Hz base, 60Hz max] as a standard V/
f pattern.
Table 4.26 Closed Loop V/f Control [A1-02 = 1]

5 Set F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)] correctly and make sure that encoder pulse counting direction is correct.
6 Set C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1].
Table 4.27 Open Loop Vector Control [A1-02 = 2] or Closed Loop Vector Control [A1-02 = 3]
7 Decouple motor shafts and machines.
Refer to the information on the motor nameplate and set this data correctly:
• Motor rated power (kW) to T1-02
• Motor rated voltage (V) to T1-03
8 • Motor rated current (A) to T1-04
• Motor base frequency (Hz) to T1-05
• Number of motor poles to T1-06
• Motor base speed (min-1) to T1-07
9 Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Table 4.28 Closed Loop Vector Control [A1-02 = 3]

10 Set F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)] and F1-05 [Encoder 1 Rotation Selection].
Table 4.29 PM Open Loop Vector Control [A1-02 = 5]

12 Set E5-01 through E5-24 [PM Motor Settings].
Table 4.30 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector [A1-02 = 6]

Table 4.31 PM Closed Loop Vector Control [A1-02 = 7]

17 Set F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)] and F1-05 [Encoder 1 Rotation Selection].
18 Set E5-11 [Encoder Z-Pulse Offset].

19 The keypad will show “Rdy” after starting to operate the motor.
20 To give the Run command and frequency reference from the keypad, push to set to LOCAL Mode (when in LOCAL Mode, the LO/RE
LED illuminates).
21 If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during test run, switch two of the motor cables (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
22 Set Heavy Duty or Normal Duty Mode with C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] to conform to the load condition.
23 Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] and L1-01 [Motor Overload Protection Select] correctly for motor thermal protection.
Set the drive for REMOTE Mode when the control circuit terminals supply the Run command and frequency reference (in REMOTE Mode, the
24 LO/RE LED turns OFF).
When terminal A1 is used for the frequency reference:

• Voltage input
– Set DIP Switch S1-1 on the drive to “V”.
– Set H3-01 = 0, 1 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0), -10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)].
25 – Set H3-02 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection = Frequency Reference].

• Current input
– Set DIP Switch S1-1 on the drive to “I”.
– Set H3-01 = 2, 3 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select = 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA].
– Set H3-02 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection = Frequency Reference].

• Voltage input
– Set H3-09 = 0, 1 [Terminal A2 Signal Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0), -10 to 10 V (Bipolar Reference)].

• Current input
– Set H3-09 = 2, 3 [Terminal A2 Signal Level Select = 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA].

• Voltage input
– Set DIP Switch S4 on the drive to analog input side.

– Set H3-05 = 0, 1 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0), -10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)].

• Current input
– Set DIP Switch S4 on the drive to analog input side.
– Set H3-05 = 2, 3 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select = 4 to 20 mA (Lower Limit at 4), 0 to 20 mA (Bipolar Reference)].
Make sure that the frequency reference reaches the necessary minimum and maximum values.
→ If drive operation is incorrect, make these adjustments:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage and current values, then adjust the analog input gain until the frequency reference reaches the
4
28
necessary value. (For terminal A1 input: H3-03, for terminal A2 input: H3-11, for terminal A3 input: H3-07)
Bias adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current values, then adjust the analog input bias until the frequency reference reaches the necessary
minimum value. (For terminal A1 input: H3-04, for terminal A2 input: H3-12, for terminal A3 input: H3-08)


5
Standards Compliance
This chapter gives information about how to make the machines and devices that use this
product comply with European standards and UL standards.
5.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................228

5.2 European Standards..............................................................................................230
5.3 United Kingdom Conformity Assessed Marking............................................259
5.4 UL Standards...........................................................................................................260
5.5 China RoHS Compliance ......................................................................................288
5.6 对应中国RoHS指令..................................................................................................289
5.7 Safe Disable Input ..................................................................................................290

5.1 Section Safety
5.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
If you do not ground the equipment correctly, it can cause serious injury or death if you touch the motor case.
Fire Hazard
Damage to Equipment
Fire Hazard
material.

5.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Crush Hazard
Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive.
If you do not use correct safety equipment, it can cause serious injury or death.
death.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is
outputting voltage.
Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive.
Before you connect a dynamic braking option to the drive, make sure that qualified personnel
read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual
(TOBPC72060001).
If you do not read and obey the manual or if personnel are not qualified, it can cause damage to the drive and
braking circuit.
devices.
Note:
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

5.2 European Standards
Figure 5.1 CE Mark

The CE Mark identifies that the product meets environmental and safety standards in the European Union.
Products manufactured, sold, or imported in the European Union must display the CE Mark.
European Union standards include standards for electrical appliances (Low Voltage Directive), standards for
electrical noise (EMC Directive), and standards for machinery (Machinery Directive).
This product displays the CE Mark in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive, the EMC Directive, and the
Machinery Directive.
Table 5.1 Harmonized Standards
European Directive Harmonized Standards
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

EN 61800-5-1 *1
2014/35/EU
Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

EN 61800-3 *1
2014/30/EU
• EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e (Cat.III))

Machinery Directive
• EN 62061 (SILCL3) *1
2006/42/EC
• IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3) *1
Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances (RoHS)

EN IEC 63000 *1
2011/65/EU
*1 Refer to “EU Declaration of Conformity” for the year of the Designated Standards.
The customer must display the CE Mark on the final device containing this product. Customers must verify that
the final device complies with EU standards.
Table 5.2 Other Applicable Standards
European Directive Applicable Standards
EU ErP Directive The drive meets the requirements for IE2 efficiency according to the European
2009/125/EC regulation 2019/1781.
The losses and the efficiency were measured in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 61800-9-2.
◆ CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

It has been confirmed that this product complies with the CE Low Voltage Directive by conducting a test
according to IEC/EN 61800-5-1.
The following conditions must be satisfied for machines and devices incorporating this product to comply with
the CE Low Voltage Directive.
■ Area of Use
Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in IEC/
CE 60664.
■ Guarding Against Debris

When you install IP20/UL Open type drives (models: 2xxxxB, 4xxxxB) and IP00/UL Open type drives (models:
4xxxxA), use an enclosure panel that does not let unwanted material enter the drive from above or below.
■ Electrical Installation
Refer to Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.3 for examples of drives that are wired to comply with the CE Low Voltage
Directive.

Three-Phase Drive
Figure 5.2 Wiring Diagram for CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

*1 Connect peripheral options to terminals -, +1, +2, B1, and B2.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that the polarity is correct before you send a Run command. If the
drive incorrectly detects the polarity, the drive can rotate in the direction opposite of the Run command and cause serious
injury or death.

*2 To protect the circuit, the main circuit is separate from the surface case that can touch the main circuit.
*3 The control circuit is a Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit. Use reinforced insulation to separate this circuit from other circuits. Make
sure that you connect the Safety Extra-Low Voltage as specified.
*4 Reinforced insulation separates the output terminals from other circuits. You can also connect circuits that are not Safety Extra-Low
Voltage circuits when the drive output is 250 Vac, 1 A maximum or 30 VDC, 1 A maximum.

6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives
Figure 5.3 Wiring Diagram for CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance: 6-Phase/12-Pulse Drives
*1 Use terminals - and +3 to connect options to the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that the polarity is correct before you send a Run command. If the
drive incorrectly detects the polarity, the drive can rotate in the direction opposite of the Run command and cause serious
injury or death.

*2 To protect the circuit, the main circuit is separate from the surface case that can touch the main circuit.
*3 The control circuit is a Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit. Use reinforced insulation to separate this circuit from other circuits. Make
sure that you connect the Safety Extra-Low Voltage as specified.
*4 Reinforced insulation separates the output terminals from other circuits. You can also connect circuits that are not Safety Extra-Low
Voltage circuits when the drive output is 250 Vac, 1 A maximum or 30 VDC, 1 A maximum.

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Only connect peripheral options, for example a DC reactor or braking resistor, to terminals
+1, +2, +3, -, B1, and B2. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2004 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2006 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2010 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2012 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2018 -, +1, +2 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2021 -, +1, +2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
4 - 10 1.2 - 1.5
6 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5
2030 -, +1, +2 10 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
10 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10
(2.5 - 10)
10 M4 (13.5 - 15) 5
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

2042 -, +1, +2 16 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
10 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
2056 -, +1, +2 35 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 20 M6
(25 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 20 M6
(16) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 50 5 - 5.5
2070 -, +1, +2 50 20 M6
(35 - 50) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 20 M6
(25 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 25 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 20 M6
(16 - 25) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 50 5 - 5.5
2082 -, +1, +2 50 20 M6
(35 - 50) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 16 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 35 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 27 M6
(25 - 35) (71 - 80)
16 - 35 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 27 M6
(25 - 35) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 10 - 12
2110 -, +1 50 27 M8
(25 - 50) (89 - 107)
6 - 25 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 25 21 M6
(6 - 25) (27 - 31)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 50 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
16 - 50 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 10 - 12
2138 -, +1 70 27 M8
(50 - 70) (89 - 107)
6 - 35 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 35 21 M6
(6 - 35) (27 - 31)
25 5.4 - 6.0
25 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
2169 -, -, +1, +1 *3 *4 35 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
+3 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
35 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
2211 -, -, +1, +1 *3 *4 50 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
+3 *4 70 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
50 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
2257 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 35 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
2313 -, +1 95 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P
(150 × 2P)
- M12 (310) 5
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
2360 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
2415 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4002 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4004 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4005 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4007 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4009 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4012 -, +1, +2 2.5 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.2 - 1.5

2.5 - M4
(-) (10.6 - 13.3)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5
4018 -, +1, +2 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 10 2.0 - 2.5

2.5 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6
(2.5 - 10)
10 M4 (13.5 - 15) 5
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

4023 -, +1, +2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 4 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 4) (13.5 - 15)
4 - 10 2.0 - 2.5
6 - M5
(-) (17.7 - 22.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4031 -, +1, +2 10 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 2.5 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
10 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4038 -, +1, +2 16 20 M6
(10 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 4 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
6 - 16 5.4 - 6.0
10 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 10 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 18 M5
(6 - 10) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4044 -, +1, +2 25 18 M5
(6 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 6 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 6) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 18 M5
(6 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4060 -, +1 25 18 M5
(6 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

4075 -, +1 25 18 M5
(4 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 10 1.5 - 1.7

B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 25 2.3 - 2.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 18 M5
(10 - 25) (19.8 - 22)
2.5 - 35 5 - 5.5
4089 -, +1 35 20 M6
(16 - 35) (45 - 49)
2.5 - 16 2.3 - 2.5

B1, B2 16 18 M5
(4 - 16) (19.8 - 22)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
16 - 50 8-9
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
16 - 50 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 27 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 10 - 12
4103 -, +1 50 27 M8
(50 - 70) (89 - 107)
6 - 35 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 25 21 M6
(6 - 35) (27 - 31)
16 - 25 5.4 - 6.0
16 - M6
(-) (47.8 - 53.1)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
4140 -, -, +1, +1 *3 25 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
B1, B2 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
25 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
50 - 95 12 - 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
50 - 95 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 37 M10
(95) (107 - 124)
16 - 50 8-9
4168 -, -, +1, +1 *3 35 28 M6
(50) (71 - 80)
25 - 70 8-9
B1, B2 *4 50 28 M8
(50 - 70) (71 - 80)
25 - 50 9.0 - 11
35 - M8
(-) (79.7 - 97.4)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P
(70 - 95 × 2P)
- M10 (177) 5
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4208 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 35 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
50 - 240 18 - 23
50 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4250 -, +1 70 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 50 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
70 - 240 18 - 23
70 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
25 - 95 × 2P 20
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
35 - 120 × 2P 20
4296 -, +1 95 × 2P - M10
(120 × 2P) (177)
25 - 70 × 2P 20
+3 70 × 2P - M10
(70 × 2P) (177)
95 - 240 18 - 23
95 - M10
(-) (159 - 204)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
4371 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 70 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
120 - 240 32 - 40
120 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P - M12
(150 × 2P) (310)
95 - 185 × 2P 35
4389 -, +1 120 × 2P - M12
(185 × 2P) (310)
50 - 95 × 2P 35
+3 95 × 2P - M12
(-) (310)
35 - 240 32 - 40
95 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4453 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
50 - 150 32 - 40
150 - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4568 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
60 - 150 32 - 40
95 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P - M12
(150 × 4P) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 4P - M12
(120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
95 - 185 × 4P 35
4675 -, +1 95 × 4P - M12
(185 × 4P) (310)
35 - 95 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(95 × 4P) (310)
60 - 150 32 - 40
95 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35

120 × 2P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
70 - 150 × 2P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 150 × 4P 35
4810 -, +1 150 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
+3 70 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 120 32 - 40
120 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35

120 × 2P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
95 - 150 × 2P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 150 × 4P 35
4930 -, +1 150 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P 35
+3 95 × 4P - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 120 32 - 40
120 × 2P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 4P × 2 35

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
95 × 4P × 2
(-)
- M12 (310) 5
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
4H11 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
+3 35 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 120 32 - 40
95 × 4P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)

Applicable Gauge
Wire Stripping
Model Terminal *1)
mm
mm2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 - 150 × 4P × 2 35

95 × 4P × 2 - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (-) (310)
50 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
70 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
4H12 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
35 - 150 × 4P × 2 35
+3 50 × 4P × 2 - M12
(-) (310)
95 - 120 32 - 40
95 × 4P - M12
(-) (283 - 354)
Terminal
Model Terminal
Shape
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

120 × 2P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4810 -, +1 150 × 4P 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 70 × 4P 70 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
120 × 2P 70 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

120 × 2P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 120 × 2P × 2 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4930 -, +1 150 × 4P 95 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 95 × 4P 70 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
120 × 2P 70 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

95 × 4P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4H11 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 35 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
95 × 4P 95 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)

Terminal
Model Terminal
Shape
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35

95 × 4P (×2) 95 - 150 M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (310)
35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 × 4P × 2 50 - 150 M12 (310)
35
4H12 -, +1 70 × 4P × 2 70 - 150 M12 (310)
35
+3 50 × 4P × 2 35 - 150 M12 (310)
32 - 40
95 × 4P 95 - 120 M12 (283 - 354)
Pulse drive.
■ Connect a Fuse to the Input Side (Primary Side)

The drive circuit protection must comply with IEC/EN 61800-5-1 for protection against a short circuit in the
internal circuitry. Yaskawa recommends that you install semiconductor protection fuses or ELCBs on the input
side for branch circuit protection.
Table 5.3 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection (200 V Class)
Drive Model Model Drive Model Model
2004 FWH-45B FWH-225A

2110
FWH-250A *1
2006 FWH-45B
FWH-275A
2010 FWH-45B 2138
FWH-300A *1
2012 FWH-50B FWH-275A
2169
FWH-350A *1
2018 FWH-80B
FWH-325A
2021 FWH-80B 2211
FWH-450A *1
2030 FWH-125B
2257 FWH-600A
2042 FWH-150B
2313 FWH-800A
2056 FWH-200B
2360 FWH-1000B
2070 FWH-225A
2415 FWH-1000B
FWH-225A
2082
FWH-250A *1
5
Table 5.4 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection (400 V Class)
4002 FWH-50B 4018 FWH-80B
4004 FWH-50B 4023 FWH-90B
4005 FWH-50B 4031 FWH-150B
4007 FWH-60B 4038 FWH-200B
4009 FWH-60B 4044 FWH-200B
4012 FWH-60B 4060 FWH-225A


4075 FWH-250A 4389 FWH-1000B
4089 FWH-275A 4453 FWH-1200B
4103 FWH-275A 4568 FWH-1200B
4140 FWH-300A FWH-1400A

4675
FWH-1600A *1
FWH-325A
4168
FWH-400A *1 4810 FWH-1200B
4208 FWH-500A 4930 FWH-1200B
4250 FWH-600A 4H11 FWH-1600A
4296 FWH-700A 4H12 FWH-1600A
4371 FWH-800A
Table 5.5 Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection (6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class)
4810 FWH-1000B 4H11 FWH-1200B
4930 FWH-1000B 4H12 FWH-1200B
■ CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

To comply with CE Standards, install a fuse for the DC power supply input.
Figure 5.4 shows a wiring example for a DC power supply that has two drives connected in parallel.
Figure 5.4 Wiring Example for DC Power Supply Input

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not ground the main circuit bus. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• On models 4810 to 4H12, use DC power supply input terminals +1 and - to connect a PWM converter that can do protection
coordination on the input side, for example a Yaskawa D1000-series Power Regenerative Converter. You cannot use a DC power
supply to connect drives in parallel.
• Install a fuse for each drive when operating more than one drive. If one fuse blows, replace all fuses.
• Install the external filter (system) to comply with the EMC Directive.
Refer to Table 5.6 and Table 5.7 for the recommended fuses.
Table 5.6 Recommended Fuse (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Fuse Fuse
Drive Model Manufacturer: Bussmann Drive Model Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model Qty Model Qty
2004 FWH-45B 2 2018 FWH-80B 2
2006 FWH-45B 2 2021 FWH-80B 2
2010 FWH-45B 2 2030 FWH-125B 2
2012 FWH-50B 2 2042 FWH-150B 2

Fuse Fuse
Model Qty Model Qty
2056 FWH-200B 2 FWH-450A

2211 2
FWH-600A *1
2070 FWH-250A 2
FWH-600A
FWH-250A 2257 2
2082 2 FWH-700A *1
FWH-300A *1
FWH-800A
FWH-250A 2313 2
2110 2 FWH-1000B *1
FWH-275A *1
2360 FWH-1000B 2
FWH-300A
2138 2
FWH-350A *1 2415 FWH-1000B 2
FWH-350A
2169 2
FWH-450A *1

Fuse Fuse
Model Qty Model Qty
4002 FWH-50B 2 FWH-500A

4208 2
FWH-600A *1
4004 FWH-50B 2
FWH-600A
4005 FWH-50B 2 4250 2
FWH-700A *1
4007 FWH-60B 2 FWH-700A
4296 2
FWH-800A *1
4009 FWH-60B 2
FWH-800A
4012 FWH-60B 2 4371 2
FWH-1000B *1
4018 FWH-80B 2
FWH-1000B
4389 2
4023 FWH-90B 2 FWH-1200B *1
4031 FWH-150B 2 FWH-1200B

4453 2
FWH-1400A *1
4038 FWH-200B 2
FWH-1200B
4568 2
4044 FWH-200B 2 FWH-1600A *1
4060 FWH-225A 2 4675 FWH-1600A 2
4075 FWH-250A 2 4810 - *2 -
4089 FWH-275A 2 - *2
4930 -
4103 FWH-275A 2 4H11 - *2 -
FWH-300A 4H12 - *2 -
4140 2
FWH-325A *1
FWH-400A
4168 2
FWH-450A *1
*2 It is not necessary to install fuses. On models 4810 to 4H12, use DC power supply input terminals +1 and - to connect a PWM 5
converter that can do protection coordination on the input side, for example a Yaskawa D1000-series Power Regenerative Converter.
■ Braking Unit Connection Wire Gauge (CDBR-Type)

When you connect a braking unit (CDBR-type) to drive models 2257 to 2415 or 4208 to 4H12, refer to Table 5.8
and Table 5.9 to select the wires.


Drive Model Drive Terminals
(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-2022D +3 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P
(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P
2257
+3 35 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 35 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35
(× 1)
Specified Wire Gauge - 35 35
2313
+3 50 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 50 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35
2360 (× 1)
CDBR-2110D +3 35 35
2415 (× 1)
*1 This is the applicable wire gauge when you do not use a Yaskawa braking unit (CDBR-type).
*2 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use the same wires for terminal - and terminal +3.
(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-4045D +3 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P
(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 6 × 2P 6 - 10 × 2P
4208
+3 35 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 35 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
(× 1)
4250
+3 50 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 50 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
(× 1)
4296
+3 70 × 2P 25 - 70 × 2P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 2P *2 25 - 70 × 2P *2
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
4371 (× 1)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
4389 (× 1)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
(× 1)
4453
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2
CDBR-4220D +3 35 35
(× 1)
4568
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P
Applicable Gauge
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2


(Qty) (mm2) (mm2)
CDBR-4220D +3 35 × 2P 35 × 2P
(× 2)
Specified Wire Gauge - 35 × 2P 35 × 2P
4675
+3 70 × 4P 35 - 95 × 4P
Applicable Gauge *1
- 70 × 4P *2 35 - 95 × 4P *2
*1 This is the applicable wire gauge when you do not use a Yaskawa braking unit (CDBR-type).
*2 This is the applicable wire gauge when you use the same wires for terminal - and terminal +3.
◆ Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

Drives with built-in EMC filters (models 2xxxB, 2xxxC, 4xxxB, 4xxxC) were tested in accordance with European
standard EN 61800-3, and comply with the EMC Directive.
Use drives with built-in EMC filters or install external EMC filters to the drive input side to comply with the
EMC Directive. Refer to Installing the External EMC Noise Filter on page 254 for the installation of the EMC
filter.
■ Install a Drive to Conform to the EMC Directive

Install drive models 2xxxB, 2xxxC, 4xxxB, and 4xxxC with this procedure to comply with the EMC Directive
when the drive is a single unit or installed in a larger device.
1. Install the drive on a grounded metal plate.
2. Wire the drive and motor.
3. Ground the wire shielding on the drive side and motor side.
A - Drive D - Metal conduit
B - 10 m (32.8 ft) maximum E - Grounding wire
C - Motor
Figure 5.5 Wiring the Drive and Motor
Note:
• Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit.
• The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m (32.8 ft). Keep the wire as short as possible.
• Keep the grounding wire as short as possible.
4. Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate. 5
Note:
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications and local safety standards.
A - Braided shield cable C - Cable clamp (conductive)

B - Metal plate
Figure 5.6 Ground the Shield

A - Grounding surface (Remove any paint or F- Motor

sealant.) G- Motor cable
B - Enclosure panel H- Cable clamp
C - Metal plate I- Grounding wire
D - Drive
E - Shielded wire
Figure 5.7 Install a Drive with a Built-in EMC Filter

5. To maintain compliance with IEC/EN 61000-3-2 on drive models 2004, 4002, and 4004, install an AC
reactor or a DC reactor. Refer to DC Reactor on page 258 to select a DC reactor.
Note:
• Ground the DC reactor (option) on the back of the mounting base. Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control
panel.
Ground Wiring

Enable the Internal EMC Filter

On drive models 2xxxB, 2xxxC, 4xxxB, and 4xxxC, move the screw or screws to turn ON and OFF (enable and
disable) the EMC filter.
Make sure that the symmetric grounding network is applied, and install the screw or screws in the ON position to
enable the built-in EMC filter in compliance with the EMC Directive. The EMC filter switch screw or screws are
installed in the OFF position by default.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive, wait for the time specified on the warning label, and
check the drive for dangerous voltages before you remove covers or touch EMC filter screws. If you touch the screws when
there are dangerous voltages, it will cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Connect the ground cable correctly. If you touch electrical equipment that is not grounded,
it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: To disable the internal EMC filter, move the screws from ON to OFF and then tighten to the specified torque. If you
fully remove the screws or tighten the screws to an incorrect torque, it can cause drive failure.
NOTICE: Move the EMC switch screw or screws to the OFF position for networks that are not symmetrically grounded. If the
screws are not in the correct position, it can cause damage to the drive.
Figure 5.8 Symmetric Grounding

NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you use the drive with a non-grounding, high-resistance grounding, or asymmetric-
grounding network, put the EMC Filter screw or screws in the OFF position to disable the built-in EMC filter. If you do not disable
the built-in EMC filter, it will cause damage to the drive.
Table 5.10 shows asymmetric grounding networks.
Table 5.10 Asymmetric Grounding
Type of Grounding Diagram
Grounded at the corner of the delta connection
Grounded at the middle of the side
Single-phase, grounded at the end point
Three-phase variable transformer without solidly grounded neutral

Table 5.11 EMC Filter Switch Location

Model Switch Location Diagram
2004B - 2042B, 4002B - 4023B

Figure 5.9
2004C - 2042C, 4002C - 4023C
2056B, 4031B, 4038B

Figure 5.10
2056C, 4031C, 4038C
2070B, 2082B, 4044B, 4060B

Figure 5.11
2070C, 2082C, 4044C, 4060C
2110B, 4075B, 2138B - 2211B, 4089B - 4168B

Figure 5.12
2110C, 4075C, 2138C - 2211C, 4089C - 4168C
2257B - 2313B, 4208B - 4296B

Figure 5.13
2257C - 2313C, 4208C - 4296C
2360B, 2415B, 4371B, 4389B

Figure 5.14
2360C, 2415C, 4371C, 4389C
4453B - 4675B
Figure 5.15
4453C - 4675C
A - SW (ON) B - Screw (OFF)
Figure 5.9 EMC Filter Switch Location 1



If you lose an EMC filter switch screw, use Table 5.12 to find the correct replacement screw and install the new
screw with the correct tightening torque.
NOTICE: Only use the screws specified in this manual. If you use screws that are not approved, it can cause damage to the
drive.
Table 5.12 Screw Sizes and Tightening Torques
Tightening Torque
Model Screw Size
N∙m
2004 - 2082, 4002 - 4060 M4 × 20 1.0 - 1.3
2110 - 2211, 4075 - 4168 M4 × 25 1.0 - 1.3
2257 - 2415, 4208 - 4675 M5 × 25 2.0 - 2.5
■ Installing the External EMC Noise Filter

Drive models 2xxxA and 4xxxA must meet conditions in this section to comply with EN 61800-3.
Connect an EMC noise filter that complies with European standards as specified by Yaskawa to the input side
(primary side). Refer to External EMC Noise Filter Selection on page 257 to select the correct EMC noise filter.
Use this procedure to install an EMC noise filter to make equipment and devices added to the drive comply with
the EMC Directive.
1. Install the drive and EMC noise filter on the same grounded metal plate.
2. Wire the drive and motor.

3. Ground the wire shielding on the drive side and motor side.
A - Drive D - Metal conduit

B - 10 m (32.8 ft) maximum E - Grounding wire
C - Motor
Figure 5.16 Wiring the Drive and Motor

Note:
• Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit.
• The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m (32.8 ft). Keep the wire as short as possible.
• Keep the grounding wire as short as possible.
4. Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate.
Note:
Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications and local safety standards.
A - Braided shield cable C - Cable clamp (conductive)

B - Metal plate
Figure 5.17 Ground the Shield

A - Grounding surface (Remove any paint or F - Motor

sealant.) G - Motor cable (Braided shield cable: 10 m (32.8 ft)
B - Enclosure panel maximum)
C - Metal plate H - Cable clamp
D - Drive I - Grounding wire
E - Ground the shield. J - EMC noise filter
Figure 5.18 EMC Noise Filter and Drive Installation Procedure
5. To maintain compliance with IEC/EN 61000-3-2 on drive models 2004, 4002, and 4004, install an AC
reactor or a DC reactor. Refer to DC Reactor on page 258 to select a DC reactor.
Note:
• Ground the DC reactor (option) on the back of the mounting base. Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control
panel.
Ground Wiring

External EMC Noise Filter Selection

Table 5.13 External EMC Noise Filter (2xxxA)
Model EMC Noise Filter Model Qty Manufacturer
2004A RTEN-5006 1 TDK
2006A RTEN-5010 1 TDK
2010A RTEN-5020 1 TDK
2012A RTEN-5020 1 TDK
2018A RTEN-5030 1 TDK
2021A RTEN-5030 1 TDK
2030A RTEN-5060 1 TDK
2042A RTEN-5060 1 TDK
2056A RTEN-5080 1 TDK
2070A FS5972-100-35 1 Schaffner
2082A FS5972-100-35 1 Schaffner
2110A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
2138A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
2169A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
2211A FS5972-250-37 1 Schaffner
2257A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
2313A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
2360A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
2415A FS5972-600-99 1 Schaffner
Table 5.14 External EMC Noise Filter (4xxxA)

4002A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK
4004A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK
4005A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK
4007A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK
4009A B84143A0020R106 1 TDK
4012A B84143A0020R106 1 TDK
4018A B84143A0035R106 1 TDK
4023A B84143A0035R106 1 TDK
4031A B84143A0050R106 1 TDK
4038A B84143A0065R106 1 TDK
4044A B84143A0065R106 1 TDK

5
4060A B84143A0065R106 1 TDK
4075A B84143A0080R106 1 TDK
4089A FS5972-100-35 1 Schaffner
4103A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
4140A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
4168A FS5972-170-40 1 Schaffner
4208A FS5972-250-37 1 Schaffner
4250A FS5972-250-37 1 Schaffner
4296A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
4371A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
4389A FS5972-410-99 1 Schaffner
4453A FS5972-600-99 1 Schaffner

4568A FS5972-600-99 1 Schaffner
4675A FS5972-410-99 2 Schaffner
4810A FS5972-600-99 2 Schaffner
4930A FS5972-600-99 2 Schaffner
4H11A FS5972-800-99 2 Schaffner
4H12A FS5972-800-99 2 Schaffner
■ DC Reactor
To comply with IEC/EN 61000-3-2, install a DC reactor to drive models 2004, 2006, 4002, and 4004 when using
an internal or external EMC filter. Refer to Table 5.15 to select the correct DC reactor.
Table 5.15 DC Reactors for Harmonic Suppression (Manufacturer: Yaskawa Electric)
Drive Model DC Reactor Model DC Reactor Rating
2004 UZDA-B 5.4 A, 8 mH
2006 UZDA-B 5.4 A, 8 mH
4002 UZDA-B 3.2 A, 28 mH
4004 UZDA-B 3.2 A, 28 mH

5.3 United Kingdom Conformity Assessed Marking
5.3 United Kingdom Conformity Assessed Marking
Figure 5.19 United Kingdom Conformity Assessed Marking

The UKCA Mark identifies that the product meets environmental and safety standards in the United Kingdom.
Products manufactured, sold, or imported into Great Britain must display the UKCA Mark.
United Kingdom standards include the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations (Low voltage) for electronics
manufacturers, the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (EMC) for controlling noise, and the Supply of
Machinery (Safety) Regulations (Machinery) for machine manufacturers.
This product displays the UKCA Mark in accordance with the Low Voltage Directive, the EMC Directive, and the
Machinery Directive.
Table 5.16 Designated Standards
Statutory Instruments Designated Standards
Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations EN 61800-5-1 *1

S.I. 2016 No. 1101
Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations EN 61800-3 *1

S.I. 2016 No. 1091
Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e (Cat.III))

S.I. 2008 No. 1597 EN 62061 (SILCL3) *1
EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3) *1
Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic EN IEC 63000 *1
Equipment Regulations
S.I. 2012 No. 3032
*1 Refer to “UK Declaration of Conformity” for the year of the Designated Standards.
The customer must display the UKCA Mark on the final device containing this product. Customers must verify
that the final device complies with UK standards.
Table 5.17 Other Applicable Standards
Statutory Instruments Applicable Standards
Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products and Energy Information Regulations The drive meets the requirements for IEC2 efficiency according to the S.I. 2021 No.
S.I. 2021 No. 745 745.
The losses and the efficiency were determined in accordance with IEC 61800-9-2.

5.4 UL Standards
5.4 UL Standards
Figure 5.20 UL/cUL Mark

The UL/cUL Mark identifies that this product conforms to rigid safety standards. This mark appears on products
in the United States and Canada. It shows UL approval, which identifies that the product complies with safety
standards after careful inspection and assessment. You must use UL Listed or UL Recognized parts for all primary
components that are built into electrical equipment that has UL approval.
This product has been tested in accordance with UL standard UL 61800-5-1, and has been verified to be in
compliance with UL standards.
Machines and devices integrated with this product must satisfy the following conditions for compliance with UL
standards:
◆ Area of Use
Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in UL
61800-5-1.
■ Ambient Temperature Setting

Maintain the ambient temperature within the following ranges according to the enclosure type.
• IP00/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
• IP20/UL Open Type: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
• IP20/UL Type 1: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
• IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; front side: -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
• IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; back side: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
◆ Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block

Wire the main circuit terminal block correctly as specified by the instructions in the manual.
To comply with UL standards on drive models 2257 to 2415 and 4208 to 4H12, use UL Listed closed-loop crimp
terminals. Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer to crimp the closed-loop crimp terminal. Refer
to Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals on page 273 for more information about UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals.
To select the correct wire gauge, refer to Three-Phase 200 V Class on page 263 and Three-Phase 400 V Class on
page 267.

drive performance.
the product manual.

5.4 UL Standards
terminal screws.


A - Cable clamp
5

5.4 UL Standards

TSD-M 3NM
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
Wire Gauge ≤
25 mm2 Wire Gauge ≤
(AWG 10):
TSD-M 3NM 25 mm2
(AWG 10): N/A
(1.2 - 3 N∙m
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
Wire Gauge ≥
30 mm2 (AWG 8):
4.1 - 4.5 N∙m
(AWG 8): N/A
(36.3 - 39.8 lbf∙in) *2
*3
5 - 9 N∙m
*3
M6
3 - 3.5 N∙m
*3
8 - 12 N∙m
*3
12 - 14 N∙m
*3

Refer to Three-Phase 200 V Class on page 263 and Three-Phase 400 V Class on page 267 for the recommended
wire gauges and tightening torques of the main circuit terminals.
Comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where you will use the drive.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Only connect peripheral options, for example a DC reactor or braking resistor, to terminals
+1, +2, +3, -, B1, and B2. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• For drive models 2257 to 2415 and 4208 to 4H12, use UL-approved closed-loop crimp terminals on the drive main circuit terminals.
Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer and make sure that the terminals are correctly connected.
• The metric wire gauge values are provided as reference information from equivalent AWG sizes and not exactly the same sizes as the
AWG/kcmil values. Obey local safety regulations for wire sizes and make sure that the ferrule or crimp terminals are correct for your
size.

5.4 UL Standards
IP20 Applicable
Applicable Gauge Wire Stripping Tightening
Recomm. Gauge Gauge *1) Terminal Screw
Model Terminal AWG, kcmil Length *2 Torque
AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Size and Shape
(mm2) mm N∙m (lbf∙in)
(mm2)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2004 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2006 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2010 -, +1, +2 12 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 12 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2012 -, +1, +2 10 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
5
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2018 -, +1, +2 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)

5.4 UL Standards
Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicable

Gauge *1) Wire Stripping Tightening
Recomm. Gauge Length *2 Terminal Screw Torque
Model Terminal AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil
AWG, kcmil Size and Shape
(mm2)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2021 -, +1, +2 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
12 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(4.0 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2030 -, +1, +2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 12 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 8 2.0 - 2.5
8 - - M5
(6.0 - 10) (17.7 - 22.1)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
2042 -, +1, +2 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 8 2.0 - 2.5
8 - - M5
(6.0 - 10) (17.7 - 22.1)
14 - 3 8-3 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (10 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 1 8-1 5 - 5.5
2056 -, +1, +2 1 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (10 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
8-6 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(10 - 16) (47.8 - 53.1)
14 - 1 6-1 5 - 5.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (16 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 3 6-3 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 20 M6
(2.5 - 25) (16 - 25) (45 - 49)
14 - 1/0 14 - 1/0 5 - 5.5

2070 -, +1, +2 1/0 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (2.5 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
14 - 1/0 6 - 1/0 5 - 5.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (16 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 2 6-2 5 - 5.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 20 M6
(2.5 - 35) (16 - 35) (45 - 49)
14 - 2/0 14 - 2/0 5 - 5.5

2082 -, +1, +2 2/0 20 M6
(2.5 - 70) (2.5 - 70) (45 - 49)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
6 - 1/0 6 - 1/0 8-9

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 27 M6
(16 - 50) (16 - 50) (71 - 80)
6 - 1/0 6 - 1/0 8-9

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 27 M6
(16 - 50) (16 - 50) (71 - 80)
2 - 2/0 2 - 2/0 10 - 12
2110 -, +1 2/0 27 M8
(35 - 70) (35 - 70) (89 - 107)
14 - 4 10 - 4 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 4 21 M6
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (27 - 31)
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
6 - 2/0 2 - 2/0 8-9

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 27 M6
(16 - 70) (35 - 70) (71 - 80)
6 - 2/0 2 - 2/0 8-9

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 27 M6
(16 - 70) (35 - 70) (71 - 80)
2 - 4/0 2 - 4/0 10 - 12
2138 -, +1 4/0 27 M8
(35 - 95) (35 - 95) (89 - 107)
14 - 3 10 - 3 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 3 21 M6
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (27 - 31)
4 5.4 - 6.0
4 - - M6
(25) (47.8 - 53.1)
2 - 250 2/0 - 250 12 - 14

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 37 M10
(35 - 120) (70 - 120) (107 - 124)
2 - 300 3/0 - 300 12 - 14

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 37 M10
(35 - 150) (95 - 150) (107 - 124)
6 - 2/0 1/0 - 2/0 8-9
2169 -, -, +1, +1 *4 *5 1 28 M6
(16 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 2/0 1 - 2/0 8-9

+3 *5 1/0 28 M8
(25 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 1/0 9.0 - 11
4 - - M8
(25 - 50) (79.7 - 97.4)
2 - 250 2/0 - 250 12 - 14

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250
(35 - 120) (70 - 120)
37 M10 (107 - 124) 5
2 - 300 3/0 - 300 12 - 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 37 M10
(35 - 150) (95 - 150) (107 - 124)
6 - 2/0 1/0 - 2/0 8-9

2211 -, -, +1, +1 *4 *5 2/0 28 M6
(16 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 2/0 1 - 2/0 8-9

+3 *5 2/0 28 M8
(25 - 70) (35 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 1/0 9.0 - 11
4 - - M8
(25 - 50) (79.7 - 97.4)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
2 - 250 × 2P 4/0 - 250 × 2P 20

2257 -, +1 4/0 × 2P - M10
(35 - 120 × 2P) (95 × 2P) (177)
4 - 1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P 20
+3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 50 × 2P) (50 × 2P) (177)
3 - 350 18 - 23
3 - - M10
(25 - 185) (159 - 204)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
2 - 250 × 2P 4/0 - 250 × 2P 20

2313 -, +1 250 × 2P - M10
(35 - 120 × 2P) (95 × 2P) (177)
4 - 1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P 20
+3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 50 × 2P) (50 × 2P) (177)
2 - 350 18 - 23
2 - - M10
(35 - 150) (159 - 204)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 250 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
4/0 - 400 × 2P 300 - 400 × 2P 35

2360 -, +1 350 × 2P - M12
(95 - 185 × 2P) (150 - 185 × 2P) (310)
1/0 - 4/0 × 2P 35
+3 3/0 × 2P - - M12
(50 - 95 × 2P) (310)
1 - 350 32 - 40
1 - - M12
(50 - 150) (283 - 354)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
4/0 - 400 × 2P 300 - 400 × 2P 35

2415 -, +1 350 × 2P - M12
(95 - 185 × 2P) (150 - 185 × 2P) (310)
1/0 - 4/0 × 2P 35
+3 3/0 × 2P - - M12
(50 - 95 × 2P) (310)
1 - 350 32 - 40
1 - - M12
(50 - 150) (283 - 354)
*3 When you use AWG 8 or larger wires to comply with UL standards, tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 4.1 N∙m to 4.5 N∙m
(36 lbf∙in to 40 lbf∙in).

5.4 UL Standards
IP20 Applicable
Applicable Gauge Wire Stripping Tightening
Recomm. Gauge Gauge *1) Terminal Screw
Model Terminal AWG, kcmil Length *2 Torque
AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil Size and Shape
(mm2)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4002 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
12 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4004 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
12 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4005 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4007 -, +1, +2 14 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
5
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4009 -, +1, +2 12 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 12 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4012 -, +1, +2 10 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 1.2 - 1.5
10 - - M4
(2.5 - 10) (10.6 - 13.3)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4018 -, +1, +2 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 14 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 8 2.0 - 2.5
10 - - M5
(2.5 - 10) (17.7 - 22.1)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
14 - 3 14 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4023 -, +1, +2 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (2.5 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 10 14 - 10 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 12 10 M4
(2.5 - 6.0) (2.5 - 6.0) (13.5 - 15)
12 - 8 2.0 - 2.5
10 - - M5
(4.0 - 10) (17.7 - 22.1)
14 - 3 8-3 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (10 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 1 8-1 5 - 5.5
4031 -, +1, +2 6 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (10 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 6 5.4 - 6.0
8 - - M6
(6.0 - 16) (47.8 - 53.1)
14 - 3 8-3 2.3 - 2.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (10 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 1 8-1 5 - 5.5
4038 -, +1, +2 4 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (10 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 10 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
10 - 6 5.4 - 6.0
6 - - M6
(6.0 - 16) (47.8 - 53.1)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 6 10 - 6 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (6.0 - 16) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 3 10 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4044 -, +1, +2 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
8-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(10 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 4 10 - 4 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 3 10 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
4060 -, +1 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 8 14 - 8 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 8 10 M4
(2.5 - 10) (2.5 - 10) (13.5 - 15)
8-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(10 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
14 - 3 12 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (4.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 3 12 - 3 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3 18 M5
(2.5 - 25) (4.0 - 25) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 2 10 - 2 2.3 - 2.5
4075 -, +1 2 18 M5
(2.5 - 35) (6.0 - 35) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 6 14 - 6 1.5 - 1.7
B1, B2 6 10 M4
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (13.5 - 15)
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

6 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
14 - 2 10 - 2 2.3 - 2.5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 18 M5
(2.5 - 35) (6.0 - 35) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 2 10 - 2 2.3 - 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 18 M5
(2.5 - 35) (6.0 - 35) (19.8 - 22) *3
14 - 1/0 6 - 1/0 5 - 5.5
4089 -, +1 1/0 20 M6
(2.5 - 50) (16 - 50) (45 - 49)
14 - 6 14 - 6 2.3 - 2.5
B1, B2 6 18 M5
(2.5 - 16) (2.5 - 16) (19.8 - 22) *3
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

4 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)
6 - 2/0 2 - 2/0 8-9

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0
(16 - 70) (35 - 70)
27 M6 (71 - 80) 5
6 - 2/0 2 - 2/0 8-9
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1 27 M6
(16 - 70) (35 - 70) (71 - 80)
2 - 4/0 2 - 4/0 10 - 12
4103 -, +1 2/0 27 M8
(35 - 95) (35 - 95) (89 - 107)
14 - 3 10 - 3 3 - 3.5
B1, B2 3 21 M6
(2.5 - 25) (6.0 - 25) (27 - 31)
6-4 5.4 - 6.0

4 - - M6
(16 - 25) (47.8 - 53.1)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
2 - 250 2/0 - 250 12 - 14

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 37 M10
(35 - 120) (70 - 120) (107 - 124)
2 - 300 3/0 - 300 12 - 14

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 37 M10
(35 - 150) (95 - 150) (107 - 124)
6 - 2/0 1/0 - 2/0 8-9

4140 -, -, +1, +1 *4 2 28 M6
(16 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 2/0 1 - 2/0 8-9

B1, B2 *5 1 28 M8
(25 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 1/0 9.0 - 11
4 - - M8
(25 - 50) (79.7 - 97.4)
2 - 250 2/0 - 250 12 - 14

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 37 M10
(35 - 120) (70 - 120) (107 - 124)
2 - 300 3/0 - 300 12 - 14

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 37 M10
(35 - 150) (95 - 150) (107 - 124)
6 - 2/0 1/0 - 2/0 8-9

4168 -, -, +1, +1 *4 1/0 28 M6
(16 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 2/0 1 - 2/0 8-9

B1, B2 *5 1/0 28 M8
(25 - 70) (50 - 70) (71 - 80)
4 - 1/0 9.0 - 11
4 - - M8
(25 - 50) (79.7 - 97.4)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
2 - 250 × 2P 4/0 - 250 × 2P 20

4208 -, +1 3/0 × 2P - M10
(35 - 120 × 2P) (95 × 2P) (177)
4 - 1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P 20
+3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 50 × 2P) (50 × 2P) (177)
4 - 350 18 - 23
4 - - M10
(25 - 150) (159 - 204)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
2 - 250 × 2P 4/0 - 250 × 2P 20

4250 -, +1 3/0 × 2P - M10
(35 - 120 × 2P) (95 × 2P) (177)
4 - 1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P 20
+3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 50 × 2P) (50 × 2P) (177)
2 - 350 18 - 23
2 - - M10
(35 - 150) (159 - 204)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
3 - 4/0 × 2P 2/0 - 4/0 × 2P 20

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 95 × 2P) (70 - 95 × 2P) (177)
2 - 250 × 2P 4/0 - 250 × 2P 20

4296 -, +1 4/0 × 2P - M10
(35 - 120 × 2P) (95 × 2P) (177)
4 - 1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P 20
+3 1/0 × 2P - M10
(25 - 50 × 2P) (50 × 2P) (177)
2 - 350 18 - 23
2 - - M10
(35 - 185) (159 - 204)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 250 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
4/0 - 400 × 2P 300 - 400 × 2P 35

4371 -, +1 350 × 2P - M12
(95 - 185 × 2P) (150 - 185 × 2P) (310)
1 - 4/0 × 2P 35
+3 3/0 × 2P - - M12
(50 - 95 × 2P) (310)
1 - 350 32 - 40
1 - - M12
(50 - 185) (283 - 354)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 2P 250 - 300 × 2P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 2P - M12
(70 - 150 × 2P) (120 - 150 × 2P) (310)
4/0 - 400 × 2P 300 - 400 × 2P 35

4389 -, +1 400 × 2P - M12
(95 - 185 × 2P) (150 - 185 × 2P) (310)
1 - 4/0 × 2P 35
+3 4/0 × 2P - - M12
(50 - 95 × 2P) (310)
1 - 350 32 - 40
1 - - M12
(35 - 185) (283 - 354)
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 4P - M12
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 4P - M12
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
3/0 - 400 × 4P 300 - 400 × 4P 35

4453 -, +1 4/0 × 4P - M12
(95 - 185 × 4P) (150 - 185 × 4P) (310)
2 - 4/0 × 4P 4/0 × 4P 35
+3 3/0 × 4P - M12
(35 - 95 × 4P) (95 × 4P) (310)
1/0 - 300 32 - 40
1/0 - - M12
(50 - 150) (283 - 354)
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 250 × 4P - M12
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 4P - M12
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
3/0 - 400 × 4P 300 - 400 × 4P 35
4568 -, +1 300 × 4P - M12
(95 - 185 × 4P) (150 - 185 × 4P) (310)
2 - 4/0 × 4P 4/0 × 4P 35
+3 3/0 × 4P - M12
(35 - 95 × 4P) (95 × 4P) (310)
2/0 - 300 32 - 40
2/0 - - M12
(70 - 150) (283 - 354)
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 300 × 4P
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P)
- M12 (310) 5
2/0 - 300 × 4P 250 - 300 × 4P 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 4P - M12
(70 - 150 × 4P) (120 - 150 × 4P) (310)
3/0 - 400 × 4P 300 - 400 × 4P 35

4675 -, +1 400 × 4P - M12
(95 - 185 × 4P) (150 - 185 × 4P) (310)
2 - 4/0 × 4P 4/0 × 4P 35
+3 4/0 × 4P - M12
(35 - 95 × 4P) (95 × 4P) (310)
2/0 - 300 32 - 40
2/0 - - M12
(70 - 150) (283 - 354)

5.4 UL Standards

(mm2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35

3/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (70 - 150) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(70 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
4810 -, +1 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(95 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
+3 1/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(50 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 250 32 - 40
3/0 - - M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35

4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (95 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(95 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
4930 -, +1 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(95 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
+3 1/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(50 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 250 32 - 40
3/0 - - M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35

250 × 4P × 2 - - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (95 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 250 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(95 -150) (310)
250 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
4H11 -, +1 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(120 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
+3 2/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(50 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 250 32 - 40
4/0 - - M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35

300 × 4P × 2 - - M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (95 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(95 - 150) (310)
250 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
4H12 -, +1 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(120 - 150) (310)
2/0 - 300 × 4P × 2 35
+3 3/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12
(70 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 250 32 - 40
4/0 - - M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
*3 When you use AWG 8 or larger wires to comply with UL standards, tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 4.1 N∙m to 4.5 N∙m
(36 lbf∙in to 40 lbf∙in).

5.4 UL Standards
Applicable Gauge Terminal

Recomm. Gauge *1 Screw Tightening Torque
Model Terminal AWG, kcmil
AWG, kcmil Size and N∙m (lbf∙in)
(mm2) Shape
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 - 300 35

2/0 × 4P (×2) M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (70 - 150) (310)
2/0 - 300 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(70 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 35
4810 -, +1 4/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(95 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 35
+3 1/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(50 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 250 32 - 40
3/0 M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2/0 - 300 35

3/0 × 4P (×2) M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (95 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(95 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 300 35
4930 -, +1 4/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(95 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 35
+3 1/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(50 - 150) (310)
3/0 - 250 32 - 40
3/0 M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3/0 - 300 35

4/0 × 4P (×2) M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (95 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 300 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 250 × 4P × 2 M12
(95 -150) (310)
250 - 300 35
4H11 -, +1 300 × 4P × 2 M12
(120 - 150) (310)
1/0 - 300 35
+3 2/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(50 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 250 32 - 40
4/0 M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4/0 - 300 35

4/0 × 4P (×2) M12
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 *2 (95 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 300 35
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 × 4P × 2 M12
(95 - 150) (310)
250 - 300 35
4H12 -, +1 300 × 4P × 2 M12
(120 - 150) (310)
2/0 - 300 35
+3 3/0 × 4P × 2 M12
(70 - 150) (310)
4/0 - 250 32 - 40
4/0 M12
(95 - 120) (283 - 354)
5
Pulse drive.
■ Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals

To comply with UL standards on drive models 2257 to 2415 and 4208 to 4H12, use UL Listed closed-loop crimp
terminals and insulation caps. Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer to crimp the closed-loop
crimp terminal. Yaskawa recommends closed-loop crimp terminals from JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. and insulation caps
from Tokyo DIP Co., Ltd.
Make sure that you comply with local standards for correct wire gauges in the region where you will use the drive.
Refer to Table 5.19, Table 5.20, and Table 5.21 to select crimp terminals as specified by drive model and wire
gauge.
Note:
To comply with UL standards, use only insulated crimp terminals or crimp terminals with insulation tubing. Use UL Listed vinyl-coated
insulated copper wires for operation with a continuous maximum permitted temperature of 75 °C at 600 V.

5.4 UL Standards
Table 5.19 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals and Insulation Caps: Three-Phase 200 V Class
Recomm. Gauge (AWG, kcmil) Crimping Tool
Crimp
R/L1 U/T1 Terminal Insulation
Model Screw Size Terminal Cap Model
S/L2 V/T2 -, +1 +3 Model Tool Model Die Jaw
T/L3 W/T3
2004 - 2021 - - - - 10 M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005
2030, 2042 - - - - 8 M5 R8-5 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008
2056 - - - - 6 M6 R14-6 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014
2070 - 2110 - - - - 6 M6 R14-6 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014
2138 - - - - 4 M6 R22-6 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022
2169, 2211 - - - - 4 M8 R22-8 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

2/0 × 2P 2/0 × 2P - - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - 4/0 × 2P - - M10 R100-10 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
2257
YF-1 TD-225, TD-
- - - 1/0 × 2P - M10 R60-10 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-224, TD-

- - - - 3 M10 R38-10 212 TP-038
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

4/0 × 2P - - - - M10 R100-10 214 TP-100
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- 3/0 × 2P - - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

2313 - - 250 × 2P - - M10 R150-10 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
YF-1 TD-225, TD-

- - - 1/0 × 2P - M10 R60-10 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-224, TD-

- - - - 2 M10 R38-10 TP-038
YET-150-1 212
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

250 × 2P 250 × 2P - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-327, TD-

- - 350 × 2P - - M12 R200-12 314 TP-200
YET-300-1
2360
YF-1 TD-323, TD-
- - - 3/0 × 2P - M12 80-12 312 TP-080
YET-300-1
YF-1 TD-321, TD-

- - - - 1 M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-300-1 311
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

250 × 2P - - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

- 300 × 2P - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-327, TD-

2415 - - 350 × 2P - - M12 R200-12 TP-200
YET-300-1 314
YF-1 TD-323, TD-

- - - 3/0 × 2P - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-321, TD-

- - - - 1 M12 R60-12 311 TP-060
YET-300-1
Table 5.20 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals and Insulation Caps: Three-Phase 400 V Class
Crimp
Model Terminal
Screw Size Model Cap Model
S/L2 V/T2 -, +1 +3 Tool Model Die Jaw
T/L3 W/T3
4002, 4004 - - - - 12 M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005
4005 - 4012 - - - - 10 M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005
4018, 4023 - - - - 10 M5 R5.5-5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005
4031 - - - - 8 M6 R8-6 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008

5.4 UL Standards

Crimp
T/L3 W/T3
4038 - - - - 6 M6 R14-6 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014
4044, 4060 - - - - 6 M6 R14-6 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014
4075 - - - - 6 M6 R14-6 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014
4089, 4103 - - - - 4 M6 R22-6 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022
4140, 4168 - - - - 4 M8 R22-8 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022
YF-1 TD-225, D-
1/0 × 2P 1/0 × 2P - 1/0 × 2P - M10 R60-10 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

4208 - - 3/0 × 2P - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-223, TD-

- - - - 4 M10 R22-10 TP-022
YET-150-1 212
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

2/0 × 2P 2/0 × 2P - - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- - 3/0 × 2P - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
4250
YF-1 TD-225, TD-
- - - 1/0 × 2P - M10 R60-10 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-224, TD-

- - - - 2 M10 R38-10 212 TP-038
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

3/0 × 2P 3/0 × 2P - - - M10 80-10 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - 4/0 × 2P - - M10 R100-10 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
4296
YF-1 TD-225, TD-
- - - 1/0 × 2P - M10 R60-10 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-224, TD-

- - - - 2 M10 R38-10 TP-038
YET-150-1 212
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

250 × 2P 250 × 2P - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-327, TD-

- - 350 × 2P - - M12 R200-12 314 TP-200
YET-300-1
4371
YF-1
TD-323, TD-
- - - 3/0 × 2P - M12 80-12 312 TP-080
YET-300-1
YF-1 TD-321, TD-

- - - - 1 M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-300-1 311
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

300 × 2P 300 × 2P - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-327, TD-

- - 400 × 2P - - M12 R200-12 TP-200
YET-300-1 314
4389
YF-1 TD-324, TD-
5
- - - 4/0 × 2P - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-321, TD-

- - - - 1 M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-300-1 311
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

250 × 4P - - - - M12 R150-12 313 TP-150
YET-300-1
YF-1 TD-324, TD-

- 4/0 × 4P 4/0 × 4P - - M12 R100-12 312 TP-100
YET-300-1
4453
YF-1 TD-323, TD-
- - - 3/0 × 4P - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-321, TD-

- - - - 1/0 M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-300-1 311

5.4 UL Standards

Crimp
T/L3 W/T3
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

250 × 4P - - - - M12 R150-12 313 TP-150
YET-300-1
YF-1 TD-324, TD-

- 4/0 × 4P - - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

4568 - - 300 × 4P - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-323, TD-

- - - 3/0 × 4P - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-323, TD-

- - - - 2/0 M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-325, TD-

300 × 4P 300 × 4P - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-300-1 313
YF-1 TD-327, TD-

- - 400 × 4P - - M12 R200-12 314 TP-200
YET-300-1
4675
YF-1 TD-324, TD-
- - - 4/0 × 4P - M12 R100-12 312 TP-100
YET-300-1
YF-1 TD-323, TD-

- - - - 2/0 M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-300-1 312
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

3/0 × 4P × 2 - - - - M12 80-L12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- 3/0 × 4P × 2 - - 3/0 M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
4810
YF-1 TD-228, TD-
- - 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-225, TD-

- - - 1/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

4/0 × 4P × 2 - - - - M12 100-L12 214 TP-100
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- 4/0 × 4P × 2 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
4930
YF-1 TD-225, TD-
- - - 1/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- - - - 3/0 M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

250 × 4P × 2 - - - - M12 150-L12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

- 250 × 4P × 2 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
4H11
YF-1 TD-227, TD-
- - - 2/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 70-12 TP-070
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - - - 4/0 M12 R100-12 214 TP-100
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

300 × 4P × 2 - - - - M12 150-L12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

- 300 × 4P × 2 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
4H12
YF-1 TD-227, TD-
- - - 3/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - - - 4/0 M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214

5.4 UL Standards
Table 5.21 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminals and Insulation Caps: 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Class (Drive Models: 4xxx)
Recomm. Gauge (AWG, kcmil) *1 Crimping Tool
R/L1, R1/ Crimp

L11 U/T1 Terminal Insulation
Model Terminal
Screw Size Cap Model
S/L2, S1/L21 V/T2 -, +1 +3 Model Tool Model Die Jaw
T/L3, T1/L31 W/T3
*2
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

2/0 × 4P (× 2) - - - - M12 70-12 214 TP-070
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- 3/0 × 4P × 2 - - - M12 80-12 214 TP-080
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

4810 - - 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-225, TD-

- - - 1/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 R60-12 TP-060
YET-150-1 213
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- - - - 3/0 M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

3/0 × 4P (× 2) - - - - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- 4/0 × 4P × 2 4/0 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
4930
YF-1 TD-225, TD-
- - - 1/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 R60-12 213 TP-060
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- - - - 3/0 M12 80-12 214 TP-080
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

4/0 × 4P (× 2) - - - - M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

- 250 × 4P × 2 - - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
YF-1 TD-229, TD-

4H11 - - 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R150-12 TP-150
YET-150-1 215
YF-1 TD-227, TD-

- - - 2/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 70-12 TP-070
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - - - 4/0 M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

4/0 × 4P (× 2) - - - - M12 R100-12 214 TP-100
YET-150-1
YF-1 TD-229, TD-
- 300 × 4P × 2 300 × 4P × 2 - - M12 R150-12 215 TP-150
YET-150-1
4H12
YF-1 TD-227, TD-
- - - 3/0 × 4P × 2 - M12 80-12 TP-080
YET-150-1 214
YF-1 TD-228, TD-

- - - - 4/0 M12 R100-12 TP-100
YET-150-1 214
Pulse drive.
*2 When you use drive models 4810 to 4H12 as a 6-Phase/12-Pulse drive, remove the common bus bars on the input terminals. 5
■ Factory-Recommended Branch Circuit Protection for UL Listing
Use branch circuit protection to protect against short circuits and to maintain compliance with UL 61800-5-1.
Yaskawa recommends connecting semiconductor protection fuses on the input side for branch circuit protection.
Refer to Three-Phase 200 V Class on page 278 and Three-Phase 400 V Class on page 279 for more information
about recommended fuses.
• 200 V Class
• 400 V Class

5.4 UL Standards
The built-in short circuit protection of the drive does not provide branch circuit protection. The user must provide
branch circuit protection as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), the Canadian Electric Code, Part I
(CEC), and local codes.
Maximum Applicable Motor Output Input Current Rating Rated Current
Drive Model
kW (HP) A
Manufacturer: EATON/Bussmann
2004 0.75 (0.75) 4.8 FWH-45B
2006 1.1 (1.5) 6.7 FWH-45B
2010 2.2 (3) 12.7 FWH-45B
FWH-50B
2012 3 (4) 17
FWH-80B *1
FWH-80B
2018 3.7 (5) 20.7
FWH-100B *1
FWH-80B
2021 5.5 (7.5) 30
FWH-100B *1
2030 7.5 (10) 40.3 FWH-125B
2042 11 (15) 52 FWH-150B
2056 15 (20) 78.4 FWH-200B
2070 18.5 (25) 96 FWH-225A
FWH-225A
2082 22 (30) 114
FWH-250A *1
FWH-225A
2110 30 (40) 111
FWH-250A *1
FWH-275A
2138 37 (50) 136
FWH-300A *1
FWH-275A
2169 45 (60) 164
FWH-350A *1
FWH-325A
2211 55 (75) 200
FWH-450A *1
2257 75 (100) 271 FWH-600A
2313 90 (125) 324 FWH-800A
2360 110 (150) 394 FWH-1000B
2415 - - -
Maximum Applicable Motor Output Input Current Rating
2004 0.55 (0.5) 3.6 FWH-45B
2006 0.75 (1) 4.8 FWH-45B
2010 1.5 (2) 8.9 FWH-45B
FWH-50B
2012 2.2 (3) 12.7
FWH-80B *1
FWH-80B
2018 3 (4) 17
FWH-100B *1
FWH-80B
2021 3.7 (5) 20.7
FWH-100B *1
2030 5.5 (7.5) 30 FWH-125B
2042 7.5 (10) 40.3 FWH-150B
2056 11 (15) 58.2 FWH-200B
2070 15 (20) 78.4 FWH-225A

5.4 UL Standards
Maximum Applicable Motor Output Input Current Rating Semiconductor Protection Fuse
FWH-225A
2082 18.5 (25) 96
FWH-250A *1
FWH-225A
2110 22 (30) 82
FWH-250A *1
FWH-275A
2138 30 (40) 111
FWH-300A *1
FWH-275A
2169 37 (50) 136
FWH-350A *1
FWH-325A
2211 45 (60) 164
FWH-450A *1
2257 55 (75) 200 FWH-600A
2313 75 (100) 271 FWH-800A
2360 90 (125) 324 FWH-1000B
2415 110 (150) 394 FWH-1000B
4002 0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) 2.5 FWH-50B
4004 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 4.7 FWH-50B
4005 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 6.7 FWH-50B
4007 3.0 (4) 3.0 (4) 8.9 FWH-60B
4009 4.0 (5) 3.7 (5) 11.7 FWH-60B
4012 5.5 (7.5) 5.5 (7.5) 15.8 FWH-60B
4018 7.5 (10) 7.5 (10) 21.2 FWH-80B
4023 11 (15) 11 (15) 30.6 FWH-90B
4031 15 (20) 15 (20) 41.3 FWH-150B
4038 18.5 (25) 18.5 (25) 50.5 FWH-200B
4044 22 (30) 22 (30) 59.7 FWH-200B
4060 30 (40) 30 (40) 58.3 FWH-225A
4075 37 (50) 37 (50) 71.5 FWH-250A
4089 45 (60) 45 (60) 86.5 FWH-275A
4103 55 (75) 55 (75) 105 FWH-275A
4140 75 (100) 75 (100) 142 FWH-300A 5

FWH-325A
4168 90 (125) 90 (125) 170
FWH-400A *1
4208 110 (150) 110 (150) 207 FWH-500A
4250 132 (175) 150 (200) 248 FWH-600A
4296 160 (200) 185 (250) 300 FWH-700A
4371 200 (250) 220 (300) 373 FWH-800A
4389 220 (300) 260 (350) 410 FWH-1000B
4453 250 (335) 300 (400) 465 FWH-1200B
4568 315 (400) 335 (450) 584 FWH-1200B
4675 355 (450) 370 (500) 657 FWH-1400A
4810 450 (603) 525 (700) 879 FWH-1200B
4930 500 (670) 600 (800) 922 FWH-1200B

5.4 UL Standards

4H11 560 (751) 675 (900) 1091 FWH-1600A
4H12 630 (845) 750 (1000) 1158 FWH-1600A
Drive Model
4002 0.55 (0.75) 0.55 (0.75) 1.9 FWH-50B
4004 1.1 (1.5) 0.75 (1) 3.5 FWH-50B
4005 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 4.7 FWH-50B
4007 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 6.7 FWH-60B
4009 3 (4) 3 (4) 8.9 FWH-60B
4012 4.0 (5) 3.7 (5) 11.7 FWH-60B
4018 5.5 (7.5) 5.5 (7.5) 15.8 FWH-80B
4023 7.5 (10) 7.5 (10) 21.2 FWH-90B
4031 11 (15) 11 (15) 30.6 FWH-150B
4038 15 (20) 15 (20) 41.3 FWH-200B
4044 18.5 (25) 18.5 (25) 50.5 FWH-200B
4060 22 (30) 22 (30) 43.1 FWH-225A
4075 30 (40) 30 (40) 58.3 FWH-250A
4089 37 (50) 37 (50) 71.5 FWH-275A
4103 45 (60) 45 (60) 86.5 FWH-275A
4140 55 (75) 55 (75) 105 FWH-300A
FWH-325A
4168 75 (100) 75 (100) 142
FWH-400A *1
4208 90 (125) 90 (125) 170 FWH-500A
4250 110 (150) 110 (150) 207 FWH-600A
4296 132 (175) 150 (200) 248 FWH-700A
4371 160 (200) 185 (250) 300 FWH-800A
4389 200 (250) 220 (300) 373 FWH-1000B
4453 220 (300) 260 (350) 410 FWH-1200B
4568 250 (335) 300 (400) 465 FWH-1200B
4675 315 (400) 335 (450) 584 FWH-1400A
4810 400 (536) 450 (600) 783 FWH-1200B
4930 450 (603) 525 (700) 830 FWH-1200B
4H11 500 (670) 600 (800) 976 FWH-1600A
4H12 560 (751) 675 (900) 1031 FWH-1600A
◆ UL Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

To comply with UL Standards, install a fuse for the DC power supply input.
Figure 5.24 shows a wiring example for a DC power supply that has two drives connected in parallel.

5.4 UL Standards
Figure 5.24 Wiring Example for DC Power Supply Input

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not ground the main circuit bus. Incorrect wiring can cause serious injury or death.
Note:
Install a fuse for each drive when operating more than one drive. If one fuse blows, replace all fuses.
Refer to Table 5.26 and Table 5.27 for the recommended fuses.
Fuse Fuse
Model Qty Model Qty
2004 FWH-45B 2 FWH-250A

2110 2
FWH-275A *1
2006 FWH-45B 2
FWH-300A
2010 FWH-45B 2 2138 2
FWH-350A *1
2012 FWH-50B 2 FWH-350A
2169 2
FWH-450A *1
2018 FWH-80B 2
FWH-450A
2021 FWH-80B 2 2211 2
FWH-600A *1
2030 FWH-125B 2
FWH-600A
2257 2
2042 FWH-150B 2 FWH-700A *1
2056 FWH-200B 2 FWH-800A

2313 2
FWH-1000B *1
2070 FWH-250A 2
2360 FWH-1000B 2
FWH-250A
2082 2 2415 FWH-1000B 2
FWH-300A *1
*1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads of approximately 150%.

Fuse Fuse
Model Qty Model Qty
4002 FWH-50B 2 4089 FWH-275A 2

5
4004 FWH-50B 2 4103 FWH-275A 2
4005 FWH-50B 2 FWH-300A

4140 2
FWH-325A *1
4007 FWH-60B 2
FWH-400A
4009 FWH-60B 2 4168 2
FWH-450A *1
4012 FWH-60B 2 FWH-500A
4208 2
4018 FWH-80B 2 FWH-600A *1
FWH-600A
4023 FWH-90B 2 4250 2
FWH-700A *1
4031 FWH-150B 2
FWH-700A
4296 2
4038 FWH-200B 2 FWH-800A *1
4044 FWH-200B 2 FWH-800A

4371 2
FWH-1000B *1
4060 FWH-225A 2
FWH-1000B
4389 2
4075 FWH-250A 2 FWH-1200B *1

5.4 UL Standards
Fuse Fuse
Model Qty Model Qty
FWH-1200B 4810 - -
4453 2
FWH-1400A *1
4930 - -
FWH-1200B
4568 2 4H11 - -
FWH-1600A *1
4675 FWH-1600A 2 4H12 - -
*1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads of approximately 150%.
◆ Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

You must provide low voltage wiring as specified by the National Electric Code (NEC), the Canadian Electric
Code, Part I (CEC), and local codes. Yaskawa recommends the NEC class 1 circuit conductor. Use the UL
approved class 2 power supply for external power supply.
Table 5.28 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supplies
Input/Output Terminals Power Supply Specifications
Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive.

Digital input S1 to S8, SN, SC, SP Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.

Analog input A1 to A3, AC, +V, -V Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.
Analog output FM, AM, AC Uses the LVLC power supply in the drive.

Pulse train output MP, AC Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.

Pulse train input RP, AC Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.

Safe disable input H1, H2, HC Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.

Serial communication input/output D+, D-, AC Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply for external
power supply.
24 V external power supply PS, AC Use the UL Listed class 2 power supply.
◆ Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection

The drive motor overload and overheat protection function complies with the National Electric Code (NEC) and
the Canadian Electric Code, Part I (CEC).
Set the Motor Rated Current and L1-01 through L1-04 [Motor Overload Protection Select] correctly to enable
motor overload and overheat protection.
Refer to the control method and set the motor rated current with E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)], E5-03 [PM
Motor Rated Current (FLA)], or E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].
■ E2-01: Motor Rated Current (FLA)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(030E) Sets the motor rated current in amps. 01
(10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
Note:
• If E2-01 < E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current], the drive will detect oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error].
• When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
–0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
–0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12

5.4 UL Standards
The value set for E2-01 becomes the reference value for motor protection, the torque limit, and torque control.
Enter the motor rated current written on the motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E2-01
to the value input for “Motor Rated Current”.
■ E5-03: PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-03 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01
(032B) Sets the PM motor rated current (FLA). (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
Note:
The display units are different for different models:
• 0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
The drive automatically sets E5-03 to the value input for “PM Motor Rated Current” after you do these types of
Auto-Tuning:
• Manual Entry w/ Motor Data Sheet
• PM Stationary Auto-Tuning
• Stationary (R Only)
• Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-06 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 and
(11E9) Sets the motor rated current in amps. o2-04
rated current)
Note:
• 0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
The setting value of E9-06 is the reference value for motor protection. Enter the motor rated current written on the
motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E9-06 to the value input for “Motor Rated
Current”.
■ L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0480) Protection Sets the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors. (0 - 6)
This parameter enables and disables the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.
The cooling capability of the motor changes when the speed control range of the motor changes. Use an electronic 5
thermal protector that aligns with the permitted load characteristics of the motor to select motor protection.
The electronic thermal protector of the drive uses these items to calculate motor overload tolerance and supply
overload protection for the motor:
• Output current
• Output frequency
• Motor thermal characteristics
• Time characteristics
If the drive detects motor overload, the drive will trigger an oL1 [Motor Overload] and stop the drive output.
Set H2-01 = 1F [Term M1-M2 Function Selection = Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)] to set a motor overload alarm.
If the motor overload level is more than 90% of the oL1 detection level, the output terminal activates and triggers
an overload alarm.
0 : Disable

5.4 UL Standards
Disable motor protection when motor overload protection is not necessary or when the drive is operating more
than one motor.
Refer to Figure 5.25 for an example of the circuit configuration to connect more than one motor to one drive.
Figure 5.25 Protection Circuit Configuration to Connect More than One Motor to One Drive
NOTICE: When you connect more than one motor to one drive or when the motor amp rating is higher than the drive amp
rating, set L1-01 =0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled] and install thermal overload relays for each motor. The
electronic thermal protection of the drive will not function and it can cause damage to the motor.
1 : Variable Torque
Use this setting for general-purpose motors with a 60 Hz base frequency.
The overload tolerance decreases as motor speed decreases because the cooling fan speed decreases and the ability
of the motor to cool decreases in the low speed range.
The overload tolerance characteristics of the motor change the trigger point for the electronic thermal protector.
This provides motor overheat protection from low speed to high speed across the full speed range.
Overload Characteristics
Load Tolerance Cooling Capability
(at 100% motor load)
This motor is designed to operate with commercial line If the motor operates at frequencies less than 60 Hz, the
power. Operate at a 60 Hz base frequency to maximize drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay
the motor cooling ability. output and the motor coasts to stop.
2 : Constant Torque 10:1 Speed Range

Use this setting for drive-dedicated motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:10.
The speed control for this motor is 10% to 100% when at 100% load. Operating slower than 10% speed at 100%
load will cause motor overload.
This motor is designed to withstand increased The motor operates continuously at 10% to 100% base
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 10% speed at 100%
speed range (10% base frequency). load will cause motor overload.

5.4 UL Standards
3 : Constant Torque 100:1 SpeedRange

Use this setting for vector motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:100.
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 1% speed at 100% load
speed range (1% base frequency). will cause motor overload.
4 : PM Variable Torque
Use this setting for PM motors with derated torque characteristics.
This motor is designed to withstand increased If the motor operates continuously at lower speed than
temperatures during continuous operation at rated speed rated rotation speed at more than 100% torque, the drive
and rated torque. will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay output and
the motor coasts to stop.
5 : PM Constant Torque
Use this setting with a PM motor for constant torque that has a speed range for constant torque of 1:500.
The speed control for this motor is 0.2% to 100% when at 100% load. Operating slower than 0.2% speed at 100%
This motor is designed to withstand increased

temperatures during continuous operation in the low
The motor operates continuously at 0.2% to 100% rated
speed. Operating slower than 0.2% speed at 100% load
5
speed range (0.2% base frequency). will cause motor overload.
6 : Variable Torque (50Hz)


5.4 UL Standards
This motor is designed to operate with commercial line If the motor operates at frequencies less than commercial
power. Operate at a 50 Hz base frequency to maximize line power, the drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a
the motor cooling ability. fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop.
■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 min
(0481) Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the (0.1 - 5.0 min)
motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Set the overload tolerance time to the length of time that the motor can operate at 150% load from continuous
operation at 100% load.
When the motor operates at 150% load continuously for 1 minute after continuous operation at 100% load (hot
start), the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector.
Figure 5.26 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time. Motor overload protection
operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start.
This example shows a general-purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1-02 set to 1.0 min.
• Cold start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when the overload occurs immediately after starting
operation from a complete stop.
• Hot start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when overload occurs from continuous operation
below the motor rated current.
Figure 5.26 Protection Operation Time for a General-purpose Motor at Rated Output Frequency
■ L1-03: Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-03 Motor Thermistor oH V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(0482) Alarm Select Sets drive operation when the PTC input signal entered into the drive is at the oH3 [Motor (0 - 3)
Overheat Alarm] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and
MB-MC turns OFF.

5.4 UL Standards
1 : Coast to Stop
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC
turns OFF.
2 : Fast Stop (Use C1-09)
The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-
MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows oH3 and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
■ L1-04: Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-04 Motor Thermistor oH Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0483) Select Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the oH4 [Motor Overheat (0 - 2)
Fault (PTC Input)] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
The output turns OFF and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC
turns OFF.

5.5 China RoHS Compliance
5.5 China RoHS Compliance
15
Figure 5.27 China RoHS Mark
The China RoHS mark is displayed on products containing six specified hazardous substances that are in excess
of regulatory limits, based on the “Administrative Measures for the Restriction of the Use of Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products” and “Marking for the Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in
Electronic and Electrical Products” (SJ/T 11364-2014), which were promulgated on January 26, 2016. The
number displayed in the center of the mark indicates the environment-friendly use period (number of years) in
which electrical and electronic products that are being produced, sold, or imported to China can be used. The date
of manufacture of the electrical and electronic product is the starting date of the environment-friendly use period
for the product. The six specified hazardous substances contained in the product will not leak outside of the
product during normal use within this period and will have no serious impact on the environment, the human
body, or property.
The environment-friendly use period for this product is 15 years. This period is not the product warranty period.
◆ Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product

Table 5.29 shows the details on hazardous substances contained in this product.
Table 5.29 Contents of Hazardous Substances in This Product
Hazardous Substances
Parts Name Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Polybrominated Biphenyls Polybrominated Diphenyl
Chromium Ethers
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (PBB)
(Cr(VI)) (PBDE)
Circuit Board × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Electronic Parts × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Brass Screw × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Aluminum Die × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Casting
This table has been prepared in accordance with the provisions outlined in SJ/T 11364.
○: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below or equal to the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.
×: Indicates that said hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement of GB/T 26572.
Note:
This product complies with EU RoHS directives. In this table, "×" indicates that hazardous substances that are exempt from EU RoHS directives are contained.

5.6 对应中国RoHS指令
5.6 对应中国RoHS指令
15
图 5.28 中国RoHS标志
中国RoHS标志依据2016年1月26日公布的《电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法》，以及《电子电气产品有
害物质限制使用标识要求》（SJ/T 11364-2014）作成。电子电气产品中特定6种有害物质的含量超过规定值时，应
标识此标志。中间的数字为在中国生产销售以及进口的电子电气产品的环保使用期限（年限）。电子电气产品的环
保使用期限从生产日期算起。在期限内，正常使用产品的过程中，不会有特定的6种有害物质外泄进而对环境、人
和财产造成深刻影响。
本产品的环保使用期限为15年。但需要注意的是环保使用期限并非产品的质量保证期限。
◆ 本产品中含有有害物质的信息
本产品中所含有害物质的详细信息如表 5.30所示。
表 5.30 本产品中有害物质的名称及含量
有害物质
部件名称铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
实装基板 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
电子元件 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
黄铜螺钉 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
铝压铸 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
本表格依据SJ/T 11364的规定编制。
○:表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB/T 26572规定的限量要求以下。
×:表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB/T 26572规定的限量要求。
（注）本产品符合欧盟RoHS指令。上表中的“×”表示含有欧盟RoHS指令豁免的有害物质。

5.7 Safe Disable Input

This section gives precautions to support the Safe Disable input. Contact Yaskawa for more information.
The safety function complies with the standards shown in Table 5.31.
Table 5.31 Applied Safety Standards and Unified Standards
Safety Standards Unified Standards
IEC/EN 61508 (SIL3)
Functional Safety IEC/EN 62061 (SILCL3)
IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL3)
Machine Safety ISO/EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (Cat.3, PL e)
EMC IEC/EN 61000-6-7
Note:
• SIL = Safety Integrity Level.
• SILCL = SIL Claim Limit.
◆ Safe Disable Specifications

The Safe Disable input provides the stop function that complies with “Safe Torque Off” as specified by IEC/EN
61800-5-2. The Safe Disable input meets the requirements of EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC/EN 61508. It also has a
safety status monitor to detect safety circuit errors.
When you install the drive as a component in a system, you must make sure that the system complies with the
applicable safety standards.
Refer to Table 5.32 for safety function specifications.
Table 5.32 Safe Disable Specifications
Item Description
• Input: 2
Safe Disable input (H1, H2)
Signal ON level: 18 Vdc to 28 Vdc
Input/Output Signal OFF level: -4 Vdc to +4 Vdc
• Output: 1
MFDO safety monitor output for external device monitor (EDM)
Response time from when the input opens to when the drive output stops 3 ms or less
Response time from when the H1 and H2 terminal inputs open to when the EDM 20 ms or less
signal operates
Less frequent operation request mode PFD = 4.65E-6

Failure probability
Frequent operation request mode or
PFH = 1.11E-9
continuous mode
Performance level The Safe Disable input complies with the performance level requirements of EN ISO 13849-
1.
HFT (hardware fault tolerance) N=1
Type of subsystem Type B
Note:
EDM = External Device Monitoring
PFD = Probability of Failure on Demand
PFH = Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour
◆ Notes
DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use the Safe Disable function in the safety system of a machine, do a full risk
assessment for the system to make sure that all parts of the system comply with applicable safety standards. Incorrect
application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.
DANGER! Sudden Movement Hazard. If the output circuit of the drive is damaged and the Safe Disable function turns OFF the
drive output to a permanent magnet (PM) motor, the motor can rotate 180 electrical degrees. Prevent damage to equipment and
injury to personnel during this condition. Sudden motor movement can cause serious injury or death. It is possible for current to
flow through the motor winding in these conditions.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. You cannot depend on the Safe Disable function to prevent electrical shock. Disconnect all
power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before you remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous
voltages before servicing or repair work. If you do work on the drive when it is energized and there is no cover over the
electronic circuits, it can cause serious injury or death.

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Although the Safe Disable function is in operation, gravity or other external forces in the
vertical axis can move the motor. Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not use the drive output signals to control external holding brakes or dynamic
brakes for functional safety. Use a system that conforms to the functional safety requirements. Incorrect application of the Safe
Disable function can cause serious injury or death. Systems that use drive output signals (including EDM) for safety are not safe
because drive output signals are not safety components.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Connect the Safe Disable inputs to the devices as specified by the safety requirements.
If you connect the Safe Disable inputs incorrectly, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. To use the Safe Disable inputs, remove the jumpers between terminals H1-HC and H2-
HC. If the Safe Disable circuit does not work correctly, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you clear the Safe Disable input, make sure that the Safe Disable Monitor output
operates correctly as the specification for Safe Disable function. If the Safe Disable circuit does not operate correctly, it can
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Regularly examine the Safe Disable input and all other safety features. A system that
does not operate correctly can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Only let approved personnel who know about the drive, instruction manual, and safety
standards wire, examine, and maintain the Safe Disable input. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Only use the Safe Disable Monitor (multi-function output terminal set to the EDM
function) to monitor the Safe Disable status or to find a malfunction in the Safe Disable inputs. The monitor output is not a safety
output. If you use the Safe Disable Monitor incorrectly, it can cause death or serious injury.
Note:
• When you use a drive with a built in safety function, you must replace it 10 years after first use.
• A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the
OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 3 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if
terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 3 ms.
◆ Using the Safe Disable Function

■ Safe Disable Circuit
The Safe Disable circuit has two isolated channels (terminals H1 and H2) that stop the output transistors. The
input can use the internal power supply of the drive.
Set the EDM function to one of the MFDO terminals [H2-xx = 21 or 121] to monitor the status of the Safe
Disable function. This is the “Safe Disable monitor output function”.
Figure 5.29 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example

■ Connect Safe Disable Input Contacts to Multiple Drives

To Use the Drive Internal Power Supply
Figure 5.30 shows an example of how to connect Safe Disable contacts.
From the terminals HC-SN of drive 1, supply the power for the Safe Disable function for the applicable drives.
These conditions limit the number of units to connect:
• Internal power supply capacity
• Number of MFDIs used
• Supply current to the external sensors
Safety switch
Drive 1
S2
HC
Safe Disable input
SN
S1
H1
H2
E(G)
Open Safety
controller
Reset/
feedback
input Drive 2
HC
SN
H1
H2
Connect MFDO terminals set to
Safe Torque OFF [H2 - xx = 21] in series. E(G)
Safety Electronic
Device Monitor output
Drive 3
HC
SN
H1
H2
E(G)
Figure 5.30 Connection Example to Use the Internal Power Supply

To Use 24 V External Power Supply
Figure 5.31 shows an example of how to connect Safe Disable contacts. These conditions limit the number of
units to connect:
• External power supply capacity
• Number of MFDIs used
• Supply current to the external sensors

Figure 5.31 Connection Example to Use 24 V External Power Supply

The Number of Possible Units to Connect
Power Supply MFDI 24 V Output Number of Drive Units
Yes Yes *1 3
(8-channel input) No 15
Internal power supply
(Drive 1) Yes *1 7
No
No 19
External power supply - Different for different external power
supply capacities *2
*1 This is when you use a maximum of 150 mA.

*2 24 V, 12 mA is necessary for each drive.
Use the this formula to calculate the number of units to connect:
5
• n: Number of units to connect
• Iomax: Maximum current that can be supplied from the power supply (234 mA for the internal power supply)
• IMFDI: Current consumed per MFDI (6 mA)
• nMFDI: Maximum number of MFDIs that can be activated at the same time (maximum of 8-channel)
• Isensor: Current externally supplied for sensor power supply (maximum of 150 mA)
• Isafety: Current consumed by Safe Disable terminals H1 and H2 (12 mA)
Note:
Round the values off to the first decimal place.
■ Enabling and Disabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”)

Refer to Figure 5.32 for an example of drive operation when the drive changes from “Safe Torque Off” status to
usual operation.

Figure 5.32 Safe Disable Operation

Switching from Usual Operation to “Safe Torque Off”
Turn OFF (open) safety input terminal H1 or H2 to enable the Safe Disable function. When the Safe Disable
function is enabled while the motor is operating, the drive output and motor torque turn off and the motor always
coasts to stop. The b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection] setting does not have an effect on the stopping method.
The “Safe Torque Off” status is only possible with the Safe Disable function. Clear the Run command to stop the
drive. Turning off drive output (a baseblock condition) ≠ “Safe Torque Off”.
Note:
• When it is necessary to ramp to stop the motor, do not turn off terminals H1 and H2 until the motor fully stops. This will prevent the
motor from coasting to stop during usual operation.
• A maximum of 3 ms will elapse from when terminals H1 or H2 shut off until the drive switches to the “Safe Torque Off” status. Set the
OFF status for terminals H1 and H2 to hold for at least 3 ms. The drive may not be able to switch to the “Safe Torque Off” status if
terminals H1 and H2 are only open for less than 3 ms.
Going from “Safe Torque Off” to Usual Operation
The safety input will only release when there is no Run command.
• During Stop
When the Safe Disable function is triggered during stop, close the circuit between terminals H1-HC and H2-HC
to disable “Safe Torque Off”. Enter the Run command after the drive stops correctly.
• During Run
If you trigger the Safe Disable function during run, clear the Run command, then close the circuit between
terminals H1-HC and H2-HC to disable “Safe Torque Off”. Enter the Stop command, then enter the Run
command when terminals H1 and H2 are activated.
■ Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Keypad Display

Refer to Table 5.33 for information about the relation between the input channel status, Safety monitor output
status, and drive output status.
Table 5.33 Safe Disable Input and External Device Monitor (EDM) Terminal Status
Input 1 (H1-HC) ON (Close the circuit) OFF (Open) ON (Close the circuit) OFF (Open)
Input Channel Status
Input 2 (H2-HC) ON (Close the circuit) ON (Close the circuit) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)
MFDO Terminal
OFF OFF OFF ON
MFDO Terminal (H2-xx = 21)
(H2-xx = 21) MFDO Terminal
ON ON ON OFF
(H2-xx = 121)
Drive Output Status Baseblock (Drive ready) Safety status (STo) Safety status (STo) Safety status (STo)
Keypad Display Normally displayed SToF (Flashing) SToF (Flashing) STo (Flashing)
LED Status Ring Ready: Illuminated ALM/ERR: Flashing ALM/ERR: Flashing Ready: Flashing
MEMOBUS Register bit C: 0 bit C: 1 bit C: 1 bit C: 0

0020 (Hex.) bit D: 0 bit D: 0 bit D: 0 bit D: 1
Safety Function Status Monitor

The drive Safety monitor output sends a feedback signal about the status of the Safety function. The Safety
monitor output is one of the possible settings available for the MFDO terminals. If there is damage to the Safe
Disable circuit, a controller (PLC or safety relay) must read this signal as an input signal to hold the “Safe Torque
Off” status. This will help verify the condition of the safety circuit. Refer to the manual for the safety device for
more information about the Safety function.
You can use the MFDO function settings to switch the polarity of the Safety monitor output signal. Refer to Table
5.33 for setting instructions.

Keypad Display
If the two input channels are OFF (Open), the keypad will flash STo [Safe Torque OFF].
If there is damage to the Safe disable circuit or the drive, the keypad will flash SToF [Safe Torque OFF
Hardware] when one input channel is OFF (Open) and the other is ON (Close the circuit). When you use the Safe
disable circuit correctly, the keypad will not show SToF.
If there is damage to the drive, the keypad will show SCF [Safety Circuit Fault] when the drive detects a fault in
the Safe disable circuit. Refer to the chapter on Troubleshooting for more information.
■ Validating the Safe Disable Function

After you replace parts or do maintenance on the drive, first complete all necessary wiring to start the drive, then
test the Safe Disable input with these steps. Keep a record of the test results.
Note:
This validation should be performed at least once every three months in order to guarantee the specification values of the safety
parameters.
1. When the two input channels are OFF (Open), make sure that the keypad flashes STo [Safe Torque OFF], and
make sure that the motor is not running.
2. Monitor the ON/OFF status of the input channels and make sure that MFDO set to the EDM function operates
as shown in Table 5.33.
If one or more of these items are true, the ON/OFF status of the MFDO may not display correctly on the
keypad:
• Incorrect parameter settings.
• A problem with an external device.
• The external wiring has a short circuit or is disconnected.
• There is damage to the device.
Find the cause and repair the problem to correctly display the status.
3. Make sure that the EDM signal operates during usual operation as shown in Table 5.33.


6
Network Communications
6.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................298
6.2 Field Bus Network Support..................................................................................299
6.3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications ..............................................................300

6.1 Section Safety
6.1 Section Safety

DANGER

6.2 Field Bus Network Support
6.2 Field Bus Network Support

You can use the PLC to control and monitor the drive through the network. The drive has a standard RS-485
interface (MEMOBUS/Modbus communications). Install a separately sold communication option on the drive to
support other network communications.
◆ Available Communication Options

Refer to for the fieldbus networks that are compatible with the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative to order a communication option.
Table 6.1 Available Fieldbus Network
Type of Communications Option model Type of Communications Option model
CC-Link SI-C3 Modbus TCP/IP SI-EM3, JOHB-SMP3
MECHATROLINK-II SI-T3 PROFINET SI-EP3, JOHB-SMP3
MECHATROLINK-III SI-ET3 EtherNet/IP SI-EN3, JOHB-SMP3
PROFIBUS-DP SI-P3 EtherCAT SI-ES3, JOHB-SMP3
CANopen SI-S3 Powerlink SI-EL3
DeviceNet SI-N3

6.3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

This section gives detailed information about the parameters, error codes and communication procedures for
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
◆ Configure Master/Slave
You can use the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol for serial communication with programmable controllers (PLC).
The MEMOBUS/Modbus communication uses one master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slave drives. Serial
communications usually starts with a signal from the master to the slave drives.
A slave drive that receives a command from the master does the specified function and then sends a response back
to the master. You must set the address number for each slave drive before you start signal communications to
make sure that the master uses the correct address numbers.
A - Master (PLC) B - Slave (drive)
Figure 6.1 PLC and Drive Connection Example
◆ Communication Specifications
Table 6.2 lists the specifications for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Table 6.2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Specifications
Item Specification
Interface RS-485
Synchronization method Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
Communications speed:1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 76.8, 115.2 kbps
Data length: 8 bit (fixed)

Communication parameter
Parity: even, odd, none
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed)
Communication protocol MEMOBUS/Modbus standard (RTU mode only)
Number of possible units to connect Maximum: 31 units
◆ Communication with the PLC

This section gives information about the settings for the termination resistor and how to connect to MEMOBUS/
Modbus communications. MEMOBUS/Modbus communications uses an RS-485 interface (2-wire sequence).
■ Connect Communications Cable

Use this procedure to start communication between the PLC and drive.

1. De-energize the drive then connect the communications cable to the PLC and the drive. The drive uses
terminal TB4 for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
A - Terminal AC: Shield ground C - Terminal D-: Communication input/output (-)

B - Terminal D+: Communication input/output (+)
Figure 6.2 Communications Cable Connection Terminal (TB4)
Note:
Isolate the communications wiring from the main circuit wiring and other high-power wiring Use shielded wires for the
communications wiring and connect cable sheaths to the ground terminal of the drive. Incorrect wiring procedures could
cause drive malfunction because of electrical interference.
2. Install the termination resistor on the network termination slave drive. Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position
to enable the termination resistor on the drive.
3. Energize the drive.
4. Use the drive keypad to set the necessary communications parameters H5-01 to H5-12.
• H5-01 [Drive Node Address]
• H5-02 [Communication Speed Selection]
• H5-03 [Communication Parity Selection]
• H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method]
• H5-05 [Comm Fault Detection Selection]
• H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time]
• H5-09 [CE Detection Time]
• H5-10 [Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel]
• H5-11 [Comm ENTER Command Mode]
• H5-12 [Run Command Method Selection]
5. De-energize the drive and wait for the keypad display to turn off.
The drive is prepared to start communication with the PLC.
■ Set the Termination Resistor

You must enable the termination resistor on the slave terminal of the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. Use DIP switch S2 on the terminal block to enable and disable the built-in termination resistor.
Refer to Figure 6.3 for an example of how to set DIP switch S2. Use the tip of a tweezers or a jig with a tip width
of 0.8 mm (0.03 in) to set the DIP switch. When you install the drive at the end of the communication line, set
DIP switch S2 to ON. Set DIP switch S2 to OFF on all other drives.
Figure 6.3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Terminal and DIP Switch S2
■ Wiring Diagram for More than One Drive

Figure 6.4 shows how to wire more than one connected drive with using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

Figure 6.4 Wiring Diagram for More than One Drive

Note:
Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position on the last drive of the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication network to enable the termination
resistor.
◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Drive Operations

Drive parameters will apply to the settings when the drive is running during MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. This section gives information about the available functions and their related parameters.
■ Executable Functions
A PLC can do these operations with MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Parameter settings (except H5-xx) do
not have an effect on the availability of these operations.
• Monitor the drive status and operate the drive
• Set and view parameters
• Fault Reset
• Multi-function input setting (The input command from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications and MFDI
terminals (S1 to S8) are linked by a logical OR operation.)
■ Drive Control
Select the external command that sets the frequency references and motor run/stop with MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. Use the information in Table 6.3 to set the parameters as specified by the application.
Table 6.3 Necessary Parameter Settings for Drive Control from MEMOBUS/Modbus
LOCAL Control Selected No. Name Setting Value
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

External reference 1
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]
b1-15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]

External reference 2
b1-16 Run Command Selection 2 2 [Memobus/Modbus Communications]
For more information about operation mode selection, refer to [Frequency Reference Selection 1] and b1-02 [Run
Command Selection 1]. Refer to H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Select = External Reference 1/2 Selection] for more
information about external commands.
◆ Communications Timing
To prevent overrun of the slave side, the master cannot send a message to the same drive for a selected length of
time.
To prevent overrun of the master side, the slave cannot send a response message to the master for a selected length
of time.
This section gives information about message timing.

■ Command Message from Master to Slave

To prevent data loss and overrun, after the master receives a message from the slave, the master cannot send the
same type of command message to the same slave for a selected length of time. The minimum wait time is
different for each type of message. Refer to Table 6.4 to find the minimum wait times.
Table 6.4 Minimum Wait Time to Send a Message
Command Type Example Minimum Wait Time
• Operation commands (Run command, stop command)

1 • I/O settings 5 ms *1
• Reading the motor and parameter setting values
2 Writing a parameter 50 ms *1
3 Writing of modified data with the Enter command 3 to 5 s *1
*1 When the drive receives a message in the minimum wait time, it does command type 1 and sends a response message. If the drive
receives command type 2 or command type 3 messages in the minimum wait time, it will trigger a communications error or the drive
will ignore the command.
Figure 6.5 Minimum Wait Time to Send a Message

You must set the timer in the master to measure the length of time for the slave to respond to the master. If you set
the timer, but the slave does not send a response message in a specified length of time, the master will send the
message again.
■ Response Message from Slave

The slave receives the command message from the master then processes the data it received. The slave then waits
for the time set in H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time] then sends a response message to the master. If overrun
occurs on the master, increase the wait time set in H5-06.
Figure 6.6 Response Wait Time
◆ Message Format
■ Communication Message Description
In MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, the master sends commands to the slave, then the slave responds. The
master and slave send their messages in the configuration in Figure 6.7. The length of the data changes when the
description of the command (function) changes. 6
Figure 6.7 Message Format

■ Slave Address
Set the slave address of the drive to 00 to FF (Hex.). When the slave address is 00 (Hex), the master sends the
command and all slaves receive the command.
The slave will not send a response message to the master.
■ Function Code
There are five function codes that set commands. Table 6.5 shows the different codes.
Table 6.5 Function Codes
Command Message Response Message
Function Code Subfunction Code
Function Minimum Data Maximum Data Minimum Data Maximum Data
(Hex.) (Hex.) Length Length Length Length
(byte) (byte) (byte) (byte)
Read Multiple Holding

03 - Registers 8 8 7 37
08 - Loopback Test 8 8 8 8
Writing to Multiple
10 - 11 41 8 8
Holding Registers
Writing to Multiple
Holding Registers /
5A - 11 41 17 17
Reading the Register
Indicated
Reading the Contents

010D of Non-Consecutive 10 248 10 248
Holding Registers
67
Writing to Non-
010E Consecutive Holding 14 250 8 8
Registers
■ Communications Data
Communications data is a series of data that uses the combination of the communications register number and the
data for these registers. The data length changes when the description of the command changes. For a loopback
test, it switches to test code.
The communications register for the drive has a 2-byte length. Data that is written to the register for the drive is
usually 2 bytes. Register data that is read from the drive is also 2 bytes.
■ Error Check
Error check uses the CRC-16 method to detect transmission errors. Use the procedure in this section to calculate
CRC-16.
Command Data
When the drive receives data, it will make sure that there are no errors in the data. The drive uses the procedure
below to calculate CRC-16, then the drive compares that data with the CRC-16 value in the message. If the CRC-
16 values do not agree, the drive will not execute a command message.
When you calculate CRC-16 in MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, make sure that you set the start value as
FFFF (Hex.). All 16 bits must be 1.
Use this procedure to calculate CRC-16:
1. Make sure that the start value is FFFF (Hex.).
2. Calculate the FFFF (Hex.) start value and the XOR of the slave address (exclusive OR).
3. Move the step 2 results one column to the right. Do this shift until the carry bit is 1.
4. When the carry bit is 1, calculate XOR via the result from the above step 3 and A001 (Hex.).
5. Do steps 3 and 4 until the 8th shift to the right.
6. Use the result of step 5 to calculate the XOR and the data of the following messages (function code, register
address, data). Do steps 3 to 5 until the last data, then calculate.
7. The result of the last right shift or the value of the last XOR calculation is the result for CRC-16.
Table 6.6 lists examples of the CRC-16 calculation of slave address 02 (Hex.) and function code 03 (Hex.). The
calculated results of CRC-16 for this section is D140 (Hex.).
Note:
The calculation example only gives information about some error checks with CRC-16. The drive will do the same error checks for the
next data.

Table 6.6 CRC-16 Calculation Example

Description Calculation Overflow Description Calculation Overflow
Initial value (FFFF (Hex.)) 1111 1111 1111 1111 - Function code 03 (Hex.) 0000 0011 -
Address 02 (Hex.) 0000 0010 - XOR w result 1000 0001 0011 1101 -
XOR w initial value 1111 1111 1111 1101 Shift 1 0100 0000 1001 1110 1
Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - XOR result 1110 0000 1001 1111 -
XOR result 1101 1111 1111 1111 - Shift 2 0111 0000 0100 1111 1
Shift 2 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
XOR result 1100 1111 1111 1110 - Shift 3 0110 1000 0010 0111 0
Shift 3 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 4 0011 0100 0001 0011 1
Shift 4 0011 0011 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
XOR result 1001 0011 1111 1110 - Shift 5 0100 1010 0000 1001 0
Shift 5 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 6 0010 0101 0000 0100 1
Shift 6 0010 0100 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
XOR result 1000 0100 1111 1110 - Shift 7 0100 0010 1000 0010 1
Shift 7 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
Shift 8 0010 0001 0011 1111 1 XOR result 1110 0010 1000 0011 -
XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 - Shift 8 0111 0001 0100 0001 1
XOR result 1000 0001 0011 1110 - XOR w A001 (Hex.) 1010 0000 0000 0001 -
XOR result 1101 0001 0100 0000 -
1101 0001 0100 0000 -

Perform operations with next data (function code) CRC-16 D140
-
(Lower) (Upper)
Continue from here with next data.
Response Data
The drive does the CRC-16 calculation for the response message and makes sure that the data does not have
errors. Make sure that the calculated value is the same value as the CRC-16 in the response message.
◆ Examples of Messages for Commands/Responses
The items in this section are examples of messages for commands/responses.
■ Read Multiple Holding Registers

Uses function code 03 (Hex.) to read the contents of a maximum of 16 holding registers.
Table 6.7 shows example messages when the drive reads status signal from the drive of slave 2, the error contents,
fault contents, and frequency references. 6
Table 6.7 Message Example When Reading the Contents of Holding Register
Setting Data Setting Data Setting Data
Byte Command Message Response Message (Normal) Response Message (Fault)
(Hex.) (Hex.) (Hex.)
0 Slave address 02 Slave address 02 Slave address 02
1 Function code 03 Function code 03 Function code 83


Byte Command Message Response Message (Normal) Response Message (Fault)
2 Upper 00 Data Qty 08 Error code 03

Starting No.
3 Lower 20 Upper 00 Upper F1
First storage
register CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Lower 65 Lower 31
Data Qty
5 Lower 04 Upper 00 -
Next storage
register
6 Upper 45 Lower 00 -
CRC-16
7 Lower F0 Upper 00 -
Next storage
register
8 - Lower 00 -
9 - Upper 01 -
Next storage
register
10 - Lower F4 -
11 - Upper AF -
CRC-16
12 - Lower 82 -
■ Loopback Test
The loopback test uses function code 08 (Hex.) and returns the command message as a response message. This
test checks communication between the master and slave. The test code and data can use desired values.
Table 6.8 shows examples of messages given out when the loopback test is done with the drive of slave 1.
Table 6.8 Message Examples from the Loopback Test
Byte Command Message Setting Data (Hex.) Response Message (Normal) Setting Data (Hex.)
0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01
1 Function code 08 Function code 08
2 Upper 00 Upper 00
Test code Test code
3 Lower 00 Lower 00
4 Upper A5 Upper A5
Data Data
5 Lower 37 Lower 37
6 Upper DA Upper DA
CRC-16 CRC-16
7 Lower 8D Lower 8D
■ Writing to Multiple Holding Registers

You can write the data that you set to the number of holding registers set in function code 10 (hex). You must
configure the number of the holding registers and each 8 higher bits and 8 lower bits in order in the command
message for the write data. You can write to a maximum of 16 holding registers.
Table 6.9 shows example messages when you use the PLC to set Forward run in the drive of slave 1 with a 60.00
Hz frequency reference.
When you rewrite the parameter value with the write command through the H5-11 [Comm ENTER Command
Mode] setting, you must use the Enter command to save and enable the contents of the changes. Refer to H5-11:
Comm ENTER Command Mode on page 901 and Enter Command on page 309 for more information.
Table 6.9 Message Example When Writing to Multiple Holding Registers
Setting Data Response Message (When Setting Data Response Message (When Setting Data
Byte Command Message
(Hex.) Normal) (Hex.) There is a Fault) (Hex.)
1 Function code 10 Function code 10 Function code 90
2 Upper 00 Upper 00 Error code 02

Starting No. Starting No.
3 Lower 01 Lower 01 Upper CD
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower C1
Data Quantity Data Quantity
5 Lower 02 Lower 02 -
6 Byte No. 04 Upper 10 -

CRC-16
7 First data Upper 00 Lower 08 -
8 Data Quantity Lower 01 - -

Setting Data Response Message (When Setting Data Response Message (When Setting Data
Byte Command Message
(Hex.) Normal) (Hex.) There is a Fault) (Hex.)
9 Upper 17 - -
Next data
10 Lower 70 - -
11 Upper 6D - -
CRC-16
12 Lower B7 - -
Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message. The response message uses
the same formula.
■ Reading from More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register
The drive uses function code 5A (Hex.) to write to more than one register, then it reads the contents of four
holding registers at the same time.
The function for writing to more than one register is the same as the function for function code 10 (Hex.). You can
write to a maximum of 16 holding registers.
The four holding registers to be read from are specified in H5-25 to H5-28 [Function 5A Register x Selection].
Table 6.10 shows example messages when you write to more than one holding register or when you read more
than one command register. Table 6.10 uses this register data for the examples:
• The drive for slave 1 is set for Forward run with a frequency reference of 60.00 Hz.
• The setting in H5-25 to H5-28 and the data in the specified holding registers are as follows.
– H5-25 = 0044H: U1-05 [Motor Speed] = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)
– H5-26 = 0045H: U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] = 200.0 V (2000 = 07D0H)
– H5-27 = 0042H: U1-03 [Output Current] = 50% of drive rated current (100% = 8192, 50% = 4096 = 1000H)
– H5-28 = 0049H: U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] = 00H
Table 6.10 Message Example When Reading from More than One Holding Register/Reading the Indicated Register
Command Message Response Message (when normal) Response Message (when there is a fault)
Byte
1 Function Code 5A Function Code 5A Function Code DA
2 Upper 00 Register status 0F Register status 0F

Starting No.
3 Lower 01 Data in holding Upper 17 Data in holding Upper 17
register 1 register 1
selected with selected with
4 Upper 00 H5-25 Lower 70 H5-25 Lower 70
Data Qty
5 Lower 02 Data in holding Upper 07 Data in holding Upper 07
6 Byte No. 04 H5-26 Lower D0 H5-26 Lower D0
7 Upper 00 Data in holding

register 3
Upper 10 Data in holding
register 3
Upper 10 6
First data
8 Lower 01 H5-27 Lower 00 H5-27 Lower 00
9 Upper 17 Data in holding Upper 00 Data in holding Upper 00

Next data selected with selected with
10 Lower 70 H5-28 Lower 00 H5-28 Lower 00
11 Upper 4F Upper 00 Error Codes 02

CRC-16 Starting No.
12 Lower 43 Lower 01 Upper E9
CRC-16
13 - Upper 00 Lower 6C
Data Qty
14 - Lower 02 -
15 - Upper AC -
CRC-16
16 - Lower D0 -

Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message.
Register status
bit 0 Data in register 1 selected with H5-25

1: Successfully read the register
0: Register read error



bit 4 Not used
bit 5 Not used
bit 6 Not used
bit 7 Not used
■ Reading the Contents of Non-Consecutive Holding Registers

The drive uses function code 67 (Hex.) and subfunction code 010D (Hex.) to read data with a maximum of 120
holding registers.
You must give the holding register number from which to read separately.
Table 6.11 shows example messages when you read the frequency reference and torque limit from the drive for
slave 1. Table 6.11 uses these specified holding registers data for the examples.
• 0024H:U1-01 [Frequency Reference] = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)
• 0028H:U1-09 [Torque Reference] = 100.0% (1000 = 03E8H)
Table 6.11 Message Example When Reading the Contents of Non-Consecutive Holding Registers
Byte
1 Function Code 67 Function Code 67 Function Code E7
2 Upper 01 Upper 01 Error Codes 02

Subfunction Subfunction
Code Code
3 Lower 0D Lower 0D Upper EA
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower 31
Data Qty Byte No.
6 Upper 00 Upper 17 -
Holding register Holding register
1 No. 1 data
8 Upper 00 Upper 03 -
Holding register Holding register
2 No. 2 data
9 Lower 28 Lower E8 -
10 Upper 8B Upper 47 -
CRC-16 CRC-16
11 Lower 29 Lower ED -
Note:
The number of bytes set within the response message sets twice the number of data contained in the command message.
■ Writing to Non-Consecutive Holding Registers

The drive uses function code 67 (Hex.) and subfunction code 010E (Hex.) to read data with a maximum of 60
holding registers.
You must give the holding register number from which to write separately.

Table 6.12 shows example messages when you write the frequency reference and torque limit from the drive for
slave 1. Table 6.12 uses these specified holding registers data for the examples.
• 0002H: Frequency Reference = 60.00 Hz (6000 = 1770H)
• 0004H: Torque Limit = 150.0% (1500 = 05DCH)
Table 6.12 Message Example When Writing to Non-Consecutive Holding Registers
Byte
1 Function Code 67 Function Code 67 Function Code E7
2 Upper 01 Upper 01 Error Codes 02

Subfunction Subfunction
Code Code
3 Lower 0E Lower 0E Upper EA
CRC-16
4 Upper 00 Upper 00 Lower 31
Data Qty Data Qty
6 Upper 00 Upper D5 -
Byte No. CRC-16
7 Lower 04 Lower FC -
8 Upper 00 - -
Holding register
1 No.
9 Lower 02 - -
10 Upper 17 - -
Holding register
1 data
11 Lower 70 - -
12 Upper 00 - -
Holding register
2 No.
13 Lower 04 - -
14 Upper 05 - -
Holding register
2 data
15 Lower DC - -
16 Upper 55 - -
CRC-16
17 Lower 59 - -
Note:
The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity × 2 during the command message.
◆ Enter Command
When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to write parameters from the PLC to the drive, H5-11
[Comm ENTER Command Mode] lets you use the Enter command to enable these parameters. This section gives
information about the Enter command.
■ Types of Enter Commands

The drive supports the two Enter commands shown in Table 6.13. 6
Write 0 to register number 0900 or 0910 (Hex.) to enable the Enter command. You can only write to these
registers. If you read to these registers, it will cause an error.
Table 6.13 Types of Enter Commands
Register No.
Description
(Hex.)
When you write parameter data to the EEPROM, you will enable the data on the RAM at the same time.
0900
This process saves the parameter changes even if you de-energize the drive.
This updates the data on the RAM, but does not write data to the EEPROM.
0910
If you de-energize the drive, you will lose the parameter changes.

Note:
• You can write the EEPROM to the drive a maximum of 100,000 times. Do not frequently execute the Enter command (0900 (Hex.))
that is written to EEPROM.
• The Enter command register is write-only. If this register is read, it will cause a Register Number Error (02 (Hex.)).
• When the command data or broadcast message is transmitted to the drive, the Enter command is not necessary.
■ Functions of the Enter Command when Replacing a Previous Generation Drive

When you replace a previous generation Yaskawa drive with this product, you must set the Enter command
function for this product the same as the previous product. The Enter command function is different for Yaskawa
G7, F7-series, and V7-series drives.
Use H5-11 to set the Enter command function:
• When replacing G7 and F7 series drives, set H5-11 = 0 [ENTER Command Required].
• When replacing V7 series drives, set H5-11 = 1 [ENTER Command Not Required].
• When replacing 1000-series drives, set H5-11 to the same value as the drive you replaced.
Table 6.14 Enter Command Function Differences
H5-11 Settings H5-11 = 0 H5-11 = 1
The drive you replaced G7, F7 V7
Time when the parameter settings are enabled When the drive receives the Enter command from the When you change the parameter settings
master
Checks the upper and lower limits and considers the Checks the upper and lower limit of the changed
Upper and lower limit check related parameter settings. parameter only.
Will not change related parameter settings. You must Automatically changes the default settings for the related
Default setting of related parameters
change the parameters manually. parameters.
Accepts and responds as usual to correct setting data if the

If there is a setting error in a parameter, the drive
data contains parameter setting errors. The drive discards
Fault detection when you set more than one parameter the disabled setting data, but will not return an error responds with a fault. The drive discards the data that was
sent.
message.
◆ Self-Diagnostics
The drive can use Self-Diagnositcs to find the operation of the serial communications interface circuit. Self-
Diagnostics connects the transmission terminal to the reception terminal on the control circuit. It then transmits
the data sent by the drive and makes sure that the drive can communicate correctly.
Use this procedure to do Self-Diagnostics:
2. Set H1-06 = 67 [Terminal S6 Function Select = Communications test mode].
3. De-energize the drive.
4. Connect a jumper between control circuit terminals S6 and SN.
Make sure terminal SC and terminal SP are connected by a wire jumper.
Figure 6.8 Self-Diagnostics Jumper Terminals

6. When normal, the keypad will show PASS [MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Test Mode Normal].
When there is an error, the keypad will show CE [MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error].

7. De-energize the drive.

8. Disconnect the wire jumper between terminals S6 and SN. Set terminal S6 to its initial function.
Self-Diagnostics is complete and the drive returns to its usual function.
◆ Communications Data Table

Command Data on page 311, Monitor Data on page 314, and Broadcast Messages on page 327 show the
communications data. The data types are command data, monitor data, and broadcast message.
Refer to the Parameter List for parameter communications registers.
■ Command Data
You can read and write command data.
Note:
Set the reserved bit to 0. Do not write the data in the reserved register or the monitor register.
Table 6.15 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Command Data
Register No. Description
(Hex.)
0000 Reserved
Run command, multi-function input command
When H5-12 = 0, Forward run/stop

1: Forward run, 0: Stop
bit 0
When H5-12 = 1, run/stop
1: Run, 0: Stop
When H5-12 = 0, Reverse run/stop

1: Reverse run, 0: Stop
bit 1
When H5-12 = 1, Forward/Reverse run
1: Reverse, 0: Forward run
External Fault
bit 2
1: EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
Fault Reset
bit 3
1: Reset command
Multi-function input 1
When H1-01 = 40 [Forward Run Command (2-Wire Seq)], the multi-function input command is “ComRef.”
bit 4 Note:
0001 When you switch the bit ON as ComRef, the frequency reference source changes to MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications. When you connect a communication option to the drive, the frequency reference source gives priority to
the communications option.
Multi-function input 2
When the multi-function input command is H1-02 = 41 [Reverse Run Command (2-Wire Seq)], bit 5 is “ComCtrl.”
bit 5 Note:
When you switch the bit ON as ComCtrl, the Run Command source changes to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
When you connect a communication option to the drive, the Run Command source gives priority to the communications
option.
bit 6 Multi-function input 3
bit 9 Multi-function input 6 6

bit A Multi-function input 7
bit B Multi-function input 8
bit C - F Reserved
0002 Frequency Reference o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] (unsigned) sets the units.
Units: 0.1%
0003 Output voltage gain
Setting range: 20 (2.0%) to 2000 (200.0%), the default value at energize: 1000 (100.0%)
0004 Torque reference/torque limit (0.1% signed)
0005 Torque compensation (0.1% signed)
0006 PID setpoint (0.01% signed)
0007 Setting for the multi-function analog monitor output terminal 1 (10 V/4000 H)


(Hex.)
0008 Setting for the multi-function analog monitor output terminal 2 (10 V/4000 H)
MFDO setting
MFDO (terminal M1-M2)

bit 0
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 1
1: ON, 0: OFF

0009 bit 2
1: ON, 0: OFF
bit 3 - 5 Reserved
bit 6 1: bit 7 function is enabled
Fault relay output (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 7
1: ON, 0: OFF
bit 8 - F Reserved
000A Pulse train output (Units: 1/1 Hz, setting range: 0 to 32000)
000B - 000E Reserved
Command selection setting
bit 0 Reserved
Input for the PID setpoint

bit 1
1: Enables target values from MEMOBUS/Modbus
Torque reference/torque limit input

bit 2
1: Enables setting values from MEMOBUS/Modbus
Torque Compensation Input

bit 3
1: Enables setting values from MEMOBUS/Modbus
bit 4 Reserved
000F PID feedback from the MEMOBUS/Modbus

bit 5
1: Enables PID feedback (15FF (Hex.) from MEMOBUS/Modbus
bit 6 - B Reserved
Terminal S5 input of broadcast message

bit C
1: Enabled, 0: Disabled

bit D

bit E

bit F
0010 - 001A Reserved
001B Analog monitor option AO-A3 analog output 1 value (10 V/4000 (Hex.))
001C Analog monitor option AO-A3 analog output 2 value (10 V/4000 (Hex.))
001D Digital output option DO-A3 output value (binary)
001E - 001F Reserved
bit 0 Extended multi-function input command 1

15C0
bit 3 - F Reserved


(Hex.)
Speed Search from Fmax

1: Enables Speed Search from Fmax
bit 0
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 61 [MFDI Function Selection = Speed Search from Fmax]. It operates as specified by
the command and OR operation from the MFDI terminals.
Baseblock command
1: Enables baseblock command
bit 1
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 8 [Baseblock Command (N.O.)]. It operates as specified by the command and OR
operation from the MFDI terminals.
Baseblock command - Without message

1: Enables baseblock command
bit 2
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 8 [Baseblock Command (N.O.)].
• The keypad does not show the bb [Baseblock] alarm message. The ALM LED does not flash.
Coast-to-stop command
1: Enables coast-to-stop command
bit 3
• The drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop at the leading edge of bit 3.
• To restart the drive, set bit 3 to 0 and enter the Run command again.
Ramp to stop command

1: Enables ramp to stop command
bit 4
• The drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time at the leading edge of bit 4.
• To restart the drive, set bit 4 to 0 and enter the Run command again.
Fast stop command

1: Enables fast stop command
bit 5
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 15 [Fast Stop (N.O.)]. It operates as specified by the command and OR operation
from the MFDI terminals.
Soft start input reset

1: Enables soft start input reset
bit 6 • When bit 6 is 1, the input to the soft starter will be 0. The drive decelerates the motor in the selected deceleration time.
When bit 6 is 0, the motor accelerates to the previous frequency reference.
15DF
• U1-01 [Frequency Reference] shows the set frequency reference.
Soft start output reset

1: Enables soft start output reset
bit 7 • When bit 7 is 1, the output from the soft starter will be 0.
• When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV or CLV/PM], the drive decelerates the motor as specified by the
torque limit. When A1-02 ≠ 3, 7 the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts.
• When bit 6 is 0, the motor accelerates to the previous frequency reference.
Accel/decel ramp hold command

1: Enables accel/decel ramp hold command
bit 8
• This is the same function as H1-xx = A [Accel/Decel Ramp Hold]. It operates as specified by the command and OR
JOG command
1: Enables JOG command
bit 9
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 6 [Jog Reference Selection]. It operates as specified by the command and OR
Forward Jog
1: Enables FJOG command
bit A
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 12 [Forward Jog]. It operates as specified by the command and OR operation from
the MFDI terminals.
Reverse Jog
1: Enables RJOG command
bit B
• This is the same function as H1-xx = 13 [Reverse Jog]. It operates as specified by the command and OR operation from the
MFDI terminals.
PID Disable command

1: Enables PID Disable command
6
bit C
• This the same function as H1-xx = 19 [PID Disable]. It operates as specified by the command and OR operation from the
MFDI terminals.
bit D - F Reserved
Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 Output Func

bit 1
When you do not set functions to H2-40 to H2-42, set them to F [Not Used].

15E0 bit 2

bit 3


(Hex.)
Time Setting
Setting range: 0000 to 2359 (decimal), the default value at energize: 0000
3004 Set the hour and the minute in HHMM format.
• HH: 00 to 23 (decimal)
• MM: 00 to 59 (decimal)
Year and Day Setting

Sets the year and the day of the week in YYDW format.
• YY: the last two digits of the year from 16 to 99 (decimal)
• DW: the day of the week
– Sunday: 00
3005 – Monday: 01
– Tuesday: 02
– Wednesday: 03
– Thursday: 04
– Friday: 05
– Saturday: 06
Date Setting
3006 Sets the month and the date in MMDD format.
• MM: 01 to 12 (decimal)
• DD: 01 to 31 (decimal)
Set the Date Information

3007 Sets the values specified in 3004H to 3006H as the date and time.
• Command Data: 1
• Response Data: 0 (normal), 8 (fault)
■ Monitor Data
You can only read monitor data.

Table 6.16 Monitor Data for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication

(Hex.)
Drive Status 1
During Run
bit 0
1: During run, 0: During stop
During Reverse
bit 1
1: During reverse, 0: Forward run
Drive ready
bit 2
1: Ready, 0: Not ready
Fault
bit 3
1: Fault
Data Setting Error

bit 4
1: oPExx error

bit 5
1: ON, 0: OFF
0020
bit 6
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 7
1: ON, 0: OFF
bit 8 - B Reserved
SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware]

bit C 1: One of Safe Disable input 1 (terminal H1-HC) and Safe Disable input 2 (terminal H2-HC) is OFF (open) and the other is
ON (closed)
STo [Safe Torque OFF]

bit D
1: Both Safe Disable input 1 (terminal H1-HC) and Safe Disable input 2 (terminal H2-HC) are OFF (open)
ComRef status
bit E
1: Enabled
ComCtrl status
bit F
1: Enabled
Fault Description 1
bit 0 oC [Overcurrent], GF [Ground Fault]
bit 1 ov [Overvoltage]
bit 2 oL2 [Drive Overload]
bit 3 oH1 [Heatsink Overheat], oH2 [External Overheat (H1-XX=B)]
bit 4 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat], rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault]
bit 5 Reserved
bit 6 FbL [PID Feedback Loss], FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]
bit 7 EF0 [Option Card External Fault], EF1 to EF8 [External Fault]
0021
CPFxx [Hardware Fault]
bit 8 Note:
Includes oFx.
bit 9 oL1 [Motor Overload], oL3, oL4 [Overtorque Detection 1/2], UL3, UL4 [Undertorque Detection 1/2]
bit A PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss], PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault], oS [Overspeed], dEv [Speed Deviation]
bit B During Uv [Undervoltage] detection

6
bit C Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage], Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage], Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]
bit D LF [Output Phase Loss], PF [Input Phase Loss]
bit E CE [Modbus Communication Error], bUS [Option Communication Error]
bit F oPr [Keypad Connection Fault]


(Hex.)
Fault Contents
bit 0 1: During data writing, during motor switching
bit 1
Reserved
bit 2
bit 3 1: Upper/Lower Limit Fault
0022 bit 4 1: Data Integrity Fault
bit 5 1: During EEPROM writing
0: EEPROM writing
1: Change data only on the RAM
bit 6
Note:
Enabled when H5-17 = 1 [ENTER Command Response @CPU BUSY = Write to RAM Only].
bit 7 - F Reserved
U1-01 [Frequency Reference]

0023 Note:
o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] sets the units.
U1-02 [Output Frequency]

0024 Note:
o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection] sets the units.
U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] (units: 0.1 V)

0025 Note:
Use H5-10 [Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel] to change the setting unit.
0026 U1-03 [Output Current] (units: 0.1 A)
0027 U1-08 [Output Power]
0028 U1-09 [Torque Reference]
Fault Description 2
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 GF [Ground Fault]
bit 2 PF [Input Phase Loss]
0029 bit 3 LF [Output Phase Loss]
bit 4 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat]
bit 5 Reserved
bit 6 oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)]
bit 7 - F Reserved
Minor Fault Description 1
bit 0 - 1 Reserved
bit 2 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error]
bit 3 bb [Baseblock]
bit 4 oL3 [Overtorque 1]
bit 5 oH [Heatsink Overheat]
bit 7 Uv [Undervoltage]
002A
bit 8 FAn [Internal Fan Fault]
bit 9 CE [Modbus Communication Error]
bit A bUS [Option Communication Error]
bit B UL3/UL4 [Undertorque Detection 1/2]
bit C oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]
bit D FbL [PID Feedback Loss], FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]
bit E Reserved
bit F CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]


(Hex.)
U1-10 [Input Terminal Status]
bit 0 1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON

002B
bit 8 - F Reserved
Drive Status 2
During Run
bit 0
1: During Run
During zero speed

bit 1
1: During zero speed
Speed agreement
bit 2
1: During agreement
User-defined speed agreement

bit 3
1: During agreement
Frequency Detection 1
bit 4
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Frequency Detection 2
bit 5
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Drive ready
bit 6
1: Run ready
During low voltage detection

002C bit 7
1: During detection
During Baseblock
bit 8
1: Drive output during baseblock
Frequency reference mode

bit 9
1: No communication option, 0: Communication option
Run command mode

bit A
1: No communication option, 0: Communication option
bit B During overtorque/undertorque 1, 2 detection
Frequency reference loss
bit C
1: Loss
Executing Auto-Restart
bit D
1: Restart Enabled
Fault
bit E
1: Fault generated
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications timeout

bit F
1: At Timeout
6
U1-11 [Output Terminal Status]

bit 0
1: ON, 0: OFF

bit 1
1: ON, 0: OFF
002D MFDO (terminal M5-M6)

bit 2
1: ON, 0: OFF
bit 3 - 6 Reserved
Fault relay output (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 7
1: ON, 0: OFF
bit 8 - F Reserved
002E Reserved


(Hex.)
002F Frequency reference bias (Up 2/Down 2 function) (Units: 0.1%)
0030 Reserved
0031 U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] (unit: 1 V)
0032 U1-09 [Torque Reference] (unit: 1%)
0033 Reserved
0034 Product code 1 [ASCII], product type (GA700 = 0A)
0035 Product code 2 [ASCII], specification (GA700 = 70)
0036 - 0037 Reserved
0038 PID Feedback: Unsigned, input is equivalent to 100%/maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)
0039 PID Input: Signed, ±100%/±maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)
003A PID Output: Signed, ±100%/±maximum output frequency (Units: 0.1%)
003B - 003C Reserved
Communications error description

Note:
The drive saves the description of the communications error until you reset the fault.
bit 0 CRC Error
bit 1 Data Length Error
bit 2 Reserved
003D
bit 3 Parity Error
bit 4 Overrun Error
bit 5 Framing Error
bit 6 Timeout
bit 7 - F Reserved
Units: min-1 or r/min

003E Note:
Output frequency Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
003F 0.01% units
0040 - 004A Used with U1-xx [Operation Status Monitors]. Refer to the U Monitor for parameter details.
U1-12 [Drive Status]
bit 0 1: During Run
bit 1 1: During zero speed
bit 2 1: During reverse
bit 3 1: During reset signal input
bit 4 1: During speed agreement
bit 5 1: Drive operation ready
004B bit 6 1: Minor Fault
bit 7 1: Fault
bit 8 1: oPExx [Operation Error] generation
bit 9 1: Recovery from momentary power loss, 0: Power recovery
bit A 1: Motor 2 Selection
bit B Reserved
bit E ComRef status/ NetRef status
bit F ComCtrl status/ NetCtrl status
004C - 007E Use with U1-xx, U4-xx, U5-xx, U6-xx [Monitors]. Refer to “U2: Fault Trace” and “U3: Fault History” for more information.
007F Minor fault code (Refer to “Minor fault description” for more information about the minor fault codes.)
0080 - 0097 Use with U2-xx, U3-xx [Monitors]. Refer to “U Monitor” for more information, and refer to “Fault Trace/Fault History Descriptions” for more information
about register values.


(Hex.)
U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time]

0098 - 0099
Example: When U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time = 12345], 0098 (Hex.) = 1234 and 0099 (Hex.) = 5.
U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time]

009A - 009B
Example: When U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time = 12345], 009A (Hex.) = 1234 and 009B (Hex.) = 5.
009C - 00AA Reserved
Drive rated current

Note:
00AB The unit of display is different for different models.
2004 to 2042, 4002 to 4023: 0.01 A
2056 to 2415, 4031 to 4H12: 0.1 A

00AC Note:
U1-05 [Motor Speed] Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00AD Units: 0.01%
00AE, 00AF Reserved
The drive stores option codes in the register.

AI-A3 = 0003 (Hex.)
AO-A3 = 0004 (Hex.)
DI-A3 = 0001 (Hex.)
DO-A3 = 0002 (Hex.)
PG-B3 = 0011 (Hex.)
PG-F3 = 0021 (Hex.)
PG-RT3 = 0023 (Hex.)
PG-X3 = 0012 (Hex.)
SI-C3 = 5343 (Hex.)
SI-EM3 = 1005 (Hex.)
00B0 Option codes connected to SI-EN3 = 1006 (Hex.)
CN5-A
SI-ET3 = 1004 (Hex.)
SI-N3 = 534E (Hex.)
SI-P3 = 5350 (Hex.)
SI-S3 = 5353 (Hex.)
SI-T3 = 5354 (Hex.)
SI-W3 = 1003 (Hex.)
SI-ES3 = 1001 (Hex.)
JOHB-SMP3 (EtherCAT) = 1001 (Hex.)
JOHB-SMP3 (Modbus TCP/IP) = 1005 (Hex.)
JOHB-SMP3 (EtherNet/IP) = 1006 (Hex.)
JOHB-SMP3 (PROFINET = 1006 (Hex.)
00B1 Reserved
00B2 Option codes connected to CN5-B
00B3 Option codes connected to CN5-C
00B4 Reserved

00B5 Note:
U1-16 [SFS Output
Frequency] Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00B6 Units: 0.01%

00B7
Frequency reference
Note: 6
monitor Set E2-04, E4-04, E5-04, E9-08 [Motor Pole Count].
00B8 Units: 0.01%
00B9 - 00BE Reserved
Operation error number

00BF
xx of oPExx is displayed.


(Hex.)
Fault Description 3
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage]
bit 2 Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage]
bit 3 Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]
bit 4 SC [Short Circuit/IGBT Failure]
bit 5 GF [Ground Fault]
bit 6 oC [Overcurrent]
00C0 bit 7 ov [Overvoltage]
bit 9 oH1 [Heatsink Overheat]
bit A oL1 [Motor Overload]
bit B oL2 [Drive Overload]
bit C oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1]
bit D oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2]
bit E rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault]
bit F rH [Braking Resistor Overheat]
Fault Description 4
bit 0 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)]
bit 6 FAn [Internal Fan Fault]
00C1 bit 7 oS [Overspeed]
bit 8 dEv [Speed Deviation]
bit 9 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss]
bit A PF [Input Phase Loss]
bit B LF [Output Phase Loss]
bit C oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]
bit D oPr [Keypad Connection Fault]
bit E Err [EEPROM Write Error]
bit F oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)]


(Hex.)
Fault Description 5
bit 1 bUS [Option Communication Error]
bit 2 - 3 Reserved
bit 4 CF [Control Fault]
bit 5 SvE [Zero Servo Fault]
00C2 bit 6 EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
bit 7 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]
bit 8 UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]
bit 9 UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]
bit A oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload]
bit B - E Reserved
bit F Hardware Fault (includes oFx fault)
Fault Description 6
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 dv1 [Z Pulse Fault]
bit 2 dv2 [Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection]
bit 3 dv3 [Inversion Detection]
bit 4 dv4 [Inversion Prevention Detection]
00C3 bit 5 LF2 [Output Current Imbalance]
bit 6 STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected]
bit 7 PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault]
bit 8 E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err]
bit 9 Reserved
bit A SEr [Speed Search Retries Exceeded]
bit B - F Reserved
Fault Description 7
bit 0 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]
bit 3 oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1]
bit 4 UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]
bit 5 CoF [Current Offset Fault]

00C4
bit 6 - 7 Reserved
bit 8 dWFL [DriveWorksEZ Fault]
bit 9 dWF1 [EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error] 6

bit A - C Reserved
bit D rF [Braking Resistor Fault]
bit E boL [BrakingTransistor Overload Fault]
bit F oH5 [Motor Overheat (NTC Input)]


(Hex.)
Fault Description 8
bit 0 LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out]
bit 1 nSE [Node Setup Error]
00C5 bit 2 Tho [Thermistor Disconnect]
bit 3- 9 Reserved
bit A dv7 [Polarity Judge Timeout]
bit B - F Reserved
00C6 - 00C7 Reserved
bit 0 Uv [Undervoltage]
bit 3 oH2 [Overheat Alarm]
bit 6 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error]
00C8 bit 7 bb [Baseblock]
bit A EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)]
bit B EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)]
bit C EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)]
bit D EF8 [External Fault (Terminal S8)]
bit E FAn [Internal Fan Fault]
bit F oS [Overspeed]
bit 0 dEv [Speed Deviation]
bit 1 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss]
bit 2 oPr [Keypad Connection Fault]
bit 4 bUS [Option Communication Error]
bit 5 CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]
bit 6 oL1 [Motor Overload]
00C9 bit 7 oL2 [Drive Overload]
bit 8 Reserved
bit 9 EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
bit A rUn [Motor Switch during Run]
bit B Reserved
bit C CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]
bit D UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]
bit E UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]
bit F SE [Modbus Test Mode Error]


(Hex.)
bit 0 L24v [Loss of External Power 24 Supply]
bit 1 oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]
bit 2 - 5 Reserved
bit 6 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]

00CA
bit 7 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]
bit 8 Reserved
bit 9 dnE [Drive Disabled]
bit A PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault]
bit B - F Reserved
bit 0 E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err]
bit 1 AEr [Station Address Setting Error]
bit 2 CyC [MECHATROLINK CommCycleSettingErr]
bit 3 HCA [High Current Alarm]
bit 4 LT-1 [Cooling Fan Maintenance Time]
bit 5 LT-2 [Capacitor Maintenance Time]
00CB bit 6 - 7 Reserved
bit A SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware]
bit B STo [Safe Torque OFF]
bit C oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1]
bit D UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]
bit E - F Reserved
bit 0 Reserved
bit 1 TrPC [IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)]
bit 2 LT-3 [SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime]
bit 3 LT-4 [IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)]
bit 4 boL [Braking Transistor Overload]

00CC
bit 5 - 6 Reserved
bit 7 oH5 [Motor Overheat (NTC Input)]
bit 8 dWAL [DriveWorksEZ Fault]
bit 9 - B Reserved
bit C Tho [Thermistor Disconnect] 6

bit D - F Reserved
00CD - 00CF Reserved


(Hex.)
CPF Contents 1
bit 0 - 1 Reserved
bit 2 CPF02 [Control Circuit Error]
bit 4 - 5 Reserved
bit 6 CPF06 [Control Circuit Error (EEPROM memory Data Error)]
00D0 bit 8 CPF08 [Control Circuit Error]
bit 9 Reserved
bit A CPF10 [Control Circuit Error]
bit B CPF11 [Control Circuit Error]
bit C CPF12 [Control Circuit Error]
bit D CPF13 [Control Circuit Error]
bit E CPF14 [Control Circuit Error]
bit F Reserved
CPF Contents 2
00D1 bit 7 CPF23 [Control Circuit Error]
bit 8 CPF24 [Control Circuit Error (Drive Unit Signal Fault)]
bit 9 Reserved
bit A CPF26 [Control Circuit Error]
bit B CPF27 [Control Circuit Error]
bit C CPF28 [Control Circuit Error]
bit D CPF29 [Control Circuit Error]
bit E CPF30 [Control Circuit Error]
bit F CPF31 [Control Circuit Error]
CPF Contents 3

00D2
bit 8 - F Reserved
00D3 - 00D7 Reserved


(Hex.)
oFA0x Description (CN5-A)
bit 0 oFA00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]
bit 1 oFA01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]
00D8 bit 2 - 4 Reserved
bit 5 oFA05 [Option A/D Error]
bit 6 oFA06 [Option Communication Error]
bit 7 - F Reserved
bit 0 oFA10 [Option RAM Error]
bit 1 oFA11 [Option Ope Mode Error]
bit 2 oFA12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]
bit 3 oFA13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]

00D9
bit 4 oFA14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
bit 5 oFA15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
bit 6 oFA16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
bit 7 oFA17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
bit 8 - F Reserved
00DA Reserved
bit 0 oFA30 [COM ID Error]
bit 1 oFA31 [Type Code Error]
bit 2 oFA32 [SUM Check Error]
bit 3 oFA33 [Option Receive Time Over]
bit 4 oFA34 [Memobus Time Over]
bit 5 oFA35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]
bit 6 oFA36 [CI Check Error]

00DB
bit 8 oFA38 [Control Reference Error]
bit A oFA40 [CtrlResSel 1Err]
bit B oFA41 [Drive Receive Time Over 4]
bit C oFA42 [CtrlResSel 2Err]
bit D oFA43 [Drive Receive Time Over 5]
bit E - F Reserved
oFb0x Description (CN5-B)
bit 0 oFb00 [Option Not Compatible with Port] 6

bit 1 oFb01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]
bit 2 oFb02 [Duplicate Options]

00DC
bit 3 - 4 Reserved
bit 5 oFb05 [Option A/D Error]
bit 6 oFb06 [Option Communication Error]
bit 7 - F Reserved


(Hex.)
bit 0 oFb10 [Option RAM Error]
bit 1 oFb11 [Option Ope Mode Error]
bit 2 oFb12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]
bit 3 oFb13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]

00DD
bit 4 oFb14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
bit 5 oFb15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
bit 6 oFb16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
bit 7 oFb17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
bit 8 - F Reserved
00DE - 00DF Reserved
bit 0 oFb30 [COM ID Error]
bit 1 oFb31 [Type Code Error]
bit 2 oFb32 [SUM Check Error]
bit 3 oFb33 [Option Receive Time Over]
bit 4 oFb34 [Memobus Time Over]
bit 5 oFb35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]
bit 6 oFb36 [CI Check Error]

00E0
bit 8 oFb38 [Control Reference Error]
bit A oFb40 [CtrlResSel 1Err]
bit B oFb41 [Drive Receive Time Over 4]
bit C oFb42 [CtrlResSel 2Err]
bit D oFb43 [Drive Receive Time Over 5]
bit E - F Reserved
oFC0x Description (CN5-C)
bit 0 oFC00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]
bit 1 oFC01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]
bit 2 oFC02 [Duplicate Options]

00E1
bit 3 - 4 Reserved
bit 5 oFC05 [Option A/D Error]
bit 6 oFC06 [Option Communication Error]
bit 7 - F Reserved
bit 0 oFC10 [Option RAM Error]
bit 1 oFC11 [Option Ope Mode Error]
bit 2 oFC12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]
bit 3 oFC13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]

00E2
bit 4 oFC14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
bit 5 oFC15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
bit 6 oFC16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
bit 7 oFC17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
bit 8 - F Reserved
00E3 Reserved


(Hex.)
bit 0 oFC50 [Encoder Option A/D Conv Error]
bit 1 oFC51 [EncOpAnlgCrctErr]
bit 2 oFC52 [Encoder Option Comm Timeout]

00E4
bit 3 oFC53 [Encoder Option Comm Data Fault]
bit 4 oFC54 [Encoder Error]
bit 5 oFC55 [Resolver Error]
bit 6 - F Reserved
bit 0 EP24v [External Power 24V Supply]
bit 1 - 3 Reserved
bit 4 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]
bit 5 Reserved
00E5
bit 6 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]
bit 8 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]
bit 9 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Error]
bit A - F Reserved
00E6 - 00E9 Reserved
Fault Description 11
bit 0 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]
bit 1 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]

00EA
bit 2- D Reserved
bit E SCF [Safety Circuit Fault]
bit F Reserved
00EB - 00ED Reserved
Fault Description 12
bit 0 - 2 Reserved
00EE
bit 5 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Fault]
bit 6 - F Reserved
00EF - 00F4 Reserved
bit 0 - 5 Reserved
00F5 bit 6 PSE [JOHB-SMP3 Protocol Set Error]
bit 7 - F Reserved 6
00E6 - 00FA Reserved
Output current
Note:
The unit of display is different for different models.
00FB
2004 to 2042, 4002 to 4023: 0.01 A
2056 to 2415, 4031 to 4675: 0.1 A
4810 to 4H12: 1 A
■ Broadcast Messages
Broadcast messages are available as read-only.
The undefined bit signal in the broadcast operation signal uses the local data signal.

Table 6.17 Broadcast Messages for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication

(Hex.)
Operation signal
Run command
bit 0
1: Run, 0: Stop
Reverse run command

bit 1
1: Reverse, 0: Forward run
bit 2 - 3 Reserved
External fault
bit 4
1: EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
0001
Fault Reset
bit 5
1: Reset command
bit 6 - B Reserved
bit C MFDI terminal S5 input
bit D MFDI terminal S6 input
bit E MFDI terminal S7 input
bit F MFDI terminal S8 input
0002 Frequency reference 30000/100%
■ Fault Trace/Fault History Contents

Table 6.18 shows the fault codes that the commands from monitors [U2-xx, U3-xx] read.
Table 6.18 Fault Trace/Fault History Contents
Fault Code Name Fault Code Name
(Hex.) (Hex.)
0002 Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] 001B PF [Input Phase Loss]
0003 Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage] 001C LF [Output Phase Loss]
0004 Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault] 001D oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]
0005 SC [Short Circuit/IGBT Failure] 001E oPr [Keypad Connection Fault]
0006 GF [Ground Fault] 001F Err [EEPROM Write Error]
0007 oC [Overcurrent] 0020 oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)]
0008 ov [Overvoltage] 0021 CE [Modbus Communication Error]
0009 oH [Heatsink Overheat] 0022 bUS [Option Communication Error]
000A oH1 [Heatsink Overheat] 0025 CF [Control Fault]
000B oL1 [Motor Overload] 0026 SvE [Zero Servo Fault]
000C oL2 [Drive Overload] 0027 EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
000D oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1] 0028 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]
000E oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] 0029 UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]
000F rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault] 002A UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]
0010 rH [Braking Resistor Overheat] 002B oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload]
0011 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)] 0030 Includes oFx Fault [Hardware Fault]
0012 EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)] 0032 dv1 [Z Pulse Fault]
0013 EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)] 0033 dv2 [Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection]
0014 EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)] 0034 dv3 [Inversion Detection]
0015 EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)] 0035 dv4 [Inversion Prevention Detection]
0016 EF8 [External Fault (Terminal S8)] 0036 LF2 [Output Current Imbalance]
0017 FAn [Internal Fan Fault] 0037 STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected]
0018 oS [Overspeed] 0038 PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault]
0019 dEv [Speed Deviation] 0039 E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err]
001A PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss] 003B SEr [Speed Search Retries Exceeded]


(Hex.) (Hex.)
0041 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback] 00A6 CPF37 [Control Circuit Error]
0042 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)] 00A7 CPF38 [Control Circuit Error]
0043 EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)] 00A8 CPF39 [Control Circuit Error]
0044 oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1] 0101 oFA00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]
0045 UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2] 0102 oFA01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]
0046 CoF [Current Offset Fault] 0106 oFA05 [Option A/D Error]
0048 oH5 [Motor Overheat (NTC Input)] 0107 oFA06 [Option Communication Error]
0049 dWFL [DriveWorksEZ Fault] 0111 oFA10 [Option RAM Error]
004A dWF1 [EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error] 0112 oFA11 [Option Ope Mode Error]
004B dWF2 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 2] 0113 oFA12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]
004C dWF3 [DriveWorksEZ Fault 3] 0114 oFA13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]
004D Tho [Thermistor Disconnect] 0115 oFA14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
004E rF [Braking Resistor Fault] 0116 oFA15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
004F boL [BrakingTransistor Overload Fault] 0117 oFA16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
0051 LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] 0118 oFA17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
0052 nSE [Node Setup Error] 0131 oFA30 [COM ID Error]
005B dv7 [Polarity Judge Timeout] 0132 oFA31 [Type Code Error]
0083 CPF02 [Control Circuit Error] 0133 oFA32 [SUM Check Error]
0084 CPF03 [Control Circuit Error] 0134 oFA33 [Option Receive Time Over]
0087 CPF06 [Control Circuit Error] 0135 oFA34 [Memobus Time Over]
0088 CPF07 [Control Circuit Error] 0136 oFA35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]
0089 CPF08 [Control Circuit Error] 0137 oFA36 [CI Check Error]
008C CPF11 [Control Circuit Error] 0138 oFA37 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]
008D CPF12 [Control Circuit Error] 0139 oFA38 [Control Reference Error]
008E CPF13 [Control Circuit Error] 013A oFA39 [Drive Receive Time Over 3]
008F CPF14 [Control Circuit Error] 013B oFA40 [CtrlResSel 1Err]
0091 CPF16 [Control Circuit Error] 013C oFA41 [Drive Receive Time Over 4]
0092 CPF17 [Control Circuit Error] 013D oFA42 [CtrlResSel 2Err]
0093 CPF18 [Control Circuit Error] 013E oFA43 [Drive Receive Time Over 1]
0094 CPF19 [Control Circuit Error] 0201 oFb00 [Option Not Compatible with Port]
0095 CPF20 [Control Circuit Error] 0202 oFb01 [Option Fault/Connection Error]
0096 CPF21 [Control Circuit Error] 0203 oFb02 [Duplicate Options]
0097 CPF22 [Control Circuit Error] 0206 oFb05 [Option A/D Error]
0098 CPF23 [Control Circuit Error] 0207 oFb06 [Option Communication Error]
0099 CPF24 [Control Circuit Error (Drive Unit Signal Fault)] 0211 oFb10 [Option RAM Error]
009B CPF26 [Control Circuit Error] 0212 oFb11 [Option Ope Mode Error] 6
009C CPF27 [Control Circuit Error] 0213 oFb12 [Drive Receive CRC Error]
009D CPF28 [Control Circuit Error] 0214 oFb13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]
009E CPF29 [Control Circuit Error] 0215 oFb14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
009F CPF30 [Control Circuit Error] 0216 oFb15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
00A0 CPF31 [Control Circuit Error] 0217 oFb16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
00A1 CPF32 [Control Circuit Error] 0218 oFb17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
00A2 CPF33 [Control Circuit Error] 0231 oFb30 [COM ID Error]
00A3 CPF34 [Control Circuit Error] 0232 oFb31 [Type Code Error]
00A4 CPF35 [Control Circuit Error] 0233 oFb32 [SUM Check Error]
00A5 CPF36 [Control Circuit Error] 0234 oFb33 [Option Receive Time Over]


(Hex.) (Hex.)
0235 oFb34 [Memobus Time Over] 0315 oFC14 [Drive Receive Abort Error]
0236 oFb35 [Drive Receive Time Over 1] 0316 oFC15 [Option Receive CRC Error]
0237 oFb36 [CI Check Error] 0317 oFC16 [Option Receive Frame Error]
0238 oFb37 [Drive Receive Time Over 1] 0318 oFC17 [Option Receive Abort Error]
0239 oFb38 [Control Reference Error] 0351 oFC50 [Encoder Option A/D Conv Error]
023A oFb39 [Drive Receive Time Over 3] 0352 oFC51 [EncOpAnlgCrctErr]
023B oFb40 [CtrlResSel 1Err] 0353 oFC52 [Encoder Option Comm Timeout]
023C oFb41 [Drive Receive Time Over 1] 0354 oFC53 [Encoder Option Comm Data Fault]
023D oFb42 [CtrlResSel 2Err] 0355 oFC54 [Encoder Error]
023E oFb43 [Drive Receive Time Over 5] 0356 oFC55 [Resolver Error]
0301 oFC00 [Option Not Compatible with Port] 0401 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]
0302 oFC01 [Option Fault/Connection Error] 0402 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]
0303 oFC02 [Duplicate Options] 040F SCF [Safety Circuit Fault]
0306 oFC05 [Option A/D Error] 0413 FAn1 [Drive Cooling Fan Failure]
0307 oFC06 [Option Communication Error] 0414 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]
0311 oFC10 [Option RAM Error] 0415 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Fault]
0312 oFC11 [Option Ope Mode Error] 0416 bCE [Bluetooth Communication Fault]
0313 oFC12 [Drive Receive CRC Error] 0437 PSE [JOHB-SMP3 Protocol Set Error]
0314 oFC13 [Drive Receive Frame Error]
■ Minor Fault/Alarm Contents

Table 6.19 shows the minor fault/alarm codes that communications register (007F (Hex.)) reads.
Table 6.19 Minor Fault/Alarm Contents (007 (Hex.))
Minor Fault/ Minor Fault/
Alarm Code Name Alarm Code Name
(Hex.) (Hex.)
0001 Uv [Undervoltage] 0017 oL1 [Motor Overload]
0002 ov [Overvoltage] 0018 oL2 [Drive Overload]
0003 oH [Heatsink Overheat] 001A EF0 [Option Card External Fault]
0004 oH2 [External Overheat (H1-XX=B)] 001B rUn [Motor Switch during Run]
0005 oL3 [Overtorque 1] 001D CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error]
0006 oL4 [Overtorque 2] 001E UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1]
0007 EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] 001F UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2]
0008 bb [Baseblock] 0020 SE [Modbus Test Mode Error]
0009 EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)] 0021 L24v [Loss of External Power 24 Supply]
000A EF4 [External Fault (Terminal S4)] 0022 oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)]
000B EF5 [External Fault (Terminal S5)] 0027 FbL [PID Feedback Loss]
000C EF6 [External Fault (Terminal S6)] 0028 FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]
000D EF7 [External Fault (Terminal S7)] 002A dnE [Drive Disabled]
000E EF8 [External Fault (Terminal S8)] 002B PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault]
000F FAn [Internal Fan Fault] 0031 E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err]
0010 oS [Overspeed] 0032 AEr [Station Address Setting Error]
0011 dEv [Speed Deviation] 0033 CyC [MECHATROLINK CommCycleSettingErr]
0012 PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss] 0034 HCA [High Current Alarm]
0014 CE [Modbus Communication Error] 0035 LT-1 [Cooling Fan Maintenance Time]
0015 bUS [Option Communication Error] 0036 LT-2 [Capacitor Maintenance Time]
0016 CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error] 0039 EF1 [External Fault (Terminal S1)]

Minor Fault/ Minor Fault/

Alarm Code Name Alarm Code Name
(Hex.) (Hex.)
003A EF2 [External Fault (Terminal S2)] 004B dWA3 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3]
003B SToF [Safe Torque OFF Hardware] 0050 oH5 [Motor Overheat (NTC Input)]
003D oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1] 0053 Tho [Thermistor Disconnect]
003E UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2] 0081 EP24v [External Power 24V Supply]
0042 TrPC [IGBT Maintenance Time (90%)] 0085 bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage]
0043 LT-3 [SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime] 0087 CP1 [Comparator 1 Limit Fault]
0044 LT-4 [IGBT Maintenance Time (50%)] 0088 CP2 [Comparator 2 Limit Fault]
0045 boL [Braking Transistor Overload] 0089 TiM [Keypad Time Not Set]
0049 dWAL [DriveWorksEZ Alarm] 008A bCE [Bluetooth Communication Error]
004A dWA2 [DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2]
◆ Error Codes
■ MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error Code List
Table 6.20 lists the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications error codes.
When an error occurs, remove the cause of the error and restart communications.
Table 6.20 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Error Codes
Error Code
Name Cause
(Hex.)
01 Function Code Error The PLC set a function code that was not 03, 08, or 10 (Hex.)
• The register number that is trying to access is not registered.

02 Register Number Error
• A starting number that was not 0001 or 0002 (Hex.) was set when broadcasting.
• Read and write data quantities are more than the 1 to 16 range. (Command message data quantity is disabled.)
• The data that was read from non-consecutive holding registers contained more than 120 bytes.
03 Bit Count Error
• The data to be written to non-consecutive holding registers contained more than 60 bytes.
• In the write mode, the number of bytes in the message is not the number of data × 2.
• Writing control data or parameters made the settings go out of the permitted setting range.
21 Data Setting Error
• A parameter setting error occurred when writing a parameter.
• Tried to write a disabled parameter during run.

• When there was a CPF06 [Control Circuit Error], the master tried to write a parameter other than one of these:
– A1-00 [Language Selection]
– A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
– A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
22 Write Mode Error – A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]

– A1-04 [Password]
– A1-05 [Password Setting]
– E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection]
– o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
• Writes the read-only data.
23
DC Bus Undervoltage
Write Error
During Uv [DC Bus Undervoltage], a Uv write disabled parameter was written. 6
Error Writing Data During
24 Tried to write a parameter from the master during parameter processing on the drive side.
Parameter Processing
25 Writing into EEPROM Writing into EEPROM write is disabled, but EEPROM write was executed from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. When
Disabled this error occurs, the keypad shows a message and the drive continues operation.
■ No Response from Slave

The slave ignores the command message from the master and will not send a response message in these
conditions:
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address for the drive side do not agree (Use H5-
01 [Drive Node Address] to set the slave address of the drive)
• When the time interval between the data of which the message is composed is longer than 24 bits

• When the data length for the command message is not accurate
Note:
• If the keypad shows CALL [Serial Comm Transmission Error], refer to “Troubleshooting” to remove the cause of the error, and try to
do communications again. If the keypad does not show CALL, check U1-19 [MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code] for the error and error
type.
• If you execute the write function code when the slave address in the command message is 00 (Hex.), all of the slaves will execute the
write command, but they will not send response messages to the master.

7
Troubleshooting
7.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................334
7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors ........................................336
7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes ........................................337
7.4 Fault ...........................................................................................................................342
7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms ..............................................................................................371
7.6 Parameter Setting Errors......................................................................................382
7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors ................................................................................................387
7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors.................................392
7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults.......................................................................393
7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display............................................................394

7.1 Section Safety
7.1 Section Safety

DANGER
WARNING
death.
Fire Hazard
Damage to Equipment

7.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Fire Hazard
material.
Crush Hazard
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is
outputting voltage.
Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause damage to the drive.
devices.
Note:
Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Unshielded wire can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.
Troubleshooting

7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors
7.2 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors

If the drive or motor do not operate correctly, check the drive keypad for a code or message.
If problems occur that are not identified in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with this
information:
• Drive model
• Drive software version
• Date of purchase
• Description of the problem (such as failure conditions)
Table 7.1 contains descriptions of the different types of faults, minor faults, alarms, and errors that can occur
during drive operation.
Contact Yaskawa if there is damage to the drive. Contact information is on the back cover of the manual.
Table 7.1 Types of Faults, Minor Faults, Alarms, and Errors
Type Drive Response
When the drive detects a fault, it will cause these conditions:
Faults • The keypad shows the fault code and and ALM/ERR of the LED Status Ring illuminate continuously.
• The drive shuts off output, and the motor coasts to a stop. Some faults let the user select a motor stopping method.
• Fault relay output MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF.
The drive will not operate until you clear the fault with a Fault Reset and the drive goes back to usual status.
When the drive detects a minor fault or an alarm, it will cause these conditions:
• The keypad shows the alarm code and and ALM/ERR on the LED Status Ring flash.
• The drive will continue to operate the motor. Some alarms let the user select a motor stopping method.
Minor Faults/Alarms
• If the drive detects a minor fault, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will switch
ON. If you do not set parameters H2-01 to H2-03 , the drive will not trigger MFDO terminals when it detects a minor
fault.
• The drive will not output a minor fault signal when it detects an alarm.
It is not necessary to do Fault Reset.
An error occurs when parameter settings do not agree or a parameter combination is incorrect. The drive will not operate
until you set the parameters correctly.
When the drive detects an operation error, these conditions will result:
Operation Errors
• The keypad shows the error code.
• Multi-function outputs do not output an alarm signal.
Find the parameters that caused the error and correct the settings.
An error occurs during Auto-Tuning.

When the drive detects a tuning error, it will cause these conditions:
Auto-Tuning Errors
• The motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again.
An error occurs when you use the keypad for a backup, restore, or verify operation.
When the drive detects a copy function error, it will cause these conditions:
Copy Function Errors
Push a key on the keypad to clear the error. Remove the cause of the error and try the backup, restore, or verify operation
again.

7.3 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes

Table 7.2 shows the possible fault, minor fault, alarm, and error codes.
The display codes are in alphabetical order. Search the table for the code shown on the keypad, and identify its
causes and possible solutions.
Note:
The number in parentheses adjacent to the code in the table identifies the fault code or minor fault code (hex. number) that was read
during MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Example: AEr (0032)
Table 7.2 List of Fault, Minor Fault, Alarm, and Error Codes
Display (Hex.) Name ALM LED Type Ref.
AEr (0032) Station Address Setting Error Flashing Alarm 371
bAT (0085) Keypad Battery Low Voltage Flashing Alarm 371
bAT (0402) Keypad Battery Low Voltage Illuminated Fault 342
bb (0008) Baseblock Flashing Alarm 371
bCE (008A) Bluetooth Communication Error Flashing Alarm 371
bCE (0416) Bluetooth Communication Fault Illuminated Fault 342
boL (0045) Braking Transistor Overload Flashing Alarm 371
boL (004F) BrakingTransistor Overload Fault Illuminated Fault 342
bUS (0015) Option Communication Error Flashing Alarm 371
bUS (0022) Option Communication Error Illuminated Fault 342
bUSy Busy - Not an alarm. 372
CALL (001D) Serial Comm Transmission Error Flashing Alarm 372
CE (0014) Modbus Communication Error Flashing Alarm 372
CE (0021) Modbus Communication Error Illuminated Fault 342
CF (0025) Control Fault Illuminated Fault 343
CoF (0046) Current Offset Fault Illuminated Fault 343
CP1 (0087) Comparator 1 Limit Error Flashing Alarm 372
CP1 (0414) Comparator 1 Limit Fault Illuminated Fault 343
CP2 (0088) Comparator 2 Limit Error Flashing Alarm 373
CP2 (0415) Comparator 2 Limit Fault Illuminated Fault 343
CPF00 Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 344
CPF01 Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 344
CPF02 (0083)
Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 344, 344
CPF03 (0084)
CPF06 (0087) Control Circuit Error (EEPROM Memory Data Error) Illuminated Fault 344 Troubleshooting
CPF07 (0088)
Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 344, 344
CPF08 (0089)
CPF10 (008B) - CPF14 (008F) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 344 - 345
CPF16 (0091) - CPF23 (0098) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 345, 346
CPF24 (0099) Control Circuit Error (Drive Unit Signal Fault) Illuminated Fault 346 7
CPF26 (009B) - CPF39 (00A8) Control Circuit Error Illuminated Fault 346, 347
CPyE Error Writing Data - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
CrST Remove RUN Command to Reset Flashing Not an alarm. 373
CSEr Control Mode Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
CyC (0033) MECHATROLINK CommCycleSettingErr Flashing Alarm 373
CyPo (0029) Cycle Power to Accept Changes Flashing Alarm 373
dEv (0011) Speed Deviation Flashing Alarm 373
dEv (0019) Speed Deviation Illuminated Fault 348

dFPS Drive Model Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
dnE (002A) Drive Disabled Flashing Alarm 373
dv1 (0032) Z Pulse Fault Illuminated Fault 348
dv2 (0033) Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection Illuminated Fault 348
dv3 (0034) Inversion Detection Illuminated Fault 348
dv4 (0035) Inversion Prevention Detection Illuminated Fault 349
dv7 (005B) Polarity Judge Timeout Illuminated Fault 349
dWA2 (004A) DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2 Flashing Alarm 373
dWA3 (004B) DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3 Flashing Alarm 373
dWAL (0049) DriveWorksEZ Alarm Flashing Alarm 373
dWF1 (004A) EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data Error Illuminated Fault 349
dWF2 (004B) DriveWorksEZ Fault 2 Illuminated Fault 349
dWF3 (004C) DriveWorksEZ Fault 3 Illuminated Fault 349
dWFL (0049) DriveWorksEZ Fault Illuminated Fault 349
E5 (0031) MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err Flashing Alarm 373
E5 (0039) MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err Illuminated Fault 350
EF (0007) FWD/REV Run Command Input Error Flashing Alarm 374
EF0 (001A) Option Card External Fault Flashing Alarm 374
EF0 (0027) Option Card External Fault Illuminated Fault 350
EF1 (0042) External Fault (Terminal S1) Illuminated Fault 350
EF1 (0039) External Fault (Terminal S1) Flashing Alarm 374
EF2 (003A) External Fault (Terminal S2) Flashing Alarm 374
EF3 (0009) External Fault (Terminal S3) Flashing Alarm 374
EF4 (000A) External Fault (Terminal S4) Flashing Alarm 374
EF5 (000B) External Fault (Terminal S5) Flashing Alarm 374
EF6 (000C) External Fault (Terminal S6) Flashing Alarm 375
EF7 (000D) External Fault (Terminal S7) Flashing Alarm 375
EF8 (000E) External Fault (Terminal S8) Flashing Alarm 375
End1 Excessive Rated Voltage Setting Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End5 Resistance Tuning Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End7 No-Load Current Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 387
End8 HFI Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 388
End9 Initial Pole Detection Alarm Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 388
EP24v (0081) External Power 24V Supply Flashing Alarm 375
Er-01 Motor Data Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 388

Er-02 Drive in an Alarm State Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 388
Er-03 STOP Button was Pressed Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 388
Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-05 No-Load Current Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-08 Rated Slip Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-09 Acceleration Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-10 Motor Direction Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-11 Motor Speed Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 389
Er-12 Current Detection Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-13 Leakage Inductance Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-14 Motor Speed Error 2 Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-15 Torque Saturation Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-16 Inertia ID Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-17 Reverse Prohibited Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-18 Back EMF Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-19 PM Inductance Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-20 Stator Resistance Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-21 Z Pulse Correction Error Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 390
Er-25 HighFreq Inject Param Tuning Err Flashing Auto-Tuning Error 391
Err (001F) EEPROM Write Error Illuminated Fault 351
FAn (000F) Internal Fan Fault Flashing Alarm 375
FAn (0017) Internal Fan Fault Illuminated Fault 351
FAn1 (0413) Drive Cooling Fan Fault Illuminated Fault 351
FbH (0028) Excessive PID Feedback Flashing Alarm 375
FbH (0041) Excessive PID Feedback Illuminated Fault 352
FbL (0027) PID Feedback Loss Flashing Alarm 375
FbL (0028) PID Feedback Loss Illuminated Fault 352
GF (0006) Ground Fault Illuminated Fault 352
HCA (0034) High Current Alarm Flashing Alarm 376
HLCE (0411) High Level Communication Errors Illuminated Fault 352
iFEr Communication Err - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
L24v (0021) Loss of External Power 24 Supply Flashing Alarm 376
LF (001C) Output Phase Loss Illuminated Fault 352

Troubleshooting
LF2 (0036) Output Current Imbalance Illuminated Fault 353
LoG Log Com Error Flashing Alarm 376
LSo (0051) Low Speed Motor Step-Out Illuminated Fault 353
LT-1 (0035) Cooling Fan Maintenance Time Flashing Alarm 376
LT-2 (0036) Capacitor Maintenance Time Flashing Alarm 376 7

LT-3 (0043) SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime Flashing Alarm 377
LT-4 (0044) IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) Flashing Alarm 377
ndAT Model,VolClass,Capacity Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
nSE (0052) Node Setup Error Illuminated Fault 353
oC (0007) Overcurrent Illuminated Fault 353
oFA00 (0101) Option Not Compatible with Port Illuminated Fault 354
oFA01 (0102) Option Fault/Connection Error Illuminated Fault 355
oFA02 (0103) Duplicate Options Illuminated Fault 355

oFA03 (0104) - oFA06 (0107) Option Card Error at Option Port (CN5-A) Illuminated Fault 355, 355
oFA10 (0111)
Option Card Error at Option Port (CN5-A) Illuminated Fault 355, 355
oFA11 (0112)
oFA12 (0113) - oFA17 (0118) Option Card Connection Error (CN5-A) Illuminated Fault 355 - 356
oFA30 (0131) - oFA43 (013E) Communication Option Card Connection Error (CN5-A) Illuminated Fault 356 - 358
oFb00 (0201) Option Not Compatible with Port Illuminated Fault 358
oFb01 (0202) Option Fault/Connection Error Illuminated Fault 358
oFb02 (0203) Duplicate Options Illuminated Fault 358
oFb03 (0204) - oFb11 (0212) Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port (CN5-B) Illuminated Fault 358 - 359
oFb12 (0213) - oFb17 (0218) Option Card Connection Error (CN5-B) Illuminated Fault 359 - 359
oFC00 (0301) Option Not Compatible with Port Illuminated Fault 359
oFC01 (0302) Option Fault/Connection Error Illuminated Fault 359
oFC02 (0303) Duplicate Options Illuminated Fault 360
oFC03 (0304) - oFC11 (0312) Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port (CN5-C) Illuminated Fault 360 - 360
oFC12 (0313) - oFC17 (0318) Option Card Connection Error (CN5-C) Illuminated Fault 360 - 361
oFC50 (0351) - oFC55 (0356) Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port (CN5-C) Illuminated Fault 361 - 361
oH (0003) Heatsink Overheat Flashing Alarm 377
oH (0009) Heatsink Overheat Illuminated Fault 362
oH1 (000A) Heatsink Overheat Illuminated Fault 362
oH2 (0004) External Overheat (H1-XX=B) Flashing Alarm 377
oH3 (001D) Motor Overheat (PTC Input) Illuminated Fault 362
oH3 (0022) Motor Overheat (PTC Input) Flashing Alarm 377
oH4 (0020) Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input) Illuminated Fault 363
oL1 (000B) Motor Overload Illuminated Fault 363
oL2 (000C) Drive Overload Illuminated Fault 364
oL3 (0005) Overtorque 1 Flashing Alarm 378
oL3 (000D) Overtorque Detection 1 Illuminated Fault 364
oL4 (0006) Overtorque 2 Flashing Alarm 378
oL4 (000E) Overtorque Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 364
oL5 (003D) Mechanical Weakening Detection 1 Flashing Alarm 378
oL5 (0044) Mechanical Weakening Detection 1 Illuminated Fault 364
oL7 (002B) High Slip Braking Overload Illuminated Fault 365
oPE01 Drive Capacity Setting Fault Flashing Parameter Setting Error 382
oPE02 Parameter Range Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 382
oPE03 Multi-Function Input Setting Err Flashing Parameter Setting Error 382
oPE05 Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err Flashing Parameter Setting Error 383
oPE06 Control Method Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 384
oPE07 Analog Input Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 384
oPE08 Parameter Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 384
oPE09 PID Control Selection Fault Flashing Parameter Setting Error 385
oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 385
oPE11 Carrier Frequency Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 385
oPE13 Pulse Monitor Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 385
oPE15 Torque Control Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 386
oPE16 Energy Saving Constants Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 386
oPE18 Online Tuning Param Setting Err Flashing Parameter Setting Error 386
oPE20 PG-F3 Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 386

oPE33 Digital Output Selection Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 386
oPr (001E) Keypad Connection Fault Illuminated Fault 365
oS (0010) Overspeed Flashing Alarm 378
oS (0018) Overspeed Illuminated Fault 365
ov (0002) DC Bus Overvoltage Flashing Alarm 378
ov (0008) Overvoltage Illuminated Fault 365
ovEr Too Many Parameters Changed - Not an alarm. 379
PASS Modbus Communication Test Flashing Not an alarm. 379
PE1 (0047) PLC Fault 1 Illuminated Fault 366
PE2 (0048) PLC Fault 2 Illuminated Fault 366
PF (0047) Input Phase Loss Flashing Alarm 379
PF (001B) Input Phase Loss Illuminated Fault 367
PGo (0012) Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss Flashing Alarm 379
PGo (001A) Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss Illuminated Fault 367
PGoH (002B) Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault Flashing Alarm 379
PGoH (0038) Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault Illuminated Fault 367
PSE (0437) JOHB-SMP3 Protocol Set Error Illuminated Fault 367
PWEr DWEZ Password Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
rdEr Error Reading Data - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
rF (004E) Braking Resistor Fault Illuminated Fault 367
rH (0010) Braking Resistor Overheat Illuminated Fault 367
rr (000F) Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault Illuminated Fault 368
rUn (001B) Motor Switch during Run Flashing Alarm 379
SC (0005) Short Circuit/IGBT Failure Illuminated Fault 368
SCF (040F) Safety Circuit Fault Illuminated Fault 368
SE (0020) Modbus Test Mode Error Flashing Alarm 379
SEr (003B) Speed Search Retries Exceeded Illuminated Fault 368
STo (003C) Safe Torque OFF - Alarm 380
SToF (003B) Safe Torque OFF Flashing Alarm 380
STPo (0037) Motor Step-Out Detected Illuminated Fault 368
SvE (0026) Zero Servo Fault Illuminated Fault 369
TiM (0089) Keypad Time Not Set Flashing Alarm 380
TiM (0401) Keypad Time Not Set Illuminated Fault 369

Troubleshooting
TrPC (0042) IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) Flashing Alarm 380
UL3 (001E) Undertorque Detection 1 Flashing Alarm 380
UL3 (0029) Undertorque Detection 1 Illuminated Fault 369
UL4 (001F) Undertorque Detection 2 Flashing Alarm 380
UL4 (002A) Undertorque Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 369 7

UL5 (003E) Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 Flashing Alarm 380
UL5 (0045) Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 Illuminated Fault 369
Uv (0001) Undervoltage Flashing Alarm 380
Uv1 (0002) DC Bus Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 369
Uv2 (0003) Control Power Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 370
Uv3 (0004) Soft Charge Answerback Fault Illuminated Fault 370
vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch - Backup Function Runtime Error 392
vFyE Parameters do not Match - Backup Function Runtime Error 392

7.4 Fault
7.4 Fault
This section gives information about some of the causes and possible solutions of faults. You must use the Fault
Reset operation to remove the fault before you can operate the drive. Use the information in this table to remove
the cause of the fault.
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions
bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage The keypad battery voltage is low. Replace the keypad battery.
Note:
Use o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] to enable/disable bAT detection.
bCE Bluetooth Communication Fault The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile Use the smartphone or tablet 10 m (32.8 ft) or nearer to the
or DriveWizard installed is too far from the keypad. keypad.
Note:
bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m (32.8 ft)
or nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the
smartphone or tablet.
Radio waves from a different device are causing Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio
interference with communications between the bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio
smartphone or tablet and keypad. interference.
Note:
• The drive detects this error when you use the Bluetooth LCD keypad to operate the drive from a smartphone or tablet.
• Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
• Set the stopping method for this fault in o2-27 [bCE Detection Selection].
boL BrakingTransistor Overload Fault The duty cycle of the braking transistor is high (the • Install a braking unit (CDBR-series).
regeneration power or repetition frequency is high). • Install a regenerative converter.
• Increase the deceleration time.
You enabled the protective function for the braking Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable].
transistor when you have a regenerative converter.
The braking transistor in the drive is broken. Replace the entire drive.
Note:
Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault.
bUS Option Communication Error The drive did not receive a signal from the Correct wiring errors.
controller.
The communications cable wiring is incorrect.
There is a short-circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.
or the communications cable is not connected. • Replace the defective communications cable.
Electrical interference caused a communication data • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
error. ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
• Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the
electrical interference, then use a Surge Protective Device if
necessary.
• Use only the recommended cables or other shielded line.
Ground the shield on the controller side or the drive input
power side.
• Separate the communication wiring from drive power lines,
and install a noise filter to the input side of the power supply
for communication.
• Decrease the effects of electrical interference from the
controller.
The option is incorrectly installed to the drive. Correctly install the option to the drive.
The option is damaged. If the fault continues and the wiring is correct, replace the option.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the Run command or frequency reference is assigned to the option card.
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F6-01 [Communication Error Selection].
CE Modbus Communication Error The communications cable wiring is incorrect. Correct wiring errors.
There is a short circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.

7.4 Fault
interference.
necessary.
power side.
for communication.
controller.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not correctly receive control data for the CE detection time set to H5-09 [CE Detection Time].
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method].
CF Control Fault Motor parameters are set incorrectly Correctly set the motor parameters and do Auto-Tuning again.
When A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = When Rotational Auto-Tuning changes or the installation
Advanced Open Loop Vector], the drive takes long environment changes, make sure that you do Line-to-Line
to ramp to stop because of these settings: Resistance Tuning and set L8-20 = 0 [Control Fault & Step Out
• The torque limit setting is too low. Detect = Disabled].
• L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Note:
Enabled]. After you set L8-20 = 0, do test runs and examine the drive to
• d5-01 = 1 [Torque Control Selection = Torque make sure that it starts and stops correctly.
Control].
The torque limit setting is too low. Adjust L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].
The load inertia is too large. • Adjust C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08 [Deceleration Times].
• Set the frequency reference to the minimum output frequency,
and stop the Run command when the drive stops deceleration.
The drive is trying to ramp to stop a machine that Correctly set b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection].
cannot do ramp to stop or on a machine for which
deceleration is not necessary.
The motor and drive are connected incorrectly. Correct wiring errors.
Line-to-line Resistance Tuning is not done. Do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance.
The drive received a Run command while the motor • Examine the sequence and input the Run command after the
was coasting. motor fully stops.
• Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the torque reference is more than the torque limit for 3 seconds or longer while the drive ramps to stop.
CoF Current Offset Fault The drive starts operation while the induced voltage • Make a sequence that does not restart operation when induced
stays in the motor (during coasting to a stop or after voltage stays in the motor.
fast deceleration). • Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
• Use Speed Search from Fmax or Fref [H1-xx = 61, 62] to do a
speed search through one of the external terminals.
Note:
When controlling the PM motor, External Speed Search
commands 1 and 2 operate the same. Troubleshooting
A drive hardware problem occurred. • Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault or de-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the drive.
CP1 Comparator 1 Limit Fault The monitor value set in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the fault.
Monitor Selection] was in the range of H2-21
[Comparator 1 Lower Limit] and H2-22
[Comparator 1 Upper Limit]. 7
Note:
• The drive detects this error when the terminal is set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 66 [MFDO Function Selection = Comparator1].
• Set the stopping method for this fault in H2-33 [Comparator1 Protection Selection].
CP2 Comparator 2 Limit Fault The monitor value set in H2-26 [Comparator 2 Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the fault.
Monitor Selection] was outside the range of H2-27
[Comparator 2 Upper Limit].
Note:
• The drive detects this error when the terminal is set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 67 [MFDO Function Selection = Comparator2].
• Set the stopping method for this fault in H2-35 [Comparator2 Protection Selection].

7.4 Fault
CPF00 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
information about replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• Fault trace is not available for these faults.
Note:
Note:
Note:
CPF06 Control Circuit Error (EEPROM The drive power supply was de-energized while a Set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire
memory Data Error) communication option entered a parameter Write Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] and initialize the drive.
command.
An EEPROM peripheral circuit error occurred. • Re-energize the drive.

information about how to replace the control board, contact
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is an error in the data written to the drive EEPROM.
Note:
Note:
Note:

7.4 Fault
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Troubleshooting
Note:
• Re-energize the drive.

CPF19 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred.
7
Note:
Note:

7.4 Fault
Note:
Note:
Note:
CPF24 Control Circuit Error (Drive Unit A drive hardware problem occurred. • Re-energize the drive.
Signal Fault) • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:

7.4 Fault
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Troubleshooting
Note:

CPF38 Control Circuit Error A drive hardware problem occurred.
7
Note:
Note:

7.4 Fault
dEv Speed Deviation The load is too heavy. Decrease the load.
Acceleration and deceleration times are set too Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
short. Deceleration Time].
The dEv detection level settings are incorrect. Adjust F1-10 [Speed Deviation Detection Level] and F1-11
[Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime].
The load is locked up. Examine the machine.
The holding brake is stopping the motor. Release the holding brake.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the difference between the detected speed and the speed reference is more than the setting of F1-10 for longer than F1-11.
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F1-04 [Speed Deviation Detection Select].
dv1 Z Pulse Fault The encoder option card or the encoder on the 1. Repair wiring errors and connect disconnected wires.
motor side is damaged. Correctly ground the shielded wire of the encoder cable.
2. Re-energize the drive
The encoder cable is disconnected or wired
incorrectly. 3. If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not detect a Z pulse during one motor rotation.
dv2 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection Noise interference along the encoder cable. Isolate the encoder cable from the drive output line or a different
source of electrical interference.
The encoder cable is disconnected or wired Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires in the encoder
incorrectly. cable, and repair problems. Correctly ground the shielded wire of
the encoder cable.
The drive is operating a motor with 24 or more • Set F1-46 = 1 [dv2 Detection Method Selection =
poles at zero speed. MechanicalAngle Detection Method].
• Increase F1-17 [Deviation 2 Detection Selection].
• Increase F1-47 [Deviation 2 Detection Level].
Note:
If you change the setting of F1-47, the sensitivity of detection
for dv2 can decrease.
The PG option or the encoder on the motor side is Repair the wiring and re-energize the drive, then replace the PG
damaged. option or the encoder if the problem continues.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it detects more than one Z pulse per rotation for the number of rotations set in F1-17 [Deviation 2 Detection Selection].
dv3 Inversion Detection E5-11 [Encoder Z-Pulse Offset] is set incorrectly. Correctly set the value for Δθ to E5-11 as specified by the values
on the motor nameplate.
There is a new encoder or the motor rotation Do Z Pulse Offset Tuning.

direction changed.
An external force on the load side rotated the motor. • Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction.
• Find and repair problems on the load side that cause the motor
to rotate from the load side.
Noise interference along the encoder cable. Correctly ground the shielded wire of the encoder cable.
incorrectly. cable, and repair problems.
The setting for F1-05 [Encoder 1 Rotation Correctly connect the motor wiring for each phase (U, V, W).
Selection] is the opposite of the direction of motor
rotation.
The drive incorrectly detected the motor magnetic When U6-57 [PolePolarityDeterVal] < 819, increase n8-84
pole position. [Polarity Detection Current]. Consult the motor manufacturer for
information about maximum setting values.
n8-84 [Polarity Detection Current] is too low. Increase n8-84 from the default. Consult the motor manufacturer
for information about maximum setting values.
Pole Position Detection failed. If you are using an IPM motor, do High Frequency Injection
Auto-Tuning.
The PG option or the encoder on the motor side is Repair the wiring and re-energize the drive, then replace the PG
damaged. option card or the PG if the problem continues.

7.4 Fault
The drive incorrectly detected the motor magnetic When U6-57 [PolePolarityDeterVal] < 819, set n8-84 [Polarity
pole position. Detection Current > default setting.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if:
–the torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions.
–the speed reference and actual motor speed are more than 30% different for the number of times set to F1-18 [Deviation 3 Detection Selection].
dv4 Inversion Prevention Detection An external force on the load side rotated the motor. • Make sure that the motor is rotating in the correct direction.
• Find and repair problems on the load side that cause the motor
to rotate from the load side.
• Disable detection of this fault for applications that rotate the
motor from the load side in the opposite direction of the speed
reference. The drive will not detect this fault if F1-19 = 0
[Deviation 4 Detection Selection = Disabled].
E5-11 [Encoder Z-Pulse Offset] is set incorrectly. Correctly set the value for Δθ to E5-11 as specified by the values
on the motor nameplate.
There is a new encoder or the motor rotation Do Z Pulse Offset Tuning.

direction changed.
Noise interference along the encoder cable. Correctly ground the shielded wire of the encoder cable.
The drive incorrectly detected the motor magnetic If the value for U6-57 [PolePolarityDeterVal] is lower than 819,
pole position. increase the value set in n8-84 [Polarity Detection Current].
Consult the motor manufacturer for information about maximum
setting values.
The setting of n8-84 [Polarity Detection Current] is Increase the n8-84 setting from the default. Consult the motor
too low. manufacturer for information about maximum setting values.
Pole Position Detection failed. If you are using an IPM motor, do High Frequency Injection
Auto-Tuning.
The PG option card or the encoder on the motor Repair the wiring and re-energize the drive, then replace the PG
side is damaged. option card or the PG if the problem continues.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the pulses in the opposite direction of the speed reference are more than the value set in F1-19.
dv7 Polarity Judge Timeout There is a disconnection in the motor coil winding. Measure the motor line-to-line resistance and replace the motor if
a coil is disconnected.
The screws on the drive output terminals are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it cannot detect polarity in a pre-set length of time.
dWF1 EEPROM Memory DWEZ Data There is an error in the EEPROM peripheral circuit. • Re-energize the drive.
Error • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive. For
There is a problem with the EEPROM data. Set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire
Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] to initialize the drive, then
upload the DriveWorksEZ project to the drive again. Troubleshooting
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is an error in the DriveWorksEZ program that was saved to EEPROM.
dWF2 DriveWorksEZ Fault 2 There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
fault. This is not a drive fault.
Note: 7
dWF3 DriveWorksEZ Fault 3 There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
Note:
dWFL DriveWorksEZ Fault There was a fault in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
Note:

7.4 Fault
E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog The drive detected a watchdog circuit exception Examine the MECHATROLINK cable connection. If this error
Timer Err while it received data from the controller. occurs frequently, examine the wiring and decrease the effects of
electrical interference as specified by these manuals:
• MECHATROLINK-II Installation Guide (MECHATROLINK
Members Association, manual number MMATDEP011)
• MECHATROLINK-III Installation Manual
(MECHATROLINK Members Association, publication
number MMATDEP018)
Note:
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in F6-25 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel].
EF0 Option Card External Fault The communication option received an external 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
fault from the controller. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input from the controller.
A programming error occurred on the controller Examine the operation of the controller program.
side.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the alarm function on the external device side is operating.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in F6-03 [Comm External Fault (EF0) Select].
EF1 External Fault (Terminal S1) MFDI terminal S1 caused an external fault through 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
an external device. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input in the MFDI.
The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S1.
External Fault [H1-01 = 20 to 2B] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
terminal S1, but the terminal is not in use.
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:

7.4 Fault
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Err EEPROM Write Error There was a problem with the EEPROM hardware. • Re-energize the drive.
• If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the board.
Electrical interference corrupted the data while it • Push ENTER Key.

was writing to the EEPROM of the drive. • Set the parameters again.
Note:
FAn Internal Fan Fault The circulation fan stopped operating correctly. • Examine circulation fan operation.
• Examine U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] and U4-04 [Cool
Fan Maintenance]. If there is damage to the circulation fan or
if the performance life of the fan is expired, replace the fan. Troubleshooting
Note:
FAn1 Drive Cooling Fan Fault The cooling fan stopped operating correctly. • Examine cooling fan operation.
Fan Maintenance]. If the performance life of the cooling fan is
7
expired or if there is damage to the fan, replace the fan.
The circulation fan is damaged. • Examine circulation fan operation.

if the performance life of the fan is expired, replace the fan.
Note:

7.4 Fault
FbH Excessive PID Feedback The FbH detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust b5-36 [PID High Feedback Detection Lvl] and b5-37 [PID
High Feedback Detection Time].
There is a problem with the PID feedback wiring. Correct errors with the PID control wiring.
The feedback sensor is not operating correctly. Examine the sensors on the control device side.
A fault occurred in the feedback input circuit of the Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
drive. replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the PID feedback input is more than the level set in b5-36 for longer than b5-37.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select].
FbL PID Feedback Loss The FbL detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl] and b5-14 [PID
Feedback Loss Detection Time].
representative.
Note:
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select].
GF Ground Fault Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.
The motor main circuit cable is contacting ground • Examine the motor main circuit cable for damage, and repair
to make a short circuit. short circuits.
• Measure the resistance between the motor main circuit cable
and the ground terminal. If there is electrical conduction,
replace the cable.
An increase in the stray capacitance of the cable and • If the wiring length of the cable is more than 100 m, decrease
the ground terminal caused an increase in the the carrier frequency.
leakage current. • Decrease the stray capacitance.
There was a problem with the drive hardware. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if a current short to ground was more than 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive.
• L5-08 [Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2] disables the Auto Restart function.
HLCE High Level Communication Errors Communication data error occurred between the Examine the wiring between the option and the master drive and
option and the master drive when you use Gateway remove the cause of the fault.
function.
The master drive detects oFxxx and the slave drive
detects HLCE.
LF Output Phase Loss The motor main circuit cable is disconnected. Connect motor main circuit cable wiring. Correct wiring errors in
the main circuit drive input power.
There is a disconnection in the motor coil winding. If a coil is disconnected, measure the motor Line-to-Line
Resistance and replace the motor.
The screws on the drive output terminals are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
The rated output current of the motor is less than Examine the drive capacity or the motor output to be applied.
5% of the drive rated current.
You are trying to use a single-phase motor. The drive cannot operate a single-phase motor.
The output transistor in the drive is damaged. • Re-energize the drive.

Note:
• The drive detects this fault if phase loss occurs on the output side of the drive.
• Set L8-07 [Output Phase Loss Protection Sel] to enable and disable LF detection.

7.4 Fault
LF2 Output Current Imbalance There is phase loss in the wiring on the output side Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires on the output
of the drive. side of the drive, and repair problems.
The screws on the drive output terminals are loose. Tighten the terminal screws to a correct tightening torque.
There is not balance between the three phases of the • Measure the Line-to-Line Resistance for each motor phase and
PM motor impedance. make sure that resistance is equal in the three phases, and that
all wires are connected correctly.
• Replace the motor.
The drive output circuit is broken. • Re-energize the drive.

The voltage compensation-related parameters are Set C4-20 = 0 [Voltage Compensation Adjust 1 = 0 Hz].
incorrect.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if there is not balance between the three phases of the output current from the PM motor.
LSo Low Speed Motor Step-Out The motor code set incorrectly. • Set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] correctly as specified
by the motor.
• For specialized motors, refer to the motor test report and set
E5-xx correctly.
The load is too large. • Decrease the load.

• Replace the drive and motor with larger capacity models.
An external force on the load side caused the motor Find and repair problems on the load side that cause the motor to
to move at start. rotate from the load side.
The drive incorrectly detected the motor magnetic • Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled].
pole position. • If the value for U6-57 [PolePolarityDeterVal] is lower than
819, increase the value set in n8-84 [Polarity Detection
Current]. Consult the motor manufacturer for information
about maximum setting values.
The setting of n8-84 [Polarity Detection Current] is Increase the n8-84 setting from the default. Consult the motor
too low. manufacturer for information about maximum setting values.
Incorrect values set in L8-93 [Low Speed Pull-out Increase the values set in L8-93 to L8-95.
DetectionTime], L8-94 [Low Speed Pull-out Detect
Level], and L8-95 [Low Speed Pull-out Amount].
The drive incorrectly detected the motor magnetic If you are using an IPM motor, do High Frequency Injection
pole position. Auto-Tuning.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if it detects step-out while running at low speed.
• LSo is a protective function that stops the motor and stops the reverse run if a motor without a motor code incorrectly detects the initial polarity. To quickly detect motor
reversal, decrease the values set in L8-93 to L8-95 to a range in which the drive does not malfunction.
nSE Node Setup Error The H1-xx = 47 [Node Setup (CANopen)] terminal Stop the drive when the Node Setup function is in use.
was activated during run.
The drive received a Run command while the Node

Setup function was active.
Note:
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions Troubleshooting
oC Overcurrent The load is too heavy. • Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model if the current
value is more than the drive rated current.
• Decrease the load or replace with a larger drive to prevent
sudden changes in the current level.
Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation. 7
replace the cable.
A short circuit or ground fault on the drive output • Make sure that there is not a short circuit in terminal B1 and
side caused damage to the output transistor of the terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Make sure that there is not a
drive. short circuit in terminals - and terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/
T3.
• If there is a short circuit, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

7.4 Fault
The acceleration time is too short. • Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to
the load inertia and the specified acceleration time.
• Increase the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07
[Acceleration Times] to get the necessary torque.
• Increase the values set in C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve
Characteristics] to get the necessary torque.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or • Examine the motor nameplate, the motor, and the drive to
a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor
motor output of the drive. rated current.
A magnetic contactor was switched at the output. Set the operation sequence to not turn ON or OFF the magnetic
contactor while the drive is outputting voltage.
The V/f pattern settings are incorrect. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
voltage. Decrease the voltage if it is too high compared to the
frequency.
• Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. For motor 2,
adjust E3-04 to E3-10.
The torque compensation gain is too large. Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to
make sure that the motor does not stall.
Electrical interference caused a problem. Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground
wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical interference.
The gain during overexcitation operation is too • Find the time when the fault occurs.
large. • If the fault occurs at the same time as overexcitation operation,
decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB)
Gain] and consider the motor flux saturation.
The drive received a Run command while the motor • Examine the sequence and input the Run command after the
was coasting. motor fully stops.
• Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled] or
set H1-xx = 61, 62 [Speed Search from Fmax or Fref] to input
speed search commands from the MFDI terminals.
In PM Control Methods, the setting of the motor • Enter the correct motor code to E5-01 [PM Motor Code
code is incorrect. Selection] as specified by the PM motor.
E5-xx [PM Motor Settings] correctly.
If the drive detects the fault at start or in the low • Set E5-xx [PM Motor Parameters] correctly or do Rotational
speed range (10% or less) and n8-57 = 1 [HFI Auto-Tuning.
Overlap Selection = Enabled] for PM Control • Decrease the value of n8-41 [HFI P Gain] in 0.5-unit
methods, the high frequency injection gain is too increments.
high.
Note:
Set n8-41 > 0.0 for IPM motors.
The current flowing in the motor is more than the Correct the value set in L8-27.
value set in L8-27 [Overcurrent Detection Gain] for
PM Control Methods.
The control method is set incorrectly for the motor. Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] correctly.
The motor main circuit cable is too long. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
Speed search does not complete at start when you When E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction (IM)], set b3-
set A1-02 = 8 [EZ Vector Control] and use an 24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current Detection
induction motor. Speed Search].
An overcurrent occurred during overexcitation • Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB)
deceleration. Gain].
• Decrease the value set in n3-21 [HSB Current Suppression
Level].
When you use an IE3 premium efficiency motor. Use these values to adjust the parameters.
• L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time] = default value ×
2
Note:
• This fault occurs if the drive sensors detect a drive output current more than the specified overcurrent detection level.
oFA00 Option Not Compatible with Port The option connected to connector CN5-A is not Connect the option to the correct connector.
compatible. Note:
Encoder options are not compatible with connector CN5-A.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFA01 Option Fault/Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5-A is 1. De-energize the drive.
not compatible. 2. Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the
option card to the connector on the drive.
Note:
oFA02 Duplicate Options The same option cards or the same type of option Connect the option card to the correct connector.
cards are connected to connectors CN5-A, B, and C. Note:
Use connectors CN5-C and CN5-B to connect two encoder
option cards.
Note:
oFA03 Diagnostic Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
2. Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the
connector.
3. If the problem continues, replace the option card.
Note:
oFA04 Flash Write Mode A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA05 Option A/D Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA06 Option Communication Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA10 Option RAM Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
Troubleshooting
oFA11 Option Ope Mode Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
7
oFA12 Drive Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFA13 Drive Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA14 Drive Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA15 Option Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA16 Option Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA17 Option Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA30 COM ID Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA31 Type Code Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA32 SUM Check Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA33 Option Receive Time Over A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFA34 Memobus Time Over A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA35 Drive Receive Time Over 1 A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFA36 CI Check Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
connector.
Note:
oFA38 Control Reference Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
connector.
Note:
oFA40 CtrlResSel 1Err A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
Troubleshooting
connector.
Note:
7
oFA42 CtrlResSel 2Err A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:

7.4 Fault
connector.
Note:
oFb00 Option Not Compatible with Port The option connected to connector CN5-B is not Connect the option to the correct connector.
compatible. Note:
DO-A3, AO-A3, PG-B3, and PG-X3 options can connect to
connector CN5-B. To connect only one PG option card, use
the CN5-C connector.
Note:
oFb01 Option Fault/Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5-B was 1. De-energize the drive.
changed during operation. 2. Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the
Note:
oFb02 Duplicate Options The same option cards or the same type of option Connect the option card to the correct connector.
cards are connected to connectors CN5-A, B, and C.
Note:
oFb03 Diagnostic Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb04 Flash Write Mode A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb05 Option A/D Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb06 Option Communication Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb10 Option RAM Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFb11 Option Ope Mode Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb12 Drive Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb13 Drive Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb14 Drive Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb15 Option Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb16 Option Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFb17 Option Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
Troubleshooting
oFC00 Option Not Compatible with Port The option connected to connector CN5-C is not Connect the option to the correct connector.
compatible. Note:
AI-A3, DI-A3, and communication options cannot be
connected to the CN5-C connector.
Note:
7
oFC01 Option Fault/Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5-C was 1. De-energize the drive.
changed during operation. 2. Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFC02 Duplicate Options The same option cards or the same type of option Connect the option card to the correct connector.
cards are connected to connectors CN5-A, B, and C.
Note:
oFC03 Diagnostic Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC04 Flash Write Mode A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC05 Option A/D Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC06 Option Card Error Occurred at A fault occurred in the option. 1. De-energize the drive.
Option Port (CN5-C) 2. Make sure that the option is correctly connected to the
connector.
3. Re-energize the drive. If the problem continues, replace the
option.
You re-energized the drive when: 1. De-energize the drive main circuit power supply and the
• There is an encoder option installed the drive external 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC.
• The drive main circuit power supply is energized 2. After the keypad display goes out, energize the drive main
circuit power supply again.
• There is an external 24 V power supply
connected to terminals PS-AC. 3. Supply the external 24 V power to terminals PS-AC.
When you use an encoder, de-energize the drive main circuit

power supply.
Note:
oFC10 Option RAM Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC11 Option Ope Mode Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC12 Drive Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oFC13 Drive Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC14 Drive Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC15 Option Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC16 Option Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC17 Option Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card. 1. De-energize the drive.
connector.
Note:
oFC50 EncOp A/D CnvErr A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note:
oFC51 EncOpAnlgCrctErr A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note:
oFC52 Enc Com Timeout A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note: Troubleshooting
oFC53 Enc Com Data Flt A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note:
Code Name Causes Possible Solutions 7
oFC54 Encoder Error A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note:
oFC55 Resolver Error A fault occurred in the option card. Refer to the manual for the PG-RT3 or PG-F3 option card.
Note:

7.4 Fault
oH Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature of the drive is more than the value set • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
in L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].
• Install a cooling device (cooling fan or air conditioner) to
lower the ambient temperature.
• Remove objects near the drive that are producing too much
heat.
The load is too heavy. • Measure the output current.

• Decrease the load.
• Decrease the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency
Selection].
The internal cooling fan of the drive stopped. 1. Use the procedures in this manual to replace the cooling fan.
2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the value set in L8-02.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L8-03 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection].
oH1 Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature of the drive is more than the oH1 • Increase the airflow in the control panel.
detection level.
heat.
The load is too heavy. • Measure the output current.

Selection].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than the oH1 detection level. o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] determines the oH1 detection
level.
oH3 Motor Overheat (PTC Input) The thermistor wiring that detects motor Correct wiring errors.
temperature is defective.
A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
Example: The machine is locked.
The motor has overheated. • Check the load level, acceleration/deceleration time, and motor
start/stop frequency (cycle time).
• Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
Deceleration Times].
• Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] correctly to the value
specified by the motor nameplate.
• Make sure that the motor cooling system is operating correctly,
and repair or replace it if it is damaged.
adjust E3-04 to E3-10. Decrease the values set in E1-08 [Mid
Point A Voltage] and E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage].
Note:
If the values set in E1-08 and E1-10 are too low, the overload
tolerance will decrease at low speeds.
Note:
• When H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 = E [MFAI Function Selection = Motor Temperature (PTC Input)], the drive detects this fault if the motor overheat signal entered to an
analog input terminal A1, A2, or A3 is more than the alarm detection level.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L1-03 [Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select].

7.4 Fault
oH4 Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input) The motor has overheated. • Check the load level, acceleration/deceleration time, and motor
Note:
Note:
oL1 Motor Overload The load is too heavy. Decrease the load.
Note:
Reset oL1 when U4-16 [Motor oL1 Level] < 100.
The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times • Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor
are too short. start/stop frequencies (cycle times).
Overload occurred while running at low speed. • Decrease the load when running at low speed.
• Increase the motor speed.
• If the motor is run frequently at low speeds, replace the motor
with a larger motor or use a drive-dedicated motor.
Note:
For general-purpose motors, overload can occur while
running at low speed when operating at below the rated
current.
L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] is set Set L1-01 in as specified by the motor qualities for a drive-
incorrectly. dedicated motor.
The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
frequency.
Note:
E1-06 [Base Frequency] is set incorrectly. Set E1-06 to the rated frequency shown on the motor nameplate.
One drive is operating more than one motor. Set L1-01 = 0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled],
connect thermal overload relay to each motor to prevent damage
to the motor.
The electronic thermal protector qualities and the • Examine the motor qualities and set L1-01 [Motor Overload
motor overload properties do not align. (oL1) Protection] correctly.
• Connect a thermal overload relay to the motor.
Troubleshooting
The electronic thermal protector is operating at an Set E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] correctly to the value
incorrect level. specified by the motor nameplate.
There is increased motor loss from overexcitation • Lower the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB)
operation. Gain].
• Set L3-04 ≠ 4 [Stall Prevention during Decel ≠ Overexcitation/
High Flux].
• Set n3-23 = 0 [Overexcitation Braking Operation = Disabled].
The speed search-related parameters are set • Examine the settings for all speed search related parameters. 7
incorrectly. • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time].
• Set b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed
Estimation] after Auto-Tuning.
Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.
output current to change.
Overload occurred during overexcitation • Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB)
Level].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the electronic thermal protector of the drive started the motor overload protection.

7.4 Fault
oL2 Drive Overload The load is too large. Decrease the load.
The acceleration/deceleration times or cycle times • Examine the acceleration/deceleration times and the motor
are too short. start/stop frequencies (cycle times).
The V/f pattern does not fit the motor qualities. • Examine the ratios between the V/f pattern frequency and
frequency.
• Adjust E1-04 to E1-10 [V/f Pattern Parameters]. Decrease the
values set in E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] and E1-10
[Minimum Output Voltage]. For motor 2, adjust E3-04 to E3-
10.
Note:
The drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
Overload occurred while running at low speed. • Decrease the load when running at low speed.
Selection].
The torque compensation gain is too large. Decrease the value set in C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain] to
make sure that the motor does not stall.
The speed search-related parameters are set • Examine the settings for all speed search-related parameters.
incorrectly. • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time].
• Set b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed
Estimation] after Auto-Tuning.
Phase loss in the input power supply is causing the • Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input
output current to change. power.
• Make sure that there is no phase loss, and repair problems.
Overload occurred during overexcitation • Decrease the value set in n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB)
Level].
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the electronic thermal protector of the drive started the drive overload protection.
oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
The parameters are incorrect for the load. Adjust L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] and L6-03 [Torque
Detection Time 1] settings.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Note:
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
oL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 1 The drive detected overtorque as specified by the Do a deterioration diagnostic test on the machine side.
conditions for mechanical weakening detection set
in L6-08 [Mechanical Fatigue Detect Select].
Note:
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-08.

7.4 Fault
oL7 High Slip Braking Overload The load inertia is too large. • Decrease deceleration times in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-
08 [Deceleration Times] for applications that do not use High
An external force on the load side rotated the motor. Slip Braking.
• Use a braking resistor to decrease the deceleration time.
Something is preventing deceleration on the load
side.
The value set in n3-04 [HSB Overload Time] is too • Increase the value set in n3-04.
small. • Connect a thermal overload relay to the motor, and set n3-04 =
1200 s (maximum value).
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the output frequency is constant for longer than n3-04.
oPr Keypad Connection Fault The keypad is not securely connected to the Examine the connection between the keypad and the drive.
connector on the drive.
The connection cable between the drive and the • Remove the keypad and then reconnect it.
keypad is disconnected. • Replace the cable if damaged.
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if these conditions are correct:
–o2-06 = 1 [Keypad Disconnect Detection = Enabled].
–b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad], or the drive is operating in LOCAL Mode with the keypad.
oS Overspeed There is overshoot. • Decrease C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and increase C5-
02 [ASR Integral Time 1].
• Adjust the pulse train gain with H6-02 to H6-05 [Pulse Train
Input Setting Parameters].
There is an incorrect number of PG pulses set in the Set H6-02 [Terminal RP Frequency Scaling] to the pulse train
drive. frequency during 100% reference (maximum motor rotation
speed).
The oS detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust F1-08 [Overspeed Detection Level] and F1-09 [Overspeed
Detection Delay Time].
If the drive detects the fault at start or in the low • Set E5-xx [PM Motor Parameters] correctly or do Rotational
speed range (10% or less) and n8-57 = 1 [HFI Auto-Tuning.
Overlap Selection = Enabled] for PM Control • Decrease the value of n8-41 [HFI P Gain] in 0.5 unit
methods, the high frequency injection gain is too increments.
high.
Note:
Note:
• The drive detects this fault if the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-08 for longer than F1-09.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in F1-03 [Overspeed Detection Selection].
ov Overvoltage The deceleration time is too short and too much • Set L3-04 = 1 [Stall Prevention during Decel = General
regenerative energy is flowing back into the drive. Purpose].
[Deceleration Times].
• Connect a dynamic braking option to the drive.
• Perform Deceleration Rate Tuning.
The acceleration time is too short. • Make sure that sudden drive acceleration does not cause the
fault. Troubleshooting
[Acceleration Times].
• Increase the value set in C2-02 [S-Curve Time @ End of
Accel].
• Set L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Enabled].
The braking load is too large. Connect a dynamic braking option to the drive.
There are surge voltages in the input power supply. Connect a DC reactor to the drive.
Note:
7
If you turn the phase advancing capacitors ON and OFF and
use thyristor converters in the same power supply system,
there can be surge voltages that irregularly increase the input
voltage.
The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground 1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor
(the current short to ground is charging the main terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
circuit capacitor of the drive through the power 2. Re-energize the drive.
supply).

7.4 Fault
If the drive detects ov in these conditions, the speed • Examine the settings for all speed search related parameters.
search-related parameters are incorrect: • Set b3-19 ≠ 0 [Speed Search Restart Attempts ≠ 0 times].
• During speed search • Adjust b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time].
• During momentary power loss recovery • Do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance and
• When the drive starts again automatically then set b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed
• When you use an IE3 premium efficiency motor Estimation].
• Use these values to adjust the parameters.
• b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] = default value ×
2
• L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time] = default value
×2
The power supply voltage is too high. Decrease the power supply voltage to match the drive rated
voltage.
The braking resistor or braking resistor unit wiring Correct wiring errors in the connection to the braking resistor or
is incorrect. braking resistor unit.
Noise interference along the encoder cable. Isolate the encoder cable from the drive output line or a different
Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction. • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
necessary.
The load inertia is set incorrectly. • Examine the load inertia settings with KEB, overvoltage
suppression, or stall prevention during deceleration.
• Adjust L3-25 [Load Inertia Ratio] to match the qualities of the
machine.
You used the Short Circuit Braking function when Connect a braking resistor to the drive.
A1-02 = 5 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM].
There is motor hunting. • Adjust n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain Setting].

• Adjust n2-02 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time 1] and n2-03
[Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2].
• Adjust n8-45 [Speed Feedback Detection Gain] and n8-47
[Pull-in Current Comp Filter Time].
Speed Search at Start does not complete correctly Set b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current
when: Detection 2].
• A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV]
• E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction
(IM)]
The drive detects ov [Overvoltage] when A1-02 = 2 • Increase the value set in n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator
[OLV] and when: Time 2] in 50 ms increments.
• The acceleration completes Note:
• The deceleration starts Make sure that this parameter setting is: n2-02 [Automatic
• The load changes suddenly Freq Regulator Time 1] ≤ n2-03. When you adjust n2-03, you
must also increase the C4-06 [Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay
Time] value by the same ratio.
• Increase C4-06 in 10 ms increments.
Note:
Make sure that this parameter setting is: C4-02 [Torque
Compensation Delay Time] ≤ C4-06. When you adjust C4-06,
you must also increase the n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator
Time 2] value by the same ratio.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage is more than the ov detection level while the drive is running.
• For 200 V class drives, the detection level of ov is approximately 410 V. For 400 V class drives, the detection level is approximately 820 V.
PE1 PLC Fault 1 The communication option detected a fault. Refer to the manual for the communication option card.
Note:
PE2 PLC Fault 2 The communication option detected a fault. Refer to the manual for the communication option card.
Note:

7.4 Fault
PF Input Phase Loss There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.
There is loose wiring in the drive input power Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque.
terminals.
The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the input power for problems.
much. • Make the drive input power stable.
• If the input power supply is good, examine the magnetic
contactor on the main circuit side for problems.
There is unsatisfactory balance between voltage • Examine the input power for problems.
phases. • Make the drive input power stable.
• Set L8-05 = 0 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel = Disabled].
The main circuit capacitors have become • Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace
the control board or the drive. For information about replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
• If drive input power is correct and the fault stays, replace the
control board or the drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage changes irregularly without regeneration.
• Use L8-05 to enable and disable PF detection.
PGo Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss The encoder cable is disconnected or wired Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires in the encoder
The encoder is not receiving power. Examine the encoder power supply.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not receive the speed detection pulse signal from the encoder in the detection time set in F1-14 [Encoder Open-Circuit Detect Time].
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in F1-02 [PG Open Circuit Detection Select].
PGoH Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault The encoder cable is disconnected. Connect any disconnected wires in the encoder cable.
Note:
• Parameter F1-20 [Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect Detect] or F1-36 [Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect] enables and disables PGoH detection.
PSE JOHB-SMP3 Protocol Set Error • The DIP switches on the JOHB-SMP3 are at Make sure that the power to the drive is OFF and the CHARGE
their default setting. LED light is OFF before you use the DIP switches on the JOHB-
• There is no protocol assigned to the JOHB- SMP3 to set the protocol. Refer to the JOHB-SMP3 manual for
SMP3. more information.
rF Braking Resistor Fault The resistance of the dynamic braking option that is Use a dynamic braking option that fits the model and duty rating
connected to the drive is too low. of the drive.
A regenerative converter, regenerative unit, or Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable].

braking unit is connected to the drive.
Troubleshooting
Note:
rH Braking Resistor Overheat The deceleration time is too short and excessive • Check the load level, deceleration time, and speed.
regenerative energy is flowing back into the drive. • Decrease the load.
[Deceleration Times]. 7
• Use a dynamic braking option that lets you use more power.
The duty cycle is too high. Examine the duty cycle.

Note:
When L8-01 = 1 [3% ERF DB Resistor Protection =
Enabled], the maximum braking duty cycle is 3%.
The braking load is too heavy. • Calculate the braking load and braking power again, and
decrease the braking load.
• Use a braking resistor that improves braking power.

7.4 Fault
The braking resistor is not sufficient. Use the braking resistor specifications to select a sufficient
braking resistor.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the braking resistor overheat protective function is active.
• The magnitude of the braking load causes the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. If the duty cycle is higher than the braking resistor rating, the
drive will show the alarm.
• Parameter L8-01 enables and disables rH detection.
rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault The drive control circuit is damaged. • Re-energize the drive.
There is a malfunction in the internal braking information about replacing the control board, contact
transistor of the drive. Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
SC Short Circuit/IGBT Failure Overheating caused damage to the motor or the Measure the motor insulation resistance, and replace the motor if
motor insulation is not satisfactory. there is electrical conduction or unserviceable insulation.
replace the cable.
A short circuit or ground fault on the drive output • Make sure that there is not a short circuit in terminal B1 and
side caused damage to the output transistor of the terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Make sure that there is not a
drive. short circuit in terminals - and terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/
T3.
• If there is a short circuit, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
When A1-02 = 5, 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = Set L8-27 correctly.

OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, or CLV/PM], the output
current is more than the value set in L8-27
[Overcurrent Detection Gain].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if there is a short circuit or ground fault on the drive output side, or an IGBT failure.
SCF Safety Circuit Fault The safety circuit is broken. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
representative.
Note:
SEr Speed Search Retries Exceeded The speed search-related parameters are set • Decrease b3-10 [Speed Estimation Detection Gain].
incorrectly. • Increase b3-17 [Speed Est Retry Current Level].
• Increase b3-18 [Speed Est Retry Detection Time].
• Do Auto-Tuning again.
The motor is coasting in the opposite direction of Set b3-14 = 1 [Bi-directional Speed Search = Enabled].
the Run command.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the number of speed search restarts is more than b3-19 [Speed Search Restart Attempts].
STPo Motor Step-Out Detected The motor code is set incorrectly for PM Control • Set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] correctly as specified
Methods. by the motor.
E5-xx correctly.
The load is too large. • Increase the value set in n8-55 [Motor to Load Inertia Ratio].
• Increase the value set in n8-51 [Pull-in Current @
Acceleration]. If the drive detects STPo during deceleration
when increasing the value set in n8-51, set the value of n8-79
[Pull-in Current @ Deceleration] lower than n8-51.
• Replace the drive and motor with larger capacity models.
The load inertia is too large. Increase the value set in n8-55.
The acceleration/deceleration times are too short. • Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
• Increase the value set in C2-01 [S-Curve Time @ Start of
Accel].

7.4 Fault
Speed response is too slow. Increase the value set in n8-55.

Note:
SvE Zero Servo Fault The value set in the torque limit is too small. Adjust torque limit-related parameters L7-01 to L7-04.
The load torque is too large. Decrease the load torque.
Noise interference along the encoder cable Isolate the encoder cable from the drive output line or a different
Note:
• The drive detects this error if motor rotation position moves during Zero Servo.
TiM Keypad Time Not Set There is a battery in the keypad, but the date and Use the keypad to set the date and time.
time are not set.
Note:
• Parameter o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] enables and disables TiM detection.
UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Example: There is a broken pulley belt.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is less than the level set in L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
Note:
UL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 The drive detected undertorque as specified by the Examine the machine for deterioration.
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-08.
Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.
terminals. Troubleshooting
The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the input power for problems.
There was a loss of power. Use a better power supply.
The main circuit capacitors have become

unserviceable.
Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
[CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the
7
representative.
The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the performance life of
relay is damaged. the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is more than 90%, replace
the board or the drive. For information about replacing the board,
contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage decreases below the level set in L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] while the drive is running.
• The Uv1 detection level is approximately 190 V for a 200 V class drives. The detection level is approximately 380 V for 400 V class drives. The detection level is
approximately 350 V when E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] < 400.
• Fault trace is not available for this fault.

7.4 Fault
Uv2 Control Power Undervoltage The value set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Connect the momentary power loss recovery unit to the drive.
Time] increased and the momentary power loss
recovery unit is not connected to the drive.
There was a problem with the drive hardware. • Re-energize the drive.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the control power supply voltage decreases.
• Fault trace is not available for this fault.
Uv3 Soft Charge Answerback Fault There is damage to the relay or contactor on the • Re-energize the drive.
soft-charge bypass relay. • If the fault stays, replace the control board or the drive.
• Monitor U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the
performance life of the soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is
more than 90%, replace the board or the drive. For information
about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your
nearest sales representative.
Air inside the drive is too hot. Decrease the ambient temperature of the drive.
Note:

7.5 Minor Faults/Alarms

This section gives information about the causes and possible solutions when a minor fault or alarm occurs. Use
the information in this table to remove the cause of the minor fault or alarm.
AEr Station Address Setting Error The node address for the communication option is • For CC-Link communication, set F6-10 [CC-Link Node
not in the permitted setting range. Address] correctly.
• For MECHATROLINK communication, set F6-20
[MECHATROLINK Station Address] correctly.
• For CANopen communication, set F6-35 [CANopen Node ID
Selection] correctly.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage The keypad battery voltage is low. Replace the keypad battery.
Note:
• If detected, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will switch ON.
• Set o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] to enable/disable bAT detection.
bb Baseblock An external baseblock command was entered Examine the external sequence and timing of the baseblock
through one of the MFDI terminals Sx, and the command input.
drive output stopped as shown by an external
baseblock command.
Note:
The drive will not output a minor fault signal for this alarm.
bCE Bluetooth Communication Error The smartphone or tablet with DriveWizard Mobile Use the smartphone or tablet 10 m (32.8 ft.) or nearer to the
installed is too far from the keypad. keypad.
Note:
bCE can occur when the smartphone or tablet is 10 m (32.8 ft)
or nearer to the keypad depending on the specifications of the
smartphone or tablet.
Radio waves from a different device are causing Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio
interference with communications between the bandwidth (2400 MHz to 2480 MHz), and prevent radio
smartphone or tablet and keypad. interference.
Note:
• The drive detects this error when you use the Bluetooth LCD keypad to operate the drive from a smartphone or tablet.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
• Parameter o2-27 [bCE Detection Selection] enables and disables bCE detection.
boL Braking Transistor Overload The duty cycle of the braking transistor is high (the • Install a braking unit (CDBR series).
regeneration power or repetition frequency is high). • Install a regenerative converter.
• Increase the deceleration time.
You enabled the protective function for the braking Set L8-55 = 0 [Internal DB TransistorProtection = Disable].
transistor when you have a regenerative converter.
The braking transistor in the drive is broken. Replace the drive.

Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
bUS Option Communication Error The communications cable wiring is incorrect. Correct wiring errors.
There is a short-circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.
interference. 7
necessary.
power side.
for communication.
controller.
The option card is incorrectly installed to the drive. Correctly install the option card to the drive.

The option card is damaged. If the alarm continues and the wiring is correct, replace the option
card.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the Run command or frequency reference is assigned to the option card.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F6-01 [Communication Error Selection].
bUSy Busy You set the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the enter
communications to change parameters, but you used command, then use the keypad to change the parameter.
the keypad to change parameters.
You tried to change a parameter while the drive was Wait until the process is complete.
changing setting.
CALL Serial Comm Transmission Error The communications cable wiring is incorrect. Correct wiring errors.
There is a short circuit in the communications cable • Repair the short-circuited or disconnected portion of the cable.
A programming error occurred on the controller Examine communications at start-up and correct programming
side. errors.
There is damage to the communications circuitry. • Do a self-diagnostics check.

• If the problem continues, replace the control board or the
drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the control board.
The termination resistor setting for MEMOBUS/ On the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network, set DIP
Modbus communications is incorrect. switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not correctly receive control data from the controller when energizing the drive.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
CE Modbus Communication Error The communications cable wiring is incorrect. Correct wiring errors.
There is a short circuit in the communications cable • Repair short circuits and connect cables.
interference.
necessary.
power side.
for communication.
controller.
The communication protocol is not compatible. • Examine the values set in H5-xx.
• Examine the settings on the controller side and correct the
difference in communication conditions.
The value set in H5-09 [CE Detection Time] is too • Change the controller software settings.
small for the communications cycle. • Increase the value set in H5-09.
The controller software or hardware is causing a Examine the controller and remove the cause of the problem.
communication problem.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not correctly receive control data for the CE detection time set to H5-09.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method].
CP1 Comparator 1 Limit Error The monitor value set in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the error.
Monitor Selection] was in the range of H2-21
Note:
• The drive detects this error when the terminal is assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 66 [MFDO Function Select = Comparator1].
• H2-33 [Comparator1 Protection Selection] enables and disables CP1 detection.

CP2 Comparator 2 Limit Error The monitor value set in H2-26 [Comparator 2 Examine the monitor value and remove the cause of the error.
Monitor Selection] was outside the range of H2-27
Note:
• The drive detects this error when the terminal is assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 67 [MFDO Function Select = Comparator2].
• H2-35 [Comparator2 Protection Selection] enables and disables CP2 detection.
CrST Cannot Reset The drive received a fault reset command when a Turn off the Run command then de-energize and re-energize the
Run command was active. drive.
CyC MECHATROLINK The communications cycle setting of the controller Set the communications cycle of the controller in the permitted
CommCycleSettingErr is not in the permitted range of the range of the MECHATROLINK interface option.
MECHATROLINK interface option.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will activate.
CyPo Cycle Power to Accept Changes Although F6-15 = 1 [Comm. Option Parameters Re-energize the drive to update the communication option
Reload = Reload Now], the drive does not update parameters.
the communication option parameters.
dEv Speed Deviation The load is too heavy Decrease the load.
Acceleration and deceleration times are set too Increase the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/
short. Deceleration Time].
The dEv detection level settings are incorrect. Adjust F1-10 [Speed Deviation Detection Level] and F1-11
[Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime].
The load is locked up. Examine the machine.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the difference between the detected speed and the speed reference is more than the setting of F1-10 for longer than F1-11.
• If the drive detects this error, the drive will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F1-04 [Speed Deviation Detection Select].
dnE Drive Disabled A terminal set for H1-xx = 6A [Drive Enable] Examine the operation sequence.
turned OFF.
Note:
dWA2 DriveWorksEZ Alarm 2 There was an error in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
error. This is not a drive fault.
Note:
dWA3 DriveWorksEZ Alarm 3 There was an error in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
error. This is not a drive fault. Troubleshooting
Note:
dWAL DriveWorksEZ Alarm There was an error in the DriveWorksEZ program. Examine the DriveWorksEZ program and remove the cause of the
error. This is not a drive fault.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON. 7
E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog The drive detected a watchdog circuit exception Examine the MECHATROLINK cable connection. If this error
Timer Err while it received data from the controller. occurs frequently, examine the wiring and decrease the effects of
electrical interference as specified by these manuals:
• MECHATROLINK-II Installation Guide (MECHATROLINK
Members Association, manual number MMATDEP011)
• MECHATROLINK-III Installation Manual
(MECHATROLINK Members Association, publication
number MMATDEP018)
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in F6-25 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel].

EF FWD/REV Run Command Input A forward command and a reverse command were Examine the forward and reverse command sequence and correct
Error input at the same time for longer than 0.5 s. the problem.
Note:
• If the drive detects EF, the motor will ramp to stop.
EF0 Option Card External Fault The communication option card received an 1. Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the
external fault from the controller. cause.
2. Clear the external fault input from the controller.
Programming error occurred on the controller side. Examine the operation of the controller program.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the alarm function on the external device side is operating.
• Set the stopping method for this fault in F6-03 [Comm External Fault (EF0) Select].
External Fault [H1-01 = 2C to 2F] is set to MFDI Correctly set the MFDI.
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:

Note:
Note:
Note:
EP24v External Power 24V Supply The voltage of the main circuit power supply • Examine the main circuit power supply.
decreased, and the 24 V power supply is supplying • Turn ON the main circuit power supply to run the drive.
power to the drive.
Note:
• Set o2-26 [Ext. Power 24V Supply Display] to enable or disable EP24v detection.
• The drive will not output an alarm signal for this alarm.
FAn Internal Fan Fault The circulation fan stopped operating correctly. • Examine circulation fan operation.
if the performance life of the fan is expired, replace the fan.
Note:
If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
FbH Excessive PID Feedback The FbH detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust b5-36 [PID High Feedback Detection Lvl] and b5-37 [PID
High Feedback Detection Time].
Troubleshooting
representative.
Note:
• If detected, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
• If the drive detects this fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select]. 7
FbL PID Feedback Loss The FbL detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl] and b5-14 [PID
Feedback Loss Detection Time].

representative.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the PID feedback input is lower than the level set in b5-13 for longer than b5-14.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stop method set in b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select].
HCA High Current Alarm The load is too heavy. • Decrease the load for applications with repetitive starts and
stops.
The acceleration time is too short. • Calculate the torque necessary during acceleration related to
the load inertia and the specified acceleration time.
[Acceleration Times] until you get the necessary torque.
• Increase the values set in C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve
Characteristics] until you get the necessary torque.
The drive is trying to operate a specialized motor or • Examine the motor nameplate, the motor, and the drive to
a motor that is larger than the maximum applicable make sure that the drive rated current is larger than the motor
motor output of the drive. rated current.
The current level temporarily increased because of If speed search or Auto Restart cause an increase in current, the
speed search after a momentary power loss or while drive can temporarily show this alarm. The time that the drive
trying to Auto Restart. shows the alarm is short. No more steps are necessary to clear the
alarm.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is more than the overcurrent alarm level (150% of the rated current).
L24v Loss of External Power 24 Supply The voltage of the backup 24 V power supply has • Examine the external 24 V power supply for disconnected
decreased. The main circuit power supply is wires and wiring errors and repair the problems.
operating correctly. • Examine the external 24 V power supply for problems.
Note:
• Set o2-23 [External 24V Powerloss Detection] to enable or disable L24v detection.
• The drive will not output an alarm signal for this alarm.
LoG Log Com Error There is not a micro SD card in the keypad. Put a micro SD card in the keypad.
• The drive is connected to USB. Set o5-01 = 0 [Log Start/Stop Selection = OFF].
• The number of log communication files is more
than 1000.
• The micro SD card does not have available
memory space.
• The line number data in a log communication
file was changed.
• There was a communication error between the
keypad and drive during a log communication.
You used a keypad that does not support short-term • Use a keypad that supports short-term data logging.
data logging and started short-term data logging. • Set o5-00 = 0 [Log Type = Long Term Log].
• Set o5-01 = 0 [Log Start/Stop Selection = OFF].
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 6A [MFDO Function Select = Data Logger Error] will be ON.
• You can use short-term data logging with an LCD keypad or a Bluetooth LCD Keypad version REV:H or later. Refer to “REV” on the keypad nameplate for the keypad
version.
LT-1 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time The cooling fan is at 90% of its expected 1. Replace the cooling fan.
performance life. 2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset
the cooling fan operation time.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Selection = Maintenance Notification] will activate.
LT-2 Capacitor Maintenance Time The capacitors for the main circuit and control Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
circuit are at 90% of expected performance life. replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
When the estimated performance life is expired, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 2F [MFDO Function Select = Maintenance Notification] will be ON.

LT-3 SoftChargeBypassRelay The soft charge bypass relay is at 90% of its Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
MainteTime expected performance life. replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
LT-4 IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) The IGBT is at 50% of its expected performance Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency.
life.
Note:
oH Heatsink Overheat The ambient temperature is high and the heatsink • Measure the ambient temperature.
temperature is more than the L8-02 [Overheat • Increase the airflow around the drive.
Alarm Level].
heat.
There is not sufficient airflow around the drive. • Give the drive the correct installation space as shown in the
manual.
• Make sure that there is sufficient circulation around the control
panel.
• Examine the drive for dust or other unwanted materials that
could clog the cooling fan.
• Remove unwanted materials that prevent air circulation.
The internal cooling fan or fans have stopped. 1. Use the procedures in this manual to replace the cooling fan.
2. Set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset
the cooling fan operation time.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the heatsink temperature of the drive is more than L8-02.
• Set the stopping method for this fault in L8-03 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection].
oH2 External Overheat (H1-XX=B) An external device sent an oH2. 1. Find the external device that output the overheat alarm.
2. Remove the cause of the problem.
3. Clear the Overheat Alarm (oH2) [H1-xx = B] that was set to
MFDI terminals S1 to S6.
Note:
oH3 Motor Overheat (PTC Input) The thermistor wiring that detects motor Correct wiring errors.
temperature is defective.
A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault
The motor has overheated. • Check the load level, acceleration/deceleration time, and motor
Troubleshooting
Note:
tolerance will decrease at low speeds. 7
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in L1-03 [Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select].

oL3 Overtorque 1 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Note:
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
oL4 Overtorque 2 A fault occurred on the machine. Examine the machine and remove the cause of the fault.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the drive output current is more than the level set in L6-05 for longer than L6-06.
• Set the conditions that trigger the minor fault using L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2].
oL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 1 The drive detected overtorque as specified by the Do a deterioration diagnostic test on the machine side.
Note:
• If the drive detects this minor fault, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-08.
oS Overspeed There is overshoot. • Decrease C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and increase C5-
02 [ASR Integral Time 1].
• Use H6-02 to H6-05 [Pulse Train Input Setting Parameters] to
adjust the pulse train gain.
There is an incorrect number of PG pulses set in the Set H6-02 [Terminal RP Frequency Scaling] to the pulse train
drive. frequency during 100% reference (maximum motor rotation
speed).
The oS detection level is set incorrectly. Adjust F1-08 [Overspeed Detection Level] and F1-09 [Overspeed
Detection Delay Time].
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-08 for longer than F1-09.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F1-03 [Overspeed Detection Selection].
ov Overvoltage There are surge voltages in the input power supply. Connect a DC reactor to the drive.
Note:
If you turn the phase advancing capacitors ON and OFF and
use thyristor converters in the same power supply system,
there can be surge voltages that irregularly increase the input
voltage.
The drive output cable or motor is shorted to ground 1. Examine the motor main circuit cable, terminals, and motor
(the current short to ground is charging the main terminal box, and then remove ground faults.
circuit capacitor of the drive through the power 2. Re-energize the drive.
supply).
The power supply voltage is too high. Decrease the power supply voltage to match the drive rated
voltage.
Electrical interference caused a drive malfunction. • Examine the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and
ground wiring, and decrease the effects of electrical
interference.
necessary.
• Set L5-01 ≠ 0 [Number of Auto-Restart Attempts ≠ 0 times].
The drive detects ov [Overvoltage] when: • Increase the value set in n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator
• The acceleration completes Time 2] in 50 ms increments.
• The deceleration starts Note:
• The load changes suddenly Make sure that you set n2-02 ≤ n2-03. When you adjust n2-
03, you must also increase the C4-06 [Motor 2 Torque Comp
Delay Time] value by same ratio.
• Increase C4-06 in 10 ms increments.
Note:
Make sure that you set C4-02 ≤ C4-06. When you adjust C4-
06, you must also increase the n2-03 value by same ratio.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage is more than the ov detection level when there is no Run command (while the drive is stopped).
• The ov detection level is approximately 410 V with 200 V class drives. The detection level is approximately 820 V for 400 V class drives.

ovEr Too Many Parameters Changed You tried to change more than 150 parameters. Make sure that parameters that do not have an effect on drive
operation are at their default settings.
Note:
• You can change 150 parameters maximum.
• If you change parameters that have dependencies, the drive
can detect ovEr when the number of changed parameters is
fewer than 150.
PASS Modbus Communication Test The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications test is The PASS display will turn off after communications test mode is
complete. cleared.
PF Input Phase Loss There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct all wiring errors with the main circuit power supply.
Loose wiring in the input power terminals. Tighten the screws to the correct tightening torque.
The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the supply voltage for problems.
Unsatisfactory balance between voltage phases. • Examine the supply voltage for problems.
• Make the drive input power stable.
• If the supply voltage is good, examine the magnetic contactor
on the main circuit side for problems.
The main circuit capacitors have become • Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance].
• If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the capacitor. Contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more
information.
• Examine the supply voltage for problems.

• If the alarm stays, replace the circuit board or the drive.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more
information.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if the DC bus voltage changes irregularly without regeneration.
• Use L8-05 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel] to enable and disable PF detection.
PGo Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss The encoder cable is disconnected or wired Examine for wiring errors or disconnected wires in the encoder
The encoder is not receiving power. Examine the encoder power supply.
Note:
• The drive detects this error if it does not receive the speed detection pulse signal from the encoder in the detection time set in F1-14 [Encoder Open-Circuit Detect Time].
PGoH Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault The encoder cable is disconnected. Correct any disconnected wires in the encoder cable.
Note:
• Parameters F1-20 [Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect Detect] or F1-36 [Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect] enable and disable PGoH detection.
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the stopping method set in F1-02 [PG Open Circuit Detection Select].
Troubleshooting
rUn Motor Switch during Run The drive received a Motor 2 Selection [H1-xx = Make sure that the drive receives the Motor 2 Selection while the
16] during run. drive is stopped.
Note:
SE Modbus Test Mode Error MEMOBUS/Modbus communications self- Stop the drive and do MEMOBUS/Modbus communications self-
diagnostics [H1-xx = 67] was done while the drive diagnostics.
was running.
Note:
If detected, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.

STo Safe Torque OFF Safe Disable inputs H1-HC and H2-HC are open. • Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an
external source to terminal H1-HC and H2-HC.
• When the Safe Disable function is not in use, connect
terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.
There is internal damage to the two Safe Disable Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
channels. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
• The drive will not output an alarm signal for this condition.
• If the drive detects this condition, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 21 [MFDO Function Select = Safe Torque OFF] will be ON.
SToF Safe Torque OFF One of the two terminals H1-HC or H2-HC • Make sure that the Safe Disable signal is input from an
received the Safe Disable input signal. external source to terminals H1-HC or H2-HC.
• When the Safe Disable function is not in use, connect
The Safe Disable input signal is wired incorrectly. terminals H1-HC and H2-HC.
There is internal damage to one Safe Disable Replace the board or the drive. For information about replacing
channel. the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Note:
TiM Keypad Time Not Set You put a battery in the keypad, but you have not Set the date and time with the keypad.
set the date and time.
Note:
• Parameter o4-24 [bAT Detection Selection] enables and disables TiM detection.
• If the drive detects this error, the terminal set to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm] will activate.
TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) The IGBT is at 90% of its expected performance Replace the IGBT or the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest
life. sales representative for more information.
Note:
Note:
Note:
• If detected, the terminal assigned to H2-01 to H2-03 = 10 [MFDO Function Select = Alarm] will be ON.
UL5 Mechanical Weakening Detection 2 The drive detected undertorque as specified by the Examine the machine for deterioration.
Note:
• If the drive detects this error, it will operate the motor as specified by the Stopping Method set in L6-08.
Uv Undervoltage The drive input power voltage is changing too • Examine the input power for problems.
There is a phase loss in the drive input power. Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive input power.
terminals.

The main circuit capacitors have become Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4-05
unserviceable. [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the
representative.
The drive input power transformer is too small and • Check for an alarm when a molded-case circuit breaker,
voltage drops when the power is switched on. Leakage Breaker (ELCB, GFCI, or RCM/RCD) (with
overcurrent protective function), or magnetic contactor is ON.
• Check the capacity of the drive power supply transformer.
Air inside the drive is too hot. Check the ambient temperature of the drive.
The Charge LED is broken. Replace the control board or the entire drive. For information
about replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your
Note:
• The drive detects this error if one of these conditions is correct when the Run command has not been input (while the drive is stopped).
–The DC bus voltage < L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)].
–The Contactor that prevents inrush current in the drive was opened.
–There is low voltage in the control drive input power.
Troubleshooting

7.6 Parameter Setting Errors

Parameter setting errors occur when multiple parameter settings do not agree, or when parameter setting values
are not correct. Refer to the table in this section, examine the parameter setting that caused the error, and remove
the cause of the error. You must first correct the parameter setting errors before you can operate the drive. The
drive will not send notification signals for the faults and alarms when these parameter setting errors occur.
oPE01 Drive Capacity Setting Error The value set in o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Set o2-04 to the correct value.
Selection] does not agree with the drive model.
oPE02 Parameter Range Setting Error Parameter settings are not in the applicable setting
range. 1. Push to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter], and find
parameters that are not in the applicable setting range.
2. Correct the parameter settings.
Note:
• If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx
errors have priority over oPE02.
• If you copy the parameter settings from a drive with
software versions PRG: 01021 or earlier, and restore the
parameter settings to a drive with PRG: 01022 or later, the
drive can detect oPE02. If U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter]
shows n8-36 [HFI Frequency Level for L Tuning], set n8-36
to the default setting and do High Frequency Injection
Tuning.
The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the
drive identifies the software version. You can also use U1-25
Set E2-01 ≤ E2-03 [Motor Rated Current (FLA) ≤ Make sure that E2-01 > E2-03.
Motor No-Load Current]. Note:
If it is necessary to set E2-01 < E2-03, first lower the value
set in E2-03, and then set E2-01.
oPE03 Multi-Function Input Setting Err The settings for these parameters do not agree: Correct the parameter settings.
• F3-10 to F3-25 [Terminal D1 to DF Function
Selection]
• H1-01 to H1-08 [Terminals S1 to S8 Function
Selection]
• H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Inputs 1
to 4]
The settings for the standby mode function do not Correct the parameter settings.
agree:
• b8-50 = 0 [Standby Mode Selection = Disabled]
and H2-xx = 65 [MFDO Function Select =
Standby Output]
• b8-50 = 1 [Enabled] and H2-xx ≠ 65
The settings for MFDIs overlap. Set the parameters correctly to prevent MFDI function overlap.
Note:
This does not include H1-xx = 20 to 2F [MFDI
Function Select = External Fault] and
[Reserved].
These pairs of MFDI functions are not set to Digital Set the MFDI pairs.
Inputs (H1-xx, F3-10 to F3-25, and H7-01 to H7-
04) at the same time:
• Setting values 10 [Up Command] and 11 [Down
Command]
• Setting values 75 [Up 2 Command] and 76
[Down 2 Command]
• Setting values 42 [Run Command (2-Wire
Sequence 2)] and 43 [FWD/REV (2-Wire
Sequence 2)]
A minimum of two of these MFDI combinations are Remove the function settings that are not in use.
set to Digital Inputs (H1-xx, F3-10 to F3-25, and
H7-01 to H7-04) at the same time:
• Setting values 10 [Up Command] and 11 [Down
Command]
• Setting values 75 [Up 2 Command] and 76
[Down 2 Command]
• Setting value A [Accel/Decel Ramp Hold]
• Setting value 1E [Reference Sample Hold]
• Setting values 44 to 46 [Add Offset Frequency 1
to 3 (d7-01 to d7-03)]
The parameter settings are enabled at the same time. • Set b5-01 = 0 [Disabled].
• b5-01 [PID Mode Setting] • Remove the function Up/Down command settings.
• H1-xx = 10 [Up Command]
• H1-xx = 11 [Down Command]

These commands are set in Digital Inputs (H1-xx, Remove the function settings that are not in use.
F3-10 to F3-25, and H7-01 to H7-04) at the same
time:
• Setting values 61 [Speed Search from Fmax] and
62 [Speed Search from Fref]
• Setting values 65, 66, 7A, 7B [KEB Ride-Thru 1
or 2 Activate] and 68 [High Slip Braking (HSB)
Activate]
• Setting values 16 [Motor 2 Selection] and 1A
[Accel/Decel Time Selection 2]
• Setting values 65, 66 [KEB Ride-Thru 1
Activate] and 7A, 7B [KEB Ride-Thru 2
Activate]
• Setting values 40, 41 [Forward RUN (2-Wire),
Reverse RUN (2-Wire)] and 42, 43 [Run
Command (2-Wire Sequence 2), FWD/REV (2-
Wire Sequence 2)]
• Setting values 60 [DC Injection Braking
Command] and 6A [Drive Enable]
• Setting values 16 [Motor 2 Selection] and 75, 76
[Up 2 Command, Down 2 Command]
Settings for N.C. and N.O. input [H1-xx] for these Remove one of the function settings.
functions were selected at the same time:
• Setting value 15 [Fast Stop (N.O.)]
• Setting value 17 [Fast Stop (N.C.)]
These settings were entered while H1-xx = 2 Set H6-01 = 0.

[External Reference 1/2 Selection]:
• b1-15 = 4 [Frequency Reference Selection 2 =
Pulse Train Input]
• H6-01 ≠ 0 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function ≠
Frequency Reference]
These settings were entered while H1-xx = 2 Connect an input option card to the drive.
• b1-15 = 3 [Option PCB] or b1-16 = 3 [Run
Command Selection 2 = Option PCB]
• No option card is connected to the drive.
These settings were entered while H1-xx = 2 Set H3-02 = 0 or H3-10 = 0.

• b1-15 = 1 [Analog Input]
• H3-02 ≠ 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection ≠
Frequency Reference] or H3-10 ≠ 0 [Terminal
A2 Function Selection ≠ Frequency Reference]
These parameters are set at the same time: Correct the parameter settings.
• H1-xx ≠ 6A [Drive Enable]
• H2-xx = 38 [Drive Enabled]
• H6-01 ≠ 3 [PG Speed Feedback (V/F Control)]
• H1-xx = 7E [Reverse Rotation Identifier]
These parameters are set at the same time: Remove one of the function settings.
• H1-xx = 75/76 [Up 2 /Down 2 Command]
• H3-01, H3-05, H3-09 = 1 [Terminal A1, A2, A3
Signal Level Select = -10 to +10V (Bipolar
Reference)]
These parameters are set at the same time: Remove one of the function settings.
• H1-xx = 62 [Speed Search from Fref] Troubleshooting
• H5-22 = 1 [Speed Search from MODBUS =
Enabled]
These settings do not agree: Correct the parameter settings.

• A PG-RT3 option is connected to the drive. Note:
• H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection] is set. The Motor Switch function is not available with the PG-RT3
option.

oPE05 Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err The setting to assign the Run command or Correct the parameter settings.
frequency reference to an option card or the pulse
train input is incorrect.
b1-01 = 3 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Connect an option card to the drive.

Option PCB] is set, but there is no option card
connected to the drive.
b1-02 = 3 [Run Command Selection 1 = Option

PCB] is set, but there is no option card connected to
the drive.
The following parameters are set at the same time: Set H6-01 = 0.
• b1-01 = 4 [Pulse Train Input]
• H6-01 ≠ 0 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function ≠
Frequency Reference]

The following parameters are set at the same time: Set F3-03 = 2 [16-bit].
• F3-01 = 6 [Digital Input Function Selection =
BCD (5-digit), 0.01 Hz]
• F3-03 = 0, 1 [Digital Input Data Length Select
= 8-bit, 12-bit]
These parameters are set and there is an AI-A3 Correct the parameter settings.
option card connected to the drive:
• H1-xx = 2 [External Reference 1/2 Selection]
• b1-15 = 3 [Frequency Reference Selection 2 =
Option PCB]
• F2-01 = 0 [Analog Input Function Selection = 3
Independent Channels]
oPE06 Control Method Selection Error A1-02 = 1, 3, or 7 [Control Method Selection = CL- • Connect an encoder option the drive.
V/f, CLV, CLV/PM], but there is no encoder option • Set A1-02 correctly.
connected the drive.
You supplied external 24 V power to terminals PS- 1. De-energize the drive main circuit power supply and the
AC when: external 24 V power supply to terminals PS-AC.
• There is an encoder option installed the drive 2. After the keypad display goes out, energize the drive main
• The drive main circuit power supply is de- circuit power supply again.
energized 3. Supply the external 24 V power to terminals PS-AC.
When you use an encoder option, energize the drive main circuit
power supply.
oPE07 Analog Input Selection Error The settings for H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10 [MFAI Set H3-02, H3-06, H3-10, and H7-30 correctly to prevent overlap.
Function Select] and H7-30 [Virtual Analog Input Note:
Selection] overlap.
It is possible to set these functions to multiple analog input
terminals at the same time:
• Setting value 0 [Frequency Reference]
• Setting values F and 1F [Not Used]
The following parameters are set at the same time: Remove the function settings that are not in use.
• H3-02, H3-06, H3-10, H7-30 = B [PID
Feedback]
• H6-01 = 1 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function =
PID Feedback Value]
The following parameters are set at the same time:

• H3-02, H3-06, H3-10, H7-30 = C [PID
Setpoint]
• H6-01 = 2 [PID Setpoint Value]

• H3-02, H3-06, H3-10, H7-30 = C
• b5-18 = 1 [b5-19 PID Setpoint Selection =
Enabled]

• H6-01 = 2
• b5-18 = 1
oPE08 Parameter Selection Error You set a function that is not compatible with the
control method set in A1-02 [Control Method 1. Push to show U1-18 [oPE Fault Parameter], and find
Selection]. parameters that are not in the applicable setting range.
2. Correct the parameter settings.
Note:
If more than one error occurs at the same time, other oPExx
errors have priority over oPE02.
When A1-02 = 2 [Control Method Selection = • Set n2-02 < n2-03.

OLV], you used these parameter settings: • Set C4-02 < C4-06.
• n2-02 > n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time
1 > Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2]
• C4-02 > C4-06 [Torque Compensation Delay
Time > Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time]
When A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f], Correct the parameter settings.
you used these parameter settings: Note:
• H6-01 = 3 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function = You cannot use Speed Feedback (V/F Control) with the Motor
Speed Feedback (V/F Control)] Switch function.
• H1-xx = 16 [MFDI Function Select = Motor 2
Selection]
When A1-02 = 5 [PM Open Loop Vector], you set • Set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] correctly as specified
E5-02 to E5-07 [PM Motor Parameters] = 0. by the motor.
E5-xx correctly.

When A1-02 = 5 to 7 [Control Methods for PM Set E5-09 or E5-24 to the correct value.
Motors], you used these parameter settings:
• E5-09 = 0.0 [PM Back-EMF Vpeak (mV/(rad/s))
= 0.0 mV/(rad/s)]
• E5-24 = 0.0 [PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms (mV/rpm)
= 0.0 mV/min-1]
When A1-02 = 5 to 7, you set E5-09 ≠ 0 and E5-24 Set E5-09 = 0 or E5-24 = 0.
≠ 0.
When A1-02 = 6 [PM Advanced Open Loop Correct the parameter settings.
Vector], you used these parameter settings:
• n8-57 = 0 [HFI Overlap Selection = Disabled]
• You set E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] <
the 5% value of E1-06.
When A1-02 = 6, you set these parameters: Correct the parameter settings.
• n8-35 = 0 [Initial Pole Detection Method =
Pull-in]
• n8-57 = 1 [Enabled]
When A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV], you used these When E9-01 = 1 or 2, set b3-24 = 1 [Speed Estimation].
parameter settings:
• E9-01 = 1, 2 [Motor Type Selection =
Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous
Reluctance (SynRM)]
• b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection =
Current Detection 2]
oPE09 PID Control Selection Fault These parameters are set at the same time: • Set b5-15 ≠ 0.0.
• b5-15 ≠ 0.0 [PID Sleep Function Start Level ≠ • Set b1-03 = 0, 1 [Ramp to Stop, Coast to Stop].
0.0 Hz]
• b1-03 = 2, 3 [Stopping Method Selection = DC
Injection Braking to Stop, Coast to Stop with
Timer]
• b5-01 = 1, 2 [Enabled (Standard), Enabled (D =
Feedforward)]
• d2-02 ≠ 0.0 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit
≠ 0.0%]
• b5-11 = 1 [PID Output Reverse Selection =
Negative Output Accepted]
• b5-01 = 3, 4 [Trim (Fref+PID Out, D = Fdbk),
Trim (Fref+PID Out, D = FeedFwd)]
• d2 -02≠ 0.0 has been set.
Note:
The drive detects this error if the PID control function selection is incorrect.
(When b5-01 = 1 to 4 [PID Mode Setting = PID Control Enabled])
oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error The parameters that set the V/f pattern do not Set the parameters correctly to satisfy the conditions.
satisfy these conditions:
• For motor 1: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤
E1-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point
A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B
Frequency ≤ Maximum Output Frequency]
• For motor 2: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤ Troubleshooting
E3-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point
A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B
oPE11 Carrier Frequency Setting Error These parameters are set at the same time: Set C6-02 to C6-05 correctly.
• C6-05 > 6 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain >
6]
• C6-04 > C6-03 [Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
7
> Carrier Frequency Upper Limit]
Note:
When C6-05 < 7, C6-04 becomes disabled. The
drive sets the carrier frequency to the value set
to C6-03.
C6-02 to C6-05 settings are not in the applicable
setting range.
oPE13 Pulse Monitor Selection Error H6-06 = 101, 102, 105, or 116 [Terminal MP Set H6-06 correctly.
Monitor Selection = Frequency Reference, Output
Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Frequency after
Soft Starter] has not been set when H6-07 = 0
[Terminal MP Frequency Scaling = 0 Hz].

oPE15 Torque Control Setting Error More than one parameter is selecting torque control Correct the parameter settings.
at the same time.
• d5-01 = 1 [Torque Control Selection = Torque
Control]
• H1-xx = 71 [MFDI Function Select = Torque
Control]
Droop control and Feed Forward control are Correct the parameter settings.
enabled at the same time that torque control is
selected.
• d5-01 = 1 or H1-xx = 71
• b7-01 ≠ 0.0 [Droop Control Gain ≠ 0.0%] or n5-
01 = 1 [Feed Forward Control Selection =
Enabled]
KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O., N.C.) is enabled at the Correct the parameter settings.
same time that torque control is selected.
• d5-01 = 1 or H1-xx = 71
• H1-xx = 7A [KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.C.)]
or H1-xx = 7b [KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.
O.)]
After a momentary power loss, drive operation will Correct the parameter settings.
enable KEB when torque control is selected.
• d5-01 = 1 or H1-xx = 71
• L2-01 = 3, 4, 5 [Power Loss Ride Through
Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, Kinetic
Energy Backup: CPU Power, or Kinetic Energy
Backup: DecelStop]
Optimal deceleration or overexcitation deceleration Correct the parameter settings.

2 is enabled at the same time that torque control is
selected.
• d5-01 = 1 or H1-xx = 71
• L3-04 = 2, 5 [Stall Prevention during Decel =
Intelligent (Ignore Decel Ramp), Overexcitation/
High Flux 2]
oPE16 Energy Saving Constants Error The Energy Saving parameters are not set in the Make sure that E5-xx is set correctly as specified by the motor
applicable setting range. nameplate data.
oPE18 Online Tuning Param Setting Err The parameters that control online tuning are set Set E2-02, E2-03, and E2-06 correctly.
incorrectly. In OLV control, one of these parameters
was set when n6-01 = 2 [Online Tuning Selection =
Voltage Correction Tuning]:
• E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] is set to 30% of the
default setting or lower.
• E2-06 [Motor Leakage Inductance] is set to 50%
of the default setting or lower.
• E2-03 = 0 [Motor No-Load Current = 0 A] has
been set.
oPE20 PG-F3 Setting Error The value set in F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count • Examine the F1-01 value and the number of encoder pulses.
(PPR)] does not agree with the number of encoder • Set F1-01 correctly.
pulses.
The calculation encoder signal frequency at Decrease the value set for E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]
maximum speed is more than 20 kHz. and make sure that the output frequency of the encoder is not
more than 20 kHz.
oPE33 Digital Output Selection Error These two parameters are set at the same time: Clear the H2-01 to H2-03 = 1xx [Inverse output of xx] settings.
• H2-60 ≠ F [Term M1-M2 Secondary Function ≠ Note:
Not Used] It is not possible to set H2-01 to H2-03 = 1xx [Inverse output
• H2-01 = 1xx [Term M1-M2 Function Selection of xx] when using output functions for logic operations (H2-
= Inverse output of xx] 60, H2-63, H2-66 ≠ F).
These two parameters are set at the same time:

• H2-63 ≠ F [Term M3-M4 Secondary Function ≠
Not Used]
• H2-02 = 1xx [Term M3-M4 Function Selection
= Inverse output of xx]
These two parameters are set at the same time:

• H2-66 ≠ F [Term M5-M6 Secondary Function ≠
Not Used]
• H2-03 = 1xx [Term M5-M6 Function Selection
= Inverse output of xx]
These parameter pairs are set incorrectly: • Set parameters H2-21 ≤ H2-22.
• H2-21 [Comparator 1 Lower Limit] > H2-22 • Set parameters H2-27 ≤ H2-28.
[Comparator 1 Upper Limit]
• H2-27 [Comparator 2 Lower Limit] > H2-28
[Comparator 2 Upper Limit]

7.7 Auto-Tuning Errors

This table gives information about errors detected during Auto-Tuning. If the drive detects an Auto-Tuning error,
the keypad will show the error and the motor will coast to stop. The drive will not send notification signals for
faults and alarms when Auto-Tuning errors occur.
Two types of Auto-Tuning errors are: Endx and Erx. Endx identifies that Auto-Tuning has successfully completed
with calculation errors. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning again, or set the motor
parameters manually. You can use the drive in the application if you cannot find the cause of the Endx error.
Erx identifies that Auto-Tuning was not successful. Find and repair the cause of the error and do Auto-Tuning
again.
End1 Excessive Rated Voltage Setting The torque reference was more than 20% during • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Auto-Tuning or the no-load current that was • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
measured after Auto-Tuning is more than 80%. data.
• If you can uncouple the motor and load, remove the motor
from the machine and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.
• If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, use the results
from Auto-Tuning.
End2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Tuning is incorrect. • Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.
Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
parameter setting range, and E2-07 or E2-08 [Motor • If you can uncouple the motor and load, remove the motor
Saturation Coefficient 2] have temporary values. from the machine and do Rotational Auto-Tuning again.
End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm The rated current value is incorrect. Do Auto-Tuning again and set the correct rated current shown on
the motor nameplate.
End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Make sure the input motor nameplate data is correct.
parameter setting range. • Do Rotational Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor
nameplate data.
The motor rated slip that was measured after
Stationary Auto-Tuning was 0.2 Hz or lower. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, do Stationary
Auto-Tuning 2.
The motor rated slip that was measured after
compensation with E2-08 [Motor Saturation
Coefficient 2] is not in the applicable range.
The secondary resistor measurement results were

not in the applicable range.
End5 Resistance Tuning Error The Auto-Tuning results of the Line-to-Line • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Resistance were not in the applicable range. • Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and do
parameter setting range. Auto-Tuning again.
A1-02 [Control Method Selection] setting is not • Examine the value set in A1-02.
applicable.
Troubleshooting
• Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and
do Auto-Tuning again.
End7 No-Load Current Alarm The Auto-Tuning results of the motor no-load Examine and repair damaged motor wiring.
current value were not in the applicable range.
Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of the motor Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct, and do
rated current. Auto-Tuning again. 7

End8 HFI Alarm • Inductance saliency ratio (E5-07/E5-06) is too • Set the correct value on the motor nameplate E5-xx [PM motor
small. parameters] or do Stationary/Rotational Auto-Tuning, and
• The drive cannot find the n8-36 [HFI Frequency then do High Frequency Injection Tuning again.
Level for L Tuning] value. • When it is necessary to set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection
Method = High Frequency Injection] or n8-57 = 1 [HFI
Overlap Selection = Enabled], make sure that there is no
unusual noise in the low speed range (10% or less) and that the
motor does not rotate in reverse at start.
If there is unusual noise in the low speed range (10% or less),
increase n8-41 in increments of 0.5. Set n8-41 > 0.0 for IPM
motors.
Note:
If the drive detects End8, it will automatically set n8-35 =0
[Pull-in] and n8-57 = 0 [Disabled]. Do not change the
settings unless necessary.
End9 Initial Pole Detection Alarm The drive cannot calculate the correct value for n8- • Set the correct value on the motor nameplate E5-xx [PM motor
84 [Polarity Detection Current] during High parameters] or do Stationary/Rotational Auto-Tuning, and
Frequency Injection Tuning. then do High Frequency Injection Tuning again.
• When n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High
Frequency Injection] or n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection =
Enabled], make sure that the motor does not rotate in reverse
at start.
If there is unusual noise in the low speed range (10% or less),
increase n8-41 in increments of 0.5. Set n8-41 > 0.0 for IPM
motors.
Note:
If the drive detects End9, it will automatically set n8-35 =0
[Pull-in] and n8-57 = 0 [Disabled]. Do not change the
settings unless necessary.
Er-01 Motor Data Error The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the motor nameplate data is correct.
data.
The combination of the motor rated power and • Examine the combination of drive capacity and motor output.
motor rated current do not match. • Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the motor rated power
and motor rated current.
The combination of the motor rated current that was • Examine the motor rated current and the no-load current.
entered during Auto-Tuning and E2-03 [Motor No- • Set E2-03 correctly.
Load Current] do not match.
• Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the motor rated
current.
The combination of the setting values of Motor Do Auto-Tuning again, and correctly set the Motor Base
Base Frequency and Motor Base Speed do not Frequency and Motor Base Speed.
match.
Er-02 Drive in an Alarm State The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the motor nameplate data entered in Auto-
Tuning is incorrect. Tuning is correct.
• Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.
You did Auto-Tuning while the drive had a minor Clear the minor fault or alarm and do Auto-Tuning again.
fault or alarm.
There is a defective motor cable or cable Examine and repair motor wiring.
connection.
The load is too large. • Decrease the load.

• Examine the machine area to see if, for example, the motor
shaft is locked.
The drive detected a minor fault during Auto- 1. Stop Auto-Tuning.

Tuning. 2. Examine the minor fault code and remove the cause of the
problem.
3. Do Auto-Tuning again.
Er-03 STOP Button was Pressed Auto-Tuning did not complete correctly. Do Auto-Tuning again.
During Auto-Tuning, was pushed.

Er-04 Line-to-Line Resistance Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair motor wiring.
parameter setting range. • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of
time.
There is a defective motor cable or cable

connection.
The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
data.
Er-05 No-Load Current Error The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable • Examine and repair motor wiring.
parameter setting range. • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.
Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of
time.
The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
data.
Rotational Auto-Tuning was done with a load that • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
was more than 30% of the rating connected to the Auto-Tuning again.
motor. • If you cannot uncouple the motor and load, make sure that the
load is less than 30% of the motor rating. If a mechanical
brake is installed in the motor, release the brake during
Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Er-08 Rated Slip Error The motor nameplate data entered during Auto- • Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
data.
Auto-Tuning did not complete in a pre-set length of • Examine and repair the motor wiring.
time. • If the motor and machine are connected during Rotational
Auto-Tuning, decouple the motor from the machinery.
The Auto-Tuning results were not in the applicable
parameter setting range.
Er-09 Acceleration Error The motor did not accelerate for the specified 1. Increase the value set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1].
acceleration time. 2. Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.
The value of L7-01 or L7-02 [Forward/Reverse Increase the value set in L7-01 or L7-02.
Torque Limit] is small.
Er-10 Motor Direction Error There is defective drive and motor wiring. Examine and repair motor wiring.
There is defective drive and encoder wiring. Examine and repair the wiring to the encoder.
The direction of the motor and the setting of F1-05 Set F1-05 correctly.
[PG 1 Rotation Selection] are opposite.
The machine pulled the motor to rotate in the Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational Auto-
opposite direction. Tuning again. 7
When the torque reference is 100% or higher, the
sign of the speed reference was opposite of the
detected speed.
Er-11 Motor Speed Error The torque reference during acceleration is too high • Increase the value set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1].
(100%). • Disconnect the machine from the motor and do Rotational
Auto-Tuning again.

Er-12 Current Detection Error There is a phase loss in the drive input power. (U/ Examine and repair motor wiring.
T1, V/T2, W/T3)
The current exceeded the current rating of the drive. • Check the motor wiring for any short circuits between the
wires.
The output current is too low. • Check and turn ON any magnetic contactors used between
motors.
• Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest
You tried Auto-Tuning without a motor connected Connect the motor and do Auto-Tuning.
to the drive.
There was a current detection signal error. Replace the control board or the drive. For information about
representative.
Er-13 Leakage Inductance Alarm The motor rated current value is incorrect. Correctly set the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate
and perform Auto-Tuning again.
The drive could not complete tuning for leakage Examine and repair motor wiring.
inductance in fewer than 300 seconds.
Er-14 Motor Speed Error 2 The motor speed was more than two times the Decrease the value set in C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1].
amplitude of speed reference during Inertia Tuning.
Er-15 Torque Saturation Error During Inertia Tuning, the output torque was more • Increase the value set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] as
than the value set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit]. much as possible.
• Decrease the values set for the frequency and amplitude of the
test signals used when doing inertia tuning. First, decrease the
test signal amplitude, and then do Inertia Tuning. If the error
continues, decrease the test signal frequency and do Inertia
Tuning again.
Er-16 Inertia ID Error The inertia found by the drive was too small or too • Decrease the values set for the frequency and amplitude of the
large during Inertia Tuning (10% or less, or test signals used when doing inertia tuning. First, decrease the
50000% or more). test signal amplitude, and then do Inertia Tuning. If the error
continues, decrease the test signal frequency and do Inertia
Tuning again
• Correctly set the motor inertia as specified by the motor, and
do Inertia Tuning again.
Er-17 Reverse Prohibited Error b1-04 = 1 [Reverse Operation Selection = Reverse 1. Enable reverse in the target machine.
Disabled] 2. Set b1-04 = 0 [Reverse Enabled].
Note: 3. Do Inertia Tuning again.
You cannot do Inertia Tuning if the drive cannot
rotate the motor in reverse.
Er-18 Back EMF Error The result of the induced voltage tuning was not in 1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
the applicable range. 2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.
Er-19 PM Inductance Error The Auto-Tuning results of the PM motor 1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
inductance were not in the applicable range. 2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.
Er-20 Stator Resistance Error The Auto-Tuning results of the PM Motor Stator 1. Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct.
Resistance were not in the applicable range. 2. Do Auto-Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate
data.
Er-21 Z Pulse Correction Error The motor is wired incorrectly. 1. Repair motor and encoder wiring errors.
2. Do Z Pulse Offset Tuning again.
The encoder is wired incorrectly.
You did Auto-Tuning on a coasting motor. 1. Wait for the motor to fully stop.
The setting for the direction of the encoder motor 1. Set the direction of motor rotation of the encoder in F1-05
rotation is incorrect. [Encoder 1 Rotation Selection] correctly.
The number of encoder pulses is incorrect. 1. Set the number of encoder pulses in F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse
Count (PPR)] correctly.

The motor Inertia is too large. Increase the value set in n8-02 [Pole Alignment Current Level].
Parameter b1-04 = 1 [Reverse Operation Selection • If the machine prevents reverse rotation, disconnect the motor
= Reverse Disabled] and you did Z Pulse Offset from the machinery, set b1-04 = 0 [Reverse Enabled], then do
Tuning. Z Pulse Offset Tuning. When tuning is complete, set b1-04 = 1
[Reverse Disabled].
• If the machine does not prevent reverse rotation, set b1-04 = 0
and do Z Pulse Offset Tuning.
The motor vibrates during tuning. • Increase the values set in n8-03 [Pole Position Detection
Time] and n8-04 [Pole Alignment Time].
• Decrease the value set in n8-02 [Pole Alignment Current
Level].
The encoder is damaged. • Examine the signal output from the encoder.
• Replace the encoder.
Er-25 HighFreq Inject Param Tuning Err The motor data is incorrect. Do Stationary Auto-Tuning again.
Note:
If the drive detects Er-25 after doing Stationary Auto-Tuning,
the motor may not be able to use high frequency injection
control. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative
for more information.
Troubleshooting

7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors
7.8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors

◆ Operating Mode Display
When you use the backup function from the LCD keypad, the keypad shows messages according to the current
operation. These indicators do not show that an error has occurred.
Keypad Display Name Display Status
Drive and Keypad mismatch. Detection of inconsistency between the Normally displayed The drive detected the connection of a
Should the parameters be drive and keypad keypad from a different drive. Select [Yes]
to copy parameters backed up in the
restored? keypad to the connected drive.
Restore Restore from keypad Restoring parameters Flashing The parameters stored in the keypad have
been restored to the drive.
End Backup/restore/verify operation ended Normally displayed The parameter backup, restore, or verify
normally operation ended normally.
Backup Backup from Drive Backing up parameters Flashing The parameters stored in the drive are
being backed up to the keypad.
Verify Keypad & Drive Verifying parameters Flashing The parameter settings stored in the
keypad and the parameter settings in the
drive match or are being compared.
◆ Backup Function Runtime Errors

When an error occurs, the keypad shows a code to identify the error.
The table in this section show the error codes. Refer to these tables to remove the cause of the errors.
Note:
Push any key on the keypad to clear an error.
CPyE Error Writing Data Parameter restore did not end correctly. Restore the parameters.
CSEr Control Mode Mismatch The keypad is broken. Replace the keypad.
dFPS Drive Model Mismatch You tried to restore parameters to a different drive 1. Examine the drive model that you used to back up the
model than the one that you backed up. parameters.
2. Restore the parameters.
iFEr Keypad Communication Error There was a communications error between the Examine the connector or cable connection.
keypad and the drive.
ndAT Error Received Data The parameter settings for model and specifications 1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive
(power supply voltage and capacity) are different Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
between the keypad and the drive. 2. Restore the parameters.
The parameters are not stored in the keypad. 1. Connect a keypad that has the correct parameters.
2. Restore the parameters.
PWEr DWEZ Password Mismatch The password set in the backup operation with qx- Set the DWEZ PC software password supplied by Yaskawa for
xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameters] and rx-xx the DWEZ program user ID downloaded to the drive.
[DriveWorksEZ Connections] is incorrect.
Note:
U8-11 and U8-12 [DWEZ Versions 1 and 2] show the user ID of the DWEZ program.
rdEr Error Reading Data You tried to back up the data when o3-02 = 0 [Copy Set o3-02 = 1 [Enabled] and back up again.
Allowed Selection = Disabled].
vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch The power supply specifications or drive capacity 1. Make sure that drive model and the value set in o2-04 [Drive
parameter settings are different between the keypad Model (KVA) Selection] agree.
and the drive. 2. Restore the parameters.
vFyE Parameters do not Match The parameters that are backed up in the keypad 1. Restore or backup the parameter again.
and the parameters in the drive are not the same. 2. Verify the parameters.

7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
7.9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the drive stops, do the procedures in this section to remove the cause of the fault, then re-
energize the drive.
◆ Fault and Power Loss Occur at the Same Time

WARNING! Crush Hazard. Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive. If you do not use correct safety equipment, it
can cause serious injury or death.
1. Supply power to the control circuit from the external 24 V input.

2. Use monitor parameters U2-xx [Fault Trace] to show the fault code and data about the operating status of
the drive immediately before the fault occurred.
3. Use the information in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault.
Note:
1. To find the faults that were triggered, check the fault history in U2-02 [Previous Fault]. To find information about drive status (such
as frequency, current, and voltage) when the faults were triggered, check U2-03 to U2-20.
2. If the fault display stays after you re-energize the drive, remove the cause of the fault and reset.
◆ Fault Occurs Without Power Loss

1. Examine the fault code shown on the keypad.
2. Use the information in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault.
3. Do a fault reset.
◆ Fault Reset
If a fault occurs, you must remove the cause of the fault and re-energize the drive. Table 7.3 lists the different
methods to reset the drive after a fault.
Table 7.3 Fault Reset Methods
Methods Description
Method 1 While the keypad is showing the fault or alarm code, push (Reset) or on the keypad.
Switch ON the MFDI terminal set to H1-xx = 14 [MFDI Function Select = Fault Reset].
Note:
The default setting for H1-04 [Terminal S4 Function Selection] is 14 [Fault Reset].
Troubleshooting
Method 2
1. De-energize the drive main circuit power supply.

7
2. Energize the drive again after the keypad display goes out.
Method 3
Note:
If the drive receives a Run command from a communication option or control circuit terminal, the drive will not reset the fault. Remove
the Run command then try to clear the fault. If you do a fault reset when the drive has a Run command, the keypad will show minor
fault CrST [Remove RUN Command to Reset].

7.10 Troubleshooting Without Fault Display

If the drive or motor operate incorrectly, but the keypad does not show a fault or error code, refer to the items this
section.
• Motor hunting and oscillation
• Unsatisfactory motor torque
• Unsatisfactory speed precision
• Unsatisfactory motor torque and speed response
• Motor noise
◆ Typical Problems
Symptom Ref.
The Parameter Settings Will Not Change 394
The Motor Does Not Rotate after You Enter a Run Command 395
The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command 396
The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction 396
The Motor Is Too Hot 396
The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available 397
The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is Too Long 397
The Drive Frequency Reference Is Different than the Controller Frequency Reference Command 398
The Motor Is Not Stable When Using a PM Motor 398
There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is Irregular 398
Deceleration Takes Longer than Expected when You Enable Dynamic Braking 398
The Load Falls When a Brake Is Applied 399
There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when You Energize the Drive 399
The Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (RCM/ RCD) Trips During Run 399
Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery 399
Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting 400
PID Output Fault 400
The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient 400
The Motor Rotates after You Shut Off Drive Output 400
The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency Reference 400
The Motor Is Making an Audible Noise 401
The Motor Will Not Restart after Power Loss 401
◆ The Parameter Settings Will Not Change

Causes Possible Solutions
The drive is operating the motor (the drive is in Drive Mode). Stop the drive and change to Programming Mode.
Parameter A1-01 = 0 [Access Level Selection = Operation Only]. Set A1-01 = 2 [Access Level Selection = Advanced Level] or A1-01 = 3 [Expert Level].
Parameter H1-xx = 1B [MFDI Function Select = Programming Lockout]. Activate the terminals to which H1-xx = 1B is set, and then change the parameters.

You entered an incorrect password in A1-04 [Password]. • Enter the correct password to A1-04 again.
• If you forgot the password, set the password again with A1-04 and A1-05 [Password Setting].
Note:
If you set the password, you cannot change these parameters until the password aligns:
• A1-01 [Access Level Selection]
• A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
• A1-03 [Initialize Parameters]
• A1-06 [Application Preset]
• A1-07 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection]
• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to User Parameter 32]
The drive detected Uv [Undervoltage]. • View U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] to see the power supply voltage.
• Examine the main circuit wiring.
◆ The Motor Does Not Rotate After Entering Run Command

The drive is not in Drive Mode. 1. Make sure that the keypad shows [Rdy].
2. If the keypad does not show [Rdy], go back to the Home screen.
Do one of these two:

The drive stopped, was pushed, and changed the Run command
source to the keypad. • Push .
Note:
Set o2-01 = 0 [LO/RE Key Function Selection = Disabled] to prevent changing the Run
command source with .
Auto-Tuning completed. Go back to the Home screen on the keypad.

Note:
When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive changes to Programming Mode. The drive will not
accept a Run command unless the drive is in Drive Mode.
The drive received a fast stop command. Turn off the fast stop input signal.
The settings for the source that supplies the Run command are incorrect. Set b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1] correctly.
The frequency reference source is set incorrectly. Set b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] correctly.
There is defective wiring in the control circuit terminals. • Correctly wire the drive control circuit terminals.
• View U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] for input terminal status.
The settings for voltage input and current input of the master frequency Examine these analog input terminal signal level settings:
reference are incorrect. • Terminal A1: DIP switch S1-1 and H3-01 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select]
• Terminal A2: DIP switch S1-2 and H3-09 [Terminal A2 Signal Level Select]
• Terminal A3: DIP switch S4, S1-3 and H3-05 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select]
The selection for the sinking/sourcing mode and the internal/external power • For sinking mode, close the circuit between terminals SC-SP with a wire jumper.
supply is incorrect. • For sourcing mode, close the circuit between terminals SC-SN with a wire jumper.
• For external power supply, remove the wire jumper.
The frequency reference is too low. • View U1-01 [Freq Reference].

• Increase the frequency reference to a value higher than E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency].
The MFAI setting is incorrect. • Make sure that the functions set to the MFAI are correct. The frequency reference is 0 when
H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 = 1 [MFAI Function Select = Frequency Gain] and voltage (current) is
not input. Troubleshooting
• View U1-13 to U1-15 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Input Voltage] to see if the analog input values set
to terminals A1, A2, and A3 are applicable.
Turn the Run command OFF then ON from an external input.

was pushed. Note:
When you push during operation, the drive will ramp to stop. Set o2-02 = 0 [STOP
Key Function Selection = Disabled] to disable the function. 7

The 2-wire sequence and 3-wire sequence are set incorrectly. • Set one of the parameters H1-03 to H1-08 [Terminals S3 to S8 Function Select] to 0 [3-Wire
Sequence] to enable the 3-wire sequence.
• If a 2-wire sequence is necessary, make sure that H1-03 to H1-08 ≠ 0.

◆ The Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command
The phase wiring between the drive and motor is incorrect. • Examine the wiring between the drive and motor.
• Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to agree with
motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Switch two motor cables U, V, and W to reverse motor direction.
The forward direction for the motor is set incorrectly. • Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 in the correct sequence to agree with
motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Switch two motor cables U, V, and W to reverse motor direction.
Figure 7.1 Forward Rotating Motor

Note:
• For Yaskawa motors, the forward direction is counterclockwise when looking from the
motor shaft side.
• Refer to the motor specifications, and make sure that the forward rotation direction is
correct for the application. The forward rotation direction of motors can be different for
different motor manufacturers and types.
The signal connections for forward run and reverse run on the drive control Correctly wire the control circuit.
circuit terminals and control panel side are incorrect.
The motor is running at almost 0 Hz and the Speed Search estimated the Set b3-14 = 0 [Bi-directional Speed Search = Disabled], then the drive will only do speed search
speed to be in the opposite direction. in the specified direction.
◆ The Motor Rotates in Only One Direction

The drive will not let the motor rotate in reverse. Set b1-04 = 0 [Reverse Operation Selection = Reverse Enabled].
The drive did not receive a Reverse run signal and 3-Wire sequence is Activate the terminals to which H1-xx = 0 [3-Wire Sequence] is set, and then enable reverse
selected. operation.
◆ The Motor Is Too Hot

The load is too heavy. • Decrease the load.

• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Examine the values set in L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection], L1-02 [Motor Overload
Protection Time], and E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)].
• Use a larger motor.
Note:
The motor also has a short-term overload rating. Examine this rating carefully before setting
drive parameters.
The motor is running continuously at a very low speed. • Change the run speed.
• Use a drive-dedicated motor.
The drive is operating in a vector control mode, but Auto-Tuning has not • Do Auto-Tuning.
been done. • Calculate motor parameter and set motor parameters.
• Set A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control].
The voltage insulation between motor phases is not sufficient. • Use a motor with a voltage tolerance that is higher than the maximum voltage surge.
• Use a drive-dedicated motor that is rated for use with AC drives for applications that use a
motor on drives rated higher than 400 V class.
• Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive and set C6-02 = 1 [Carrier Frequency
Selection = 2.0 kHz].
Note:
When the motor is connected to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, surges
occur between the drive switching and the motor coils. These surges can be three times the
drive input power supply voltage (600 V for a 200 V class drive, 1200 V for a 400 V class
drive).
The air around the motor is too hot. • Measure the ambient temperature.
• Decrease the temperature in the area until it is in the specified temperature range.
The motor fan stopped or is clogged. • Clean the motor fan.

• Make the drive environment better.

◆ The Correct Auto-Tuning Mode Is Not Available

The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for the selected control Change the motor control method with parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection].
mode.
◆ The Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel/Decel Time Is Too Long

The drive and motor system reached the torque limit or current suppression • Decrease the load.
will not let the drive accelerate. • Use a larger motor.
Note:
Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, accelerating too fast or trying to drive a load that is too large can exceed the limits
of the motor.
Torque limit is set incorrectly. Set the torque limit correctly.
The acceleration time setting is too short. Check the values set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, or C1-07 [Acceleration Time] and set them to
applicable values.
The load is too heavy. • Increase the acceleration time.

• Examine the mechanical brake and make sure that it is fully releasing.
• Decrease the load to make sure that the output current stays less than the motor rated current.
• Use a larger motor.
Note:
• In extruder and mixer applications, the load can increase as the temperature decreases.
• Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, accelerating too fast or trying to drive a load that is too large can exceed the limits
of the motor.
The frequency reference is low. • Examine E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] and increase the setting if it is set too low.
• Examine U1-01 [Frequency Reference] for the correct frequency reference.
• Examine the multi-function input terminals to see if a frequency reference signal switch has
been set.
• Examine the low gain level set in H3-03, H3-11, H3-07 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Gain Setting] if
you use MFAI.
The frequency reference is set incorrectly. When H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 = 1 [MFAI Function Select = Frequency Gain] are set, see if voltage
(current) has been set.
• Check the values set in H3-02, H3-10, and H3-06.
• Use U1-13 to U1-15 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Input Voltage] to make sure that the analog input
values set to terminals A1, A2, and A3 are applicable.
The motor characteristics and drive parameter settings are not compatible. • Set the correct V/f pattern to agree with the characteristics of the motor.
• Examine the V/f pattern set in E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection].
• Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning.
The drive is operating in vector control mode, but Auto-Tuning is not • Do Auto-Tuning.
completed. • Calculate motor data and reset motor parameters.
• Set A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control].
Parameter A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = Advanced Open Loop Increase the value set in n4-65 [Flux Estimate Response@High Freq] in 0.1-unit increments.
Vector] and the speed estimation response is too slow.
The Stall Prevention level during acceleration setting is too low. Increase the value set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel].
Note:
If the L3-02 value is too low, the acceleration time can be unsatisfactorily long. Troubleshooting
The Stall Prevention level during run setting is too low. Increase the value set in L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run].
Note:
If the L3-06 value is too low, speed will decrease while the drive outputs torque.
Drive reached the limitations of the V/f motor control method. • When the motor cable is longer than 50 m (164 ft.), do Auto-Tuning for line-to-line resistance.
• Set the V/f pattern to “High Starting Torque”.
• Use a Vector Control method.
Note: 7
V/f control method does not provide high torque at low speeds.

◆ The Drive Frequency Reference Is Different than the Controller Frequency

Reference Command
The analog input gain and bias for the frequency reference input are set Examine the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs that set the frequency reference.
incorrectly. • Terminal A1: H3-03 [Terminal A1 Gain Setting], H3-04 [Terminal A1 Bias Setting]
• Terminal A2: H3-11 [Terminal A2 Gain Setting], H3-12 [Terminal A2 Bias Setting]
• Terminal A3: H3-07 [Terminal A3 Gain Setting], H3-08 [Terminal A3 Bias Setting]
The drive is receiving frequency bias signals from analog input terminals A1 • Examine parameters H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 [MFAI Function Select]. If two or more of these
to A3 and the sum of all signals makes the frequency reference. parameters are set to 0, change the settings.
• Use U1-13 to U1-15 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Input Voltage] to make sure that the analog input
values set to terminals A1, A2, and A3 are applicable.
The motor rotates faster than the frequency reference at low speed. • Decrease the value set in n4-70 [Speed Command Comp @ Low Freq] in increments of 0.1
Hz.
Note:
If you set the value too low, the motor can rotate in reverse.
• Set E1-09 > 0 [Minimum Output Frequency].
Note:
• The recommended setting for E1-09 is 0.5 Hz.
• When frequency reference < E1-09, the drive output will turn OFF.
PID control is enabled. If PID control is not necessary, set b5-01 = 0 [PID Mode Setting = Disabled].
Note:
When PID control is enabled, the drive adjusts the output frequency as specified by the target
value. The drive will only accelerate to the maximum output frequency set in E1-04
[Maximum Output Frequency] while PID control is active.
◆ The Motor Speed Is Not Stable When Using a PM Motor

E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] is set incorrectly. Refer to “Motor Performance Fine-Tuning” in the technical manual.
The drive is operating the motor at more than the specified speed control Examine the speed control range and adjust the speed.
range.
The motor is hunting. Adjust these parameters to have the largest effect:
• n8-55 [Motor to Load Inertia Ratio]
• n8-45 [Speed Feedback Detection Gain]
• C4-02 [Torque Compensation Delay Time]
Hunting occurs at start. Increase the value set in C2-01 [S-Curve Time @ Start of Accel].
Too much current is flowing through the drive. Set E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] correctly as specified by the motor. For special-purpose
motors, enter the correct value to E5-xx as specified by the motor test report.
Operation is not stable when n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled]. • Do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
• Decrease the value set in n8-41 [HFI P Gain] in increments of 0.5.
Note:
◆ There Is Too Much Motor Oscillation and the Rotation Is Irregular

Unsatisfactory balance of motor phases. • Make sure that the drive input power voltage supplies stable power.
• Set L8-05 = 0 [Input Phase Loss Protect Select = Disabled].
The motor is hunting. • Set n1-01 = 1 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled].

• Increase the value of n2-01 [SpdFeedbackDetectCtr (AFR) Gain] or n2-02
[SpdFeedbackDetCtr(AFR)TimeConst1].
◆ Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Braking Is Enabled

The stall prevention during deceleration setting is incorrect. • Examine the setting for L3-04 [Decel Stall Prevention Selection].
• When the drive has a dynamic braking option installed, set L3-04 = 0 [Disabled].
• If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage], set L3-04 = 3 [General Purpose w/ DB resistor].
The deceleration time setting is too long. Set C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08 [Deceleration Times] to applicable values.

The motor torque is not sufficient. Use a larger motor.

Note:
If these items are correct, the demand on the motor is more than the motor capacity:
• Parameter settings are correct.
• The drive does not detect ov [Overvoltage].
The drive and motor system reached the torque limit. • Examine the values set in L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] and increase them if necessary.
Note:
If the torque limit is enabled, deceleration time can increase because the drive cannot output
more torque than the limit.
• If H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 = 10, 11, 12, 15 [MFAI Function Select = Torque Limit] has been set,
examine the settings for the MFAIs.
• Examine the values set in H3-02, H3-10, and H3-06.
• Use U1-13 to U1-15 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Input Voltage] to make sure that the analog
input values set to terminals A1, A2, and A3 are applicable.
The load is more than the internal torque limit as specified by the drive rated Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
current.
◆ The Load Falls When a Brake Is Applied

The open/close timing of the brake is incorrect. Refer to “Notes on Controlling the Brake when Using the Hoist Application Preset” in the
technical manual and take appropriate measures.
The DC injection braking is not sufficient. Increase the value set in b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current].
◆ There Is Audible Noise from the Drive or Motor Cables when You Energize the
Drive
The relay switching in the drive is making too much noise. • Use C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to decrease the carrier frequency.
• Connect a noise filter to the input side of the drive power supply.
• Connect a noise filter to the output side of the drive.
• Isolate the control circuit wiring from the main circuit wiring.
• Use a metal cable gland to wire the drive.
• Shield the periphery of the drive with metal.
• Make sure that the drive and motor are grounded correctly.
• Make sure that ground faults have not occurred in the wiring or motor.
◆ Residual Current Monitoring/Detection (RCM/RCD) Trips During Run

There is too much leakage current from the drive. • Increase the RCM/RCD sensitivity or use RCM/RCD with a higher threshold.
• Use C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] to decrease the carrier frequency.
• Decrease the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor.
• Install a noise filter or AC reactor on the output side of the drive. Set C6-02 = 1 [2.0 kHz]
when connecting an AC reactor.
• Disable the internal EMC filter.
Troubleshooting
◆ Motor Rotation Causes Unexpected Audible Noise from Connected Machinery

The carrier frequency and the resonant frequency of the connected • Adjust C6-02 to C6-05 [Carrier Frequency].
machinery are the same. • Set C6-02 = 1 to 6 [Carrier Frequency Selection = Frequency other than Swing PWM].
Note:
7
If C6-02 = 7 to A [Carrier Frequency Selection = Swing PWM], the drive will not know if
the noise comes from the drive or the machine.
The drive output frequency and the resonant frequency of the connected • Adjust d3-01 to d3-04 [Jump Frequency].
machinery are the same. • Put the motor on a rubber pad to decrease vibration.

◆ Motor Rotation Causes Oscillation or Hunting

The frequency reference is assigned to an external source, and there is Make sure that electrical interference does not have an effect on the signal lines.
electrical interference in the signal. • Isolate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring.
• Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.
• Increase the value of H3-13 [Analog Input FilterTime Constant].
The cable between the drive and motor is too long. • Do Auto-Tuning.
• Make the wiring as short as possible.
The PID parameters are not sufficiently adjusted. Adjust b5-xx [PID control].
◆ PID Output Fault

There is no PID feedback input. • Examine the MFAI terminal settings.

• See if H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 = B [MFAI Function Select = PID Feedback] is set.
• Make sure that the MFAI terminal settings agree with the signal inputs.
• Examine the connection of the feedback signal.
• Make sure that b5-xx [PID Control] is set correctly.
Note:
If there is no PID feedback input to the terminal, the detected value is 0, which causes a PID
fault and also causes the drive to operate at maximum frequency.
The detection level and the target value do not agree. Use H3-03, H3-11, H3-07 [Terminal A1, A2, A3 Gain Setting] to adjust PID target and feedback
signal scaling.
Note:
PID control keeps the difference between the target value and detection value at 0. Set the
input level for the values relative to each other.
Reverse drive output frequency and speed detection. When output frequency Set b5-09 = 1 [PID Output Level Selection = Reverse output (reverse acting)].
increases, the sensor detects a speed decrease.
◆ The Starting Torque Is Not Sufficient

Auto-Tuning has not been done in vector control method. Do Auto-Tuning.
The control method was changed after doing Auto-Tuning. Do Auto-Tuning again.
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance was done. Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
◆ The Motor Rotates after the Drive Output Is Shut Off

DC Injection Braking is too low and the drive cannot decelerate correctly. • Increase the value set in b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current].
• Increase the value set in b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop].
The stopping method makes the drive coast to stop. Set b1-03 = 0 or 2 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop, DC Injection Braking to Stop].
◆ The Output Frequency Is Lower Than the Frequency Reference

The frequency reference is in the Jump frequency range. Adjust d3-01 to d3-03 [Jump Frequency 1 to 3] and d3-04 [Jump Frequency Width].
Note:
Enabling the Jump frequency prevents the drive from outputting the frequencies specified in
the Jump range.
The upper limit for the frequency reference has been exceeded. Set E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] and d2-01 [Frequency Reference Upper Limit] to the
best values for the application.
Note:
This calculation supplies the upper value for the output frequency:
E1-04 × d2-01 / 100
A large load triggered Stall Prevention function during acceleration. • Decrease the load.
• Adjust L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel].

L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevent Select duringAccel = ILim Mode] has been set. 1. Check whether the V/f pattern and motor parameter settings are appropriate, and set them
correctly.
2. If this does not solve the problem, and it is not necessary to limit the current level of stall
during acceleration, adjust L3-02.
3. If this does not solve the problem, set L3-01 = 1 [Enabled].
The motor is rotating at this speed: • Set b1-21 = 1 [CLV Start Selection = Accept Run command at any speed].
b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] ≤ Motor Speed < E1-09 • Set E1-09 < b2-01.
[Minimum Output Frequency]
◆ The Motor Is Making an Audible Noise

100% of the rated output current of the drive was exceeded while operating • If the sound is coming from the motor, set L8-38 = 0 [Carrier Frequency Reduction =
at low speeds. Disabled].
• If oL2 [Drive Overloaded] occurs frequently after setting L8-38 = 0, replace the drive with a
high-capacity drive.
◆ The Motor Will Not Restart after a Loss of Power

The drive did not receive a Run command after applying power. • Examine the sequence and wiring that enters the Run command.
• Set up a relay to make sure that the Run command stays enabled during a loss of power.
For applications that use 3-wire sequence, the momentary power loss Examine the wiring and circuitry for the relay that keeps the Run command enabled during the
continued for a long time, and the relay that keeps the Run command has momentary power loss ride-thru time.
been switched off.
Troubleshooting


8
Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
This chapter gives information about how to examine and maintain drives in use, how to replace
cooling fans and other parts, and how to store drives.
8.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................404

8.2 Inspection.................................................................................................................406
8.3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................408
8.4 Replace Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans...................................................410
8.5 Replace the Drive ...................................................................................................442
8.6 Replace the Keypad Battery ................................................................................447
8.7 Storage Guidelines ................................................................................................449

8.1 Section Safety
8.1 Section Safety

DANGER
Disconnect all power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before you
remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous voltages before servicing or repair work.
If you do work on the drive when it is energized and there is no cover over the electronic circuits, it will cause
serious injury or death from electrical shock. The drive has internal capacitors that stay charged after you de-
energize the drive.
WARNING
The motor will run after you de-energize the drive. PM motors can generate induced voltage to
the terminal of the motor after you de-energize the drive.
If you touch a motor that is moving or energized, it can cause serious injury or death.
Fire Hazard
Damage to Equipment
Fire Hazard
material.

8.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Make sure that you align the phase order for the drive and motor when you connect the motor to
drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
If the phase order is incorrect, it can cause the motor to run in reverse. If the motor accidentally runs in reverse, it
can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Burn Hazard
Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then
make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans.
If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans. When you do maintenance on
the fans, replace all the fans to increase product life.
If you install the fans incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
devices.
Do not energize and de-energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes.
If you frequently energize and de-energize the drive, it can cause drive failure.
Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts.
You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment.

Note:
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the
drive. Incorrect wiring can cause electrical interference and unsatisfactory system performance.

8.2 Inspection
8.2 Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and can show changes in performance and deterioration of performance after
years of use in usual conditions. To help prevent these problems, it is important to do preventive maintenance and
regular inspection, and replace parts on the drive.
Drives contain different types of power electronics, for example power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors,
resistors, fans, and relays. The electronics in the drive are necessary for correct motor control.
Follow the inspection lists in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note:
Examine the drive one time each year at a minimum.
The operating conditions, environmental conditions, and use conditions will have an effect on the examination frequency for connected
equipment.
Examine the drive more frequently if you use the drive in bad conditions or in these conditions:
• High ambient temperatures
• Frequent starting and stopping
• Changes in the AC power supply or load
• Too much vibration or shock loading
• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, or chlorine atmospheres
• Unsatisfactory storage conditions.
◆ Recommended Daily Inspection

Table 8.1 gives information about the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Examine the items in
Table 8.1 each day to make sure that the components do not become unserviceable or fail. Make a copy of this
checklist and put a check mark in the “Checked” column after each inspection.
Table 8.1 Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked
• Check the load coupling.

Examine for unusual oscillation or noise coming
Motor • Measure motor vibration.
from the motor.
• Tighten all loose components.
• Check for a load that is too heavy.

Examine for unusual heat from the drive or motor • Tighten loose screws.
and visible discoloration. • Check for a dirty heatsink or motor.
Cooling System • Measure the ambient temperature.
Examine the cooling fans, circulation fans, and • Check for a clogged or dirty fan.
circuit board cooling fans. • Use the performance life monitor to check for correct fan operation.
Surrounding Make sure that the installation environment is

Remove the source of contamination or correct unsatisfactory environment.
Environment applicable.
Make sure that the drive output current is not more • Check for a load that is too heavy.
Load than the motor or drive rating for an extended period
of time. • Check the correct motor parameter settings.
Power Supply • Correct the voltage or power supply to agree with nameplate specifications.
Examine main power supply and control voltages.
Voltage • Verify all main circuit phases.
◆ Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 8.2 to Table 8.6 give information about the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drives.
Examine the drive one time each year at a minimum. The operating conditions, environmental conditions, and use
conditions will have an effect on the examination frequency for connected equipment. You must use your
experience with the application to select the correct inspection frequency for each drive installation. Periodic
inspections will help to prevent performance deterioration and product failure. Make a copy of this checklist and
put a check mark in the “Checked” column after each inspection.

8.2 Inspection
Table 8.2 Main Circuit Periodic Inspection Checklist

• Examine equipment for discoloration from too • Replace damaged components as necessary.
much heat or deterioration. • The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
• Examine for damaged parts. replace the drive.
General • Examine enclosure door seal.

• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without
Examine for dirt, unwanted particles, or dust on touching the components.
components.
• If you cannot remove unwanted particles and dust with a vacuum cleaner,
replace the components.
• Examine wiring and connections for discoloration

or damage. Examine wiring and connections for
Conductors and discoloration from too much heat. Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Wiring
• Examine wire insulation and shielding for
discoloration and wear.
• Tighten loose screws.

• Replace damaged screws or terminals.
Examine terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose
Terminal Block Note:
connections.
On drive models, 2056, 2070, 4031, and 4038, you cannot replace the hex
screws.
• Examine contactors and relays for too much noise

Electromagnetic during operation. • Check coil voltage for overvoltage or undervoltage conditions.
Contactors and
Relays • Examine coils for signs of too much heat, such as • Replace broken relays, contactors, or circuit boards that you can remove.
melted or broken insulation.
Dynamic Braking Examine the insulation for discoloration from too If there is discoloration in the option, check to make sure that the wiring is not
Option much heat. damaged. A small quantity of discoloration is not a problem.
• Examine for leaks, discoloration, or cracks.

Electrolytic The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
Capacitor • Examine if the cap has come off, if there is replace the drive.
swelling, or if there are leaks from broken sides.
Diodes, IGBT Examine for dust or other unwanted material Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without touching
(Power Transistor) collected on the surface. the components.
Table 8.3 Motor Periodic Inspection Checklist

Operation Check Check for increased vibration or unusual noise. Stop the motor and contact approved maintenance personnel as necessary.
Table 8.4 Control Circuit Periodic Inspection Checklist

• Examine terminals for stripped, damaged, or • Tighten loose screws.

loose connections. • Replace damaged screws or terminals.
General
• Make sure that all terminals have been correctly • If terminals are integral to a circuit board, it could be necessary to replace the
tightened. control board or the drive.
• Tighten loose connections.

• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without
• Check for odor, discoloration, or rust.
touching the components.
• Make sure that all connections are correctly
• If you cannot remove unwanted particles and dust with a vacuum cleaner,
Circuit Boards fastened. replace the components.

• Make sure that the surface of the circuit board
• Do not use solvents to clean the board.
does not have dust or oil mist.
• The drive does not have many serviceable parts and it could be necessary to
replace the drive.
Table 8.5 Cooling System Periodic Inspection Checklist

• Check for unusual oscillation or unusual noise.

Cooling fan Clean or replace the fans as necessary.
• Check for damaged or missing fan blades.
• Examine for dust or other unwanted material

collected on the surface. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove unwanted particles and dust without touching
Heatsink
the components.
• Examine for dirt.
Examine air intake, exhaust openings and make sure

Air Duct that there are no unwanted materials on the surface. Clear blockages and clean air duct as necessary. 8
Table 8.6 Keypad Periodic Inspection Checklist
• Make sure that the keypad shows the data • If you have problems with the display or the keys, contact Yaskawa or your
correctly.
General nearest sales representative.
• Examine for dust or other unwanted material that
• Clean the keypad.
collected on components in the area.

8.3 Maintenance
8.3 Maintenance
The drive Maintenance Monitors keep track of component wear and tell the user when the end of the estimated
performance life is approaching. The Maintenance Monitors prevent the need to shut down the full system for
unexpected problems. Users can set alarm notifications for the maintenance periods for these drive components:
• Cooling fan
• Electrolytic Capacitor
• Soft charge bypass relay
• IGBT
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information about part replacement.
◆ Replaceable Parts
You can replace these parts of the drive:
• Control circuit terminal board
• Cooling fan, circulation fan
• Keypad
If there is a failure in the main circuit, replace the drive.
If the drive is in the warranty period, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before you replace
parts. Yaskawa reserves the right to replace or repair the drive as specified by the Yaskawa warranty policy.
◆ Part Replacement Guidelines

Table 8.7 shows the standard replacement period for replacement parts. When you replace these parts, make sure
that you use Yaskawa replacement parts for the applicable model and design revision number of your drive.
Table 8.7 Standard Replacement Period
Parts Standard Replacement Period
Cooling Fan 10 years
Electrolytic Capacitor *1 10 years
*1 If there is damage to parts that you cannot repair or replace, replace the drive.
Note:
These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing parts to maintain performance. Unsatisfactory conditions or heavy use will
make it necessary for you to replace some parts more frequently than other parts. Performance life estimate is based on the yearly
average of these use conditions.
• Ambient air temperature
–IP00/UL Open Type: 40 °C (104 °F)
–IP20/UL Open Type: 40 °C (104 °F)
–IP20/UL Type 1: 30 °C (86 °F)
–IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; front side: 40 °C (104 °F)
–IP55/UL Type 12 Heatsink External Mounting; back side: 30 °C (86 °F)
• Load factor
80%
• Operating rate
24 hours a day
◆ Monitors that Display the Lifespan of Drive Components

The drive keypad shows percentage values for the replacement parts to help you know when you must replace
those components. Use the monitors in Table 8.8 to check replacement periods. When the monitor value is 100%,
the component is at the end of its useful life and there is an increased risk of drive malfunction. Yaskawa
recommends that you check the maintenance period regularly to make sure that you get the maximum
performance life of the drive.

8.3 Maintenance
Table 8.8 Performance Life Monitors

Monitor No. Parts Description
Shows the total operation time of fans as 0 to 99999 hours. After this value is 99999, the drive automatically
U4-03 resets it to 0.
Cooling fan
U4-04 Shows the total fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.
U4-05 Electrolytic Capacitor Shows the total capacitor usage time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period.
U4-06 Soft charge bypass relay Shows the number of times the drive is energized as a percentage of the performance life of the inrush circuit.
U4-07 IGBT Shows the percentage of the maintenance period for the IGBTs.
◆ Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

You can use H2-xx [MFDO Function Selection] to send a message that tells you when a specified component is
near the end of its performance life estimate. Set the applicable value to H2-xx as shown in Table 8.9 for your
component.
When the specified component is near the end of its performance life estimate, the MFDO terminals set for H2-xx
= 2F [Maintenance Notification] will activate, and the keypad will show an alarm that identifies the component to
replace.
Table 8.9 Maintenance Period Alarms
MFDO
Display Alarm Name Cause Possible Solutions (Setting Value in
H2-xx)
Cooling Fan The cooling fan is at 90% of its expected Replace the cooling fan, then set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation
LT-1 Maintenance Time performance life. Time Setting = 0 h] to reset the cooling fan operation time.
Replace the board or the drive.

Capacitor The capacitors for the main circuit and control
LT-2 Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
Maintenance Time circuit are at 90% of expected performance life.
replace the board.
2F
Replace the board or the drive.
SoftChargeBypassRe The soft charge bypass relay is at 90% of its
LT-3 lay MainteTime performance life estimate. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to
replace the board.
IGBT Maintenance The IGBT is at 50% of its expected performance Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency.
LT-4
Time (50%) life.
TrPC IGBT Maintenance The IGBT is at 90% of its expected performance Replace the IGBT or the drive. 10
Time (90%) life.
◆ Related Parameters
Replace the component, then set o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 [Maintenance Setting] = 0 to reset the
Maintenance Monitor. If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the
Maintenance Monitor function will continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached
with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will not have the correct value of the

performance life for the new component.
Note:
The maintenance period changes for different operating environments.
Table 8.10 Maintenance Setting Parameters
No. Name Function
o4-03 Fan Operation Time Setting Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10-hour units.
Note:
When o4-03 = 30, the drive will count the operation time for the cooling fan from 300 hours and U4-03
[Cooling Fan Ope Time] will show 300 h.
o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting Sets the value from which to start the count for the main circuit capacitor maintenance period as a percentage.
o4-07 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set Sets as a percentage the value from which to start the count for the soft charge bypass relay maintenance
time.
8
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the value from which to start the count for the IGBT maintenance period as a percentage.

8.4 Replace Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans

CAUTION! Injury to Personnel. Some fan units are not easily accessible from a standing position. Make sure that you can
safely and comfortably remove and replace the fan. If you try to remove a fan that you cannot easily access, the fan unit can fall
and cause minor to moderate injury.
NOTICE: Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans. When you do maintenance on the fans, replace all the
fans to increase product life. If you install the fans incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive.
◆ Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans by Drive Model

Table 8.11 Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans (Three-Phase 200 V Class)
Model Cooling Fan Circulation Fan Procedure Ref.
2004 - 2012 - - - -
2018, 2021 1 - Procedure A 410
2030, 2042 2 - Procedure B 412
2056 - 2082 2 - Procedure C 415
2110 - 2211 2 - Procedure D 417
2257 - 2313 2 - Procedure E 419
2360, 2415 3 1 Procedure F 421
Table 8.12 Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans (Three-Phase 400 V Class)
Circuit Board Cooling
Model Cooling Fan Circulation Fan Procedure Ref.
Fan
4002 - 4005 - - - - -
4007 - 4012 1 - - Procedure A 410
4018, 4023 2 - - Procedure B 412
4031 - 4060 2 - - Procedure C 415
4075 - 4168 2 - - Procedure D 417
4208 - 4296 2 - - Procedure E 419
4371 2 1 - Procedure F 421
4389 3 1 - Procedure F 421
4453 - 4675 2 1 2 Procedure G 426
4810 - 4H12 4 2 4 Procedure H 434
◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure A)

CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. De-energize the drive, wait for a minimum of 15 minutes, then make
sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans. If you touch a hot drive heatsink, it can burn you.

■ Fan Removal
1. To remove the fan finger guard from the drive, push the hooks on the left and right sides of it and pull up.
A - Fan finger guard
Figure 8.1 Remove the Fan Finger Guard

2. Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive. Disconnect the relay connector and remove the fan from the
drive.
A - Cooling fan
Figure 8.2 Remove the Cooling Fan
■ Fan Installation
Reverse the removal procedure for fan installation.
1. Connect the relay connector between the drive and cooling fan.
Figure 8.3 Connect the Relay Connector

2. Align the notch on the fan with the pin on the drive and install the cooling fan in the drive.
A - Notch on fan C - Front of drive

B - Alignment pin on drive
Figure 8.4 Install the Cooling Fan

3. Put the cable and connector in the recess of the drive.
A - Front of drive B - Space for cable *1
Figure 8.5 Put the Cable and Connector in the Drive Recess
*1 Make sure that the cable and connector are in the correct space.
4. Insert the fan finger guard straight until the hooks click into place.
Figure 8.6 Reattach the Fan Finger Guard

5. Energize the drive and set o4-03 = 0 [Fan Operation Time Setting = 0 h] to reset the fan operation time.
◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure B)


■ Fan Removal
1. To remove the fan finger guard from the drive, push the hook on the back side of the fan finger guard and
pull up.

2. Pull the cooling fans straight up from the drive. Disconnect the relay connectors and remove the fans from
the drive.
A - Cooling fans
Figure 8.8 Remove the Cooling Fans
1. Connect the relay connectors between the drive and cooling fans.
Figure 8.9 Connect the Relay Connectors

2. Align the notches on the fans with the pins on the drive and install the cooling fans in the drive.

B - Alignment pins on drive
Figure 8.10 Install the Cooling Fans
3. Put the cables in the recess of the drive.
A - Front of drive B - Space for cables *1
Figure 8.11 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess
*1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space.
4. Hold the fan finger guard at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on
the drive.
A - Front of drive C - Connector tabs

B - Drive holes

5. Push the hook on the back side of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive.

◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure C)

■ Fan Removal

the drive.
8
A - Cooling fans



3. Put the cables and connectors in the recess of the drive.
4. Insert the fan finger guard straight until the hooks click into place.


◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure D)

■ Fan Removal

the drive.
A - Cooling fans




4. Push the hooks on the left and right sides of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive.


◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure E)

■ Fan Removal
1. To remove the fan finger guard from the drive, push the tabs on the left and right sides of it and pull up the
back side of the guard.

the drive.
A - Cooling fans




4. Hold the fan finger guard at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on
the drive.
A - Front of drive C - Connector tabs

B - Drive holes

5. Push the hooks on the left and right sides of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive.

◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure F)

■ Fan Removal
1. To remove the fan finger guards from the drive, push the hook on the back side of each guard and pull up.
A - Fan finger guards

Figure 8.33 Remove the Fan Finger Guards
the drive.
Note:

The number of fans is different for different drive models.
A - Cooling fans



4. Hold the fan finger guards at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guards into the holes
on the drive.
Note:
When you install the cooling fans, make sure that you do not pinch cables between the fan finger guards and the drive.

A - Front of drive C - Connector tab

B - Insertion area
Figure 8.38 Reattach the Fan Finger Guards
5. Push the hooks on the back side of the fan finger guards and click them into place on the drive.
Figure 8.39 Reattach the Fan Finger Guards

■ Circulation Fan Removal

Remove the drive cover before you start this procedure.
CAUTION! Crush Hazard. Loosen the cover screws. Do not fully remove them. If you fully remove the cover screws, the
terminal cover can fall and cause moderate injury.

1. Remove the cable from the clamps.
A - Fan unit C - Fan cable

B - Clamps
Figure 8.40 Remove the Fan Cable
2. Loosen the screws that safety the fan unit and slide the fan unit to the right.
Note:
To remove the fan unit, it is only necessary to loosen the screws.
A - Fan unit B - Screws
Figure 8.41 Slide the Fan Unit

3. Disconnect the relay connector and remove the fan unit.
Figure 8.42 Remove the Fan Unit

4. Remove the screws that safety the circulation fan and remove the fan.
A - Circulation fan
Figure 8.43 Remove the Circulation Fan
■ Circulation Fan Installation

1. Connect the relay connector between the drive and circulation fan.
A - Circulation fan B - Fan unit base

2. Align the pin on the fan unit base with the notch on the fan and put the fan in the fan unit base, then use
the screws to safety it.
Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque:
• 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in)
A - Circulation fan C - Alignment pin on fan unit base

B - Fan unit base D - Circulation fan connector
8
Figure 8.45 Install the Circulation Fan

3. Safety the fan cable through the clamp.
A - Clamp
Figure 8.46 Safety the Fan Cable
4. Put the fan unit into the specified location and slide it to the left, then use screws to safety it to the drive.
Figure 8.47 Install the Fan Unit

5. Safety the cable through the clamps.
A - Clamps B - Fan cable
Figure 8.48 Safety the Fan Cable through the Clamps

6. Install the drive cover.
◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure G)


■ Fan Removal
1. Remove the drive cover.
2. Unplug the fan cable from the fan connectors.

B - Fan connectors
Figure 8.49 Remove the Fan Cable
3. Loosen the screws that safety the fan unit and slide the slide panel to the left.
Note:
To remove the fan unit, it is only necessary to loosen the screws in position B.
Remove the screws in position A.
A - Screw position A C - Slide panel

B - Screw position B
8
Figure 8.50 Slide the Slide Panel

4. Remove the fan unit and the slide panel at the same time.

5. Unplug the relay connectors, remove the screws that safety the cooling fans and circulation fan, and then
remove the fans.
A - Cooling fans C - Fan unit base

B - Relay connectors D - Circulation fan
Figure 8.52 Remove the Cooling Fans and Circulation Fan

1. Connect the relay connectors on the fan unit base to the cooling fans and the circulation fan.
A - Cooling fans C - Fan unit base


2. Align the pins on the fan unit base with the notches on the fans and put the fans in the fan unit base, then
use the screws to safety them.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the fans and the fan unit base.
A - Cooling fans D - Circulation fan

B - Fan unit base E - Notch on fan

C - Alignment pin on fan unit base
Figure 8.54 Install the Cooling Fans and Circulation Fan
Note:
Safety the relay cables to the hooks.

A - Cooling fans D - Relay cables

B - Cable hooks E - Circulation fan
C - Relay connectors
4. Put the fan unit into the specified location.

5. Slide the fan unit to the right and use the screws to safety it to the drive.
• Screws in Position A: 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in)
• Screws in Position B: 1.96 N∙m to 2.53 N∙m (17.35 lbf∙in to 22.39 lbf∙in)

A - Screw position A C - Fan unit

B - Screw position B
Figure 8.57 Slide the Fan Unit

6. Connect the fan cable to the fan connectors.

B - Fan connectors
Figure 8.58 Connect Cooling Fan Connectors

■ Circuit Board Cooling Fan Removal


1. Unplug the fan cables from the fan connectors.
A - Fan connectors C - Circuit board cooling fan units

B - Fan cables
Figure 8.59 Unplug the Fan Cables
2. Loosen the screws that safety the circuit board cooling fan unit and slide the circuit board cooling fan unit
up.
Note:
A - Screws
Figure 8.60 Slide the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Units

3. Remove the circuit board cooling fan units.
Figure 8.61 Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Units

4. Remove the screws that safety the circuit board cooling fans and remove the fans.
A - Circuit board cooling fan B - Fan unit base
Figure 8.62 Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fans
■ Circuit Board Cooling Fan Installation

1. Align the pin on the fan unit base with the notch on the fan and put the circuit board cooling fan in the fan
unit, then use the screws to safety the circuit board cooling fan to the fan unit base.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the circuit board cooling fan and the fan unit base.
A - Circuit board cooling fan C - Alignment pin on fan unit base

B - Fan unit base
Figure 8.63 Install the Circuit Board Cooling Fan 8

2. Put the circuit board cooling fan unit into the specified location and slide it down, then use the screws to
safety it to the drive.

Figure 8.64 Install the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Unit


B - Fan cable
Figure 8.65 Fan Connect Cooling Fan Connectors
◆ Fan Replacement (Procedure H)

■ Fan Removal
1. Remove the drive cover.

A - Fan connectors B - Fan cables
Figure 8.66 Components

3. Loosen the screws that safety the fan unit.
A - Screw position A B - Screw position B
Figure 8.67 Loosen the Screws

4. Remove the fan unit.

8

5. Unplug the relay connector, remove the screws that safety the cooling fans and circulation fan, and then
remove the fans.
A - Cooling fan C - Fan unit base

Figure 8.69 Remove the Cooling Fans and Circulation Fan
1. Connect the relay connectors on the fan unit base to the cooling fans and the circulation fan.
A - Cooling fan C - Fan unit base


2. Align the pin on the fan unit base with the notch on the fan and put the fan in the fan unit base, then use
the screws to safety it.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the fans and the fan unit base.

A - Cooling fan D - Circulation fan

B - Fan unit base E - Notch on fan
C - Alignment pin on fan unit base
Figure 8.71 Install the Cooling Fans and Circulation Fan
Note:
Safety the relay cables to the hooks.
A - Cooling fan D - Relay connectors Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
B - Relay cables E - Circulation fan

C - Cable hooks
4. Put the fan unit into the specified location and use screws to safety it to the drive.
• Screws in Position A: 0.98 N∙m to 1.33 N∙m (8.67 lbf∙in to 11.77 lbf∙in)
• Screws in Position B: 1.96 N∙m to 2.53 N∙m (17.35 lbf∙in to 22.39 lbf∙in) 8

A - Screw position A B - Screw position B

A - Fan connectors B - Fan cables
Figure 8.74 Connect Cooling Fan Connectors

■ Circuit Board Cooling Fan Removal



B - Fan cables
Figure 8.75 Unplug the Fan Cables
2. Loosen the screws that safety the circuit board cooling fan unit and slide the circuit board cooling fan unit
up.
Note:

A - Screws
Figure 8.76 Slide the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Units

3. Remove the circuit board cooling fan units.
Figure 8.77 Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Units

4. Remove the screws that safety the circuit board cooling fans and remove the fans.
A - Circuit board cooling fan B - Fan unit base
Figure 8.78 Remove the Circuit Board Cooling Fans
■ Circuit Board Cooling Fan Installation

Reverse the removal procedure to install a cooling fan.
1. Align the pin on the fan unit base with the notch on the fan and put the circuit board cooling fan in the fan
unit, then use the screws to safety the circuit board cooling fan to the fan unit base.
Note:
Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the circuit board cooling fan and the fan unit base.
A - Circuit board cooling fan C - Alignment pin on fan unit base

B - Fan unit base
Figure 8.79 Install the Circuit Board Cooling Fan
2. Put the circuit board cooling fan unit into the specified location and use screws to safety it to the drive.
Figure 8.80 Install the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Unit

3. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors.
A - Fan connectors C - Fan cables

B - Circuit board cooling fan units
Figure 8.81 Connect the Fan Cables

8.5 Replace the Drive

◆ About the Control Circuit Terminal Block
You can remove the control circuit terminal block of the drive and install a new terminal block. If there is a failure
in the drive, you can use this feature to easily replace the control circuit terminal block.
A - Control circuit terminal block B - Control circuit terminal block fastening screw
Figure 8.82 Control Circuit Terminal Block
◆ Replace the Drive

DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect all power to the drive and wait for the time specified on the warning label before
you remove covers. Check the drive for dangerous voltages before servicing or repair work. If you do work on the drive when it
is energized and there is no cover over the electronic circuits, it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock. The
drive has internal capacitors that stay charged after you de-energize the drive.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Only let approved personnel install, wire, maintain, examine, replace parts, and repair the
drive. If personnel are not approved, it can cause serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you touch the drive and circuit boards, make sure that you observe correct electrostatic
discharge (ESD) procedures. If you do not follow procedures, it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry.

drive performance.
the product manual.

terminal screws.



A - Cable clamp

TSD-M 3NM
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
Wire Gauge ≤
25 mm2
(AWG 10):
Wire Gauge ≤ 8
TSD-M 3NM 25 mm2
(AWG 10): N/A
(1.2 - 3 N∙m
(10.6 - 26.6 lbf∙in))
Wire Gauge ≥
(AWG 8):
30 mm2
4.1 - 4.5 N∙m
(AWG 8): N/A (36.3 - 39.8 lbf∙in) *2
*3


5 - 9 N∙m
*3
M6
3 - 3.5 N∙m
*3
8 - 12 N∙m
*3
12 - 14 N∙m
*3
■ Remove the Control Circuit Terminal Block

Remove the keypad and the drive front cover before doing these steps.
1. Loosen the screws on the control circuit terminal block.
Figure 8.86 Loosen the Screws

2. Slide the wired control circuit terminal block down and remove it.
Figure 8.87 Remove the Control Circuit Terminal Block
■ Wire a New Drive

Remove the keypad, front cover, and control circuit terminal block of the new drive. Wire the drive to the main
circuit terminal block before you install a wired control circuit terminal block.
1. Pull the wiring cover away from the drive to remove it.
A B
A - Wiring cover B - Main circuit terminal block

2. Loosen the main circuit terminal block screws to fully open the terminal block opening.
Note:
The terminal block openings ship from the factory as fully open.
Figure 8.89 Loosen Terminal Block Screws

3. Put wires with prepared ends into the main circuit terminal block.

Note:
If there is a jumper between terminals +1 and +2, loosen the terminal block screws to remove the jumper before you wire to
terminals +1 and +2.
4. Tighten the screws to the specified torque.

Figure 8.91 Tighten Terminal Block Screws
5. Check the terminal sign that you wired and use a nipper as shown in Figure 8.92 to clip the specified
cutaway section of the wiring cover.
A - Cutaway sections B - Clip here with nippers 8

Note:
• Be careful when clipping the cutaway section of the wiring cover, as the section may fly out in unpredictable directions.

6. Put the wiring cover in its initial position. Put the cables through the holes that you cut out of the wiring
cover.
■ Connect the Control Circuit Terminal Block

1. To put a wired control circuit terminal block in the drive, align it with the guides and move it straight up.
A - Guides
Figure 8.94 Put the Terminal Block into the Connector

2. Use M3 screws to safety the terminal block.
Figure 8.95 Safety the Terminal Block

3. Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions.
4. Check o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection].
Note:
• When you save parameter information in a keypad that you installed before you replaced the terminal block, make sure that you use
that keypad to restore the parameter data.
• To reset the performance life monitors for the components, set o4-01 to o4-13 [Maintenance Period].

8.6 Replace the Keypad Battery

When the keypad battery is expired, the date and time go back to the default settings. Use this procedure to
replace the battery.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Handle keypad batteries properly. Do not charge the battery or disassemble the keypad. If the battery
explodes, it can cause a fire.
To replace the battery, use a Hitachi Maxell “CR2016 Lithium Manganese Dioxide Lithium Battery” or an
equivalent battery with these properties:
• Nominal voltage: 3 V
• Operating temperature range: -20°C to +85°C (-4°F to +185°F)
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not disassemble batteries. Do not expose batteries to heat or fire. If the battery explodes, it can
cause a fire.
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. The keypad battery stays in use after you de-energize the drive. When you will keep the drive
de-energized for long periods of time, remove the battery from the keypad. When the expected life of the battery is complete,
replace the battery immediately. A dead battery in the keypad can leak and cause damage to the keypad and drive.
The performance life estimate of a new battery is different for different keypad versions.
Refer to “REV” on the keypad nameplate for the keypad version.
• Keypad with REV: H and earlier or REV: J and later
– 5 years (20 °C (68 °F))
– 3.5 years (-10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F))
• Keypad with REV: I
– 2.5 years (20 °C (68 °F))
– 1.8 years (-10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F))
1. De-energize the drive and remove the keypad.
2. Use a slotted screwdriver to turn the battery cover counterclockwise and remove the cover.

A - Battery cover C - Closed
B - Opened
Figure 8.96 Remove the Battery Cover

3. Remove the used battery from the keypad.
4. Insert the new battery.
Note:
• The battery cover side is the positive pole. Make sure that the polarity is correct when you put the battery in the keypad.
• Discard the used battery as specified by local regulations. 8

A - Battery
Figure 8.97 Insert the New Battery

5. Put the battery cover on the keypad and use a slotted screwdriver to turn the battery cover clockwise to
close it.
6. Install the keypad on the drive.

8.7 Storage Guidelines

The chemicals in the electrolytic capacitors and other electronic parts of the drive change over time. When you
store the drive for long periods of time, use the information in this section to help keep the performance life
estimates.
◆ Storage Location
• Temperature and Humidity
When you store the drive for approximately one month, for example during shipping, you can put the drive in a
location where the temperature is -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F). Correctly package and store the drive
during shipping to prevent vibration and impact damage.
Do not put the drive in direct sunlight or where there will be condensation or ice. Put the drive in a location
where the relative humidity is 95% or less.
• Dust and Oil Mist
Do not keep the drive locations with dust or oil mist. For example, cement factories and cotton mills.
• Corrosive Gas
Do not keep the drive in locations with corrosive gas. For example, chemical plants, refineries, and sewage
plants.
• Salt Damage
Do not keep the drive in salty locations. For example, locations near the ocean, and salt damage-designated
locations.
Do not keep the drive in unsatisfactory locations. Keep all drives in storage rooms that are safe from
unsatisfactory elements.
◆ Regular Application of Power

To prevent deterioration of the capacitors, Yaskawa recommends that you apply power to the drive a minimum of
one time each year for a minimum of 30 minutes.
If you store the drive for longer than two years and do not apply power, Yaskawa recommends that you use a
variable power source and gradually increase the power from 0 V to the rated drive voltage over a period of 2 to 3
minutes. Apply power for a minimum of 1 hour with no load to reform the main circuit electrolytic capacitor.
When you operate the drive after you apply power, wire the drive correctly and check for drive faults,
overcurrents, motor vibration, motor speed differences, and other defects during operation.
A - AC power supply C - Drive Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

B - Variable power source
Figure 8.98 Power Distribution Method


9
Disposal
9.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................452
9.2 Disposal Instructions ............................................................................................453

9.1 Section Safety
9.1 Section Safety

WARNING
De-energize the drive and wait 5 minutes minimum until the Charge LED turns off. Remove the
front cover and terminal cover to do work on wiring, circuit boards, and other parts. Use
terminals for their correct function only.
Incorrect wiring, incorrect ground connections, and incorrect repair of protective covers can cause death or
serious injury.
Fire Hazard
Handle keypad batteries properly. Do not charge the battery or disassemble the keypad.
If the battery explodes, it can cause a fire.
Do not disassemble batteries. Do not expose batteries to heat or fire.
If the battery explodes, it can cause a fire.
Crush Hazard
Only approved personnel can operate a crane or hoist to move the drive.
If unapproved personnel operate a crane or hoist, it can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment
The keypad battery stays in use after you de-energize the drive. When you will keep the drive
de-energized for long periods of time, remove the battery from the keypad. When the expected
life of the battery is complete, replace the battery immediately.
A dead battery in the keypad can leak and cause damage to the keypad and drive.

9.2 Disposal Instructions

Correctly discard the drive, packing material, battery, and microSD card as specified by regional, local, and
municipal laws and regulations for this product.
Note:
• Remove the battery and microSD card from the keypad before you discard the drive.
• You cannot recycle the battery. Discard used batteries as specified by the battery manufacturer.
• Customers are responsible for microSD card data protection.
PC functions that format and delete the data may not be sufficient to fully erase the microSD card data. Yaskawa recommends that
customers physically destroy the microSD card in a shredder or use data wipe software to fully erase the card.
◆ WEEE Directive
The wheelie bin symbol on this product, its manual, or its packaging identifies that you must recycle it at the end
of its product life.
You must discard the product at an applicable collection point for electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Do
not discard the product with usual waste.
Disposal


10
Specifications
10.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................456
10.2 Drive Duty Modes ...................................................................................................457
10.3 Model-Specific Specifications (200 V Class)...................................................458
10.4 Model-Specific Specifications (400 V Class)...................................................461
10.5 Drive Specifications...............................................................................................467
10.6 Drive Derating .........................................................................................................470
10.7 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions........................................................476
10.8 Knock-Out Hole Dimensions (IP20/UL Type 1)................................................496
10.9 Peripheral Devices and Options.........................................................................501

10.1 Section Safety
10.1 Section Safety

DANGER

10.2 Drive Duty Modes
10.2 Drive Duty Modes

The drive has two duty modes from which to select for the application: Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND).
Note:
The drive has two duty modes from which to select for the application: Heavy Duty (HD1/2) and Normal Duty (ND1/2). When E1-01
[Input AC Supply Voltage] ≥ 460 V, the duty rating switches to HD2 or ND2. The specifications listed here are different between HD1
and HD2 and ND1 and ND2.
• The input power kVA
• The maximum applicable motor output
• The rated input current
• The rated output capacity
• The rated output current
The rated output current of HD/ND is the reference to set the parameter as a percentage of the drive rated output
current. Refer to Table 10.1 for information about the differences between HD and ND ratings.
Table 10.1 Drive Duty Modes
E1-01 Setting C6-01 Default Carrier Overload Tolerance (oL2
Duty Rating Application
Input Voltage Setting Frequency [Drive Overload])
Heavy Duty Rating 1 • ≥ 200 V and < 240 V 150% of the rated output
• Extruder
(HD1) • ≥ 380 V and < 460 V current for 60 seconds The
• Conveyor
0 2 kHz permitted frequency of
Heavy Duty Rating 2 • Constant torque or high overload overload is one time each 10
≥ 460 V and < 480 V capacity minutes.
(HD2)
Normal Duty Rating 1 • ≥ 200 V and < 240 V • Fan • Models 2004 to 2415, 110% of the rated output
(ND1) • ≥ 380 V and < 460 V 4002 to 4720: 2 kHz current for 60 seconds The
• Pump Swing-PWM
1 permitted frequency of
Normal Duty Rating 2 • Blower overload is one time each 10
• Models 4810 to 4H12: 2
≥ 460 V and < 480 V • Variable speed control kHz minutes.
(ND2)
Specifications
10

10.3 Model-Specific Specifications (200 V Class)

Table 10.2 Rating (200 V Class)
Model 2004 2006 2010 2012 2018 2021 2030 2042
HD1 *1 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5

Maximum Applicable Motor
Output (kW)
ND1 *2 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
HD1 *1 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 7 1/2 10

Output (HP)
ND1 *2 3/4 1 1/2 3 4 5 7 1/2 10 15
HD1 (AC) 3.6 4.8 8.9 12.7 17 20.7 30 40.3
HD1 (DC) 4.5 5.9 10.9 15.6 20.8 25.3 36.8 49.4
Rated Input
Input Current (A)
ND1 (AC) 4.8 6.7 12.7 17 20.7 30 40.3 52
ND1 (DC) 5.9 8.2 15.6 20.8 25.3 36.8 49.4 71.3
Rated Output HD1 *3 1.2 1.9 3.0 4.2 5.3 6.7 9.5 12.6
Capacity
(kVA) ND1 *4 1.3 2.3 3.7 4.6 6.7 8.0 11.4 16.0
HD1 3.2 5 8 11 14 17.5 25 33

Rated Output
Current (A)
ND1 3.5 6 9.6 12.2 17.5 21 30 42
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.
• ND: 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.
Overload Tolerance
Note:
Derating can be necessary for applications that start and stop frequently.
Output
HD: 8 kHz without derating the drive capacity.
Carrier Frequency ND: 2 kHz without derating the drive capacity.
Derate the drive capacity to use values to 15 kHz maximum.
Three-phase 200 V to 240 V

Maximum Output Voltage Note:
The maximum output voltage is proportional to the input voltage.
• AOLV and EZOLV: 120 Hz

Maximum Output Frequency • CL-V/f, CLV, AOLV/PM, and CLV/PM: 400 Hz
• V/f, OLV, OLV/PM: 590 Hz
Measures for DC reactor External options

Harmonics
Braking Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics

Device
EMC Filter Factory option

EMC Filter
IEC 61800-3, C3 • Models 2xxxB: There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive.
Rated Voltage, Rated • Three-phase AC power supply 200 V to 240 V at 50/60 Hz

Frequency • DC power supply 270 V to 340 V
Permitted Voltage Fluctuation -15% to +10%
Power Supply Permitted Frequency

±5%
Fluctuation
HD1 1.5 2.0 3.7 5.3 7.1 8.6 12.5 16.8

Input Power
(kVA)
ND1 2.0 2.8 5.3 7.1 8.6 12.5 16.8 21.6
*1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 208 V motor ratings as specified in NEC Table 430.250. The rated output
current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
*2 The maximum applicable motor output is based on 4-pole, general-purpose 220 V motor ratings. The rated output current of the drive
output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
*3 The rated output capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 208 V.
Model 2056 2070 2082 2110 2138
HD1 *1 11 15 18.5 22 30
Maximum Applicable Motor Output (kW)
ND1 *2 15 18.5 22 30 37
HD1 *1 15 20 25 30 40
Maximum Applicable Motor Output (HP)
ND1 *2 20 25 30 40 50

Model 2056 2070 2082 2110 2138
HD1 (AC) 58.2 78.4 96 82 111
HD1 (DC) 71.3 96 118 100 136

Rated Input Current
Input
(A)
ND1 (AC) 78.4 96 114 111 136
ND1 (DC) 96 117.6 139 136 166
HD1 *3 17.9 22.9 28.6 33.5 43.8

Rated Output
Capacity (kVA)
ND1 *4 21.3 26.7 31.2 41.9 52.6
HD1 47 60 75 88 115
Rated Output
Current (A)
ND1 56 70 82 110 138
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each
10 minutes.
• ND: 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each
Overload Tolerance 10 minutes.
Note:
Output Derating can be necessary for applications that start and stop frequently.



Measures for DC reactor External options Standard internal characteristics

Harmonics
Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics

EMC Filter
• Three-phase AC power supply 200 V to 240 V at 50/60 Hz

Rated Voltage, Rated Frequency
• DC power supply 270 V to 340 V

Power Supply
Permitted Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
HD1 24.2 32.6 39.9 34.1 46.1

Input Power (kVA)
ND1 32.6 39.9 47.4 46.1 56.5
Model 2169 2211 2257 2313 2360 2415
HD1 *1 37 45 55 75 90 110
Maximum Applicable Motor Output
(kW)
ND1 *2 45 55 75 90 110 -
HD1 *1 50 60 75 100 125 150

Maximum Applicable Motor Output
(HP)
ND1 *2 60 75 100 125 150 -
Specifications
HD1 (AC) 136 164 200 271 324 394
HD1 (DC) 166 201 245 331 396 482

Rated Input
Input Current (A)
ND1 (AC) 164 200 271 324 394 -
ND1 (DC) 201 245 331 396 482 -

10

Model 2169 2211 2257 2313 2360 2415
HD1 *3 55.3 68.6 81.9 108 132 158

Rated Output
Capacity (kVA)
ND1 *4 64.4 80.4 97.9 119 137
HD1 145 180 215 283 346 415

Rated Output
Current (A)
ND1 169 211 257 313 360 -
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10
minutes.
• ND: 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10
Overload Tolerance minutes.
Note:
Output Derating can be necessary for applications that start and stop frequently.


Maximum Output Voltage (V) Note:

Measures for
DC reactor Standard internal characteristics
Harmonics
Braking Device Braking Transistor External options

EMC Filter


Power Supply
HD1 56.5 68.2 83.1 113 135 164

Input Power
(kVA)
ND1 68.2 83.1 113 135 164 -


Model Input Duty 4002 4004 4005 4007 4009 4012 4018 4023
Voltage Rating
HD1 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5

< 460 V *1
ND1 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11
Maximum Applicable
Motor Output (kW)
HD2 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
HD1 3/4 1.5 2 3 4 5 7.5 10

< 460 V *1
ND1 1 2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15
Maximum Applicable
Motor Output (HP)
HD2 3/4 1 2 3 4 5 7.5 10
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 1 2 3 4 5 7.5 10 15
HD1 (AC) 1.9 3.5 4.7 6.7 8.9 11.7 15.8 21.2
HD1 (DC) 2.3 4.3 5.8 8.2 10.9 14.3 19.4 26.0
< 460 V
ND1 (AC) 2.5 4.7 6.7 8.9 11.7 15.8 21.2 30.6
ND1 (DC) 3.1 5.8 8.2 10.9 14.3 19.4 26.0 37.5
Rated Input
Input
Current (A)
HD2 (AC) 1.6 2.1 3.9 5.5 7.4 9.0 13.1 17.5
HD2 (DC) 1.9 2.5 4.8 6.8 9.0 11.0 16.0 21.5
≥ 460 V
ND2 (AC) 2.1 3.9 5.5 7.4 9.0 13.1 17.5 25.3
ND2 (DC) 2.5 4.8 6.8 9.0 11.0 16.0 21.5 31.0
HD1 1.2 2.2 3.2 3.6 4.7 6.1 10 12

< 460 V *3
Rated Output ND1 1.4 2.7 3.6 4.7 5.9 7.8 12 15
Capacity
(kVA) HD2 1.3 1.7 2.7 3.8 5.5 6.1 8.8 11
≥ 460 V *4
ND2 1.7 2.7 3.8 5.5 6.1 8.8 11 17
HD1 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18

< 460 V
ND1 2.1 4.1 5.4 7.1 8.9 11.9 17.5 23.4
Rated Output
Current (A)
HD2 1.6 2.1 3.4 4.8 6.9 7.6 11 14
≥ 460 V
ND2 2.1 3.4 4.8 6.9 7.6 11 14 21
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10
minutes.
Output
• ND: 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds. The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10
Overload Tolerance minutes.
Note:



Measures for
DC reactor External options
Harmonics
Specifications
Braking
Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics
Device

EMC Filter
10

Model Input Duty 4002 4004 4005 4007 4009 4012 4018 4023
Voltage Rating


Power
Supply HD1 1.5 2.8 3.7 5.3 7.1 9.3 13 17
< 460 V
ND1 2.0 3.7 5.3 7.1 9.3 13 17 24
Input Power
(kVA)
HD2 1.3 1.7 3.2 4.6 6.2 7.5 11 15
≥ 460 V
ND2 1.7 3.2 4.6 6.2 7.5 11 15 21
*1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 380 V motor ratings as specified in Annex G of IEC 60947-4-1. The rated
output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current.
Input
Model Voltage Duty Rating 4031 4038 4044 4060 4075 4089 4103
HD1 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
< 460 V *1
ND1 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Output (kW)
HD2 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
HD1 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
< 460 V *1
ND1 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Output (HP)
HD2 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
HD1 (AC) 30.6 41.3 50.5 43.1 58.3 71.5 86.5
HD1 (DC) 37.5 50.5 61.9 52.8 71.4 87.5 106.0

< 460 V
ND1 (AC) 41.3 50.5 59.7 58.3 71.5 86.5 105
ND1 (DC) 50.5 61.9 73.2 71.4 87.5 106.0 129

Rated Input
Input
Current (A)
HD2 (AC) 25.3 34.1 41.7 35.6 48.1 59.0 71.4
HD2 (DC) 31.0 41.8 51.1 43.7 59.0 72.3 87.5

≥ 460 V
ND2 (AC) 34.1 41.7 49.4 48.1 59.0 71.4 86.9
ND2 (DC) 41.8 51.1 60.4 59.0 72.3 87.5 106.0

Model Input Duty Rating 4031 4038 4044 4060 4075 4089 4103
Voltage
HD1 16 20 26 30 39 49 60
< 460 V *3
Rated Output ND1 20 25 29 39 49 59 68
Capacity
(kVA) HD2 17 22 27 32 41 52 61
≥ 460 V *4
ND2 22 27 32 41 52 61 76
HD1 24 31 39 45 60 75 91
< 460 V
ND1 31 38 44 59.6 74.9 89.2 103
Rated Output
Current (A)
HD2 21 27 34 40 52 65 77
≥ 460 V
ND2 27 34 40 52 65 77 96
10 minutes.
Output
Note:



Measures for DC reactor External options Standard internal characteristics

Harmonics
Braking Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics

Device

EMC Filter


Power Supply
HD1 24 33 40 34 46 57 69
< 460 V
ND1 33 40 48 46 57 69 84
Input Power
(kVA)
HD2 21 28 35 30 40 49 59
≥ 460 V
ND2 28 35 41 40 49 59 72
Input
Model Duty Rating 4140 4168 4208 4250 4296 4371 4389
Voltage
HD1 55 75 90 110 132 160 200

< 460 V *1
Specifications
ND1 75 90 110 132 160 200 220

Output (kW)
HD2 55 75 90 110 150 185 220
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 75 90 110 150 185 220 260
HD1 75 100 125 150 175 200 250

< 460 V *1
ND1 100 125 150 175 200 250 300
10
Output (HP)
HD2 75 100 125 150 200 250 300
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 100 125 150 200 250 300 350

Model Input Duty Rating 4140 4168 4208 4250 4296 4371 4389
Voltage
HD1 (AC) 105 142 170 207 248 300 373
HD1 (DC) 129 174 209 254 304 367 457

< 460 V
ND1 (AC) 142 170 207 248 300 373 410
ND1 (DC) 174 209 254 304 367 457 502

Rated Input
Input Current (A)
HD2 (AC) 86.9 118 141 171 232 289 346
HD2 (DC) 106.0 144 172 210 284 354 424

≥ 460 V
ND2 (AC) 118 141 171 232 289 346 403
ND2 (DC) 144 172 210 284 354 424 494
HD1 74 99 118 142 171 200 244

< 460 V *3
Rated Output ND1 92 111 137 165 195 244 256
Capacity
(kVA) HD2 76 99 124 143 191 241 288
≥ 460 V *4
ND2 99 124 143 191 241 288 330
HD1 112 150 180 216 260 304 371

< 460 V
ND1 140 168 208 250 296 371 389
Rated Output
Current (A)
HD2 96 124 156 180 240 302 361
≥ 460 V
ND2 124 156 180 240 302 361 414
10 minutes.
Output
Note:



Measures for
Harmonics DC reactor Standard internal characteristics
Braking Standard internal

Device Braking Transistor characteristics External options

EMC Filter


Power Supply
HD1 84 113 135 165 198 239 297
< 460 V
ND1 113 135 165 198 239 297 327
Input Power
(kVA)
HD2 72 98 117 142 193 240 288
≥ 460 V
ND2 98 117 142 193 295 288 335

Model Input Duty Rating 4453 4568 4675 4810 4930 4H11 4H12
Voltage
HD1 220 250 315 400 450 500 560

< 460 V *1
ND1 250 315 355 450 500 560 630
Output (kW)
HD2 260 300 335 450 525 600 675
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 300 335 370 525 600 675 750
HD1 300 335 400 536 603 670 751

< 460 V *1
ND1 335 400 450 603 670 751 845
Output (HP)
HD2 350 400 450 600 700 800 900
≥ 460 V *2
ND2 400 450 500 700 800 900 1000
HD1 (AC) 410 465 584 783 830 976 1031
HD1 (DC) 502 569 715 959 1017 1195 1262

< 460 V
ND1 (AC) 465 584 657 879 922 1091 1158
ND1 (DC) 569 715 805 1077 1129 1337 1418

Rated Input
Input Current (A)
HD2 (AC) 403 460 516 726 799 965 1024
HD2 (DC) 494 563 632 890 978 1182 1255

≥ 460 V
ND2 (AC) 460 516 573 846 912 1085 1137
ND2 (DC) 563 632 702 1036 1117 1328 1392
HD1 272 298 398 474 533 612 717

< 460 V *3
Rated Output ND1 298 374 444 533 612 717 790
Capacity
(kVA) HD2 330 380 410 574 645 741 868
≥ 460 V *4
ND2 380 410 482 645 741 868 956
HD1 414 453 605 720 810 930 1090

< 460 V
ND1 453 568 675 810 930 1090 1200
Rated Output
Current (A)
HD2 414 477 515 720 810 930 1090
≥ 460 V
ND2 477 515 605 810 930 1090 1200
10 minutes.
Output
Note:



Measures for
Harmonics DC reactor Standard internal characteristics
Braking
Braking Transistor External options
Device
Specifications
Factory option
EMC Filter
EMC Filter • Models 4xxxB: There is a category C3 Factory option
IEC 61800-3, C3
EMC filter in the drive.
10

Model Input Duty Rating 4453 4568 4675 4810 4930 4H11 4H12
Voltage


Power Supply
HD1 327 370 465 624 662 777 821
< 460 V
ND1 370 465 523 701 734 870 923
Input Power
(kVA)
HD2 335 382 429 604 664 803 852
≥ 460 V
ND2 382 429 476 703 758 902 945

10.5 Drive Specifications

Note:
• To get the OLV, CLV, and AOLV specifications, do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• To get the longest product life, install the drive in an environment that meets the necessary specifications.
Table 10.9 Control Characteristics
Item Specification
• V/f Control
• V/f Control with Encoder
• Open Loop Vector
• Closed Loop Vector
Control Methods • Advanced Open Loop Vector
• PM Open Loop Vector
• PM Advanced Open Loop Vector
• PM Closed Loop Vector
• EZ Vector Control
• AOLV and EZOLV: 0.01 Hz to 120 Hz

Frequency Control • CL-V/f, CLV, AOLV/PM, and CLV/PM: 0.01 Hz to 400 Hz
Range
• V/f, OLV, and OLV/PM: 0.01 Hz to 590 Hz
Frequency Accuracy Digital inputs: ±0.01% of the maximum output frequency (-10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F))
(Temperature Analog inputs: ±0.1% of the maximum output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C (77 °F ±18 °F))
Fluctuation)
Frequency Setting Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz

Resolution Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output frequency (11-bit signed)
Output Frequency 0.001 Hz

Resolution
Frequency Setting Main speed frequency reference: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Signal Main speed reference: Pulse train input (maximum 32 kHz)
• V/f: 150%/3 Hz
• CL-V/f: 150%/3 Hz
• OLV: 200%/0.3 Hz
• CLV: 200%/0 min-1 (r/min)
• AOLV: 200%/0.3 Hz
• OLV/PM: 100%/5% speed
• AOLV/PM: 200%/0 min-1 (r/min)
• CLV/PM: 200%/0 min-1 (r/min)
Starting Torque • EZOLV: 100%/1% speed
Note:
• Correctly select the drive and motor capacity for this starting torque in these control methods:
–OLV
–CLV
–AOLV
–AOLV/PM
–CLV/PM
• Set n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] for this starting torque in AOLV/PM. When you use a non-Yaskawa PM motor, do Rotational
Auto-Tuning.
• V/f: 1:40
• CL-V/f: 1:40
• OLV: 1:200
• CLV: 1:1500
• AOLV: 1:200
• OLV/PM: 1:20
Speed Control Range
• AOLV/PM: 1:100
• CLV/PM: 1:1500
• EZOLV: 1:100
Note:
• Set n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] for this Speed Control Range in AOLV/PM. When you use a non-Yaskawa PM motor, do
Specifications
• Speed control range of 1:100 for AOLV/PM is Instantaneous operation range. Correctly select the drive and motor capacity for continuous operation.
Possible in these control methods:

• CLV
Zero Speed Control
• AOLV/PM
• CLV/PM
10

Item Specification
You can use parameter settings for different limits in four quadrants in these control methods:
• OLV
• CLV
Torque Limits • AOLV
• AOLV/PM
• CLV/PM
• EZOLV
Acceleration and 0.0 s to 6000.0 s

Deceleration Times The drive can set four pairs of different acceleration and deceleration times.
Approximately 20%
Approximately 125% with a dynamic braking option
• Short-time average deceleration torque
Motor output 0.4/0.75 kW: over 100%
Motor output 1.5 kW: over 50%
Motor output 2.2 kW and larger: over 20%, Overexcitation Braking/High Slip Braking allow for approximately 40%
• Continuous regenerative torque: Approximately 20%. Dynamic braking option allows for approximately 125%, 10%ED, 10 s
WARNING!
Set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled] when you operate the drive with:
• a regenerative converter
Braking Torque
• regenerative unit
• braking unit
• braking resistor
• braking resistor unit.
If you set the parameter incorrectly, the drive can decelerate for too long and cause serious injury or death.
Note:
• Models 2004 to 2138 and 4002 to 4168 have a braking transistor.
• Short-time average deceleration torque refers to the necessary torque to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from the load) from the rated speed to zero.
Motor characteristics can change the actual specifications.
• Motor characteristics change the continuous regenerative torque and short-time average deceleration torque for motors 2.2 kW and larger.
V/f Characteristics Select from 15 pre-defined V/f patterns, or a user-set V/f pattern.
Torque Control, Droop Control, Speed/Torque Control Switching, Feed Forward Control, Zero Servo Function, Restart After Momentary Power Loss,
Speed Search, Overtorque/Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, 17-Step Speed (max.), Accel/Decel Switch, S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration, 3-wire
Sequence, Auto-Tuning (Rotational and Stationary), Dwell Function, Cooling Fan ON/OFF Switch, Slip Compensation, Torque Compensation, Frequency
Main Control
Jump, Upper/Lower Limits for Frequency Reference, DC Injection Braking at Start and Stop, Overexcitation Braking, High Slip Braking, PID Control
Functions (with Sleep Function), Energy Saving Control, MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication (RS-485 max, 115.2 kbps), Auto Restart, Application Presets,
DriveWorksEZ (customized functions), Removable Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function, Online Tuning, KEB, Overexcitation Deceleration,
Inertia (ASR) Tuning, Overvoltage Suppression, High Frequency Injection
Table 10.10 Protection Functions

Item Specification
Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload protection
Momentary Drive stops when the output current is more than 200% of the HD output current.
Overcurrent
Protection
Drive stops when the output current is more than these overload tolerances:
• HD: 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.
Overload Protection • ND: 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds The permitted frequency of overload is one time each 10 minutes.
Note:
If output frequency < 6 Hz, the drive can trigger the overload protection function when the output current is in the overload tolerance range.
Overvoltage 200 V Class: Stops when the DC bus voltage is more than approximately 410 V
Protection 400 V Class: Stops when the DC bus voltage is more than approximately 820 V
Undervoltage 200 V Class: Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 190 V
Protection 400 V Class: Stops when the DC bus voltage decreases to less than approximately 380 V
Stops when power loss is longer than 15 ms.

Continues operation if power loss is shorter than 2 s (depending on parameter settings).
Momentary Power Note:
Loss Ride-thru • The stop time can be shorter depending on the load and motor speed.
• Drive capacity will change the continuous operation time. A Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit is necessary to continue operation through a 2 s
power loss on models 2004 to 2056 and 4002 to 4031.
Heatsink Overheat The drive stops when the thermistor detects an IGBT temperature more than approximately 100°C (212°F). The trip temperature level is different for
Protection different drive models.
Braking Resistor Overheat detection for braking resistor (optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Overheat Protection
Stall Prevention Stall prevention is available during acceleration, deceleration, and during run.

Item Specification
Electronic circuit protection

Note:
Ground Fault
Protection This protection detects ground faults during run. The drive will not provide protection when:
• There is a low-resistance ground fault for the motor cable or terminal block
• You energize the drive when there is a ground fault.
DC Bus Charge LED Charge LED illuminates when DC bus voltage is more than 50 V.
Table 10.11 Environment

Item Specification
Area of Use Indoors
Power Supply Overvoltage Category III

IP20/UL Type 1: -10 °C to +40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F)
Surrounding Air • When you install the drive in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range.
Temperature
• Do not let the drive freeze.
• You can use IP00/IP20/UL Open Type drives at a maximum of 60 °C (140 °F) when you derate the output current.
• You can use IP20/UL Type 1 drives at a maximum of 50 °C (122 °F) when you derate the output current.
95% RH or less
Humidity
Do not let condensation form on the drive.
Storage Temperature -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) (short-term temperature during transportation)
Pollution degree 2 or less

Install the drive in an area without:
• Oil mist, corrosive or flammable gas, or dust
• Metal powder, oil, water, or other unwanted materials
Surrounding Area
• Radioactive materials or flammable materials, including wood
• Harmful gas or fluids
• Salt
• Direct sunlight
1000 m (3281 ft) Maximum

Note:
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m (3281 ft to 13123 ft).
Altitude It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• Installing the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• Installing the drive between 2000 m to 4000 m (6562 ft to 13123 ft) and grounding the neutral point on the power supply.
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if you will not ground the neutral point.
• 10 Hz to 20 Hz:
2004 to 2415, 4002 to 4675: 1 G (9.8 m/s2, 32.15 ft/s2)
4810 to 4H12: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)
Vibration *1
• 20 Hz to 55 Hz:
2004 to 2211, 4002 to 4168: 0.6 G (5.9 m/s2, 19.36 ft/s2)
2257 to 2415, 4208 to 4H12: 0.2 G (2.0 m/s2, 6.56 ft/s2)
Installation Install the drive vertically for sufficient airflow to cool the drive.
Orientation
*1 This drive passed the vibration test with a logarithmic sweep as specified by EN 60068-2-6 and JIS C60068-2-6. If the internal
components of the drive vibrate too much, it can cause damage to the drive even when the vibration frequency is in the specification.
If the drive components vibrate, improve the installation environment to decrease vibration. To improve the installation environment
for vibration, you can put the motor on a rubber pad or reinforce the structure of the installation.
Table 10.12 Standard
Item Specification
• UL 61800-5-1
• EN 61800-3
Applicable Standards
• IEC/EN 61800-5-1
• Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to EN ISO 13849-1:2015 (PL e (Cat.III)), IEC/EN 61508 SIL3
Specifications
IP00/UL Open Type

IP20/UL Open Type
Enclosure Protection
IP20/UL Type 1
Design
Note:
To change an IP20/UL Open Type drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 drive, install a UL Type 1 kit.
10

10.6 Drive Derating
10.6 Drive Derating

You must derate the drive capacity to operate the drive above the rated temperature, altitude, and default carrier
frequency.
◆ Carrier Frequency Settings and Rated Current Values

Table 10.13 and Table 10.16 show how the drive rated output current changes when the C6-02 [Carrier
Frequency Selection] value changes.
The output current value changes linearly as the carrier frequency changes. You can use the values from the tables
to calculate a frequency that is not shown. When A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = AOLV], refer to Table
10.14 and Table 10.17.
When A1-02 = 6 [AOLV/ PM], refer to Table 10.15 and Table 10.18.
Note:
The drive only applies the carrier frequency derating of the output current to the reference output current value of oL2 [Drive Overload].
The drive will not derate the 100% output rated current of parameters and monitors as specified in the output rated current shown in
Model-Specific Specifications (200 V Class) on page 458 and Model-Specific Specifications (400 V Class) on page 461.
■ 200 V Class
Table 10.13 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8
Rated Current (A)
Model Heavy Duty Rating (HD1) Normal Duty Rating (ND1)
2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz
2004 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.1 2.9 2.78 3.5 3.3 2.9 2.7 2.4 2.1
2006 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.8 4.6 4.3 6.0 5.6 5.0 4.6 4.1 3.6
2010 8.0 8.0 8.0 7.4 6.6 5.8 9.6 9.0 8.0 7.4 6.6 5.8
2012 11.0 11.0 11.0 10.4 9.6 8.8 12.0 11.7 11.0 10.5 9.9 9.3
2018 14.0 14.0 14.0 12.6 10.8 9.1 17.5 16.1 14.0 12.6 10.8 9.1
2021 17.5 17.5 17.5 16.1 14.3 12.6 21.0 19.6 17.0 16.1 14.3 12.5
2030 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.0 20.5 18.0 30.0 28.0 25.0 23.0 20.5 18.0
2042 33.0 33.0 33.0 29.3 24.8 20.2 42.0 38.4 33.0 29.4 24.9 20.4
2056 47.0 47.0 47.0 43.4 38.9 34.4 56.0 52.4 47.0 43.4 38.9 34.4
2070 60.0 60.0 60.0 56.0 51.0 46.0 70.0 66.0 60.0 56.0 51.0 46.0
2082 75.0 75.0 75.0 68.6 60.5 53.0 82.0 82.0 75.0 68.8 61.0 53.1
2110 88.0 88.0 88.0 80.5 71.0 62.0 110.0 102.7 92.0 84.3 75.2 66.0
2138 115.0 115.0 115.0 105.1 92.8 81.0 138.0 128.8 115.0 105.8 94.3 82.8
2169 145.0 145.0 125.2 112.0 - - 169.0 152.7 128.3 112.0 - -
2211 180.0 180.0 155.2 138.6 - - 211.0 190.2 158.9 138.1 - -
2257 215.0 215.0 184.8 164.7 - - 257.0 230.4 190.5 163.9 - -
2313 283.0 283.0 249.0 226.4 - - 313.0 288.5 251.7 227.1 - -
2360 346.0 346.0 294.3 259.8 - - 360.0 330.8 287.6 258.8 - -
2415 415.0 415.0 365.2 332.0 - - 415.0 391.3 355.7 332.0 - -
Table 10.14 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV]
Rated Current (A)
2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz
2004 3.2 3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6 3.5 3.0 2.4 2.1 1.7
2006 5.0 5.0 4.6 4.3 4.0 6.0 5.1 4.0 3.6 2.8
2010 8.0 8.0 6.7 5.8 4.5 9.6 8.2 7.0 5.8 4.6
2012 11.0 11.0 9.8 8.8 7.7 12.0 11.1 10.0 9.3 8.4

10.6 Drive Derating
Rated Current (A)
2018 14.0 14.0 11.2 9.1 6.4 17.5 14.3 11.0 9.1 6.4
2021 17.5 17.5 14.7 12.6 9.9 21.0 17.8 15.0 12.5 9.9
2030 25.0 25.0 21.0 18.0 14.3 30.0 25.5 21.0 18.0 14.3
2042 33.0 33.0 25.7 20.2 13.3 42.0 33.9 26.0 20.4 13.7
2056 47.0 47.0 39.8 34.4 27.7 56.0 47.9 40.0 34.4 27.6
2070 60.0 60.0 52.0 46.0 38.5 70.0 61.0 52.0 46.0 38.5
2082 75.0 75.0 62.1 52.5 40.4 82.0 76.7 63.0 53.1 41.4
2110 88.0 88.0 72.9 61.6 47.5 110.0 93.5 77.0 66.0 52.3
2138 115.0 115.0 95.3 80.5 62.0 138.0 117.3 97.0 82.8 65.6
2169 145.0 128.5 98.8 78.9 - 169.0 132.3 95.7 71.2 -
2211 180.0 159.3 122.0 97.2 - 211.0 164.1 117.2 86.0 -
2257 215.0 189.8 144.5 114.3 - 257.0 197.2 137.3 97.4 -
2313 283.0 254.7 203.8 169.8 - 313.0 257.8 202.6 165.8 -
2360 346.0 302.9 225.3 173.6 - 360.0 294.8 230.0 186.8 -
2415 415.0 373.5 298.8 249.0 - 415.0 361.6 308.3 272.7 -
Table 10.15 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 6 [AOLV/PM]
Rated Current (A)
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz
2004 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.0 2.8 2.6 3.5 3.1 2.8 2.4 2.1 1.7
2006 5.0 5.0 4.9 4.6 4.3 4.1 6.0 5.4 4.8 4.2 3.6 3.0
2010 8.0 8.0 7.7 6.7 5.8 4.8 9.6 8.6 7.7 6.7 5.8 4.8
2012 11.0 11.0 10.7 9.8 8.8 7.9 12.2 11.5 10.7 10.0 9.3 8.6
2018 14.0 14.0 13.3 11.2 9.1 6.9 17.5 15.4 13.3 11.2 9.1 6.9
2021 17.5 17.5 16.8 14.7 12.6 10.4 21.0 18.9 16.8 14.6 12.5 10.4
2030 25.0 25.0 24.0 21.0 18.0 15.0 30.0 27.0 24.0 21.0 18.0 15.0
2042 33.0 33.0 31.2 25.7 20.2 14.7 42.0 36.6 31.2 25.8 20.4 15.0
2056 47.0 47.0 45.2 39.8 34.4 29.0 56.0 50.6 45.2 39.8 34.4 29.0
2070 60.0 60.0 58.0 52.0 46.0 40.0 70.0 64.0 58.0 52.0 46.0 40.0
2082 75.0 75.0 71.8 62.1 52.5 42.9 82.0 81.4 72.0 62.6 53.1 43.7
2110 88.0 88.0 84.2 72.9 61.6 50.3 110.0 99.0 88.0 77.0 66.0 55.0
2138 115.0 115.0 110.1 95.3 80.5 65.7 138.0 124.2 110.4 96.6 82.8 69.0
2169 145.0 138.4 118.6 98.8 78.9 - 169.0 144.6 120.1 95.7 71.2 -
2211 180.0 171.7 146.9 122.0 97.2 - 211.0 179.7 148.5 117.2 86.0 -
2257 215.0 204.9 174.7 144.5 114.3 - 257.0 217.1 177.2 137.3 97.4 -
2313 283.0 271.7 237.7 203.8 169.8 - 313.0 276.2 239.4 202.6 165.8 -
Specifications
2360 346.0 328.8 277.0 225.3 173.6 - 359.6 316.4 273.2 230.0 186.8 -
2415 415.0 398.4 348.6 298.8 249.0 - 415.0 379.4 343.9 308.3 272.7 -
10

10.6 Drive Derating
■ 400 V Class
Table 10.16 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8 (< 460 V)
Rated Current (A)
2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12.5 kHz 15 kHz
4002 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.3 1.0 2.1 2.0 1.8 1.7 1.5 1.4
4004 3.4 3.4 3.4 2.9 2.3 1.7 4.1 3.8 3.4 3.1 2.8 2.4
4005 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.3 3.7 3.0 5.4 5.2 4.8 4.6 4.3 3.9
4007 5.5 5.5 5.5 4.9 4.1 3.2 7.1 6.5 5.5 4.8 4.0 3.2
4009 7.2 7.2 7.2 6.5 5.6 4.8 8.9 8.2 7.2 6.5 5.6 4.8
4012 9.2 9.2 9.2 8.1 6.8 5.4 11.9 10.8 9.2 8.1 6.7 5.4
4018 14.8 14.8 14.8 13.1 11.0 8.9 17.5 17.3 14.8 13.1 11.0 8.9
4023 18.0 18.0 18.0 15.9 13.4 10.8 23.0 21.5 18.3 16.2 13.6 11.0
4031 24.0 24.0 24.0 21.2 17.7 14.1 31.0 28.2 24.0 21.1 17.6 14.1
4038 31.0 31.0 31.0 27.5 23.0 18.6 38.0 36.3 31.0 27.5 23.0 18.6
4044 39.0 39.0 39.0 34.5 29.0 23.4 44.0 43.6 37.5 33.5 28.4 23.4
4060 45.0 45.0 45.0 39.1 31.8 24.4 60.0 53.7 44.9 39.1 31.7 24.0
4075 60.0 60.0 60.0 53.1 44.6 36.0 75.0 73.8 62.9 55.6 46.5 37.0
4089 75.0 75.0 75.0 66.4 55.7 45.0 89.0 88.8 75.8 67.2 56.4 46.0
4103 91.0 91.0 91.0 80.6 67.6 54.6 103.0 103.0 90.3 80.1 67.3 55.0
4140 112.0 112.0 91.8 78.4 - - 140.0 122.8 96.7 79.0 - -
4168 150.0 150.0 123.0 105.0 - - 168.0 150.5 124.4 107.0 - -
4208 180.0 180.0 147.6 126.0 - - 208.0 179.7 137.2 109.0 - -
4250 216.0 216.0 177.1 151.2 - - 250.0 221.8 179.4 151.0 - -
4296 260.0 260.0 213.2 182.0 - - 296.0 263.4 214.6 182.0 - -
4371 304.0 304.0 249.3 212.8 - - 371.0 327.2 261.6 218.0 - -
4389 371.0 371.0 304.2 259.7 - - 389.0 348.0 286.3 245.0 - -
4453 414.0 345.7 - - - - 453.0 349.0 - - - -
4568 453.0 378.3 - - - - 568.0 437.0 - - - -
4675 605.0 505.2 - - - - 675.0 529.0 - - - -
4810 720.0 600.0 - - - - 810.0 624.0 - - - -
4930 810.0 675.0 - - - - 930.0 716.0 - - - -
4H11 930.0 775.0 - - - - 1090.0 852.0 - - - -
4H12 1090.0 908.0 - - - - 1200.0 938.0 - - - -
Table 10.17 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] (< 460 V)
Rated Current (A)
4002 1.8 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.6 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2
4004 3.4 3.4 2.4 1.7 0.8 4.1 3.5 2.8 2.4 1.9
4005 4.8 4.8 3.8 3.0 2.1 5.4 4.9 4.3 3.9 3.5
4007 5.5 5.5 4.2 3.2 2.0 7.1 5.7 4.2 3.2 2.0
4009 7.2 7.2 5.8 4.8 3.5 8.9 7.4 5.8 4.8 3.5
4012 9.2 9.2 7.0 5.4 3.3 11.9 9.5 7.0 5.4 3.3
4018 14.8 14.8 11.4 8.9 5.7 17.5 15.2 11.4 8.9 5.7
4023 18.0 18.0 13.9 10.8 6.9 23.0 18.8 14.1 11.0 7.1
4031 24.0 24.0 18.4 14.1 8.8 31.0 24.7 18.3 14.1 8.8

10.6 Drive Derating
Rated Current (A)
4038 31.0 31.0 23.9 18.6 12.0 38.0 31.9 23.9 18.6 12.0
4044 39.0 39.0 30.1 23.4 15.0 44.0 38.5 29.5 23.4 15.8
4060 45.0 45.0 33.3 24.4 13.4 60.0 46.4 33.2 24.4 13.4
4075 60.0 60.0 46.3 36.0 23.1 75.0 64.7 48.4 37.5 23.8
4089 75.0 75.0 57.9 45.0 28.9 89.0 78.0 58.6 45.6 29.4
4103 91.0 91.0 70.2 54.6 35.1 103.0 92.8 69.9 54.6 35.5
4140 112.0 95.2 65.0 44.8 - 140.0 101.1 62.0 36.0 -
4168 150.0 127.5 87.0 60.0 - 168.0 128.7 89.5 63.0 -
4208 180.0 153.0 104.4 72.0 - 208.0 144.3 80.6 38.0 -
4250 216.0 183.6 125.3 86.4 - 250.0 186.5 123.0 81.0 -
4296 260.0 221.0 150.8 104.0 - 296.0 222.7 149.4 101.0 -
4371 304.0 258.4 176.3 121.6 - 371.0 272.5 174.0 108.0 -
4389 371.0 315.4 215.2 148.4 - 389.0 297.0 203.8 142.0 -
4453 414.0 259.8 - - - 453.0 219.0 - - -
4568 453.0 284.3 - - - 568.0 274.0 - - -
4675 605.0 379.6 - - - 675.0 345.0 - - -
4810 720.0 450.0 - - - 810.0 391.0 - - -
4930 810.0 506.0 - - - 930.0 449.0 - - -
4H11 930.0 581.0 - - - 1090.0 554.0 - - -
4H12 1090.0 681.0 - - - 1200.0 610.0 - - -
Table 10.18 Carrier Frequency and Rated Current Derating When A1-02 = 6 [AOLV/PM] (< 460 V)
Rated Current (A)
4002 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.6 2.1 1.9 1.7 1.6 1.4 1.2
4004 3.4 3.4 3.2 2.4 1.7 1.0 4.1 3.7 3.3 2.8 2.4 2.0
4005 4.8 4.8 4.5 3.8 3.0 2.3 5.4 5.0 4.7 4.3 3.9 3.6
4007 5.5 5.5 5.2 4.2 3.2 2.3 7.1 6.1 5.2 4.2 3.2 2.3
4009 7.2 7.2 6.9 5.8 4.8 3.8 8.9 7.9 6.8 5.8 4.8 3.7
4012 9.2 9.2 8.7 7.0 5.4 3.8 11.9 10.3 8.6 7.0 5.4 3.8
4018 14.8 14.8 14.0 11.4 8.9 6.3 17.5 16.5 14.0 11.4 8.9 6.3
4023 18.0 18.0 17.0 13.9 10.8 7.7 23.4 20.4 17.3 14.1 11.0 7.8
4031 24.0 24.0 22.6 18.4 14.1 9.9 31.0 26.8 22.6 18.3 14.1 9.9
4038 31.0 31.0 29.2 23.9 18.6 13.3 38.0 34.5 29.2 23.9 18.6 13.3
4044 39.0 39.0 36.8 30.1 23.4 16.7 44.0 41.6 35.5 29.5 23.4 17.3
4060 45.0 45.0 42.1 33.3 24.4 15.6 59.6 50.8 42.0 33.2 24.4 15.6
Specifications
4075 60.0 60.0 56.6 46.3 36.0 25.7 74.9 70.2 59.3 48.4 37.5 26.5
4089 75.0 75.0 70.7 57.9 45.0 32.1 89.2 84.5 71.5 58.6 45.6 32.7
4103 91.0 91.0 85.8 70.2 54.6 39.0 103.0 100.5 85.2 69.9 54.6 39.3
4140 112.0 105.3 85.1 65.0 44.8 - 140.0 114.1 88.1 62.0 36.0 -
4168 150.0 141.0 114.0 87.0 60.0 - 168.0 141.8 115.6 89.5 63.3 - 10
4208 180.0 169.2 136.8 104.4 72.0 - 208.0 165.5 123.1 80.6 38.1 -
4250 216.0 203.0 164.2 125.3 86.4 - 250.0 207.7 165.3 123.0 80.6 -
4296 260.0 244.4 197.6 150.8 104.0 - 296.0 247.1 198.3 149.4 100.6 -

10.6 Drive Derating
Rated Current (A)
4371 304.0 285.8 231.0 176.3 121.6 - 371.0 305.3 239.7 174.0 108.3 -
4389 371.0 348.7 282.0 215.2 148.4 - 389.0 327.5 265.7 203.8 142.0 -
4453 414.0 311.3 - - - - 453.0 296.7 - - - -
4568 453.0 340.7 - - - - 568.0 372.0 - - - -
4675 605.0 455.0 - - - - 675.0 455.0 - - - -
4810 720.0 540.0 - - - - 810.0 531.0 - - - -
4930 810.0 607.0 - - - - 930.0 609.0 - - - -
4H11 930.0 697.0 - - - - 1090.0 733.0 - - - -
4H12 1090.0 817.0 - - - - 1200.0 807.0 - - - -
◆ Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature

When you install drives in a place where ambient temperatures are higher than the rated conditions or install
drives side-by-side in the enclosure panel, set L8-12 [Ambient Temperature Setting] and L8-35 [Installation
Method Selection]. Derate the output current as specified in Figure 10.1.
A - L8-35 = 0 C - L8-35 = 1
B - L8-35 = 2, L8-35 = 3
Figure 10.1 Derating Depending on Drive Installation Method
■ L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-12 Ambient Temperature V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 °C
(04B8) Setting Sets the ambient temperature of the drive installation area. (-10 °C - +50 °C)
The drive automatically adjusts the drive rated current to the best value as specified by the set temperature. Set the
ambient temperature of the area where you install the drive to a value that is more than the drive rating.
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 474 for information about derating depending on
ambient temperature.
■ L8-35: Installation Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-35 Installation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by the drive
(04EC) Selection Sets the type of drive installation. (0 - 3)
Note:
• Parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] does not initialize this parameter.
• This parameter is set to the correct value when the drive is shipped. Side-by-Side installation
–Change the value only in these conditions:
–When you install a UL Type 1 kit on an IP20/UL Open Type drive to convert the drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 drive.

10.6 Drive Derating
The drive automatically adjusts the overload protection detection level to the best value for each setting value.
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 474 for information about derating as specified by
0 : IP00/IP20/UL Open Type/Ex Heatsink
Use this setting to install IP00/IP20/UL Open Type drives or when the heatsink (cooling fin) is outside the
enclosure panel.
Make sure that there is 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum of space between drives or between the drive and side of the
enclosure panel.
1 : Side-by-Side Mounting
Use this setting to install more than one drive side-by-side.
Make sure that there is 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum of space between drives.
2 : IP20/UL Type 1
Use this setting to install IP20/UL Type 1 drives.
3 : Finless
Use this setting to install a finless drive.
◆ Altitude Derating
Install the drive in a location that has an altitude of 1000 m (3281 ft) or lower.
Derate the output current by 1% for each 100 m (328 ft) to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 to 4000 m
(3281 to 13123 ft).
It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions:
• Installing the drive at 2000 m (6562 ft) or lower
• Installing the drive between 2000 to 4000 m (6562 to 13123 ft) and grounding the neutral point on the power
supply.
If you do not ground the drive with a neutral network, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Specifications
10

10.7 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

◆ Drive Models and Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Note:
The estimated weights in this document are for drives with hardware revision D or later. For estimated weights of drives with hardware
revision C or earlier, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. The “REV” column on the nameplate on the right side of the
drive identifies the hardware revision. Refer to Nameplate on page 23 for more information.
Table 10.19 Three-Phase 200 V Class
Ref.
Model
IP20/UL Open Type IP20/UL Type 1
2004 - 2042 477 487
2056 478 488
2070, 2082 479 489
2110 480 490
2138 481 491
2169, 2211 482 492
2257, 2313 483 493
2360 484 494
2415 484 -

Ref.
Model
IP00/UL Open Type IP20/UL Open Type IP20/UL Type 1
4002 - 4023 - 477 487
4031, 4038 - 478 488
4044 - 4060 - 479 489
4075 - 480 490
4089, 4103 - 481 491
4140, 4168 - 482 492
4208 - 4296 - 483 493
4371 - 484 494
4389 - 484 -
4453 - 4675 - 485 -
4810 - 4H12 486 - -

◆ IP00/IP20/UL Open Type

■ 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
Figure 10.2 Dimension Diagram 1

Table 10.21 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Open Type)
Dimensions mm (in) Est.
Model Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H1 H2 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.5

2004 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.72)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.5

2006 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.72)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.5

2010 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.72)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.5

2012 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.72)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.8

2018 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.38)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.8

2021 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.38)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 4.2

2030 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (9.26)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 4.2

2042 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (9.26)

Model Weight
Specifications
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.4

4002 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.50)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.4

4004 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (7.50)
140 260 176 138 38 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.4

4005
(5.51) (10.24) (6.93) (5.43) (1.50) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20)
M5
(7.50) 10
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.7
4007 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.16)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.7

4009 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.16)


Model Weight
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 3.7

4012 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.16)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 4.0

4018 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.82)
140 260 211 138 73 102 102 248 6 1.6 5 4.0

4023 M5
(5.51) (10.24) (8.31) (5.43) (2.87) (4.02) (4.02) (9.76) (0.24) (0.06) (0.20) (8.82)
■ 2056, 4031, 4038

Model Weight
180 300 202 134 68 140 140 284 8 1.6 1.6 6

2056 M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (11.18) (0.32) (0.06) (0.06) (13.23)

Model Weight
180 300 202 134 68 140 140 284 8 1.6 1.6 5.5
4031 M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (11.18) (0.32) (0.06) (0.06) (12.13)
180 300 202 134 68 140 140 284 8 1.6 1.6 5.5
4038 M5
(7.09) (11.81) (7.95) (5.28) (2.68) (5.51) (5.51) (11.18) (0.32) (0.06) (0.06) (12.13)

■ 2070, 2082, 4044, 4060

Model Weight
220 350 227 140 87 192 192 335 8 2.3 2.3 8.5
2070 M6
(8.66) (13.78) (8.94) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.19) (0.32) (0.09) (0.09) (18.74)
220 350 227 140 87 192 192 335 8 2.3 2.3 9.5
2082 M6
(8.66) (13.78) (8.94) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.19) (0.32) (0.09) (0.09) (20.95)

Model Weight
220 350 227 140 87 192 192 335 8 2.3 2.3 8

4044 M6
(8.66) (13.78) (8.94) (5.51) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.19) (0.32) (0.09) (0.09) (17.64)
220 350 246 140 106 192 192 335 8 2.3 2.3 13
4060 M6
(8.66) (13.78) (9.69) (5.51) (4.17) (7.56) (7.56) (13.19) (0.32) (0.09) (0.09) (28.67)
Specifications
10

■ 2110, 4075

Table 10.27 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Open Type, No Internal EMC Filter)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 (Maxi H1 H2 H4 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
mum)
240 400 280 166 114 195 186 12 375 17.5 17.5 2.3 2.3 18
2110 M6
(9.45) (15.75) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (7.68) (7.32) (0.47) (14.76) (0.69) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (39.69)
Table 10.28 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Open Type, with Built-in EMC Filter)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
240 400 280 166 114 195 186 12 375 17.5 17.5 2.3 2.3 19
2110 M6
(9.45) (15.75) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (7.68) (7.32) (0.47) (14.76) (0.69) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (41.90)

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
240 400 280 166 114 195 186 12 375 17.5 17.5 2.3 2.3 15
4075 M6
(9.45) (15.75) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (7.68) (7.32) (0.47) (14.76) (0.69) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (33.08)

■ 2138, 4089, 4103

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 (Maxi H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
mum)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 21
2138 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (46.31)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 22
2138 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (48.51)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 20
4089 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (44.10)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 24
4103 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (52.92)
Dimensions mm (in)
Specifications
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 21
4089 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (46.31)
255 450 280 166 114 170 165 12 424 16 29 21 2.3 2.3 25
10
4103 M6
(10.04) (17.72) (11.02) (6.54) (4.49) (6.69) (6.50) (0.47) (16.69) (0.63) (1.14) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (55.13)

■ 2169, 2211, 4140, 4168

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 34
2169 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (74.97)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 35
2211 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (77.18)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 35
2169 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (77.18)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 36
2211 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (79.38)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 36
4140 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (79.38)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 37
4168 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (81.59)

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 37
4140 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (81.59)
264 543 335 186 149 190 182 12 516 17.5 28.5 20.5 2.3 2.3 38
4168 M8
(10.39) (21.38) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.47) (20.31) (0.69) (1.12) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (83.79)
■ 2257, 2313, 4208 to 4296

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 58
2257 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (127.89)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 61
2313 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (134.51)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 59
2257 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (130.10)
Specifications
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 61
2313 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (134.51)
10

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 60
4208 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (132.30)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 62
4250 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (136.71)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 65
4296 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (143.33)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 61
4208 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (134.51)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 63
4250 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (138.92)
312 700 420 260 160 218 218 18 659 28 43.5 28.5 4.5 4.5 66
4296 M10
(12.28) (27.56) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.71) (25.94) (1.10) (1.71) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) (145.53)
■ 2360, 2415, 4371, 4389

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 100
2360 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (220.50)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 106
2415 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (233.73)

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 106
2360 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (233.73)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 112
2415 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (246.96)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 106
4371 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (233.73)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 112
4389 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (246.96)
Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
mum)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 111
4371 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (244.76)
440 800 472 254 218 370 370 20 757 28 44 30 4.5 4.5 117
4389 M12
(17.32) (31.50) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.79) (29.80) (1.10) (1.73) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) (257.99)
■ 4453 - 4675
Specifications
10


Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W5 Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 (Maxi H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
mum)
510 1136 480 260 220 450 450 225 225 20 1093 25.5 43.5 30.5 4.5 4.5 198
4453 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (18.90) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (17.72) (8.86) (8.86) (0.79) (43.03) (1.00) (1.71) (1.20) (0.18) (0.18) (436.59)
510 1136 480 260 220 450 450 225 225 20 1093 25.5 43.5 30.5 4.5 4.5 198
4568 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (18.90) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (17.72) (8.86) (8.86) (0.79) (43.03) (1.00) (1.71) (1.20) (0.18) (0.18) (436.59)
510 1136 480 260 220 450 450 225 225 20 1093 25.5 43.5 30.5 4.5 4.5 207
4675 M12
(20.08) (44.72) (18.90) (10.24) (8.66) (17.72) (17.72) (8.86) (8.86) (0.79) (43.03) (1.00) (1.71) (1.20) (0.18) (0.18) (456.44)
■ 4810 - 4H12

Dimensions mm (in)
Est.
Model W4 Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 (Maxi H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
mum)
760 1367.5 440 245 195 680 336 172 20 1324 23.5 45.5 29.5 4.5 4.5 363
4810 M12
(29.92) (53.84) (17.32) (9.65) (7.68) (26.77) (13.23) (6.77) (0.79) (52.13) (0.93) (1.79) (1.16) (0.18) (0.18) (800.42)
760 1367.5 440 245 195 680 336 172 20 1324 23.5 45.5 29.5 4.5 4.5 363
4930 M12
(29.92) (53.84) (17.32) (9.65) (7.68) (26.77) (13.23) (6.77) (0.79) (52.13) (0.93) (1.79) (1.16) (0.18) (0.18) (800.42)
760 1367.5 440 245 195 680 336 172 20 1324 23.5 45.5 29.5 4.5 4.5 368
4H11 M12
(29.92) (53.84) (17.32) (9.65) (7.68) (26.77) (13.23) (6.77) (0.79) (52.13) (0.93) (1.79) (1.16) (0.18) (0.18) (811.44)
760 1367.5 440 245 195 680 336 172 20 1324 23.5 45.5 29.5 4.5 4.5 368
4H12 M12
(29.92) (53.84) (17.32) (9.65) (7.68) (26.77) (13.23) (6.77) (0.79) (52.13) (0.93) (1.79) (1.16) (0.18) (0.18) (811.44)

◆ IP20/UL Type1
■ 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023

Table 10.48 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Type 1)
Model Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4.1
2004 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (9.04)
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4.1
2006 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (9.04)
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4.1
2010 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (9.04)
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4.1
2012 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (9.04)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.4
2018 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (9.70)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.4
2021 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (9.70)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.8
2030 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (10.58)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.8
Specifications
2042 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (10.58)

Model Weight
10
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4
4002 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (8.82)
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4
4004 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (8.82)


Model Weight
140 300 175.8 136.8 39 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 5 4
4005 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (6.92) (5.39) (1.54) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.20) (8.82)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.3
4007 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (9.48)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.3
4009 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (9.48)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.3
4012 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (9.48)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.6
4018 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (10.14)
140 300 210.8 136.8 74 102 102 260 248 6 40 1.5 1.6 4.6 4.6
4023 M5
(5.51) (11.81) (8.3) (5.39) (2.91) (4.02) (4.02) (10.24) (9.76) (0.24) (1.57) (0.06) (0.06) (0.18) (10.14)
■ 2056, 4031, 4038

Model Weight
180 340 201.3 133.8 67.5 140 140 298 284 6 42 1.5 1.6 1.6 7
2056 M5
(7.09) (13.39) (7.93) (5.27) (2.66) (5.51) (5.51) (11.73) (11.18) (0.24) (1.65) (0.06) (0.06) (0.06) (15.44)

Model Weight
180 340 201.3 133.8 67.5 140 140 298 284 6 42 1.5 1.6 1.6 6.5
4031 M5
(7.09) (13.39) (7.93) (5.27) (2.66) (5.51) (5.51) (11.73) (11.18) (0.24) (1.65) (0.06) (0.06) (0.06) (14.33)
180 340 201.3 133.8 67.5 140 140 298 284 6 42 1.5 1.6 1.6 6.5
4038 M5
(7.09) (13.39) (7.93) (5.27) (2.66) (5.51) (5.51) (11.73) (11.18) (0.24) (1.65) (0.06) (0.06) (0.06) (14.33)

■ 2070, 2082, 4044, 4060

Model Weight
220 400 227 139.8 87.2 192 192 348 335 6 52 2 2.3 2.3 9
2070 M6
(8.66) (15.75) (8.94) (5.5) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.7) (13.19) (0.24) (2.05) (0.08) (0.09) (0.09) (19.85)
220 435 227 139.8 87.2 192 192 348 335 6 87 2 2.3 2.3 10.5
2082 M6
(8.66) (17.13) (8.94) (5.5) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.7) (13.19) (0.24) (3.43) (0.08) (0.09) (0.09) (23.15)

Model Weight
220 400 227 139.8 87.2 192 192 348 335 6 52 2 2.3 2.3 9
4044 M6
(8.66) (15.75) (8.94) (5.5) (3.43) (7.56) (7.56) (13.7) (13.19) (0.24) (2.05) (0.08) (0.09) (0.09) (19.85)
220 400 246 139.8 106.2 192 192 348 335 6 52 2 2.3 2.3 14
4060 M6
(8.66) (15.75) (9.69) (5.5) (4.18) (7.56) (7.56) (13.7) (13.19) (0.24) (2.05) (0.08) (0.09) (0.09) (30.87)
Specifications
10

■ 2110, 4075

Table 10.54 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Type 1, No Internal EMC Filter)
Model Weight
W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 H0 H1 H2 H3 H5 t1 t2 d kg (lb)
243.8 500 280 167.5 112.5 195 186 6.9 390 375 7.5 110 17.5 2.3 2.3 20
2110 M6
(9.6) (19.69) (11.02) (6.59) (4.43) (7.68) (7.32) (0.27) (15.35) (14.76) (0.3) (4.33) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (44.10)
Table 10.55 Three-Phase 200 V Class (IP20/UL Type 1, with Internal EMC Filter)
Model Weight
243.8 500 280 167.5 112.5 195 186 6.9 390 375 7.5 110 17.5 2.3 2.3 21
2110 M6
(9.6) (19.69) (11.02) (6.59) (4.43) (7.68) (7.32) (0.27) (15.35) (14.76) (0.3) (4.33) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (46.31)

Model Weight
243.8 500 280 167.5 112.5 195 186 6.9 390 375 7.5 110 17.5 2.3 2.3 18
4075 M6
(9.6) (19.69) (11.02) (6.59) (4.43) (7.68) (7.32) (0.27) (15.35) (14.76) (0.3) (4.33) (0.69) (0.09) (0.09) (39.69)

■ 2138, 4089, 4103

Model Weight
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 24
2138 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (52.92)
Model Weight
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 25
2138 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (55.13)
Model Weight
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 23
4089 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (50.72)
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 28
4103 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (61.74)
Specifications

Model Weight
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 24
4089 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (52.92)
259 580 280 167.6 112.4 170 165 7.7 440 424 6 140 21 2.3 2.3 29
10
4103 M6
(10.20) (22.83) (11.02) (6.6) (4.43) (6.69) (6.50) (0.3) (17.32) (16.69) (0.24) (5.51) (0.83) (0.09) (0.09) (63.95)

■ 2169, 2211, 4140, 4168

Model Weight
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 39
2169 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (86.00)
268 770 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 237 20.5 2.3 2.3 41
2211 M8
(10.55) (30.31) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (9.33) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (90.41)
Model Weight
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 40
2169 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (88.20)
268 770 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 237 20.5 2.3 2.3 42
2211 M8
(10.55) (30.31) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (9.33) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (92.61)
Model Weight
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 41
4140 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (90.41)
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 42
4168 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (92.61)
Model Weight
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 42
4140 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (92.61)
268 700 335 185.8 149.2 190 182 7.7 533 516 7.5 167 20.5 2.3 2.3 43
4168 M8
(10.55) (27.56) (13.19) (7.32) (5.87) (7.48) (7.17) (0.3) (20.98) (20.31) (0.3) (6.57) (0.81) (0.09) (0.09) (94.82)

■ 2257, 2313, 4208 to 4296

Model Weight
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5 63
2257 M10 (138.92
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) )
66
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
2313 M10 (145.53
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
Model Weight
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5 64
2257 M10 (141.12
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) )
66
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
2313 M10 (145.53
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
Specifications
10

Model Weight
65
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
4208 M10 (143.33
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5 67
4250 M10 (147.74
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
70
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
4296 M10 (154.35
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
Model Weight
66
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
4208 M10 (145.53
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
68
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
4250 M10 (149.94
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18) )
71
316 915 420 260 160 218 218 14 685 659 13 230 28.5 4.5 4.5
4296 M10 (156.56
(12.44) (36.02) (16.54) (10.24) (6.30) (8.58) (8.58) (0.55) (26.97) (25.94) (0.51) (9.06) (1.12) (0.18) (0.18)
)
■ 2360, 4371

Model Weight
109
444 1045 472 254 218 370 370 15.5 785 757 13 260 30 4.5 4.5
2360 M12 (240.35
(17.48) (41.14) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.61) (30.91) (29.80) (0.51) (10.24) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18)
)
Model Weight
444 1045 472 254 218 370 370 15.5 785 757 13 260 30 4.5 4.5 115
2360 M12 (253.58
(17.48) (41.14) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.61) (30.91) (29.80) (0.51) (10.24) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) )
Model Weight
114
444 1045 472 254 218 370 370 15.5 785 757 13 260 30 4.5 4.5
4371 M12 (251.37
(17.48) (41.14) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.61) (30.91) (29.80) (0.51) (10.24) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18)
)
Model Weight
119
444 1045 472 254 218 370 370 15.5 785 757 13 260 30 4.5 4.5
4371 M12 (262.40
(17.48) (41.14) (18.58) (10.00) (8.58) (14.57) (14.57) (0.61) (30.91) (29.80) (0.51) (10.24) (1.18) (0.18) (0.18) )
Specifications
10

10.8 Knock-Out Hole Dimensions (IP20/UL Type 1)

◆ Models and Dimensions of Knock-Out Hole
Model Reference
2004 to 2042
496
4002 to 4023
2056
497
4031, 4038
2070, 2082
497
4044, 4060
2110
498
4075
2138
498
4089, 4103
2169
499
4140, 4168
2211 499
2257, 2313
500
4208 - 4296
2360
500
4371
■ 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
Figure 10.20 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 1 (Models: 2004 to 2042 and 4002 to 4023)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 D3 W φd4
2004 to 2012 39 85 57.5 30 38.3 35

4002 to 4005 (1.54) (3.35) (2.26) (1.18) (1.51) (1.38)
2018 to 2042 74 85 57.5 30 38.3 35

4007 to 4023 (2.91) (3.35) (2.26) (1.18) (1.51) (1.38)

■ 2056, 4031, 4038
Figure 10.21 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 2 (Models: 2056, 4031, and 4038)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5
2056 67.5 86.5 60 34 54 46.5 35 44

4031, 4038 (2.66) (3.41) (2.36) (1.34) (2.13) (1.83) (1.38) (1.73)
■ 2070, 2082, 4044, 4060
Figure 10.22 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 3 (Models: 2070, 2082, 4044, and 4060)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5
2070, 2082 87.2 84.3 36.8 68 35 35 50

4044 (3.43) (3.32) (1.45) (2.68) (1.38) (1.38) (1.97)
106.2 84.3 36.8 68 35 35 50

4060
(4.18) (3.32) (1.45) (2.68) (1.38) (1.38) (1.97)
Specifications
10

■ 2110, 4075
Figure 10.23 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 4 (Models: 2110 and 4075)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
2110 112.5 96 48.5 73 38 35 50

4075 (4.43) (3.78) (1.91) (2.87) (1.50) (1.38) (1.97)
■ 2138, 4089, 4103
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
2138 112.4 112.8 55.8 73.5 35 35 62

4089, 4103 (4.43) (4.44) (2.20) (2.89) (1.38) (1.38) (2.44)

■ 2169, 4140, 4168
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 W W1 φd4 φd5 φd6
2169 149.2 117.8 56.8 78 37.5 44 35 62

4140, 4168 (5.87) (4.64) (2.24) (3.07) (1.48) (1.73) (1.38) (2.44)
■ 2211
Figure 10.26 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 7 (Models: 2211)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5 φd6
149.2 124.8 117.3 61.8 96 61.5 50 35 75

2211
(5.87) (4.91) (4.62) (2.43) (3.78) (2.42) (1.97) (1.38) (2.95)
Specifications
10

■ 2257, 2313, 4208 to 4296
Figure 10.27 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 8 (Models: 2257, 2313, 4208, 4250, and 4296)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 D3 W W1 φd4 φd5
2257, 2313 160 208.4 166.3 75.3 92.8 27.5 35 62

4208, 4250, 4296 (6.30) (8.20) (6.55) (2.96) (3.65) (1.08) (1.38) (2.44)
■ 2360, 4371
Figure 10.28 Knock-Out Dimension Diagram 9 (Models: 2360 and 4371)
Dimensions mm (in)
Model
D D1 D2 W W1 W2 φd4 φd5
2360 218 170 66.6 145 120 40 35 75

4371 (8.58) (6.69) (2.62) (5.71) (4.72) (1.57) (1.38) (2.95)

10.9 Peripheral Devices and Options

to Table 10.77 show the available peripheral devices and options for the drive. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest
sales representative to make an order.
• Selection: Refer to the drive catalog for information about available products.
• Installation and wiring: Refer to the instruction manual for each option.
Table 10.73 Main Circuit Options
Name Model Intended Use
To improve the drive input power factor.

• To prevent damage to the drive when the power supply capacity is large. You must only use this option
AC reactor LR3 series and ALR3 series when the power supply capacity is more than 600 kVA.
• To decrease harmonic current.
• To improve the power supply total power factor.
To decrease the regenerative energy of the motor and decrease the deceleration time (duty cycle of 3%
Braking Resistor ERF-150WJ Series
ED). You must also use the installation attachment.
Braking Unit CDBR series Use with a braking resistor unit to decrease motor deceleration times.
Residual Current Monitoring/ NV and NS series To prevent short circuit damage to the power supply system, provide overload protection for wiring,
Detection (RCM/RCD) prevent electrical shock, and provide ground fault protection against earth leakage fires.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker To prevent short circuit damage to the power supply system and provide overload protection for wiring.
(MCCB) NF Series
Input Side Magnetic Contactor To prevent burn damage when connecting a braking resistor. This option fully opens the circuit between
SC Series
(MC) the power supply and drive.
Table 10.74 Keypad

1 m: WV001 To connect the keypad and drive.

Keypad Remote Cable
3 m: WV003 This option is an RJ-45, 8-pin straight-through UTP CAT5e cable.
Installation Support Set A 900-192-933-001 To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses screws.
To attach the keypad to the control panel. This option uses nut clamps.
Installation Support Set B 900-192-933-002
Use this option when there are weld studs in the control panel.
Table 10.75 Kit

To install the heatsink outside of the control panel.

900-193-209-001
• 900-193-209-001: 2004 to 2042, 4002 to 4023
External Heatsink Installation Kit 900-193-209-002
• 900-193-209-002: 2056, 4031, 4038
900-193-209-003
• 900-193-209-003: 2070, 2082, 4044, 4060
To install the heatsink of drive models 4810 to 4H12 outside of the enclosure panel with water-proof and
External Heatsink Installation Kit ZPSD-700-EH12-FR12
dust-proof specifications (IP55/UL Type 12).
To change an IP20/UL Open Type drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 drive.

900-192-121-001
• 900-192-121-001: 2004 to 2042, 4002 to 4023
900-192-121-002
• 900-192-121-002: 2056, 4031, 4038
900-192-121-003
• 900-192-121-003: 2070, 4044, 4060
900-192-121-004
• 900-192-121-004: 2082
900-192-121-005
UL Type 1 Kit • 900-192-121-005: 2110, 4075
900-192-121-006
• 900-192-121-006: 2138, 4089, 4103
900-192-121-007
• 900-192-121-007: 2169, 4140, 4168
900-192-121-008
• 900-192-121-008: 2211
900-192-121-009
• 900-192-121-009: 2257, 2313, 4208 to 4296
900-192-121-010
• 900-192-121-010: 2360, 4371
Table 10.76 Engineering Tools

Specifications
DriveWizard - To use a PC to program drives and manage parameters.
DriveWorksEZ - To use a PC to do advanced drive programming.
10

Table 10.77 Option

Name Model Intended Use Document No.
This option is for use with CL-V/f and OLV control methods. The drive detects
motor rotation speed from the pulse generator as feedback and can control the
drive output frequency to keep the motor speed constant.
• Complementary output PG support
Complementary Type PG PG-B3 • A, B, and Z pulse (Three-phase pulse) input TOBPC73060075
• Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector (24 V, maximum of 30 mA)
• Encoder power supply: 12 V, maximum 200 mA current.
This option is for use with CLV, CL-V/f, and CLV/PM control methods. The
drive detects motor rotation speed from the pulse generator as feedback. The
drive can then enable control of the output frequency keep a constant motor
speed.
Motor PG feedback line driver • RS-422 output encoder support
interface PG-X3 TOBPC73060076
• A, B, and Z pulse (differential pulse) input
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Pulse monitor: Equivalent to RS-422 level
• Encoder voltage output: 5 V or 12V, maximum 200 mA current
This option is for use with CLV/PM control method. The drive detects motor
rotation speed from the pulse generator as feedback. The drive can then enable
control of the output frequency keep a constant motor speed.
• Supports EnDat 2.1/01, EnDat 2.2/01, EnDat 2.2/22 models from
HEIDENHAIN
• Supports HIPERFACE models from SICK STEGMANN
• Maximum input frequency: 20 kHz (use for low-speed applications, for
example gearless motors)
Note:
EnDat 2.2/22 has no limits on input frequencies.
• Cable length: Maximum of 20 m (65.6 ft) for encoders and maximum of 30
Encoder Type (EnDat) PG-F3 m (98.4 ft) for pulse monitors TOBPC73060077
• Pulse monitor: Equivalent to RS-422 level
Note:
You cannot use EnDat 2.2/22.
• Encoder voltage output: 5 V at a maximum current of 330 mA, or 8 V at a
maximum current of 150 mA
Note:
Use these types of encoder cables:
• EnDat 2.1/01 and EnDat 2.2/01: HEIDENHAIN 17-pin cables
• EnDat 2.2/22: HEIDENHAIN 8-pin cables
• HIPERFACE: SICK STEGMANN 8-pin cables
To connect resolvers that are electrically compatible with resolver model

TS2640N321E64 from Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd. These are the typical
electrical characteristics of model TS2640N321E64:
• Resolver motor excitation voltage: 10 Vac rms at 10 kHz
• Transformation ratio [K]: 0.5 ±5%
Resolver Interface PG-RT3 TOBPC73060087
• Resolver input current: 100 mA rms
• Cable length: Up to 10 m (32.8 ft) (or up to 100 m [328 ft] when using SS5
or SS7 series motors from Yaskawa Motor Co., Ltd. and encoder cables
from Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.)
This option is for use with CLV and CLV/PM control methods.
To configure very accurate analog references at high resolution.

• Input signal level: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) at 4 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω)
• Input channel: 3 channels
Use a DIP switch to select voltage input or current input.
Analog input AI-A3 TOBPC73060078
• Input resolution
– Voltage input: 13 bits (1/8192) + encoding
– Current input: 1/4096
To use analog signals to monitor the drive output frequency and output current.
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + encoding
Analog Monitor AO-A3 TOBPC73060079
• Output voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc (non-insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
To use digital speed references and MFDI with a maximum 16 bits of

resolution.
• Input signals: Binary, 16 bits: BCD4 digits + SIGN signal + SET signal
Digital input DI-A3 Use parameters to select 6 bits, 8 bits, or 12 bits. TOBPC73060080
• Input voltage: 24 V (insulated)
• Input current: 8 mA
To output insulated digital signals and monitor the operation status of the drive
(alarm signals and detecting zero speed).
Type of output:
Digital Output DO-A3 TOBPC73060081
• Photocoupler relays: 6 channels (48 V, 50 mA maximum)
• Relay contact output: 2 channels (250 Vac at 1 A or less, 30 Vdc at 1 A or
less)

Name Model Intended Use Document No.
This option uses the host controller over PROFIBUS-DP communication to:
• Operate and stop the drive TOBPC73060082
PROFIBUS-DP SI-P3
• Set and view parameters SIxPC73060082
• Monitor output frequency, output current, and other statuses
This option uses the host controller over CC-Link communication to:
CC-Link SI-C3
This option uses the host controller over DeviceNet communication to:
• Operate and stop the drive
• Set and view parameters TOBPC73060084
DeviceNet SI-N3
• Monitor output frequency, output current, and other statuses SIxPC73060084
Note:
The drive is compatible with option software versions 1114 and later.
This option uses the host controller over CANopen communication to:
CANopen SI-S3
This option uses the host controller over MECHATROLINK-II communication

to:
TOBPC73060086
MECHATROLINK-II SI-T3 • Set and view parameters
SIxPC73060086
Note:
This option uses the host controller over MECHATROLINK-III

communication to:
TOBPC73060088
MECHATROLINK-III SI-ET3 • Set and view parameters
SIxPC73060088
Note:
This option uses the host controller over EtherNet/IP communication to: TOBPC73060092
SI-EN3
• Operate and stop the drive SIEPC73060092
EtherNet/IP • Set and view parameters
TOBPC7306000H
JOHB-SMP3 • Monitor output frequency, output current, and other statuses
SIxPC7306000J
This option uses the host controller over Modbus TCP/IP communication to: TOBPC73060091
SI-EM3
• Operate and stop the drive SIEPC73060091
Modbus TCP/IP • Set and view parameters
TOBPC7306000H
SIxPC7306000I
This option uses the host controller over LonWorks communication to:
LonWorks SI-W3
• Set and view parameters SIEPC73060093
This option uses the host controller over PROFINET communication to: TOBPC73060089
SI-EP3
• Operate and stop the drive SIxPC73060089
PROFINET • Set and view parameters
TOBPC7306000H
SIxPC7306000K
This option uses the host controller over EtherCAT communication to: TOBPC73060096
SI-ES3
• Operate and stop the drive SIxPC73060096
EtherCAT • Set and view parameters
TOBPC7306000H
SIxPC7306000L
Table 10.78 Types of Option and Connectors

Specifications
Option Available Connector Ports Number of Options Permitted
PG-B3, PG-X3 CN5-C (CN5-B) 2 *1
PG-F3 *2, PG-RT3 *2 CN5-C 1
AO-A3, DO-A3 CN5-A, B, and C 1

10
AI-A3 *3, DI-A3 *3, SI-C3, SI-EL3, SI-EM3, SI-EN3, SI-EP3, SI-ES3, SI-ET3, SI-N3, CN5-A 1
SI-P3, SI-S3, SI-T3, SI-W3, JOHB-SMP3
*1 To connect only one PG option, use the CN5-C connector. To connect two PG options, use the CN5-C and CN5-B connectors.
*2 If you use the motor switching function, you cannot use this option.

*3 To use AI-A3 and DI-A3 input statuses as monitors, connect the options to one of CN5-A, CN5-B, or CN5-C. Use U1-21, U1-22,
and U1-23 to confirm the AI-A3 input status. Use U1-17 to confirm the DI-A3 input status.

11
Parameter List
11.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................506
11.2 How to Read the Parameter List .........................................................................507
11.3 Parameter Groups ..................................................................................................508
11.4 A: Initialization Parameters..................................................................................509
11.5 b: Application ..........................................................................................................513
11.6 C: Tuning ..................................................................................................................524
11.7 d: Reference Settings............................................................................................530
11.8 E: Motor Parameters..............................................................................................535
11.9 F: Options.................................................................................................................540
11.10 H: Terminal Functions ...........................................................................................554
11.11 L: Protection Functions ........................................................................................581
11.12 n: Special Adjustment ...........................................................................................591
11.13 o: Keypad-Related Settings .................................................................................598
11.14 q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters..............................................................................605
11.15 r: DWEZ Connection 1-20 .....................................................................................606
11.16 T: Motor Tuning .......................................................................................................607
11.17 U: Monitors............................................................................................................... 611
11.18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control
Method Selection] ..................................................................................................627
11.19 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with E3-01 [Motor 2
Control Mode Selection] .......................................................................................633
11.20 Parameters Changed by E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] .................................634
11.21 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD...........................................637

11.1 Section Safety
11.1 Section Safety

DANGER

11.2 How to Read the Parameter List
11.2 How to Read the Parameter List

◆ Icons and Terms that Identify Parameters and Control Methods
Icon Description
V/f The parameter is available when operating the drive with V/f Control.
CL-V/f The parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop V/f Control.
OLV The parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector Control.
CLV The parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector Control.
AOLV The parameter is available when operating the drive with Advanced Open Loop Vector Control.
OLV/PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector Control for PM.
AOLV/PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM.
CLV/PM The parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector Control for PM.
EZOLV The parameter is available when operating the drive with EZ Open Loop Vector Control.
Hex. Hexadecimal numbers that represent MEMOBUS addresses to change parameters over network communication.
RUN You can change the parameter setting during Run.
Expert The parameter that is available in Expert Mode only. *1
*1 Set A1-01 = 3 [Access Level Selection = Expert Level] to show and set Expert Mode parameters on the keypad.
Note:
Gray icons identify parameters that are not available in the specified control method.
Parameter List
11

11.3 Parameter Groups
11.3 Parameter Groups

Represents the type of product parameters.
Parameters Name Parameters Name
A1 Initialization H4 Analog Outputs
A2 User Parameters H5 Modbus Communication
b1 Operation Mode Selection H6 Pulse Train Input/Output
b2 DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking H7 Virtual Inputs / Outputs
b3 Speed Search L1 Motor Protection
b4 Timer Function L2 Power Loss Ride Through
b5 PID Control L3 Stall Prevention
b6 Dwell Function L4 Speed Detection
b7 Droop Control L5 Fault Restart
b8 Energy Saving L6 Torque Detection
b9 Zero Servo L7 Torque Limit
C1 Accel & Decel Time L8 Drive Protection
C2 S-Curve Characteristics L9 Drive Protection 2
C3 Slip Compensation n1 Hunting Prevention
C4 Torque Compensation n2 Auto Freq Regulator (AFR)
C5 Auto Speed Regulator (ASR) n3 High Slip/Overexcite Braking
C6 Duty & Carrier Frequency n4 Adv Open Loop Vector Tune
d1 Frequency Reference n5 Feed Forward Control
d2 Reference Limits n6 Online Tuning
d3 Jump Frequency n7 EZ Drive
d4 Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold n8 PM Motor Control Tuning
d5 Torque Control o1 Keypad Display
d6 Field Weakening /Forcing o2 Keypad Operation
d7 Offset Frequency o3 Copy Keypad Function
E1 V/f Pattern for Motor 1 o4 Maintenance Monitors
E2 Motor Parameters o5 Log Function
E3 V/f Pattern for Motor 2 q DriveWorksEZ Parameters
E4 Motor 2 Parameters r DriveWorksEZ Connections
E5 PM Motor Settings T0 Tuning Mode Selection
E9 Motor Setting T1 InductionMotor Auto-Tuning
F1 PG Option Setup (Encoder) T2 PM Motor Auto-Tuning
F2 Analog Input Option T3 ASR and Inertia Tuning
F3 Digital Input Option T4 EZ Tuning
F4 Analog Output Option U1 Operation Status Monitors
F5 Digital Output Option U2 Fault Trace
F6 Communication Options U3 Fault History
F7 Ethernet Options U4 Maintenance Monitors
H1 Digital Inputs U5 PID Monitors
H2 Digital Outputs U6 Operation Status Monitors
H3 Analog Inputs U8 DriveWorksEZ Monitors

11.4 A: Initialization Parameters

◆ A1: Initialization
No. Default
Name Description Ref.
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-00 Language Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 659
(0100) Sets the language for the LCD keypad. (0 - 12)
RUN Note:
When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, the drive will
not reset this parameter.
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Italian
5 : Spanish
6 : Portuguese
7 : Chinese
8 : Czech
9 : Russian
10 : Turkish
11 : Polish
12 : Greek
A1-01 Access Level Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2 659
(0101) Sets user access to parameters. The access level controls which parameters the keypad (0 - 3)
RUN will display, and which parameters the user can set.
0 : Operation Only
1 : User Parameters
2 : Advanced Level
3 : Expert Level
A1-02 Control Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2 660
(0102) Selection Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor. (0 - 8)
0 : V/f Control
1 : V/f Control with Encoder
2 : Open Loop Vector
3 : Closed Loop Vector
4 : Advanced Open Loop Vector
5 : PM Open Loop Vector
6 : PM Advanced Open Loop Vector
7 : PM Closed Loop Vector
8 : EZ Vector Control
A1-03 Initialize Parameters V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 661
(0103) Sets parameters to default values. (0 - 3330)
0 : No Initialization
1110 : User Initialization
2220 : 2-Wire Initialization
A1-04 Password V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000 662
(0104) Entry point for the password set in A1-05 [Password Setting]. The user can view the (0000 - 9999)
settings of parameters that are locked without entering the password. Enter the correct
password in this parameter to change parameter settings.
A1-05 Password Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000 663
(0105) Set the password to lock parameters and prevent changes to parameter settings. Enter (0000 - 9999)
the correct password in A1-04 [Password] to unlock parameters and accept changes.
A1-06 Application Preset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 663
(0127) Sets the drive to operate in selected application conditions. (0 - 7)
0 : General-purpose
1 : Water Supply Pump 2
2 : Conveyor
3 : Exhaust Fan
Parameter List
4 : HVAC Fan
5 : Air Compressor
6 : Crane (Hoist)
7 : Crane (Traveling)
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-07 DriveWorksEZ Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 678
(0128) Selection Sets the drive to operate with DriveWorksEZ. (0 - 2)
0 : DWEZ Disabled
1 : DWEZ Enabled
2 : Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input
A1-11 Firmware Update Lock V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 678
(111D) Protects the drive firmware. When you enable the protection, you cannot update the (0, 1)
Expert drive firmware.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
A1-12 Bluetooth ID V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV - 679
(1564) Sets the password necessary to use Bluetooth to control the drive with a smartphone or (0000 - 9999)
tablet.
◆ A2: User Parameters

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
A2-01 User Parameter 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV A1-02 679
(0106) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 1 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
under the main menu. You can select a maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set
them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32.
A2-02 User Parameter 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV b1-01 679
A2-05 User Parameter 5 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV C1-01 679
(010A) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 5 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(010B) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 6 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(010C) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 7 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(010D) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 8 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
A2-09 User Parameter 9 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV d1-01 679
(010E) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 9 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(010F) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 10 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
A2-14 User Parameter 14 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV E1-01 679
them to parameters A2-01 to A2-32. You can set A2-17 to A2-32 when A2-33 = 0 [User
Parameter Auto Selection = Disabled: Manual Entry Required].
(011A) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 21 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(011B) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 22 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
(011C) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 23 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
A2-24 User Parameter 24 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV H4-02 679
(011D) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 24 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
A2-25 User Parameter 25 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV L1-01 679
(011E) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 25 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
A2-26 User Parameter 26 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV L3-04 679
(011F) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 26 of the [User Custom Parameters] (Determined by A1-06)
A2-27 User Parameter 27 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV - 679
Parameter List
(0122) Sets the parameter number to be shown for number 29 of the [User Custom Parameters]
(Determined by A1-06) 11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
A2-33 User Parameter Auto V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-06 679
(0126) Selection Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2-17 to A2-32 [User (0, 1)
Parameters 17 to 32].
0 : Disabled: Manual Entry Required
1 : Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms

11.5 b: Application
11.5 b: Application
◆ b1: Operation Mode Selection
No. Default
(Hex.) (Setting Range)
b1-01 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 680
(0180) Selection 1 Sets the input method for the frequency reference. (0 - 4)
0 : Keypad
1 : Analog Input
2 : Memobus/Modbus Communications
3 : Option PCB
4 : Pulse Train Input
b1-02 Run Command Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 682
(0181) 1 Sets the input method for the Run command. (0 - 3)
0 : Keypad
1 : Digital Input
3 : Option PCB
b1-03 Stopping Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 682
(0182) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor after removing a Run command or entering a Stop (0 - 3, 9)
command.
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 [Control Method Selection = CLV, AOLV, OLV/PM,
AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV], the setting range is 0, 1, 3.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
2 : DC Injection Braking to Stop
3 : Coast to Stop with Timer
9 : Stop with Constant Distance
b1-04 Reverse Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 686
(0183) Selection Sets the reverse operation function. Disable reverse operation in fan or pump (0, 1)
applications where reverse rotation is dangerous.
0 : Reverse Enabled
1 : Reverse Disabled
b1-05 Operation Below V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 686
(0184) Minimum Freq Sets the drive operation when the frequency reference decreases to less than the value (0 - 3)
set in E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency].
0 : Operate at Frequency Reference
1 : Baseblock (Motor Coasts)
2 : Operate at Minimum Frequency
3 : Operate at Zero Speed
b1-06 Digital Input Reading V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 688
(0185) Sets the number of times that the drive reads the sequence input command to prevent (0, 1)
malfunction because of electrical interference.
0 : Single Scan
1 : Double Scan
b1-07 LOCAL/REMOTE Run V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 688
(0186) Selection Sets drive response to an existing Run command when the drive receives a second Run (0, 1)
command from a different location.
0 : Disregard Existing RUN Command
1 : Accept Existing RUN Command
b1-08 Run Command Select in V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 688
(0187) PRG Mode Sets the conditions for the drive to accept a Run command entered from an external (0 - 2)
source when using the keypad to set parameters.
0 : Disregard RUN while Programming
1 : Accept RUN while Programming
2 : Allow Programming Only at Stop
b1-14 Phase Order Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 689
(01C3) Sets the phase order for output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This parameter can (0, 1)
align the Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor
Parameter List
without changing wiring.

0 : Standard
1 : Switch Phase Order
11

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(01C4) Selection 2 Sets the input method for frequency reference 2. (0 - 4)
0 : Keypad
1 : Analog Input
3 : Option PCB
b1-16 Run Command Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 691
(01C5) 2 Sets the input method for Run Command 2 when the user switches the control circuit (0 - 3)
terminals ON/OFF to change the Run command source.
0 : Keypad
1 : Digital Input
3 : Option PCB
b1-17 Run Command at Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 692
(01C6) Up Sets drive response when the CPU changes from de-energized to energized and there is (0, 1)
an active Run command. Set this parameter in applications where energizing or de-
energizing the drive enables the Run command. When the CPU stays energized during
loss of power, L2-01 [Power Loss Ride Through Select] sets operation.
b1-21 CLV Start Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 692
(0748) Sets the conditions for the drive to accept a Run command when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control (0, 1)
Expert Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 : Reject RUN if b2-01<U1-05<E1-09
1 : Accept RUN Command at Any Speed
b1-35 Digital Input Deadband V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 ms 692
(1117) Time Sets the deadband time for MFDIs. (0.0 to 100.0 ms)
Expert
◆ b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-01 DC Injection/Zero V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 693
(0189) SpeedThreshold Sets the frequency to start DC Injection Braking, Short Circuit Braking, or Zero Servo (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
near the end of a stop ramp.
Note:
This parameter is available when b1-03 = 0 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to
Stop].
b2-02 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50% 694
(018A) Current Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. (0 - 100%)
b2-03 DC Inject Braking Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV A1-02 = 4: 0.30 s 694
(018B) at Start Sets the DC Injection Braking Time at stop. Sets the time of Zero Speed Control at start Other than A1-02 = 4:
when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. 0.00 s
(0.00 - 10.00 s)
b2-04 DC Inject Braking Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 694
(018C) at Stop Sets the DC Injection Braking Time at stop. Sets the time of Zero Speed Control at stop (0.00 - 10.00 s)
when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM].
b2-08 Magnetic Flux V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 695
(0190) Compensation Value Sets how much current the drive injects when DC Injection Braking at Start starts (0 - 1000%)
(Initial Excitation) as a percentage of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current].
b2-12 Short Circuit Brake Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 695
(01BA) @ Start Sets the Short Circuit Braking time at start. (0.00 - 25.50 s)
b2-13 Short Circuit Brake Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV A1-02 = 8: 0.00 s 695
(01BB) @ Stop Sets the Short Circuit Braking time at stop. Other than A1-02 = 8:
0.50 s
(0.00 - 25.50 s)
b2-18 Short Circuit Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 696
(0177) Current Sets the Short Circuit Braking Current as a percentage of the motor rated current. (0.0 - 200.0%)
Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the motor
rated current.
• A1-02 = 5, 6 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM]: E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
• A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV]: E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]

11.5 b: Application
◆ b3: Speed Search

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-01 Speed Search at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 699
(0191) Selection Sets the Speed Search at Start function so the drive will do Speed Search with each Run (0, 1)
command.
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
b3-02 SpeedSearch V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 700
(0192) Deactivation Current Sets the current level that stops Speed Search as a percentage of the drive rated output (0 - 200%)
current. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
b3-03 Speed Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s 700
(0193) Deceleration Time Sets the deceleration time during Speed Search operation. Set the length of time to (0.1 - 10.0 s)
decelerate from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this parameter takes effect
only in Expert Mode.
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 700
(0194) Search Sets the ratio used to reduce the V/f during searches to reduce the output current during (10 - 100)
speed searches.
b3-05 Speed Search Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.2 s 700
(0195) Time Sets the Speed Search delay time to activate a magnetic contactor installed between the (0.0 - 100.0 s)
drive and motor.
b3-06 Speed Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 700
(0196) Current Level 1 Sets the level of current that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search (0.0 - 2.0)
Expert as a coefficient of the motor rated current. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
b3-07 Speed Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 701
(0197) Current Level 2 Sets the level of current that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search (0.0 - 3.0)
Expert as a coefficient of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current] or E4-03 [Motor 2 Rated No-Load
Current]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
b3-08 Speed Estimation ACR P V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 701
(0198) Gain Sets the proportional gain for the automatic current regulator during Speed Estimation and o2-04
Expert Speed Search. Also adjusts speed search responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to (0.00 - 6.00)
change this setting.
b3-09 Speed Estimation ACR I V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 701
(0199) Time Sets the integral time for the automatic current regulator during Speed Estimation Speed (0.0 - 1000.0 ms)
Expert Search. Also adjusts speed search responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to change
this setting.
b3-10 Speed Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.05 701
(019A) Detection Gain Sets the gain to correct estimated frequencies from Speed Estimation Speed Search. (1.00 - 1.20)
Expert
b3-14 Bi-directional Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, 701
(019E) Search Sets the direction of Speed Search to the direction of the frequency reference or in the b3-24, and E9-01
motor rotation direction as detected by the drive. (0, 1)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
Note:
• The initial value of b3-14 is different for different A1-02 [Control Method
Selection] settings when you set these parameters:
–A1-02 = 0, 2, 8 [V/f, OLV, EZOLV]
–E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction (IM)]
–b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed Estimation].
• The initial value of b3-14 is different for different A1-02 [Control Method
Selection] settings when you set these parameters:
–A1-02 = 1, 4, 8 [CL-V/f, AOLV, EZOLV]
–E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]
• The initial value of b3-14 is 0 when you set these parameters:
–A1-02 = 0, 2, 8
–E9-01 = 0
–b3-24 = 2 [Current Detection 2]
• When you set A1-02, b3-24, and E9-01, set b3-14.
b3-17 Speed Est Retry Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150% 702
Parameter List
(01F0) Level Sets the current level for the search retry function in Speed Estimation Speed Search as (0 - 200%)
Expert a percentage where drive rated current is a setting value of 100%.
b3-18 Speed Est Retry V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s 702
(01F1) Detection Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait to retry Speed Estimation Speed Search (0.00 - 1.00 s)
Expert when too much current flow stopped the Speed Search.
b3-19 Speed Search Restart

Attempts
V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 times 702 11
(01F2) Sets the number of times to restart Speed Search if Speed Search does not complete. (0 - 10 times)

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-24 Speed Search Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 702
(01C0) Selection Sets the Speed Search method when you start the motor or when you restore power after (1, 2)
a momentary power loss.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], the default setting
changes when the setting for E9-01 [Motor Type Selection] and the drive model
change.
–E9-01 = 0 [Induction (IM)]
–2004 - 2313, 4002 - 4296: 1
–2360, 2415, 4371 - 4H12: 2
–E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]: 1
• When you set A1-02 = 8 and E9-01 = 1 or 2, also set b3-24 = 1. If b3-24 = 2, the
drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• When you set b3-24, it will trigger the drive to initialize b3-14 [Bi-directional
Speed Search]. After you set b3-24, set b3-14.
• When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV], the default setting is 1 [Speed Estimation].
1 : Speed Estimation
2 : Current Detection 2
b3-25 Speed Search Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 s 703
(01C8) Sets the length of time the drive will wait to start the Speed Search Retry function. (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Expert
b3-26 Direction Determination V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1000 703
(01C7) Level Sets the level to find the motor rotation direction. Increase the value if the drive cannot (40 to 60000)
Expert find the direction.
b3-27 Speed Search RUN/BB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 703
(01C9) Priority Sets the conditions necessary to start Speed Search. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : SS Only if RUN Applied Before BB
1 : SS Regardless of RUN/BB Sequence
b3-29 Speed Search Back-EMF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10% 703
(077C) Threshold Sets the induced voltage for motors that use Speed Search. The drive will start Speed (0 - 10%)
Expert Search when the motor induced voltage level is the same as the setting value. Usually it
is not necessary to change this setting.
b3-31 Spd Search Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50 703
(0BC0) Reference Lvl Sets the current level that decreases the output current during Current Detection Speed (1.50 - 3.50)
Expert Search.
b3-32 Spd Search Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.20 703
(0BC1) Complete Lvl Sets the current level that completes Speed Search. (0.00 - 1.49)
Expert
b3-33 Speed Search during Uv V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 704
(0B3F) Selection Sets the function that starts Speed Search at start-up if the drive detects a Uv (0, 1)
Expert [Undervoltage] when it receives a Run command.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
b3-35 Low Back EMF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10% 704
(0BC3) Detection Level Sets the Low Back EMF Detection Level. Usually it is not necessary to change this (5 - 50%)
Expert setting.
b3-36 High Back EMF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.970 704
(0BC4) Detection Level Sets the voltage level for Speed Search restart. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0.500 - 1.000)
Expert setting.
b3-39 Regen Judgment Lv of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15% 704
(1B8F) Spd Search Sets the level to determine the regenerative state during speed search. Usually it is not (0 - 50%)
Expert necessary to change this setting.
b3-54 Search Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400 ms 704
(3123) Sets the length of time that the drive will run Speed Search. (10 - 2000 ms)
b3-55 Current Increment Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 ms 705
(3124) Sets the length of time that the drive will increase the current from zero current to the (10 - 2000 ms)
Expert setting value of b3-06 [Speed Estimation Current Level 1].

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-56 InverseRotationSearch V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 705
(3126) WaitTime Sets the wait time until the drive starts inverse rotation search after it completes forward (0.1 - 5.0 s)
search when you do inverse rotation search during Current Detection Speed Search.
b3-61 Init Magnet Pole V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0 705
(1B96) Estimation Gain Sets the responsiveness for initial motor magnetic pole calculation when A1-02 = 6 (-20.0 - +20.0)
Expert [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM]. Set b3-61 > 0.0 for an ordinary IPM motor.
When you use High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set
this value.
Note:
• Set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Calculation Method = High Frequency Injection] to
enable this parameter.
• When A1-02= 6 [AOLV/PM] and you do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning,
the drive automatically sets this parameter .
• Set n8-41 [HFI P Gain] to adjust the responsiveness for initial motor magnetic
pole calculation when A1-02 = 5, 7 [OLV/PM, CLV/PM].
◆ b4: Timer Function

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b4-01 Timer Function ON- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 706
(01A3) Delay Time Sets the ON-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)
b4-02 Timer Function OFF- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 706
(01A4) Delay Time Sets the OFF-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)
b4-03 Terminal M1-M2 ON- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms 706
(0B30) Delay Time Sets the delay time to activate the contact after the function set in H2-01 activates. (0 - 65000 ms)
Expert
b4-04 Terminal M1-M2 OFF- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms 706
(0B31) Delay Time Sets the delay time to deactivate the contact after the function set in H2-01 deactivates. (0 - 65000 ms)
Expert
Expert
Expert
Expert
Expert
◆ b5: PID Control

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-01 PID Mode Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 712
(01A5) Sets the type of PID control. (0 - 8)
0 : Disabled
1 : Standard
2 : Standard (D on feedback)
3 : Fref + PID Trim
4 : Fref + PID Trim (D on feedback)
5 : Same as 7series & prior, b5-01=1
Parameter List

Note:
Use settings 5 to 8 instead of settings 1 to 4 when the drive is a replacement for
Varispeed F7.
b5-02 Proportional Gain (P) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 713
(01A6) Sets the proportional gain (P) that is applied to PID input. (0.00 - 25.00)
RUN
11

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-03 Integral Time (I) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 713
(01A7) Sets the integral time (I) that is applied to PID input. (0.0 - 360.0 s)
RUN
b5-04 Integral Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 713
(01A8) Sets the upper limit for integral control (I) as a percentage of the Maximum Output (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN Frequency.
Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the
maximum output frequency.
• A1-02 ≠ 8 [EZOLV]: E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]
• A1-02 = 8: E9-02 [Maximum Speed]
b5-05 Derivative Time (D) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 713
(01A9) Sets the derivative time (D) for PID control. This parameter adjusts system (0.00 - 10.00 s)
RUN responsiveness.
b5-06 PID Output Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 713
(01AA) Sets the maximum possible output from the PID controller as a percentage of the (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN Maximum Output Frequency.
Note:
b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 714
(01AB) Sets the offset for the PID control output as a percentage of the Maximum Output (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN Frequency.
Note:
b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 714
(01AC) Constant Sets the primary delay time constant for the PID control output. Usually it is not (0.00 - 10.00 s)
RUN necessary to change this setting.
Expert
b5-09 PID Output Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 714
(01AD) Selection Sets the polarity of the PID output. (0, 1)
0 : Normal Output (Direct Acting)
1 : Reverse Output (Reverse Acting)
b5-10 PID Output Gain Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 714
(01AE) Sets the amount of gain to apply to the PID output. (0.00 - 25.00)
RUN
b5-11 PID Output Reverse V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 714
(01AF) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables reverse motor rotation for negative PID (0, 1)
control output.
0 : Lower Limit is Zero
1 : Negative Output Accepted
b5-12 Feedback Loss Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 715
(01B0) Select Sets the drive response to PID Feedback Low/High. Sets drive operation after the drive (0 - 5)
detects PID feedback Low/High.
0 : Digital Out Only, Always Detect
1 : Alarm + Digital Out, Always Det
2 : Fault + Digital Out, Always Det
3 : Digital Out Only, @ PID Enable
4 : Alarm + Digital Out, @PID Enable
5 : Fault + Digital Out, @PID Enable
b5-13 PID Feedback Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 715
(01B1) Detection Lvl Sets the level that triggers PID Feedback Loss [FbL] detection as a percentage of the (0 - 100%)
Maximum Output Frequency.
Note:
b5-14 PID Feedback Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 716
(01B2) Detection Time Sets the length of time that PID Feedback must be less than b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss (0.0 - 25.5 s)
Detection Lvl] to detect PID Feedback Loss [FbL].
b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 716
(01B3) Level Sets the output level that triggers the PID Sleep function. (0.0 - 590.0)

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 716
(01B4) Sets a delay time to start or stop the PID Sleep function. (0.0 - 25.5 s)
b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 716
(01B5) Raises or lowers the PID setpoint using the acceleration and deceleration times set to (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN the drive. This is a soft-starter for the PID setpoint.
b5-18 b5-19 PID Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 716
(01DC) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables b5-19 [PID Setpoint Value]. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00% 716
(01DD) Sets the PID setpoint when b5-18 = 1 [b5-19 PID Setpoint Selection = Enabled]. (0.00 - 100.00%)
RUN
b5-20 PID Unit Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 717
(01E2) Sets the number of digits to set and show the PID setpoint. (0 - 3)
0 : 0.01Hz units
1 : 0.01% units
2 : min-1
3 : User Units
b5-34 PID Output Lower Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 717
(019F) Level Sets the lower limit level for the PID control as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN Output Frequency].
When you use b5-34, set b5-91 = 0 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed = 0 (Disabled)].
When you set the output lower limit level as Hz units or min-1 (r/min) units, refer to
page 721.
Note:
b5-35 PID Input Limit Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1000.0% 717
(01A0) Sets the output upper limit for the PID control as a percentage of the Maximum Output (0.0 - 1000.0%)
RUN Frequency.
Note:
b5-36 PID High Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100% 717
(01A1) Detection Lvl Sets the level that triggers Excessive PID Feedback [FbH] as a percentage of the (0 - 100%)
Maximum Output Frequency.
Note:
b5-37 PID High Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 718
(01A2) Detection Time Sets the length of time that the PID feedback signal must be more than the level set in (0.0 - 25.5 s)
b5-36 [PID Feedback High Detection Lvl] to cause Excessive PID Feedback [FbH].
b5-38 PID User Unit Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by b5-20 718
(01FE) Scaling Sets the value that the drive sets or shows as the PID setpoint when at the maximum (1 - 60000)
output frequency.
b5-39 PID User Unit Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by b5-20 718
(01FF) Digits Sets the number of digits to set and show the PID setpoint. (0 - 3)
0 : No Decimal Places (XXXXX)
1 : One Decimal Places (XXXX.X)
2 : Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)
3 : Three Decimal Places (XX.XXX)
(017F) Monitor @PID Sets the contents for monitor U1-01 [Frequency Reference] in PID control. (0, 1)
0 : U1-01 Includes PID Output
Parameter List
1 : U1-01 Excludes PID Output
b5-47 PID Trim Mode Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 719
(017D) Reverse Sel Sets reverse motor rotation when the PID control output is negative. (0, 1)
b5-53 PID Integrator Ramp

Limit
V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 719 11
(0B8F) Sets the responsiveness of PID control when the PID feedback changes quickly. (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
RUN

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-55 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 000 719
(0BE1) Selection Sets the monitor (Ux-xx) used as the PID Feedback. (000 - 9999)
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set b5-55 = 102 to monitor
U1-02 [Output Frequency].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a
decimal number. For example, set b5-55 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
b5-56 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 719
(0BE2) Gain Sets the gain for the monitor set in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor Selection]. (0.00 - 10.00)
b5-57 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 719
(11DD) Bias Sets the bias for the monitor specified in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor Selection]. (-10.00 - +10.00)
b5-58 PID Setpoints 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00% 719
(1182) Sets the PID setpoint when H1-xx = 3E or 3F [MFDI Function Select = PID Setpoint (0.00 - 100.00%)
RUN Selection 1/2]. This value is a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note:
Note:
Note:
b5-61 PID Trim Mode Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 720
(119A) Limit Sel Sets the function that adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
b5-62 PID Trim Mode Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00% 720
(119B) Limit Value Sets the PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Value as a percentage of the maximum output (0.00 - 100.00%)
frequency.
Note:
b5-63 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 000 720
(119C) Monitor Sel Selects the monitor (Ux-xx) used as the PID Differential Feedback. (000 - 9999)
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set b5-63 = 103 to monitor
U1-03 [Output Current].
decimal number. For example, set b5-63 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
b5-64 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 720
(119D) Monitor Gain Sets the gain for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor Sel]. (0.00 - 10.00)
b5-65 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 721
(119F) Monitor Bias Sets the bias for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor Sel]. (-10.00 - +10.00)
b5-66 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 721
(11DE) Level Sets the signal level for the monitor specified in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor (0, 1)
Selection].
0 : Absolute
1 : Bi-directional (+/-)
b5-67 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 721
(11DF) Monitor Lvl Sets the signal level for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor (0, 1)
Sel].
0 : Absolute

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-89 Sleep Method Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 721
(0B89) Sets sleep and wake up operation when using PID. (0, 1)
RUN 0 : Standard
1 : EZ Sleep/Wake-up
b5-90 EZ Sleep Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 721
(0B90) Sets the measurement units for b5-91 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed] and b5-92 [EZ Sleep (0, 1)
Level].
0 : 0.1Hz units
1 : rev/min
b5-91 EZ Sleep Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz or 0 min-1 (r/min) 721
(0B91) Speed Sets the output lower limit level for the PID control as Hz units or min-1 (r/min) units. (0.0 to 590.0 Hz or 0 to
RUN When you use b5-91, set b5-34 = 0.0 [PID Output Lower Limit Level = 0.0 (disabled)]. 35400 min-1 (r/min))
When you set the output lower limit for PID output as a percentage of the Maximum
Output Frequency, refer to page 717.
b5-92 EZ Sleep Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz or 0 min-1 (r/min) 722
(0B92) Sets the value that the output frequency or motor speed must be less than for longer than (0.0 to 590.0 Hz or 0 to
RUN b5-93 [EZ Sleep Time] to enter Sleep Mode. 35400 min-1 (r/min))
b5-93 EZ Sleep Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0 s 722
(0B93) Sets the length of time that the output frequency or motor speed must be less than b5-92 (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
RUN [EZ Sleep Level] to enter Sleep Mode.
b5-94 EZ Sleep Wake-up Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00% 722
(0B94) Sets the level at which the drive resumes operation when exiting Sleep Mode. (0.00 - 600.00%)
RUN
b5-95 EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 722
(0B95) Sets the wake-up mode to use when exiting Sleep Mode. (0, 1)
0 : Absolute
1 : Setpoint Delta
b5-96 EZ Sleep Wake-up Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 722
(0B96) Sets the EZ Wake-up time. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
RUN
◆ b6: Dwell Function

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 723
(01B6) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when the motor starts. (Determined by A1-02)
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 723
(01B7) Sets the length of time that the drive will hold the output frequency when the motor (0.0 - 10.0 s)
starts.
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 723
(01B8) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when ramping to stop the (Determined by A1-02)
motor.
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 723
(01B9) Sets the length of time for the drive to hold the output frequency when ramping to stop (0.0 - 10.0 s)
the motor.
◆ b7: Droop Control

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b7-01 Droop Control Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 724
(01CA) Sets the amount of deceleration when the torque reference is at 100% as a percentage of (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency].
b7-02 Droop Control Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.05 s 724
Parameter List
(01CB) Time Sets the responsiveness of Droop control. Decrease this setting when drive response is (0.03 - 2.00 s)
RUN slow. Increase this setting when hunting or oscillation occur.
b7-03 Droop Control Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 724
(017E) Selection Sets the Droop control limit function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled 11

11.5 b: Application
◆ b8: Energy Saving

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-01 Energy Saving Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 725
(01CC) Selection Sets the Energy-saving control function. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
2 : Automatic Optimization
Note:
Setting 2 is available only when A1-02 = 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/
PM, CLV/PM] and in Expert Mode.
b8-02 Energy Saving Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 725
(01CD) Sets the gain for Energy-saving control. (0.0 - 10.0)
RUN
Expert
b8-03 Energy Saving Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02， 725
(01CE) Time Sets the responsiveness for Energy-saving control. C6-01 and o2-04
RUN (0.00 - 10.00 s)
Expert
b8-04 Energy Saving V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01, 725
(01CF) Coefficient Value Sets the Energy-saving control coefficient to maintain maximum motor efficiency. The E2-11, and o2-04
Expert default setting is for Yaskawa motors. (0.00 - 655.00)
b8-05 Power Detection Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20 ms 726
(01D0) Time Sets the time constant to measure output power. (0 - 2000 ms)
Expert
b8-06 Search Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 726
(01D1) Voltage Limit Sets the voltage limit for Search Operation as a percentage of the motor rated voltage. (0 - 100%)
Expert
b8-16 PM E-Save Coefficient V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 726
(01F8) Ki Sets torque linearity. This parameter uses the Ki value from the motor nameplate. (0.00 - 3.00)
Expert Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
b8-17 PM E-Save Coefficient V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 726
(01F9) Kt Sets torque linearity. This parameter uses the Kt value from the motor nameplate. (0.00 - 3.00)
b8-18 E-Save d-axis Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.100 s 726
(01FA) FilterTime Sets the d-axis current reference filter time constant. (0.000 - 5.000 s)
Expert
b8-19 E-Save Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 727
(0B40) Frequency Sets the frequency of Energy-saving control search operations. Usually it is not (10 - 300 Hz)
b8-20 E-Save Search Width V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 degrees 727
(0B41) Sets the amplitude of Energy-saving control search operations. (0.1 - 5.0 degrees)
Expert
b8-21 PM E-Save Search Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.3Hz 727
(0B42) Sets the gain of Energy-saving control search operations. (0.1 - 20.0 Hz)
Expert
b8-22 PM E-Save Search LPF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 Hz 727
(0B43) Cutoff Freq Sets the frequency of the filter used to extract the high-efficiency phase from search (1.0 - 30.0 Hz)
Expert operations. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
b8-23 PM E-Save Search Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15.0 degrees 727
(0B44) Sets the search operations output limit. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 30.0 degrees)
Expert
b8-24 PM E-Save High Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200.0 Hz 727
(0B45) ACR Gain Sets the gain for high-frequency current control. (100.0 - 1000.0 Hz)
Expert
b8-25 PM E-Save Search Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0% 728
(0B46) Level Sets the start level for search operations. (0.0 - 100.0%)
Expert
b8-26 PM E-Save Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 728
(0B47) Setpoint Sets a value to increase torque accuracy. (-10.0 - +10.0%)
Expert

11.5 b: Application
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-28 Over Excitation Action V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 728
(0B8B) Selection Sets the function for excitation operation. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
b8-29 Energy Saving Priority V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 728
(0B8C) Selection Sets the priority of drive response between changes to the load or Energy-saving (0, 1)
control. Enable this to prioritize energy-saving control. Disable this to prioritize
tracking related to fast load changes, and prevent motor stall.
0 : Priority: Drive Response
1 : Priority: Energy Savings
b8-50 Standby Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 728
(0B0D) Sets the Standby Mode function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
b8-51 Standby Mode Wait V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 600 s 729
(0B01) Time Sets the delay time before turning off the electromagnetic contactor after the drive (0 - 6000 s)
stops.
◆ b9: Zero Servo

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
b9-01 Zero Servo Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 730
(01DA) Sets the responsiveness for the Zero Servo function. (0 - 100)
b9-02 Zero Servo Completion V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 730
(01DB) Window Sets the range to trigger an output terminal set for “Zero Servo Complete” during Zero (0 - 16383)
Servo operation. Be sure to set the deviation from the Zero Servo start position.
Parameter List
11

11.6 C: Tuning
11.6 C: Tuning
◆ C1: Accel & Decel Time
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s 732
(0200) Sets the length of time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency. (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s 733
(0201) Sets the length of time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero. (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
C1-09 Fast Stop Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s 734
(0208) Sets the length of time that the drive will decelerate to zero for a Fast Stop. (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN Note:
• Decelerating too quickly can cause an ov [Overvoltage] fault that shuts off the
drive while the motor to coasts to a stop. Set a Fast Stop time in C1-09 that
prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely.
• When L2-29 = 0 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru
1] and you do KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set C1-09. If you
must not change the Fast Stop time, do not do KEB Tuning.
C1-10 Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 734
(0209) Setting Units Sets the setting units for C1-01 to C1-08 [Accel/Decel Times 1 to 4], C1-09 [Fast Stop (0, 1)
Time], L2-06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time], and L2-07 [Kinetic Energy Backup
Accel Time].
0 : 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)
1 : 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
C1-11 Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 734
(020A) Switching Frequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will automatically change acceleration and (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
deceleration times.
C1-14 Accel/Decel Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 735
(0264) Frequency Sets the base frequency used to calculate acceleration and deceleration rates. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
RUN
◆ C2: S-Curve Characteristics

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C2-01 S-Curve Time @ Start of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 737
(020B) Accel Sets the S-curve acceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
C2-02 S-Curve Time @ End of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s 737
(020C) Accel Sets the S-curve acceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
C2-03 S-Curve Time @ Start of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s 737
(020D) Decel Sets the S-curve deceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
C2-04 S-Curve Time @ End of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 737
(020E) Decel Sets the S-curve deceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)

11.6 C: Tuning
◆ C3: Slip Compensation

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 737
(020F) Sets the gain for the slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN this setting.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV], you cannot change the setting while the drive is
running.
• Correctly set these parameters before you change the slip compensation gain:
–E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
–E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip]
–E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
C3-02 Slip Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 738
(0210) Delay Time Sets the slip compensation delay time when speed is unstable or when the slip (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN compensation response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 738
(0211) Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor (0 - 250%)
rated slip.
C3-04 Slip Compensation at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 738
(0212) Regen Sets the slip compensation function during regeneration. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled Above 6Hz
2 : Enabled Above Defined Range
C3-05 Output Voltage Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 739
(0213) Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is (0, 1)
saturated.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
C3-16 Vout Modulation Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90.0% 739
(0261) Start Lvl Sets the modulation factor that starts the output voltage limit operation when C3-05 = 1 (70.0 - 90.0%)
Expert [Output Voltage Limit Selection = Enabled].
C3-17 Vout Modulation Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 739
(0262) Max Level Sets the modulation factor used with C3-18 [Output Voltage Limit Level] for the output (85.0 - 100.0%)
Expert voltage limit operation when C3-05 = 1 [Output Voltage Limit Selection = Enabled].
C3-18 Output Voltage Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90.0% 739
(0263) Level Sets the maximum drop width of the voltage reference when C3-05 = 1 [Output Voltage (50.0 - 100.0%)
Expert Limit Selection = Enabled].
C3-21 Motor 2 Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 739
(033E) Compensation Gain Sets the gain for the motor 2 slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN change this setting.
Note:
Correctly set these parameters before changing the slip compensation gain:
• E4-01 [Motor 2 Rated Current]
• E4-02 [Motor 2 Rated Slip]
• E4-03 [Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current]
C3-22 Motor 2 Slip Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 740
(0241) Delay Time Sets the slip compensation delay time for motor 2 when speed is unstable or when the (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN slip compensation response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
C3-23 Motor 2 Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 740
(0242) Compensation Limit Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor 2 (0 - 250%)
rated slip.
C3-24 Motor 2 Slip Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 740
(0243) during Regen Sets the slip compensation during regenerative operation function for motor 2. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
C3-28 Adaptive Slip Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 741
(1B5B) Mode Sets the slip compensation function mode. (0, 1)
Parameter List
Expert 0 : Normal
1 : Advanced
11

11.6 C: Tuning
◆ C4: Torque Compensation

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-01 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 741
(0215) Gain Sets the gain for the torque compensation function. Use this parameter value for motor (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN 1 when operating multiple motors.
Note:
If A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], you cannot change the setting
while the drive is running.
C4-02 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 741
(0216) Delay Time Sets the torque compensation delay time. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0 - 60000 ms)
RUN setting.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 5 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM], you cannot change the
setting while the drive is running.
• When A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV], you cannot change the setting while the drive is
running.
C4-03 Torque Compensation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 742
(0217) FWD Start Set the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated (0.0 - 200.0%)
torque.
C4-04 Torque Compensation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 742
(0218) REV Start Sets the amount of torque reference for reverse start as a percentage of the motor rated (-200.0 - 0.0%)
torque.
C4-05 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 ms 742
(0219) Time Sets the starting torque constant to use with C4-03 and C4-04 [Torque Compensation @ (0 - 200 ms)
FWD/REV Start].
C4-06 Motor 2 Torque Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150 ms 742
(021A) Delay Time Sets the value if ov [Overvoltage] occurs with sudden changes in the load, at the end of (0 - 10000 ms)
acceleration, or at the start of deceleration.
C4-07 Motor 2 Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 742
(0341) Compensation Gain Sets the gain for motor 2 torque compensation function when using the Motor Switch (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN function.
C4-19 Torque Ripple Suppress V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 Hz 743
(0B8D) Min Freq If there is slow oscillation at low speeds, adjust this setting. Usually it is not necessary (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
Expert to change this setting.
Increase this parameter in 1.0 Hz increments when current ripples and torque ripples
occur during low-speed operation. Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the function if
increasing the value does not fix the problem.
C4-20 Voltage Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 120 Hz 743
(0BCB) Adjust 1 Sets voltage precision compensation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 200 Hz)
Expert
C4-21 Voltage Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 743
(0BCC) Adjust 2 Sets voltage precision compensation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 10)
Expert
C4-23 Current Control Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 743
(1583) Sets the Current control gain. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. (0.50 - 2.50)
Expert
C4-25 High-Speed Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 743
(1BF4) Compensation Sets the voltage compensation function for high-speed operation. Usually it is not (0, 1)
Note:
Set C4-25 = 0 when there is audible noise or motor vibration during high-speed
operation.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

11.6 C: Tuning
◆ C5: Auto Speed Regulator (ASR)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 747
(021B) Sets the gain to adjust ASR response. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN Note:
If A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f], you must set H6-01 = 3 [Terminal
RP Pulse Train Function = Speed Feedback (V/F Control)] to enable this
parameter.
C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 747
(021C) Sets the ASR integral time. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN Note:
parameter.
C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 747
(021D) Sets the gain to adjust ASR response. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN Note:
parameter.
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 747
(021E) Sets the ASR integral time. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN Note:
parameter.
C5-05 ASR Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0% 748
(021F) Set the ASR output limit as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. (0.0 - 20.0%)
C5-06 ASR Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 748
(0220) Sets the filter time constant of the torque reference output from the speed loop. Usually (0.000 - 0.500 s)
it is not necessary to change this setting.
C5-07 ASR Gain Switchover V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 748
(0221) Frequency Sets the frequency where the drive will switch between these parameters: (Determined by A1-02)
C5-01 and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 1/2]
C5-02 and C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 1/2]
C5-08 ASR Integral Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400% 748
(0222) Set the upper limit of the ASR integral amount as a percentage of the rated load. (0 - 400%)
C5-12 Integral Operation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 748
(0386) Accel/Decel Sets ASR integral operation during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
parameter.
C5-17 Motor Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 749
(0276) Sets the motor inertia. C6-01, and E5-01
Expert Note: (0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
The display units for the default setting and setting range are different for different
models:
• 0.0001 kgm2 units (setting range: 0.0001 kgm2 to 6.0000 kgm2): 2004 to 2021,
4002 to 4012
• 0.001 kgm2 units (setting range: 0.001 kgm2 to 60.000 kgm2): 2030 to 2211, 4018
to 4103
• 0.01 kgm2 units (setting range: 0.01 kgm2 to 600.00 kgm2): 2257 to 2415, 4140 to
4H12
C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 749
(0277) Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor inertia. (0.0 - 6000.0)
Expert
C5-21 Motor 2 ASR V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 749
(0356) Proportional Gain 1 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response for motor 2. (0.00 - 300.00)
Parameter List
RUN
C5-22 Motor 2 ASR Integral V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 749
(0357) Time 1 Sets the ASR integral time for motor 2. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
C5-23 Motor 2 ASR V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 749
Proportional Gain 2
(0358) Sets the gain to adjust ASR response for motor 2. (0.00 - 300.00) 11
RUN

11.6 C: Tuning
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-24 Motor 2 ASR Integral V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 750
(0359) Time 2 Sets the ASR integral time for motor 2. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
C5-25 Motor 2 ASR Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0% 750
(035A) Set the motor 2 ASR output limit as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output (0.0 - 20.0%)
Frequency].
C5-26 Motor 2 ASR Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 750
(035B) Time Sets the motor 2 filter time constant of the torque reference output from the speed loop. (0.000 - 0.500 s)
Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
C5-27 Motor 2 ASR Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 750
(035C) Switchover Freq Sets the frequency where the drive will switch between these parameters: (0.0 - 400.0)
C5-21 and C5-23 [Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1/2]
C5-22 and C5-24 [Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1/2]
C5-28 Motor 2 ASR Integral V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400% 750
(035D) Limit Set the upper limit of the motor 2 ASR integral amount as a percentage of the rated (0 - 400%)
load.
C5-29 Speed Control Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 751
(0B18) Sets the level of speed control responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0, 1)
Expert setting.
0 : Standard
1 : High Performance 1
C5-32 Motor 2 Integral Oper at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 751
(0361) Acc/Dec Sets ASR integral operation during acceleration and deceleration for motor 2. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
C5-37 Motor 2 Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 751
(0278) Sets the motor inertia for motor 2. C6-01
Expert Note: (0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
models:
4002 to 4012
to 4103
4H12
C5-38 Motor 2 Load Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 751
(0279) Ratio Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor 2 inertia. (0.0 - 6000.0)
Expert
C5-39 ASR Primary Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000 s 751
(030D) Time Const 2 Sets the filter time constant used when the torque reference is output from ASR. (0.000 - 0.500 s)
Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
C5-50 Notch Filter Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 Hz 752
(0B14) Sets the machine resonance frequency. (0, or 2 to 100 Hz)
Expert Note:
Set C5-50 = 0 [0 Hz] to disable the notch filter.
C5-51 Notch Filter Bandwidth V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 752
(0B15) Sets the notch width of the notch filter. (0.5 - 5.0)
Expert Note:
Set C5-50 = 0 [Notch Filter Frequency = 0 Hz] to disable the notch filter.

11.6 C: Tuning
◆ C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-01 Normal / Heavy Duty V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 752
(0223) Selection Sets the drive duty rating. (0, 1)
0 : Heavy Duty Rating
1 : Normal Duty Rating
C6-02 Carrier Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, 753
(0224) Selection Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive. C6-01, and o2-04
1 : 2.0 kHz (Determined by A1-02)
2 : 5.0 kHz (4.0 kHz for AOLV/PM)
7 : Swing PWM4 (Audible Sound 1)
A : Swing PWM4 (Audible Sound 4)
F : User Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
Note:
The carrier frequency for Swing PWM 1 to 4 is equivalent to 2.0 kHz.
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02 754
(0225) Limit Sets the upper limit of the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency (1.0 - 15.0 kHz)
Selection = User Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)] to set this parameter.
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02 755
(0226) Limit Sets the lower limit of the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency (1.0 - 15.0 kHz)
C6-05 Carrier Freq Proportional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02 755
(0227) Gain Sets the proportional gain for the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency (0 - 99)
C6-09 Carrier Freq at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 755
(022B) Rotational Tune Sets the Auto-Tuning carrier frequency. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0, 1)
setting.
0 : 5kHz
1 : use C6-03
Parameter List
11

11.7 d: Reference Settings

◆ d1: Frequency Reference
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d1-01 Reference 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz 758
(0280) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Note:
When A1-02 = 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM, CLV/PM], the drive
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
(0281) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
(028B) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
(028C) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(028D) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
(028E) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
(028F) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
RUN Selection].
Note:
changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
d1-17 Jog Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz 762
(0292) Sets the Jog frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN Selection]. Set H1-xx = 6 [MFDI Function Select = Jog Reference Selection] to use the
Jog frequency reference.
Note:
sets o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
◆ d2: Reference Limits

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d2-01 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 762
(0289) Upper Limit Sets maximum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is (0.0 - 110.0%)
100%.
Note:
• A1-02 = 8: E9-02 [Motor Max Revolutions]
d2-02 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 762
(028A) Lower Limit Sets minimum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is (0.0 - 110.0%)
100%.
Note:
• A1-02 = 8: E9-02 [Motor Max Revolutions]
d2-03 Analog Frequency Ref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 762
(0293) Lower Limit Sets the lower limit for the master frequency reference (the first frequency of the multi- (0.0 - 110.0%)
step speed reference) as a percentage. The maximum output frequency is 100%.
Note:
Parameter List

• A1-02 ≠ 8: E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]
11

◆ d3: Jump Frequency

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 763
(0294) Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid. (Determined by A1-02)
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 Hz 764
(0297) Sets the width of the frequency band that the drive will avoid. (Determined by A1-02)
◆ d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-01 Freq Reference Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 764
(0298) Selection Sets the function that saves the frequency reference or the frequency bias (Up/Down 2) (0, 1)
after a Stop command or when de-energizing the drive.
Set H1-xx [MFDI Function Selection] to one of these values to enable this parameter:
• A [Accel/Decel Ramp Hold]
• 10/11 [Up/Down Command]
• 75/76 [Up/Down 2 Command]
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
d4-03 Up/Down 2 Bias Step V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz 766
(02AA) Frequency Sets the bias that the Up/Down 2 function adds to or subtracts from the frequency (0.00 - 99.99 Hz)
RUN reference.
d4-04 Up/Down 2 Ramp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 767
(02AB) Selection Sets the acceleration and deceleration times for the Up/Down 2 function to apply the (0, 1)
RUN bias to the frequency reference.
0 : Use Selected Accel/Decel Time
1 : Use Accel/Decel Time 4
d4-05 Up/Down 2 Bias Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 767
(02AC) Selection Sets the function that saves the bias value to the drive when you open or close the two (0, 1)
RUN Up/Down 2 Commands [H1-xx = 75, 76]. Set d4-03 [Up/Down 2 Bias Step Frequency]
= 0.00 before you set this parameter.
0 : Hold when Neither Up/Down Closed
1 : Reset when Neither / Both Closed
d4-06 Frequency Ref Bias (Up/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 767
(02AD) Down 2) Saves the bias value from the Up/Down 2 Command where the Maximum Output (-99.9 - +100.0%)
Frequency is 100%.
Note:
d4-07 Analog Freq Ref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0% 768
(02AE) Fluctuate Limit If the frequency reference changes for more than the level set to this parameter, then the (0.1 - 100.0%)
RUN bias value will be held. The value is set as a percentage of the Maximum Output
Frequency.
Note:
d4-08 Up/Down 2 Bias Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 768
(02AF) Limit Sets the upper limit of the Up/Down 2 bias as a percentage of the Maximum Output (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN Frequency.
Note:

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-09 Up/Down 2 Bias Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 768
(02B0) Limit Sets the lower limit of the Up/Down 2 bias as a percentage of the Maximum Output (-99.9 - 0.0%)
RUN Frequency.
Note:
d4-10 Up/Down Freq Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 768
(02B6) Limit Select Sets the lower frequency limit for the Up/Down function. (0, 1)
0 : Greater of d2-02 or Analog
1 : d2-02
d4-11 Bi-directional Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 769
(02B7) Selection Sets the function that changes the frequency reference to a Bi-Directional internal (0, 1)
frequency reference.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
d4-12 Stop Position Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 770
(02B8) Sets the gain to adjust the stopping accuracy. Set this parameter when b1-03 = 9 (0.50 - 2.55)
[Stopping Method Selection = Stop with Constant Distance].
◆ d5: Torque Control

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-01 Torque Control Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 774
(029A) Sets the drive for torque control or speed control. (0, 1)
0 : Speed Control
1 : Torque Control
d5-02 Torque Reference Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 774
(029B) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the torque reference filter. (0 - 1000 ms)
d5-03 Speed Limit Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 774
(029C) Sets the torque control speed limit method. (1, 2)
1 : Active Frequency Reference
2 : d5-04 Setting
d5-04 Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 775
(029D) Sets the speed limit during Torque Control as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output (-120 - +120%)
Frequency]. Set d5-03 = 2 [Speed Limit Selection = d5-04 Setting] before you set this
parameter.
d5-05 Speed Limit Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10% 775
(029E) Sets the speed limit bias value as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. (0 - 120%)
d5-06 Speed/Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms 775
(029F) Changeover Time Sets the delay time to switch between Speed Control and Torque Control. Set H1-xx = (0 - 1000 ms)
71 [MFDI Function Selection = Torque Control] before you set this parameter.
d5-08 Uni-directional Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 775
(02B5) Limit Bias Sets the direction of the speed limit reference to which Speed Limit Bias [d5-05] (0, 1)
applies.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ d6: Field Weakening /Forcing

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-01 Field Weakening Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80% 776
(02A0) Sets the drive output voltage as a percentage of E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage] when (0 - 100%)
H1-xx = 63 [Field Weakening] is activated.
Parameter List
d6-02 Field Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 776
(02A1) Frequency Limit Sets the minimum output frequency to start field weakening. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-03 Field Forcing Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 776
(02A2) Sets the field forcing function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
d6-06 Field Forcing Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400% 776
(02A5) Sets the limit value for field forcing to increase the motor excitation current reference as (100 - 400%)
a percentage of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]. Usually it is not necessary to change
this setting.
◆ d7: Offset Frequency

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
d7-01 Offset Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 777
(02B2) Uses H1-xx = 44 [MFDI Function Select = Add Offset Frequency 1 (d7-01)] as a (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency to add or subtract the set frequency to/
from the frequency reference.
Note:
Note:
Note:

11.8 E: Motor Parameters

◆ E1: V/f Pattern for Motor 1
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-01 Input AC Supply Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 230 V, 779
(0300) Sets the drive input voltage. 400 V Class: 400 V
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Set E1-01 [Input AC Supply (200 V Class: 155 to 255
V, 400 V Class: 310 to
Voltage] to align with the drive input voltage (not motor 510 V)
voltage). If this parameter is incorrect, the protective functions
of the drive will not operate correctly and it can cause damage
to the drive.
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 779
(0302) Sets the V/f pattern for the drive and motor. You can use one of the preset patterns or (Determined by A1-02)
you can make a custom pattern.
0 : Const Trq, 50Hz base, 50Hz max
4 : VT, 50Hz, 65% Vmid reduction
6 : VT, 60 Hz, 65% Vmid reduction
8 : High Trq, 50Hz, 25% Vmin boost
9 : High Trq, 50Hz, 65% Vmin boost
A : High Trq, 60Hz, 25% Vmin boost
B : High Trq, 60Hz, 65% Vmin boost
C : High Freq, 60Hz base, 90Hz max
D : High Freq, 60Hz base, 120Hz max
E : High Freq, 60Hz base, 180Hz max
F : Custom
Note:
• When A1-02 = 2 [Control Method Selection = OLV], settings 0 to E are not
available.
• Set the correct V/f pattern for the application and operation area. An incorrect V/f
pattern can decrease motor torque and increase current from overexcitation.
E1-04 Maximum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 784
(0303) Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V/f pattern. and E5-01
(Determined by A1-02
and E5-01)
E1-05 Maximum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200.0 784
(0304) Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
510.0 V)
E1-06 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 784
(0305) Sets the base frequency for the V/f pattern. and E5-01
(0.0 - E1-04)
E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 784
(0306) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - E1-04)
E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02， 785
(0307) Sets a middle output voltage for the V/f pattern. C6-01 and o2-04
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)
E1-09 Minimum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 785
(0308) Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the V/f pattern. and E5-01
(Determined by A1-02,
E1-04, and E5-01)
E1-10 Minimum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 785
(0309) Voltage Sets the minimum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 to
255.0 V, 400 V Class:
Parameter List
0.0 to 510.0 V)
E1-11 Mid Point B Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 785
(030A) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - E1-04)
Expert
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-12 Mid Point B Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V 785
(030B) Sets a middle point voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 to
Expert 255.0 V, 400 V Class:
0.0 to 510.0 V)
E1-13 Base Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V 785
(030C) Sets the base voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
Expert V,400 V Class: 0.0 -
510.0 V)
◆ E2: Motor Parameters

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-01 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 786
(030E) (FLA) Sets the motor rated current in amps. C6-01
(10% to 200% of the
drive rated current)
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 786
(030F) Sets motor rated slip. C6-01
(0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 786
(0310) Sets the no-load current for the motor in amps when operating at the rated frequency C6-01
and the no-load voltage. (0 to E2-01)
E2-04 Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 787
(0311) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 - 120)
Note:
• When A1-02 = 0, 1, 3 [Control Method Selection = V/f, CL-V/f, CLV], the
maximum value is 120.
• When A1-02 = 2, 4 [OLV, AOLV], the maximum value is 48.
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 787
(0312) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. C6-01
Note: (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the unit is mΩ, and the setting range is 0.000 mΩ to
65.000 mΩ.
E2-06 Motor Leakage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 787
(0313) Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor leakage inductance when the motor is operating at the C6-01
rated frequency and rated current. This value is a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage. (0.0 - 60.0%)
E2-07 Motor Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.50 787
(0314) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)
E2-08 Motor Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.75 787
(0315) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E2-07 - 0.75)
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 788
(0316) Sets the mechanical loss of the motor. It is set as a percentage of E2-11 [Motor Rated (0.0 - 10.0%)
Expert Power]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 788
(0317) Sets the motor iron loss. C6-01
(0 - 65535 W)
E2-11 Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 788
(0318) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. C6-01
Note: (0.00 - 1000.0)
On drive models 2xxx, and 4002 to 4675, the setting unit is 0.01 kW. The setting
range is 0.00 kW to 650.00 kW (0.00 HP to 650.00 HP).
On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the setting unit is 0.1 kW. The setting range is 0.0
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).


No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-01 Motor 2 Control Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 789
(0319) Selection Sets the control method for motor 2. (0 - 3)
Note:
When you change this setting, the drive will set all parameters that are dependent on
this parameter to their default settings.
0 : V/f Control
E3-04 Motor 2 Maximum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031A) Output Frequency Set the maximum output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (40.0 - 590.0 Hz)
E3-05 Motor 2 Maximum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031B) Output Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031C) Sets the base frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Point A V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031D) Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Point A V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031E) Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 789
(031F) Output Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01 790
(0320) Output Voltage Sets the minimum output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Point B V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz 790
(0345) Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust (0.0 - E3-04)
Expert the V/f pattern for the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this
parameter.
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Point B V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V 790
(0346) Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust the (200 V Class: 0.0 to
Expert V/f pattern for the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this 255.0 V, 400 V Class:
parameter. 0.0 to 510.0 V)
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V 790
(0347) Sets the base voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust the V/f (200 V Class: 0.0 to
Expert pattern for the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this 255.0 V, 400 V Class:
parameter. 0.0 to 510.0 V)
◆ E4: Motor 2 Parameters

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 790
(0321) Sets the motor rated current for motor 2 in amps. C6-01
(10% to 200% of the
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 791
(0322) Sets the motor rated slip for motor 2. C6-01
(0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 791
(0323) Current Sets the no-load current for motor 2 in amps when operating at the rated frequency and C6-01
Parameter List
the no-load voltage. (Less than 0 - E4-01)
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 791
(0324) Sets the number of poles for motor 2. (2 - 120)
E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 791
(0325) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor 2 stator windings. C6-01
Note: (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
11
65.000 mΩ.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 792
(0326) Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor 2 leakage inductance as a percentage of Motor Rated C6-01
Voltage when motor 2 operates at the rated frequency and rated current. (0.0 - 60.0%)
E4-07 Motor 2 Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.50 792
(0343) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor 2 iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)
E4-08 Motor 2 Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.75 792
(0344) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor 2 iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E4-07 - 0.75)
E4-09 Motor 2 Mechanical V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 792
(033F) Loss Sets the mechanical loss of motor 2. It is set as a percentage of E4-11 [Motor 2 Rated (0.0 - 10.0%)
Expert Power]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 792
(0340) Sets the motor iron loss for motor 2. C6-01
(0 - 65535 W)
E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 792
Note: (0.00 - 1000.0)
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).
◆ E5: PM Motor Settings

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-01 PM Motor Code V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV FFFF 793
(0329) Selection Sets the motor code for Yaskawa PM motors. The drive uses the motor code to (0000 - FFFF)
automatically set some parameters to their correct settings.
E5-02 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01 793
(032A) Sets the PM motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.10 - 1000.0)
Note:
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.1 HP to 1340.5 HP).
E5-03 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01 793
(032B) (FLA) Sets the PM motor rated current (FLA). (10% to 200% of the
E5-04 PM Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01 794
(032C) Sets the number of PM motor poles. (2 - 120)
Note:
• When A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], the maximum value is
120.
• When A1-02 = 5, 6 or 8 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM or EZOLV], the maximum value is
48.
E5-05 PM Motor Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.100 Ω 794
(032D) (ohms/phase) Sets the resistance per phase of a PM motor. Set 50% of the line-to-line resistance. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
65.000 mΩ.
E5-06 PM d-axis Inductance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 mH 794
(032E) (mH/phase) Sets the PM motor d-axis inductance. (0.00 - 300.00 mH)
E5-07 PM q-axis Inductance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 mH 794
(032F) (mH/phase) Sets the PM motor q-axis inductance. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)
E5-09 PM Back-EMF Vpeak V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 mV/(rad/sec) 794
(0331) (mV/(rad/s)) Sets the peak value of PM motor induced voltage. (0.0 - 2000.0 mV/(rad/s))
E5-11 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 degrees 795
(0333) Sets the encoder Z-pulse offset. (-180.0 - +180.0
degrees)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-24 PM Back-EMF L-L V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 795
(0353) Vrms (mV/rpm) Sets the RMS value for PM motor line voltage. 100.0 mV/min-1
400 V Class:
200.0 mV/min-1
(0.0 - 6500.0 mV/min-1)
E5-25 Polarity Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 795
(035E) Timeout Sets the function that switches polarity for initial polarity estimation. Usually it is not (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ E9: Motor Setting

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-01 Motor Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 795
(11E4) Sets the type of motor. (0 - 2)
0 : Induction (IM)
1 : Permanent Magnet (PM)
2 : Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)
E9-02 Maximum Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 796
(11E5) Sets the maximum speed of the motor. (40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
E9-03 Rated Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 796
(11E6) Sets the rated rotation speed of the motor. (100 - 7200 min-1)
E9-04 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 796
(11E7) Sets the rated frequency of the motor. (40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
E9-05 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V, 796
(11E8) Sets the rated voltage of the motor. 400 V Class: 400.0 V
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
510.0 V)
E9-06 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 796
(11E9) (FLA) Sets the motor rated current in amps. and o2-04
(10% to 200% of the
E9-07 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-02 796
(11EA) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. and o2-04
Note: (0.00 - 1000.0)
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).
E9-08 Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 797
(11EB) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 120)
E9-09 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000 Hz 797
(11EC) Sets the motor rated slip. (0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
E9-10 Motor Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 797
(11ED) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
65.000 mΩ.
Parameter List
11

11.9 F: Options
11.9 F: Options
◆ F1: PG Option Setup (Encoder)
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-01 Encoder 1 Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr 799
(0380) (PPR) Sets the number of output pulses for each motor revolution. (1 - 60000 ppr)
F1-02 Encoder Signal Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 799
(0381) Detect Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 4)
detects PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
4 : No Alarm Display
F1-03 Overspeed Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 799
(0382) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 3)
detects oS [Overspeed].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
F1-04 Speed Deviation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 800
(0383) Detection Select Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 3)
detects dEv [Speed Deviation].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 800
(0384) Selection Sets the output sequence for the A and B pulses from the encoder, assuming that the (0, 1)
motor is operating in the forward direction.
0 : Pulse A leads in FWD Direction
1 : Pulse B leads in FWD Direction
F1-06 Encoder 1 Pulse Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 001 800
(0385) Scaling Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of the encoder as a 3-digit (001 - 032, 102 - 132 (1 -
number. The first digit is the numerator and the second and third digits set the 1/32))
denominator.
The dividing ratio = (1 + x)/yz when the setting value is a 3-digit value (xyz).
F1-08 Overspeed Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 115% 801
(0387) Level Sets the detection level of oS [Overspeed] as a percentage when the maximum output (0 - 120%)
frequency is 100%.
Note:
• Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the
–A1-02 ≠ 8 [EZOLV]: E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]
–A1-02 = 8: E9-02 [Maximum Speed]
• If A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f], you must set H6-01 = 3 [Terminal
parameter.
F1-09 Overspeed Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 801
(0388) Delay Time Sets the length of time that the speed feedback must be more than the F1-08 level to (0.0 - 2.0 s)
cause oS [Overspeed].
Note:
parameter.
F1-10 Speed Deviation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10% 801
(0389) Detection Level Sets the detection level of dEv [Speed Deviation] as a percentage when the maximum (0 - 50%)
output frequency is 100%.
Note:
• If A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f], you must set H6-01 = 3 [Terminal
parameter.

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-11 Speed Deviation Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 s 801
(038A) DelayTime Sets the length of time that the difference between the frequency reference and speed (0.0 - 10.0 s)
feedback must be more than the level in F1-10 to cause dEv [Speed Deviation].
Note:
parameter.
F1-12 Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 801
(038B) Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side. This parameter and F1-13 [Encoder 1 (0 - 1000)
Gear Teeth 2] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
(038C) Sets the number of gear teeth on the load side. This parameter and F1-12 [Encoder 1 (0 - 1000)
F1-14 Encoder Open-Circuit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s 802
(038D) Detect Time Sets the length of time that the drive must not receive a pulse signal to cause PGo (0.0 - 10.0 s)
[Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss].
Note:
Motor speed and load conditions can cause ov [Overvoltage] and oC [Overcurrent]
faults.
parameter.
F1-16 Deviation 1 Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 802
(03AB) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables Deviation 1 Detection Selection. When A1- (0, 1)
Expert 02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], this function is always enabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
(03AC) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the number of motor rotations that (0 - 100)
the drive will detect more than one Z pulse per rotation to detect dv2.
(03AD) Selection Sets the number of rotations necessary to detect conditions that invert the torque (0 - 10)
reference and rate of acceleration and cause dv3 [Inversion Detection].
(03AE) Selection Sets the number of pulses necessary to cause dv4 [Inversion Prevention Detection]. (0 - 5000)
F1-20 Encoder 1 PCB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 803
(03B4) Disconnect Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected encoder (0, 1)
connection cable to cause PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault].
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
F1-21 Encoder 1 Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 803
(03BC) Selection Sets the number of channels for the signal to the encoder option card. (0, 1)
0 : A Pulse Detection
1 : AB Pulse Detection
F1-30 Motor 2 Encoder PCB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 803
(03AA) Port Select Sets the drive port to install the motor 2 encoder option card. (0, 1)
0 : CN5-C
1 : CN5-B
F1-31 Encoder 2 Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr 803
(03B0) (PPR) Sets the number of output pulses for each motor revolution for motor 2. (1 - 60000 ppr)
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], you can set the
number of output pulses without setting H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection].
F1-32 Encoder 2 Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 803
(03B1) Selection Sets the output sequence for the A and B pulses from the encoder for motor 2. This (0, 1)
parameter assumes that the motor is operating in the forward direction.
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], you can set this
parameter without setting H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection].
Parameter List
(03B2) Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side for motor 2. This parameter and F1-34 (0 - 1000)
[Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 2] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
(03B3) Sets the number of gear teeth on the load side for motor 2. This parameter and F1-33 (0 - 1000)
[Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 1] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-35 Encoder 2 Pulse Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 001 804
(03BE) Scaling Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of the encoder as a 3-digit (001 - 032, 102 - 132 (1 -
number for motor 2. The first digit is the numerator and the second and third digits are 1/32))
the denominator.
The dividing ratio = (1 + x)/yz when the setting value is a 3-digit value (xyz).
Note:
F1-36 Encoder 2 PCB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 804
(03B5) Disconnect Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected encoder (0, 1)
connection cable that causes PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault] for motor 2.
Note:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
F1-37 Encoder 2 Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 804
(03BD) Selection Sets the number of channels for the signal to the encoder option for motor 2. (0, 1)
Note:
F1-46 dv2 Detection Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 805
(1B98) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the detection method for dv2 [Z (0, 1)
Pulse Noise Fault Detection].
0 : ElectricalAngle Detection Method
1 : MechanicalAngle Detection Method
F1-47 Deviation 2 Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15° 805
(1B99) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the sensitivity of detection for dv2 (0 - 180°)
[Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection]. Increase the value to decrease the sensitivity.
F1-50 PG-F3 Option Encoder V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 805
(03D2) Type Sets the type of encoder connected to the PG-F3 option. (0 - 2)
0 : EnDat Sin/Cos
1 : EnDat Serial Only
2 : HIPERFACE
F1-51 PG-F3 PGoH Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80% 805
(03D3) Level The drive will detect PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault] if the value of this (1 - 100%)
parameter is smaller than the value of .
Note:
This function is enabled when F1-20 = 1 [Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect Detect =
Enabled].
F1-52 Serial Encoder Comm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 805
(03D4) Speed Sets the communication speed between the PG-F3 option and the serial encoder. (0 - 2)
0 : 1M/9600bps
1 : 500k/19200bps
2 : 1M/38400bps

11.9 F: Options
◆ F2: Analog Input Option

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F2-01 Analog Input Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 806
(038F) Selection Sets the input method for the analog reference used with AI-A3. (0, 1)
0 : 3 Independent Channels
1 : 3 Channels Added Together
F2-02 Analog Input Option V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 807
(0368) Card Gain Sets the analog reference gain as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN 100%.
Note:
• Set F2-01 = 1 [Analog Input Function Selection = 3 Channels Added Together] to
enable this function.
F2-03 Analog Input Option V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 807
(0369) Card Bias Sets the analog reference bias as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN 100%.
Note:
• Set F2-01 = 1 [Analog Input Function Selection = 3 Channels Added Together] to
enable this function.
◆ F3: Digital Input Option

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-01 Digital Input Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 808
(0390) Selection Sets the data format of digital input signals. This parameter is enabled when o1-03 = 0 (0 - 8)
or 1 [Frequency Display Unit Selection = 0.01 Hz or 0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
Note:
When o1-03 = 2 or 3 [Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) or User Units (o1-10 & o1-
11)], the input signal will be BCD. The o1-03 value sets the setting units.
0 : BCD, 1% units
1 : BCD, 0.1% units
2 : BCD, 0.01% units
3 : BCD, 1 Hz units
4 : BCD, 0.1 Hz units
6 : BCD (5-digit), 0.02 Hz
7 : Binary input
8 : Multi-Function Digital Input
F3-03 Digital Input Data V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2 809
(03B9) Length Select Sets the number of bits to set the frequency reference with DI-A3. (0 - 2)
0 : 8-bit
1 : 12-bit
2 : 16-bit
F3-10 Terminal D0 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 809
(0BE3) Selection Sets the function for terminal D0 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
Expert Function Selection = Multi-Function Digital Input].
Parameter List
Function Selection = Multi-Function Digital Input].
Expert
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(0BEA) Selection Sets the function for terminal D7 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
(0BEB) Selection Sets the function for terminal D8 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
(0BEC) Selection Sets the function for terminal D9 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-20 Terminal DA Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BED) Selection Sets the function for terminal DA of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-21 Terminal DB Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BEE) Selection Sets the function for terminal DB of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-22 Terminal DC Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BEF) Selection Sets the function for terminal DC of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-23 Terminal DD Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BF0) Selection Sets the function for terminal DD of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-24 Terminal DE Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BF1) Selection Sets the function for terminal DE of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
F3-25 Terminal DF Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 811
(0BF2) Selection Sets the function for terminal DF of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input (1 - 19F)
◆ F4: Analog Monitor Option

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-01 Terminal V1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 812
(0391) Selection Sets the monitor signal (Ux-xx) output from terminal V1. (000 - 9999)
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set F4-01 = 102 to monitor
decimal number. For example, set F4-01 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
F4-02 Terminal V1 Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 812
(0392) Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V1. Sets the analog signal (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN output level from the terminal V1 at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for
monitoring items is 100%.
F4-03 Terminal V2 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103 812
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set F4-03 = 103 to monitor
decimal number. For example, set F4-03 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
F4-04 Terminal V2 Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0% 813
(0394) Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2. Sets the analog signal (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN output level from terminal V2 at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for monitoring
items is 100%.
F4-05 Terminal V1 Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 813
(0395) Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V1. When an output for (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN monitoring items is 0%, this parameter sets the analog signal output level from the V1
terminal as a percentage of 10 V or 20 mA.

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-06 Terminal V2 Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 813
(0396) Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2. Set the level of the (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN analog signal sent from the V2 terminal at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for
monitoring items is 0%.
F4-07 Terminal V1 Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 813
(0397) Level Sets the output signal level for terminal V1. (0, 1)
0 : 0 to 10 V
1 : -10 to 10 V
F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 813
(0398) Level Sets the output signal level for terminal V2. (0, 1)
0 : 0 to 10 V
1 : -10 to 10 V
◆ F5: Digital Output Option

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F5-01 Terminal P1-PC V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 815
(0399) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P1-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
Output Mode Selection = Programmable (F5-01 to F5-08)] to enable this function.
(039A) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P2-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
(039B) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P3-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
(039C) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P4-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
(039D) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P5-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
(039E) Function Select Sets the function of terminal P6-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
F5-07 Terminal M1-M2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 816
(039F) Function Select Sets the function of terminal M3-M2 on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
F5-08 Terminal M3-M4 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 816
(03A0) Function Select Sets the function of terminal M3-M4 on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 (0 - 1A7)
F5-09 DO-A3 Output Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 816
(03A1) Selection Sets the output mode of signals from the DO-A3 option. (0 - 2)
0 : Predefined Individual Outputs
1 : Binary Output
2 : Programmable (F5-01 to F5-08)
◆ F6: Communication Options

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-01 Communication Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 822
(03A2) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 5)
detects bUS [Option Communication Error].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
Parameter List
3 : Alarm Only
4 : Alarm (Run at d1-04)
5 : Alarm - Ramp Stop
F6-02 Comm External Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 823
(03A3) (EF0) Detect Sets the conditions at which EF0 [Option Card External Fault] is detected. (0, 1)
0 : Always Detected
1 : Detected during RUN Only
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-03 Comm External Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 823
(03A4) (EF0) Select Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 3)
detects an EF0 [Option Card External Fault].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
F6-04 bUS Error Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s 823
(03A5) Time Sets the delay time for the drive to detect bUS [Option Communication Error]. (0.0 - 5.0 s)
Note:
When you install an option card in the drive, the parameter value changes to 0.0 s.
F6-06 Torque Reference/Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 823
(03A7) by Comm Sets the function that enables and disables the torque reference and torque limit (0, 1)
received from the communication option.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
F6-07 Multi-Step Ref @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 823
(03A8) NetRef/ComRef Sets the function that enables and disables the multi-step speed reference when the (0, 1)
frequency reference source is NetRef or ComRef (communication option card or
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications).
0 : Disable Multi-Step References
1 : Enable Multi-Step References
F6-08 Comm Parameter Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 824
(036A) @Initialize Sets the function to initialize F6-xx and F7-xx parameters when the drive is initialized (0, 1)
with A1-03 [Initialize Parameters].
0 : No Reset - Parameters Retained
1 : Reset Back to Factory Default
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 824
(03B6) Sets the node address for CC-Link communication. Restart the drive after you change (0 - 64)
the parameter setting.
Note:
Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not
set this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr [Station Address
Setting Error] errors and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
F6-11 CC-Link V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 824
(03B7) Communication Speed Sets the communication speed for CC-Link communication. Restart the drive after you (0 - 4)
change the parameter setting.
0 : 156 kbps
1 : 625 kbps
2 : 2.5 Mbps
3 : 5 Mbps
4 : 10 Mbps
F6-14 BUS Error Auto Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 824
(03BB) Sets the automatic reset function for bUS [Option Communication Errors]. (0, 1)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
F6-15 Comm. Option V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 825
(0B5B) Parameters Reload Sets the update method when you change F6-xx, F7-xx [Communication Options]. (0 - 2)
0 : Reload at Next Power Cycle
1 : Reload Now
2 : Cancel Reload Request
F6-16 Gateway Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 825
(0B8A) Sets the gateway mode operation and the number of connected slave drives. (0 to 4)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled: 1 Slave Drives
F6-20 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0021h 825
(036B) Station Address Sets the station address for MECHATROLINK communication. Restart the drive after (MECHATROLINK-II:
you change the parameter setting. 0020h - 003Fh,
Note: MECHATROLINK-III:
• The setting range changes if using MECHATROLINK-II or MECHATROLINK- 0003h - 00EFh)
III:
–MECHATROLINK-II (SI-T3) range: 20 - 3F
–MECHATROLINK-III (SI-ET3) range: 03 - EF
• Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses.
Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr [Station Address Setting Error] errors
and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
• When the station address is 20 or 3F, the drive detects AEr errors.

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-21 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 825
(036C) Frame Size Sets the frame size for MECHATROLINK communication. Restart the drive after you (0, 1)
0 : 32byte (M-2) / 64byte (M-3)
1 : 17byte (M-2) / 32byte (M-3)
F6-22 MECHATROLINK Link V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 825
(036D) Speed Sets the communications speed for MECHATROLINK-II. Restart the drive after you (0, 1)
Note:
This parameter is only available with the MECHATROLINK-II option.
0 : 10 Mbps
1 : 4 Mbps
(036E) Monitor Select (E) Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL (drive (0000h - FFFFh)
operation control command) and INV_I/O (drive I/O control command). Restart the
drive after you change the parameter setting.
(036F) Monitor Select (F) Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL (drive (0000h - FFFFh)
operation control command) and INV_I/O (drive I/O control command). Restart the
drive after you change the parameter setting.
(03C9) Watchdog Error Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive (0 - 3)
detects an E5 [MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err].
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
(03CA) Allowable No of Err Sets the number of times that the option must detect a bUS alarm to cause a bUS (2 - 10 times)
[Option Communication Error].
F6-30 PROFIBUS-DP Node V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 827
(03CB) Address Sets the node address for PROFIBUS-DP communication. Restart the drive after you (0 - 125)
Note:
Be sure to set an address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not set
this parameter to 0.
F6-31 PROFIBUS-DP Clear V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 827
(03CC) Mode Selection Sets what the drive will do after it receives the Clear Mode command. (0, 1)
0 : Reset
1 : Hold Previous State
F6-32 PROFIBUS-DP Data V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 827
(03CD) Format Select Sets the data format of PROFIBUS-DP communication. Restart the drive after you (0 - 5)
0 : PPO Type
1 : Conventional
2 : PPO (bit0)
3 : PPO (Enter)
4 : Conventional (Enter)
5 : PPO (bit0, Enter)
F6-35 CANopen Node ID V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 827
(03D0) Selection Sets the node address for CANopen communication. Restart the drive after you change (0 - 126)
Note:
this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr [Station Address
Setting Error] errors and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
F6-36 CANopen V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 827
(03D1) Communication Speed Sets the CANopen communications speed. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 8)
parameter setting.
0 : Auto-detection
1 : 10 kbps
2 : 20 kbps
Parameter List
3 : 50 kbps
4 : 125 kbps
5 : 250 kbps
6 : 500 kbps
7 : 800 kbps
8 : 1 Mbps
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-45 BACnet Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 828
(02FB) Sets the node address for BACnet communication. (0 - 127)
Note:
F6-46 BACnet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 828
(02FC) Sets the BACnet communications speed. (0 - 8)
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps
F6-47 Rx to Tx Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms 828
(02FD) Sets the wait time for the drive to receive and send BACnet communication. (5 - 65 ms)
F6-48 BACnet Device Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 828
(02FE) Identifier0 Sets the last word of BACnet communication addresses. (0 - FFFF)
F6-49 BACnet Device Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 828
(02FF) Identifier1 Sets the last word of BACnet communication addresses. (0 - 3F)
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 829
(03C1) Address Sets the MAC address for DeviceNet communication. Restart the drive after you change (0 - 64)
Note:
Be sure to set a MAC address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not
set this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr [Station Address
Setting Error] errors and the MS LED on the option will flash.
F6-51 DeviceNet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 829
(03C2) Sets the DeviceNet communications speed. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 4)
parameter setting.
0 : 125 kbps
1 : 250 kbps
2 : 500 kbps
3 : Adjustable from Network
4 : Detect Automatically
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 21 829
(03C3) Sets the format of data that the DeviceNet communication master sends to the drive. (0 - 255)
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 71 829
(03C4) Sets the format of data that the drive sends to the DeviceNet communication master. (0 - 255)
F6-54 DeviceNet Idle Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 829
(03C5) Detection If the drive does not receive data from the DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP master, this (0 - 4)
parameter sets the function to detect EF0 [Option Card External Fault].
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled, No Fault Detection
2 : Vendor Specific
3 : RUN Forward
4 : RUN Reverse
F6-55 DeviceNet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03C6) Monitor Sets the function to see the actual DeviceNet communications speed using the keypad. (0 - 2)
This parameter functions as a monitor only.
0 : 125 kbps
1 : 250 kbps
2 : 500 kbps
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03D7) Scaling Sets the speed scale for DeviceNet communication. (-15 - +15)
F6-57 DeviceNet Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03D8) Scaling Sets the current scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03D9) Scaling Sets the torque scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
F6-59 DeviceNet Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03DA) Scaling Sets the power scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03DB) Scaling Sets the voltage scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03DC) Sets the time scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 830
(03DD) Interval Sets the heartbeat for DeviceNet communication. Set this parameter to 0 to disable the (0 - 10)
heartbeat function.
F6-63 DeviceNet Network V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 831
(03DE) MAC ID Sets the function to see the actual DeviceNet MAC address using the keypad. This (0 - 63)
parameter functions as a monitor only.
F6-64 Dynamic Out Assembly V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000H 831
(03DF) 109 Param1 Sets Configurable Output 1 written to the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
(03E0) 109 Param2 Sets Configurable Output 2 written to the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
F6-68 Dynamic In Assembly V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000H 831
(03E3) 159 Param 1 Sets Configurable Input 1 read from the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
(03E4) 159 Param 2 Sets Configurable Input 2 read from the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
(03C7) 159 Param 3 Sets Configurable Input 3 read from the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
(03C8) 159 Param 4 Sets Configurable Input 4 read from the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
F6-72 PowerLink Node V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 831
(081B) Address Sets the node ID for PowerLink communication. (0 - 255)
Note:
◆ F7: Communication Options

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-01 IP Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 192 831
(03E5) Sets the first octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. (0 - 255)
Restart the drive after you change this parameter.
Note:
When F7-13 = 0 [Address Mode at Startup = Static]:
• Use parameters F7-01 to F7-04 [IP Address 1 to 4] to set the IP Address. Be sure
to set a different IP address for each drive on the network.
• Also set parameters F7-05 to F7-12 [Subnet Mask 1 to 4, Gateway Address 1 to
4].
(03E6) Sets the second octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. (0 - 255)
Note:
4].
(03E7) Sets the third octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. (0 - 255)
Note:
Parameter List

4].
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(03E8) Sets the fourth octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. (0 - 255)
Note:
4].
F7-05 Subnet Mask 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 255 832
(03E9) Sets the first octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
Set this parameter when F7-13 = 0 [Address Mode at Startup = Static].
(03EA) Sets the second octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
(03EB) Sets the third octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
(03EC) Sets the fourth octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
F7-09 Gateway Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 192 832
(03ED) Sets the first octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
(03EE) Sets the second octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
(03EF) Sets the third octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
(03F0) Sets the fourth octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
F7-13 Address Mode at Startup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2 833
(03F1) Sets the method to set option card IP addresses. (0 - 2)
0 : Static
1 : BOOTP
2 : DHCP
Note:
• The following setting values are available when using the PROFINET
communication option card (SI-EP3).
–0: Static
–2: DHCP
• When F7-13 = 0, set parameters F7-01 to F7-12 [IP Address 1 to Gateway
Address 4] to set the IP Address. Be sure to set a different IP address for each
drive on the network.
F7-14 Duplex Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 833
(03F2) Sets the duplex mode setting method. (0 - 8)
0 : Half/Half
1 : Auto/Auto
2 : Full/Full
3 : Half/Auto
4 : Half/Full
5 : Auto/Half
6 : Auto/Full
7 : Full/Half
8 : Full/Auto

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-15 Communication Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 834
(03F3) Selection Sets the communications speed. (10, 100 - 102)
10 : 10/10 Mbps
100 : 100/100 Mbps
101 : 10/100 Mbps
102 : 100/10 Mbps
F7-16 Timeout Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 834
(03F4) Sets the detection time for a communications timeout. (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Note:
Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the connection timeout function.
F7-17 EtherNet/IP Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 834
(03F5) Scaling Factor Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
F7-18 EtherNet/IP Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 834
(03F6) Scale Factor Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH (-15 - +15)
Object.
F7-19 EtherNet/IP Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 834
(03F7) Scale Factor Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
F7-20 EtherNet/IP Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 834
(03F8) Scaling Factor Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
F7-21 EtherNet/IP Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 834
(03F9) Scale Factor Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
F7-22 EtherNet/IP Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(03FA) Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
F7-23 Dynamic Out Param 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(03FB) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the
values from Output Assembly 116 to the MEMOBUS/Modbus address register that is
stored for each parameter. The drive will not write the values from Output Assembly
116 to the registers when the MEMOBUS/Modbus address is 0. When you use a
PROFINET option, set this parameter to set to configurable output 1.
(03FC) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the
(03FD) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the
(03FE) for CommCard Sets Output Assembly 116 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive writes the
ProfiNet option, set this parameter to set to configurable output 4.
(03FF) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the
(0370) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the
116 to the registers when the MEMOBUS/Modbus address is 0.
Parameter List
11

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-33 Dynamic In Param 1 for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(0375) CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
values from the MEMOBUS/Modbus address registers stored for each parameter to
Input Assembly 166. The drive returns the default register value for the option card
when the MEMOBUS/Modbus address is 0 and the value sent to Input Assembly 166 is
not defined. When you use a ProfiNet option, set this parameter to set to configurable
input 1.
input 2.
input 3.
input 4.
input 5.
(037A) CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
not defined.
(037B) CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
not defined.
(037C) CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
not defined.
(037D) CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
not defined.
F7-42 Dynamic In Param 10 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(037E) for CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet/IP option. The drive sends the
not defined.
F7-60 PZD1 Write (Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(0780) Word) When you use a Profibus option, set the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD1 (PPO
output). PZD1 (PPO output) functions as the STW when F7-60 = 0 to 2.
F7-61 PZD2 Write (Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(0781) Reference) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD2 (PPO
output). PZD2 (PPO output) functions as the HSW when F7-61 = 0 to 2.
F7-62 PZD3 Write V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 835
(0782) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD3 (PPO
output). A value of 0, 1, or 2 will disable the PZD3 (PPO output) write operation to the
MEMOBUS/Modbus register.

11.9 F: Options
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(0789) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD10
(PPO output). A value of 0, 1, or 2 will disable the PZD10 (PPO output) write operation
to the MEMOBUS/Modbus register.
F7-70 PZD1 Read (Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 836
(078A) Word) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD1 (PPO
input). PZD1 (PPO input) functions as the ZSW when F7-70 = 0.
F7-71 PZD2 Read (Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 836
(078B) Frequency) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD2 (PPO
input). PZD2 (PPO input) functions as the HIW when F7-71 = 0.
F7-72 PZD3 Read V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 836
(078C) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD3 (PPO
input). A value of 0 will disable the PZD3 (PPO input) load operation from the
(078D) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD4 (PPO
(078E) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD5 (PPO
(078F) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD6 (PPO
Parameter List
(0793) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD10
(PPO input). A value of 0 will disable the PZD10 (PPO input) load operation from the
11

11.10 H: Terminal Functions

◆ H1: Digital Inputs
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H1-01 Terminal S1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 839
(0438) Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S1. (1 - 1FF)
Note:
The default setting is F when you initialize the drive for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-
03 = 3330].
Note:
The default setting is F when you initialize the drive for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-
03 = 3330].
Note:
The default setting is 0 when the drive is initialized for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-03
= 3330].
Note:
= 3330].
Note:
= 3330].
H1-21 Terminal S1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 840
(0B70) Selection 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S1. (1 - 19F)
(0B71) Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S2. (1 - 19F)
H1-40 Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 841
(0B54) Input Func Sets MFDI function to set to bit 0 of the MEMOBUS register 15C0 (Hex.). (1 - 19F)

■ H1-xx: Multi-Function Digital Input Setting Values

Setting Value Function Description Ref.
0 3-Wire Sequence V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 842
Sets the direction of motor rotation for 3-wire sequence.
1 LOCAL/REMOTE V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 843
Selection Sets drive control for the keypad (LOCAL) or an external source (REMOTE).
ON : LOCAL
OFF : REMOTE
2 External Reference 1/2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 843
Selection Sets the drive to use Run command source 1/2 or Reference command source 1/2 when in REMOTE Mode.
ON : b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2], b1-16 [Run Command Selection 2]
OFF : b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1], b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1]
3 Multi-Step Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 843
Reference 1 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-16 to set a multi-step speed reference.
6 Jog Reference Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 844
Sets the drive to use the JOG Frequency Reference (JOG command) set in d1-17. The JOG Frequency Reference
(JOG command) overrides Frequency References 1 to 16 (d1-01 to d1-16).
7 Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 844
Selection 1 Sets the drive to use C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] and C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] or C1-03 [Acceleration Time
2] and C1-04 [Deceleration Time 2].
8 Baseblock Command (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 844
O.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input is ON.
ON : Baseblock (drive output stop)
OFF : Normal operation
9 Baseblock Command (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 844
C.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input terminal is OFF.
ON : Normal operation
OFF : Baseblock (drive output stop)
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
Momentarily pauses motor acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON, retains the output
frequency that was stored in the drive at the time of the pause, and restarts motor operation.
B Overheat Alarm (oH2) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
Sets the drive to show an oH2 [External Overheat (H1-XX=B)] alarm when the input terminal is ON. The alarm
does not have an effect on drive operation.
C Analog Terminal Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
Selection Sets the command that enables or disables the terminals selected in H3-14 [Analog Input Terminal Enable Sel].
ON : Terminal selected with H3-14 is enabled
OFF : Terminal selected with H3-14 is disabled
D Ignore Speed Fdbk (V/f V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
w/o Enc) Sets the command to disable speed feedback control and run the drive in V/f control or use speed feedback from
the encoder.
ON : Speed feedback control disable (V/f Control)
OFF : Speed feedback control enable (Closed Loop V/f Control)
E ASR Integral Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
Sets the command to reset the integral value and use PI control or P control for the speed control loop.
ON : P control
OFF : PI control
F Not Used V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 845
Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode.
10 Up Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 846
Sets the command to use a push button switch to increase the drive frequency reference. You must also set Setting
11 [Down Command].
ON : Increases the frequency reference.
Parameter List
OFF : Holds the current frequency reference.
11 Down Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 847
Sets the command to use a push button switch to decrease the drive frequency reference. You must also set Setting
10 [Up Command].
ON : Decreases the frequency reference.
V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
11
12 Forward Jog 848
Sets the command to operate the motor in the forward direction at the Jog Frequency set in d1-17 [Jog Reference].

13 Reverse Jog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 848
Sets the command to operate the motor in the reverse direction at the Jog Frequency set in d1-17 [Jog Reference].
14 Fault Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 848
Sets the command to reset the current fault when the Run command is inactive.
Note:
The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active. Remove the Run command
before trying to reset a fault.
15 Fast Stop (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 848
Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is
ON while the drive is operating.
16 Motor 2 Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 849
Sets the command for the drive to operate motor 1 or motor 2. Stop the motors before switching.
ON : Selects motor 2
OFF : Selects motor 1
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 849
Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is
ON while the drive is operating.
18 Timer Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 850
Sets the command to start the timer function. Use this setting with Timer Output [H2-xx = 12].
19 PID Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 850
Sets the command to disable PID control when b5-01 = 1 to 8 [PID Mode Setting = Enabled].
ON : PID control disabled
OFF : PID control enabled
1A Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 850
Selection 2 Set this function and H1-xx = 7 [Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] together. Sets the drive to use C1-05 [Acceleration
Time 3] and C1-06 [Deceleration Time 3] or C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] and C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4].
1B Programming Lockout V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 850
Sets the command to prevent parameter changes when the terminal is OFF.
ON : Programming Lockout
OFF : Parameter Write Prohibit
1E Reference Sample Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
Sets the command to sample the frequency reference at terminals A1, A2, or A3 and hold the frequency reference
at that frequency.
20 External Fault (NO- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
Always-Ramp) When the terminal activates, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal
MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the drive is
stopped or running.
21 External Fault (NC- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
Always-Ramp) When the terminal deactivates, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output terminal
stopped or running.
@Run-Ramp) When the terminal activates during run, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay output
terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while the
drive is stopped.
@Run-Ramp) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive ramps to stop in the selected deceleration time. Fault relay
output terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive does not detect external faults while
the drive is stopped.
Always-Coast) When the terminal activates, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal
stopped or running.
Always-Coast) When the terminal deactivates, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output
terminal MA-MC will turn ON, and MB-MC will turn OFF. The drive always detects external faults whether the
drive is stopped or running.
@Run-Coast) When the terminal activates during run, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay
@Run-Coast) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay
Always-FStop) When the terminal activates, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. Fault
relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives and running drives will detect
external faults.

Always-FStop) When the terminal deactivates, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop Time].
Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives and running drives will
detect external faults.
2A External Fault (NO- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
@Run-FStop) When the terminal activates during run, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast Stop
Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives will not detect
external faults.
2B External Fault (NC- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
@Run-FStop) When the terminal deactivates during run, the drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set to C1-09 [Fast
Stop Time]. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC turns OFF. Stopped drives will not detect
external faults.
2C External Fault (NO- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
Always-Alarm) When the terminal activates, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output terminal
set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives and running drives
will detect external faults.
2D External Fault (NC- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
Always-Alarm) When the terminal deactivates, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output terminal
set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives and running drives
will detect external faults.
2E External Fault (NO- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
@Run-Alarm) When the terminal activates during run, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the output
terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives will not
detect external faults.
2F External Fault (NC- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 851
@Run-Alarm) When the terminal deactivates during run, the keypad shows EFx [External Fault (Input Terminal Sx)] and the
output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. The drive continues operation. Stopped drives will
not detect external faults.
30 PID Integrator Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 852
Sets the command to reset and hold the PID control integral to 0 when the terminal is ON.
31 PID Integrator Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 852
Sets the command to hold the integral value of the PID control while the terminal is activated.
34 PID Soft Starter Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 852
Sets the PID soft starter function.
ON : Disable
OFF : Enabled
35 PID Input (Error) Invert V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 853
Sets the command to turn the terminal ON and OFF to switch the PID input level (polarity).
3E PID Setpoint Selection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 853
Set this function and H1-xx = 3F [PID Setpoint Selection 2] together. Sets the function to switch the PID setpoint
to b5-58 to b5-60 [PID Setpoint 2 to 4].
3F PID Setpoint Selection 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 853
Set this function and H1-xx = 3E [PID Setpoint Selection 1] at the same time. Sets the function to switch the PID
setpoint to b5-58 to b5-60 [PID Setpoint 2 to 4].
40 Forward RUN (2-Wire) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 853
Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 41 [Reverse RUN (2-Wire)]
together.
ON : Forward Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an
EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Forward Run command to terminal S1.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2),
FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)].
41 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 853
Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 40 [Forward RUN (2-Wire)]
together.
ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Stop
Parameter List
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an
EF [FWD/REV Run Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Reverse Run command to terminal S2.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2),
FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)].
11

42 Run Command (2-Wire V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 854
Sequence 2) Sets the Run command for 2-wire sequence 2. Set this function and H1-xx = 43 [FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)]
together.
ON : Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 40, 41 [Forward RUN (2-Wire), Reverse RUN (2-
Wire)].
43 FWD/REV (2-Wire V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 854
Sequence 2) Sets the direction of motor rotation for 2-wire sequence 2. Set this function and H1-xx = 42 [Run Command (2-
Wire Sequence 2)] together.
ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Forward Run
Note:
• You must input the Run command to rotate the motor.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 40, 41 [Forward RUN (2-Wire), Reverse RUN (2-
Wire)].
44 Add Offset Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 854
(d7-01) Sets the function to add the offset frequency set in d7-01 [Offset Frequency 1] to the frequency reference when the
terminal activates.
terminal activates.
terminal activates.
47 Node Setup (CANopen) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 854
Sets the function in CANopen communications to start the Node Setup function to set the drive node address from
the host controller.
60 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 855
Command Sets the command to use DC Injection Braking to stop the motor.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this function is available with a PM motor.
61 Speed Search from Fmax V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 855
Sets the function to use an external reference to start speed search although b3-01 = 0 [Speed Search Selection at
Start = Disabled] to not allow speed search at start.
Note:
The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] when H1-xx = 61 [Speed Search from Fmax]
and H1-xx = 62 [Speed Search from Fref] are set at the same time.
62 Speed Search from Fref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 855
Note:
The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] when H1-xx = 61 [Speed Search from Fmax]
and H1-xx = 62 [Speed Search from Fref] are set at the same time.
63 Field Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 855
Sets the function to send the Field Weakening Level and Field Weakening Frequency Limit commands set in d6-01
[Field Weakening Level] and d6-02 [Field Weakening Frequency Limit] when the input terminal is activated.
65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 855
Activate (N.C.) Sets operation of the KEB1 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.).
OFF : Deceleration during momentary power loss
66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 856
Activate (N.O.) Sets operation of the KEB1 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.).
ON : Deceleration during momentary power loss
67 Communications Test V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 856
Mode Set the function for the drive to self-test RS-485 serial communications operation.
68 High Slip Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 856
(HSB) Activate Sets the command to use high-slip braking to stop the motor.
6A Drive Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 856
Sets the function to show dnE [Drive Disabled] on the keypad and ignore Run commands when the terminal is
OFF.
71 Torque Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 856
Sets the function to switch between torque control and speed control.
ON : Torque control
OFF : Speed control
72 Zero Servo V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 857
Sets the function to hold a stopped motor.

75 Up 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 857
Sets the function to increase the frequency reference bias value to accelerate the motor when the terminal is
activated. Set this function and H1-xx = 76 [Down 2 Command] together.
Note:
When you use this function, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper
Limit/Lower Limit].
76 Down 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 858
Sets the function to decrease the frequency reference bias value to decelerate the motor when the terminal is
activated. Set this function and H1-xx = 75 [Up 2 Command] together.
Note:
When you use this function, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper
Limit/Lower Limit].
77 ASR Gain (C5-03) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 859
Select Sets the function to switch the ASR proportional gain to C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] or C5-03 [ASR
Proportional Gain 2].
ON : C5-03
OFF : C5-01
78 Analog TorqueRef V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 859
Polarity Invert Sets the rotation direction of the external torque reference.
ON : External torque reference reverse direction
OFF : External torque reference forward direction
7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 859
Activate (N.C.) Sets operation of the KEB2 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.).
7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 859
Activate (N.O.) Sets operation of the KEB2 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.).
7C Short Circuit Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 859
(N.O.) Sets operation of Short Circuit Braking (N.O.).
ON : Short Circuit Braking is enabled.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this function is available only when you use a PM
motor.
7D Short Circuit Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 860
(N.C.) Sets operation of Short Circuit Braking (N.C.).
OFF : Short Circuit Braking is enabled.
Note:
motor.
7E Reverse Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 860
Identifier Sets the rotation direction of the motor when in Simple Closed Loop V/f Control method and F1-21, F1-37 = 0
[Encoder Option Function Selection = A pulse detection], or when in Closed Loop V/f Control method.
ON : Reverse run
OFF : Forward run
7F PID Bi-Directional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 860
Enable Sets operation of the PID Bi-Directional function.
ON : Enabled
OFF : Disabled
90 DWEZ Digital Input 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 860
Sets the DriveWorksEZ digital input 1. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
Parameter List
11

9F DWEZ Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 860
Sets operation of the DriveWorksEZ program saved in the drive.
ON : Disabled
OFF : Enabled
Note:
Set A1-07 = 2 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection = Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input] to use this function.
101 !LOCAL/REMOTE V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
ON : REMOTE
OFF : LOCAL
102 !External Reference 1/2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
ON : b1-01 = [Frequency Reference Selection 1], b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1]
OFF : b1-15 = [Frequency Reference Selection 2], b1-16 [Run Command Selection 2]
103 !Multi-Step Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Reference 1 Uses a combination of multi-step speed references 1, 2 and 3 (N.C.) to set d1-01 to d1-08 [Multi-Step Speed
Reference].
Reference].
Reference].
106 !Jog Reference Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the drive to use the JOG Frequency Reference (JOG command) set in d1-17 [Jog Reference]. The JOG
Frequency Reference (JOG command) overrides the d1-01 to d1-16 [References 1 to 16].
107 !Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Selection 1 Sets the drive to use C1-01, C1-02 [Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1] or C1-03, C1-04 [Acceleration/
Deceleration Time 2].
10 A !Accel/Decel Ramp Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Momentarily pauses motor acceleration and deceleration when the terminal deactivates, retains the output
frequency that was stored in the drive at the time of the pause, and restarts motor operation.
10B !Overheat Alarm (oH2) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the drive to display an oH2 [Drive Overheat Warning] alarm when the input terminal deactivates. The alarm
does not have an effect on drive operation.
10C !Analog Terminal Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Selection Enables and disables the terminal selected with the H3-14 [Analog Input Term Enable Select] function.
ON : Input to the terminal selected with H3-14 is disabled
OFF : Input to the terminal selected with H3-14 is enabled
10D !Ignore Speed Fdbk (V/f V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
w/o Enc) When the terminal deactivates, the drive ignores the feedback control from the encoder and operates in V/f control.
When the terminal activates, the drive uses the feedback from the encoder to control the motor speed again.
ON : Speed feedback control enable (Closed Loop V/f Control)
OFF : Speed feedback control disable (V/f Control)
10E !ASR Integral Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
ON : PI control
OFF : P control
110 !Up Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Set this function and 111 [! Down Command] together. Sets the Up command and Down command to use the two
push button switches to increase and decrease the drive frequency reference.
ON : Holds the current frequency reference.
OFF : Increases the frequency reference.
111 !Down Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Set this function and 110 [!Up Command] together. Sets the Up command and Down command to use the two push
button switches to increase and decrease the drive frequency reference.
ON : Holds the current frequency reference.
OFF : Decreases the frequency reference.
114 !Fault Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to reset the current fault when the Run command is not active.
Note:
The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active. Remove the Run command
before you try to reset a fault.

116 !Motor 2 Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Switches between motor 1 or motor 2. Switch the motor while the motor is stopped.
118 !Timer Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to start the timer function. Use this setting with H2-xx = 112 [!Timer Output].
119 !PID Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to disable PID control with an external input when b5-01 = 1 to 8 [PID Function Setting =
Enabled].
ON : PID control enabled
OFF : PID control disabled
11 A !Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Selection 2 Set this function and H1-xx = 107 [!Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] together. Sets the drive to use C1-01 to C1-08
[Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 to 4].
11B !Programming Lockout V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to prevent parameter changes when the terminal is OFF. You can continue to view parameter
setting values when the terminal is ON [Parameter Write Prohibit].
ON : Parameter Write Prohibit
OFF : Programming Lockout
11E !Reference Sample Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Samples the analog frequency reference input to the terminals A1, A2, or A3, and continues operation at the
sampled frequency.
130 !PID Integrator Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to reset and hold the PID control integral to 0 when the terminal deactivates.
131 !PID Integrator Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the command to hold the integral value of the PID control while the terminal deactivates.
Reference 4 Uses a combination of multi-step speed references 1, 2 and 3 (N.C.) to switch d1-09 to d1-16 [Reference 9 to 16].
134 !PID Soft Starter Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
ON : Enabled
OFF : Disable
135 !PID Input (Error) Invert V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
13E !PID Setpoint Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
1 Set this function and H1-xx = 13F [!PID Setpoint Selection 2] together. Sets the function to use the PID setpoint
set in b5-58 to b5-60 [PID setpoint2 to 4].
13F !PID Setpoint Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
2 Set this function and H1-xx = 13E [!PID Setpoint Selection 1] together. Sets the function to use the PID setpoint
set in b5-58 to b5-60 [PID setpoint2 to 4].
144 !Add Offset Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
(d7-01) Sets the function to add the offset frequency set in d7-01 to the frequency reference when the terminal deactivates.
(d7-02) Sets the function to add the offset frequency set in d7-02 to the frequency reference when the terminal deactivates.
(d7-03) Sets the function to add the offset frequency set ind7-03 to the frequency reference when the terminal deactivates.
147 !Node Setup (CANopen) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the function in CANopen communications to start the Node Setup function to set the drive node address from
the host controller.
160 !DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZ Vector Control], this function is available if you use a PM
motor.
161 !Speed Search from V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Fmax Sets the function to use an external reference to start speed search although b3-01 = 0 [Speed Search Selection at
Parameter List
Note:
The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] when H1-xx = 161 [!Speed Search from
Fmax] and H1-xx = 162 [!Speed Search from Fref] are set at the same time.
162 !Speed Search from Fref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Note: 11
The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] when H1-xx = 161 [!Speed Search from
Fmax] and H1-xx = 162 [!Speed Search from Fref] are set at the same time.

163 !Field Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the function to send the Field Weakening Level and Field Weakening Frequency Limit commands set in d6-01
and d6-02 when the input terminal deactivates.
167 !Communications Test V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Mode Set the function for the drive to self-test RS-485 serial communications operation.
168 !High Slip Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
(HSB) Activate Sets the command to use high-slip braking to stop the motor.
16 A !Drive Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Sets the function to show dnE [Drive Enabled] on the keypad and ignore Run commands when the terminal
activates.
171 !Torque Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Switches between the speed control and the torque control.
ON : Speed Control
OFF : Torque Control
172 !Zero Servo V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Holds a stopped motor.
175 !Up 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
When the terminal deactivates, the motor accelerates by increasing the frequency reference bias value. Set !Up 2
Command and !Down 2 Command together.
Note:
When you use the functions, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper
Limit/Lower Limit (Up/Down 2)].
176 !Down 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
When the terminal deactivates, the motor decelerates by decreasing the frequency reference bias value. Set !Up 2
Command and !Down 2 Command together.
Note:
When you use the functions, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper
Limit/Lower Limit (Up/Down 2)].
177 !ASR Gain (C5-03) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Select Sets the function to switch the ASR proportional gain to C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] or C5-03 [ASR
Proportional Gain 2].
ON : C5-01
OFF : C5-03
178 !Analog TorqueRef V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Polarity Invert Switches the rotation direction of the external torque reference.
ON : External torque reference forward direction
OFF : External torque reference reverse direction
17E !Reverse Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Identifier Lets you set the rotation direction of the motor when F1-21, F1-37 = 0 [Encoder Option Function Selection = A
pulse detection] for Simple Closed Loop V/f Control method and Closed Loop V/f Control method.
ON : Forward run
OFF : Reverse run
17F !PID Bi-Directional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Enable Switches the PID Bi-Directional output to enable or disable.
ON : Disable
OFF : Enabled
19F !DWEZ Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 861
Switches the DriveWorksEZ program saved in the drive to enable or disable.
ON : Enabled
OFF : Disable
Note:
Set A1-07 = 2 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection = Digital input] to use this function.
◆ H2: Multi-function Digital Output

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-01 Term M1-M2 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 863
(040B) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M1-M2. (0 - 1FF)
Note:
When you do not use the terminal or when you use the terminal in through mode,
set this parameter to F.
(040C) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M3-M4. (0 - 1FF)
Note:

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(040D) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M5-M6. (0 - 1FF)
Note:
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 863
(0437) Selection Sets the unit for the output signal when H2-01 to H2-03 = 39 [MFDO Function (0 - 4)
Selection = Watt Hour Pulse Output].
0 : 0.1 kWh units
1 : 1 kWh units
2 : 10 kWh units
3 : 100 kWh units
4 : 1000 kWh units
H2-07 Modbus Register 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0001 864
(0B3A) Address Select Sets the address of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0001 - 1FFF)
H2-08 Modbus Register 1 Bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000 864
(0B3B) Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0000 - FFFF)
H2-09 Modbus Register 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0001 864
(0B3C) Address Select Sets the address of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0001 - 1FFF)
H2-10 Modbus Register 2 Bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000 864
(0B3D) Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0000 - FFFF)
H2-20 Comparator 1 Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 865
(1540) Selection Sets the monitor number (Ux-xx) for comparator 1. (000 - 9999)
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H2-20 = 102 to monitor
decimal number. For example, set H2-20 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
H2-21 Comparator 1 Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 865
(1541) Limit Sets the lower limit detection level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output (0.0 - 300.0%)
for the monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is the 100% value.
H2-22 Comparator 1 Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 865
(1542) Limit Sets the upper limit detection level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output (0.0 - 300.0%)
for the monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is the 100% value.
H2-23 Comparator 1 Hysteresis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 865
(1543) Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 1 as a percentage of the full scale analog output (0.0 - 10.0%)
for the monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection].
H2-24 Comparator 1 On-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 865
(1544) Time Sets the on-delay time for comparator 1. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
H2-25 Comparator 1 Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 865
(1545) Time Sets the off-delay time for comparator 1. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
H2-26 Comparator 2 Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103 866
Note:
decimal number. For example, set H2-26 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
H2-27 Comparator 2 Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 866
(1547) Limit Sets the lower limit detection level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale (0.0 - 300.0%)
analog output for the monitor selected in H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection].
H2-28 Comparator 2 Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 866
(1548) Limit Sets the upper limit detection level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale (0.0 - 300.0%)
analog output for the monitor selected in H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection].
H2-29 Comparator 2 Hysteresis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 866
(1549) Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale analog output (0.0 - 10.0%)
H2-30 Comparator 2 On-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 866
Parameter List
(154A) Time Sets the on-delay time for comparator 2. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
H2-31 Comparator 2 Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 866
(154B) Time Sets the off-delay time for comparator 2. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
H2-32 Comparator 1 Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0s 867
(159A) Time Sets the time constant that is applied to the primary delay filter used for the analog (0.0 - 10.0 s)
output of the monitor selected with H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection]. 11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-33 Comparator1 Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 867
(159B) Selection Sets drive operation when it detects CP1 [Comparator1 Limit Fault]. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
4 : Digital Output Only
H2-34 Comparator 2 Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0s 867
(159C) Time Sets the time constant that is applied to the primary delay filter used for the analog (0.0 - 10.0 s)
output of the monitor selected with H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection].
H2-35 Comparator2 Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 867
(159D) Selection Sets drive operation when it detects CP2 [Comparator2 Limit Fault]. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
H2-36 Comparator 1 Ineffective V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 868
(159E) Time Sets the length of time that CP1 [Comparator1 Limit Fault] is disabled. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
H2-37 Comparator 2 Ineffective V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 868
(159F) Time Sets the length of time that CP2 [Comparator2 Limit Fault] is disabled. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
H2-40 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 868
(0B58) Output Func Sets the MFDO for bit 0 of MEMOBUS register 15E0 (Hex.). (0 - 1FF)
(0B5A) Output Func Sets the MFDO for bit 2 of MEMOBUS register 15E0 (Hex.). (0 - 1FF)
H2-60 Term M1-M2 Secondary V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 868
(1B46) Function Sets the second function for terminal M1-M2. Outputs the logical calculation results of (0 - FF)
Expert the terminals assigned to functions by H2-01 [Term M1-M2 Function Selection].
H2-61 Terminal M1-M2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 868
(1B47) Logical Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-01 [Term M1-M2 Function (0 - 8)
Expert Selection] and H2-60 [Term M1-M2 Secondary Function].
H2-62 Terminal M1-M2 Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s 869
(1B48) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert M1-M2.
(1B49) Function Sets the second function for terminal M3-M4. Outputs the logical calculation results of (0 - FF)
Expert the terminals assigned to functions by H2-02 [Term M3-M4 Function Selection].
(1B4A) Logical Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-02 [Term M3-M4 Function (0 - 8)
(1B4B) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert M3-M4.
(1B4C) Function Sets the second function for terminal M5-M6. Outputs the logical calculation results of (0 - FF)
Expert the terminals assigned to functions by H2-03 [Terminal M5-M6 Function Select].
(1B4D) Logical Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-03 [Term M5-M6 Function (0 - 8)
(1B4E) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert M5-M6.

■ H2-xx: MFDO Setting Values

0 During Run V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 870
The terminal activates when you input a Run command and when the drive is outputting voltage.
ON : Drive is running
OFF : Drive is stopping
1 Zero Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 870
The terminal activates when the output frequency < E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] or b2-01 [DC Injection/
Zero SpeedThreshold].
Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the reference.
A1-02 Setting Control method selection Parameter Used as the Reference
0 V/f E1-09
1 CL-V/f E1-09
2 OLV b2-01
3 CLV E1-09
4 AOLV E1-09
5 OLV/PM E1-09
6 AOLV/PM E1-09
7 CLV/PM b2-01
8 EZOLV E1-09
ON : Output frequency < value of E1-09 or b2-01.

OFF : Output frequency ≥ value of E1-09 or b2-01.
2 Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 870
The terminal turns on when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02 [Speed Agree
Detection Width].
Note:
• The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions.
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [CLV, CLV/PM]. It also outputs the motor speed
status when A1-02 = 4 and n4-72 = 1.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-02”.
OFF : The output frequency does not align with the frequency reference although the drive is running.
3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 871
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] ± L4-02
[Speed Agree Detection Width] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02.
Note:
• The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the
forward/reverse detection level.
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [CLV, CLV/PM]. It also outputs the motor speed
status when A1-02 = 4 and n4-72 = 1.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” and the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” or the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.
4 Frequency Detection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 871
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency > “L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] + L4-02 [Speed
Agree Detection Width]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency is
at the value of L4-01.
Note:
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. It
also outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With
Encoder].
ON : The output frequency < L4-01, or the output frequency ≤ “L4-01 + L4-02”
OFF : The output frequency > “L4-01 + L4-02”
The terminal activates when the output frequency > L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level]. After the terminal
activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of “L4-01 - L4-02”.
Note:
Parameter List
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. It
also outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With
Encoder].
ON : The output frequency > L4-01
OFF : The output frequency < “L4-01 - L4-02”, or the output frequency ≤ L4-01
6 Drive Ready V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 872
The terminal activates when the drive is ready and running. 11

7 DC Bus Undervoltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
The terminal activates when the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply is at the voltage set in L2-05
[Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] or less. The terminal also activates when there is a fault with the DC bus
voltage.
ON : The DC bus voltage ≤ L2-05
OFF : The DC bus voltage > L2-05
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
The terminal activates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching
and does not make DC bus voltage.
ON : During baseblock
OFF : The drive is not in baseblock.
9 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
from Keypad Shows the selected frequency reference source.
ON : The keypad is the frequency reference source.
OFF : Parameter b1-01 or b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 or 2] is the frequency reference source.
A Run Command Source V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
Shows the selected Run command source.
ON : The keypad is the Run command source.
OFF : Parameter b1-02 or b1-16 [Run Command Selection 1 or 2] is the Run command source.
B Torque Detection 1 (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
O.) The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
ON : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque < L6-02 for
longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].
C Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 873
Loss The terminal activates when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference.
D Braking Resistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
The terminal activates when the mounting-type braking resistor is overheating or when there is a braking transistor
fault.
E Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
The terminal activates when the drive detects a fault.
Note:
The terminal will not activate for CPF00 and CPF01 [Control Circuit Error] faults.
Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode. Also use this setting as the PLC contact
output via MEMOBUS/Modbus or the communication option. This signal does not function if you do not
configure signals from the PLC.
10 Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
The terminal activates when the drive detects a minor fault.
11 Fault Reset Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
Active The terminal activates when the drive receives the Reset command from the control circuit terminal, serial
communications, or the communication option.
12 Timer Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
Sets the terminal as the timer output. Use this setting with the timer input set in H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function
Selection = Timer Function].
13 Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 874
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04 [Speed Agree
Detection Width (+/-)].
Note:
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM].
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 875
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level (+/-)] ±
L4-04 [Speed Agree Detection Width (+/-)] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04.
Note:
• The detection level set in L4-03 is a signed value. The drive will only detect in one direction.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” and the range of frequency reference ± L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” or the range of frequency reference ± L4-04.
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency > “L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] + L4-04 [Speed
Agree Detection Width(+/-)]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output
frequency is at the value of L4-03.
Note:
ON : The output frequency < L4-03, or the output frequency ≤ “L4-03 + L4-04”
OFF : The output frequency > “L4-03 + L4-04”

The terminal activates when the output frequency > L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)]. After the terminal
activates, the terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of “L4-03 - L4-04”.
Note:
ON : The output frequency > L4-03
OFF : The output frequency < “L4-03 - L4-04”, or the output frequency ≤ L4-03
17 Torque Detection 1 (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 876
C.) The terminal deactivates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
OFF : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque < L6-02 for
ON : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque < L6-05 for
OFF : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque < L6-05 for
1A During Reverse V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 877
The terminal activates when the motor operates in the reverse direction.
ON : The motor is operating in the reverse direction.
OFF : The motor is operating in the forward direction or the motor stopped.
1B During Baseblock (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 877
The terminal deactivates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops
switching and does not make DC bus voltage.
ON : The drive is not in baseblock.
OFF : During baseblock
1C Motor 2 Selected V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 877
The terminal activates when you select motor 2.
ON : Motor 2 Selected
OFF : Motor 1 Selected
1D During Regeneration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 877
The terminal activates on when the motor is regenerating.
ON : Motor is regenerating.
OFF : Motor is operating or stopped.
1E Executing Auto-Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
The terminal activates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault.
1F Motor Overload Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
(oL1) The terminal activates when the electronic thermal protection value of the motor overload protective function is a
minimum of 90% of the detection level.
20 Drive Overheat Pre- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
Alarm (oH) The terminal activates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].
21 Safety Monitor Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
Status The terminal activates (safety stop state) when the safety circuit and safety diagnosis circuit are operating correctly
and when terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open).
ON : Safety stop state
OFF : Safety circuit fault or RUN/READY
22 Mechanical Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
Detection The terminal activates when the drive detects mechanical weakening.
2F Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 878
Notification The terminal activates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period.
Tells you about the maintenance period for these items:
• IGBT
• Cooling Fan
• Capacitor
30 During Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 879
Parameter List
The terminal activates when the torque reference is the torque limit set with L7 parameters, H3-02, H3-06, or H3-
10 [MFAI Function Selection].
31 During Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 879
The terminal activates when the speed limit is active.
32 In Speed Limit During V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 879
Trq Ctrl The motor accelerates in the forward direction or the reverse direction after enabling torque control and the 11
externally input torque reference is disproportionate to the load. The output terminal activates when this speed is
not higher than a constant speed and the motor speed is at the speed limit. This does not include operation when the
drive is stopped.

33 Zero Servo Complete V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 879
The terminal activates when positioning in the range set with b9-02 [Zero Servo Completion Window] completes
after sending the Zero-Servo command.
37 During Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 879
Output The terminal activates when the drive outputs frequency.
ON : The drive is outputting frequency.
OFF : The drive is not outputting frequency.
38 Drive Enabled V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 880
This terminal activates when the H1-xx = 6A [Drive Enable] terminal activates.
39 Watt Hour Pulse Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 880
Outputs the pulse that shows the watt hours.
3C LOCAL Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 880
Selected The terminal activates when the Run command source or frequency reference source is LOCAL.
ON : LOCAL
OFF : REMOTE
3D During Speed Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 880
The terminal activates when the drive is doing speed search.
3E PID Feedback Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 880
The terminal activates when the drive detects FbL [PID Feedback Loss].
3F PID Feedback High V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
The terminal activates when the drive detects FbH [Excessive PID Feedback].
4A During KEB Ride-Thru V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
The activates during KEB Ride-Thru.
4B During Short Circuit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
Braking The terminal activates during Short Circuit Braking.
Note:
motor.
4C During Fast Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
The terminal activates when the fast stop is in operation.
4D oH Pre-Alarm Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
Limit The terminal activates when L8-03 = 4 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection = Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)] and
oH [Heatsink Overheat] does not clear after the drive decreases the frequency for 10 cycles.
4E Braking Transistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
(rr) The terminal activates when the internal braking transistor overheats and the drive detects an rr [Dynamic Braking
Transistor Fault] fault.
4F Braking Resistor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
Overheat (rH) The terminal activates when the braking resistor overheats and the drive detects an rH [Braking Resistor Overheat]
fault.
60 Internal Cooling Fan V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 881
Failure The terminal activates when the drive detects a cooling fan failure in the drive.
61 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 882
Complete The terminal activates when drive receives a Run command and the drive detects the motor magnetic pole position
of the PM motor.
62 Modbus Reg 1 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 882
Satisfied The terminal activates when the bit specified by H2-08 [Modbus Register 1 Bit Select] for the MEMOBUS register
address set with H2-07 [Modbus Register 1 Address Select] activates.
63 Modbus Reg 2 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 882
Satisfied The terminal activates when the bit specified by H2-10 [Modbus Register 2 Bit Select] for the MEMOBUS register
address set with H2-09 [Modbus Register 2 Address Select] activates.
65 Standby Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 882
The terminal deactivates after the drive stops operating and after the time set with b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait
Time].
ON : The Run command turns on and the magnetic contactor on the input side turns on.
OFF : The Run command turns off and the drive stops operating. Then, the magnetic contactor on the input side
turns off after the time set in b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait Time]elapses.
66 Comparator1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 882
The terminal activates if the monitor value set with H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is in range of the
values of H2-21 [Comparator 1 Lower Limit] and H2-22 [Comparator 1 Upper Limit] for the time set in H2-24
[Comparator 1 On-Delay Time].
67 Comparator2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 883
The terminal activates if the monitor value set with H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection] is not in the range of
the values of H2-27 [Comparator 2 Lower Limit] and H2-28 [Comparator 2 Upper Limit] for the time set in H2-
30 [Comparator 2 On-Delay Time].

69 External Power 24V V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 883
Supply The terminal activates when there is an external 24V power supply between terminals PS-AC.
ON : The external 24V power supply is supplying power.
OFF : The external 24V power supply is not supplying power.
6A Data Logger Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 883
The terminal activates when the drive detects a LoG [Com Error / Abnormal SD card].
90 DWEZ Digital Output 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Sets the DriveWorksEZ digital output 1. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
A0 DWEZ Extended Digital V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Output 1 Sets the DriveWorksEZ digital output 1. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
100 !During Run V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when you input a Run command and when the drive is outputting voltage.
ON : Drive is stopping
OFF : Drive is running
101 !Zero Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is less than E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] or b2-01 [DC
Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold].
Note:
A1-02 Setting Description Parameter Used as the Reference
0 Open Loop V/f Control E1-09
1 V/f Control with Encoder E1-09
2 Open Loop Vector b2-01
3 Closed Loop Vector E1-09
4 Advanced OpenLoop Vector Control E1-09
5 PM Open Loop Vector Control E1-09
6 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector E1-09
7 PM Closed Loop Vector Control b2-01
8 EZ Open Loop Vector Control E1-09

Parameter List
ON : The output frequency is the value of E1-09 or more, or b2-01 or more.

OFF : The output frequency is less than the value of E1-09 or b2-01.
102 !Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02 [Speed
Agree Detection Width].
Note:
In CLV, the motor speed is the reference.
ON : The output frequency does not align with the frequency reference although the drive is running.
11
OFF : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-02”.

103 !User-Set Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] ± L4-
02 [Speed Agree Detection Width] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02.
Note:
• When using Closed Loop Vector Control, this is the value of “Motor Speed ± L4-02.”
ON : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” nor the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” and the range of frequency reference ± L4-02.
104 !Frequency Detection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection
Level] + L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection Width]. When the terminal activates, it stays activated until the output
frequency = L4-01.
Note:
• In CLV, the motor speed is the reference.
ON : The output frequency is higher than L4-01 + L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is less than L4-01 or is not more than L4-01 + L4-02.
Level]. When the terminal deactivates, it stays deactivated until the output frequency = L4-01 - L4-02.
ON : The output frequency is less than “L4-01 - L4-02,” or it is not more than L4-01.
OFF : The output frequency is more than L4-01.
106 !Drive Ready V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive is ready and running.
107 !DC Bus Undervoltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply is at or below the voltage set in
L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)]. The terminal also deactivates when there is a fault with the DC bus
voltage.
ON : The DC bus voltage is more than the setting value of L2-05.
OFF : The DC bus voltage is less than the setting value of L2-05.
108 During Baseblock (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops
switching and does not make DC bus voltage.
109 !Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
from Keypad Shows the selected frequency reference source.
ON : b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] or b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2] is the frequency
reference source.
OFF : The keypad is the frequency reference source.
10A !Run Command from V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Keypad Shows the selected Run command source.
ON : b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1] or b1-16 [Run Command Selection 2] is the Run command source.
OFF : The keypad is the Run command source.
10B Torque Detection 1 (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
OFF : The output current/torque exceeds the torque value set with L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the level
has dropped and remained in this state longer than the time set with L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].
10C !Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Loss The terminal deactivates when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference.
10D !Braking Resistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the mounting-type braking resistor is overheating or when there is a braking
transistor fault.
10E !Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects a fault.
Note:
Faults CPF00 and CPF01 [Control Circuit Error] are excluded.
110 !Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects a minor fault.
111 !Fault Reset Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Active The terminal deactivates when the drive receives the Reset command from the control circuit terminal, serial
communications, or the communication option.
112 !Timer Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Sets the terminal as the timer output. Use this setting with the timer input set in H1-xx = 118 [MFDI Function
Selection = !Timer Function].

113 !Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04 [Speed
Agree Detection Width(+/-)].
Note:
The drive uses the motor speed as the reference in CLV and CLV/PM.
ON : The output frequency is not in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
OFF : The output frequency is in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.
114 !User-Set Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] ±
L4-04 [Speed Agree Detection Width(+/-)] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04.
ON : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” nor the range of frequency reference ± L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” and the range of frequency reference ± L4-04.
The terminal activates when the output frequency is higher than “L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] + L4-
04 [Speed Agree Detection Width(+/-)]”. When the terminal activates, it stays activated until the output frequency
= L4-03.
Note:
• The detection level set in L4-03 is a signed value. Detections only occur one specific orientation.
• The drive uses the motor speed as the reference in CLV and CLV/PM.
ON : The output frequency is higher than L4-03 + L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is less than L4-03 or is not more than L4-03 + L4-04.
Level(+/-)]. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency = L4-03 - L4-
04.
ON : The output frequency is less than “L4-03 - L4-04,” or it is not more than L4-03.
OFF : The output frequency is more than L4-03.
ON : The output current/torque exceeds the torque value set with L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the level
OFF : The output current/torque exceeds the torque value set with L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the level
ON : The output current/torque exceeds the torque value set with L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the level
11A !During Reverse V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the motor operates in the reverse direction.
ON : The motor is operating in the forward direction or the motor stopped.
OFF : The motor is operating in the reverse direction.
11B During Baseblock (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal activates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching
and does not make DC bus voltage.
11C !Motor 2 Selected V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when motor 2 is selected.
ON : Motor 1 Selection
OFF : Motor 2 Selection
11D !During Regeneration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the motor is regenerating.
ON : Motor is operating or stopped.
OFF : Motor is regenerating.
11E !Executing Auto-Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault.
11F !Motor Overload Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
(oL1) The terminal deactivates when the electronic thermal protection value of the motor overload protective function is
a minimum of 90% of the detection level.
Parameter List
120 !Drive Overheat Pre- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Alarm (oH) The terminal deactivates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8-02 [Overheat Alarm
Level].
121 !Safe Torque OFF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates (safety stop state) when the safety circuit and safety diagnosis circuit are operating
correctly and when terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open).
ON : Safety circuit fault or RUN/READY 11
OFF : Safety stop state

122 !Mechanical Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Detection The terminal deactivates when the drive detects mechanical weakening.
12F !Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Notification The terminal deactivates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period.
Tells you about the maintenance period for these items:
• IGBT
• Cooling Fan
• Capacitor
130 !During Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the torque reference is the torque limit set with L7 parameters, H3-02, H3-06, or
H3-10 [MFAI Function Selection].
131 !During Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the speed limit is active.
132 !In Speed Limit During V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Trq Ctrl The motor accelerates in the forward direction or the reverse direction after enabling torque control and the
externally-input torque reference is disproportionate to the load. The output terminal deactivates when this speed is
not higher than a constant speed and the motor speed is at the speed limit. This does not include operation when the
drive is stopped.
133 !Zero Servo Complete V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when positioning in the range set with b9-02 [Zero Servo Completion Window] completes
after sending the Zero-Servo command.
137 !During Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Output The terminal deactivates when the drive outputs frequency.
ON : The drive is not outputting frequency.
OFF : The drive is outputting frequency.
138 !Drive Enabled V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
This terminal deactivates when the H1-xx = 16A [Drive Enable] terminal deactivates.
139 !Watt Hour Pulse Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
13C !LOCAL Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Selected The terminal deactivates when the Run command source or frequency reference source is LOCAL.
ON : REMOTE
OFF : LOCAL
13D !During Speed Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive does speed search.
13E !PID Feedback Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects FbL [PID Feedback Loss].
13F !PID Feedback High V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects FbH [Excessive PID Feedback].
14A !During KEB Ride-Thru V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive executes the KEB Ride-Thru function.
14B !During Short Circuit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Braking The terminal deactivates during Short Circuit Braking.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZ Vector Control], this function is available when you use a
PM motor.
14C !During Fast Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the fast stop is in operation.
14D !oH Pre-Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Reduction Limit The terminal deactivates when L8-03 = 4 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection = Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)]
and oH [Heatsink Overheat] does not clear after the drive decreases the frequency for 10 cycles.
14E !Braking Transistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
(rr) The terminal deactivates when the internal braking transistor overheats and the drive detects an rr [Dynamic
Braking Transistor Fault] fault.
14F !Braking Resistor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Overheat (rH) The terminal deactivates when the braking resistor overheats and the drive detects an rH [Braking Resistor
Overheat] fault.
160 !Internal Cooling Fan V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Failure The terminal deactivates when the drive detects a cooling fan failure in the drive.
161 !RotorPositionDetection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Complete The terminal deactivates when drive receives a Run command and the drive detects the motor magnetic pole
position of the PM motor.

162 !Modbus Reg 1 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Satisfied The terminal deactivates when the bit specified by H2-07 turns on regarding the MEMOBUS register address
configured with H2-08.
163 !Modbus Reg 2 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Satisfied The terminal deactivates when the bit specified by H2-10 turns on regarding the MEMOBUS register address
configured with H2-09.
165 !Standby Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal activated after the drive stops operating and after the time set with b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait Time].
ON : The Run command turns off and the drive stops operating. When time set in b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait
Time] is expired, the magnetic contactor on the input side turns off.
OFF : The Run command turns on and the magnetic contactor on the input side turns on.
166 !Comparator 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the monitor value set with H2-20 is within range of H2-21 and H2-22 for the time
set in H2-24.
167 !Comparator 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the when the monitor value set with H2-26 is outside the range of H2-27 and H2-28
for the time set in H2-30.
169 !External Power 24V V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Supply The terminal deactivates when there is an external 24V power supply between terminals PS-AC.
ON : The external 24V power supply is not supplying power.
OFF : The external 24V power supply is supplying power.
16A !Data Logger Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects a LoG [Com Error / Abnormal SD card].
190 !DWEZ Digital Output 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
1A0 !DWEZ Extended V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 884
Digital Output 1 Sets the digital output 1 for the DriveWorksEZ DO-A3 option. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
Parameter List
11

◆ H3: Analog Inputs

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 886
(0410) Level Select Sets the input signal level for MFAI terminal A1. (0 - 3)
0 : 0-10V (Lower Limit at 0)
1 : -10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)
2 : 4 to 20 mA
3 : 0 to 20 mA
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 886
(0434) Selection Sets the function for MFAI terminal A1. (0 - 32)
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 886
(0411) Setting Sets the gain of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 887
(0412) Setting Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
2 : 4 to 20 mA
3 : 0 to 20 mA
RUN
(0416) Setting Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A3. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
2 : 4 to 20 mA
3 : 0 to 20 mA
RUN
(041A) Setting Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A2. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
H3-13 Analog Input FilterTime V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.03 s 889
(041B) Constant Sets the time constant for primary delay filters on MFAI terminals. (0.00 - 2.00 s)
H3-14 Analog Input Terminal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 7 889
(041C) Enable Sel Sets the enabled terminal or terminals when H1-xx = C [MFDI Function Select = (1 - 7)
Analog Terminal Enable Selection] is ON.
1 : Terminal A1 only
3 : Terminals A1 and A2
7 : Terminals A1, A2, and A3
H3-16 Terminal A1 Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 889
(02F0) Sets the offset level for analog signals input to terminal A1. Usually it is not necessary (-500 - +500)
to change this setting.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-40 Mbus Reg 15C1h Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 890
(0B5C) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI1 function. (4 - 2F)
(0B5F) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI2 function. (4 - 2F)
(0B62) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI3 function. (4 - 2F)
H3-43 Mbus Reg Inputs V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 890
(117F) FilterTime Const Sets the time constant to apply a primary delay filter to the MEMOBUS analog input (0.00 - 2.00 s)
register values.
■ H3-xx: MFAI Function Selections

0 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 890
The input value from the MFAI terminal set with this function becomes the master frequency reference.
1 Frequency Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 891
The drive multiplies the analog frequency reference with the input value from the MFAI set with this function.
2 Auxiliary Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 891
Reference 1 Sets Reference 2 through multi-step speed reference to enable the command reference (Auxiliary Frequency
Reference 1) from the analog input terminal set here. This value is a percentage where the Maximum Output
Frequency setting is a setting value of 100%.
Note:
Parameter A1-02 [Control Method Selection] selects which parameter is the maximum output frequency.
3 Auxiliary Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 891
Reference 2 Sets Reference 3 through multi-step speed reference to enable the command reference (Auxiliary Frequency
Reference 2) from the analog input terminal set here. This value is a percentage where the Maximum Output
Frequency setting is a setting value of 100%.
Note:
4 Output Voltage Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 891
Set this parameter to input a bias signal and amplify the output voltage.
5 Accel/Decel Time Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 892
Enters a signal to adjust the gain used for C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 to 4] and C1-09
[Fast Stop Time] when the full scale analog signal (10 V or 20 mA) is 100%.
6 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 892
Current Enters a signal to adjust the current level used for DC Injection Braking when the drive rated output current is
100%.
7 Torque Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 892
Enters a signal to adjust the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
Note:
Use this function with L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1]. This parameter functions as an alternative to L6-
02 [Torque Detection Level 1].
8 Stall Prevent Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 892
During Run Enters a signal to adjust the stall prevention level during run if the drive rated current is 100%.
9 Output Frequency Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 893
Limit Enters a signal to adjust the output frequency lower limit level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note:
B PID Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 893
Parameter List
Enter the PID feedback value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note:
11

C PID Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 893
Enters the PID setpoint as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note:
D Frequency Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 893
Enters the bias value added to the frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Note:
E Motor Temperature V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 893
(PTC Input) Uses the motor Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to prevent heat damage to the motor as a
percentage of the current value when the 10 V analog signal is input.
10 Forward Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 894
Enters the forward torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
11 Reverse Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Enters the load torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
12 Regenerative Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Limit Enters the regenerative torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
13 Torque Reference / V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Torque Limit Enters the torque reference if the motor rated torque is 100%. This setting is the torque limit for speed control.
14 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Enters the torque compensation value if the motor rated torque is 100%.
15 General Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Enters the torque limit that is the same for all quadrants for forward, reverse, and regenerative operation if the
motor rated torque is 100%.
16 Differential PID V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 895
Feedback Enters the PID differential feedback value if the full scale analog signal (10 V or 20 mA) is 100%.
1F Not Used V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 896
30 DWEZ Analog Input 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 896
Use with DriveWorksEZ. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
◆ H4: Analog Outputs

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-01 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 897
(041D) Output Select Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal FM. (000 - 9999)
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitors]. For example, set H4-01 = 102 to monitor
If the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal
number. For example, set H4-01 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
H4-02 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 898
(041E) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN Sets the analog signal output level from the terminal FM at 10 V or 20 mA as 100%
when an output for monitoring items is 100%.
H4-03 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 898
(041F) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN Set the level of the analog signal sent from terminal FM at 10 V or 20 mA as 100%
when an output for monitoring items is 0%.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-04 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103 898
(0420) Output Select Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal AM. (000 - 9999)
Note:
If the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal
number. For example, set H4-04 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
H4-05 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0% 898
(0421) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN When an output for monitoring items is 0%, this parameter sets the analog signal output
level from the AM terminal at 10 V or 20 mA as 100%.
H4-06 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 899
(0422) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN When an output for monitoring items is 0%, this parameter sets the analog signal output
level from the AM terminal at 10 V or 20 mA as 0%.
H4-07 Terminal FM Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 899
(0423) Level Select Sets the MFAO terminal FM output signal level. (0 - 2)
Note:
Set jumper S5 on the control circuit terminal block accordingly when changing
these parameters.
2 : 4 to 20 mA
H4-08 Terminal AM Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 899
(0424) Level Select Sets the MFAO terminal AM output signal level. (0 - 2)
Note:
Set jumper S5 on the control circuit terminal block accordingly when changing
these parameters.
0 : 0 to 10 Vdc
1 : -10 to +10 Vdc
2 : 4 to 20 mA
H4-20 Analog Power Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 kW 899
(0B53) 100% Level Sets the level at 10 V when U1-08 [Output Power] is set for analog output. (0.00 - 1000.0 kW)
Note:
range is 0.00 kW to 650.00 kW.
kW to 1000.0 kW.
◆ H5: Modbus Communication

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-01 Drive Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1FH 900
(0425) Sets the communication slave address for drives. (0 - FFH)
Note:
• Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
• Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
H5-02 Communication Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 900
(0426) Selection Sets the communications speed for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 8)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
Parameter List
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps
H5-03 Communication Parity V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 900
(0427) Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 2)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload =
0 : No parity
11
1 : Even parity
2 : Odd parity

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-04 Communication Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 900
(0428) Stop Method Sets the motor Stopping Method when the drive detects CE [Modbus Communication (0 - 3)
Error] issues.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
H5-05 Comm Fault Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 901
(0429) Selection Sets the function that detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues during (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms 901
(042A) Time Sets the time to wait to send a response message after the drive receives a command (0 - 65 ms)
message from the master.
Note:
Restart the drive after changing the parameter setting.
H5-09 CE Detection Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s 901
(0435) Sets the detection time for CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues when (0.0 - 10.0 s)
communication stops.
H5-10 Modbus Register 0025H V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 901
(0436) Unit Sel Sets the unit of measure used for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications monitor (0, 1)
register 0025H (output voltage reference monitor).
0 : 0.1 V units
1 : 1 V units
H5-11 Comm ENTER V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 901
(043C) Command Mode Sets the function to make the Enter command necessary to change parameters through (0, 1)
0 : ENTER Command Required
1 : ENTER Command Not Required
H5-12 Run Command Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 902
(043D) Selection Sets the input method for the Run command when b1-02 = 2 [Run Command Selection (0, 1)
1 = Memobus/Modbus Communications] or b1-16 = 2 [Run Command Selection 2 =
Memobus/Modbus Communications].
0 : FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
1 : Run/Stop, FWD/REV
H5-17 ENTER command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 902
(11A1) response @CPU BUSY Sets operation when the EEPROM write command is sent without EEPROM write (0, 1)
Expert available. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 : Ignore Command(No ROM/RAM Write)
1 : Write to RAM Only
H5-18 Motor Speed Filter over V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms 902
(11A2) Comms Sets the filter time constant used when monitoring motor speed during MEMOBUS/ (0 - 100 ms)
Modbus communications or with a communication option.
H5-20 Communication V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 902
(0B57) Parameters Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (0, 1)
parameters.
1 : Reload Now
H5-22 Speed Search from V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 903
(11CF) MODBUS Enables the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication register Speed Search function (bit0 (0, 1)
of 15DFH).
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
H5-25 Function 5A Register 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0044H (U1-05) 903
(1589) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN when responding to the master device.
(158A) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
(158B) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)
(158C) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register (0000H - FFFFH)

◆ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-01 Terminal RP Pulse Train V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 904
(042C) Function Sets the function for pulse train input terminal RP. (0 - 3)
0 : Frequency Reference
1 : PID Feedback Value
2 : PID Setpoint Value
3 : Speed Feedback (V/F Control)
H6-02 Terminal RP Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1440 Hz 905
(042D) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train input signal used when the item selected with H6- (100 - 32000 Hz)
RUN 01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input at 100%.
H6-03 Terminal RP Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 905
(042E) Gain Sets the gain used when the function in H6-01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is (0.0 - 1000.0%)
RUN input to terminal RP.
H6-04 Terminal RP Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 905
(042F) Bias Sets the bias used when the function in H6-01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is (-100.0 - 100.0%)
RUN input to terminal RP. Sets a value at the time when the pulse train is 0 Hz.
H6-05 Terminal RP Filter Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s 905
(0430) Sets the time constant for the pulse train input primary delay filters. (0.00 - 2.00 s)
RUN
H6-06 Terminal MP Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 905
(0431) Selection Sets a function for pulse train monitor output terminal MP. Sets the “x-xx” part of the (000, 031, 101, 102, 105,
RUN Ux-xx monitor. 116, 501, 502, 801 - 809,
821 - 825, 831 - 839, 851
- 855)
H6-07 Terminal MP Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1440 Hz 906
(0432) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train output signal used when the monitor set with H6- (0 - 32000 Hz)
RUN 06 [Terminal MP Monitor Selection] is 100%.
H6-08 Terminal RP Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 Hz 906
(043F) Frequency Sets the minimum frequency of the pulse train signal that terminal RP can detect. (0.1 - 1000.0 Hz)
H6-09 Voltage Phase Sync MP V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 906
(156E) Selection Set whether to output the pulse synchronized with drive output voltage phase from the (0, 1)
pulse train monitor output terminal MP. This parameter is only enabled when H6-06 =
102 [Terminal MP Monitor Selection = Output Frequency] and H6-07 = 0 [Terminal
MP Frequency Scaling = 0 Hz].
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ H7: Virtual MFIO selection

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-00 Virtual MFIO selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 907
(116F) Sets the function to enable and disable the virtual I/O function. Set this parameter to 1 (0, 1)
Expert to operate the virtual I/O function.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
H7-01 Virtual Multi-Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 907
(1185) Input 1 Sets the function that enters the virtual input set in H7-10 [Virtual Multi-Function (1 - 19F)
Expert Output 1].
Expert Output 2].
Expert Output 3].
Parameter List
Expert Output 4].
(11A4) Output 1 Sets the function for virtual digital output 1. (0 - 1A7)
Expert
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-11 Virtual Output 1 Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s 908
(11A5) Time Sets the minimum ON time for virtual digital output 1. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert
Expert
Expert
Expert
Expert
(11AA) Output 4 Sets the function for virtual digital output 4. (0 - 1A7)
Expert
(11AB) Time Sets the minimum ON time for virtual digital output 4. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert
H7-30 Virtual Analog Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F 909
(1177) Selection Sets the virtual analog input function. (0 - 32)
Expert
H7-31 Virtual Analog Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 909
(1178) Gain Sets the virtual analog input gain. (-999.9 - 999.9%)
RUN
Expert
H7-32 Virtual Analog Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 909
(1179) Bias Sets the virtual analog input bias. (-999.9 - 999.9%)
RUN
Expert
H7-40 Virtual Analog Out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 909
(1163) Signal Select Sets the signal level of the virtual analog output. (0 - 2)
0 : 0 to 100% (Absolute Value)
1 : -100 to 100%
2 : 0 to 100% (Lower Limit at 0)
H7-41 Virtual Analog Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 909
(1164) Function Sets the monitor to be output from the virtual analog output. (0 - 999)
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H7-41 = 102 to monitor U1-
02 [Output Frequency].
H7-42 Virtual Analog Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s 910
(1165) FilterTime Sets the time constant for a primary filter of the virtual analog output. (0.00 - 2.00 s)

11.11 L: Protection Functions

◆ L1: Motor Protection
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 283
0 : Disable
1 : Variable Torque
Note:
When only one motor is connected to a drive, set L1-01 = 1 to 6 [Enabled].
External thermal relays are not necessary in these conditions.
L1-02 Motor Overload V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 min 286
(0481) Protection Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent (0.1 - 5.0 min)
damage to the motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
L1-03 Motor Thermistor oH V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 286
(0482) Alarm Select Sets drive operation when the PTC input signal entered into the drive is at the oH3 (0 - 3)
[Motor Overheat Alarm] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
L1-04 Motor Thermistor oH V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 287
(0483) Fault Select Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the oH4 [Motor (0 - 2)
Overheat Fault (PTC Input)] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
L1-05 Motor Thermistor Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s 916
(0484) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the PTC input signal entered to the drive. This (0.00 - 10.00 s)
parameter prevents accidental motor overheat faults.
L1-08 oL1 Current Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 A 916
(1103) Sets the reference current for the motor 1 thermal overload detection. When the current (0.0 A or 10% to 150%
level > 0.0 A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current. of the drive rated
current)
L1-09 oL1 Current Level for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 A 916
(1104) Motor 2 Sets the reference current for the motor 2 thermal overload detection. When the current (0.0 A or 10 to150% of
level > 0.0 A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current. the drive rated current)
L1-13 Motor Overload Memory V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 916
(046D) Selection Sets the function that keeps the current electronic thermal protector value when the (0, 1)
drive stops receiving power.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ L2: Power Loss Ride Through

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-01 Power Loss Ride V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 921
(0485) Through Select Sets the drive operation after a momentary power loss. (0 - 5)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
2 : Enabled while CPU Power Active
3 : Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02
Parameter List
4 : Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power

5 : Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop
Note:
When the CPU is inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at
power up.
L2-02
(0486)
Power Loss Ride
Through Time
Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it tries to restart if the DC bus
Determined by o2-04,
C6-01
923
11
voltage is less than L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] after a momentary power (0.0 - 25.5 s)
loss.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-03 Minimum Baseblock V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 923
(0487) Time Sets the minimum time to continue the drive output block (baseblock) after a baseblock. C6-01
(0.1 - 5.0 s)
L2-04 Powerloss V/f Recovery V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 923
(0488) Ramp Time Sets the time for the drive output voltage to go back to correct voltage after completing C6-01
speed searches. (0.0 - 5.0 s)
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 923
(0489) Lvl (Uv1) Sets the voltage at which a Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] fault is triggered or at which and E1-01
the KEB function is activated. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (200 V Class: 150 - 210
V, 400 V Class: 300 -
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you set this parameter 420 V)
to a value lower than the default, you must install an AC
reactor on the input side of the power supply. If you do not
install an AC reactor, it will cause damage to the drive circuitry.
L2-06 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 924
(048A) Decel Time Sets the deceleration time during KEB operation used to decrease the maximum output (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
Expert frequency to 0.
Note:
When L2-29 = 1, 2, or 3 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB
Ride-Thru 2, System KEB Ride-Thru 1, or System KEB Ride-Thru 2] and you do
KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set this value.
L2-07 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 924
(048B) Accel Time Sets the acceleration time to return the frequency to the frequency reference before a (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
Expert power loss after canceling KEB operation.
L2-08 Frequency Gain at KEB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100% 924
(048C) Start Sets the quantity of output frequency reduction used when KEB operation starts as a (0 - 300%)
Expert percentage of the motor rated slip before starting KEB operation.
L2-09 KEB Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20% 925
(048D) Frequency Level Sets the quantity of output frequency reduction used as a percentage of E2-02 [Motor (0 - 100%)
Expert Rated Slip] when KEB operation starts.
L2-10 Minimum KEB Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms 925
(048E) Sets the minimum length of time to operate the KEB after the drive detects a (0 - 25500 ms)
Expert momentary power loss.
L2-11 KEB DC Bus Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E1-01 925
(0461) Setpoint Sets the target value that controls the DC bus voltage to a constant level in Single Drive (Determined by E1-01)
Expert KEB Ride-Thru 2. Sets the DC bus voltage level that completes the KEB operation for
all other KEB methods.
L2-29 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 925
(0475) Method Sets the KEB function operation mode. (0 - 3)
Expert 0 : Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1
1 : Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2
2 : System KEB Ride-Thru 1
L2-30 KEB Zero Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 926
(045E) Operation Sets the operation when the output frequency decreases below the zero level (DC (0, 1)
Expert braking injection starting frequency) during KEB deceleration when L2-01 = 3 to 5
[Power Loss Ride Through Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, Kinetic Energy
Backup: CPU Power, or Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop].
0 : Baseblock
1 : DC/SC Braking
L2-31 KEB Start Voltage Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 926
(045D) Level Sets the KEB start voltage offset. (200 V Class: 0 - 100
Expert V,400 V Class: 0 - 200
V)

◆ L3: Stall Prevention

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-01 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 927
(048F) Accel Sets the method of the Stall Prevention During Acceleration. (0 - 3)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
2 : Intelligent (Ignore Accel Ramp)
3 : Current Limit Acceleration
L3-02 Stall Prevent Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 929
(0490) during Accel Sets the output current level to activate the Stall Prevention function during acceleration and L8-38
as a percentage of the drive rated output current. (0 - 150%)
Note:
The upper limit of the setting range changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty
Selection] changes.
• 150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating].
• 110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating].
L3-03 Stall Prevent Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50% 929
(0491) during Accel Sets the lower limit for the stall prevention level used in the constant output range as a (0 - 100%)
percentage of the drive rated output current.
L3-04 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 929
(0492) Decel Sets the method that the drive will use to prevent overvoltage faults when decelerating. (Determined by A1-02)
Note:
1. To connect a dynamic braking option (braking resistor or braking resistor unit)
to the drive, set this parameter to 0 or 3. Parameter values 1, 2, 4, and 5 will
enable Stall Prevention function during deceleration, and the dynamic braking
option will not function.
2. The setting range changes when the A1-02 [Control Method Selection] value
changes:
• When A1-02 = 5 [OLV/PM], the setting range is 0 to 2.
• When A1-02 = 6, 7, 8 [AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV], the setting range is 0,
1.
0 : Disabled
1 : General Purpose
2 : Intelligent (Ignore Decel Ramp)
3 : General Purpose w/ DB resistor
4 : Overexcitation/High Flux 1
L3-05 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 931
(0493) RUN Sets the function to enable and disable Stall Prevention During Run. (0 - Determined by A1-
Note: 02)
1. An output frequency lower than 6 Hz will disable Stall Prevention during Run.
The L3-05 and L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run] settings do not have an
effect.
2. The setting range changes when the A1-02 [Control Method] value changes:
• A1-02 = 0, 1, 5 [V/f, CL-V/f, OLV/PM]: 0 to 2
• A1-02 =8[EZOLV]: 0, 3
0 : Disabled
1 : Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)
L3-06 Stall Prevent Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 931
(0494) during Run Sets the output current level to enable the Stall Prevention function during operation as and L8-38
a percentage of the drive rated output current. (5 - 150%)
Note:
• This parameter is applicable when L3-05 = 1, 2 [Stall Prevention during RUN =
Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02), Deceleration Time 2 (C1-04)].
• The upper limit of the setting range changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty
Selection] changes.
–150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating 1 (HD1) for Constant Torque
Applications].
–110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating 1 (ND1) for Variable Torque
Applications].
L3-11 Overvoltage Suppression V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 932
(04C7) Select Sets the overvoltage suppression function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
Parameter List
1 : Enabled
L3-17 DC Bus Regulation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 375 V, 932
(0462) Level Sets the target value for the DC bus voltage when the overvoltage suppression function 400 V Class: 750 V
and the Decel Stall Prevention function (Intelligent Stall Prevention) are active. (200 V Class: 150 to 400
V, 400 V Class: 300 to
800 V)
11
L3-20 DC Bus Voltage Determined by A1-02 932
(0465) Adjustment Gain Sets the proportional gain used to control the DC bus voltage. (0.00 - 5.00)
Expert

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-21 OVSuppression Accel/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 933
(0466) Decel P Gain Sets the proportional gain to calculate acceleration and deceleration rates. (0.10 - 10.00)
Expert
L3-22 PM Stall Prevention V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s 933
(04F9) Decel Time Sets the momentary deceleration time that the drive will use when it tries to accelerate a (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
PM motor and detected motor stalls. This function is applicable when L3-01 = 1 [Stall
Prevention during Accel = Enabled].
L3-23 Stall P Reduction at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 933
(04FD) Constant HP Sets the function to automatically decrease the Stall Prevention Level during Run for (0, 1)
Constant Horse Power (CHP) part of the speed range.
0 : Use L3-06 for Entire Speed Range
1 : Automatic Reduction @ CHP Region
L3-24 Motor Accel Time @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 933
(046E) Rated Torque Sets the motor acceleration time to reach the maximum frequency at the motor rated C6-01, E2-11, and E5-01
Expert torque for stopped single-drive motors. (0.001 - 10.000 s)
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 934
(046F) Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia. (0.1 - 1000.0)
Expert
L3-26 Additional DC Bus V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 μF 934
(0455) Capacitors Sets the capacity for external main circuit capacitors. Usually it is not necessary to (0 to 65000 μF)
Expert change this setting. Sets this parameter when you use the KEB Ride-Thru function.
L3-27 Stall Prevention V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms 935
(0456) Detection Time Sets a delay time between reaching the Stall Prevention level and starting the Stall (0 - 5000 ms)
Prevention function.
L3-34 Torque Limit Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 935
(016F) Time Sets the filter time constant that returns the torque limit to its initial value when KEB (0.000 - 1.000 s)
Expert operation operates in Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru mode.
L3-35 Speed Agree Width for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz 935
(0747) Auto Decel Sets the width for speed agreement when L3-04 = 2 [Stall Prevention during Decel = (0.00 - 1.00 Hz)
Expert Intelligent (Ignore Decel Ramp)]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
L3-36 Current Suppression V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 935
(11D0) Gain@Accel Sets the gain to suppress current and motor speed hunting during operation when L3-01 (0.0 - 100.0)
= 3 [Stall Prevention during Accel = Current Limit Method]. Usually it is not necessary
L3-37 Current Limit P Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms 935
(11D1) @Accel Suppresses current hunting during acceleration. Usually it is not necessary to change (0 - 100 ms)
Expert this setting.
L3-38 Current Limit I Time @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 935
(11D2) Accel Suppresses current hunting and overshooting that occurs when the drive stalls during (0.0 - 100.0)
Expert acceleration. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
L3-39 Current Limit Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 ms 936
(11D3) Time@Accel Sets the time constant to adjust the acceleration rate when L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention (1.0 - 1000.0 ms)
during Accel = Current Limit Acceleration]. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
L3-40 Current Limit S-Curve V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 936
(11D4) @ Acc/Dec Sets the function to enable and disable the best S-curve characteristic used for current- (0, 1)
limited acceleration.
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
◆ L4: Speed Detection

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L4-01 Speed Agree Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 936
(0499) Level Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5 (Determined by A1-02)
[MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency
Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].
(049A) Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)
Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5
[MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
(049B) Level (+/-) Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)
Sets the speed agree detection level or motor speed detection level when H2-01 to H2-
03 = 13, 14, 15, 16 [MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree
2, Frequency Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].
(049C) Width (+/-) Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)
Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15,
16 [MFDO Function Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency
L4-05 Fref Loss Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 937
(049D) Selection Sets the operation when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference. (0, 1)
0 : Stop
1 : Run at (L4-06 x Last Reference)
L4-06 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80.0% 937
(04C2) @Loss of Ref Sets the frequency reference as a percentage to continue drive operation after it detects a (0.0 - 100.0%)
frequency reference loss. The value is a percentage of the frequency reference before
the drive detected the loss.
L4-07 Speed Agree Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 937
(0470) Selection Sets the condition that activates speed detection. (0, 1)
0 : No Detection during Baseblock
1 : Detection Always Enabled
◆ L5: Fault Restart

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 938
(049E) Attempts Sets the number of times that the drive will try to restart. (0 - 10 times)
L5-02 Fault Contact at Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 938
(049F) Select Sets the function that sends signals to the MFDO terminal set for Fault [H2-xx = E] (0, 1)
while the drive is automatically restarting.
0 : Active Only when Not Restarting
1 : Always Active
L5-03 Continuous Method Max V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s 938
(04A0) Restart T Sets the time for which the drive will try to restart. If the drive cannot restart inthe time (0.5 - 180.0 s)
set in L5-03, the drive detects a fault. This is available when L5-05 = 0 [Auto-Restart
Method = Continuous/Immediate Attempts].
L5-04 Interval Method Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s 938
(046C) Time Sets the time interval between each Auto Restart attempt. This function is enabled when (0.5 - 600.0 s)
L5-05 = 1 [Auto Restart Operation Selection = Use L5-04 Time].
L5-05 Auto-Restart Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 938
(0467) Sets the count method for the Auto Restart operation. (0, 1)
0 : Continuous/Immediate Attempts
1 : Interval/Attempt after L5-04 sec
Parameter List
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-07 Fault Reset Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1111 939
(0B2A) Select Grp1 Use these 4 digits to set the Auto Restart function for oL1 to oL4. From left to right, the (0000 - 1111)
digits set oL1, oL2, oL3, and oL4, in order.
0000 : Disabled
0001 : Enabled (—/—/—/oL4)
0010 : Enabled (—/—/oL3/—)
0011 : Enabled (—/—/oL3/oL4)
0100 : Enabled (—/oL2/—/—)
0101 : Enabled (—/oL2/—/oL4)
0110 : Enabled (—/oL2/oL3/—)
0111 : Enabled (—/oL2/oL3/oL4)
1000 : Enabled (oL1/—/—/—)
1001 : Enabled (oL1/—/—/oL4)
1010 : Enabled (oL1/—/oL3/—)
1011 : Enabled (oL1/—/oL3/oL4)
1100 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/—/—)
1101 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/—/oL4)
1110 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/oL3/—)
1111 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/oL3/oL4)
L5-08 Fault Reset Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1111 939
(0B2B) Select Grp2 Use these 4 digits to set the Auto Restart function for Uv1, ov, oH1, and GF. From left (0000 - 1111)
to right, the digits set Uv1, ov, oH1, and GF, in order.
0000 : Disabled
0001 : Enabled (—/–/—/GF)
0010 : Enabled (—/–/oH1/–)
0011 : Enabled (—/–/oH1/GF)
0100 : Enabled (—/ov/—/–)
0101 : Enabled (—/ov/—/GF)
0110 : Enabled (—/ov/oH1/–)
0111 : Enabled (—/ov/oH1/GF)
1000 : Enabled (Uv1/–/—/–)
1001 : Enabled (Uv1/–/—/GF)
1010 : Enabled (Uv1/–/oH1/–)
1011 : Enabled (Uv1/–/oH1/GF)
1100 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/—/–)
1101 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/—/GF)
1110 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/oH1/–)
1111 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/oH1/GF)
◆ L6: Torque Detection

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-01 Torque Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 942
(04A1) Selection 1 Sets torque detection conditions that will trigger an overtorque or undertorque response (0 - 8)
from the drive.
0 : Disabled
1 : oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
2 : oL @ RUN - Alarm only
3 : oL @ Speed Agree - Fault
4 : oL @ RUN - Fault
5 : UL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only
6 : UL @ RUN - Alarm only
7 : UL @ Speed Agree - Fault
8 : UL @ RUN - Fault
L6-02 Torque Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150% 943
(04A2) 1 Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. In V/f control, drive (0 - 300%)
rated output current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s 943
(04A3) Sets the detection time for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. (0.0 - 10.0 s)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-04 Torque Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 943
(04A4) Selection 2 Sets the speed range that detects overtorque and undertorque and the operation of drives (0 - 8)
(operation status) after detection.
0 : Disabled
L6-05 Torque Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150% 944
(04A5) 2 Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. In V/f control, drive (0 - 300%)
rated output current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s 944
L6-07 Torque Detection Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms 944
(04E5) Time Sets the time constant for a primary filter to the torque reference or to the output current (0 - 1000 ms)
used to detect overtorque/undertorque.
L6-08 Mechanical Fatigue V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 944
(0468) Detect Select Sets the speed where the drive detects mechanical deterioration and how the drive (0 - 8)
operates (operation status) after detection.
0 : Disabled
1 : oL5 @ Speed > L6-09 - Alarm
2 : oL5 @ |Speed| > L6-09 - Alarm
3 : oL5 @ Speed > L6-09 - Fault
4 : oL5 @ |Speed| > L6-09 - Fault
5 : UL5 @ Speed < L6-09 - Alarm
6 : UL5 @ |Speed| < L6-09 - Alarm
7 : UL5 @ Speed < L6-09 - Fault
8 : UL5 @ |Speed| < L6-09 - Fault
L6-09 Mech Fatigue Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 110.0% 945
(0469) Speed Level Sets the speed level where the drive will operate the mechanical deterioration detection (-110.0 - 110.0%)
function, as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency.
Note:
L6-10 Mech Fatigue Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s 945
(046A) Delay Time Sets the time for mechanical deterioration detection. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
L6-11 Mech Fatigue Hold Off V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h 945
(046B) Time Sets the time that the drive will start mechanical deterioration detection triggered by the (0 - 65535 h)
cumulative operation time of the drive.
◆ L7: Torque Limit

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-01 Forward Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 946
(04A7) Sets the torque limit value for forward motoring as a percentage, where motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque is the 100% value.
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 946
(04A8) Sets the torque limit value for reversed motoring as a percentage, where motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque is the 100% value.
L7-03 Forward Regenerative V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 946
(04A9) Trq Limit Sets the torque limit value for forward regenerative conditions as a percentage of the (0 - 300%)
Parameter List
RUN motor rated torque.
L7-04 Reverse Regenerative V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200% 947
(04AA) Trq Limit Sets the torque limit value for reversed regenerative conditions as a percentage of the (0 - 300%)
RUN motor rated torque.
L7-06 Torque Limit Integral V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 ms 947
(04AC) Time Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function. (5 - 10000 ms) 11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-07 Torque Limit during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 947
(04C9) Accel/Decel Sets the torque limit function during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
0 : Proportional only
1 : Proportional & Integral control
L7-16 Torque Limit Process at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 947
(044D) Start Assigns a time filter to allow the torque limit to build at start. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
L7-35 Low Freq Regen Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0% 948
(1B57) Limit Lvl Sets the torque limit used during low-speed regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to (0.0 - 200.0%)
Expert change this setting.
L7-36 Regen Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.0 Hz 948
(1B58) Derate Freq Sets the frequency width at which L7-35 [Low Freq Regen Torque Limit Lvl] operates. (0.0 - 30.0 Hz)
Expert
◆ L8: Drive Protection

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-01 3% ERF DB Resistor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 948
(04AD) Protection Sets the function to enable braking resistor protection with a Yaskawa ERF series (0, 1)
braking resistor (3% ED) installed on the heatsink.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 949
(04AE) Sets the oH detection level in temperature. C6-01
(50 - 150 °C)
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 949
(04AF) Selection Sets the operation of drives when an oH alarm is detected. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
4 : Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)
L8-05 Input Phase Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 950
(04B1) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable input phase loss detection. (0 - 4)
Note:
The default setting and setting range is different for different drive input power
supplies.
• Three-phase 200 V and 400 V Input
Default setting: 1
Setting range: Determined by the drive model
–2xxx, 4002 - 4675: 0, 1
–4810 - 4H12: 0 - 4
• 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Input
Default setting: 4
Setting range: 0 - 4
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
4 : Enabled, with Hardware Detection
L8-07 Output Phase Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 950
(04B3) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable output phase loss detection. The drive starts (0 - 2)
output phase loss detection when the output current decreases to less than 5% of the
drive rated current.
Note:
The drive can incorrectly start output phase loss detection in these conditions:
• The motor rated current is very small compared to the drive rating.
• The drive is operating a PM motor with a small load.
0 : Disabled
1 : Fault when one phase is lost
2 : Fault when two phases are lost
L8-09 Output Ground Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 951
(04B5) Detection Sets the function to enable and disable ground fault protection. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-10 Heatsink Fan Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 951
(04B6) Selection Sets operation of the heatsink cooling fan. (0 - 2)
0 : During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay
1 : Always On
2 : Temperature-Dependent Fan Ctrl.
L8-11 Heatsink Fan Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60 s 951
(04B7) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it stops the cooling fan after it (0 - 300 s)
cancels the Run command when L8-10 = 0 [Heatsink Fan Operation Selection =
During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay].
L8-12 Ambient Temperature V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 °C 474
L8-15 Drive oL2 @ Low Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 952
(04BB) Protection Sets the function to decrease the drive overload level at which the drive will trigger oL2 (0, 1)
[Drive Overload] during low speed operation (6 Hz or slower) to prevent damage to the
main circuit transistors.
Note:
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before disabling this function
at low speeds. If you frequently operate drives with high output current in low
speed ranges, it can cause heat stress and decrease the life span of drive IGBTs.
0 : Disabled (No Additional Derate)
1 : Enabled (Reduced oL2 Level)
L8-18 Software Current Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 952
(04BE) Selection Set the software current limit selection function to prevent damage to the main circuit (0, 1)
transistor caused by too much current.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
L8-19 Freq Reduction @ oH V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.8 952
(04BF) Pre-Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference during an oH alarm. (0.1 - 0.9)
L8-20 Control Fault & Step Out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 952
(04C0) Detect Sets operation after the drive detects a CF fault when A1-02 = 4 [Control Method (0 - 2)
Expert Selection = Advanced Open Loop Vector].
0 : Disabled
1 : CF/STPo Detection Enabled
2 : CF ALM/Stop
L8-27 Overcurrent Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 300.0% 953
(04DD) Gain Sets the PM motor overcurrent detection level as a percentage of the motor rated current (0.0 - 1000.0%)
value.
Note:
rated current.
• A1-02 ≠ 8 [EZOLV]: E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
• A1-02 = 8: E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
L8-29 Output Unbalance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 953
(04DF) Detection Sel Sets the function to detect LF2 [Output Current Imbalance]. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
L8-31 LF2 Detection Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 953
(04E1) Sets the LF2 [Output Current Imbalance] detection time. (1 – 100)
L8-35 Installation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by the drive 474
2 : IP20/UL Type 1
3 : Finless
L8-38 Carrier Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, 954
(04EF) Reduction Sets the carrier frequency reduction function. The drive reduces the carrier frequency C6-01 and o2-04
when the output current is more than a specified level. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled below 6 Hz
2 : Enabled for All Speeds
Parameter List
L8-40 Carrier Freq Reduction V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 954
(04F1) Off-Delay Sets the length of time until the automatically reduced carrier frequency returns to the (0.00 - 2.00 s)
condition before the reduction.
L8-41 High Current Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 955
(04F2) Selection Sets the function to cause an HCA [Current Alarm] when the output current is more (0, 1)
than 150% of the drive rated current.
0 : Disabled 11
1 : Enabled

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-51 STPo I Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 955
(0471) Sets the STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] detection level as a percentage of the motor (0.0 - 300.0%)
Expert rated current.
Note:
rated current.
• A1-02 = 5 [OLV/PM]: E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
L8-52 STPo Integration Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 955
(0472) Sets the detection level for STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] related to the ACR integral (0.1 - 2.0)
Expert value.
L8-53 STPo Integration Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 955
(0473) Sets the length of time until the drive detects STPo after it is more than the value of L8- (1.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert 51 [STPo I Detection Level].
L8-54 STPo Id Diff Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 955
(0474) Sets the Id deviation detection function for STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected]. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
L8-55 Internal DB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 955
(045F) TransistorProtection Sets the protection function for the internal braking transistor. (0, 1)
0 : Disable
1 : Protection Enabled
L8-56 Stall P @ Accel V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5000 ms 956
(047D) Activation Time Sets the length time that the acceleration stall prevention function can continue to (100 - 5000 ms)
Expert operate before the drive detects an STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
L8-57 Stall Prevention Retry V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 956
(047E) Counts Sets the number of times the acceleration stall prevention function can operate until (1 - 10 times)
Expert speeds agree before the drive detects an STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
L8-90 STPo Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 956
(0175) (Low Speed) Sets the detection level that the control fault must be equal to or more than to cause an (0 - 5000 times)
Expert STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
L8-93 Low Speed Pull-out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 956
(073C) DetectionTime Sets the length of time the drive will wait to start baseblock after detecting LSo [Low (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert Speed Motor Step-Out].
L8-94 Low Speed Pull-out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3% 956
(073D) Detect Level Sets the detection level for LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] as a percentage of E1-04 (0 - 10%)
Expert [Maximum Output Frequency].
L8-95 Low Speed Pull-out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 957
(077F) Amount Sets the average count of LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] detections. (1 - 50 times)
Expert
◆ L9: Drive Protection 2

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
L9-16 FAn1 Detect Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4.0 s 957
(11DC) Sets the detection time for FAn1 [Drive Cooling Fan Fault]. Yaskawa recommends that (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Expert you do not change this parameter value.

11.12 n: Special Adjustment

◆ n1: Hunting Prevention
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-01 Hunting Prevention V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 958
(0580) Selection Sets the function to prevent hunting. (0 to 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled (Normal)
2 : Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 958
(0581) Setting Sets the performance of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is not necessary to (0.00 - 2.50)
Expert change this parameter.
n1-03 Hunting Prevention V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 958
(0582) Time Constant Sets the primary delay time constant of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is (0 - 500 ms)
Expert not necessary to change this parameter.
n1-05 Hunting Prevent Gain in V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 958
(0530) Reverse Sets the performance of the hunting prevention function. This parameter adjusts (0.00 - 2.50)
Expert Reverse run. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
n1-08 Current Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 959
(1105) Method Sets how the drive decreases the motor vibration that is caused by leakage current. (0, 1)
Expert Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
0 : 2-Phases
1 : 3-Phases
n1-13 DC Bus Stabilization V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 959
(1B59) Control Sets the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus voltage. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
n1-14 DC Bus Stabilization V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 ms 959
(1B5A) Time Adjusts the responsiveness of the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus (50.0 - 500.0 ms)
Expert voltage. Set n1-13 = 1 [DC Bus Stabilization Control = Enabled] to enable this
parameter.
n1-15 PWM Voltage Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 959
(0BF8) Calibration Sets the calibration method that the drive uses to decrease torque/current ripple. (0 - 2)
Expert 0 : No Calibration
1 : One Time Calibrate at Next Start
2 : Calibrate Every Time at Start
n1-16 Hunting Prevention High V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 960
(0BFB) Fc Gain Sets the gain for the hunting prevention function. This parameter functions best with a (0.00 - 2.50)
high carrier frequency. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
n1-17 Hunting Prevent High Fc V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 500 ms 960
(0BFC) Filter Sets the responsiveness of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is not necessary to (0 - 1000 ms)
Expert change this parameter.
n1-20 Voltage Calibration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms 960
(1588) Duration Sets the calibration time at start. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. (10 - 500 ms)
Expert
◆ n2: Auto Freq Regulator (AFR)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n2-01 Automatic Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 960
(0584) Regulator Gain Sets the gain of the AFR function as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary (0.00 - 10.00)
n2-02 Automatic Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms 960
(0585) Regulator Time 1 Sets the time constant that sets the rate of change for the AFR function. Usually it is not (0 - 2000 ms)
Parameter List
necessary to change this setting.
n2-03 Automatic Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 750 ms 961
(0586) Regulator Time 2 Sets the time constant that sets the speed difference of the AFR function. Use this (0 - 2000 ms)
parameter for speed searches or regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
11

◆ n3: High Slip/Overexcite Braking

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-01 HSB Deceleration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5% 962
(0588) Frequency Width Sets the amount by which the output frequency is to be lowered during high-slip (1 - 20%)
Expert braking, as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency], which represents the
100% value.
n3-02 HSB Current Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 963
(0589) Level Sets the maximum current output during high-slip braking as a percentage, where E2-01 and L8-38
Expert [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] is 100%. Also set the current suppression to prevent (0 - 150%)
exceeding drive overload tolerance.
Note:
The upper limit to the setting range changes when the setting for C6-01 [Normal /
Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
• 150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating]
• 110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating]
n3-03 HSB Dwell Time at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s 963
(058A) Sets the dwell time, a length of time when high-slip braking is ending and during which (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert the motor speed decreases and runs at a stable speed. For a set length of time, the drive
will hold the actual output frequency at the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
n3-04 HSB Overload Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 s 963
(058B) Sets the time used to detect oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload], which occurs when the (30 - 1200 s)
Expert output frequency does not change during high-slip braking. Usually it is not necessary
to change this parameter.
n3-13 OverexcitationBraking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.10 963
(0531) (OEB) Gain Sets the gain value that the drive multiplies by the V/f pattern output value during (1.00 - 1.40)
overexcitation deceleration to calculate the overexcitation level.
n3-14 OEB High Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 964
(0532) Injection Sets the function that injects harmonic signals during overexcitation deceleration. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
n3-21 HSB Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100% 964
(0579) Suppression Level Sets the upper limit of the current that is suppressed at the time of overexcitation (0 - 150%)
deceleration as a percentage of the drive rated current.
n3-23 Overexcitation Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 964
(057B) Operation Sets the direction of motor rotation where the drive will enable overexcitation. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled Only when Rotating FWD
2 : Enabled Only when Rotating REV
◆ n4: Adv Open Loop Vector Tune

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-60 Motoring Low Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 % 965
(1B80) Comp Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for motoring loads in the low (50.0 - 200.0%)
speed range.
n4-61 Low Speed Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz 965
(1B81) Frequency Level Sets a frequency at which the settings n4-60 [Motoring Low Speed Comp Gain] and n4- (0.50 - 12.00 Hz)
62 [Regen Low Speed Comp Gain] are enabled. When the output frequency < n4-61, the
drive adjusts the torque to agree with the settings for n4-60 and n4-62. Usually it is not
n4-62 Regen Low Speed Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 % 965
(1B82) Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for regenerative loads in the (50.0 - 500.0%)
low speed range.
n4-63 Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60.0 965
(1B83) EstimateResponse@ Sets the responsiveness of the speed estimation in high speed ranges, where the output (0.1 - 300.0)
High Freq frequency is ≥ n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq].
n4-64 Speed Estimate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60.0 965
(1B84) Response@Low Freq Sets the responsiveness of the speed estimation in low speed ranges, where 0 ≤ the (0.1 - 300.0)
output frequency, which is < n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq].
n4-65 Flux Estimate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 966
(1B85) Response@High Freq Sets the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation in high speed ranges, where the (0.50 - 3.00)
output frequency is ≥ n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq]. Usually it is not
n4-66 Flux Estimate Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50 966
(1B86) @Low Freq Sets the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation in low speed ranges, where 0 ≤ (0.50 - 3.00)
the output frequency, which is < n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq]. Usually it is
not necessary to change this setting.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-67 Estimate Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz 966
(1B87) Switchover Freq Sets the switching frequency for estimation gain for these parameters: (0.00 - E1-04 setting)
n4-63 [Speed EstimateResponse@High Freq]
n4-64 [Speed Estimate Response@Low Freq]
n4-65 [Flux Estimate Response@High Freq]
n4-66 [Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq]
n4-68 Speed Estimation Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.001 s 966
(1B88) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the speed estimation value. Usually it is not (0.001 - 0.010 s)
n4-69 Flux Control Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 966
(1B89) Unifies control of magnetic flux to make motor vibrations more stable. (0.00 - 60.00)
n4-70 Speed Command Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 Hz 966
(1B8A) @ Low Freq Sets the function to make the drive more stable when operating at low speeds. Usually it (0.00 - 6.00 Hz)
n4-71 Flux Estimation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 967
(1B8B) Sets the flux estimation method. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Method 1
1 : Method 2
n4-72 Speed Feedback Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 967
(1B8C) Sets the requirement for an encoder option when A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection (0, 1)
= Advanced Open Loop Vector].
0 : Without Encoder
1 : With Encoder
n4-73 PGo Recovery Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 967
(1B8D) Sets the restart mode to Without Encoder Mode or the With Encoder Mode when an (0, 1)
encoder is disconnected.
0 : Without Encoder
1 : With Encoder
n4-74 Limit of Flux Loop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 250% 967
(1B8E) Sets the control level for flux loop control output. (100 - 500%)
◆ n5: Feed Forward Control

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n5-01 Feed Forward Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 969
(05B0) Selection Sets the feed forward function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
n5-02 Motor Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01, 969
(05B1) Acceleration Time Sets the length of time for the motor to accelerate from the stopped to the maximum E5-01, and o2-04
frequency with a single motor at the rated torque. Inertia Tuning automatically sets the (0.001 - 10.000 s)
motor acceleration time.
n5-03 Feed Forward Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 969
(05B2) Gain Sets the ratio between load inertia and motor inertia. Inertia Tuning automatically sets (0.00 - 100.00)
the Feedforward Control Gain value.
n5-04 Speed Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 970
(05B3) Frequency Sets the response frequency for the speed reference. Usually it is not necessary to (0.00 - 500.00 Hz)
RUN change this parameter.
Expert
Parameter List
11

◆ n6: Online Tuning

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n6-01 Online Tuning Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 970
(0570) Sets the type of motor data that Online Tuning uses for OLV control. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning
2 : Voltage Correction Tuning
n6-05 Online Tuning Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 971
(05C7) Sets the compensation gain when n6-01 = 2 [Online Tuning Selection = Voltage (0.1 - 50.0)
Expert Correction Tuning]. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
n6-11 Online Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000 971
(1B56) Tuning Sets the responsiveness for online resistor tuning. Set this parameter to approximately (0.000 - 1.000)
Expert 1.000 to enable the function. The function is disabled when the value is 0.000.
◆ n7: EZ Drive
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-01 Damping Gain for Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 971
(3111) Frequency Sets the oscillation suppression gain for the low speed range. (0.1 - 10.0)
Expert
n7-05 Response Gain for Load V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100 971
(3115) Changes Sets the response gain related to changes in the load. (10 - 1000)
Expert
n7-07 Speed Calculation Gain1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15.0 971
(3117) Sets the speed calculation gain during usual operation. Usually it is not necessary to (1.0 - 50.0)
n7-08 Speed Calculation Gain2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 25.0 971
(3118) Sets the speed calculation gain during a speed search. (1.0 - 50.0)
Expert
n7-10 Pull-in Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0% 972
(311A) Switching Speed Sets the speed range to operate with the pull-in current command. Drive rated frequency (0.0 - 100.0%)
Expert = 100% value. If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low
speed range, increase the setting value.
n7-11 Drv Mode Switch V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0% 972
(311B) Hysteresis Band Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the hysteresis level for Switching (1.0 - 20.0%)
Expert Speed set in n7-10 [Pull-in Current Switching Speed].
When the speed is lower than n7-10 + n7-11 during acceleration, the drive enables pull-
in current.
Note:
• When the drive accelerates, it enables these settings:
–Motor speed ≤ n7-10 + n7-11: n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration]
–Motor speed > n7-10 + n7-11: b8-01 [Energy Saving Control Selection]
• If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low speed range,
• When it is most important to save energy in the low speed range, decrease the
setting value.
n7-13 Driving Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100 ms 972
(311D) Switching Time Sets a time to enable the pull-in current commands. (0 - 1000 ms)
Expert If there is a large quantity of oscillation at speeds around n7-10 [Pull-in Current
Switching Speed], decrease the setting in 20 ms decrements.
n7-17 Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 972
(3122) TemperatureCorrection Sets the function to adjust for changes in the motor resistance value caused by changes (0 to 2)
in the temperature.
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid (Only 1 time)
2 : Valid (Every time)

◆ n8: PM Motor Control Tuning

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-01 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50% 973
(0540) Current Sets the Initial Rotor Position Estimated Current as a percentage where E5-03 [PM (0 - 100%)
Expert Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
n8-02 Pole Alignment Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80% 973
(0541) Level Sets the current at the time of polar attraction as a percentage where E5-03 [PM Motor (0 - 150%)
Expert Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
n8-03 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.5 s 973
(0542) Time Sets the length of the Current Starting Time, which is used for Z Pulse Offset Tuning. (1.5 - 5.0 s)
n8-04 Pole Alignment Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.5 s 973
(0543) Sets the length of the Polar Attraction Time, which is used for Z Pulse Offset Tuning. (1.5 - 5.0 s)
n8-11 Observer Calculation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by n8-72 973
(054A) Gain 2 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 1000.0)
n8-14 Polarity Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.000 974
(054D) Gain 3 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.000 - 10.000)
Expert
n8-15 Polarity Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.500 974
(054E) Gain 4 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.000 - 10.000)
Expert
n8-21 Motor Back-EMF (Ke) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.90 974
(0554) Gain Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.80 - 1.00)
Expert
n8-35 Initial Pole Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 974
(0562) Method Sets how the drive detects the position of the rotor at start. (0 - 2)
Note:
• When you operate an SPM motor, set n8-35 = 0. When you operate an IPM motor,
you can set n8-35 = 0 to 2.
• When you set n8-35 = 1, doHigh Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
0 : Pull-in
1 : High Frequency Injection
2 : Pulse Injection
n8-36 HFI Frequency Level for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 500 Hz 974
(0563) L Tuning Sets the injection frequency for high frequency injection. (200 - 1000 Hz)
Note:
• Set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High Frequency Injection] or n8-
57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] to enable this parameter.
• The drive automatically calculates this value when High Frequency Injection
Auto-Tuning completes successfully.
n8-37 HFI Voltage Amplitude V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20.0% 975
(0564) Level Sets the high frequency injection amplitude as a percentage where 200 V = 100% for (0.0 - 50.0%)
Expert 200 V class drives and 400 V = 100% for a 400 V class drives. Usually it is not
Note:
n8-39 HFI LPF Cutoff Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 250 Hz 975
(0566) Sets the low-pass filter shut-off frequency for high frequency injection. (0 - 1000 Hz)
Note:
n8-41 HFI P Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.5 975
(0568) Sets the response gain for the high frequency injection speed estimation. (-10.0 - +10.0)
Expert Note:
Parameter List
• When A1-02= 6 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM] and you do High
Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning, the drive automatically sets this parameter .
n8-42 HFI I Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s 975
(0569) Sets the integral time constant for the high frequency injection speed estimation. (0.00 - 9.99 s)
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-45 Speed Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.80 975
(0538) Detection Gain Sets the internal speed feedback detection reduction unit gain as a magnification value. (0.00 - 10.00)
n8-47 Pull-in Current Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0 s 976
(053A) Filter Time Sets the time constant the drive uses to align the pull-in current reference value with the (0.0 - 100.0 s)
actual current value. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
n8-48 Pull-in/Light Load Id V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30% 976
(053B) Current Sets the d-axis current that flows to the motor during run at constant speed as a (20 - 200%)
percentage where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%.
n8-49 Heavy Load Id Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01 976
(053C) Sets the d-axis current to that the drive will supply to the motor to run it at a constant (-200.0 - 0.0%)
Expert speed with a heavy load. Considers E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] to be
100%. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
n8-51 Pull-in Current @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 976
(053E) Acceleration Sets the pull-in current allowed to flow during acceleration/deceleration as a percentage (0 - 200%)
of the motor rated current.
Note:
rated current.
• A1-02 = 5 [OLV/PM]: E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
n8-54 Voltage Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 s 976
(056D) Compensation Time Sets the time constant that the drive uses when adjusting for voltage errors. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
Expert
n8-55 Motor to Load Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 977
(056E) Ratio Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia. (0 - 3)
0 : Below 1:10
1 : Between 1:10 and 1:30
3 : Beyond 1:50
n8-57 HFI Overlap Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 977
(0574) Sets the function that detects motor speed with high frequency injection. (0, 1)
Note:
When you set n8-57 = 1, do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
n8-62 Output Voltage Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V, 978
(057D) Level Sets the output voltage limit to prevent saturation of the output voltage. Usually it is not 400 V Class: 400.0 V
Expert necessary to change this parameter. (200 V Class: 0.0 to
Note: 230.0 V, 400 V Class:
• When A1-02 = 7, 8 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM EZOLV], this 0.0 to 460.0 V)
parameter is available in Expert mode.
• 200 V Class: 230.0 V
• 400 V Class: 460.0 V
n8-65 Speed Fdbk Gain @ oV V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50 978
(065C) Suppression Sets the gain of internal speed feedback detection suppression while the overvoltage (0.00 - 10.00)
Expert suppression function is operating as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary to
change this parameter.
n8-69 Speed Observer Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 978
(065D) P Gain Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the Proportional gain that the (0.00 - 20.00)
Expert drive uses for speed estimation.
n8-72 Speed Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 978
(0655) Method Select Selects the speed estimation method. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
Expert 0 : Method 1
1 : Method 2
n8-74 Light Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30% 978
(05C3) Set n8-48 [Pull-in/Light Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis (0 - 255%)
Expert current) that you will apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting
value of 100%.
n8-75 Medium Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50% 979
(05C4) (low) Set n8-78 [Medium Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis current) (0 - 255%)
Expert that you will apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting value of
100%.
n8-77 Heavy Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90% 979
(05CE) Set n8-49 [Heavy Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis current) (0 - 255%)
Expert that you will apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting value of
100%.
n8-78 Medium Load Id Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 979
(05F4) Sets the level of the pull-in current for mid-range loads. (0 - 255%)
Expert

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-79 Pull-in Current @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50% 979
(05FE) Deceleration Sets the pull-in current that can flow during deceleration as a percentage of the E5-03 (0 - 200%)
[PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)].
Note:
When n8-79 = 0, the drive will use the value set in n8-51 [Pull-in Current @
Acceleration].
n8-84 Polarity Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100% 979
(02D3) Current Sets the current that the drive uses to estimate the initial motor magnetic pole as a (0 - 150%)
Expert percentage where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%.
Note:
The drive automatically calculates this value when High Frequency Injection Auto-
Tuning completes successfully.
n8-94 Flux Position Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by d5-01 980
(012D) Method Sets the criteria that the drive uses to find changes in speed or load. Usually it is not (0, 1)
0 : Softstarter
1 : Speed Feedback
n8-95 Flux Position Est Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30 ms 980
(012E) Time Sets the time constant of the filter used for the recognition criteria value for speed and (0 - 100 ms)
Expert load changes. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Parameter List
11

11.13 o: Keypad-Related Settings

◆ o1: Keypad Display Selection
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-01 User Monitor Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 106 982
(0500) Sets the U monitor for the Drive Mode. This parameter is only available with an LED (104 - 855)
RUN keypad.
o1-02 Monitor Selection at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 982
(0501) Power-up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after you energize the drive. Refer (1 - 5)
RUN to “U: Monitors” for information about the monitor items that the keypad screen can
show. This parameter is only available with an LED keypad.
1 : Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2 : Direction
3 : Output Frequency (U1-02)
4 : Output Current (U1-03)
5 : User Monitor (o1-01)
o1-03 Frequency Display Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 982
(0502) Selection Sets the display units for the frequency reference and output frequency. (0 - 3)
0 : 0.01 Hz
1 : 0.01% (100% = E1-04)
2 : min-1 (r/min) units
3 : User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)
o1-04 V/f Pattern Display Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 983
(0503) Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the V/f pattern frequency. (0, 1)
0 : Hz
o1-05 LCD Contrast V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 983
(0504) Adjustment Sets the contrast of the LCD display on the keypad. (0 - 10)
RUN
o1-10 User Units Maximum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o1-03 983
(0520) Value Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency. (1 - 60000)
o1-11 User Units Decimal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o1-03 984
(0521) Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values. (0 - 3)
o1-24 Custom Monitor 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 101 984
(11AD) You can select a maximum of 12 monitors as user monitors and set them to parameters (0,101 - 9999)
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the first line. The
registered monitor is also used for different monitor displays of bar graph, analog meter,
and waveform.
(11AE) You can select a maximum of 12 monitors as user monitors and set them to parameters (0,101 - 9999)
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the second line. The
registered monitor is also used for different monitor displays of bar graph and
waveform.
(11AF) You can select a maximum of 12 monitors as user monitors and set them to parameters (0,101 - 9999)
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the third line. The
registered monitor is also used for the monitor display of the bar graph.
(11B0) You can select a maximum of 12 monitors as user monitors and set them to parameters (0,101 - 9999)
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the fourth line.
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the fifth line.
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the sixth line.
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the seventh line.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the eighth line.
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the ninth line.
RUN o1-24 to o1-35. This parameter sets the user monitor to show on the 10th line.
o1-36 LCD Backlight V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 984
(11B9) Brightness Sets the intensity of the LCD keypad backlight. (1 - 5)
RUN
o1-37 LCD Backlight ON/OFF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 985
(11BA) Selection Sets the automatic shut off function for the LCD backlight. (0, 1)
RUN 0 : OFF
1 : ON
o1-38 LCD Backlight Off- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60 s 985
(11BB) Delay Sets the time until the LCD backlight automatically turns off. (10 - 300 s)
RUN
o1-39 Show Initial Setup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 985
(11BC) Screen Sets the function to show the LCD keypad initial setup screen each time you energize (0, 1)
RUN the drive. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
0 : No
1 : Yes
o1-40 Home Screen Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 985
(11BD) Selection Sets the monitor display mode for the Home screen. This parameter is only available (0 - 3)
RUN with an LCD keypad.
0 : Custom Monitor
1 : Bar Graph
2 : Analog Gauge
3 : Trend Plot
o1-41 1st Monitor Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 986
(11C1) Selection Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor (0 - 1)
RUN 1] as a bar graph. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-42 ～ o1-42 )
1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-42 )
o1-42 1st Monitor Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 986
(11C2) Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor (0.0 - 100.0%)
o1-43 2nd Monitor Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 986
(11C3) Selection Selects the horizontal range used to display the monitor set in o1-25 [Custom Monitor (0 - 1)
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-44 ～ o1-44 )
1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-44 )
o1-44 2nd Monitor Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 986
(11C4) Setting Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-25 [Custom Monitor (0.0 - 100.0%)
o1-45 3rd Monitor Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 986
(11C5) Selection Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-26 [Custom Monitor (0 - 1)
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-46 ～ o1-46 )
Parameter List
1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-46 )
o1-46 3rd Monitor Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 986
(11C6) Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-26 [Custom Monitor (0.0 - 100.0%)
o1-47 Trend Plot 1 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -100.0% 986
(11C7) Minimum Value Sets the horizontal axis minimum value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 (-300.0 - +299.9%)
11
RUN [Custom Monitor 1] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD
keypad.

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-48 Trend Plot 1 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 987
(11C8) Maximum Value Sets the maximum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in (-299.9 - +300.0%)
RUN o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD
keypad.
o1-49 Trend Plot 2 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -100.0% 987
(11C9) Minimum Value Sets the horizontal axis minimum value used to display the monitor set in o1-25 (-300.0 - +299.9%)
RUN [Custom Monitor 2] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD
keypad.
o1-50 Trend Plot 2 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 987
(11CA) Maximum Value Sets the maximum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in (-299.9 - +300.0%)
RUN o1-25 [Custom Monitor 2] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD
keypad.
o1-51 Trend Plot Time Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 300 s 987
(11CB) Setting Sets the time scale (horizontal axis) to display the trend plot. When you change this (1 - 3600 s)
RUN setting, the drive automatically adjusts the data sampling time. This parameter is only
available with an LCD keypad.
o1-55 Analog Gauge Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 987
(11EE) Selection Sets the range used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as an analog ( 0, 1 )
RUN gauge. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-56 ～ o1-56 )
1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-56 )
o1-56 Analog Gauge Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0% 987
(11EF) Setting Sets the value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as an analog (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN meter. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
o1-58 Motor Power Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 988
(3125) Selection Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the motor rated power. (0, 1)
0 : kW
1 : HP
◆ o2: Keypad Operation

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-01 LO/RE Key Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 988
(0505) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function that lets you use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE
Modes.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o2-02 STOP Key Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 989
(0506) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function to use on the keypad to stop the drive when the Run
command source for the drive is REMOTE (external) and not assigned to the keypad.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o2-03 User Parameter Default V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 989
(0507) Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults (0 - 2)
to use during initialization.
0 : No change
1 : Set defaults
2 : Clear all
o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by the drive 989
(0508) Selection Sets the Drive Model code. Set this parameter after replacing the control board. (-)
o2-05 Home Mode Freq Ref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 990
(0509) Entry Mode (0, 1)
Sets the function that makes it necessary to push to use the keypad to change the
frequency reference value while in Drive Mode.
0 : ENTER Key Required
1 : Immediate / MOP-style
o2-06 Keypad Disconnect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 990
(050A) Detection Sets the function that stops the drive if you disconnect the keypad connection cable (0, 1)
from the drive or if you damage the cable while the keypad is the Run command source.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o2-07 Keypad RUN Direction V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 991
(0527) @ Power-up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the (0, 1)
Run command source.
0 : Forward
1 : Reverse

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-09 Reserved - - 991

(050D)
o2-23 External 24V Powerloss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 991
(11F8) Detection Sets the function to give a warning if the backup external 24 V power supply turns off (0, 1)
RUN when the main circuit power supply is in operation.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o2-24 LED Light Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 991
(11FE) Selection Sets the function to show the LED status rings and keypad LED lamps. (0 - 2)
0 : Enable Status Ring & Keypad LED
1 : LED Status Ring Disable
2 : Keypad LED Light Disable
o2-26 Alarm Display at Ext. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 991
(1563) 24V Power When you connect a backup external 24 V power supply, this parameter sets the (0, 1)
function to trigger an alarm when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
Note:
The drive will not run when it is operating from one 24-V external power supply.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o2-27 bCE Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 992
(1565) Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive (0 - 4)
in Bluetooth Mode.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
o2-33 Initial Pole Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 992
(1BB6) (External 24 V Power Sets initial pole detection during the first run after an external 24 V power supply (0, 1)
Supply) energizes the main circuit. While the main circuit is energized, the drive does not do
Expert
initial pole detection from the second Run command. Usually it is not necessary to
0 : Initial pole detection disabled
1 : Initial pole detection enabled
◆ o3: Copy Keypad Function

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-01 Copy Keypad Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 992
(0515) Selection Sets the function that saves and copies drive parameters to a different drive with the (0 - 4)
keypad.
0 : Copy Select
1 : Backup (drive → keypad)
2 : Restore (keypad → drive)
3 : Verify (check for mismatch)
4 : Erase (backup data of keypad)
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 992
(0516) Sets the copy function when o3-01 = 1 [Copy Keypad Function Selection = Backup (0, 1)
(drive → keypad)].
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o3-04 Select Backup/Restore V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 993
(0B3E) Location Sets the storage location for drive parameters when you back up and restore parameters. (0 - 3)
This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Memory Location 1
Parameter List
o3-05 Select Items to Backup/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 993
(0BDA) Restore Sets which parameters are backed up, restored, and referenced. This parameter is only (0, 1)
available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Standard Parameters
1 : Standard + DWEZ Parameters
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 993
(0BDE) Selection Sets the function that automatically backs up parameters. This parameter is only (0, 1)
available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 993
(0BDF) Interval Sets the interval at which the automatic parameter backup function saves parameters (0 - 3)
from the drive to the keypad.
Note:
This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Every 10 minutes
3 : Every 12 hours
◆ o4: Maintenance Monitors

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-01 Elapsed Operating Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h 994
(050B) Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10-hour units. (0 - 9999 h)
o4-02 Elapsed Operating Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 994
(050C) Selection Sets the condition that counts the cumulative operation time. (0, 1)
0 : U4-01 Shows Total Power-up Time
1 : U4-01 Shows Total RUN Time
o4-03 Fan Operation Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h 994
(050E) Setting Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10- (0 - 9999 h)
hour units.
o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 994
(051D) Setting Sets the U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
o4-07 Softcharge Relay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 995
(0523) Maintenance Set Sets the U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0% 995
(0525) Setting Sets the U4-07 [IGBT Maintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
o4-11 Fault Trace/History Init V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 995
(0510) (U2/U3) Resets the records of Monitors U2-xx [Fault Trace] and U3-xx [Fault History]. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
o4-12 kWh Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 995
(0512) Initialization Resets the monitor values for U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] and U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 (0, 1)
Digits].
0 : No Reset
1 : Reset
o4-13 RUN Command Counter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 995
(0528) @ Initialize Resets the monitor values for U4-02 [Num of Run Commands], U4-24 [Number of Runs (0, 1)
(Low)], and U4-25 [Number of Runs (High)].
0 : No Reset
1 : Reset
o4-22 Time Format V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 996
(154F) Sets the time display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD (0 - 2)
RUN keypad.
0 : 24 Hour Clock
1 : 12 Hour Clock
2 : 12 Hour JP Clock
o4-23 Date Format V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 996
(1550) Sets the date display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD (0 - 2)
RUN keypad.
0 : YYYY/MM/DD
1 : DD/MM/YYYY
2 : MM/DD/YYYY
o4-24 bAT Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 996
(310F) Sets operation when the drive detects bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage] and TiM (0 - 2)
RUN [Keypad Time Not Set].
0 : Disable
1 : Enable (Alarm Detected)
2 : Enable (Fault Detected)

◆ o5: Log Function

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-00 Log Type V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1000
(1E81) Sets the type of data log function. This parameter is only available when you use an (0, 1)
RUN LCD keypad.
0 : Long Term Log
1 : Short Term Log
o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1000
(1551) Sets the data log function. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 1)
RUN 0 : OFF
1 : ON
o5-02 Log Sampling Interval V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o5-00 1000
(1552) Sets the data log sampling cycle. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD (Determined by o5-00)
RUN keypad.
Note:
The default setting and setting range change when o5-00 [Normal / Heavy Duty
Selection] changes.
• o5-00 = 0 [Long Term Log]
–Default setting: 1000 ms
–Setting range: 100 - 60000 ms
• o5-00 = 1 [Short Term Log]
o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 101 1000
(1553) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
(1554) Sets the data log monitor (Ux-xx). This parameter is only available when you use an (000, 101 - 9999)
RUN LCD keypad.
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o5-04 = 102 to monitor
decimal number. For example, set o5-04 = 1301 to monitor Ud-01.
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN LCD keypad.
Note:
U1-01 [Frequency Reference].
RUN LCD keypad.
Note:
(155A) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
Parameter List
RUN
(155B) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999)
RUN
(155C) Sets the data log monitor. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 999) 11
RUN

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-15 Trigger Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1002
(1E82) Sets the type of trigger for the short-term data log. This parameter is only available (0, 1)
RUN when you use an LCD keypad.
0 : Digital Trigger
1 : Analog Trigger
o5-16 Digital Trigger Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV E 1003
(1E83) Sets the function for the digital trigger target from the setting values for multi-function (0 - FF)
RUN digital outputs. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
o5-17 Analog Trigger Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102 1003
(1E84) Sets the monitor for the analog trigger target. This parameter is only available when you (0 - 9999)
RUN use an LCD keypad.
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o5-17 = 101 to monitor
• When it is not necessary to set a data log monitor, set this parameter to 000.
o5-18 Analog Trigger Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0% 1003
(1E85) Sets the level to compare with the analog trigger target. This parameter is only available (-999.9% - +999.9%)
o5-19 Trigger Condition V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1003
(1E86) Sets the condition with which to detect the trigger. This parameter is only available (0, 1)
0 : Rising Edge
1 : Falling Edge
o5-20 Pre-Trigger Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90% 1003
(1E87) Sets the percentage of data to save before the drive detects the trigger for the short-term (0% - 100%)
RUN data log. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
o5-21 Trend Log Sampling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1004
(1E88) Time Selection Sets the sampling cycle for the trend log to save data before the drive detects the trigger. (0 - 4)
RUN The trend log works at the same time as the short-term data log. This parameter is only
available when you use an LCD keypad.
0 : Trend Log Disabled
1 : 0.1 s (About 1 hour)
2 : 1 s (About 10 hours)

11.14 q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters
11.14 q: DriveWorksEZ Parameters

◆ q1-01 to qx-xx: Reserved for DriveWorksEZ
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
q1-01 to qx-xx Reserved for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Refer to “DriveWorksEZ
(1600 - xxxx) DriveWorksEZ These parameters are reserved for use with DriveWorksEZ. Operation Manual”.
Parameter List
11

11.15 r: DWEZ Connection 1-20
11.15 r: DWEZ Connection 1-20

◆ r1-01 to r1-40: DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 (Upper / Lower)
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
r1-01 to r1-40: DriveWorksEZ Connection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1840 - 1867) Parameters 1 to 20 (Upper / DriveWorksEZ Connection Parameters 1 to 20 (Upper / Lower) (0 - FFFFH)
Lower)

11.16 T: Motor Tuning

◆ T0: Tuning Mode Selection
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T0-00 Tuning Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1005
(1197) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (0, 1)
0 : Motor Parameter Tuning
1 : Control Tuning
◆ T1: InductionMotor Auto-Tuning

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-00 Motor 1/Motor 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 1005
(0700) Selection Sets which motor to tune when motor 1/2 switching is enabled. (1, 2)
You can only use the keypad to set this parameter. You cannot use external input
terminals to set it.
Note:
This parameter is enabled when H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection] is set. When H1-xx
≠ 16 the keypad will not show this parameter.
1 : Motor 1 (sets E1-xx, E2-xx)
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 1006
(0701) Selection Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (Determined by A1-02)
0 : Rotational Auto-Tuning
1 : Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
2 : Stationary Line-Line Resistance
T1-02 Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 1006
Note: (0.00 - 1000.0)
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 1006
(0703) Sets the rated voltage (V) of the motor. Enter the base speed voltage for constant output C6-01
motors. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.5
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
511.0 V)
T1-04 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 1006
(0704) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0 Hz 1006
(0705) Sets the base frequency (Hz) of the motor. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4 1007
(0706) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 120)
T1-07 Motor Base Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1450 min-1 (r/min) 1007
(0707) Sets the motor base speed for Auto-Tuning (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 35400 min-1 (r/min))
T1-08 Encoder Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr 1007
(0708) (PPR) Sets the number of PG (pulse generator, encoder) pulses. (0 - 60,000 ppr)
T1-09 Motor No-Load Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV - 1007
(0709) Sets the no-load current of the motor. (0 A - T1-04; max. of
2999.9)
T1-10 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV - 1007
(070A) Frequency Sets motor rated slip. (0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E2-10 or 1007
Parameter List
(070B) Sets the iron loss to calculate the energy-saving coefficient. E4-10
(0 - 65535 W)
11

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-12 Test Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1008
(0BDB) Sets the function to enable Test Mode after Stationary Auto-Tuning. When you can (0, 1)
operate the motor with a light load attached after Stationary Auto-Tuning is complete,
enable this parameter.
Note:
You must first set T1-10 = 0 [Motor Rated Slip Frequency = 0 Hz] to enable this
parameter.
0 : No
1 : Yes
T1-13 No-load voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV T1-03 × 0.85 1008
(0BDC) Sets the no-load voltage of the motor. When the no-load voltage at rated speed is (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
available, for example on the motor test report, set the voltage in this parameter. If the V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
no-load voltage is not available, do not change this parameter. 510.0 V)
Note:
To get the same qualities as a Yaskawa 1000-series drive or previous series drive,
set this parameter = T1-03 [Motor Rated Voltage].
◆ T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-01 PM Auto-Tuning V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1008
(0750) Selection Sets the type of Auto-Tuning for PM motors. (Determined by A1-02)
0 : Manual Entry w/ Motor Data Sheet
1 : Stationary (Ld, Lq, R)
2 : Stationary (R Only)
3 : Z-Pulse Offset (Pole Position)
4 : Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF)
T2-02 PM Motor Code V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 1009
(0751) Selection Enter the PM motor code as specified by the rotation speed and motor output. and o2-04
(0000 - FFFF)
T2-03 PM Motor Type V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 1009
(0752) Sets the type of PM motor the drive will operate. (0, 1)
0 : IPM motor
1 : SPM motor
T2-04 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 1009
(0730) Sets the PM motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. C6-01
Note: (0.00 - 1000.0)
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).
T2-05 PM Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V, 1009
(0732) Sets the rated voltage (V) of the motor. 400 V Class: 400.0 V
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
510.0 V)
T2-06 PM Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 1009
(0733) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the
T2-07 PM Motor Base V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 87.5 Hz 1009
(0753) Frequency Sets the base frequency (Hz) of the motor. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
T2-08 Number of PM Motor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6 1010
(0734) Poles Sets the number of motor poles. (2 - 120)
T2-09 PM Motor Base Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1750 min-1 (r/min) 1010
(0731) Sets the motor base speed (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 34500 min-1 (r/min))
T2-10 PM Motor Stator V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02 1010
(0754) Resistance Sets the stator resistance for each motor phase. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
• This parameter does not set line-to-line resistance.
• On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the unit is mΩ, and the setting range is 0.000 mΩ
to 65.000 mΩ.
T2-11 PM Motor d-Axis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02 1010
(0735) Inductance Sets the d-axis inductance of the motor on a per phase basis. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)
T2-12 PM Motor q-Axis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02 1010
(0736) Inductance Sets the q-Axis inductance of the motor on a per phase basis. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-13 Back-EMF Units V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1 1010
(0755) Selection Sets the units that the drive uses to set the induced voltage constant. (0, 1)
0 : mV/(rev/min)
1 : mV/(rad/sec)
T2-14 Back-EMF Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-13 1010
(0737) Constant (Ke) Sets the motor induced voltage constant (Ke). (0.0 - 2000.0)
T2-15 Pull-In Current Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30% 1010
(0756) Sets the level of the pull-in current as a percentage of E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (0 - 120%)
(FLA)]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
T2-16 Encoder Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr 1011
(0738) (PPR) Sets the number of PG (pulse generator, encoder) pulses. (1 - 15000 ppr)
T2-17 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 ° 1011
(0757) Sets the encoder Z-pulse offset (Δθ) (pulse generator, encoder) that is listed on the (-180.0 - +180.0°)
motor nameplate.
◆ T3: ASR and Inertia Tuning

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-00 Control Loop Tuning V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1011
(1198) Selection Sets the type of Control Auto-Tuning. (0 - 3)
0 : Inertia Tuning
1 : ASR (Speed Regulator)
2 : Deceleration Rate Tuning
3 : KEB Tuning
Note:
Settings 0 and 1 are available only when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection =
CLV, CLV/PM].
T3-01 Test Signal Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3.0 Hz 1011
(0760) Sets the frequency of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning. Usually (0.1 - 20.0 Hz)
T3-02 Test Signal Amplitude V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 rad 1011
(0761) Sets the amplitude of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning. Usually (0.1 - 10.0 rad)
T3-03 Motor Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 1011
(0762) Sets the inertia of the motor. This value uses the test signal response to calculate the C6-01, and E5-01
load inertia. (0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
Note:
models:
4002 to 4012
to 4103
4H12
T3-04 System Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 Hz 1012
(0763) Frequency This parameter uses the load inertia value from the Inertia Tuning process to (0.1 - 50.0 Hz)
automatically calculate and set C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1].
◆ T4: EZ Tuning
No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-01 EZ Tuning Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1012
(3130) Selection Sets the type of Auto-Tuning for EZOLV control. (0, 1)
0 : Motor Parameter Setting
1 : Line-to-Line Resistance
Parameter List
T4-02 Motor Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 1012
(3131) Sets the type of motor. (0, 1, 2)
0 : Induction (IM)
T4-04
(3133)
Motor Rated Revolutions V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM
Sets rated rotation speed (min-1) of the motor.

EZOLV -
((40 Hz to 120 Hz) × 60
1012 11
× 2/E9-08)

No. Default
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-05 Motor Rated Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 1013
(3134) Sets the rated frequency (Hz) of the motor. and o2-04
(40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
T4-06 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V, 1013
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 -
510.0 V)
T4-07 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, 1013
(3136) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. C6-01
(10% to 200% of the
T4-08 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-10 1013
(3137) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.10 - 1000.0)
Note:
kW to 1000.0 kW (0.1 HP to 1340.5 HP).
T4-09 Number of Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 1013

11.17 U: Monitors
11.17 U: Monitors
◆ U1: Operation Status Monitors
No.
Name Description MFAO Signal Level
(Hex.)
U1-01 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(0040) Shows the frequency reference value. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the frequency (0 V to +10 V)
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U1-02 Output frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(0041) Shows the output frequency. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the display frequency (0 V to +10 V)
units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U1-03 Output current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Drive rated current
(0042) Shows the output current.
The keypad shows the value of U1-03 in amperes (A). When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications to show the monitor, the current is “8192 = drive rated current (A)”. Use the
formula: “Numerals being displayed / 8192 × drive rated current (A)” to use the MEMOBUS/
Modbus communication current value shown in the monitor.
Unit: When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
• 0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4675
• 1 A: 4810 - 4H12
U1-04 Control Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0043) Shows the drive control method.
0 : V/f Control
U1-05 Motor Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(0044) Shows the detected motor speed. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the frequency (0 V to +10 V)
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U1-06 Output Voltage Ref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(0045) Shows the output voltage reference. Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 400 V
(0046) Shows the DC bus voltage. 400 V Class: 10 V = 800 V
Unit: 1 V
U1-08 Output Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Drive capacity (motor
(0047) Shows the internally-calculated output power. rated power) kW
When you change A1-02 [Control Method Selection], it will also change the signal level of the (-10 V to +10 V)
analog output.
• A1-02 = 0, 1: Drive capacity (kW)
• A1-02 = 2, 3, 4: PM Motor Rated Power [E2-11] (kW)
• A1-02 = 5, 6, 7: PM Motor Rated Power [E5-02] (kW)
• A1-02 = 8: Motor Rated Power [E9-07] (kW)
Unit: The display units are different for different models:
• 0.01 kW: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 kW: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
U1-09 Torque Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Motor rated torque
(0048) Shows the internal torque reference value. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.1%
Parameter List
11

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U1-10 Input Terminal Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0049) Shows the status of the MFDI terminal where 1 = ON, 0 = OFF.
For example, U1-10 shows “00000011” when terminals S1 and S2 are ON.
bit0 : Terminal S1 (MFDI 1)
U1-11 Output Terminal Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(004A) Shows the status of the MFDO terminal where 1 = ON and 0 = OFF.
For example, U1-11 shows “00000011” when terminals M1 and M3 are ON.
Note:
When H2-xx = 100 to 1A7 [Inverse Output of Function], U1-11 does not show the status in
inverse.
bit0 : Terminal M1-M2
bit3 : Not used (normal value of 0).
bit7 : Fault relay MA/MB-MC
U1-12 Drive Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(004B) Shows drive status where 1 = ON and 0 = OFF.
For example, U1-12 shows “00000101” during run with the Reverse Run command.
bit0 : During Run
bit1 : During zero-speed
bit2 : During reverse
bit3 : During fault reset signal input
bit4 : During speed agreement
bit5 : Drive ready
bit6 : During minor fault detection
bit7 : During fault detection
U1-13 Terminal A1 Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = 100% (0 V to +10
(004E) Shows the signal level of terminal A1. V)
Unit: 0.1%
U1-14 Terminal A2 Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = 100% (0 V to +10
(004F) Shows the signal level of terminal A2. V)
Unit: 0.1%
U1-15 Terminal A3 Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = 100% (-10 V to +10
(0050) Shows the signal level of terminal A3. V)
Unit: 0.1%
U1-16 SFS Output Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(0053) Shows the output frequency after soft start. Shows the frequency with acceleration and frequency (0 V to +10 V)
deceleration times and S-curves. Parameter o1-03 [Keypad Display Unit Selection] sets the
display units.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U1-17 DI-A3 Input Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0058) Shows the reference value input from DI-A3 option.
Shows the input signal for DI-A3 in hexadecimal as set in F3-01 [Digital Input Function
Selection].
3FFFF: Set (1 bit) + Sign (1 bit) + 16 bit
U1-18 oPE Fault Parameter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0061) Shows the parameter number that caused the oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error] or oPE08
[Parameter Selection Error].

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0066) Code Shows the contents of the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication error where 1 = “error” and 0 =
“no error”.
For example, U1-19 shows “00000001” when there is a CRC error.
bit0 : CRC Error
bit1 : Data Length Error
bit3 : Parity Error
bit4 : Overrun Error
bit5 : Framing Error
bit6 : Timed Out
U1-21 AI-A3 Term V1 Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = 100% (-10 V to +10
(0077) Shows the analog reference of terminal V1 on analog input option card AI-A3. V)
Unit: 0.1%
(072A) Shows the analog reference of terminal V2 on analog input option card AI-A3. V)
Unit: 0.1%
(072B) Shows the analog reference of terminal V3 on analog input option card AI-A3. V)
Unit: 0.1%
U1-24 Input Pulse Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by H6-02
(007D) Shows the frequency to pulse train input terminal RP.
Unit: 1 Hz
U1-25 SoftwareNumber Flash V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(004D) Shows the FLASH ID.
U1-26 SoftwareNumber ROM V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(005B) Shows the ROM ID.
U1-50 Virtual Analog Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by H7-40
(1199) Shows the virtual analog input value.
Expert
U1-91 Output Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(154E) Shows the drive internal output voltage reference. Vrms
Expert Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
◆ U2: Fault Trace

No.
(Hex.)
U2-01 Current Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0080) Shows the fault that the drive has when viewing the monitor.
U2-02 Previous Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0081) Shows the fault that occurred most recently.
U2-03 Freq Reference@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0082) Shows the frequency reference at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-01 [Frequency Reference] to monitor the frequency reference value.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U2-04 Output Freq @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0083) Shows the output frequency at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-02 [Output Frequency] to monitor the actual output frequency.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U2-05 Output Current@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0084) Shows the output current at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-03 [Output Current] to monitor the output current. The keypad shows the value of U1-03
in amperes (A).
Parameter List
When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to show the monitor, the current is “8192 =
drive rated current (A)”. Use the formula: “Numerals being displayed / 8192 × drive rated current
(A)” to use the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication current value shown in the monitor.
• 0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4675
• 1 A: 4810 - 4H12 11

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U2-06 Motor Speed @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0085) Shows the motor speed at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-05 [Motor Speed] to monitor the motor speed.
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U2-07 Output Voltage@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0086) Shows the output voltage reference at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-06 [Output Voltage Ref] to monitor the output voltage reference.
Unit: 0.1 V
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0087) Shows the DC bus voltage at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage] to monitor the DC bus voltage.
Unit: 1 V
U2-09 Output Power @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0088) Shows the output power at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-08 [Output Power] to monitor the output power.
Unit: 0.1 kW
U2-10 Torque Ref @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0089) Shows the torque reference at the fault that occurred most recently as a percentage of the motor
rated torque.
Use U1-09 [Torque Reference] to monitor the torque reference.
Unit: 0.1%
U2-11 Input Terminal Status @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(008A) Fault Shows the status of the MFDI terminals at the most recent fault where 1 = (ON) and 0 = (OFF).
For example, U2-11 shows “00000011” when terminals S1 and S2 are ON.
Use U1-10 [Input Terminal Status] to monitor the MFDI terminal status.
bit0 : Terminal S1
bit1 : Terminal S2
bit2 : Terminal S3
bit3 : Terminal S4
bit4 : Terminal S5
bit5 : Terminal S6
bit6 : Terminal S7
bit7 : Terminal S8
U2-12 Output Terminal Status @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(008B) Fault Shows the status of the MFDO terminals at the most recent fault where 1 = (ON) and 0 = (OFF).
For example, U2-12 shows “00000011” when terminals M1 and M3 are ON.
Use U1-11 [Output Terminal Status] to monitor the MFDO terminal status.
bit7 : Fault relay MA/MB-MC
U2-13 Operation Status @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(008C) Shows the status of the MFDO terminals at the most recent fault where 1 = (ON) and 0 = (OFF).
For example, U2-13 shows “00000001” during run.
Use U1-12 [Drive Status] to monitor the MFDO terminal status.
bit0 : During Run
bit1 : During zero-speed
bit2 : During reverse
bit3 : During fault reset signal input
bit4 : During speed agreement
bit5 : Drive ready
bit6 : During minor fault detection
bit7 : During fault detection
U2-14 Elapsed Time @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(008D) Shows the cumulative operation time of the drive at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] to monitor the cumulative operation time.
Unit: 1 h
U2-15 SFS Output @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E0) Shows the output frequency after soft start at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U1-16 [SFS Output Frequency] to monitor the output frequency after soft start.
Unit: 0.01 Hz

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U2-16 q-Axis Current@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E1) Shows the q-Axis current of the motor at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U6-01 [Iq Secondary Current] to monitor the q-Axis current of the motor.
Unit: 0.1 %
U2-17 d-Axis Current@Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E2) Shows the d-Axis current of the motor at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U6-02 [Id ExcitationCurrent] to monitor the d-Axis current of the motor.
Unit: 0.1%
U2-19 ControlDeviation@Flt V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E4) Shows the amount of control axis deviation (Δθ) at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U6-10 [ContAxisDeviation Δθ] to monitor the actual amount of control axis deviation (Δθ).
Unit: 0.1 °
U2-20 Heatsink Temp @Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(008E) Shows the heatsink temperature at the fault that occurred most recently.
Use U4-08 [Heatsink Temperature] to monitor the temperature of the heatsink.
Unit: 1 °C
U2-21 STPo Detect @ Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(1166) Monitors conditions to detect STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] faults. The bit for each condition
Expert is shown as ON or OFF.
bit0 : Excessive current
bit1 : Induced voltage deviation
bit2 : d-axis current deviation
bit3 : Motor lock at startup
bit4 : Acceleration stall continue
bit5 : Acceleration stall repeat
◆ U3: Fault History

No.
(Hex.)
U3-01 1st MostRecent Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0090) Shows the fault history of the most recent fault.
Note:
The drive saves this fault history to two types of registers at the same time for the
U3-02 2nd MostRecent Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0091) Shows the fault history of the second most recent fault.
Note:
U3-03 3rd MostRecent Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0092) Shows the fault history of the third most recent fault.
Note:
U3-04 4th MostRecent Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0093) Shows the fault history of the fourth most recent fault.
Note:
(0804) Shows the fault history of the fifth most recent fault.
(0805) Shows the fault history of the sixth most recent fault.
Parameter List
(0806) Shows the fault history of the seventh most recent fault.
(0807) Shows the fault history of the eighth most recent fault.
(0808) Shows the fault history of the ninth most recent fault.
U3-10 10th MostRecentFault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
11
(0809) Shows the fault history of the tenth most recent fault.

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U3-11 ElapsedTime@1stFault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0094) Shows the cumulative operation time when the most recent fault occurred.
Note:
The drive saves this cumulative operation time to two types of registers at the same time for
the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Unit: 1 h
U3-12 ElapsedTime@2ndFault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0095) Shows the cumulative operation time when the second most recent fault occurred.
Note:
Unit: 1 h
U3-13 ElapsedTime@3rdFault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0096) Shows the cumulative operation time when the third most recent fault occurred.
Note:
Unit: 1 h
U3-14 ElapsedTime@4thFault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0097) Shows the cumulative operation time when the fourth most recent fault occurred.
Note:
Unit: 1 h
(080E) Shows the cumulative operation time when the fifth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
(080F) Shows the cumulative operation time when the sixth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
(0810) Shows the cumulative operation time when the seventh most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
(0811) Shows the cumulative operation time when the eighth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
(0812) Shows the cumulative operation time when the ninth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
U3-20 ElapsedTime@10 Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0813) Shows the cumulative operation time when the tenth most recent fault occurred.
Unit: 1 h
◆ U4: Maintenance Monitors

No.
(Hex.)
U4-01 Cumulative Ope Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 99999 h
(004C) Shows the cumulative operation time of the drive.
Use parameter o4-01 [Elapsed Operating Time Setting] to reset this monitor. Use parameter o4-02
[Elapsed Operating Time Selection] to select the cumulative operation times from:
• The time from when the drive is energized until it is de-energized.
• The time at which the Run command is turned ON.
The maximum value that the monitor will show is 99999. After this value is more than 99999, the
drive automatically resets it and starts to count from 0 again.
Unit: 1 h
Note:
The MEMOBUS/Modbus communication data is shown in 10 h units. Use register 0099H for
data in 1 h units.
U4-02 Num of Run Commands V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 65535 times
(0075) Shows how many times that the drive has received a Run command.
Use parameter o4-13 [RUN Command Counter @ Initialize] to reset this monitor. The maximum
value that the monitor will show is 65535. After this value is more than 65535, the drive
automatically resets it and starts to count from 0 again.
Unit: 1

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U4-03 Cooling Fan Ope Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 99999 h
(0067) Shows the cumulative operation time of the cooling fans.
Use parameter o4-03 [Fan Operation Time Setting] to reset this monitor. The maximum value that
the monitor will show is 99999. After this value is more than 99999, the drive automatically resets
it and starts to count from 0 again.
Unit: 1 h
Note:
The MEMOBUS/Modbus communication data is shown in 10 h units. Use register 009BH for
data in 1 h units.
U4-04 Cool Fan Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100%
(007E) Shows the cumulative operation time of the cooling fans as a percentage of the estimated
performance life of the cooling fans.
The default value is 0. The value counts up from 0.
Use o4-03 [Fan Operation Time Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the cooling fans when this monitor is at 90%.
U4-05 CapacitorMaintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100%
(007C) Shows the operation time of the electrolytic capacitors for the main circuit and control circuit as a
percentage of the estimated performance life of the electrolytic capacitors.
Use o4-05 [Capacitor Maintenance Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the electrolytic capacitor when this monitor is at 90%.
U4-06 PreChargeRelayMainte V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100%
(07D6) Shows the operation time of the soft charge bypass relay as a percentage of the estimated
performance life of the soft charge bypass relay.
Use o4-07 [Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the drive when this monitor is at 90%.
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100%
(07D7) Shows the operation time of the IGBTs as a percentage of the estimated performance life of the
IGBTs.
Use o4-09 [IGBT Maintenance Setting] to reset this monitor.
Unit: 1%
Note:
Replace the drive when this monitor is at 90%.
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100 °C
(0068) Shows the heatsink temperature of the drive.
Unit: 1 °C
U4-09 LED Check V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(005E) Turns on the LED Status Ring and all of the keypad LEDs to make sure that the LEDs operate
correctly.
Note:
A damaged LED Status Ring board will prevent an accurate estimate of the internal status of
the drive. Do not use only the LED Status Ring to estimate the status of the drive and motors.
1. Set o2-24 = 0 [LED Light Function Selection = Enable Status Ring & Keypad LED].
2. Push when U4-09 is the top monitor shown on the keypad.

All LEDs on the keypad and LED Status Ring will turn on.
Note:
When Safety input 2 CH is open (STo), READY will flash.
U4-10 kWh, Lower 4 Digits V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(005C) Shows the lower 4 digits of the watt hour value for the drive.
Unit: 1 kWh
Note:
The watt hour is displayed in 9 digits. Monitor U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 Digits] shows the upper
5 digits and U4-10 shows the lower 4 digits.
Parameter List
Example for 12345678.9 kWh:

U4-10: 678.9 kWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh
11

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(005D) Shows the upper 5 digits of the watt hour value for the drive.
Unit: 1 MWh
Note:
Monitor U4-11 shows the upper 5 digits and U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] shows the lower 4
digits.
Example for 12345678.9 kWh:
U4-10: 678.9 kWh
U4-11: 12345 MWh
U4-13 Peak Hold Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07CF) Shows the hold value of the peak value (rms) for the drive output current.
Use U4-14 [PeakHold Output Freq] to show the drive output frequency at the time that the drive
holds the output current.
The drive will hold the peak hold current at the next start up and restart of the power supply. The
drive keeps the value that was under hold during baseblock (during stop).
The keypad shows the value of U4-13 in amperes (A). When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications to show the monitor, the current is “8192 = drive rated current (A)”. Use the
formula: “Numerals being displayed / 8192 × drive rated current (A)” to use the MEMOBUS/
Modbus communication current value shown in the monitor.
• 0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4675
• 1 A: 4810 - 4H12
U4-14 PeakHold Output Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07D0) Shows the output frequency at which the peak value (rms) of the drive output current is held.
The peak hold current can be monitored by U4-13 [Peak Hold Current].
The peak hold output frequency will be cleared at the next startup and restart of the power supply.
The drive keeps the value that was under hold during baseblock (during stop).
Unit: 0.01 Hz
U4-16 Motor oL1 Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100%
(07D8) Shows the integrated value of oL1 [Motor Overload] as a percentage of oL1 detection level.
Unit: 0.1%
U4-18 Reference Source V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07DA) Shows the selected frequency reference source.
The keypad shows the frequency reference source as “XY-nn” as specified by these rules:
X: External Reference 1/2 Selection [H1-xx = 2] selection status
• 1: b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1]
• 2: b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2]
Y-nn: Frequency reference source
• 0-01: Keypad (d1-01 [Reference 1])
• 1-00: Analog input (unassigned)
• 1-01: MFAI terminal A1
• 2-02 to 2-17: Multi-step speed reference (d1-02 to d1-17 [Reference 2 to 16, Jog Reference])
• 3-01: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
• 4-01: Communication option card
• 5-01: Pulse train input
• 7-01: DriveWorksEZ
• 9-01: Up/Down command
U4-19 Modbus FreqRef (dec) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(07DB) Shows the frequency reference sent to the drive from the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (0 V to +10 V)
as a decimal.
Unit: 0.01%
U4-20 Option Freq Ref(dec) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(07DC) Shows the frequency reference sent to the drive from the communication option as a decimal. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01 %

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U4-21 Run Command Source V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output The
(07DD) Shows the selected Run command source. keypad shows the Run
command source as "XY-
The keypad shows the Run command source as “XY-nn” as specified by these rules: nn" as specified by these
X: External Reference 1/2 Selection [H1-xx = 2] selection status rules: available
• 1: b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1]
• 2: b1-16 [Run Command Selection 2]
Y: Run command source
• 0: Keypad
• 1: Control circuit terminal
• 3: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
• 4: Communication option card
• 7: DriveWorksEZ
nn: Run command limit status data
• 00: No limit status.
• 01: The Run command was left ON when the drive stopped in the Programming Mode.
• 02: The Run command was left ON when switching from LOCAL Mode to REMOTE Mode.
• 03: The Run command is in standby after the drive was energized until the soft charge bypass
contactor turns ON.
Note:
The drive will detect Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] or Uv [Undervoltage] if the soft charge
bypass contactor does not turn ON after 10 s.
• 04: Restart after run stop is prohibited.
• 05: Fast stop has been executed using the MFDI terminal. Or, the motor has ramped to stop by
pressing the STOP key on the keypad.
• 06: b1-17 = 0 [Run Command at Power Up = Disregard Existing RUN Command] is set.
• 07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer.
• 08: Frequency reference is below E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] during baseblock.
• 09: Waiting for the Enter command from PLC.
U4-22 Modbus CmdData (hex) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07DE) Shows the operation signal (register 0001H) sent to the drive from MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications as a 4-digit hexadecimal number (zero suppress).
The keypad shows the operation signal as specified by these rules:
bit0 : Forward run/Stop
bit1 : Reverse run/Stop
bit2 : External fault
bit3 : Fault Reset
bit4 : Multi-function input 1
bitA : Multi-function input 7
bitB : Multi-function input 8
bitC : Not used (normal value of 0).
bitD : Not used (normal value of 0).
bitE : Not used (normal value of 0).
bitF : Not used (normal value of 0).
U4-23 Option CmdData (hex) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07DF) Shows the operation signal (register 0001H) sent to the drive from MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications as a 4-digit hexadecimal number. The keypad shows the operation signal as
specified by these rules:
bit 0 : Forward run/Stop
bit 1 : Reverse run/Stop
bit 2 : External fault
bit 3 : Fault Reset
bit 4 : Multi-function input 1
Parameter List
bit A : Multi-function input 7

bit B : Multi-function input 8
bit C : Not used (normal value of 0).
bit D : Not used (normal value of 0).
bit E : Not used (normal value of 0).
bit F : Not used (normal value of 0).
11

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U4-24 Number of Runs (Low) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E6) Shows the lower 4 digits of the drive run count.
Note:
The drive run count is an 8-digit number. Monitor U4-25 [Number of Runs(High)] shows the
upper 4 digits and U4-24 shows the lower 4 digits.
U4-25 Number of Runs(High) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07E7) Shows the upper 4 digits of the drive run count.
Note:
The drive run count is an 8-digit number. Monitor U4-25 shows the upper 4 digits and U4-24
[Number of Runs (Low)] shows the lower 4 digits.
U4-52 Torque Ref from Comm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 100% (0 V to +10 V)
(1592) Shows the torque reference that the drive received from a serial communication option card or
from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications as a decimal number.
Unit: 0.1%
U4-75 Comm Option Type V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(1BC4) Shows the protocol of the communication option currently connected to the drive.
1 : Modbus TCP/IP (SI-EM3)
2 : EtherNet/IP (SI-EN3) or PROFINET (SI-EP3)
4 : EtherCAT (SI-ES3)
8 : CC-Link (SI-C3)
9 : DeviceNet (SI-N3)
A : PROFIBUS-DP (SI-P3)
B : CANopen (SI-S3)
D : MECHATROLINK-Ⅱ (SI-T3)
11 : LONWORKS (SI-W3)
12 : MECHATROLINK-Ⅲ (SI-ET3)
70 : Protocol not set (JOHB-SMP3)
71 : Modbus TCP/IP (JOHB-SMP3)
72 : EtherNet/IP (JOHB-SMP3)
74 : EtherCAT (JOHB-SMP3)
78 : PROFINET (JOHB-SMP3)
FF : Communication Option not Connected
U4-76 MAC Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(1BC5) 1, 2 Shows the first and second octets of MAC address 1.
Note:
This monitor is for JOHB-SMP3.
When you connect a communication option that is not a JOHB-SMP3, the drive shows ”00-
00”.
(1BC6) 3, 4 Shows the third and fourth octets of MAC address 1.
Note:
00”.
(1BC7) 5, 6 Shows the fifth and sixth octets of MAC address 1.
Note:
00”.
(1BC8) 1, 2 Shows the first and second octets of MAC address 2.
Expert Note:
00”.
(1BC9) 3, 4 Shows the third and fourth octets of MAC address 2.
Expert Note:
00”.
(1BCA) 5, 6 Shows the fifth and sixth octets of MAC address 2.
Expert Note:
00”.

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
(1BCB) 1, 2 Shows the first and second octets of MAC address 3.
Expert Note:
00”.
(1BCC) 3, 4 Shows the third and fourth octets of MAC address 3.
Expert Note:
00”.
(1BCD) 5, 6 Shows the fifth and sixth octets of MAC address 3.
Expert Note:
00”.
◆ U5: PID Monitors

No.
(Hex.)
U5-01 PID Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(0057) Shows the PID control feedback value. Parameter b5-20 [PID Unit Selection] sets the display (0 V to +10 V)
units.
Unit: 0.01%
U5-02 PID Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(0063) Shows the change between the PID setpoint and PID feedback (the quantity of PID input) as a (0 V to +10 V)
percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Unit: 0.01%
U5-03 PID Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(0064) Shows the PID control output as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
U5-04 PID Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(0065) Shows the PID setpoint. Parameter b5-20 [PID Unit Selection] sets the display units. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
U5-05 PID DifferentialFdbk V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(07D2) Shows the PID differential feedback value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. frequency (-10 V to +10 V)
This monitor is available after you set H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 = 16 [MFAI Function Selection =
Differential PID Feedback].
Unit: 0.01%
U5-06 PID Fdbk-Diff PID Fdbk V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(07D3) Shows the difference from calculating U5-05 - U5-01 [PID DifferentialFdbk] - [PID Feedback]. frequency (-10 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
Note:
U5-01 [PID Feedback] = U5-06 when H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 ≠ 16 [MFAI Function
Selection ≠ Differential PID Feedback].
U5-21 Energy Save Coeff Ki V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0872) Shows the energy-saving coefficient Ki value for PM.
Expert Unit: 0.01
U5-22 Energy Save Coeff Kt V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0873) Shows the energy-saving coefficient Kt value for PM.
Expert Unit: 0.01
U5-99 PID Setpoint Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(1599) Shows the PID setpoint command. Parameter b5-20 [PID Unit Selection] sets the display units. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
Parameter List
11

11.17 U: Monitors
◆ U6: Operation Status Monitors

No.
(Hex.)
U6-01 Iq Secondary Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Motor secondary
(0051) Shows the value calculated for the motor secondary current (q-Axis) as a percentage of the motor rated current (0 V to +10 V)
rated secondary current.
Unit: 0.1%
U6-02 Id ExcitationCurrent V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Motor secondary
(0052) Shows the value calculated for the motor excitation current (d-Axis) as a percentage of the motor rated current (0 V to +10 V)
rated secondary current.
Unit: 0.1%
U6-03 ASR Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum frequency
(0054) Shows the ASR input value as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
U6-04 ASR Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Motor secondary
(0055) Shows the ASR output value as a percentage of the motor rated secondary current. rated current (0 V to +10 V)
Unit: 0.01%
U6-05 OutputVoltageRef: Vq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(0059) Shows the drive internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control (q-Axis). Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)
U6-06 OutputVoltageRef: Vd V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(005A) Shows the drive internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control (d-Axis). Vrms
Unit: 0.1 V 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)
U6-07 q-Axis ACR Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(005F) Shows the output value for current control related to motor secondary current (q axis). Vrms
Expert Unit: 0.1 % 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)
U6-08 d-Axis ACR Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 10 V = 200
(0060) Shows the output value for current control related to motor excitation current (d axis). Vrms
Expert Unit: 0.1 % 400 V Class: 10 V = 400
Vrms
(0 V to +10 V)
U6-09 AdvPhase Compen Δθcmp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 V: 180 ° (-10 V to +10 V)
(07C0) Displays the data on forward phase compensation for the calculation results of the amount of
Expert control axis deviation.
Unit: 1 °
U6-10 ContAxisDeviation Δθ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 V: 180 ° (-10 V to +10 V)
(07C1) Shows the deviation between the γδ-Axis that the drive uses for motor control and the dq-Axis.
Expert Unit: 0.1 °
U6-13 MagPolePosition(Enc) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 180° (-10 V to +10 V)
(07CA) Shows the value of the flux position detection.
Expert Unit: 0.1 °
U6-14 MagPolePosition(Obs) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 180 ° (-10 V to +10
(07CB) Shows the value of the flux position estimation. V)
Expert Unit: 0.1 °
U6-17 Energy Save Coeff V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07D1) Shows the total time of direction of motor rotation detections for Speed Estimation Speed
Expert Searches. This value adjusts b3-26 [Direction Determination Level].
Note:
Upper limit is +32767 and lower limit is -32767.
U6-18 Enc 1 Pulse Counter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 65536
(07CD) Shows the number of pulses for speed detection (PG1).
Unit: 1 pulse
U6-19 Enc 2 Pulse Counter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: 65536
(07E5) Shows the number of pulses for speed detection (PG2).
Unit: 1 pulse
U6-20 UP/DOWN 2 Bias Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum Frequency
(07D4) Shows the bias value used to adjust the frequency reference.
Unit: 0.1%
U6-21 Offset Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V: Maximum Frequency
(07D5) Shows the total value of d7-01 to d7-03 [Offset Frequency 1 to 3] selected with Add Offset
Frequency 1 to 3 [H1-xx = 44 to 46].
Unit: 0.1%

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U6-22 ZeroServo Pulse Move V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Number of pulses
(0062) Shows the distance that the rotor moved from its last position when Zero Servo is available. The per revolution (-10 V to +10
value shown in this monitor = 4 X [No. of PG pulses]. V)
Unit: 1 pulse
U6-25 ASR Output Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Motor secondary
(006B) Shows the primary delay filter input value of the ASR (speed control loop). rated current (-10 V to +10
V)
Expert Unit: 0.01%
U6-26 Feed Fwd Cont Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Motor secondary
(006C) Shows the Feed Forward control output. rated current (-10 V to +10
V)
Expert Unit: 0.01%
U6-27 FeedFwd Estimate Spd V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Maximum
(006D) Shows the feed forward estimated speed. frequency
Expert Unit: 0.01% (-10 V to +10 V)
U6-31 TorqueDetect Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V:100%
(007B) Monitors the torque reference or the output current after applying the filter set to L6-07 [Torque
Detection Filter Time].
Unit: 0.1%
U6-36 Comm Errors-Host V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0720) Shows the number of inter-CPU communication errors. When you de-energize the drive, this
Expert value resets to 0.
U6-37 Comm Errors-Sensor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(0721) Shows the number of inter-CPU communication errors. When you de-energize the drive, this
Expert value resets to 0.
U6-48 ASIC Comm Errors V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(072E) Shows the number of inter-ASIC communication errors detected by the ASIC. When you de-
Expert energize the drive, this value resets to 0.
U6-57 PolePolarityDeterVal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07C4) Shows the change from the integrated current when the drive finds the polarity.
Unit: 1
Note:
If the change from the integrated current is less than 819, increase n8-84 [Polarity Detection
Current]. U6-57 = 8192 is equivalent to the motor rated current.
U6-80 Option IP Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07B0) Shows the currently available local IP Address (1st octet).
(07B1) Shows the currently available local IP Address (2nd octet).
(07B2) Shows the currently available local IP Address (3rd octet).
(07B3) Shows the currently available local IP Address (4th octet).
U6-84 Online Subnet 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07B4) Shows the currently available subnet mask (1st octet).
(07B5) Shows the currently available subnet mask (2nd octet).
(07B6) Shows the currently available subnet mask (3rd octet).
(07B7) Shows the currently available subnet mask (4th octet).
U6-88 Online Gateway 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07B8) Shows the currently available Gateway address (1st octet).
(07B9) Shows the currently available Gateway address (2nd octet).
(07F0) Shows the currently available Gateway address (3rd octet).
Parameter List
(07F1) Shows the currently available Gateway address (4th octet).
U6-92 Online Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07F2) Shows the currently available communications speed.
10: 10 Mbps
100: 100 Mbps 11
U6-93 Online Duplex V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07F3) Shows the currently available Duplex setting.

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U6-98 First Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07F8) Shows the contents of the most recent communication options fault (DeviceNet, Modbus TCP/IP,
EtherNet/IP).
U6-99 Current Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(07F9) Shows the contents of current fault from communication options (DeviceNet, Modbus TCP/IP,
EtherNet/IP).
◆ U8: DriveWorksEZ Monitors

No.
(Hex.)
U8-01 DWEZ Monitor 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = 100%
(1950) Shows DWEZ Monitor 1. (Display range: 0.00% to 999.99%)
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
(1956) Shows DWEZ Monitor 7. (Display range: -999.9% to +999.99%)
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
U8-10 DWEZ Monitor 10 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(1959) Shows DWEZ Monitor 10.
U8-11 DWEZ Version 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(195A) Shows the Upper three digits of the user ID. When you click the setting button on the title bar of
the PC tool to open the setting screen, you can confirm the user ID with the primary user ID
display.
(195B) Shows the lower five digits of the user ID. When you click the setting button on the title bar of the
PC tool to open the setting screen, you can confirm the user ID with the primary user ID display.
(195C) Shows the software ID.
U8-18 DWEZ Platform Ver V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(1961) Shows the DriveWorksEZ platform version.
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: The number of decimal points shown is set with Q2-21.

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
(196E) Shows DWEZ Monitor 31. (Display range: 0.00% to 999.99%)
Unit: 0.01%
(196F) Shows DWEZ Monitor 32. (Display range: 0.00% to 999.99%)
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
Unit: 0.01%
U8-40 DWEZ Monitor 40 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
Unit: 0.01%
U8-60 RemoteIO Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(198B) Shows the operation status of Remote IO as 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). If the DriveWorksEZ
MEMOBUS master active signal is ON, for example, the monitor shows U8-60 = 00000001.
bit 0 : Bit 0: DriveWorksEZ MEMOBUS Master Active
Parameter List
bit 1 : Not used (normal value of 0)

bit 7 : Not used (normal value of 0) 11

11.17 U: Monitors
No.
(Hex.)
U8-61 RemoteDI Monitor 0-7bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(198C) Shows the operation status of Remote DI1 to DI8 as 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). If Remote DI1 and DI2
are ON, for example, the monitor shows U8-61 = 00000011.
bit 0 : Remote DI1
bit 1 : Remote DI2
bit 2 : Remote DI3
bit 3 : Remote DI4
bit 4 : Remote DI5
bit 5 : Remote DI6
bit 6 : Remote DI7
bit 7 : Remote DI8
U8-62 RemoteDI Monitor 8-Fbit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(198D) Shows the operation status of Remote DI9 to DI16 as 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). If Remote DI9 and
DI10 are ON, for example, the monitor shows U8-62 = 00000011.
bit 0 : Remote DI9
bit 1 : Remote DI10
bit 2 : Remote DI11
bit 3 : Remote DI12
bit 4 : Remote DI13
bit 5 : Remote DI14
bit 6 : Remote DI15
bit 7 : Remote DI16
U8-63 RemoteDO Monitor 0-7bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(198E) Shows the operation status of Remote DO1 to DO8 as 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). If Remote DO1 and
DO2 are ON, for example, the monitor shows U8-63 = 00000011.
bit 0 : Remote DO1
bit 1 : Remote DO2
bit 2 : Remote DO3
bit 3 : Remote DO4
bit 4 : Remote DO5
bit 5 : Remote DO6
bit 6 : Remote DO7
bit 7 : Remote DO8
U8-64 RemoteDO Monitor 8-Fbit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV No signal output available
(198F) Shows the operation status of Remote DO9 to DO16 as 1 (ON) and 0 (OFF). If Remote DO9 and
DO10 are ON, for example, the monitor shows U8-64 = 00000011.
bit 0 : Remote DO9
bit 1 : Remote DO10
bit 2 : Remote DO11
bit 3 : Remote DO12
bit 4 : Remote DO13
bit 5 : Remote DO14
bit 6 : Remote DO15
bit 7 : Remote DO16
◆ Ud: Control Monitors

No.
(Hex.)
Ud-01 ASR Integral Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 V = Motor secondary
(1BF2) Shows the ASR output value of the integrated component as a percentage of the motor rated rated current (-10 V to +10
secondary current. V)
Unit: 0.01%

11.18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
11.18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with

A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
The values for the parameters in these tables depend on the values for A1-02. When you change A1-02, the default
settings will change.
◆ A1-02 = 0 to 4 [Induction Motor Control Methods]

Control Method (A1-02 Setting)
No. Name Range Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4)
DC Injection/
b2-01 Zero 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
SpeedThreshold
DC Inject
b2-04 Braking Time at 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Stop
Speed Search at
b3-01 Start Selection 0, 1 1 0 1 0 - 0
SpeedSearch
b3-02 Deactivation 0 - 200 1% 120 - 100 - -
Current
Speed Estimation
b3-08 ACR P Gain 0.00 - 6.00 0.01 0.50 *1 0.50 *1 0.50 *1 0.50 *1 0.50 *1
Speed Estimation
b3-09 0.0 - 1000.0 0.1 ms 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ACR I Time
Bi-directional
b3-14 0, 1 1 0 0 0 - 1
Speed Search
PID Sleep
b5-15 Function Start 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Level
Dwell Reference
b6-01 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
at Start
b6-03 Dwell Reference 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
at Stop
b8-02 Energy Saving 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 - - 0.7 1.0 1.0

Gain
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s - - 0.50 *2 0.01 *2 0.01 *2
E-Save Search
b8-19 10 - 300 1 Hz - - - - -
Injection Freq
Accel/Decel
C1-11 Time Switchover 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Freq
S-Curve Time @
C2-01 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
Start of Accel
Slip
C3-01 Compensation 0.0 - 2.5 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 1.0 0.0
Gain
Slip
C3-02 Compensation 0 - 10000 1 ms 2000 - 200 - -
Delay Time
Torque
C4-01 Compensation 0.00 - 2.50 0.01 1.00 1.00 1.00 - -
Gain
Torque
C4-02 Compensation 0 - 60000 1 ms 200 200 20 - -
Delay Time
High-Speed
C4-25 Voltage 0, 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
Parameter List
Compensation
ASR
C5-01 Proportional 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 0.20 - 20.00 10.00
Gain 1
C5-02 ASR Integral 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 s - 0.200 - 0.500 0.500

Time 1
ASR 11
C5-03 Proportional 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 0.02 - 20.00 20.00
Gain 2


(0) (1) (2) (3) (4)
ASR Integral
C5-04 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 s - 0.050 - 0.500 0.500
Time 2
C5-06 ASR Delay Time 0.000 - 0.500 0.001 s - - - 0.004 0.004
ASR Gain
C5-07 Switchover 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz - - - 0.0 0.0
Frequency
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency 1-F 1 1 *3 1 *3 1 *3 1 1
Selection
Jump Frequency
d3-01 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1
Jump Frequency
d3-02 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2
d3-03 Jump Frequency 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
3
Jump Frequency
d3-04 Width 0.0 - 20.0 0.1 Hz 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Torque Reference
d5-02 0 - 1000 1 ms - - - 0 0
Delay Time
Maximum
E1-04 Output 40.0 - 590.0 *3 *4 0.1 Hz 60.0 *5 60.0 *5 60.0 60.0 60.0
Frequency
Maximum
E1-05 0.0 - 255.0 *6 0.1 V 200.0 *5 200.0 *5 200.0 200.0 200.0
Output Voltage
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 *4 0.1 Hz 60.0 *5 60.0 *5 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07 Mid Point A 0.0 - 590.0 *7 0.1 Hz 3.0 *5 3.0 *5 3.0 - 0.0
Frequency
Mid Point A
E1-08 Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *6 0.1 V 15.0 *5 15.0 *5 11.0 - 0.0
Minimum Output
E1-09 0.0 - 590.0 *4 0.1 Hz 1.5 *5 1.5 *5 0.5 0.0 0.0
Frequency
Minimum Output
E1-10 0.0 - 255.0 *6 0.1 V 9.0 *5 9.0 *5 2.0 - 0.0
Voltage
E1-11 Mid Point B 0.0 - 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Frequency
Mid Point A
E1-12 Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *6 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *6 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Encoder 1 Pulse
F1-01 0 - 60000 1 ppr - 600 - 600 600
Count (PPR)
Encoder 1
F1-05 Rotation 0, 1 1 - 0 - 0 0
Selection
Overspeed
F1-09 Detection Delay 0.0 - 2.0 0.1 s - 1.0 - 0.0 0.1
Time
Motor Overload
L1-01 0-6 1 1 1 1 1 1
(oL1) Protection
KEB Start
L2-31 Voltage Offset 0 - 100 *6 1V 0 0 0 0 0
Level
Stall Prevention
L3-05 0-3 1 1 1 - - -
during RUN
DC Bus Voltage
L3-20 0.00 - 5.00 0.01 1.00 1.00 0.30 0.30 0.30
Adjustment Gain
OVSuppression
L3-21 Accel/Decel P 0.10 - 10.00 0.01 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Gain
Current
L3-36 Suppression 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 10.0 10.0 20.0 - -
Gain@Accel
Speed Agree
L4-01 Detection Level 0.0 - 590.0 *4 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
Speed Agree
L4-02 0.0 - 20.0 0.1 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz
Detection Width


(0) (1) (2) (3) (4)
Speed Agree
-590.0 - +590.0
L4-03 Detection Level *4 *8 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
(+/-)
Speed Agree
L4-04 Detection Width 0.0 - 20.0 0.1 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz 2.0 Hz
(+/-)
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency 0-2 1 *3 *3 *3 *3 -
Reduction
Carrier Freq
L8-40 Reduction Off- 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 -
Delay
STPo Detection
L8-90 Level (Low 0 - 5000 1 - - - - -
Speed)
PWM Voltage
n1-15 Offset 0-2 1 1 1 1 1 2
Calibration
Speed Response
n5-04 0.00 - 500.00 0.01 Hz - - - 50.00 50.00
Frequency
Initial Pole
n8-35 Detection 0-2 1 - - - - -
Method
Pull-in Current
n8-51 0 - 200 1% - - - - -
@ Acceleration
Frequency
o1-03 Display Unit 0-3 1 0 0 0 0 0
Selection
V/f Pattern
o1-04 0, 1 1 - - - 0 0
Display Unit
*2 Models 2211 to 2415 and 4103 to 4H12 use these default settings when C6-01 = 1 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection = Normal Duty
Rating]. Models 2257 to 2415 and 4140 to 4H12 use these default settings when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating].
• A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector]: 2.00
• A1-02 = 3, 4 [Closed Loop Vector, Advanced Open Loop Vector]: 0.05
*3 The default setting changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
*4 The maximum value changes when A1-02 changes:
• When A1-02 = 0, 2 [V/f Control, Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 1, 3 [V/f Control with Encoder, Closed Loop Vector], the maximum value is 400.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 4 [Advanced Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 120.0 Hz.
*5 The default setting changes when the drive model and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change.
*6 This is the value for 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives.
• When A1-02 = 0, 2 [V/f Control, Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 1 [V/f Control with Encoder], the maximum value is 400.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 4 [Advanced Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 120.0 Hz.
*8 The minimum value changes when A1-02 changes:
• When A1-02 = 0, 2 [V/f Control, Open Loop Vector], the minimum value is -590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 1, 3 [V/f Control with Encoder, Closed Loop Vector], the minimum value is -400.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 4 [Advanced Open Loop Vector], the minimum value is -120.0 Hz.
◆ A1-02 = 5 to 8 [Control Method for PM Motors and EZ Vector Control]

No. Name Range Unit OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Parameter List
(5) (6) (7) (8)
b2-01 DC Injection/Zero 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 0.5 Hz 1.0% 0.5% 0.5 Hz

SpeedThreshold
DC Inject Braking
b2-04 Time at Stop 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
b3-01
Speed Search at Start
Selection
0, 1 1 0 0 - 0 11
SpeedSearch
b3-02 0 - 200 1% - - - -
Deactivation Current


(5) (6) (7) (8)
Speed Estimation ACR

b3-08 0.00 - 6.00 0.01 0.30 0.30 - 0.60 *1
P Gain
Speed Estimation ACR

b3-09 0.0 - 1000.0 0.1 ms 4.0 4.0 - 10.0
I Time
b3-14 Bi-directional Speed 0, 1 1 - - - 0

Search
PID Sleep Function

b5-15 Start Level 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Dwell Reference at
b6-01 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Start
Dwell Reference at
b6-03 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Stop
b8-02 Energy Saving Gain 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 - - - -
Energy Saving Filter

b8-03 Time 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s - - - -
E-Save Search
b8-19 10 - 300 1 Hz - 100 100 20
Injection Freq
Accel/Decel Time
C1-11 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Switchover Freq
C2-01 S-Curve Time @ Start 0.00 - 10.00 0.01 s 1.00 0.20 0.20 1.00
of Accel
Slip Compensation
C3-01 Gain 0.0 - 2.5 0.1 - - - 0.0
Slip Compensation
C3-02 0 - 10000 1 ms - - - 200
Delay Time
Torque Compensation
C4-01 0.00 - 2.50 0.01 0.00 - - 0.00
Gain
C4-02 Torque Compensation 0 - 60000 1 ms 100 - - 200

Delay Time
High-Speed Voltage
C4-25 Compensation 0, 1 1 1 1 - 1
ASR Proportional Gain

C5-01 1 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 10.00 20.00 10.00
C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 s - 0.500 0.500 0.500
C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 10.00 20.00 10.00
2
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 s - 0.500 0.500 0.500
C5-06 ASR Delay Time 0.000 - 0.500 0.001 s - 0.016 0.004 0.004
C5-07 ASR Gain Switchover 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 - 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Frequency
Carrier Frequency
C6-02 Selection 1-F 1 2 2 2 2
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 0.0 - 400.0 *3 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width 0.0 - 20.0 *4 0.1 1.0 Hz 1.0% 1.0% 1.0 Hz
Torque Reference
d5-02 Delay Time 0 - 1000 1 ms - 0 0 -
Maximum Output Determined by E5- Determined by E5- Determined by E5-

E1-04 Frequency 40.0 - 590.0 *5 *6 0.1 Hz 01 01 01 -
Maximum Output Determined by E5- Determined by E5- Determined by E5-

E1-05 0.0 - 255.0 *7 0.1 V -
Voltage 01 01 01
Determined by E5- Determined by E5- Determined by E5-

E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 *6 0.1 Hz -
01 01 01
E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 0.1 Hz - - - -
E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *7 0.1 V - - - -
E1-09 Minimum Output 0.0 - 590.0 *6 0.1 Hz Determined by E5- Determined by E5- Determined by E5- -
Frequency 01 01 01
E1-10 Minimum Output 0.0 - 255.0 *7 0.1 V - - - -

Voltage


(5) (6) (7) (8)
E1-11 Mid Point B Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 *6 0.1 Hz - - - -
E1-12 Mid Point A Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *7 0.1 V - - - -
E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 *7 0.1 V - - - -
Encoder 1 Pulse Count

F1-01 0 - 60000 1 ppr - - 1024 -
(PPR)
F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation 0, 1 1 - - 1 -

Selection
Overspeed Detection
F1-09 Delay Time 0.0 - 2.0 0.1 s - 0.0 0.0 0.0
Motor Overload (oL1)

L1-01 0-6 1 4 4 5 1 *8
Protection
KEB Start Voltage

L2-31 0 - 100 *7 1V 50 50 50 50
Offset Level
L3-05 Stall Prevention during 0 - 3 1 1 - - 3

RUN
L3-20 DC Bus Voltage 0.00 - 5.00 0.01 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
Adjustment Gain
OVSuppression Accel/
L3-21 Decel P Gain 0.10 - 10.00 0.01 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Current Suppression
L3-36 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 - - - -
Gain@Accel
Speed Agree Detection

L4-01 0.0 - 590.0 *10 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Level
L4-02 Speed Agree Detection 0.0 - 20.0 *4 0.1 2.0 Hz 4.0% 4.0% 2.0 Hz
Width
Speed Agree Detection -590.0 - +590.0 *10

L4-03 Level(+/-) *11 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0% 0.0% 0.0 Hz
Speed Agree Detection

L4-04 0.0 - 20.0 *4 0.1 2.0 Hz 4.0% 4.0% 2.0 Hz
Width(+/-)
Carrier Frequency
L8-38 0-2 1 0 - 0 0
Reduction
L8-40 Carrier Freq Reduction 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 s 0.00 - 0.00 0.00
Off-Delay
STPo Detection Level

L8-90 (Low Speed) 0 - 5000 1 0 80 - 0
PWM Voltage Offset

n1-15 0-2 1 1 1 1 1
Calibration
Speed Response
n5-04 0.00 - 500.00 0.01 Hz - 20.00 50.00 -
Frequency
n8-35 Initial Pole Detection 0-2 1 0 1 1 -

Method
n8-51 Pull-in Current @ 0 - 200 1% 50% - - 80%

Acceleration
Frequency Display
o1-03 Unit Selection 0-3 1 0 1 1 0 *9
V/f Pattern Display

o1-04 0, 1 1 - 1 1 0 *9
Unit
*1 The default setting is different for different models.

• 2138 - 2415, 4089 - 4H12: 0.30
*3 The setting range is 0.0 to 100.0 when A1-02 = 6 or 7 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector].
*4 The setting range is 0.0 to 40.0 when A1-02 = 6 or 7 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector].
*5 The default setting changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
Parameter List
• When A1-02 = 5 [PM Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 590.0 Hz. The maximum value of the setting range changes
when E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] changes. When E5-01 = FFFF [PM Motor Code Selection = FFFF], the maximum
value is 590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 6 or 7 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector], the maximum value is 400.0 Hz. The
maximum value of the setting range changes when E5-01 changes. When E5-01 = FFFF, the maximum value is 400.0 Hz.
*7 This is the value for 200 V class drives. Double the value for 400 V class drives. 11

*8 The default setting changes when E9-01 [Motor Type Selection] changes.
• E9-01 = 0 [Induction (IM)]: 1
• E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]: 4
*9 The default setting changes when E9-01 [Motor Type Selection] changes.
• E9-01 = 0 [Induction (IM)]: 0
• E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]: 1
• When A1-02 = 5 [PM Open Loop Vector], the maximum value is 590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 6 or 7 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector], the maximum value is 100.0%.
• When A1-02 = 8 [EZ Vector Control], the maximum value is 120.0 Hz.
*11 The minimum value changes when A1-02 changes:
• When A1-02 = 5 [PM Open Loop Vector], the minimum value is -590.0 Hz.
• When A1-02 = 6 or 7 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop Vector], the minimum value is -100.0%.
• When A1-02 = 8 [EZ Vector Control], the minimum value is -120.0 Hz.

11.19 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with E3-01 [Motor 2 Control Mode Selection]
11.19 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with

E3-01 [Motor 2 Control Mode Selection]
The values for the parameters in these tables depend on the values for parameter E3-01. When you change the
setting for E3-01, the default settings will change.
Motor 2 Control Method (setting value of E3-01)
No. Name Range Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV
(0) (1) (2) (3)
C3-21 Motor 2 Slip 0.0 - 2.50 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 1.0

Compensation Gain
Motor 2 Slip Comp

C3-22 Delay Time 0 - 10000 1 ms 2000 - 200 -
Motor 2 ASR
C5-21 Proportional Gain 1 (P) 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 0.20 - 20.00
Motor 2 ASR Integral

C5-22 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 s - 0.200 - 0.500
Time 1 (I)
Motor 2 ASR
C5-23 0.00 - 300.00 0.01 - 0.02 - 20.00
Proportional Gain 2 (P)
C5-24 Motor 2 ASR Integral 0.000 - 10.000 0.001 s - 0.050 - 0.500

Time 2 (I)
Motor 2 ASR Delay

C5-26 Time 0.000 - 0.500 0.001 s - - - 0.004
Motor 2 Maximum
E3-04 40.0 - 590.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
Output Frequency
Motor 2 Maximum 0.0 - 255.0

E3-05 Output Voltage 0.1 V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*1
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
Motor 2 Mid Point A

E3-07 Frequency 0.0 - 590.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 3.0 3.0 -
Motor 2 Mid Point A 0.0 - 255.0

E3-08 0.1 V 15.0 15.0 11.0 -
Voltage *1
Motor 2 Minimum
E3-09 0.0 - 590.0 0.1 Hz 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
Output Frequency
Motor 2 Minimum 0.0 - 255.0

E3-10 Output Voltage 0.1 V 9.0 9.0 2.0 -
*1
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Point B 0.0 - 590.0 Determined by 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Frequency o1-04
Motor 2 Mid Point B 0.0 - 255.0

E3-12 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Voltage *1
0.0 - 255.0
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage 0.1 V 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
*1
Parameter List
11

11.20 Parameters Changed by E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection]

The values for parameters A1-02 [Control Method Selection] and E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] change the default
settings for the parameters in these tables:
Table 11.1 Parameters Changed by E1-03 (2004 - 2021 and 4002 - 4012)
No. E1-03 E1-04 E1-05 *1 E1-06 E1-07 E1-08 *1 E1-09 E1-10 *1
Unit - Hz V Hz Hz V Hz V
0 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 15.0 1.3 9.0
1 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
2 60.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
3 72.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
4 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 35.0 1.3 8.0
5 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 1.3 9.0
6 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 35.0 1.5 8.0
7 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 50.0 1.5 9.0

Setting Value
8 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 19.0 1.3 11.0
9 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 24.0 1.3 13.0
A 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 19.0 1.5 11.0
B 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 24.0 1.5 15.0
C 90.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
D 120.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
E 180.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 9.0
F 50.0 *2 200.0 *2 50.0 *2 2.5 *2 15.0 *2 1.3 *2 9.0 *2
OLV (2) 50.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 14.4 0.5 3.0
CLV (3) 50.0 200.0 50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Control Method
Selection OLV/PM (5) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
(A1-02 Setting)
AOLV/PM (6) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
CLV/PM (7) *3 *3 *3 - - 0.0 -
*2 These values are the default settings for E1-04 to E1-10 and E3-04 to E3-10 [V/f Pattern for Motor 2]. These settings are the same as
the settings for the V/f pattern when E1-03 = 0 [Const Trq, 60Hz base, 60Hz max].
*3 The default setting varies depending on the setting of E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection].

Table 11.2 Parameters Changed by E1-03 (2030 - 2211 and 4018 - 4103)
No. E1-03 E1-04 E1-05 *1 E1-06 E1-07 E1-08 *1 E1-09 E1-10 *1
0 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 14.0 1.3 7.0
1 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
2 60.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
3 72.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
4 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 35.0 1.3 6.0
5 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 1.3 7.0
6 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 35.0 1.5 6.0
7 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 50.0 1.5 7.0

Setting Value
8 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 18.0 1.3 9.0
9 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 23.0 1.3 11.0
A 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 18.0 1.5 9.0
B 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 23.0 1.5 13.0
C 90.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
D 120.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
E 180.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 14.0 1.5 7.0
F 50.0 *2 200.0 *2 50.0 *2 2.5 *2 14.0 *2 1.3 *2 7.0 *2
OLV (2) 50.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 13.2 0.5 2.4
CLV (3) 50.0 200.0 50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Control Method
Selection OLV/PM (5) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
(A1-02 Setting)
AOLV/PM (6) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
CLV/PM (7) *3 *3 *3 - - 0.0 -
Parameter List
11

Table 11.3 Parameters Changed by E1-03 (2257 - 2415 and 4140 - 4H12)
No. E1-03 E1-04 E1-05 *1 E1-06 E1-07 E1-08 *1 E1-09 E1-10 *1
0 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 12.0 1.3 6.0
1 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
2 60.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
3 72.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
4 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 35.0 1.3 5.0
5 50.0 200.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 1.3 6.0
6 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 35.0 1.5 5.0
7 60.0 200.0 60.0 30.0 50.0 1.5 6.0

Setting Value
8 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 15.0 1.3 7.0
9 50.0 200.0 50.0 2.5 20.0 1.3 9.0
A 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 15.0 1.5 7.0
B 60.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 20.0 1.5 11.0
C 90.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
D 120.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
E 180.0 200.0 60.0 3.0 12.0 1.5 6.0
F 50.0 *2 200.0 *2 50.0 *2 2.5 *2 12.0 *2 1.3 *2 6.0 *2
OLV (2) 50.0 200.0 50.0 3.0 13.2 0.5 2.4
CLV (3) 50.0 200.0 50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Control Method
Selection OLV/PM (5) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
(A1-02 Setting)
AOLV/PM (6) *3 *3 *3 - - *3 -
CLV/PM (7) *3 *3 *3 - - 0.0 -

11.21 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD

The values for the parameters in these tables depend on the values for parameters o2-04 and C6-01. Changing the
settings for o2-04 and C6-01 will change the default settings.
◆ Three-Phase 200 V Class

No. *1 Name Unit Default
- Drive Model - 2004 2006 2010
HD ND HD ND HD ND
C6-01 Normal / Heavy -
Duty Selection
0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 62 63 65
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
(E4-11)
b3-04 V/f Gain during % 100 100 100 100 100 100
Speed Search
Speed Estimation
b3-06 Current Level 1 - 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Speed Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level 2
Speed Estimation
b3-08 - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Filter Time
Energy Saving
b8-04 - 288.2 223.7 223.7 196.6 169.4 156.8
Coefficient Value
C5-17
Motor Inertia kgm2 0.0015 0.0028 0.0028 0.0068 0.0068 0.0088
(C5-37)
Carrier Frequency
C6-02 Selection - 1 7 1 7 1 7
E2-01 Motor Rated A 1.9 3.3 3.3 4.9 6.2 8.5

(E4-01) Current (FLA)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.9 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.9
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-Load

Current A 1.2 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.8 3
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor Line-to-

Line Resistance Ω/mΩ *2 9.842 5.156 5.156 3.577 1.997 1.601
(E4-05)
E2-06 Motor Leakage

% 18.2 13.8 13.8 18.5 18.5 18.4
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10
Motor Iron Loss W 14 26 26 38 53 77
(E4-10)
PM Motor Code
E5-01 Selection - 1202 1202 1203 1203 1205 1205
Power Loss Ride

L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
Through Time
Minimum
L2-03 s 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5
Baseblock Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery Ramp s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Parameter List
Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.178 0.142 0.142 0.142 0.166 0.145
Torque
11
L8-02 Overheat Alarm °C 115 115 115 115 115 115
Level

- Drive Model - 2004 2006 2010
HD ND HD ND HD ND
Normal / Heavy
C6-01 -
Duty Selection
0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 62 63 65
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
(E4-11) Power
Output Ground
L8-09 - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fault Detection
Carrier Frequency
L8-38 - 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention Time ms 10 10 10 10 10 10
Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention High - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.178 0.142 0.142 0.142 0.166 0.145
Time
*1 Parameters in parentheses are for motor 2.

*2 The display units are different for different models: The units are Ω for models 2004 to 2415, 4002 to 4675 and mΩ for models 4810
to 4H12.
- Drive Model - 2012 2018 2021 2030
Normal / HD ND HD ND HD ND HD ND
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 66 67 68 6A
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 2.2 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 156.8 136.4 136.4 122.9 122.9 94.75 94.75 72.69
Value
C5-17
Motor Inertia kgm2 0.0088 0.0158 0.0158 0.0158 0.0158 0.0255 0.026 0.037
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated

A 8.5 11.4 11.4 14 14 19.6 19.6 26.6
E2-02 Motor Rated

Hz 2.9 2.7 2.7 2.73 2.73 1.5 1.5 1.3
(E4-02) Slip

- Drive Model - 2012 2018 2021 2030
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 66 67 68 6A
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 2.2 3.0 3.0 3.7 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5
(E4-11) Power
E2-03 Motor No- A 3 3.7 3.7 4.5 4.5 5.1 5.1 8

(E4-03) Load Current
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 1.601 1.034 1.034 0.771 0.771 0.399 0.399 0.288
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 18.4 19 19 19.6 19.6 18.2 18.2 15.5
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 77 91 91 112 112 172 172 262
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1206 1206 FFFF FFFF 1208 1208 120A 120A
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.168 0.175
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 Alarm Level °C 124 124 110 110 110 110 110 110
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.168 0.175
Time

to 4H12.
Parameter List
11

- Drive Model - 2042 2056 2070 2082
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 6B 6D 6E 6F
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 7.5 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22
(E4-11) Power
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Search
Speed
Estimation
b3-06 - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
b8-03 Energy Saving s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Filter Time
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 72.69 70.44 70.44 63.13 63.13 57.87 57.87 51.79
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated A 26.6 39.7 39.7 53 53 65.8 65.8 77.2

E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip Hz 1.3 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.67 1.67 1.7
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-

A 8 11.2 11.2 15.2 15.2 15.7 15.7 18.5
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.288 0.23 0.23 0.138 0.138 0.101 0.101 0.079
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 15.5 19.5 19.5 17.2 17.2 15.7 20.1 19.5
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron W 262 245 245 272 272 505 505 538
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 120B 120B 120D 120D 120E 120E 120F 120F
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 0.8 0.9 0.9 1 1 1 1 1
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.175 0.265 0.265 0.244 0.244 0.317 0.317 0.355
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 110 110 115 115 120 120 133 130
Alarm Level

- Drive Model - 2042 2056 2070 2082
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 6B 6D 6E 6F
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 7.5 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22
(E4-11) Power
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.175 0.265 0.265 0.244 0.244 0.317 0.317 0.355
Time

to 4H12.
- Drive Model - 2110 2138 2169 2211
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 70 72 73 74
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 2.00
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 51.79 46.27 46.27 38.16 38.16 35.78 35.78 31.35
Parameter List
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated

11
A 77.2 105 105 131 131 160 160 190

- Drive Model - 2110 2138 2169 2211
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 70 72 73 74
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55
(E4-11) Power
E2-02 Motor Rated Hz 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.33 1.33 1.6 1.6 1.43
(E4-02) Slip
E2-03 Motor No- A 18.5 21.9 21.9 38.2 38.2 44 44 45.6

E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.079 0.064 0.064 0.039 0.039 0.03 0.03 0.022
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 19.5 20.8 20.8 18.8 18.8 20.2 20.2 20.5
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 538 699 699 823 823 852 852 960
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1210 1210 1212 1212 1213 1213 1214 1214
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.355 0.323 0.323 0.32 0.32 0.387 0.387 0.317
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 105 105 115 115 105 105 105 105
Alarm Level
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.355 0.323 0.323 0.32 0.32 0.387 0.387 0.317
Time

to 4H12.

- Drive Model - 2257 2313 2360 2415
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 75 76 77 78
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 55 75 75 90 90 110 110 110
(E4-11) Power
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Search
Speed
Estimation
b3-06 - 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
b8-03 Energy Saving s 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Filter Time
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 31.35 23.1 23.1 20.65 20.65 18.12 18.12 18.12
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated A 190 260 260 260 260 260 260 260
E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip Hz 1.43 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-

A 45.6 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023 0.023 0.023 0.023 0.023
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 20.5 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron W 960 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1215 1215 1216 1216 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.7
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ramp Time
Parameter List
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.317 0.533 0.533 0.592 0.592 0.646 0.646 0.646
Torque
Overheat
11
L8-02 °C 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105
Alarm Level

- Drive Model - 2257 2313 2360 2415
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 75 76 77 78
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 55 75 75 90 90 110 110 110
(E4-11) Power
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 100 100 100 100
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.317 0.533 0.533 0.592 0.592 0.646 0.646 0.646
Time

to 4H12.
◆ Three-Phase 400 V Class

- Drive Model - 4002 4004 4005 4007
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 92 93 94 95
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 0.4 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3.0
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 576.4 447.4 447.4 338.8 338.8 313.6 313.6 265.7
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection

- Drive Model - 4002 4004 4005 4007
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 92 93 94 95
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 0.4 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 3.0
(E4-11) Power
E2-01 Motor Rated A 1 1.6 1.6 3.1 3.1 4.2 4.2 5.7
E2-02 Motor Rated Hz 2.9 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 3 3 2.7

(E4-02) Slip
E2-03 Motor No-

Load Current A 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.9
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 38.198 22.459 22.459 10.1 10.1 6.495 6.495 4.360
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 18.2 14.3 14.3 18.3 18.3 18.7 18.7 19
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 14 26 26 53 53 77 77 105
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1232 1232 1233 1233 1235 1235 1236 1236
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.178 0.142 0.142 0.166 0.166 0.145 0.145 0.145
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 100 100 105 105 112 112 100 100
Alarm Level
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.178 0.142 0.142 0.166 0.166 0.145 0.145 0.145
Time
Parameter List

to 4H12.
11

- Drive Model - 4009 4012 4018 4023
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 96 97 99 9A
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 3.0 4.0 4.0 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 11
(E4-11) Power
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Search
Speed
Estimation
b3-06 - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
b8-03 Energy Saving s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Filter Time
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 265.7 245.8 245.8 189.5 189.5 145.38 145.38 140.88
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated A 5.7 7 7 9.8 9.8 13.3 13.3 19.9

E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip Hz 2.7 2.7 2.7 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.7
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-

A 1.9 2.3 2.3 2.6 2.6 4 4 5.6
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 4.360 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.595 1.152 1.152 0.922
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 19 19.3 19.3 18.2 18.2 15.5 15.5 19.6
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron W 105 130 130 193 193 263 263 385
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - FFFF FFFF 1238 1238 123A 123A 123B 123B
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1 1
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.168 0.175 0.175 0.265
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 100 100 100 100 105 105 105 105
Alarm Level

- Drive Model - 4009 4012 4018 4023
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 96 97 99 9A
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 3.0 4.0 4.0 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 11
(E4-11) Power
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.168 0.175 0.175 0.265
Time

to 4H12.
- Drive Model - 4031 4038 4044 4060
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 9C 9D 9E 9F
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 140.88 126.26 126.26 115.74 115.74 103.58 103.58 92.54
Parameter List
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated

11
A 19.9 26.5 26.5 32.9 32.9 38.6 38.6 52.3

- Drive Model - 4031 4038 4044 4060
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. 9C 9D 9E 9F
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30
(E4-11) Power
E2-02 Motor Rated Hz 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.67 1.67 1.7 1.7 1.8
(E4-02) Slip
E2-03 Motor No- A 5.6 7.6 7.6 7.8 7.8 9.2 9.2 10.9
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.922 0.55 0.55 0.403 0.403 0.316 0.316 0.269
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 19.6 17.2 17.2 20.1 20.1 23.5 23.5 20.7
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 385 440 440 508 508 586 586 750
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 123D 123D 123E 123E 123F 123F 1240 1240
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 0.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.1
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.265 0.244 0.244 0.317 0.317 0.355 0.355 0.323
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 115 115 120 120 120 120 130 137
Alarm Level
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.265 0.244 0.244 0.317 0.317 0.355 0.355 0.323
Time

to 4H12.

- Drive Model - 4075 4089 4103 4140
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A1 A2 A3 A4
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 30 37 37 45 45 55 55 75
(E4-11) Power
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 100 100 100 100 100 80 80 60
Search
Speed
Estimation
b3-06 - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy
b8-03 Saving Filter s 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 2.00 2.00 2.00
Time
Energy
b8-04 Saving - 92.54 76.32 76.32 71.56 71.56 67.2 67.2 46.2
Coefficient
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated A 52.3 65.6 65.6 79.7 79.7 95 95 130

E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip Hz 1.8 1.33 1.33 1.6 1.6 1.46 1.46 1.39
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-

Load Current A 10.9 19.1 19.1 22 22 24 24 36
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.269 0.155 0.155 0.122 0.122 0.088 0.088 0.092
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 20.7 18.8 18.8 19.9 19.9 20 20 20
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron W 750 925 925 1125 1125 1260 1260 1600
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1242 1242 1243 1243 1244 1244 1245 1245
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3
Time
Powerloss V/f
Parameter List
L2-04 Recovery s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1

Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated
Torque
s 0.323 0.32 0.32 0.387 0.387 0.317 0.317 0.533
11
Overheat
L8-02 °C 120 120 115 115 126 120 120 120
Alarm Level

- Drive Model - 4075 4089 4103 4140
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A1 A2 A3 A4
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 30 37 37 45 45 55 55 75
(E4-11) Power
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.323 0.32 0.32 0.387 0.387 0.317 0.317 0.533
Time

to 4H12.
- Drive Model - 4168 4208 4250 4296
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A5 A6 A7 A8
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 75 90 90 110 110 150 150 185
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 46.2 38.91 38.91 36.23 36.23 32.79 32.79 30.13
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated

A 130 156 156 190 190 223 223 270

- Drive Model - 4168 4208 4250 4296
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A5 A6 A7 A8
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 75 90 90 110 110 150 150 185
(E4-11) Power
E2-02 Motor Rated Hz 1.39 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.38 1.38 1.35
(E4-02) Slip
E2-03 Motor No- A 36 40 40 49 49 58 58 70

E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.092 0.056 0.056 0.046 0.046 0.035 0.035 0.029
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 1600 1760 1760 2150 2150 2350 2350 2850
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 1246 1246 1247 1247 1248 1248 1249 1249
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.8
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.533 0.592 0.592 0.646 0.646 0.673 0.673 0.777
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 110 110 105 105 120 120 120 120
Alarm Level
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.533 0.592 0.592 0.646 0.646 0.673 0.673 0.777
Time

to 4H12.
Parameter List
11

- Drive Model - 4371 4389 4453 4568
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A9 AA AC AD
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 185 220 220 260 260 300 300 335
(E4-11) Power
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Search
Speed
Estimation
b3-06 - 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 - 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Current Level
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
b8-03 Energy Saving s 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Filter Time
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 30.13 30.57 30.57 27.13 27.13 21.76 21.76 21.76
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated A 270 310 310 370 370 500 500 500
E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip Hz 1.35 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.25 1.25 1.25
(E4-02)
E2-03 Motor No-

A 70 81 81 96 96 130 130 130
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.029 0.025 0.025 0.02 0.02 0.014 0.014 0.014
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron W 2850 3200 3200 3700 3700 4700 4700 4700
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - 124A 124A 124A 124A 124A 124A 124A 124A
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 1.8 1.9 1.9 2 2 2.1 2.1 2.1
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 1 1 1.8 1.8 1.8 2 2 2
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 0.777 0.864 0.864 0.91 0.91 1.392 1.392 1.392
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 125 125 125 125 110 110 125 115
Alarm Level

- Drive Model - 4371 4389 4453 4568
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. A9 AA AC AD
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 185 220 220 260 260 300 300 335
(E4-11) Power
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 30 30 100 100 100 100 100 100
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 0.777 0.864 0.864 0.91 0.91 1.392 1.392 1.392
Time

to 4H12.
- Drive Model - 4675 4810 4930 4H11
Normal / HD1 ND HD ND HD ND HD ND
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. AE B0 B1 B2
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

Power kW 315 355 450 525 525 600 600 675
(E4-11)
V/f Gain
b3-04 during Speed % 60 60 40 40 40 40 40 40
Search
Speed
b3-06 Estimation - 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Current Level
1
Speed
Estimation
b3-07 Current Level - 1.0 1.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0
2
Speed
b3-08 Estimation - 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ACR P Gain
Direction
b3-26 Determination - 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Level
Energy Saving
b8-03 Filter Time s 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Energy Saving
b8-04 Coefficient - 21.76 23.84 23.84 21.4 21.4 20.26 20.26 18.12
Parameter List
Value
C5-17
(C5-37)
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency - 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection
E2-01 Motor Rated

11
A 500 650 650 800 800 900 900 1090

- Drive Model - 4675 4810 4930 4H11
Normal / HD1 ND HD ND HD ND HD ND
C6-01 Heavy Duty -
Selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Drive Model
o2-04 (KVA) Hex. AE B0 B1 B2
Selection
E2-11 Motor Rated

kW 315 355 450 525 525 600 600 675
(E4-11) Power
E2-02 Motor Rated Hz 1.25 1 1 1 1 0.9 0.9 0.8

(E4-02) Slip
E2-03 Motor No- A 130 130 130 160 160 180 180 218
E2-05 Motor Line-

to-Line Ω/mΩ *2 0.014 0.012 12.000 10.000 10.000 9.000 9.000 7.000
(E4-05) Resistance
E2-06 Motor
Leakage % 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(E4-06) Inductance
E2-10 Motor Iron

W 4700 5560 5560 7050 7050 7833 7833 9870
(E4-10) Loss
PM Motor
E5-01 Code - FFFF FFFF - - - - - -
Selection
Power Loss
L2-02 Ride Through s 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Time
Minimum
L2-03 Baseblock s 2.1 2.3 2.3 2.8 2.8 3.1 3.1 4
Time
Powerloss V/f
L2-04 Recovery s 2 2.2 2.2 2.6 2.6 3 3 3.8
Ramp Time
Undervoltage
L2-05 Detection Lvl - 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
(Uv1)
Motor Accel
L3-24 Time @ Rated s 1.392 1.667 1.667 2 2 2.222 2.222 2.857
Torque
Overheat
L8-02 °C 133 133 120 120 120 120 120 120
Alarm Level
Output
L8-09 Ground Fault - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Detection
Carrier
L8-38 Frequency - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reduction
Hunting
n1-01 Prevention - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Selection
Hunting
n1-03 Prevention ms 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Time Constant
Hunting
n1-16 Prevention - 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
High Fc Gain
Motor Inertia
n5-02 Acceleration s 1.392 1.667 1.667 2 2 2.222 2.222 2.857
Time

to 4H12.

No. *1 Name Unit
- Drive Model - 4H12
HD ND
Normal / Heavy Duty
C6-01 -
Selection
0 1
o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) Selection Hex. B3
E2-11
Motor Rated Power kW 675 750
(E4-11)
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed Search % 40 40
b3-06 Speed Estimation Current Level 1 - 0.7 0.7
b3-07 Speed Estimation Current Level 2 - 3.0 2.0
b3-08 Speed Estimation ACR P Gain - 0.8 0.8
b3-26 Direction Determination Level - 1000 1000
b8-03 Energy Saving Filter Time s 2.00 2.00
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value - 18.12 17.06
C5-17
Motor Inertia kgm2 18.00 18.00
(C5-37)
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection - 1 1
E2-01
Motor Rated Current (FLA) A 1090 1200
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip Hz 0.8 0.7
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current A 218 240
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω/mΩ *2 7.000mΩ 6.000mΩ
(E4-05)
E2-06
Motor Leakage Inductance % 20 20
(E4-06)
E2-10
Motor Iron Loss W 9870 11123
(E4-10)
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection - - -
L2-02 Power Loss Ride Through Time s 2 2
L2-03 Minimum Baseblock Time s 4 4.6
Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp

L2-04 s 3.8 4.5
Time
Undervoltage Detection Lvl

L2-05 - 380 380
(Uv1)
L3-24 Motor Accel Time @ Rated s 2.857 3.333

Torque
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 120 120
L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection - 1 1
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction - 2 2
n1-01 Hunting Prevention Selection - 2 2
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time ms 100 100

Constant
n1-16 Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain - 0.50 0.50
n5-02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time s 2.857 3.333

Parameter List
to 4H12.
11


12
Parameter Details
12.1 Section Safety .........................................................................................................658
12.2 A: Initialization Parameters..................................................................................659
12.3 b: Application ..........................................................................................................680
12.4 C: Tuning ..................................................................................................................731
12.5 d: References ..........................................................................................................756
12.6 E: Motor Parameters..............................................................................................778
12.7 F: Options.................................................................................................................798
12.8 H: Terminal Functions ...........................................................................................838
12.9 L: Protection Functions ........................................................................................ 911
12.10 n: Special Adjustment ...........................................................................................958
12.11 o: Keypad-Related Settings .................................................................................981
12.12 T: Auto-Tuning.......................................................................................................1005

12.1 Section Safety
12.1 Section Safety

DANGER


A parameters [Initialization Parameters] set the operating environment and operating conditions for the drive.
◆ A1: Initialization
A1 parameters set the operating environment and operating conditions for the drive. For example, these
parameters set the keypad language, the control method, and the parameter access level for the drive.
■ A1-00: Language Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-00 Language Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0100) Sets the language for the LCD keypad. (0 - 12)
RUN
Note:
• This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad or a Bluetooth LCD Keypad.
• When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, the drive will not reset this parameter.
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Italian
5 : Spanish
6 : Portuguese
7 : Chinese
8 : Czech
9 : Russian
10 : Turkish
11 : Polish
12 : Greek
■ A1-01: Access Level Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-01 Access Level Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2
(0101) Sets user access to parameters. The access level controls which parameters the keypad will (0 - 3)
RUN display, and which parameters the user can set.
0 : Operation Only
Access to A1-00, A1-01, A1-04 [Password], and the U Monitors.
1 : User Parameters
Access to A1-00, A1-01, A1-04, and A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameters 1 to 32].
2 : Advanced Level
Access to all parameters, but not Expert Mode parameters.
3 : Expert Level
Access to all parameters including Expert Mode parameters.
Table 12.1 shows which keypad screens are available for each A1-01 settings.
Parameter Details
12

Table 12.1 Access Level and Available Keypad Screens

A1-01 [Access Level Selection] Setting
Mode Keypad Screen
0 1 2 3
Drive Mode Monitors Yes Yes Yes Yes
Parameters Yes Yes Yes Yes
User Custom Parameters No Yes Yes Yes
Parameter Backup/Restore No No Yes Yes
Modified Parameters/Fault
Programming Mode Log No No Yes Yes
Auto-Tuning No No Yes Yes
Initial Setup Screen No No Yes Yes
Diagnostic Tools No No Yes Yes
Note:
• When you use A1-04 and A1-05 [Password Setting] to set a password, you cannot change the values set in A1-01 to A1-03, A1-06, A1-
07,or A2-01 to A2-32.
• When H1-xx = 1B [MFDI Function Select = Program Lockout], you must activate the terminal to change parameter settings.
• When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, you must send the Enter command from the controller to the drive and complete
the serial communication write process before you can use the keypad to change parameter settings.
■ A1-02: Control Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-02 Control Method Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2
(0102) Sets the control method for the drive application and the motor. (0 - 8)
Note:
When you change the control methods, the parameter values specified by A1-02 and E3-01 [Motor 2 Control Mode Selection] are
changed to their default values.
0 : V/f Control
Use this control method in these applications and conditions:
• For general variable-speed control applications in which a high level of responsiveness or high-precision speed
control is not necessary.
• Applications in which more than one motor are connected to one drive
• When there is not sufficient data to set the motor parameters
• When it is not possible to do Auto-Tuning. The speed control range is 1:40.
Use this control method in these applications and conditions:
• For general variable-speed control applications in which a high level of responsiveness or high-precision speed
control is not necessary.
• When there is not sufficient data to set the motor parameters
• When it is not possible to do Auto-Tuning. The speed control range is 1:40.
Use this control method for general variable-speed control applications in which high-precision speed control is
necessary. In this control method, a feedback signal from the motor is not necessary to have high torque response
and high torque when you operate the drive at low speeds. The speed control range is 1:200.
Use this control method for general variable-speed control applications in which these qualities are necessary:
• A high level of responsiveness
• High-precision speed control up to zero speed
• High-precision torque control. A speed feedback signal from the motor is necessary for this control method. The
speed control range is 1:1500.
This is a control method for induction motors. Use this control method for applications in which high-precision
speed control is necessary.

This control method has high speed and torque response and high torque when operating at low speeds. The speed
control range is 1:200.
The drive controls an IPM motor or SPM motor in this control method. Use this control method for general
variable-speed control applications in which a high level of responsiveness or high-precision speed control are not
necessary. The speed control range is 1:20.
The drive can control an IPM motor in this control method. Use this control method for general variable-speed
control applications in which high-precision speed control and torque limit are necessary. The speed control range
is 1:20. The speed control range is 1:100 when n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled].
Note:
The speed control range 1:100 is the momentary operation area. Correctly select the drive and motor capacity for continuous operation.
The drive controls a PM motor in this control method. Use this control method for constant torque applications in
which high-precision control with a PM motor is necessary. Also use this control method for general variable-
speed control applications in which high torque response and high-precision torque control are necessary. A speed
feedback signal from the motor is necessary for this control method. The speed control range is 1:1500.
The drive controls induction motors and PM motors in this control method. This control method uses an easier
procedure to operate motors with more efficiency. Use this control method for derating torque applications. For
example, fans and pumps.
■ A1-03: Initialize Parameters

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-03 Initialize Parameters V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0103) Sets parameters to default values. (0 - 3330)
Note:
• After you initialize the drive, the drive automatically sets A1-03 = 0.
• User Parameters can save the parameter values for your application and use these values as default values for drive initialization.
• To use the 2 motor switchover function, first turn OFF the terminal to which H1-xx = 16 [MFDI Function Selection = Motor 2
Selection] is set, then change the A1-03 setting. An incorrect procedure will trigger oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
0 : No Initialization
1110 : User Initialization
Sets parameters to the values set by the user as user settings. Set o2-03 = 1 [User Parameter Default Value = Set
defaults] to save the user settings.
You can save the parameter settings that were adjusted for the test run as user-set default values to the drive. Set
A1-03 = 1110 to reset to the saved parameter settings.
Follow this procedure to save User Parameter setting values, and to do a User Initialization.
1. Set parameters correctly for the application.
2. Set o2-03 = 1 [User Parameter Default Value = Set defaults].
This saves parameter settings for a User Initialization.
The drive will then automatically set o2-03 = 0.
3. Set A1-03 = 1110 to reset to the saved parameter settings.
When you initialize the drive, the drive sets the parameter values to the User Parameter setting values.
Sets MFDI terminal S1 to Forward Run and terminal S2 to Reverse Run, and resets all parameters to default
settings.
Parameter Details
Sets MFDI terminal S1 to Run, terminal S2 to Stop, and terminal S5 to FWD/REV, and resets all parameters to
default settings.
The drive will not initialize the parameters in Table 12.2 when A1-03 = 2220, 3330.
12

Table 12.2 Parameters that are not Initialized Using a 2-Wire Sequence or a 3-Wire Sequence
No. Name
A1-00 Language Selection
A1-02 Control Method Selection
A1-07 DriveWorksEZ Function Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection
E5-02 PM Motor Rated Power (kW)
E5-03 Motor Rated Current (FLA)
E5-04 PM Motor Pole Count
E5-05 PM Motor Resistance (ohms/phase)
E5-06 PM d-axis Inductance (mH/phase)
E5-07 PM q-axis Inductance (mH/phase)
E5-09 PM Back-EMF Vpeak (mV/(rad/s))
E5-11 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset
E5-24 PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms (mV/rpm)
E5-25 Polarity Estimation Timeout
F6-08 Comm Parameter Reset @Initialize
Communication Option Parameters

F6-xx/F7-xx Set F6-08 = 1 [Comm Parameter Reset @Initialize = Reset Back to Factory Default] to initialize communication option
parameters.
L8-35 Installation Method Selection
o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) Selection
q1-xx - qx-xx DriveWorksEZ Parameters
r1-xx DWEZ Connection 1-20
Note:
• Set A1-06 [Application Preset] to let the drive automatically set the best parameter settings for the selected application. The drive does
not initialize A1-02 when A1-03 = 2220, 3330.
• When A1-03 = 2220, 3330, the drive automatically set A1-05 [Password Setting] = 0000. Make sure that you set the password again
for applications where a password is necessary.
■ A1-04: Password
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-04 Password V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000
(0104) Entry point for the password set in A1-05 [Password Setting]. The user can view the settings of (0000 - 9999)
parameters that are locked without entering the password. Enter the correct password in this
parameter to change parameter settings.
If the password entered in A1-04 does not agree with the password setting in A1-05, you cannot change these
parameters:
• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to 32]
To lock parameter settings after making changes without changing the password, enter the incorrect password in
A1-04 and push .
Enter the Password to Unlock Parameters
Use this procedure to unlock parameter settings.
Set the password in A1-05 [Password Setting], and show the Parameter Setting Mode screen on the keypad.
This procedure verifies the password, and makes sure that the parameter settings are unlocked.

1. Push or to select “A: Initialization Parameters”, then push .
2. Push or to select [A1-04], then push .

You can now change parameter settings.
3. Push or to move the digit and enter the password.
4. Push to confirm the password.

The drive unlocks the parameters and automatically shows the Parameters Screen.
5. Push or to show [A1-02], then push .

The keypad shows the setting value for [A1-02].
6. Push or to make sure that you can change the setting value.
Push (Back) until the keypad shows the Parameter Setup Mode screen.
■ A1-05: Password Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-05 Password Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000
(0105) Set the password to lock parameters and prevent changes to parameter settings. Enter the correct (0000 - 9999)
password in A1-04 [Password] to unlock parameters and accept changes.
This parameter can lock these parameter settings:

• A2-01 to A2-32 [User Parameter 1 to 32]
Note:
• Usually, the keypad will not show A1-05. To show and set A1-05, show A1-04 [Password] and then push and on the
keypad at the same time.
• After you set A1-05, the keypad will not show it again until you enter the correct password in A1-04. Make sure that you remember the
A1-05 setting value. If you do not know the A1-05 setting value, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
• When A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [2-Wire Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization], the drive is initialized to A1-05 = 0000. Be sure to set the
password again when a password is necessary for the application.
• Change the setting value in A1-05 to change the password. The new setting value becomes the new password.
• When you use the password to unlock and change a parameter, enter a value other than the password in A1-04 to lock the parameter
again with the same password.
• If A1-04 ≠ A1-05, MEMOBUS Communication cannot read or write A1-05.
■ A1-06: Application Preset

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-06 Application Preset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0127) Sets the drive to operate in selected application conditions. (0 - 7)
The drive software contains the application presets shown below. Set A1-06 to align with the application to let the
drive automatically set the best parameter settings for the selected application. The drive saves parameters
frequently used for the application in parameters A2-01 to A2-16 [User Parameters 1 to 16] for easy configuration
Parameter Details
and reference in [User Custom Parameters] in the main menu.

• Water supply pump
• Conveyor
• Exhaust fan
• HVAC fan
12

• Air compressor
• Crane (hoist)
• Crane (traveling)
Note:
• Before you set A1-06, make sure that you set A1-03 = 2220, 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 2-Wire Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization]
to initialize parameters.
• After you set A1-06 for a hoist application (A1-06 = 6 or 7), make sure that you do Auto-Tuning.
• It is not possible to change the A1-06 value. To set an application preset, first set A1-03 = 2220 to initialize parameters, then set this
parameter. If initializing all parameters will cause a problem, do not change the settings.
If you set A2-33 = 1 [User Parameter Auto Selection = Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms] to set parameters to A2-17 to A2-32 [User
Parameters 17 to 32] automatically, the drive will reset these parameters when you change the A1-06 setting.
0 : General-purpose
The drive saves the parameters in Table 12.3 as user parameters.
Table 12.3 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the General-purpose Preset
User Parameter No. Parameter No. Saved Name
A2-01 A1-02 Control Method Selection
A2-02 b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1
A2-03 b1-02 Run Command Selection 1
A2-04 b1-03 Stopping Method Selection
A2-05 C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
A2-06 C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
A2-07 C6-01 Normal / Heavy Duty Selection
A2-08 C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection
A2-09 d1-01 Reference 1
A2-13 d1-17 Jog Reference
A2-14 E1-01 Input AC Supply Voltage
A2-15 E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
A2-16 E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
A2-17 E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage
A2-18 E1-06 Base Frequency
A2-19 E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
A2-20 E1-13 Base Voltage
A2-21 E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA)
A2-22 E2-04 Motor Pole Count
A2-23 E2-11 Motor Rated Power
A2-24 H4-02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain
A2-25 L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) Protection
A2-26 L3-04 Stall Prevention during Decel
1 : Water Supply Pump 2

The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.4 for a water supply pump application.
Table 12.4 Best Parameter Settings for Water Supply Pump Applications
No. Name Optimal Value
A1-02 Control Method Selection 0: V/f Control
b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection 1: Reverse Disabled
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 1.0 s
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 1.0 s

C6-01 Normal / Heavy Duty Selection 1: Normal Duty Rating
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection F: Custom
E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency 30.0 Hz
E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage 50.0 V
L2-01 Power Loss Ride Through Select 1: Enabled
L3-04 Stall Prevention during Decel 1: Enabled

Table 12.5 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Water Supply Pump Preset
A2-03 b1-04 Reverse Operation Selection
A2-07 E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency
A2-08 E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage
A2-10 H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Selection
A2-13 L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart Attempts
2 : Conveyor
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.6 for a conveyor application.
Table 12.6 Best Parameter Settings for Conveyor Applications
C6-01 Normal / Heavy Duty Selection 0: Heavy Duty Rating

Table 12.7 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Conveyor Preset

Parameter Details
A2-07 L3-04 Stall Prevention during Decel
3 : Exhaust Fan
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.8 for an exhaust fan application.
12

Table 12.8 Best Parameter Settings for Exhaust Fan Applications

E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency 30.0 Hz
E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage 50.0 V

Table 12.9 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Exhaust Fan Preset
A2-04 b3-01 Speed Search at Start Selection
A2-14 L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart Attempts
4 : HVAC Fan
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.10 for an HVAC fan application.
Table 12.10 Best Parameter Settings for HVAC Applications
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up 1: Accept Existing RUN Command
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 3: 8.0 kHz
H2-03 Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection 39: Watt Hour Pulse Output
L2-01 Power Loss Ride Through Select 2: Enabled while CPU Power Active
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection 4: Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2: Enabled for All Speeds

Table 12.11 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the HVAC Preset
A2-03 b1-03 Stopping Method Selection

A2-08 d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit
A2-09 d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit
A2-11 E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
A2-13 H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting
A2-14 H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting
A2-15 L2-01 Power Loss Ride Through Select
A2-16 o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization
5 : Air Compressor
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.12 for an air compressor application.
Table 12.12 Best Parameter Settings for Air Compressor Applications

Table 12.13 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Air Compressor Preset
6 : Crane (Hoist)
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.14 for a hoist application.
Note:
Parameter Details
Make sure that you do Auto-Tuning after you set A1-06 for a hoist application. Refer to Notes for Elevator or Lift Applications on page
669 for hoist (elevator) instructions.
12

Table 12.14 Best Parameter Settings for Hoist Applications

A1-02 Control Method Selection 2: Open Loop Vector
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0: Keypad
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start 3.0 Hz
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start 0.3 s
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2: 5 kHz
d1-01 Reference 1 6.00 Hz
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection 5: Frequency Detection 2
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 Function Selection 37: During Frequency Output
H3-06 Terminal A3 Function Selection F: Not Used
L2-03 Minimum Baseblock Time 0.3 s
L3-04 Stall Prevention during Decel 0: Disabled
L4-01 Speed Agree Detection Level 2.0 Hz
L4-02 Speed Agree Detection Width 0.0 Hz
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 8: UL @ RUN - Fault
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 2%
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 0.5 s
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Sel 1: Enabled
L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel 1: Fault when one phase is lost
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 1: Enabled below 6 Hz
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection 1: Enabled

Table 12.15 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Hoist Preset
A2-03 b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start
A2-04 b6-02 Dwell Time at Start
A2-12 H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection
A2-14 L4-01 Speed Agree Detection Level
A2-15 L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1
A2-16 L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1

7 : Crane (Traveling)
The drive automatically sets the parameters in Table 12.16 for a traveling application.
Table 12.16 Optimal Settings for Traveling Applications
A1-02 Control method selection 0: V/f Control
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0: Keypad
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection 2: 5 kHz
H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Selection 3: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
H1-06 Terminal S6 Function Selection 4: Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
H3-06 Terminal A3 Function Selection 1F: Not Used
L3-04 Stall Prevention during Decel 0: Disabled
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Sel 1: Enabled
L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel 1: Fault when one phase is lost
L8-38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 1: Enabled below 6 Hz
L8-41 High Current Alarm Selection 1: Enabled

Table 12.17 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Traveling Preset
A2-11 H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection
■ Notes for Elevator or Lift Applications

When you use the drive for elevator or lift applications, read the safety descriptions and precautions, and safely
and correctly use the device.
Conditions to Open and Close the Brake
Parameter Details
Set L4-07 = 0 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = No Detection during Baseblock] to open and close the holding
brake.
When L4-07 = 1 [Detection Always Enabled], the output frequency increases when you input the Run command
although the external baseblock command is input. Because of this, speed detection operates and will open the
brake signal.
12

• Set Related Parameters

Table 12.18 shows examples of parameter settings to use the MFDO terminal (M1-M2) as the holding brake
open and close signal.
Table 12.18 Holding Brake Open and Close Signal Setting Example
Brake Open and Close Signal Brake Open and Close Level Adjust Applicable Control Methods (A1-02 Setting Value)
V/f OLV CLV AOLV CLV/PM

Signal Name Parameter Settings Signal Name Parameter Settings
(0) (2) (3) (4) (7) *1
L4-07 = 0 Speed Agree Detection L4-01 = 1.0 Hz to 3.0 Hz

Level *2
Frequency (FOUT)
x x - x -
Detection 2
Speed Agree Detection L4-02 = 0.0 Hz to 0.5 Hz
H2-01 = 5 Width *3
DC Injection/Zero Speed
During Frequency Output H2-01 = 37 b2-01 = 0.1 Hz to 0.5 Hz - - x - x
Threshold
*1 When A1-02 = 7 [PM Closed Loop Vector], make sure that the motor can rotate before you do Auto-Tuning or switch the encoder.
Refer to Closed Loop Vector Control for induction motors for information about the signal to use and the adjustment method.
*2 When A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector], it is the usual setting range. When A1-02 = 0 [V/f Control], set L4-01 to the rated slip
frequency of the motor + approximately 0.5 Hz. If you set the value too low, motor torque will not be sufficient and it will cause
motor rollback. Set the parameters to meet these conditions at the same time. If the setting is too high, overshoot is possible at start.
• L4-01 > E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency]
• L4-01 > L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection Width]
*3 Use L4-02 to adjust the detection width of Frequency Detection 2. If rollback occurs when the motor is stopped, set the frequency to
approximately 0.1 Hz.
Figure 12.1 Frequency Detection 2

Sequence Circuit Configuration
Use these conditions to set the circuit for the open/close sequence of the holding brake:
• Set the sequence-side operation conditions to activate terminal M1-M2 and open the holding brake.
• Set the sequence to close the holding brake in an emergency if the drive detects a fault.
• Set the sequence to open the holding brake when you enter an increase or decrease command.
Figure 12.2 Sequence Circuit Configuration Diagram

*1 L4-07 = 0 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = No Detection during Baseblock] or During Frequency Output
Time Chart
Figure 12.3 shows the open/close sequence of the holding brake.

Figure 12.3 Holding Brake Open and Close Sequence Time Chart (V/f, CL-V/f, OLV)
*1 Start braking from the higher set frequency between b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] or E1-09 [Minimum Output
Frequency].
Figure 12.4 Holding Brake Open and Close Sequence Time Chart (CLV, CLV/PM)
*1 Start braking from the higher set frequency between b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] or E1-09 [Minimum Output
Frequency].
Notes on when Using Other Functions
Function Precautions
Stall Prevention during Deceleration When you connect a braking resistor to discharge the regenerative power to the drive, set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel
= Disabled].
Note:
If L3-04 = 1 [General Purpose], it is possible that the drive will not stop in the set deceleration time. Do not change the default
settings of these related parameters:
• L3-01 = 1 [Stall Prevention during Accel = Enabled]
• L3-05 = 1 [Stall Prevention during RUN = Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)]
Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors • When A1-02 = 2, 3, 4 [Control Method Selection = Open Loop Vector, Closed Loop Vector, Advanced Open Loop Vector], Auto-
Tune the motor before you operate the drive.
• Disconnect the drive from the motor to do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
• Auto-Tuning runs automatically for approximately 1 minute. Do not do Auto-Tuning with the motor engaged in the elevator
system.
Note:
• If you cannot disconnect the motor from the machine, do Stationary Auto-Tuning. During this time, the drive automatically
measures the necessary motor data. If the motor test report or the motor nameplate is not available, use Stationary Auto-Tuning.
Do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance for better torque characteristics at low speeds in the V/f Control mode.
• When you do Stationary Auto-Tuning, the drive energizes the motor and the motor stays stopped.
• To Auto-Tune a specialized motor, for example a wound motor, prepare a motor test report before Auto-Tuning and make sure
that the motor parameter E2-xx is not too different than the value in the test report.
Parameter Details
12

Function Precautions
Auto-Tuning for PM Motors You must set the motor data in the drive to run a PM motor.
• When you use a PM motor recommended by Yaskawa
Input the motor code in E5-01. E5 and other related motor parameters will be automatically set to the optimal values.
• When you use a non-Yaskawa PM motor
Do Auto-Tuning.
– When the motor nameplate or motor test report is available, enter the PM motor parameters directly with PM Motor Parameter
Settings.
– If the motor nameplate or motor test report is not available, and the motor cannot rotate, do PM Stationary Auto-Tuning.
– If the motor nameplate or motor test report is not available, and the motor can rotate, do PM Rotational Auto-Tuning.
– When you replace an encoder, make sure that the motor can rotate and do Z Pulse Offset Tuning or PM Rotational Auto-
Tuning.
Note:
• Use in Closed Loop Vector Control for PM control method.
• When you do Auto-Tuning or replace the encoder, make sure that the motor can rotate.
• Set the Encoder Z-Pulse Offset.
• Refer to Closed Loop Vector Control for induction motors for information about the signal to use and the adjustment method.
Braking Resistor Overheat Protection When you use a braking resistor other than the optional Yaskawa braking resistor unit (LKEB-series), this function uses the thermal
overload relay to detect braking resistor overheat. Load a sequence program that cuts the drive input power supply when the braking
resistor overheats. *1
Continuous Operation Do not use the momentary power loss continuous operation function and the Auto Restart function. If you use these functions, there
is a risk that the motor will coast to a stop if the brake is open when there is a momentary power loss and the drive is operating or if
there is a fault.
Set the these parameters:
• L2-01 = 0 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Disabled]
• L5-01 = 0 [Number of Auto-Restart Attempts = 0]
Torque Limit The motor rated torque sets the value for L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit]. If there will not be sufficient torque during start up, replace
the drive with a larger capacity drive and set the torque limit between 200% and 300%. The L7-01 to L7-04 default setting is 200%.
Input/Output Phase Loss Protection, To stop a fall because of phase loss, set these parameters:
Overtorque Detection • L8-05 = 1 [Input Phase Loss Protection Sel = Enabled]
• L8-07 = 1 [Output Phase Loss Protection Sel = Fault when One Phase is Lost]
• L6-01, L6-04 = 1 to 8 [Torque Detection Selection 1/2 = oL @ Speed Agree - Alarm only to UL @ RUN - Fault]
• L6-02, L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 1/2]
• L6-03, L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 1/2]
Note:
Use precautions, for example fall detection, on the machine side.
External Baseblock Command • If you enter the external baseblock signal set in H1-01 to H1-08 = 8 or 9 [Terminal S1 to S8 Function Selection = Baseblock
Command] during run, the motor immediately coasts to stop. When you enter a baseblock command while the motor is operating,
make sure that it is necessary.
• When you use an external baseblock command for the fast stop and operation start up interlocks, load the sequence to lock the
holding brake when you enter the external baseblock command.
• If you enter the external baseblock command and then immediately remove it, the drive will not output the voltage in the time set
in L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time]. Do not use an external baseblock command for applications that have frequent Run/Stop
commands.
Acceleration and Deceleration Times If you set the acceleration and deceleration times for the drive side too short and you do not add the mechanical operation delay time
of the holding brake, the holding brake could operate late, or there could be overcurrent at start up, the brake could grind, or the
motor could roll back when it stops. In these conditions, use Dwell Reference at Start/Time and DC Injection Braking at Stop to
adjust the holding brake timing.
Electromagnetic Contactor on the Drive Usually you must not install the electromagnetic contactor between the drive and motor. When you must install an electromagnetic
Output Side contactor to use one drive to switchover more than one motor, follow these precautions:
• Load a sequence that opens and closes the electromagnetic contactor when these two conditions are satisfied at the same time,
unless there is an emergency:
– The holding brake is fully closed
– The drive terminals set for H2-xx = 8 or 1B [MFDO Function Selection = During Baseblock] are activated
• If you open and close the electromagnetic contactor during motor control or during DC Injection Braking (or zero speed control),
the surge voltage and the motor direct input current can cause the drive to detect faults.
• When you use an electromagnetic contactor between the drive and motor, set L8-07 = 1 or 2 [Output Phase Loss Protection Sel =
Fault when One Phase is Lost, Fault when Two Phases are Lost].
*1 Refer to page Standard Connection Diagram on page 66 when you load the sequence circuit.
Adjustments Relating to Control
When there is oscillation, rollback, or other control problems, adjust the parameters as specified by the control
method.
V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control on page 672 shows only the frequently adjusted parameters.
Note:
Torque and speed response for high-resistance and high-slip motors are slow. Adjust the torque and speed response to increase them.
Low impedance (low-slip) motors will hunt and oscillate. Adjust the torque and speed response to increase them.
V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control
While in V/f Control, do not use C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain].

When you set the drive to CL-V/f Control, use the default settings for C5-01 to C5-05 [ASR Parameters]. If you
make significant changes to the default settings, it can cause oscillation.
Table 12.19 Adjustment of Drive Control (V/f Control and Closed Loop V/f Control Methods)
Adjustment description Parameter Number Possible Solutions Default Recommended Setting
• If the torque is not sufficient

with heavy loads, decrease the
• Prevent hunting and setting.
oscillation at middle speed n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain 1.00 0.50 - 2.00
Setting] • If there is hunting or
range (10 Hz to 40 Hz)
oscillation with light loads,
increase the setting.
• Prevent hunting or oscillation

C4-25 [High-Speed Voltage
at high speed range (120 Hz or Compensation] Adjust the setting value. 1 [Enabled] 0 [Disabled]
more)
• If there is a loud motor

• Increasing motor excitation excitation sound, increase the
sound setting value.
C6-02 [Carrier Frequency *1
• Prevent hunting or oscillation Selection] • If there is hunting or 1-F
at low speed range and middle oscillation at low speed range
speed range or middle speed range,
decrease the setting value.
• If the torque is not sufficient at

• Increase torque at low speed low speed range, increase the
range (10 Hz or lower) C4-01 [Torque Compensation setting value.
Gain] 1.00 0.50 - 1.50
• Prevent hunting and • If there is hunting or
oscillation oscillation with light loads,
E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] • If the torque is not sufficient at 15.0 V *2 *3 13.0 V to 16.0 V *3
low speed range, increase the
• Increase torque at low speed setting value.
range E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage] 9.0 V *2 *3 7.0 V to 10.0 V *3
• If there is a large shock during
• Prevent shock during start up start up, decrease the setting
value.
change.
*3 This is the value for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.
Open Loop Vector Control Method
Do not adjust parameter C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain]. Keep this parameter at its default setting.
If you cannot get speed accuracy during regeneration, set C3-04 = 1 [Slip Compensation at Regen = Enabled
Above 6Hz]. If you cannot get speed accuracy at high speeds, set C3-05 = 1 [Output Voltage Limit Selection =
Enabled].
Table 12.20 Adjustment of Drive Control (Open Loop Vector Control Method)
• Torque, increase speed • If torque and speed response

are slow, decrease the setting
response
n2-01 [Automatic Freq Regulator value.
• Prevent hunting and Gain] 1.00 0.50 - 2.00
• If there is hunting or
oscillation at middle speed oscillation, increase the setting
range (10 Hz to 40 Hz)
value.
• Prevent hunting or oscillation C4-25 [High-Speed Voltage

at high speed range (120 Hz or Adjust the setting value. 1 [Enabled] 0 [Disabled]
Compensation]
more)
• If torque and speed response

• Torque, increase speed are slow, decrease the setting
response C4-02 [Torque Compensation value.
20 ms 20 ms to 100 ms
• Prevent hunting and Delay Time] *1 • If there is hunting or
oscillation oscillation, increase the setting
value.
• When speed response is slow,

• Increase speed response C3-02 [Slip Compensation Delay decrease the setting value.
200 ms 100 ms to 500 ms
• Increase speed stability Time] • If speed is not stable, increase
the setting value.
• If speed is too slow, increase

the setting value.
• Improve speed accuracy C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain] 1.0 0.5 - 1.5
• If speed is too fast, decrease
Parameter Details
the setting value.
• Increasing motor excitation • If there is a loud motor

excitation sound, increase the
sound setting value.
C6-02 [Carrier Frequency *2
• Prevent hunting and Selection] 1-F
• If there is hunting or
oscillation at low speed range oscillation at low speed range,
(10 Hz to or lower)
12

E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage] • If the torque and speed 11.0 V *3 12.0 V to 13.0 V *3
response are slow, increase the
• Increase torque and speed
setting value.
response at low speed range
• Prevent shock during start up E1-10 [Minimum Output Voltage] • If there is a large shock during 2.0 V *3 2.0 V to 3.0 V *3
start up, decrease the setting
value.
*1 If the value for C4-02 [Torque Compensation Delay Time] is high, the current can increase during start up. Adjust and check the
current during start up.
change.
*3 This is the value for 200 V class drives. Multiply the voltage by 2 for 400 V class drives.
Closed Loop Vector Control Method
Table 12.21 Adjustment of Drive Control (Closed Loop Vector Control Method)
C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] • If the torque and speed

• Torque, increase speed response are slow, increase the
response setting value.
20.00 10.00 - 50.00
• Prevent hunting and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 2] • If there is hunting or
oscillation oscillation, decrease the
setting value.
• Prevent hunting or oscillation

at high speed range (120 Hz or C4-25 [High-Speed Voltage Adjust the setting value. 1 [Enabled] 0 [Disabled]
Compensation]
more)
C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] • If torque and speed response

• Torque, increase speed are slow, decrease the setting
response value.
0.500 s 0.300 s to 1.000 s
• Prevent hunting and C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 2] • If there is hunting or
oscillation oscillation, increase the setting
value.
Change the ASR proportional If you cannot get ASR

proportional gain or integral time 0.0 Hz
gain and ASR integral time in C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover 0.0 Hz to maximum output
accordance with the output Frequency] for low speed range or high speed frequency
range, switch as specified by the (Do not switch)
frequency. output frequency.
• If there is unsatisfactory
• Prevent hunting and C5-06 [ASR Delay Time] machine rigidity and 0.004 s 0.004 s to 0.020 s
oscillation oscillation is possible, increase
the setting value.
Elevator Start/Stop and Accel/Decel Time Shock Reduction

Shock when you start and stop the elevator and when you accelerate and decelerate is an issue for passenger
elevator applications. If shock has an effect on the quality of the ride, adjust these parameters:
S-Curve Characteristics, Accel & Decel Time
Adjustment Parameter Name
C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07 Acceleration Time 1 to 4
C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08 Deceleration Time 1 to 4
C2-01 S-Curve Time @ Start of Accel
C2-02 S-Curve Time @ End of Accel
C2-03 S-Curve Time @ Start of Decel
C2-04 S-Curve Time @ End of Decel
Figure 12.5 S-curve Characteristics, Accel & Decel Time

Note:
• When decreased operation times are necessary for the application, for example with cranes and hoists, do not use S-curve characteristic
times.
• The default setting for C2-04 [S-Curve Time @ End of Decel] will be 0.00 seconds. The default setting for other S-curve characteristics
will be 0.20 seconds. Set the acceleration/deceleration times and S-curve characteristic time correctly for acceleration/deceleration start
up and end. The recommended setting of the S-curve characteristics time is 0.2 to 1.0 seconds.
• When you use the C1-11 [Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq], you can switch the acceleration/deceleration rate automatically during
acceleration/deceleration. The default setting is disabled.
When the Output Frequency ≥ C1-11, operate at the acceleration and deceleration times set in C1-01 and C1-02
When the Output Frequency < C1-11, operate at the acceleration and deceleration times set in C1-07 and C1-08
• During low speed operation, if the Output Frequency < E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] in the S-Curve Time @ Start of Decel, the
drive will cancel the S-curve characteristics and will do DC Inject Braking at Stop (zero speed control).
Dwell Function at Start
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start
H2-xx = 5 Frequency Detection 2
Figure 12.6 Dwell Function at Start

Note:
• If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow, use the Dwell Function at Start to prevent brake grinding (friction). Accelerate
after the brake is fully open.
• When you use V/f Control and Open Loop Vector Control modes, set b6-01 [Dwell Reference at Start] > Frequency Detection 2 (brake
open frequency).
• If the motor torque is not sufficient during start up, use the DC Inject Braking function to secure the motor current (torque) before you
start the motor.
–b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current] recommended setting: 50% to 80% (V/f Control or Open Loop Vector Control)
–b2-03 [DC Inject Braking Time at Start] recommended setting: 0.2 s to 0.5 s
DC Injection Braking at Stop, Zero Speed Control Function
Note:
If you disconnect a drive when it is controlling the motor or during DC Injection Braking (Zero speed level), a voltage surge can trigger
a fault. When you use an electromagnetic contactor between the drive and motor, set L8-07 = 1 or 2 [Output Phase Loss Protection Sel
= Fault when one phase is lost, Fault when two phases are lost]. If it necessary to disconnect the motor and drive when you stop the
elevator, fully close the holding brake and disconnect the drive during baseblock (that is, while the baseblock signal is ON). This does
not apply for emergency conditions.
b2-01 DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Current
b2-04 DC Inject Braking Time at Stop
H2-xx = 5 Frequency Detection 2

Parameter Details
12

Figure 12.7 DC Injection Braking at Stop, Zero Speed Control Function

Note:
• If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow, use DC Injection Braking (zero speed control when set to closed loop vector)
until the brake is fully closed to prevent rollback.
• If you cannot hold the load with DC Injection Braking when it is stopped in V/f Control and Open Loop Vector Control modes, use
Dwell Function at Stop.
–b6-03 [Dwell Reference at Stop]: Minimum output frequency to 3.0 Hz
When Frequency Detection 2 is OFF, it is less than L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] - L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection Width].
–b6-04 [Dwell Time at Stop] recommended setting: 0.3 s to 0.5 s
–b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop] recommended setting: 0.0 s
Torque Compensation (Torque Bias)
This function enters the torque compensation (torque bias) signal that matches a set load from the MFAI terminal
in Closed Loop Vector Control to decrease the overshoot when you open and close the brake. You must detect the
load and motoring/regeneration on the machine side before you use the function. If there is a polarity error, shock
can increase.

Item Description
Sequence Circuit Configuration
Time chart: Increase Enter the analog signal as the torque compensation (torque bias) signal as specified by the load quantity before drive operation until
drive operation completes. The default setting is 10 V/100% torque.
Enter a positive polarity during a motoring load, and enter a negative polarity during a regenerative load.
Time chart: Decrease Enter the analog signal as the torque compensation (torque bias) signal as specified by the load quantity before drive operation until
drive operation completes. The default setting is 10 V/100% torque.
Enter a negative polarity during a motoring load, and enter a positive polarity during a regenerative load.
Note:
• Holds through an external source to not change the torque compensation signal during run. If you change the torque compensation
signal during run, the motor can oscillate.
• When you set motor reverse to the increase command and set motor forward to the decrease command, the polarity of the torque
compensation signal will reverse.
Analog Input FilterTime Constant
Parameter Details
When b1-01 = 1 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Analog Input], it adds noise to the analog frequency
reference during run.
• Minimize the effects of noise.
• Change H3-13 [Analog Input FilterTime Constant] to a range of 0.01 s to 0.10 s.
12

Startup Current Check

When you do a test run, set L8-41 =1 [High Current Alarm Selection = Enabled] and use U4-13 [Peak Hold
Current] and a clamp ammeter with the machine under load and not under load to check the motor current during
start up.
If the motor torque is not sufficient during start up or if the timing between the motor and the holding brake is
unsatisfactory and causes the motor to lock, a large quantity of current will flow. In these conditions, adjust the
parameters again and decrease the load to decrease the current to less than 150%. If the current flow is more than
150% of the drive rated current, the heat stress on the IGBTs will decrease the service life of drive parts.
To decrease the effects of heat stress, decrease the carrier frequency of the drive to 2.0 kHz to 2.5 kHz for
applications where low audible noise is not necessary.
Overvoltage Suppression Function
If the overvoltage suppression function is used in elevator type applications, there is a risk of rollback and falls.
Set L3-11 = 0 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Disabled].
The overvoltage suppression function is designed to prevent an overvoltage trip in a situation in which a braking
resistor is not used with a regenerative load. If the overvoltage suppression function is enabled, the regeneration
torque reference within the drive is automatically controlled during regeneration.
Note:
When using the drive for applications such as high speed elevators with a speed of 2 ms or more and direct drive elevators, or when you
need drives designed for cranes, contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa sales representative.
■ A1-07: DriveWorksEZ Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-07 DriveWorksEZ Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0128) Selection Sets the drive to operate with DriveWorksEZ. (0 - 2)
DriveWorksEZ is a simple visual programming tool that lets you connect function blocks to customize the drive
and add PLC functions.
Note:
• DriveWorksEZ will overwrite drive settings when it uses MFDI/MFDO and MFAI/MFAO. When you use DriveWorksEZ to make
changes to the drive, the changes will stay after you disable DriveWorksEZ.
• For more information about DriveWorksEZ, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
0 : DWEZ Disabled
1 : DWEZ Enabled
2 : Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input
Set H1-xx = 9F [MFDI Function Select = DWEZ Disable]. Deactivate the digital input to enable programs made
with DriveWorksEZ. Activate the terminal to disable the programs.
If A1-07 = 1 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection = DWEZ Enabled], the drive will continue to disable DWEZ
when these conditions are true:
• Drive is not in operation
• The MFDI terminals set for H1-xx = 9F activate.
■ A1-11: Firmware Update Lock

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-11 Firmware Update Lock V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(111D) Protects the drive firmware. When you enable the protection, you cannot update the drive (0, 1)
Expert firmware.
0 : Disabled
Lock is disabled.
1 : Enabled
Lock is enabled.

■ A1-12: Bluetooth ID
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A1-12 Bluetooth ID V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -
(1564) Sets the password necessary to use Bluetooth to control the drive with a smartphone or tablet. (0000 - 9999)
◆ A2: User Parameters

You can register frequently used parameters and recently changed parameters here to access them quickly. You
can show the registered parameters in [User Custom Parameters] in the main menu.
■ A2-01 to A2-32: User Parameters 1 to 32

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A2-01 to A2-32 User Parameters 1 to 32 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Parameters in General-
(0106 - 0125) You can select a maximum of 32 parameters for the drive and set them to parameters A2-01 to A2- Purpose Setup Mode
32. The [User Parameters] section of the keypad main menu shows the set parameters. You can (Determined by A1-06)
immediately access these set parameters.
Note:
• When the A1-06 [Application Preset] value changes, the settings for A2-01 to A2-32 change.
• You must set A1-01 = 1 [Access Level Selection = User Parameters] to access parameters A2-01 to A2-32.
• When A1-07 = 1 or 2 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection = DWEZ Enabled or Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input], the drive saves qx-
xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameters] to A2-01 to A2-32.
The drive saves these parameters to A2-01 to A2-32.
• The drive saves a maximum of 32 parameters.
Note:
Set A1-01 = 2 [Advanced Level] or A1-01 = 3 [Expert Level] to save the necessary parameters.
• The drive automatically saves changed parameters to A2-17 to A2-32.
Note:
Set A2-33 = 1 [User Parameter Auto Selection = Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms].
■ A2-33: User Parameter Auto Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
A2-33 User Parameter Auto V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-06
(0126) Selection Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2-17 to A2-32 [User Parameters 17 to (0, 1)
32].
0 : Disabled: Manual Entry Required

Set User Parameters manually.
1 : Enabled: Auto Save Recent Parms
The drive automatically registers changed parameter A2-17 to A2-32. The drive automatically saves the most
recently changed parameter to A2-17, and saves a maximum of 16 parameters. After the drive registers 16
parameters, when you save a new parameter, the drive will remove a parameter from the User Parameter list to
make space for the new parameter. The drive removes parameters with First In, First Out.
You can show the registered parameters in [User Custom Parameters] in the main menu.
Note:
In General-Purpose Setup Mode, the drive saves parameters starting with A2-27 because the drive saves parameters A2-26 and lower by
default.
Parameter Details
12

12.3 b: Application
12.3 b: Application
b parameters set the following functions.
• Frequency reference source/Run command source
• Stopping method settings
• DC Injection Braking
• Speed Search
• Timer Function
• PID control
• Dwell function
• Droop control
• Energy Savings Control
• Zero Servo Control
◆ b1: Operation Mode Selection

b1 parameters set the operation mode for the drive.
■ b1-01: Frequency Reference Selection 1

No. Default
Name Description
b1-01 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0180) Selection 1 Sets the input method for the frequency reference. (0 - 4)
Note:
• Push on the keypad to set the input mode to LOCAL and enter the frequency reference from the keypad.
• When the drive receives a Run command when the frequency reference is 0 Hz or less than the E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency]
value, on the keypad will flash. Examine the setting for the frequency reference input and enter a value more than or equal to E1-
09.
0 : Keypad
Use the keypad to enter the frequency reference.
Use and on the keypad to change the frequency reference.
1 : Analog Input
Use MFAI terminals A1, A2, and A3 to input an analog frequency reference with a voltage or current input signal.
• Voltage Input
Refer to Table 12.22 to use a voltage signal input to one of the MFAI terminals.
Table 12.22 Frequency Reference Voltage Input
Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal
Terminal Note
Level Signal Level Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
A1 0 - 10 V H3-01 = 0 H3-02 = 0 H3-03 H3-04 Set DIP switch S1-1 to “V” for
[Frequency Reference] voltage input.
-10 - +10 V H3-01 = 1
-10 - +10 V H3-09 = 1
-10 - +10 V H3-05 = 1 Set DIP switch S4 to “AI” for
analog input.

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.8 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Voltage Signal to Terminal A1
Note:
You can also use this diagram to wire terminals A2 and A3.
• Current Input
Refer to Table 12.23 to use a current signal input to one of the MFAI terminals.
Table 12.23 Frequency Reference Current Input
Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal Level Note
Signal Level
Selection Function Selection Gain Bias
A1 4 - 20 mA H3-01 = 2 H3-02 = 0 H3-03 H3-04 Set DIP switch S1-1 to “I” for
[Frequency Reference] current input.
0 - 20 mA H3-01 = 3
0 - 20 mA H3-09 = 3
0 - 20 mA H3-05 = 3 Set DIP switch S4 to “AI” for
analog input.
Figure 12.9 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Current Signal to Terminal A2
Note:
Changing between Master and Auxiliary Frequency References
Use the multi-step speed reference function to change the frequency reference input between terminals A1, A2,
and A3.
Parameter Details
Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the frequency reference.
3 : Option PCB
Use a communications option card or input option card connected to the drive to enter the Run command.
12

12.3 b: Application
Refer to the instruction manual included with the option card to install and set the option card.
Note:
If b1-01 = 3, but you did not connect a communications option card, oPE05 [Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err] will flash on the
keypad.
Use a pulse train signal from the pulse train input terminal RP to enter the frequency reference.
Do this procedure to make sure that the pulse train signal is operating correctly.
1. Set b1-01 = 4, H6-01 = 0 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function = Frequency Reference].
2. Set H6-02 [Terminal RP Frequency Scaling] to the number of pulses that determine 100% of the frequency
reference.
3. Enter a pulse train signal on the terminal RP and make sure that the keypad shows a correct frequency
reference.
■ b1-02: Run Command Selection 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-02 Run Command Selection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0181) Sets the input method for the Run command. (0 - 3)
0 : Keypad
Use the keypad to enter the Run command.
You can use the JOG operation or the FWD/REV commands from the keypad.
Note:
The on the keypad is on while keypad is the Run command source.

1 : Analog Input
Use the control circuit terminals to enter the Run command. Select the input method for the Run command with
an H1-xx parameter.
Set H1-xx = 0, 40 to 43 [3-Wire Sequence, Run Command (2-Wire Sequence)]. The default setting is 2-wire
sequence 1.
• 2-wire Sequence 1
This sequence has two input types: FWD/Stop and REV/Stop. Set A1-03 = 2220 [Initialize Parameters = 2-
Wire Initialization] to initialize the drive and set terminals S1 and S2 for a 2-wire sequence.
This sequence has two input types: Run/Stop and FWD/REV.
• 3-Wire Sequence
This sequence has three input types: Run, Stop, and FWD/REV. Set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-
Wire Initialization] to initialize the drive and set terminals S1, S2, and S5 for a 3-wire sequence.
Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the Run command.
3 : Option PCB
Note:
If b1-02 = 3, but you did not connect a communications option card, oPE05 [Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err] will flash on the
keypad.
■ b1-03: Stopping Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0182) Sets the method to stop the motor after removing a Run command or entering a Stop command. (0 - 3, 9)
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 [Control Method Selection = CLV, AOLV, OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV], the setting range is 0,
1, 3.

12.3 b: Application
Select the applicable stopping method for the application from these four options:
0 : Ramp to Stop
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive ramps the motor to stop.
The drive ramps the motor to stop as specified by the deceleration time. The default setting for the deceleration
time is C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1]. The actual deceleration time changes as the load conditions change (for
example, mechanical loss and inertia).
If the output frequency is less than or equal to the value set in b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] during
deceleration, the drive will do DC Injection Braking, Zero Speed Control, or Short Circuit Braking, as specified
by the control method.
• Ramp to Stop with V/f, AOLV, CL-V/f, and OLV Control Methods
Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start DC Injection Braking at stop. If the output frequency is less than or
equal to the value set in b2-01 during deceleration, then the drive will perform DC Injection Braking for the
time set in b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop].
Figure 12.10 Ramp to Stop with V/f, AOLV, CL-V/f, and OLV Control Methods
Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency], the drive will start DC Injection Braking from the frequency set in E1-09.
• Ramp to Stop with OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, and EZOLV Control Methods
Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start Short Circuit Braking. When the output frequency is less than or
equal to the value set in b2-01 during deceleration, then the drive will do Short Circuit Braking for the time set
in b2-13 [Short Circuit Brake Time @ Stop]. When b2-04 ≠ 0, the drive will do DC Injection Braking for the
time set in b2-04 when Short Circuit Braking is complete.
Figure 12.11 Ramp to Stop with OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, and EZOLV Control Methods
Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09, the drive will start Short Circuit Braking from the frequency set in E1-09.
If b2-01 = 0 Hz and E1-09 = 0 Hz, the drive will not do Short Circuit Braking.
• Ramp to Stop in CLV and CLV/PM Control Methods
Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start Zero Speed Control at stop. When the output frequency is less than
or equal to the value set in b2-01 during deceleration, the drive will do Zero Speed Control for the time set in
b2-04.
Parameter Details
Figure 12.12 Ramp to Stop in CLV and CLV/PM Control Methods 12

12.3 b: Application
Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09, the drive will start Zero Speed Control from the frequency set in E1-09.
1 : Coast to Stop
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive turns OFF the output and coasts the
motor to stop.
Load conditions will have an effect on the deceleration rate as the motor coasts to stop (for example, mechanical
loss and inertia).
Figure 12.13 Coast to Stop

Note:
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive ignores the Run command for the time set in L2-03
[Minimum Baseblock Time]. Do not enter the Run command until the motor comes to a complete stop. Use DC Injection or Speed
Search to restart the motor before it stops.
2 : DC Injection Braking to Stop
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF or Run command, the drive turns OFF the output for the time set
in L2-03. The drive waits for the minimum baseblock time and then injects the amount of DC current into the
motor set in b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current] to stop the motor with DC current.
DC Injection Braking stops the motor more quickly than coast to stop.
Note:
If A1-02 = 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, DC Injection Braking to Stop is not available.
Figure 12.14 DC Injection Braking to Stop

The value set in b2-04 and the output frequency when the drive receives the Stop command determine the DC
Injection Braking time. The drive calculates the DC Injection Braking time as in Figure 12.15.

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.15 DC Injection Braking Time and Output Frequency

Note:
If the drive detects oC [Overcurrent] when it uses DC Injection Braking to stop the motor, set L2-03 to a high value that will not trigger
oC.
3 : Coast to Stop with Timer
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive turns OFF the output and coasts the
motor to stop. The drive ignores the Run command until the “Run wait time t” is expired.
To start the drive again, wait until the the “Run wait time t” is expired then enter the Run command.
Figure 12.16 Coast to Stop with Timer

The active deceleration time and the output frequency when drive receives the Stop command determine the
length of “Run wait time t”.
Figure 12.17 Run Wait Time and Output Frequency

9 : Stop with Constant Distance
When you enter the Stop command or turn OFF the Run command, the drive always decelerates for the same
distance. The drive uses the active deceleration time and the value set in E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] to
calculate stopping distance S1. The drive holds its current speed when stopping from a frequency less than the
maximum speed. When the distance covered is equal to S1 minus S2, the drive ramps to stop in the current
deceleration time. Adjust the stopping precision with d4-12 [Stop Position Gain].
Parameter Details
12

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.18 Deceleration When Set for Stop in Position

Note:
Note these points when setting Stop in Position.
• To calculate the stop time, the drive uses the active deceleration time in the drive when it received the Stop command or when the Run
command was turned OFF. If you change the deceleration time during deceleration, the positioning will not be accurate.
• Set b6-03 = 0.0 [Dwell Reference at Stop = 0.0], b6-04 = 0.0 [Dwell Time at Stop = 0.0 s].
• The KEB Ride-Thru function is not available. Set H1-xx ≠ 65, 66, 7A, 7B [MFDI Function Selection = KEB Ride-Thru 1/2 Activate (N.
O./N.C.)].
• Set L3-04 = 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Disabled]. A dynamic braking option can be necessary for regenerative loads.
• Set L3-11 = 0 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Disabled].
• The High Slip Braking function is not available. Set H1-xx ≠ 68 [MFDI Function Selection ≠ High Slip Braking (HSB) Activate].
• Set C2-03, C2-04 = 0.00 [S-Curve Time @ Start of Decel, S-Curve Time @ End of Decel = 0.00 s].
■ b1-04: Reverse Operation Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-04 Reverse Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0183) Selection Sets the reverse operation function. Disable reverse operation in fan or pump applications where (0, 1)
reverse rotation is dangerous.
When reverse operation is prohibited, the drive will not accept a Reverse operation command.
0 : Reverse Enabled
The drive will accept a Reverse operation command.
1 : Reverse Disabled
The drive will not accept a Reverse operation command.
■ b1-05: Operation Below Minimum Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-05 Operation Below Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0184) Freq Sets the drive operation when the frequency reference decreases to less than the value set in E1-09 (0 - 3)
[Minimum Output Frequency].
0 : Operate at Frequency Reference

When the frequency reference is less than the value set in E1-09, the drive will continue to operate the motor as
specified by the frequency reference.
If the motor speed is less than or equal to the value set in b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] when you
enter the Stop command (or deactivate the Run command), the drive will do Zero Speed Control for the time set
in b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop] and then turn OFF its output.

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.19 Operate at the Frequency Reference

1 : Baseblock (Motor Coasts)
If the frequency reference is less than the value set in E1-09, the drive stops motor voltage output and the motor
coasts to stop. If the motor speed is less than or equal to the value set in b2-01, the drive will do Zero Speed
Control for the time set in b2-04.
Figure 12.20 Coast to Stop

2 : Operate at Minimum Frequency
The drive operates the motor at the minimum frequency reference set in E1-09 when the frequency reference falls
below the value set in E1-09 and the Run command is still enabled.
The drive decelerates the motor when the Stop command is entered (or when the Run command is switched OFF).
If the motor speed falls below or is equal to the value set in b2-01, then the drive will perform Zero Speed Control
for the time set in b2-04.
Figure 12.21 Operate at Minimum Frequency

3 : Operate at Zero Speed
The drive performs Zero Speed Control when the frequency reference falls below the value set in E1-09.
When you enter the Stop command (or when you turn OFF the Run command), the drive does Zero Speed Control
again for the time set in b2-04.
Parameter Details
Figure 12.22 Operate at Zero Speed
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b1-06: Digital Input Reading

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-06 Digital Input Reading V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0185) Sets the number of times that the drive reads the sequence input command to prevent malfunction (0, 1)
because of electrical interference.
0 : Single Scan
The drive reads the terminal status one time. The drive immediately reads all changes to the terminal status.
This setting lets the drive quickly respond to changes in the sequence, but noise can cause malfunction.
1 : Double Scan
The drive reads all changes to the terminal status two times to make sure that the reading is the same.
The drive responds slower than when it reads the sequence one time, but this setting prevents malfunction because
of electrical interference.
■ b1-07: LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-07 LOCAL/REMOTE Run V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0186) Selection Sets drive response to an existing Run command when the drive receives a second Run command (0, 1)
from a different location.
This parameter interlocks the drive to help prevent accidents that can occur if the motor starts to rotate because the
Run command source changed.
To switch the RUN command source, push on the keypad or set H1-xx = 1, 2 [MFDI Function Selection =
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection, External Reference 1/2 Selection] and activate/deactivate the terminal.
If a Run command is enabled when you switch between Run command sources, the drive will not operate the
motor.
When the drive is operating the motor, turn OFF the Run command to stop the motor. Enter the Run command
again to start operation.
If a Run command is enabled when you switch between Run command sources, the drive will start to operate the
motor or continue to operate the motor.
■ b1-08: Run Command Select in PRG Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-08 Run Command Select in V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0187) PRG Mode Sets the conditions for the drive to accept a Run command entered from an external source when (0 - 2)
using the keypad to set parameters.
As a safety precaution, when the drive is in Programming Mode, it will not respond to a Run command.
This parameter helps prevent accidents that can occur if the motor starts to rotate because the drive received a Run
command from an external source while the user is programming the drive. You can also set the drive to not show
the Programming Mode when a Run command is active.

12.3 b: Application
Note:
Refer to this table for Drive Mode and Programming Mode functions.
Mode Keypad Screen Function
Drive Mode Monitors Sets monitor display.
Parameters Changes parameter settings.
User Custom Parameters Shows the User Parameters.
Parameter Backup/Restore Saves parameters to the keypad as backup.
Programming Mode Modified Parameters/Fault Log Shows modified parameters and fault history.
Auto-Tuning Auto-Tunes the drive.
Initial Setup Screen Changes initial settings.
Diagnostic Tools Sets data logs and backlight.
0 : Disregard RUN while Programming

The drive does not accept the Run command when setting the parameters in the Programming Mode.
1 : Accept RUN while Programming
The drive accepts a Run command entered from an external source when setting the parameters in Programming
Mode.
2 : Allow Programming Only at Stop
The drive does not allow the user to enter the Programming Mode while the drive is operating. The keypad does
not display the Programming Mode while the drive is operating.
■ b1-14: Phase Order Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-14 Phase Order Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01C3) Sets the phase order for output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This parameter can align the (0, 1)
Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor without changing
wiring.
0 : Standard
1 : Switch Phase Order
■ b1-15: Frequency Reference Selection 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(01C4) Selection 2 Sets the input method for frequency reference 2. (0 - 4)
This parameter is enabled when H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Selection = External Reference 1/2 Selection] is
activated.
Note:
• Push on the keypad to set the input mode to LOCAL and enter the frequency reference from the keypad.
• If the frequency reference is 0 Hz or ≤ E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] and the drive receives a Run command, the on the
keypad will flash. Check the setting for the frequency reference input and enter a value more than or equal to E1-09.
0 : Keypad
Use the keypad to enter the frequency reference.
Use and on the keypad to change the frequency reference.
1 : Analog Input
Use MFAI terminals A1, A2, and A3 to input an analog frequency reference with a voltage or current input signal.
Parameter Details
• Voltage Input
12

12.3 b: Application
Table 12.24 Frequency Reference Voltage Input

Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal
Terminal Note
Level Signal Level
Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
A1 0 - 10 V H3-01 = 0 H3-02 = 0 H3-03 H3-04 Set DIP switch S1-1 to

[Frequency Reference] “V” for voltage input.
-10 - +10 V H3-01 = 1

-10 - +10 V H3-09 = 1

-10 - +10 V H3-05 = 1 Set DIP switch S4 to
“AI” for analog input.
Figure 12.23 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Voltage Signal to Terminal A1
Note:
• Current Input
Table 12.25 Frequency Reference Current Input
Parameter Settings
Terminal Signal Level Note
Signal Level Function Selection Gain Bias
Selection
A1 4 mA to 20 mA H3-01 = 2 H3-02 = 0 H3-03 H3-04 Set DIP switch S1-1 to

[Frequency Reference] “I” for current input.
0 - 20 mA H3-01 = 3

0 - 20 mA H3-09 = 3

0 - 20 mA H3-05 = 3 Set DIP switch S4 to
“AI” for analog input.

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.24 Example of Setting the Frequency Reference with a Current Signal to Terminal A2
Note:
Changing between Master and Auxiliary Frequency References
Use the multi-step speed reference function to change the frequency reference input between terminals A1, A2,
and A3.
Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the frequency reference.
3 : Option PCB
Note:
If b1-15 = 3 but no option card is connected, then oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] will flash on the keypad.
Use a pulse train signal from the pulse train input terminal RP to enter the frequency reference.
Do this procedure to make sure that the pulse train signal is operating correctly.
1. Set b1-15 = 4, H6-01 = 0 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function = Frequency Reference].
2. Set H6-02 [Terminal RP Frequency Scaling] to the number of pulses that determine 100% of the frequency
reference.
3. The terminal assigned to H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Selection = External Reference 1/2 Selection] is
activated.
4. Enter a pulse train signal on the terminal RP and make sure that the keypad shows a correct frequency
reference.
■ b1-16: Run Command Selection 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-16 Run Command Selection 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01C5) Sets the input method for Run Command 2 when the user switches the control circuit terminals (0 - 3)
ON/OFF to change the Run command source.
Activate H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Selection = External Reference 1/2 Selection] to enable this parameter.
0 : Keypad
Use the keypad to enter the Run command.
You can use the JOG operation or the FWD/REV commands from the keypad.
Note:
Parameter Details
The is on while the keypad is the Run command source.

1 : Digital Input
Use the control circuit terminals to enter the Run command. Select the input method for the Run command with
an H1-xx parameter.
12

12.3 b: Application
Set H1-xx = 0, 40 to 43 [3-Wire Sequence, Run Command (2-Wire Sequence)]. The default setting is 2-wire
sequence 1.
This sequence has two input types: FWD/Stop and REV/Stop. Set A1-03 = 2220 [Initialize Parameters = 2-
Wire Initialization] to initialize the drive and set terminals S1 and S2 for a 2-wire sequence.
This sequence has two input types: Run/Stop and FWD/REV.
• 3-Wire Sequence
This sequence has three input types: Run, Stop, and FWD/REV. Set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-
Wire Initialization] to initialize the drive and set terminals S1, S2, and S5 for a 3-wire sequence.
Use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications to enter the Run command.
3 : Option PCB
Note:
If b1-16 = 3 but no option card is connected, then oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] will flash on the keypad.
■ b1-17: Run Command at Power Up

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-17 Run Command at Power Up V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01C6) Sets drive response when the CPU changes from de-energized to energized and there is an active (0, 1)
Run command. Set this parameter in applications where energizing or de-energizing the drive
enables the Run command. When the CPU stays energized during loss of power, L2-01 [Power
Loss Ride Through Select] sets operation.

The drive does not start to operate the application when you apply power, even when there is an existing Run
command.
Enter the Run command again to operate the application.
Note:
When you energize the drive, on the keypad will flash quickly if the Run command is already enabled from an external source.
When there is an existing Run command, the drive starts to operate the application when you apply power.
■ b1-21: CLV Start Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-21 CLV Start Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0748) Sets the conditions for the drive to accept a Run command when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method (0, 1)
Expert Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 : Reject RUN if b2-01<U1-05<E1-09

If the motor speed ≥ b2-01 or the motor speed < E1-09, the drive will not accept a Run command.
1 : Accept RUN Command at Any Speed
If the motor speed ≥ b2-01 or the motor speed < E1-09, the drive will accept a Run command.
■ b1-35: Digital Input Deadband Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b1-35 Digital Input Deadband V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 ms
(1117) Time Sets the deadband time for MFDIs. (0.0 to 100.0 ms)
Expert

12.3 b: Application
When the on/off time for MFDIs is longer than the time set in b1-35, the drive activates the MFDI. Set this
parameter to prevent malfunctions caused by relay chattering for applications in which relays send input to MFDI
terminals.
◆ b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking

b2 parameters set the DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking functions.
• DC Injection Braking: A braking method that injects DC current into the motor windings. This function should
not be used too frequently, because it generates a fair amount of heat in the motor.
• Short Circuit Braking: A braking method for PM motors.
■ b2-01: DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-01 DC Injection/Zero V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0189) SpeedThreshold Sets the frequency to start DC Injection Braking, Short Circuit Braking, or Zero Servo near the (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
end of a stop ramp.
Note:
This parameter is available when b1-03 = 0 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop].
When the control method selected in A1-02 [Control Method Selection] changes, the b2-01 function changes.
Parameter Settings Functions of b2-01
A1-02 = 0, 1, 2 [V/f, CL-V/f, OLV] Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start DC Injection Braking at stop. When the output frequency is less than or
equal to the value set in b2-01, the drive will inject the quantity of DC current set in b2-02 [DC Injection Braking
A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 0 [Speed Feedback Current] into the motor for the time set in b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop].
Mode = With Encoder]
Figure 12.25 DC Injection Braking at Stop

Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency], the drive will start DC Injection Braking from the frequency
set in E1-09.
A1-02 = 5, 6, 8 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, EZOLV] Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start Short Circuit Braking at stop. When the output frequency is less than or
equal to the value set in b2-01, the drive will do Short Circuit Braking for the time set in b2-13 [Short Circuit Brake
Time @ Stop]. When b2-04 > 0.00 s, the drive will complete Short Circuit Braking, then do DC Injection Braking for
the time set in b2-04.
Figure 12.26 Short Circuit Braking at Stop

Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09, the drive will start Short Circuit Braking from the frequency set in E1-09. If b2-01 and E1-
09 = 0 Hz, the drive will not do Short Circuit Braking.
Parameter Details
12

12.3 b: Application
Parameter Settings Functions of b2-01
A1-02 = 3, 7 [CLV, CLV/PM] Parameter b2-01 sets the frequency to start Zero Speed Control at stop. When the output frequency is less than or
equal to the value set in b2-01, the drive will do Zero Speed Control for the time set in b2-04.
A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [With Encoder]
Figure 12.27 Zero Speed Control at Stop

Note:
When b2-01 ≤ E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency], the drive will start Zero Speed Control from the frequency
set in E1-09.
■ b2-02: DC Injection Braking Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-02 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50%
(018A) Current Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. (0 - 100%)
When the DC Injection Braking current is more than 50%, the drive decreases the carrier frequency to 1 kHz. The
motor rated current determines how much DC Injection Braking current that the drive can use.
The DC Injection Braking current level has an effect on the strength of the magnetic field that locks the motor
shaft. As the current level increases, the motor windings will supply more heat. Do not set this parameter higher
than the level that is necessary to hold the motor shaft.
Note:
When A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With Encoder], the drive ignores the b2-
02 setting and does initial excitation.
■ b2-03: DC Inject Braking Time at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-03 DC Inject Braking Time at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV A1-02 = 4: 0.30 s
(018B) Start Sets the DC Injection Braking Time at stop. Sets the time of Zero Speed Control at start when A1- Other than A1-02 = 4: 0.00
02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM]. s
(0.00 - 10.00 s)
This function stops then restarts a coasting motor and increases motor flux to make high starting torque (a process
called initial excitation). Set this parameter to 0.00 to disable the function.
Note:
• To restart a coasting motor, use DC Injection Braking to stop and then restart the motor, or enable Speed Search. Enable DC Injection
Braking or Speed Search to prevent ov [Overvoltage] or oC [Overcurrent] faults.
• Sets the time of Initial Excitation at start when A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = Without Encoder].
■ b2-04: DC Inject Braking Time at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-04 DC Inject Braking Time at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(018C) Stop Sets the DC Injection Braking Time at stop. Sets the time of Zero Speed Control at stop when A1- (0.00 - 10.00 s)
02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM].
This function fully stops a motor with a large inertia during deceleration and will not let the inertia continue to
rotate the motor.
Set this parameter to 0.00 to disable the function.
When a longer time is required to stop the motor, increase the value.
Note:
Sets the time of Zero Speed Control at stop when A1-02 = 4 [AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With Encoder].

12.3 b: Application
■ b2-08: Magnetic Flux Compensation Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-08 Magnetic Flux V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(0190) Compensation Value Sets how much current the drive injects when DC Injection Braking at Start starts (Initial (0 - 1000%)
Excitation) as a percentage of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current].
This parameter is effective when you start a high-capacity motor (a motor with a large secondary circuit time
constant). This function can quickly increase motor flux to make high starting torque (a process called initial
excitation).
The current level for DC Injection Braking at start changes linearly from the setting of b2-08 to the setting of b2-
03 as shown in Figure 12.28.
Figure 12.28 DC Current Level during DC Injection Braking at Start

Note:
• If b2-08 < 100%, flux will develop very slowly.
• When b2-08 = 0%, the DC current level will be the DC Injection current set in b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current].
• If b2-08 is set too high, DC Injection Braking at start can cause a large noise. Adjust b2-08 to decrease the volume to the permitted
level.
■ b2-12: Short Circuit Brake Time @ Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-12 Short Circuit Brake Time @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(01BA) Start Sets the Short Circuit Braking time at start. (0.00 - 25.50 s)
This function stops and restarts a coasting PM motor. The drive short circuits all the three motor phases to make
braking torque in the motor.
Note:
• Short circuit Braking will let external forces rotate the PM motor. Use DC Injection Braking to prevent motor rotation from external
forces.
• Motor speed and load conditions can make it necessary to install a dynamic braking option on the drive.
■ b2-13: Short Circuit Brake Time @ Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-13 Short Circuit Brake Time @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV A1-02 = 8: 0.00 s
(01BB) Stop Sets the Short Circuit Braking time at stop. Other than A1-02 = 8: 0.50
s
(0.00 - 25.50 s)
This function fully stops a PM motor with a large inertia during deceleration and will not let the inertia continue to
rotate the motor.
Short Circuit Braking operates for the time set in b2-13 when output frequency is less than the value set in b2-01
Parameter Details
[DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold] or E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency].

Note:
Motor speed and load conditions can make it necessary to install a dynamic braking option on the drive.
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b2-18: Short Circuit Braking Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b2-18 Short Circuit Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0177) Current Sets the Short Circuit Braking Current as a percentage of the motor rated current. (0.0 - 200.0%)
The Short Circuit Braking current cannot be higher than the drive rated current, although you can use b2-18 to set
a higher current level. The maximum rated current is 120% when the drive is set for Normal Duty (C6-01 = 1
[Normal Duty Rating]). The maximum rated current is 150% when the drive is set for Heavy Duty (C6-01 = 0
[Heavy Duty Rating]).
◆ b3: Speed Search

The Speed Search function detects the actual speed of a coasting motor, then restarts the motor before the motor
stops. Use Speed Search in these conditions:
• To continue operation after momentary power loss
• To switch from commercial power supply to drive power
• To restart a coasting fan
For example, the drive output turns off and the motor coasts when there is a momentary loss of power. After you
return power, the drive does Speed Search on the coasting motor, and restarts the motor from the detected speed.
When you use a PM motor, enable b3-01 [Speed Search at Start Selection].
There are two types of Speed Search for induction motors: Current Detection and Speed Estimation. Use
parameter b3-24 [Speed Search Method Selection] to select the type of Speed Search.
Parameter settings are different for different types of Speed Search. Refer to Table 12.26 for more information.
Table 12.26 Speed Search and Related Parameters
Speed Estimation Current Detection 2
Parameter
b3-24 = 1 b3-24 = 2
b3-01 [Speed Search at Start Selection] x x
b3-03 [Speed Search Deceleration Time] - x
b3-05 [Speed Search Delay Time] x x
b3-06 [Speed Estimation Current Level 1] x -
b3-07 [Speed Estimation Current Level 2] x -
b3-08 [Speed Estimation ACR P Gain] x -
b3-09 [Speed Estimation ACR I Time] x -
b3-10 [Speed Estimation Detection Gain] x -
b3-14 [Bi-directional Speed Search] x x *1
b3-17 [Speed Est Retry Current Level] x x
b3-18 [Speed Est Retry Detection Time] x x
b3-19 [Speed Search Restart Attempts] x x
b3-24 [Speed Search Method Selection] x x
b3-25 [Speed Search Wait Time] x x
b3-26 [Direction Determination Level] x -
b3-27 [Speed Search RUN/BB Priority] x x
b3-29 [Speed Search Back-EMF Threshold] - -
b3-31 [Spd Search Current Reference Lvl] - x
b3-32 [Spd Search Current Complete Lvl] - x
b3-33 [Speed Search during Uv Selection] x x
b3-35 [Low Back EMF Detection Level] x x
b3-36 [High Back EMF Detection Level] x x
b3-54 [Search Time] - -

12.3 b: Application
Speed Estimation Current Detection 2

Parameter
b3-24 = 1 b3-24 = 2
b3-55 [Current Increment Time] - -
b3-56 [InverseRotationSearch WaitTime] - x
*1 On drives with software versions PRG: 01023 and later, this function is enabled. On drives with software versions PRG: 01022 and
earlier, when b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current Detection 2], setting b3-14 = 1 will not have an effect on the
drive operation. The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version. You can also use
U1-25 [SoftwareNumber Flash] to identify the software version.
Note:
• To use Speed Estimation Speed Search with V/f Control, do Rotational Auto-Tuning before you set the Speed Search function. If the
wire length between the drive and motor changed since the last time you did Auto-Tuning, do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line
Resistance process again.
• If A1-02 = 5, 6 [PM Open Loop Vector, PM Advanced Open Loop Vector] and the wiring distance between the motor and drive is long
or if the motor is coasting at more than or equal to 200 Hz, do not use Speed Search to restart the motor. Use Short Circuit Braking.
■ Current Detection 2
Use this Speed Search function with induction motors. Set b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current
Detection 2]. Current Detection Speed Search injects current into the motor to detect the speed of an induction
motor. Speed Search increases the output voltage for the time set in L2-04 [Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time],
starting from the maximum output frequency or the frequency reference.
Figure 12.29 Current Detection 2 after Momentary Power Loss

Note:
After you restore power, the drive will not do Speed Search until the time set in b3-05 [Speed Search Delay Time] expires. This means
that the drive will not always start Speed Search when the time set in L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time] expires.
If you enter the Run command at the same time as Speed Search, the drive will not do Speed Search until the time
set in L2-03 expires. When the value set in L2-03 < b3-05, the drive will use the wait time set in b3-05.
Figure 12.30 Speed Search Selection at Start (Current Detection Type)

Parameter Details
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not do Current Detection Speed Search with light loads or a stopped motor. If you
do Auto-Tuning in these conditions, the motor can suddenly accelerate and cause serious injury or death.
12

12.3 b: Application
Note:
• You cannot use Current Detection Speed Search with PM motors.
• If the drive detects oL1 [Motor Overload] during Current Detection Speed Search, decrease b3-03.
• If the drive detects oC [Overcurrent] or ov [Overvoltage] during Current Detection Speed Search after the drive recovers from a
momentary power loss, increase L2-03.
• If b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled], too much current will flow when the motor starts. If there is too much
current at start, it will decrease the service life of the drive IGBTs over time.
■ Speed Estimation
Use this Speed Search function with induction motors. Set b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed
Estimation]. This function uses less current and has a shorter search time than other functions. This function lets
you do Speed Search when the motor is rotating in reverse. When you return power after a power loss, the motor
will not suddenly accelerate.
Note:
You cannot do Speed Estimation Speed Search in these conditions:
• When You Operate More than One Motor with One Drive
• When you use a high-speed motor (200 Hz or higher)
• When you use a 1.5 kW or smaller motor.
• When the motor output is more than 1 frame size smaller than the drive capacity
• When there is a long wiring distance between the drive and motor
For these conditions, use Current Detection Speed Search.
Speed Estimation Speed Search uses these two steps to estimate the motor speed:
1. Residual Voltage Search
When there is a short baseblock time, the drive searches for residual voltage. The drive uses the residual
voltage in the motor to estimate the motor speed and direction of rotation. The drive outputs the estimated
motor speed as frequency, then uses the deceleration rate set in L2-04 to increase the voltage. When the output
voltage aligns with the V/f pattern, the drive accelerates or decelerates the motor to the frequency reference. If
the drive cannot estimate the motor speed because of low residual voltage, it will automatically do Current
Injection.
Figure 12.31 Speed Search after Baseblock

Note:
After you return power, the drive waits for the time set in b3-05. If power loss is longer than the time set in L2-03, the drive will start
Speed Search when the time set in b3-05 is expired after the power recovery.
2. Current Injection
If there is not sufficient residual voltage in the motor, the drive does Current Injection. The drive injects the
quantity of DC current set in b3-06 [Speed Estimation Current Level 1] into the motor windings to estimate
the motor speed and direction of rotation. The drive outputs the estimated motor speed as frequency, then uses
the deceleration rate set in L2-04 to increase the voltage. When the output voltage aligns with the V/f pattern,
the drive accelerates or decelerates the motor to the frequency reference.

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.32 Speed Search Selection at Start

Note:
Set the lower limit of the delay time to b3-05 for when Speed Search starts.
■ Speed Search and Operation Conditions

These conditions apply to Speed Search operation. When A1-02 = 0, 1, 2 [Control Method Selection = V/f
Control, V/f Control with Encoder, Open Loop Vector], set b3-24 [Speed Search Method Selection] before you do
Speed Search.
• Do Speed Search with each Run Command
The drive ignores a Speed Search command from the external terminals.
• Use an MFDI to do an External Speed Search Command
To use an MFDI to do Speed Search, input the Run command at the same time that terminal Sx set for Speed
Search activates, or after Speed Search activates.
Set Speed Search to H1-xx to do the function externally. You cannot set external Speed Search 1 and 2 at the
same time.
Table 12.27 Execute Speed Search via the Digital Input Terminals
H1-xx Setting Name Current Detection 2 Speed Estimation
61 Speed Search from Fmax ON: Speed Search starts from E1-04 [Maximum Output
Frequency]. External Speed Search commands 1 and 2 work the
same.
62 Speed Search from Fref ON: Speed Search starts from the frequency reference The drive estimates the motor speed, then starts Speed
immediately before you input the Speed Search Search from the estimated speed.
command.
• Do Speed Search with Each Auto Restart

Set L5-01 [Number of Auto-Restart Attempts] = 1 or more. After an Auto Restart fault, the drive automatically
does Speed Search.
• Do Speed Search after Momentary Power Loss
Set L2-01 = 1, 2 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Enabled for L2-02 Time, Enabled while CPU Power
Active].
• Do Speed Search after You Clear the External Baseblock Command
If you clear the external baseblock command, the drive will do Speed Search in these conditions;
– There is an active Run command
– The output frequency is higher than the minimum frequency
■ b3-01: Speed Search at Start Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-01 Speed Search at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0191) Selection Sets the Speed Search at Start function so the drive will do Speed Search with each Run (0, 1)
Parameter Details
command.
0 : Disabled
Enter a Run command to start to operate the drive at the minimum output frequency.
When the Run command is enabled and the Speed Search from Fmax or Fref [H1-xx = 61, 62] is input from a
multi-function input terminal, the drive will do Speed Search and start to operate the motor.
12

12.3 b: Application
1 : Enabled
Enter the Run command to do Speed Search. The drive completes Speed Search, then starts to operate the motor.
Note:
If you set b3-01 = 1 when b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current Detection 2], too much current flows at start. Too
much current at start will decrease the service life of the drive IGBT.
■ b3-02: SpeedSearch Deactivation Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-02 SpeedSearch Deactivation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0192) Current Sets the current level that stops Speed Search as a percentage of the drive rated output current. (0 - 200%)
If the drive cannot restart the motor, decrease this setting.
■ b3-03: Speed Search Deceleration Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s
(0193) Time Sets the deceleration time during Speed Search operation. Set the length of time to decelerate (0.1 - 10.0 s)
from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
This is the output frequency deceleration time used by Current Detection Speed Search and by the Current
Injection Method of Speed Estimation Speed Search.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this parameter takes effect only in Expert Mode.
• If the drive detects oL1 [Motor Overload] during Current Detection Speed Search, decrease the value set in b3-03.
■ b3-04: V/f Gain during Speed Search

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-04 V/f Gain during Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0194) Search Sets the ratio used to reduce the V/f during searches to reduce the output current during speed (10 - 100)
searches.
Use this formula to calculate the output voltage during Speed Search:
Output voltage during Speed Search = Configured V/f × b3-04
When the current detection search operates correctly, this configuration is not necessary.
■ b3-05: Speed Search Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.2 s
(0195) Sets the Speed Search delay time to activate a magnetic contactor installed between the drive and (0.0 - 100.0 s)
motor.
When you use a magnetic contactor between the drive and motor, you must close the contactor before the drive
will do Speed Search. This parameter sets a delay time to activate the magnetic contactor.
■ b3-06: Speed Estimation Current Level 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-06 Speed Estimation Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0196) Level 1 Sets the level of current that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search as a (0.0 - 2.0)
Expert coefficient of the motor rated current. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
When the speed estimation value is the minimum output frequency, increase this setting. You can do this when the
motor coasts at a high speed while the drive estimates the speed during Speed Estimation Speed Search. The limit
of the output current during speed search is automatically the drive rated current.
Note:
When the drive cannot accurately estimate the speed after you adjust this parameter, use Current Detection Speed Search.

12.3 b: Application
■ b3-07: Speed Estimation Current Level 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-07 Speed Estimation Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(0197) Level 2 Sets the level of current that flows to the motor during Speed Estimation Speed Search as a (0.0 - 3.0)
Expert coefficient of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current] or E4-03 [Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current].
During Speed Estimation Speed Searches, when the speed estimation value aligns with the minimum output
frequency, increase the setting value in 0.1-unit increments. The limit of the output current during speed search is
automatically the drive rated current.
■ b3-08: Speed Estimation ACR P Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-08 Speed Estimation ACR P V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 and
(0198) Gain Sets the proportional gain for the automatic current regulator during Speed Estimation Speed o2-04
Expert Search. Also adjusts speed search responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0.00 - 6.00)
setting.
■ b3-09: Speed Estimation ACR I Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-09 Speed Estimation ACR I V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0199) Time Sets the integral time for the automatic current regulator during Speed Estimation Speed Search. (0.0 - 1000.0 ms)
Expert Also adjusts speed search responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
■ b3-10: Speed Estimation Detection Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-10 Speed Estimation Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.05
(019A) Gain Sets the gain to correct estimated frequencies from Speed Estimation Speed Search. (1.00 - 1.20)
Expert
If the drive detects ov [DC Bus Overvoltage] when you restart the motor, increase the setting value.
■ b3-14: Bi-directional Speed Search

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-14 Bi-directional Speed Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, b3-
(019E) Sets the direction of Speed Search to the direction of the frequency reference or in the motor 24, and E9-01
rotation direction as detected by the drive. (0, 1)
Note:
• The initial value of b3-14 [Bi-directional Speed Search] is different for different A1-02 [Control Method Selection] settings when you
set these parameters: Refer to Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method Selection] on page 627
for information.
–A1-02 = 0, 2, 8 [V/f, OLV, EZOLV]
–E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction (IM)]
–b3-24 = 1 [Speed Search Method Selection = Speed Estimation].
• The initial value of b3-14 is 0 when you set these parameters:
–A1-02 = 0, 2, 8
–E9-01 = 0
–b3-24 = 2 [Current Detection 2]
• The initial value of b3-14 is different for different A1-02 settings when you set these parameters: Refer to Parameters that Change
from the Default Settings with A1-02 [Control Method Selection] on page 627 for information.
–A1-02 = 1, 4, 8 [CL-V/f, AOLV, EZOLV]
Parameter Details
–E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]

• When you set A1-02, b3-24, and E9-01, set b3-14.
0 : Disabled
The drive uses the frequency reference to detect the direction of motor rotation.
1 : Enabled
12

12.3 b: Application
The drive detects the direction of motor rotation during Speed Search.
■ b3-17: Speed Est Retry Current Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-17 Speed Est Retry Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150%
(01F0) Level Sets the current level for the search retry function in Speed Estimation Speed Search as a (0 - 200%)
Expert percentage where drive rated current is a setting value of 100%.
When a large quantity of current flows during Speed Estimation Speed Search, the drive temporarily stops
operation to prevent overvoltage and overcurrent. When the current is at the level set in b3-17, the drive tries
speed search again.
■ b3-18: Speed Est Retry Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-18 Speed Est Retry Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s
(01F1) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait to retry Speed Estimation Speed Search when too (0.00 - 1.00 s)
Expert much current flow stopped the Speed Search.
When the current is more than the level set in b3-17 [Speed Est Retry Current Level] during the time set in b3-18,
the drive tries speed search again.
■ b3-19: Speed Search Restart Attempts

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-19 Speed Search Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3 times
(01F2) Attempts Sets the number of times to restart Speed Search if Speed Search does not complete. (0 - 10 times)
If the drive does the number of Speed Search restarts set in this parameter, it will trigger an SEr [Speed Search
Retries Exceeded] error.
■ b3-24: Speed Search Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-24 Speed Search Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(01C0) Selection Sets the Speed Search method when you start the motor or when you restore power after a (1, 2)
momentary power loss.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], the default setting changes when the setting for E9-01 [Motor Type Selection]
and the drive model change.
–E9-01 = 0 [Induction (IM)]
–2004 - 2313, 4002 - 4296: 1
–2360, 2415, 4371 - 4H12: 2
–E9-01 = 1, 2 [Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)]: 1
• When you set A1-02 = 8 and E9-01 = 1 or 2, also set b3-24 = 1. If b3-24 = 2, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection
Error].
• When you set b3-24, it will trigger the drive to initialize b3-14 [Bi-directional Speed Search]. After you set b3-24, set b3-14.
• When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV], the default setting is 1 [Speed Estimation].
Set b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled] to do Speed Search at start. Set L2-01 = 1 [Power
Loss Ride Through Select = Enabled for L2-02 Time]] to do Speed Search after you restore power after a
momentary power loss.
1 : Speed Estimation
The drive uses the residual voltage from a short baseblock time to estimate the motor speed.
If there is not sufficient residual voltage, then the drive will inject DC current into the motor to estimate the motor
speed.
2 : Current Detection 2
The drive will inject DC current into the motor to estimate motor speed.

12.3 b: Application
■ b3-25: Speed Search Wait Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-25 Speed Search Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 s
(01C8) Sets the length of time the drive will wait to start the Speed Search Retry function. (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Expert
If the drive detects these faults during speed search, increase the setting value:
• oC [Overcurrent]
• ov [Overvoltage]
• SEr [Speed Search Retries Exceeded]
■ b3-26: Direction Determination Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-26 Direction Determination V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1000
(01C7) Level Sets the level to find the motor rotation direction. Increase the value if the drive cannot find the (40 to 60000)
Expert direction.
■ b3-27: Speed Search RUN/BB Priority

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-27 Speed Search RUN/BB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01C9) Priority Sets the conditions necessary to start Speed Search. (0, 1)
Expert
Executes Speed Search from Fmax or Fref [H1-xx = 61/62] for initial speed searches or from the MFDI terminal.
0 : SS Only if RUN Applied Before BB
1 : SS Regardless of RUN/BB Sequence
■ b3-29: Speed Search Back-EMF Threshold

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-29 Speed Search Back-EMF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10%
(077C) Threshold Sets the induced voltage for motors that use Speed Search. The drive will start Speed Search (0 - 10%)
Expert when the motor induced voltage level is the same as the setting value. Usually it is not necessary
To make adjustments, gradually decrease the setting value. If you decrease the setting value too much, speed
search will not operate correctly.
■ b3-31: Spd Search Current Reference Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-31 Spd Search Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50
(0BC0) Reference Lvl Sets the current level that decreases the output current during Current Detection Speed Search. (1.50 - 3.50)
Expert
Set this parameter as a ratio of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]. The setting is a ratio with respect to 30% of the
motor rated current when E2-03 ≤ E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] × 0.3.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], the setting is a ratio with respect to E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] × 0.5.
■ b3-32: Spd Search Current Complete Lvl

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-32 Spd Search Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.20
(0BC1) Complete Lvl Sets the current level that completes Speed Search. (0.00 - 1.49)
Expert
12

12.3 b: Application
The Current Detection Speed Search gradually decreases the output frequency to search for the motor speed when
the output current is equal to or less than Speed Search Current Complete Level.
Set this parameter as a ratio of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]. The setting is a ratio with respect to 30% of the
motor rated current when E2-03 ≤ E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] × 0.3.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], the setting is a ratio with respect to E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] × 0.5.
■ b3-33: Speed Search during Uv Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-33 Speed Search during Uv V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0B3F) Selection Sets the function that starts Speed Search at start-up if the drive detects a Uv [Undervoltage] (0, 1)
Expert when it receives a Run command.
Set these three parameters as shown to enable b3-33:

• L2-01 = 1, 2 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Enabled for L2-02 Time, Enabled while CPU Power Active]
• b3-01 = 1 [Speed Search at Start Selection = Enabled]
• b1-03 = 1 [Stopping Method Selection = Coast to Stop]
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ b3-35: Low Back EMF Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-35 Low Back EMF Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10%
(0BC3) Level Sets the Low Back EMF Detection Level. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (5 - 50%)
Expert
■ b3-36: High Back EMF Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-36 High Back EMF Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.970
(0BC4) Level Sets the voltage level for Speed Search restart. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.500 - 1.000)
Expert
The drives wait for Speed Search to prevent failure when the induced voltage for the motor during coasting to a
stop is larger than the voltage the drive can output. The drive will not restart the motor (Speed Search) if induced
voltage ≥ supply voltage × b3-36 after a Run command is entered. The drive will restart the motor when induced
voltage < supply voltage × b3-36. For example, if the setting value is 0.83 and the voltage does not decrease to the
induced voltage at approximately 183 V when the power supply voltage is 220 V, the drive will not restart.
■ b3-39: Regen Judgment Lv of Spd Search

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-39 Regen Judgment Lv of Spd V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15%
(1B8F) Search Sets the level to determine the regenerative state during speed search. Usually it is not necessary (0 - 50%)
Expert to change this setting.
If the speed search is not completed after starting the speed search, increase the setting value in 5% increments
after the drive stops.
If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage] during speed search, decrease the setting value in 5% increments after the
drive stops.
■ b3-54: Search Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-54 Search Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400 ms
(3123) Sets the length of time that the drive will run Speed Search. (10 - 2000 ms)
If you set this parameter too low, Speed Search will not operate correctly.

12.3 b: Application
If the drive detects oC [Overcurrent] immediately after Speed Search Starts:

• Increase the value of L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time] and decrease the motor speed you use to start Speed
Search.
• Increases the setting value of b3-08 [Speed Estimation ACR P Gain].
• Increase the value of b3-54.
If the drive detects oC or ov [DC Bus Overvoltage] during Speed Search, increase the value of b3-08.
■ b3-55: Current Increment Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-55 Current Increment Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 ms
(3124) Sets the length of time that the drive will increase the current from zero current to the setting (10 - 2000 ms)
Expert value of b3-06 [Speed Estimation Current Level 1].
Gradually increase the setting value when a large quantity of current flows after speed search starts. If you set this
value too high, speed search will not operate correctly.
■ b3-56: InverseRotationSearch WaitTime

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-56 InverseRotationSearch V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(3126) WaitTime Sets the wait time until the drive starts inverse rotation search after it completes forward search (0.1 - 5.0 s)
when you do inverse rotation search during Current Detection Speed Search.
■ b3-61: Initial Pole Detection Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b3-61 Init Magnet Pole Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0
(1B96) Gain Sets the responsiveness for initial motor magnetic pole calculation when A1-02 = 6 [Control (-20.0 - +20.0)
Expert Method Selection = AOLV/PM]. Set b3-61 > 0.0 for an ordinary IPM motor.
Note:
• Set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Calculation Method = High Frequency Injection] to enable this parameter.
• The drive automatically calculates this value when High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning completes successfully.
Used when n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High Frequency Injection]. Sets the responsiveness for
initial motor magnetic pole calculation. Set this parameter to a positive value for an ordinary monitor. When you
use High Frequency injection Tuning, it will automatically set this parameter.
◆ b4: Timer Function

The drive uses timers to delay activating and deactivating MFDO terminals.
Timers prevent sensors and switches from making chattering noise.
There are two types of timers:
• Timers that set a delay for timer inputs and timer outputs.
These timers delay activating and deactivating of the MFDIs and MFDOs.
To enable this function, set H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function Select = Timer Function], and set H2-01 to H2-03 =
12 [MFDO Function Select = Timer Output].
• Timers that set a delay to activate and deactivate MFDO terminals.
These timers delay activating and deactivating MFDO terminals.
To enable this function, set delay times in parameters b4-03 to b4-08.
■ Timer Function Operation

• Timers that Set a Delay for Timer Inputs and Timer Outputs
Triggers timer output if the timer input is active for longer than the time set in b4-01 [Timer Function ON-Delay
Parameter Details
Time]. Triggers timer output late for the time set in b4-02 [Timer Function OFF-Delay Time]. Figure 12.33
shows an example of how the timer function works.
12

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.33 Example of Timer Function Operation

• Setting On/Off-delay Time for MFDO
Figure 12.34 uses H2-01 terminals to show an example of how the timer function works. Use b4-03 [Terminal
M1-M2 ON-Delay Time] and b4-04 [Terminal M1-M2 OFF-Delay Time] to set this function.
Figure 12.34 Example of How the Timer Function Works with H2-01 Terminals
Note:
When the terminal is triggered, it continues for a minimum of 100 ms. The on/off-delay time of MFDO terminal does not have an effect.
■ b4-01: Timer Function ON-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b4-01 Timer Function ON-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01A3) Time Sets the ON-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)
■ b4-02: Timer Function OFF-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b4-02 Timer Function OFF-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01A4) Time Sets the OFF-delay time for the timer input. (0.0 - 3000.0 s)
■ b4-03: Terminal M1-M2 ON-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b4-03 Terminal M1-M2 ON- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms
Expert
■ b4-04: Terminal M1-M2 OFF-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b4-04 Terminal M1-M2 OFF- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

12.3 b: Application

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert
◆ b5: PID control

The drive has a PID control function. You can control drive output to adjust the proportional gain, integral time,
and derivative time that has an effect on the bias between the target value and the feedback value to match the
target value to the detected value. Use this function to adjust the drive output to accurately match the flow,
pressure, and temperature in the application match the target value.
Use a combination of controls to increase the performance:
• P control
P control has a proportional effect on the deviation. It outputs the product (the controlled output) proportional to
the deviation. You cannot use only the offset from P control to get to zero deviation.
• I control
I control is the integral of the deviation. It uses an integral value of the deviation to output the product (the
controlled output). I control helps align the feedback value and the target value. If you use only a proportional
effect (P control), it will cause and offset. Use a proportional effect with integral control, and the offset will
disappear over time.
• D control
D control is the derivative of the deviation. D control has an effect on drive output when there are sudden, large
changes in the deviation or feedback value. It quickly returns drive output to the value before the sudden
change. It multiplies a time constant by a derivative value of the deviation (slope of the deviation), and adds that
result to PID input to calculate the deviation of the signal, then it corrects the deviation.
Note:
D control has causes less stable operation because the noise changes the deviation signal. Use D control only when necessary.
■ PID Control Operation

Figure 12.35 shows PID control operation. The modified output (output frequency) changes when the drive uses
PID control to keep the deviation (the difference between the target value and the feedback value) constant.
Parameter Details
12

12.3 b: Application
Figure 12.35 PID Control Operation
■ PID Control Applications

Table 12.28 shows applications for PID control.
Table 12.28 PID Control Applications
Application Control Content Sensors Used
• The drive uses a feedback signal for the machine

speed, and adjusts that speed to align with the target
value.
Speed Control • The drive uses speed data from other machinery as the Tacho generator
target value to do synchronous control. The drive then
adds that target value to the feedback from the
machine it is operating to align its speed with the other
machinery.
The drive uses feedback from the actual pressure to hold

Pressure control constant pressure. Pressure sensor
The drive uses feedback from the actual flow to hold

Flow control Flow rate sensor
constant flow.
The drive uses feedback from the actual temperature to

Temperature control Thermocoupler, thermistor
control a fan and hold constant temperature.
■ Input Methods for the PID Setpoint

Use b5-01 [PID Mode Setting] to select how the PID setpoint is input to the drive.
When b5-01 = 1 or 2 [Standard or Standard (D on feedback)], either the frequency reference set in b1-01
[Frequency Reference Selection 1] or b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2] will be the PID setpoint, or the
one of the inputs in Table 12.29 will be the PID setpoint.
When b5-01 = 3 or 4 [Fref + PID Trim or Fref + PID Trim (D on feedback)], one of the inputs in Table 12.29
will be the PID setpoint.
Table 12.29 Input Methods for the PID Setpoint
Input Methods for the PID Setpoint Setting Value
MFAI terminal A1 Set H3-02 = C [Terminal A1 Function Selection = PID Setpoint].
MFAI terminal A2 Set H3-10 [Terminal A2 Function Selection] = C .
MFAI terminal A3 Set H3-06 [Terminal A3 Function Selection] = C.
MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0006H Sets MEMOBUS/Modbus register 000FH (Control Selection Setting) bit 1 to 1 (PID
setpoint input). Enters the PID setpoint to MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0006H (PID
Target, 0.01% units, signed).
Pulse train input terminal RP Set H6-01 = 2 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function = PID Setpoint Value].
b5-19 [PID Setpoint Value] Set b5-18 = 1 [b5-19 PID Setpoint Selection = Enabled]. Enters the PID setpoint to b5-
19.
Note:
If you set two inputs for the PID setpoint, it will trigger operation error oPE07 [Analog Input Selection Error].
■ Entering the PID Feedback Value

You can use two methods to input the PID feedback value to the drive.
• Use Single Feedback Signal
Use Table 12.30 to select how the feedback signal is input to the drive for PID control.

12.3 b: Application
Table 12.30 PID Feedback Input Method

PID Feedback Input Method Setting Value
MFAI terminal A1 Set H3-02 = B [PID Feedback].
MFAI terminal A2 Set H3-10 = B.
MFAI terminal A3 Set H3-06 = B.
Pulse train input terminal RP Set H6-01 = 1 [PID Feedback Value].
• Use Two Feedback Signals and Calculate the Deviation from the Difference between Those Signals
Use Table 12.31 to select how the second feedback value is input to the drive. The drive calculates the deviation
of the second feedback value. Set H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 = 16 [Terminal A1/A3/A2 Function Selection =
Differential PID Feedback] to enable the second feedback signal used to calculated the deviation.
Table 12.31 PID Differential Feedback Input Method
PID Differential Feedback Input Method Setting Value
MFAI terminal A1 Set H3-02 = 16 [Differential PID Feedback].
MFAI terminal A2 Set H3-10 = 16.
MFAI terminal A3 Set H3-06 = 16.
Note:
If you set two or more of H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10 to 16, it will trigger oPE07 [Analog Input Selection Error].
■ PID Control Block Diagram
Figure 12.36 PID Control Block Diagram

Parameter Details
■ PID Feedback Loss Detection

The PID feedback loss detection function detects broken sensors and defective wiring between the drive and
sensors.
Use the PID feedback loss detection function when you use PID control. If the feedback signal is too low, the
motor can suddenly accelerate to the maximum output frequency. This function prevents such risks to the load.
12

12.3 b: Application
The drive uses two methods to detect feedback loss:

• PID Feedback Loss [FbL]
Set these parameters for the PID feedback loss detection function.
The drive detects feedback loss when the feedback value is less than the value in b5-13 for longer than the time
in b5-14.
– b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select]
– b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl]
– b5-14 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Time]
• Excessive PID Feedback [FbH]
Set these parameters to set how the drive detects a feedback level that is too high.
The drive detects too much PID feedback when the feedback value is more than the value in b5-36 for longer
than the time in b5-37.
– b5-12 [Feedback Loss Detection Select]
– b5-36 [PID High Feedback Detection Lvl]
– b5-37 [PID High Feedback Detection Time]
Figure 12.37 shows the operation principle when the feedback value is too low, and the drive detects feedback
loss. The operation is the same when the drive detects too much feedback.
Figure 12.37 Time Chart for PID Feedback Loss Detection Time
■ PID Sleep
PID sleep stops drive operation when the PID output or the frequency reference is less than b5-15 [PID Sleep
Function Start Level]. This function shuts off drive output after the motor decelerates to the set frequency.
The drive will automatically restart the motor when the PID output or the frequency reference is more than the b5-
15 value for the time set in b5-16 [PID Sleep Delay Time].
Figure 12.38 shows the PID Sleep function.
Figure 12.38 PID Sleep Time Chart

Note:
• The PID Sleep function is enabled when PID control is disabled.
• When the PID Sleep function is triggered, the drive will stop the motor as specified by b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection].
■ Fine-Tuning PID
Fine-tune the following parameter settings to have PID control eliminate problems with overshoot and oscillation.
• b5-02 [Proportional Gain (P)]
• b5-03 [Integral Time (I)]
• b5-05 [Derivative Time (D)]

12.3 b: Application
• b5-08 [PID Primary Delay Time Constant]

Purpose Procedure Results
Prevent overshoot. • Set b5-05 [Derivative Time (D)] to a smaller

value.
• Set b5-03 [Integral Time (I)] to a larger value.
Quickly stabilize control. • Set b5-05 [Derivative Time (D)] to a larger

value.
• Set b5-03 [Integral Time (I)] to a smaller value.
Prevent long-cycle oscillations. Set b5-03 [Integral Time (I)] to a larger value.
Prevent short-cycle oscillations. • Set b5-05 [Derivative Time (D)] to a smaller

value.
• If you set b5-05 = 0.00 [Derivative Time (D) =
disabling D control] and it does not stop
oscillation, then set b5-02 [Proportional Gain
(P)] to a smaller value or set b5-08 [PID
Primary Delay Time Constant] to a larger value.
■ EZ Sleep/Wake-up Functionality
Set b5-89 = 1 [Sleep Method Selection = EZ Sleep/Wake-up] to enable the EZ Sleep/Wake-up function.
Note:
• When b5-89 = 0 [Sleep Mode Selection = Standard], the EZ Sleep function and related parameters are disabled. Parameter b5-91 [EZ
Sleep Minimum Speed] is not included in this rule.
• Set b5-89 = 1 to disable b5-15 [PID Sleep Function Start Level].
Setting Parameter Description
b5-90 [EZ Sleep Unit] This parameter sets the unit of measure for b5-92 [EZ Sleep Level]. When b5-90 = 0 [0.1Hz units], the
Parameter Details
setting range of b5-91 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed] is 0.0 to 590.0 Hz. When b5-90 = 1 [rev/min], the setting
range is 0 to 35400 min--1 (r/min).
Note:
When you change b5-90, the value of b5-92 is not automatically updated.
b5-91 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed] Sets the output lower limit level for the PID control as Hz units or min-1 (r/min) units.
When you use b5-91, set b5-34 = 0.0 [PID Output Lower Limit Level = 0.0 (disabled)]. When you set the
lower limit for PID output as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency, refer to page 717. The b5-89
setting does not have an effect.
12

12.3 b: Application
Setting Parameter Description
b5-92 [EZ Sleep Level] When the output frequency or motor speed is less than the value of b5-92 for longer than the value of b5-93
[EZ Sleep Time], the drive does to sleep.
b5-95 = 0 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode = Absolute] When the PID feedback is less than the value of b5-94 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Level] for longer than the time set
in b5-96 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Time], the drive restarts operation from sleep.
b5-95 = 1 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode = Setpoint Delta] The drive resumes operation from the sleep state when the PID feedback has dropped below the value
defined as the PID setpoint value minus b5-94 continuously for the time configured with b5-96.
Figure 12.39 EZ Sleep/Wake-up Operation: PID Output is Normal and b5-92 = 0.0 Hz
*1 The values of b5-94 and b5-95 set operation.
*2 In the example, b5-92 is at the default setting of 0.0 Hz. Parameter b5-91 is the EZ sleep level.
■ b5-01: PID Mode Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-01 PID Mode Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01A5) Sets the type of PID control. (0 - 8)
0 : Disabled
1 : Standard
Enables PID control. The drive does D control on the difference between the feedback value and the PID setpoint
output through U5-02 [PID Input].
2 : Standard (D on feedback)
Enables PID control. The drive does D control on the feedback output through U5-06 [PID FdbkDif PID Fdbk].
3 : Fref + PID Trim
Enables PID control. The drive adds the frequency reference to the PID output. The drive does D control on the
difference between the feedback value and the PID setpoint output through U5-02 [PID Input].
4 : Fref + PID Trim (D on feedback)
Enables PID control. The drive adds the frequency reference to the PID output. The drive does D control on the
feedback output through U5-06 [PID FdbkDif PID Fdbk].
Note:
Use settings 5 to 8 instead of settings 1 to 4 when the drive is a replacement for Varispeed F7.

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-02: Proportional Gain (P)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-02 Proportional Gain (P) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(01A6) Sets the proportional gain (P) that is applied to PID input. (0.00 - 25.00)
RUN
Larger values decrease errors, but can cause oscillations. Smaller values let too much offset between the setpoint
and feedback.
Set b5-02 = 0.00 to disable P control.
■ b5-03: Integral Time (I)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-03 Integral Time (I) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(01A7) Sets the integral time (I) that is applied to PID input. (0.0 - 360.0 s)
RUN
Set a short integral time in b5-03 to remove the offset more quickly. If the integral time is too short, overshoot or
oscillation can occur.
Set b5-03 = 0.00 to disable I control.
Figure 12.40 Integral Time and Deviation
■ b5-04: Integral Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-04 Integral Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(01A8) Sets the upper limit for integral control (I) as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN
Applications with loads that quickly change will cause the output of the PID function to oscillate. Set this
parameter to a low value to prevent oscillation, mechanical loss, and motor speed loss.
■ b5-05: Derivative Time (D)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-05 Derivative Time (D) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(01A9) Sets the derivative time (D) for PID control. This parameter adjusts system responsiveness. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
RUN
When you increase the time setting, it will increase controller responsiveness, but it can also cause vibration.
When you decrease the time setting, it will suppress overshoot and decrease controller responsiveness.
Set b5-05 = 0.00 to disable D control.
Parameter Details
■ b5-06: PID Output Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-06 PID Output Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(01AA) Sets the maximum possible output from the PID controller as a percentage of the Maximum (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN Output Frequency.
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-07: PID Offset Adjustment

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(01AB) Sets the offset for the PID control output as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN
■ b5-08: PID Primary Delay Time Constant

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(01AC) Constant Sets the primary delay time constant for the PID control output. Usually it is not necessary to (0.00 - 10.00 s)
RUN change this setting.
Expert
Prevents resonance if there is a large quantity of mechanical friction or if rigidity is unsatisfactory. Set the value
larger than the resonant frequency cycle. A value that is too large will decrease drive responsiveness.
■ b5-09: PID Output Level Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-09 PID Output Level Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01AD) Sets the polarity of the PID output. (0, 1)
Use this parameter in applications that decrease the drive output frequency when you increase the PID setpoint.
0 : Normal Output (Direct Acting)
A positive PID input increases the PID output (direct acting).
1 : Reverse Output (Reverse Acting)
A positive PID input decreases the PID output (reverse acting).
■ b5-10: PID Output Gain Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-10 PID Output Gain Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(01AE) Sets the amount of gain to apply to the PID output. (0.00 - 25.00)
RUN
Applies a gain to the PID output and can help when b5-01 = 3 or 4 [PID Mode Setting = Fref + PID Trim, Fref +
PID Trim (D on feedback)].
■ b5-11: PID Output Reverse Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-11 PID Output Reverse V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01AF) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables reverse motor rotation for negative PID control output. (0, 1)
This parameter is disabled when b5-01 = 3, 4 [PID Mode Setting = Fref + PID Trim, Fref + PID Trim (D on
feedback)]. There is no limit for PID output (PID output can be positive or negative). Operates the same as setting
“1: Enabled: Negative lower limit”.
When PID output is negative, PID output is limited to 0 and drive output is shut off.
When the PID output is negative, the motor will rotate in reverse. When b1-04 = 1 [Reverse Operation Selection
= Reverse Disabled], the lower limit is 0.

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-12: Feedback Loss Detection Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-12 Feedback Loss Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01B0) Select Sets the drive response to PID Feedback Low/High. Sets drive operation after the drive detects (0 - 5)
PID feedback Low/High.
0 : Digital Out Only, Always Detect

The MFDO terminal set for PID Feedback Low or PID Feedback High [H2-01 to H2-03 = 3E, 3F] activates.
When the drive detects Feedback Low/High, the keypad will not show a minor fault/alarm and the drive will
continue operation.
When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl] for longer than
the time set in b5-14 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Time], the MFDO terminal set for a PID Feedback Low
activates.
When the feedback signal is more than the level set in b5-36 [PID High Feedback Detection Lvl] for longer than
the time set in b5-37 [PID High Feedback Detection Time] the MFDO terminal set for a PID Feedback High
activates.
When the feedback value is not in the detection range, the drive resets the MFDO.
1 : Alarm + Digital Out, Always Det
The drive detects FbL [PID Feedback Loss] and FbH [Excessive PID Feedback]. The MFDO terminal set for
PID Feedback Low or PID Feedback High [H2-01 to H2-03 = 3E, 3F] activates. The output terminal set for
Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates and the drive continues operation.
When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5-13 for longer than the time set in b5-14, the MFDO
terminal set for a PID Feedback Low activates.
When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5-36 for longer than the time set in b5-37, the MFDO
terminal set for a PID Feedback High activates.
When the feedback value is not in the detection range, the drive resets the MFDO.
2 : Fault + Digital Out, Always Det
The drive detects FbL and FbH. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC activates, MB-MC turns OFF, and the motor
coasts to stop.
When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5-13 for the time set in b5-14, the drive detects FbL.
When the feedback signal is less than the level set in b5-36 for the time set in b5-37, the drive detects FbH.
3 : Digital Out Only, @ PID Enable
The MFDO terminal set for PID Feedback Low or PID Feedback High activates. The keypad will not show a
minor fault/alarm. The drive continues operation.
When the MFDI terminal set to PID Disable [H1-xx = 19] activates, the drive disables fault detection.
4 : Alarm + Digital Out, @PID Enable
The drive detects FbL and FbH. The MFDO terminal set for PID Feedback Low or PID Feedback High activates.
The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates and the drive continues operation.
5 : Fault + Digital Out, @PID Enable
The drive detects FbL and FbH. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC activates, MB-MC turns OFF, and the drive
coasts to stop.
■ b5-13: PID Feedback Loss Detection Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
b5-13 PID Feedback Loss 0%

(01B1) Detection Lvl Sets the level that triggers PID Feedback Loss [FbL] detection as a percentage of the Maximum (0 - 100%)
Output Frequency.
The drive detects PID Feedback Loss [FbL] when the feedback signal decreases to less than the level set in b5-13
for longer than the time set in b5-14 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Time].
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-14: PID Feedback Loss Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-14 PID Feedback Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(01B2) Detection Time Sets the length of time that PID Feedback must be less than b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection (0.0 - 25.5 s)
Lvl] to detect PID Feedback Loss [FbL].
■ b5-15: PID Sleep Function Start Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-15 PID Sleep Function Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(01B3) Level Sets the output level that triggers the PID Sleep function. (0.0 - 590.0)
The drive goes into Sleep mode when the PID output or frequency reference is less than b5-15 for longer than the
time set to b5-16 [PID Sleep Delay Time]. The drive continues operation when the PID output or frequency
reference is more than b5-15 for longer than the time set to b5-16.
■ b5-16: PID Sleep Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-16 PID Sleep Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01B4) Sets a delay time to start or stop the PID Sleep function. (0.0 - 25.5 s)
■ b5-17: PID Accel/Decel Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-17 PID Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01B5) Raises or lowers the PID setpoint using the acceleration and deceleration times set to the drive. (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN This is a soft-starter for the PID setpoint.
The drive usually uses the acceleration and deceleration times set in C1-xx [Accel and Decel Times], but when
PID control is enabled, the drive applies C1-xx after PID output. If you frequently change the PID setpoint, the
drive responsiveness decreases. When resonance with PID control causes hunting, overshoot, or undershoot, set
b5-17 for longer acceleration and deceleration times.
Decrease C1-xx until hunting stops, then use b5-17 to check the acceleration and deceleration. To enable and
disable the setting in b5-17 through an MFDI terminal, set PID Soft Starter Disable [H1-xx = 34].
■ b5-18: b5-19 PID Setpoint Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-18 b5-19 PID Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01DC) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables b5-19 [PID Setpoint Value]. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
The drive does not use the value set in b5-19 as the PID setpoint.
1 : Enabled
The drive uses the value set in b5-19 as the PID setpoint.
■ b5-19: PID Setpoint Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-19 PID Setpoint Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00%
(01DD) Sets the PID setpoint when b5-18 = 1 [b5-19 PID Setpoint Selection = Enabled]. (0.00 - 100.00%)
RUN

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-20: PID Unit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-20 PID Unit Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(01E2) Sets the number of digits to set and show the PID setpoint. (0 - 3)
Set the units for these parameters and monitors:

• b5-19 [PID Setpoint Value]
• b5-58 [PID Setpoint2]
• U5-01 [PID Feedback]
• U5-04 [PID Setpoint]
• U5-99 [PID Setpoint Command]
0 : 0.01Hz units
The drive uses 0.01 Hz units.
1 : 0.01% units
The drive uses 0.01% units. Set the value as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency].
2 : min-1
The drive uses 1 min-1 unit. Set E2-04, E4-04, or E5-04 [Motor Pole Count].
3 : User Units
The drive uses the units set in b5-38 [PID User Unit Display Scaling] and b5-39 [PID User Unit Display Digits]
to show the PID setpoint in U5-01, U5-04, U5-06 [PID Feedback, PID Setpoint, PID Fdbk-Diff PID Fdbk].
■ b5-34: PID Output Lower Limit Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-34 PID Output Lower Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(019F) Level Sets the lower limit level for the PID control as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN Frequency].
Use a lower limit to keep PID control output from dropping below a fixed level.
When you use b5-34, set b5-91 = 0 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed = 0 (Disabled)].
When you set the output lower limit level in Hz or min-1 (r/min), refer to b5-91: EZ Sleep Minimum Speed on
page 721.
Set this parameter to 0.0% to disable this function.
■ b5-35: PID Input Limit Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-35 PID Input Limit Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1000.0%
(01A0) Sets the output upper limit for the PID control as a percentage of the Maximum Output (0.0 - 1000.0%)
RUN Frequency.
A large input value for PID control makes a high output. The drive applies this limit to the negative and positive
domains.
■ b5-36: PID High Feedback Detection Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
b5-36 PID High Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100%
(01A1) Detection Lvl Sets the level that triggers Excessive PID Feedback [FbH] as a percentage of the Maximum (0 - 100%)
Output Frequency.
When the feedback signal increases to more than the level set in b5-36 for the time set in b5-37 [PID High
Feedback Detection Time], the drive will detect Excessive PID Feedback [FbH].
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-37: PID High Feedback Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-37 PID High Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(01A2) Detection Time Sets the length of time that the PID feedback signal must be more than the level set in b5-36 [PID (0.0 - 25.5 s)
Feedback High Detection Lvl] to cause Excessive PID Feedback [FbH].
■ b5-38: PID User Unit Display Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-38 PID User Unit Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by b5-20
(01FE) Scaling Sets the value that the drive sets or shows as the PID setpoint when at the maximum output (1 - 60000)
frequency.
The drive uses this parameter and b5-39 [PID Setpoint Display Digits] together.
When b5-20 = 3 [PID Unit Selection = User Units], the drive applies user-set PID setpoint and display units to
these parameters and monitors:
■ b5-39: PID User Unit Display Digits

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-39 PID User Unit Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by b5-20
(01FF) Digits Sets the number of digits to set and show the PID setpoint. (0 - 3)
The drive uses this parameter and b5-38 [PID Setpoint User Display] together.
When b5-20 = 3 [PID Unit Selection = User Units], the drive applies user-set PID setpoint and display units to
these parameters and monitors:
■ b5-40: Frequency Reference Monitor @PID

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(017F) Monitor @PID Sets the contents for monitor U1-01 [Frequency Reference] in PID control. (0, 1)
0 : U1-01 Includes PID Output

Monitor U1-01 shows the frequency reference that was increased or decreased by the PID output.
1 : U1-01 Excludes PID Output
Monitor U1-01 shows the actual frequency reference.

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-47: PID Trim Mode Output Reverse Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-47 PID Trim Mode Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(017D) Reverse Sel Sets reverse motor rotation when the PID control output is negative. (0, 1)
This parameter is enabled when b5-01 = 3 or 4 [PID Mode Setting = Fref + PID Trim, Fref + PID Trim (D on
feedback)].
When PID output is negative, PID output is limited to 0 and drive output is shut off.
When the PID output is negative, the motor will rotate in reverse.
■ b5-53: PID Integrator Ramp Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-53 PID Integrator Ramp Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
(0B8F) Sets the responsiveness of PID control when the PID feedback changes quickly. (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
RUN
Note:
• This parameter is disabled when set to 0.0 Hz.
• When b5-53 > 0.0 Hz and the drive enables the integrator ramp limit, the PID integrator value limit is the range set by the output
frequency ± b5-53.
• When the PID feedback changes quickly, gradually decrease the value of this parameter in increments of 0.1 Hz to decrease the speed
of the response of PID control.
■ b5-55: PID Feedback Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-55 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 000
(0BE1) Selection Sets the monitor (Ux-xx) used as the PID Feedback. (000 - 9999)
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set b5-55 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set b5-55 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• You cannot select parameter U5-xx.
• This parameter is disabled when you set it to 000.
■ b5-56: PID Feedback Monitor Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-56 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(0BE2) Gain Sets the gain for the monitor set in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor Selection]. (0.00 - 10.00)
■ b5-57: PID Feedback Monitor Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-57 PID Feedback Monitor Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00
(11DD) Sets the bias for the monitor specified in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor Selection]. (-10.00 - +10.00)
■ b5-58 to b5-60: PID Setpoints 2 to 4

No. Default
Parameter Details
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-58 to b5-60: PID Setpoints 2 to 4 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00%
(1182 - 1184) Sets the PID setpoint when H1-xx = 3E or 3F [MFDI Function Selection = PID Setpoint (0.00 - 100.00%)
Table 12.32 shows how the different MFDI H1-xx values (3E and 3F) have an effect on the PID setpoint value.
12

12.3 b: Application
Table 12.32 Switching of MFDI and PID Setpoint Value

H1-xx = 3E H1-xx = 3F PID Setpoint Value
OFF OFF No switch
ON OFF b5-58 [PID Setpoint2]
OFF ON b5-59 [PID Setpoint3]
ON ON b5-60 [PID Setpoint4]
■ b5-61: PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-61 PID Trim Mode Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(119A) Limit Sel Sets the function that adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
Does not adjust the PID output with the frequency reference.
1 : Enabled
Adjusts the PID output in relation to the frequency reference. The setting value of b5-62 [PID Trim Mode Lower
Limit Value] sets the lower limit of the post-adjustment value. The maximum output frequency sets the upper
limit.
Note:
• Set b5-01 = 3, 4, 7, or 8 to enable this parameter.
• When b5-61 = 1, you can use this formula to adjust PID output proportional to the frequency reference:
U5-03 [PID Output], Fref [Frequency Reference], and Fmax [Maximum Output Frequency]
*1 Lower limit = b5-62, Upper limit = Maximum output frequency
■ b5-62: PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-62 PID Trim Mode Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00%
(119B) Limit Value Sets the PID Trim Mode Lower Limit Value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. (0.00 - 100.00%)
Note:
Set b5-01 = 3, 4, 7, or 8 to enable this parameter.
■ b5-63: PID Differential FB Monitor Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-63 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 000
(119C) Monitor Sel Selects the monitor (Ux-xx) used as the PID Differential Feedback. (000 - 9999)
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set b5-63 = 103 to monitor U1-03 [Output Current].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set b5-63 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• You cannot select parameter U5-xx.
• This parameter is disabled when you set it to 000.
■ b5-64: PID Differential FB Monitor Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-64 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(119D) Monitor Gain Sets the gain for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor Sel]. (0.00 - 10.00)

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-65: PID Differential FB Monitor Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-65 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00
(119F) Monitor Bias Sets the bias for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor Sel]. (-10.00 - +10.00)
■ b5-66: PID Feedback Monitor Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-66 PID Feedback Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11DE) Level Sets the signal level for the monitor specified in b5-55 [PID Feedback Monitor Selection]. (0, 1)
0 : Absolute
■ b5-67: PID Differential FB Monitor Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-67 PID Differential FB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11DF) Monitor Lvl Sets the signal level for the monitor specified in b5-63 [PID Differential FB Monitor Sel]. (0, 1)
0 : Absolute
■ b5-89: Sleep Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-89 Sleep Method Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B89) Sets sleep and wake up operation when using PID. (0, 1)
RUN
0 : Standard
1 : EZ Sleep/Wake-up
■ b5-90: EZ Sleep Unit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-90 EZ Sleep Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B90) Sets the measurement units for b5-91 [EZ Sleep Minimum Speed] and b5-92 [EZ Sleep Level]. (0, 1)
0 : 0.1Hz units
1 : rev/min
■ b5-91: EZ Sleep Minimum Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-91 EZ Sleep Minimum Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz or 0 min-1 (r/min)
(0B91) Sets the output lower limit level for the PID control as Hz units or min-1 (r/min) units. (0.0 to 590.0 Hz or 0 to
RUN 35400 min-1 (r/min))
When you use b5-91, set b5-34 = 0.0 [PID Output Lower Limit Level = 0.0 (disabled)].
When you set the lower limit for PID output as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency, refer to page b5-
34: PID Output Lower Limit Level on page 717.
Parameter Details
Note:
The value of b5-90 [EZ Sleep Unit] sets the units. When b5-90 changes, this parameter does not automatically update. Set this parameter
again after you change b5-90.
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b5-92: EZ Sleep Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-92 EZ Sleep Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz or 0 min-1 (r/min)
(0B92) Sets the value that the output frequency or motor speed must be less than for longer than b5-93 (0.0 to 590.0 Hz or 0 to
RUN [EZ Sleep Time] to enter Sleep Mode. 35400 min-1 (r/min))
Note:
When b5-90 [EZ Sleep Unit] changes, this parameter does not automatically update. Set this parameter again after you change b5-90.
■ b5-93: EZ Sleep Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-93 EZ Sleep Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0 s
(0B93) Sets the length of time that the output frequency or motor speed must be less than b5-92 [EZ (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
RUN Sleep Level] to enter Sleep Mode.
■ b5-94: EZ Sleep Wake-up Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-94 EZ Sleep Wake-up Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00%
(0B94) Sets the level at which the drive resumes operation when exiting Sleep Mode. (0.00 - 600.00%)
RUN
Note:
The values of b5-20 [PID Unit Selection], b5-38 [PID User Unit Display Scaling], and b5-39 [PID User Unit Display Digits] set the
units. When b5-20, b5-38, and b5-39 change, this parameter does not automatically update. Set this parameter again after you change
b5-20, b5-38, and b5-39 are changed.
• When b5-95 = 0 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode = Absolute]:
When b5-09 = 0 [PID Output Level Selection = Normal Output (Direct Acting)], and the PID Feedback [H3-xx
= B] is less than the value of b5-94 for a time longer than the value of b5-96 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Time], the
drive will exit sleep and start operation again. When b5-09 = 1 [Reverse Output (Reverse Acting)], and the PID
feedback is more than setting value of b5-94 for a time longer than the setting value of b5-96, the drive will exit
sleep and start operation again.
• When b5-95 = 1 [Setpoint Delta]:
When b5-09 = 0, and the PID feedback is less than the value of “PID setpoint value - b5-94” for a time longer
than the value of b5-96, the drive will exit sleep and start operation again. When b5-09 = 1, and the PID
feedback is more than the value of “PID setpoint value + b5-94” for a time longer than the setting value of b5-
96, the drive will exit sleep and start operation again.
■ b5-95: EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-95 EZ Sleep Wake-up Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B95) Sets the wake-up mode to use when exiting Sleep Mode. (0, 1)
0 : Absolute
1 : Setpoint Delta
■ b5-96: EZ Sleep Wake-up Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b5-96 EZ Sleep Wake-up Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(0B96) Sets the EZ Wake-up time. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
RUN
When the PID feedback is less than the value of b5-94 [EZ Sleep Wake-up Level] continuously for the time set in
b5-96, the drive will exit sleep and start operation again.
◆ b6: Dwell Function

The Dwell function momentarily holds the output frequency at start and stop.

12.3 b: Application
This prevents motor speed loss when you start and stop heavy loads. The Dwell function is also enabled when
backlash on the machine side causes sudden movement at the start of acceleration and deceleration.
At the start of acceleration, the drive uses the output frequency and acceleration time set for the Dwell function to
automatically operate at low speed to minimize the effects of backlash. Then, the drive can accelerate again. The
Dwell function operates the same for deceleration.
For conveyor applications, the Dwell function also lets the drive interlock the output frequency and a delay time
for the holding brake on the load side.
The Dwell function momentarily stops during acceleration to prevent a PM motor from stepping out. Figure 12.41
shows how the Dwell function works.
Note:
When you use the Dwell function at stop, set b1-03 = 0 [Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop].
Figure 12.41 Time Chart for the Dwell Function at Start/Stop
■ b6-01: Dwell Reference at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b6-01 Dwell Reference at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0
(01B6) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when the motor starts. (Determined by A1-02)
When the drive accelerates to the output frequency set in b6-01, it holds that frequency for the time set in b6-02
[Dwell Time at Start], and starts to accelerate again.
■ b6-02: Dwell Time at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b6-02 Dwell Time at Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01B7) Sets the length of time that the drive will hold the output frequency when the motor starts. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
■ b6-03: Dwell Reference at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b6-03 Dwell Reference at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0
(01B8) Sets the output frequency that the drive will hold momentarily when ramping to stop the motor. (Determined by A1-02)
When the drive decelerates to the output frequency set in b6-03, it holds that frequency for the time set in b6-04
[Dwell Time at Stop] and starts to decelerate again.
■ b6-04: Dwell Time at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(01B9) Sets the length of time for the drive to hold the output frequency when ramping to stop the motor. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Parameter Details
◆ b7: Droop Control

Droop control automatically balances the load level between two motors that operate the same load.
Droop control decreases motor speed as the load changes. You must enable the Droop control function for each
motor it is operating.
12

12.3 b: Application
To decrease motor speed, the Droop control function decreases the speed reference when an increase in the load
increases the torque reference. To increase motor speed, the Droop control function increases the speed reference
when a decrease in the load decreases the torque reference. The Droop control function adjusts motor speed as the
torque reference changes to balance the load between the motors.
Note:
When you use Droop control, set n5-01 = 0 [Feed Forward Control Selection = Disabled].
Figure 12.42 Droop Control Application (Crane Movement Viewed from Top)
■ b7-01: Droop Control Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b7-01 Droop Control Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(01CA) Sets the amount of deceleration when the torque reference is at 100% as a percentage of E1-04 (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN [Maximum Output Frequency].
To disable Droop control, set this parameter to 0.0%.
Figure 12.43 Droop Control Gain
■ b7-02: Droop Control Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b7-02 Droop Control Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.05 s
(01CB) Sets the responsiveness of Droop control. Decrease this setting when drive response is slow. (0.03 - 2.00 s)
RUN Increase this setting when hunting or oscillation occur.
■ b7-03: Droop Control Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b7-03 Droop Control Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(017E) Selection Sets the Droop control limit function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ b8: Energy Saving

Energy-saving control improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its most efficient
level.

12.3 b: Application
Set b8-01 and the following parameters according to the control mode and the motor.
• Set parameters b8-04, b8-05, and b8-06 when using V/f Control or Closed Loop V/f Control.
• Set parameters b8-02, b8-03 when using vector control with an induction motor.
• Set parameters b8-16, b8-17 when using a PM motor.
Note:
• Energy-saving control is not appropriate for applications with sudden changes in the load, or applications driving heavy loads such as a
traverse car application.
• Energy-saving control maximizes operation based on precise motor data set to the drive. Be sure to perform Auto-Tuning and enter the
correct information about the motor before using the Energy-saving control.
■ b8-01: Energy Saving Control Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-01 Energy Saving Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(01CC) Selection Sets the Energy-saving control function. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
2 : Automatic Optimization
Note:
Setting 2 is available only when A1-02 = 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM, CLV/PM] and in Expert Mode.
■ b8-02: Energy Saving Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-02 Energy Saving Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(01CD) Sets the gain for Energy-saving control. (0.0 - 10.0)
RUN
Expert
Increase the setting value to increase energy saving. If the setting value is too large, the motor will stall.
■ b8-03: Energy Saving Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-03 Energy Saving Filter Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02，C6-
(01CE) Sets the responsiveness for Energy-saving control. 01 and o2-04
RUN (0.00 - 10.00 s)
Expert
Decrease the setting value to increase responsiveness. If the setting value is too low, operation will not be stable.
■ b8-04: Energy Saving Coefficient Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01, E2-
(01CF) Value Sets the Energy-saving control coefficient to maintain maximum motor efficiency. The default 11, and o2-04
Expert setting is for Yaskawa motors. (0.00 - 655.00)
When you use a motor from a different manufacturer, increase the setting value in 5% increments to find the
minimum value for U1-08 [Output Power] at light loads.
When you decrease the setting value, it decreases the output voltage and decreases power consumption. If the
setting value is too low, the motor will stall.
Note:
Parameter Details
When you do Rotational Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically set the energy-saving coefficient.
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b8-05: Power Detection Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-05 Power Detection Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20 ms
(01D0) Time Sets the time constant to measure output power. (0 - 2000 ms)
Expert
Decrease the setting value to increase responsiveness to load changes. If you set the value too low during
operation at light loads, motor speed is not stable.
■ b8-06: Search Operation Voltage Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-06 Search Operation Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(01D1) Limit Sets the voltage limit for Search Operation as a percentage of the motor rated voltage. (0 - 100%)
Expert
The Search Operation changes the output voltage in small increments to find a setpoint at which the drive can use
minimum power to operate.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable Search Operation. This will not disable Energy-saving control.
If the setting value is too low, the motor will stall when loads suddenly increase.
■ b8-16: PM E-Save Coefficient Ki

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-16 PM E-Save Coefficient Ki V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(01F8) Sets torque linearity. This parameter uses the Ki value from the motor nameplate. Usually it is not (0.00 - 3.00)
When b8-16 = 1.00 (default), the drive will automatically calculate and control the energy-saving coefficient. If
the motor nameplate has a description for “Ki”, set this parameter to the Ki value.
Do this procedure to prevent oscillation when you set b8-01 = 1 [Energy Saving Control Selection = Enabled].
1. Check U5-21 [Energy Save Coeff Ki] and make sure that it aligns with the Ki value on the motor nameplate.
2. If the numbers are different, set b8-16 to the Ki value on the motor nameplate.
■ b8-17: PM E-Save Coefficient Kt

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-17 PM E-Save Coefficient Kt V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(01F9) Sets torque linearity. This parameter uses the Kt value from the motor nameplate. Usually it is not (0.00 - 3.00)
When E5-01 = 1xxx, 2xxx [PM Motor Code Selection = Yaskawa SSR1 or SST4 series IPM motor], the drive
automatically calculates the energy-saving coefficient Kt and uses that value to control operation.
Do this procedure to prevent oscillation when you set b8-01 = 1 [Energy Saving Control Selection = Enabled].
1. Check U5-22 [Energy Save Coeff Kt] and make sure that it aligns with the Kt value on the motor nameplate.
2. If the numbers are different, set b8-17 to the Kt value on the motor nameplate.
■ b8-18: E-Save d-axis Current FilterTime

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-18 E-Save d-axis Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.100 s
(01FA) FilterTime Sets the d-axis current reference filter time constant. (0.000 - 5.000 s)
Expert

12.3 b: Application
■ b8-19: E-Save Search Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-19 E-Save Search Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0B40) Sets the frequency of Energy-saving control search operations. Usually it is not necessary to (10 - 300 Hz)
Note:
• If low inertia causes vibration in the machine, increase the setting value in 10 Hz increments and check the response. If A1-02 = 8
[Control Method Selection = EZOLV], increase the setting value in 1 Hz increments.
• To make the motor more efficient, decrease the setting value in 1 Hz increments until the point immediately before machine vibration
starts to occur.
■ b8-20: E-Save Search Width

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-20 E-Save Search Width V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 degrees
(0B41) Sets the amplitude of Energy-saving control search operations. (0.1 - 5.0 degrees)
Expert
An increase in the value can make the operational efficiency better. However, if the load inertia is small, it may be
necessary to adjust the value to prevent machine vibration.
Note:
• If low inertia causes vibration in the machine, decrease the setting value in 1.0-degree increments and check the response.
• To make the motor more efficient, increase the setting value in 1.0-degreee increments until the point immediately before machine
vibration starts to occur.
■ b8-21: PM E-Save Search Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-21 PM E-Save Search Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.3Hz
(0B42) Sets the gain of Energy-saving control search operations. (0.1 - 20.0 Hz)
Expert
When you decrease the value of C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1], also decrease the value of b8-21 to keep the
correct ratio.
■ b8-22: PM E-Save Search LPF Cutoff Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-22 PM E-Save Search LPF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 Hz
(0B43) Cutoff Freq Sets the frequency of the filter used to extract the high-efficiency phase from search operations. (1.0 - 30.0 Hz)
■ b8-23: PM E-Save Search Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-23 PM E-Save Search Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15.0 degrees
(0B44) Sets the search operations output limit. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 30.0 degrees)
Expert
When the motor characteristics are correct, increase this value to make the motor more efficient.
■ b8-24: PM E-Save High Freq ACR Gain

No. Default
Name Description
Parameter Details
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-24 PM E-Save High Freq ACR V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200.0 Hz
(0B45) Gain Sets the gain for high-frequency current control. (100.0 - 1000.0 Hz)
Expert
Note:
If the drive detects oC [Overcurrent], decrease the value.
12

12.3 b: Application
■ b8-25: PM E-Save Search Start Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-25 PM E-Save Search Start V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0%
(0B46) Level Sets the start level for search operations. (0.0 - 100.0%)
Expert
Note:
If there is vibration in the machine, increase the value.
■ b8-26: PM E-Save Power Setpoint

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-26 PM E-Save Power Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0B47) Sets a value to increase torque accuracy. (-10.0 - +10.0%)
Expert
■ b8-28: Over Excitation Action Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-28 Over Excitation Action V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B8B) Selection Sets the function for excitation operation. (0, 1)
Expert
When operation is not stable at low speeds, set this parameter to 1 to enable the function.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ b8-29: Energy Saving Priority Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-29 Energy Saving Priority V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B8C) Selection Sets the priority of drive response between changes to the load or Energy-saving control. Enable (0, 1)
this to prioritize energy-saving control. Disable this to prioritize tracking related to fast load
changes, and prevent motor stall.
Enable this parameter when there are small changes in the load. It is possible that the motor cannot respond
correctly to changes in the load.
0 : Priority: Drive Response
1 : Priority: Energy Savings
■ b8-50: Standby Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-50 Standby Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B0D) Sets the Standby Mode function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Standby Mode decreases how much power the drive consumes when it is in standby.
Standby Mode waits for the drive to stop, uses the relay output of an MFDO terminal to shut off the input side
electromagnetic contactor (MC), then shuts off the main circuit power supply.
Note:
These conditions are also necessary for Standby Mode:
• Connect an external 24 V power supply.
• Connect an electromagnetic contactor to the drive input side and connect the MFDO terminal set for H2-xx = 65 [Standby Output].
When the MFDO terminal is OFF, the electromagnetic contactor must be OFF.
• Frequently starting and stopping the drive and regularly opening and closing the electromagnetic contactor will decrease the service life
of the drive.

12.3 b: Application
A - Drive C - External 24 V power supply

B - MFDO Terminal
■ b8-51: Standby Mode Wait Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b8-51 Standby Mode Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 600 s
(0B01) Sets the delay time before turning off the electromagnetic contactor after the drive stops. (0 - 6000 s)
◆ b9: Zero Servo

Zero Servo is a position control function that stops and holds the motor shaft. The drive safeties the stopped motor
and an external force will not move the motor.
When you enable the Zero Servo function, the drive will save the home position. The drive can correct the motor
position and put the motor into the home position when the load rotates the motor.
To enable Zero Servo, set H1-xx = 72 [MFDI Function Selection = Zero Servo]. The drive starts Zero Servo when
the MFDI terminal set for Zero Servo [H1-xx = 72] activates and the motor speed decreases to less than the value
set in b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero SpeedThreshold]. The drive stops and holds the motor in the Zero Servo start
position. When Zero Servo is enabled, the drive will hold the motor in position when the frequency reference
increases to more than the value set in b2-01. When Zero Servo is enabled, the drive will hold the motor in
position when the frequency reference increases to more than the value set in b2-01.
Note:
Zero Servo is available when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = Closed Loop Vector, PM Closed Loop Vector].
Figure 12.44 Zero Servo Time Chart

Monitor U6-22 [ZeroServoPulse Move] shows the difference between the position of the motor shaft and the Zero
Servo start position when Zero Servo is enabled. To find the difference, divide the number of pulses shown in U6-
22 by 4.
When the position of the motor shaft is in the range of “Zero Servo start position ± b9-02 [Zero Servo Completion
Window]”, the drive will activate an MFDO set for Zero Servo Complete [H2-xx = 33].
NOTICE: Do not let the Zero Servo function hold 100% load for long periods of time. When the application must use Zero Servo
to hold 100% load for long periods, operate in less than 50% of the drive rated output current or use a larger capacity drive. If
Zero Servo holds the load for too long in 50% or more of the drive rated output current, it will cause damage to the drive.
Parameter Details
12

12.3 b: Application
Note:
• When you use the Zero Servo function, keep the Run command ON. If the Run command is OFF, the drive will not hold the motor
shaft in position.
• When you turn oFF the Zero-Servo command, the terminal set for Zero Servo Complete will deactivate.
• If A1-02 = 7 [PM Closed Loop Vector] and an external force rotates the motor during Zero Servo, the drive will detect dv4 [Inversion
Prevention Detection]. To prevent dv4 detection, increase b9-01 [Zero Servo Gain] or increase the number of pulses set in F1-19
[Deviation 4 Detection Selection].
■ b9-01: Zero Servo Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b9-01 Zero Servo Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5
(01DA) Sets the responsiveness for the Zero Servo function. (0 - 100)
If the drive is not responsive, or if there is too much deviation from the Zero Servo start point when you increase
the load, increase this setting. If oscillation or hunting occurs, decrease this setting.
Note:
• Set C5-xx [Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)] parameters correctly before you adjust the Zero Servo gain.
• When you operate with the Zero Servo command enabled, oscillation and hunting must not occur.
■ b9-02: Zero Servo Completion Window

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
b9-02 Zero Servo Completion V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10
(01DB) Window Sets the range to trigger an output terminal set for “Zero Servo Complete” during Zero Servo (0 - 16383)
operation. Be sure to set the deviation from the Zero Servo start position.
When the position of the motor shaft is in the range of “Zero Servo start position ± b9-02”, the drive will activate a
MFDO set for Zero Servo Complete [H2-xx = 33].

12.4 C: Tuning
12.4 C: Tuning
C parameters adjust drive operation, including:
• Acceleration Time
• Deceleration Time
• Slip Compensation
• Torque Compensation
• Carrier Frequency
◆ C1: Accel & Decel Time

You can set four different acceleration and deceleration time pairs in the drive. When you activate and deactivate
H1-xx = 7, 16, 1A [MFDI Function Select = Accel/Decel Time Selection 1, Motor 2 Selection, Accel/Decel Time
Selection 2], you can switch acceleration and deceleration times during run.
Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate from 0 Hz to E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency].
Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate from E1-04 to 0 Hz.
C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] and C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] are the default active accel/decel settings.
Parameter Range
C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1]
C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1]

0.0 to 6000.0 s
Note:
The setting range for acceleration and deceleration times is 0.00 to 600.00 s when C1-10 = 0 [Accel/Decel Time Setting Units = 0.01 s
(0.00 to 600.00 s)].
■ Use MFDIs to Switch Acceleration Times

Table 12.33 shows the different acceleration and deceleration times.
Table 12.33 Accel/Decel Times and Active Parameters
H1-xx = 7 H1-xx = 1A Active Parameter
[Accel/Decel Time Selection [Accel/Decel Time Selection
1] 2] Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
OFF OFF C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1]
ON OFF C1-03 [Acceleration Time 2] C1-04 [Deceleration Time 2]
OFF ON C1-05 [Acceleration Time 3] C1-06 [Deceleration Time 3]
ON ON C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4]
Figure 12.45an operation example to change acceleration and deceleration times. It is necessary to set b1-03 = 0
[Stopping Method Selection = Ramp to Stop] for this example.
Parameter Details
12

12.4 C: Tuning
Figure 12.45 Timing Diagram of Acceleration and Deceleration Times
■ Use Motor Selection to Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Times

When you set H1-xx = 16 [MFDI Function Selection = Motor 2 Selection], you can activate and deactivate the
input terminal to switch between motor 1 and motor 2.
Note:
You cannot use the Motor 2 Selection function with PM motors.
Table 12.34 shows the possible acceleration and deceleration time combinations when you use the Motor 2
Selection function.
Table 12.34 Motor Selection and Acceleration and Deceleration Times
H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection]
H1-xx = 7
[Accel/Decel Time Selection Motor 2 Selection: OFF Motor 2 Selection: ON
1]
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
OFF C1-01 C1-02 C1-05 C1-06
ON C1-03 C1-04 C1-07 C1-08
■ Use Output Frequency Level to Switch Acceleration and Deceleration Times

The drive can use output frequency to automatically switch between different acceleration and deceleration times.
When the output frequency = C1-11 [Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq], the drive automatically switches the
acceleration and deceleration times. Set C1-11 = 0.0 Hz to disable this function.
Note:
• The acceleration and deceleration times set to MFDIs take higher priority than the automatic switch that uses the frequency level set in
C1-11. For example, if you set the switchover frequency to C1-11, the drive will not automatically switch acceleration and deceleration
times when H1-xx = 7 [Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] is activated.
• If Motor 2 Selection [H1-xx = 16] is activated, the drive will set the acceleration/deceleration time to C1-05 and C1-06 for motor 2
when the output frequency is more than the frequency level set in C1-11.
Figure 12.46 Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq
■ C1-01: Acceleration Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s
RUN

12.4 C: Tuning
Note:
When C1-10 = 0 [Accel/Decel Time Setting Units = 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)], the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 s.
■ C1-02: Deceleration Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s
RUN
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
RUN
Note:
12

12.4 C: Tuning

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
■ C1-09: Fast Stop Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-09 Fast Stop Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s
(0208) Sets the length of time that the drive will decelerate to zero for a Fast Stop. (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
RUN
Note:
• When C1-10 = 0 [Accel/Decel Time Setting Units = 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)], the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 s.
• When L2-29 = 0 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1] and you do KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will
automatically set C1-09. If you must not change the Fast Stop time, do not do KEB Auto-Tuning.
The Fast Stop function will be triggered in the following circumstances.
• The Fast Stop operation will be triggered by the input of the Fast Stop command via the multi-function digital
input terminal.
• The Fast Stop operation is will be triggered when by the input of the Fast Stop command is input via the multi-
function digital input terminal.
Set H1-xx = 15, 17 [MFDI Function Select = Fast Stop (N.O.), Fast Stop (N.C.)].
When the Fast Stop command is input, the Fast Stop operation will be triggered at the deceleration time set to C1-
09. The drive cannot be restarted after initiating a Fast Stop operation until deceleration is complete. Complete
deceleration and cycle the Run command to clear the Fast Stop input.
The terminal set for H2-xx = 4C [MFDO Function Select = During Fast Stop] will be ON during Fast Stop.
Note:
Decelerating too quickly can cause an ov [Overvoltage] fault that shuts off the drive while the motor to coasts to a stop. Set a Fast Stop
time in C1-09 that prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely.
■ C1-10: Accel/Decel Time Setting Units

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0209) Units Sets the setting units for C1-01 to C1-08 [Accel/Decel Times 1 to 4], C1-09 [Fast Stop Time], L2- (0, 1)
06 [Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time], and L2-07 [Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time].
0 : 0.01 s (0.00 to 600.00 s)

Sets acceleration and deceleration times in 0.01 s units. The setting range is 0.0 to 6000.0 s.
If one of these parameters is set to 1000.0 s or longer, you cannot set C1-10 = 0:
• C1-01 to C1-09
• L2-06
• L2-07
When one of those parameters is set to a value between 600.1 s and 1000.0 s, you can set C1-10 = 0, but the time
will change to 600.00 s.
1 : 0.1 s (0.0 to 6000.0 s)
Sets acceleration and deceleration times in 0.1 s units. The setting range is 0.0 to 6000.0 s.
■ C1-11: Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-11 Accel/Decel Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(020A) Switching Frequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will automatically change acceleration and deceleration (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
times.

12.4 C: Tuning
When the output frequency is at the C1-11 value, the drive automatically switches the acceleration and
deceleration times. Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable this function.
Figure 12.47 Accel/Decel Time Switchover Freq

Table 12.35 lists the possible combinations of acceleration and deceleration time switchover frequencies and the
acceleration times for the Motor 2 Selection function.
Table 12.35 Motor and Acceleration and Deceleration Time Combination
Motor 1 Motor 2
C1-11
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
Less than the setting value C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4] C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4]
Equal to or more than the setting C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] C1-05 [Acceleration Time 3] C1-06 [Deceleration Time 3]
value
■ C1-14: Accel/Decel Rate Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C1-14 Accel/Decel Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
(0264) Frequency Sets the base frequency used to calculate acceleration and deceleration rates. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
RUN
The acceleration and deceleration rates set in C1-01 to C1-09 [Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 to 4, Fast Stop
Time] will change when the value of C1-14 changes.
• When C1-14 = 0.0 Hz
– C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07 [Acceleration Times 1 to 4]: Time to accelerate from 0 Hz to E1-04 [Maximum
Output Frequency]
– C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08 [Deceleration Times 1 to 4], C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]: Time to decelerate from
E1-04 to 0 Hz.
Figure 12.48 Example 1: Acceleration/Deceleration Rate (When C1-14 = 0 Hz, E1-04 = 60 Hz, and the Frequency
Reference is 60 Hz)
• When C1-14 ≠ 0.0 Hz
– C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07: Time to accelerate from 0 Hz to C1-14
Parameter Details
– C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08, C1-09: Time to decelerate from C1-14 to 0 Hz
12

12.4 C: Tuning
Reference is 60 Hz)
Reference is 60 Hz)
Note:
• Figure 12.48 to Figure 12.50 show the accel/decel times when C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve Times @ Start/End of Accel/Decel] = 0.00 s.
• When L3-01 ≠ 0 [Stall Prevention during Accel≠ Disabled], Stall Prevention could cause the acceleration time to be longer than the set
value.
• When L3-04 ≠ 0 [Stall Prevention during Decel ≠ Disabled], Stall Prevention could cause the deceleration time to be longer than the
set value.
◆ C2: S-Curve Characteristics

Use S-curve characteristics to smooth acceleration and deceleration and to minimize abrupt shock to the load.
Set S-curve characteristic time during acceleration/deceleration at start and acceleration/deceleration at stop.
The following figure explains how S-curves are applied.
Figure 12.51 S-Curve Timing Diagram - Forward/Reverse Operation

Note:
• If STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] occurs when starting a PM motor, try increasing the value set to C2-01.
• Setting the S-curve will increase the acceleration and deceleration times.

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C2-01: S-Curve Time @ Start of Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C2-01 S-Curve Time @ Start of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(020B) Accel Sets the S-curve acceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
■ C2-02: S-Curve Time @ End of Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C2-02 S-Curve Time @ End of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s
(020C) Accel Sets the S-curve acceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
■ C2-03: S-Curve Time @ Start of Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C2-03 S-Curve Time @ Start of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s
(020D) Decel Sets the S-curve deceleration time at start. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
■ C2-04: S-Curve Time @ End of Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C2-04 S-Curve Time @ End of V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(020E) Decel Sets the S-curve deceleration time at completion. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
◆ C3: Slip Compensation

The Slip Compensation function improves the speed accuracy of an induction motor. As loads on induction
motors increase, motor slip increases and motor speed decreases. By adjusting the output frequency in accordance
with the motor load, it compensates the slip and makes the motor speed equal to the frequency reference.
■ C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(020F) Sets the gain for the slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN
Note:
• When A1-02 = 4 [AOLV], you cannot change the setting while the drive is running.
• Correctly set these parameters before you change the slip compensation gain:
–E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
–E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip]
–E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
• When A1-02 = 3 [Closed Loop Vector], the slip compensation gain becomes the motor temperature compensation gain. When the
motor temperature increases, the motor internal constant changes and increases the slip. When you set this parameter, the drive adjusts
the slip with the increase in temperature. Adjust this parameter in these conditions: When the setting value increases, the compensation
also increases:
–The drive is doing torque control.
–There are torque limits.
–Output torque changes when the temperature changes.
Adjust this parameter as follows if necessary:
• If the motor speed is slower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01 in 0.1-unit increments.
• If the motor speed is faster than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01 in 0.1-unit increments.
Parameter Details
12

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C3-02: Slip Compensation Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-02 Slip Compensation Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0210) Time Sets the slip compensation delay time when speed is unstable or when the slip compensation (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Use these settings to adjust this parameter as necessary:

• When the speed is not stable, increase the setting.
• When the slip compensation response is too slow, decrease the setting.
■ C3-03: Slip Compensation Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(0211) Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor rated slip. (0 - 250%)
If you increase the value of C3-01 [Slip Compensation Gain] and the motor speed is slow, use this parameter. The
drive uses this parameter when the slip is at the upper limit of slip compensation. Make sure that you measure the
motor speed when you increase this parameter value. Set this parameter to make the frequency reference and the
slip compensation limit less than the permitted range of the machine.
The slip compensation limit is constant in the constant torque range (frequency reference ≤ E1-06 [Base
Frequency]). In the constant output range where the frequency reference > E1-06, the slip compensation limit
increases with the C3-03 value and the output frequency as shown in Figure 12.52.
Figure 12.52 Slip Compensation Limit
■ C3-04: Slip Compensation at Regen

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-04 Slip Compensation at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0212) Regen Sets the slip compensation function during regeneration. (0 - 2)
If you apply a regenerative load when the slip compensation function during regeneration is active, the quantity of
regeneration can increase immediately. In this condition, it is necessary to use a dynamic braking option (braking
resistor or braking resistor unit).
0 : Disabled
The drive will not do Slip compensation during regeneration.
The load and operation status (regenerative operation) can cause the motor speed to be higher or lower than the
Slip compensation function is enabled during regeneration. Slip compensation is disabled at output frequencies of
6 Hz or less.
The drive uses E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] to automatically calculate the frequency range where it will disable slip
compensation function during regenerative operation.
Slip compensation is enabled at frequencies as low as 2 Hz.

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C3-05: Output Voltage Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-05 Output Voltage Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0213) Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is saturated. (0, 1)
The drive will decrease flux and increase current to compensate torque when voltage is saturated. Make sure that
the drive has sufficient output current capacity before you enable this parameter. When this parameter = 1
[Enabled], the output current will increase by 10% at a maximum (at rated load) before it is enabled.
Enable this parameter to increase speed precision when you move heavy loads at high speeds in these conditions:
• Power supply voltage is low
• Motor rated voltage is high
Do not enable this parameter in these conditions:
• Operating a motor in the middle speed range or low speed range
• Power supply voltage is a minimum of 10% more than the motor rated voltage
When you enable this parameter, if the power supply voltage is much less than the motor rated voltage, torque
control will not be accurate.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ C3-16: Vout Modulation Limit Start Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-16 Vout Modulation Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90.0%
(0261) Start Lvl Sets the modulation factor that starts the output voltage limit operation when C3-05 = 1 [Output (70.0 - 90.0%)
Expert Voltage Limit Selection = Enabled].
■ C3-17: Vout Modulation Limit Max Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-17 Vout Modulation Limit Max V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0262) Level Sets the modulation factor used with C3-18 [Output Voltage Limit Level] for the output voltage (85.0 - 100.0%)
Expert limit operation when C3-05 = 1 [Output Voltage Limit Selection = Enabled].
■ C3-18: Output Voltage Limit Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-18 Output Voltage Limit Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90.0%
(0263) Sets the maximum drop width of the voltage reference when C3-05 = 1 [Output Voltage Limit (50.0 - 100.0%)
Expert Selection = Enabled].
■ C3-21: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-21 Motor 2 Slip Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(033E) Gain Sets the gain for the motor 2 slip compensation function. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0.0 - 2.5)
RUN setting.
Note:
Correctly set these parameters before you change the slip compensation gain:
• E4-01 [Motor 2 Rated Current]
• E4-02 [Motor 2 Rated Slip]
Parameter Details
• E4-03 [Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current]

Adjust this parameter as follows if necessary:
• If the motor speed is slower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01 in 0.1-unit increments.
• If the motor speed is faster than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01 in 0.1-unit increments.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C3-22: Motor 2 Slip Comp Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-22 Motor 2 Slip Comp Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0241) Time Sets the slip compensation delay time for motor 2 when speed is unstable or when the slip (0 - 10000 ms)
RUN compensation response is too slow. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Use these settings to adjust this parameter as necessary:

• When the speed is not stable, increase the setting.
• When the slip compensation response is too slow, decrease the setting.
■ C3-23: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-23 Motor 2 Slip Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(0242) Limit Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor 2 rated slip. (0 - 250%)
If you increase the value of C3-21 [Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain] and the motor speed is slow, use this
parameter. The drive uses this parameter when the slip is at the upper limit of slip compensation. Make sure that
you measure the motor speed when you increase this parameter value. Set this parameter to make the frequency
reference and the slip compensation limit less than the permitted range of the machine.
The slip compensation limit is constant in the constant torque range (frequency reference ≤ E3-06 [Motor 2 Base
Frequency]). In the constant power range where the frequency reference > E3-06, the slip compensation limit
increases with the C3-23 value and the output frequency as shown in Figure 12.53.
Figure 12.53 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit
■ C3-24: Motor 2 Slip Comp during Regen

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-24 Motor 2 Slip Comp during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0243) Regen Sets the slip compensation during regenerative operation function for motor 2. (0 - 2)
If you apply a regenerative load when the slip compensation function during regeneration is active, the quantity of
regeneration can increase immediately. In this condition, it is necessary to use a dynamic braking option (braking
resistor or braking resistor unit).
0 : Disabled
The drive will not do Slip compensation during regeneration.
The load and operation status (regenerative operation) can cause the motor speed to be higher or lower than the
Slip compensation function is enabled during regeneration. Slip compensation is disabled at output frequencies of
6 Hz or less.
The drive uses E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] to automatically calculate the frequency range where it will disable slip
compensation function during regenerative operation.
Slip compensation is enabled at frequencies as low as 2 Hz.

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C3-28: Adaptive Slip Control Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C3-28 Adaptive Slip Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B5B) Mode Sets the slip compensation function mode. (0, 1)
Expert
0 : Normal
1 : Advanced
Note:
Set C3-28 = 0 for better torque precision. If the torque precision does is not better, set C3-28 = 1 and increase the value of n4-65 [Flux
Estimate Response@High Freq] or n4-66 [Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq] in 0.1-unit increments. Then, you must do Rotational
Auto-Tuning.
◆ C4: Torque Compensation

Torque compensation is a function that increases voltage to increase output torque as compensation for
insufficient torque production at start-up or low-speed operation.
Voltage drops due to motor winding resistance cause torque generating voltage to decrease, which causes
insufficient torque. If the main circuit cable connecting the drive and motor is long, this can also cause insufficient
torque due to voltage drops.
Note:
Set the motor parameters and V/f pattern properly before setting C4 parameters.
■ C4-01: Torque Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0215) Sets the gain for the torque compensation function. Use this parameter value for motor 1 when (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN operating multiple motors.
Adjust the setting in these control methods and conditions:

A1-02 [Control Method Selection] Status Adjustment
Torque is not sufficient during low-speed operation of 10 Hz or less. Increase the setting in 0.05-unit increments.
0 [V/f Control]
There is vibration in the motor when operating the drive with a light
1 [V/f Control with Encoder] Decrease the setting in 0.05-unit decrements.
load.
8 [EZ Vector Control]
The cable between the drive and motor is too long. Increase the setting in 0.05-unit increments.
Note:
• Adjust C4-01 to make sure that the output current is not more than the drive rated current during low-speed operation.
• When A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector], usually it is not necessary to change this setting. If you change this parameter in that control
method, it can decrease the torque precision.
• When A1-02 = 5 [PM Open Loop Vector], usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Setting this value too high can cause
overcompensation and motor oscillation.
• When A1-02 = 8 [EZ Vector Control], you cannot change the setting while the drive is running.
■ C4-02: Torque Compensation Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-02 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0216) Delay Time Sets the torque compensation delay time. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 60000 ms)
RUN
Note:
• When A1-02 = 5 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM], you cannot change the setting while the drive is running.
Parameter Details
• When A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV], you cannot change the setting while the drive is running.
Set this parameter in these conditions:
• If there is vibration in the motor, increase the setting.
• If the motor speed or motor torque response is too slow, decrease the setting.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C4-03: Torque Compensation @ FWD Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-03 Torque Compensation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0217) FWD Start Set the amount of torque reference for forward start as a percentage of the motor rated torque. (0.0 - 200.0%)
The torque compensation function is performed using the time constant set in C4-05 [Torque Compensation
Time].
This is available only when you start the motor with the forward command. Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable
this function.
■ C4-04: Torque Compensation @ REV Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-04 Torque Compensation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0218) REV Start Sets the amount of torque reference for reverse start as a percentage of the motor rated torque. (-200.0 - 0.0%)
The drive uses the time constant set in C4-05 [Torque Compensation Time] to do the torque compensation
function.
This is available only when you start the motor with the reverse Run command.
■ C4-05: Torque Compensation Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-05 Torque Compensation Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10 ms
(0219) Sets the starting torque constant to use with C4-03 and C4-04 [Torque Compensation @ FWD/ (0 - 200 ms)
REV Start].
■ C4-06: Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-06 Motor 2 Torque Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150 ms
(021A) Delay Time Sets the value if ov [Overvoltage] occurs with sudden changes in the load, at the end of (0 - 10000 ms)
acceleration, or at the start of deceleration.
Sets the time constant used during Speed Search or during regenerative operation when ov occurs.
Adjust this parameter in the following circumstances.
• Gradually reduce the setting in 10 ms increments and check the performance to improve motor torque speed
response when ov occurs.
Note:
• Ensure that C4-06 ≥ C4-02 [Torque Compensation Delay Time].
• Increase the setting value of n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2] proportional to C4-06.
■ C4-07: Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-07 Motor 2 Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(0341) Compensation Gain Sets the gain for motor 2 torque compensation function when using the Motor Switch function. (0.00 - 2.50)
RUN
In V/f Control or CL-V/f Control, adjust the value in 0.05 unit increments for these conditions:
• When torque is not sufficient during low-speed operation of 10 Hz or less, increase the setting value
• When there is vibration in the motor or when the motor hunts when operating the drive with a light load,
decrease the setting value
• When you use a long motor cable, increase the setting.
Note:
• Adjust C4-07 and make sure that the output current is not more than the drive rated current during low-speed operation.
• When A1-02 = 2 [Open Loop Vector], usually it is not necessary to change this setting. If you change this parameter in that control
method, it can decrease the torque precision.

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C4-19: Torque Ripple Suppress Min Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-19 Torque Ripple Suppress V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 Hz
(0B8D) Min Freq If there is slow oscillation at low speeds, adjust this setting. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.0 - 10.0 Hz)
Note:
Set C4-20 [Voltage Compensation Adjust 1] ≠ 0 to enable this parameter.
■ C4-20: Voltage Compensation Adjust 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-20 Voltage Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 120 Hz
(0BCB) Adjust 1 Sets voltage precision compensation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 200 Hz)
Expert
Note:
Set C4-20 = 0 when noise occurs during low-speed operation.
■ C4-21: Voltage Compensation Adjust 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-21 Voltage Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5
(0BCC) Adjust 2 Sets voltage precision compensation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 10)
Expert
Note:
Set C4-21 = 0 when noise occurs during high-speed operation.
■ C4-23: Current Control Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-23 Current Control Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(1583) Sets the Current control gain. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. (0.50 - 2.50)
Expert
■ C4-25: High-Speed Voltage Compensation

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C4-25 High-Speed Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(1BF4) Compensation Sets the voltage compensation function for high-speed operation. Usually it is not necessary to (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
Set C4-25 = 0 when there is audible noise or motor vibration during high-speed operation.
◆ C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR: Automatic Speed Regulator)

The ASR adjusts the output frequency or torque reference to decrease the difference between frequency reference
and motor speed. The control method sets the parameter that you must adjust.
A1-02 [Control Method Selection] Targets of Adjustment
Parameter Details
1: Closed Loop V/f Control (CL-V/f) Output frequency
• 3: Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV)

• 4: Advanced Open Loop Vector Control (AOLV)
• 6: PM Advanced Open Loop Vector (AOLV/PM) Torque Reference
• 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (CLV/PM)
• 8: EZ Vector Control (EZOLV)
12

12.4 C: Tuning
Figure 12.54 and Figure 12.55 are speed control block diagrams of each control method.
Figure 12.54 Speed Control Block Diagram for CL-V/f
Figure 12.55 Speed Control Block Diagram for CLV, AOLV, CLV/PM, AOLV/PM, and EZOLV
Note:
The detected speed is the speed estimation value when configured such that A1-02 = 4, 6, or 8 [Control Method Selection = AOLV,
AOLV/PM, or EZOLV].
■ Before You Adjust ASR Parameters

• Do Auto-Tuning and set up all motor data correctly before you adjust the ASR parameters.
• Always make adjustments with the load connected to the motor.
• Use analog output signals to monitor U1-16 [SFS Output Frequency] and U1-05 [Motor Speed] when you
adjust the ASR.
■ ASR Adjustment Procedure for CL-V/f

Do this procedure to adjust ASR parameters:
1. Run the motor at minimum speed and increase C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 2] as much as possible without
oscillation.
Figure 12.56 ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustment

2. Run the motor at minimum speed and decrease C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 2] as much as possible without
oscillation.
3. Check the output current monitor to make sure that the output current is less than 50% of the drive rated
current. If the setting value is higher than 50%, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
4. Run the motor at maximum speed and increase C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] as much as possible without
oscillations.
5. Run the motor at maximum speed and decrease C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] as much as possible without
oscillations.
6. If higher speed precision and faster response during acceleration or deceleration are necessary, set C5-12 = 1
[Integral Operation @ Accel/Decel = Enabled] to enable integral control during acceleration/decel.

12.4 C: Tuning
Note:
• If overshooting occurs when acceleration ends, decrease the value set in C5-01 and increase the value set in C5-02.
• If undershoot occurs at stop, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
• If you adjust the gain and it does not correct overshooting and undershooting, decrease the value set in C5-05 [ASR Limit] to decrease
the upper limit of the frequency reference compensation.
■ ASR Adjustment Procedure for CLV, AOLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, and EZOLV
Do this procedure to adjust ASR parameters:
1. Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and increase C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] until immediately
before vibration starts to occur.
2. Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and decrease C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1] until immediately before
vibration starts to occur.
3. Check for oscillation when you run the motor at maximum speed.
4. If oscillation occurs, increase C5-02 and decrease C5-01.
When there is no oscillation, the adjustment procedure is complete.
5. Set the low-speed gain. Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and increase C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain
2] until immediately before vibration starts to occur.
Figure 12.57 Low-speed/High-speed Gain Settings

6. Set the low-speed integral time. Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and decrease C5-04 [ASR Integral
Time 2] until immediately before vibration starts to occur.
7. Set C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover Frequency].
8. Check for oscillation when you run the motor at speeds more than the setting in C5-07.
Note:
• If overshooting occurs when acceleration ends, decrease the value set in C5-01 and increase the value set in C5-02.
• If undershoot occurs at stop, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
■ Use MFDI Switch for Proportional Gain

Note:
If A1-02 = 1 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control with Encoder], you cannot use this function.
You can use the input terminals set for H1-xx = 77 [ASR Gain (C5-03) Select] to switch the proportional gains set
with C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 2]. When the configured input
terminal deactivates, it selects the proportional gain set for C5-01. When the terminal is activated, the proportional
gain set for C5-03 is selected. The proportional gain changes linearly over the time set in C5-02 [ASR Integral
Time 1]. The signals from this MFDI are more important than C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover Frequency].
Parameter Details
Figure 12.58 Proportional Gain through Multi-function Digital Input Switch
■ Speed Waveform Monitoring Method

To make small adjustments of ASR parameters, monitor the speed waveforms when you make the adjustments.
Table 12.36 shows example settings of parameters to monitor speed waveforms.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
Table 12.36 Example Settings of MFAO Terminals to Monitor Speed Waveforms

No. Name Setting Value Description
H4-01 Terminal FM Analog Output Select 116 Lets you use terminal FM to monitor U1-
16 [SFS Output Frequency].
H4-02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain 100.0%
H4-03 Terminal FM Analog Output Bias 0.0%
H4-04 Terminal AM Analog Output Select 105 Lets you use terminal AM to monitor U1-
05 [Motor Speed].
H4-05 Terminal AM Analog Output Gain 50.0%
H4-06 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias 0.0%
H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level Select 1 Lets you monitor in a -10 V to +10 V
range.
H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level Select 1
These settings cause this MFAO configuration. The MFAO common is terminal AC:
• Terminal FM: Outputs the output frequency after SFS in a -10 V to +10 V (-100% to +100%) range.
• Terminal AM: Outputs the motor speed in a -10 V to +10 V (-200% to +200%) range.
Yaskawa recommends that you monitor the output frequency after SFS and the motor speed for delays in response
and differences in reference values.
■ Adjust ASR Parameters

Use Table 12.37 to adjust ASR. The table lists parameters for motor 1. You can make the same changes to motor 2
parameters when you run a second motor.
Note:
When adjusting the proportional gain and integral time, adjust the proportional gain first.
Table 12.37 ASR Response and Possible Solutions
Problem Possible Solutions
• Increase C5-01/C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain].

• Decrease C5-02/C5-04 [ASR Integral Time].
Speed response is slow.
• Decrease C5-01/C5-03.
• Increase C5-02/C5-04.
Overshoot or undershoot occurs at the end of acceleration

or deceleration.
• Decrease C5-01/C5-03.
• Increase C5-02/C5-04.
• Increase C5-06 [ASR Delay Time].
Vibration and oscillation occur at constant speed.
• Examine the pulse number set to F1-01 [Encoder 1

Pulse Count (PPR)] and the gear ratio to F1-12
[Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1] and F1-13 [Encoder 1 Gear
Teeth 2].
Speed accuracy is unsatisfactory when you operate a • Make sure that you correctly set the pulse signal from
motor that has a large quantity of rated slip in Closed
the encoder.
Loop V/f Control.
• Examine U6-04 [ASR Output] to make sure that the
ASR operates at its output limit set to C5-05 [ASR
Limit]. If the ASR is at the output limit, increase C5-
05.

12.4 C: Tuning
Problem Possible Solutions
When C5-12 = 1 or C5-32 = 1 [Enabled] in Closed Loop • Decrease C5-01/C5-03.

V/f Control, over/undershoot occurs if you change - • Increase C5-02/C5-04.
speeds. • Decrease the value set to C5-05.
• Closed Loop V/f Control Mode:

Use C5-03 and C5-04 at maximum speed and C5-01
and C5-02 at minimum speed to set different ASR
settings.
Oscillation at low speed and response is too slow at high • Closed Loop Vector Control, PM Advanced Open
speed. Loop Vector Control, and PM Closed Loop Vector
-
Oscillation at high speed and response is too slow at low Control:
speed. Use C5-01 to C5-04 to set the best ASR settings for
high and low speed. Use C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover
Frequency] to switch the ASR proportional gain and
ASR integral time as specified by the output
frequency.
■ C5-01: ASR Proportional Gain 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(021B) Sets the gain to adjust ASR response. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN
A higher gain gives a higher speed response. Usually, the gain increases with larger loads. Too much gain will
cause vibration.
Note:
• The drive usually sets Motor 1 ASR with C5-01 and C5-02 [ASR Integral Time 1]. When you set H1-xx = 77 [MFDI Function Select =
ASR Gain Switch], you can switch between C5-01 and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 2]. You can also use C5-01 as an alternative to
C5-03 and C5-02 as an alternative to C5-04 when the speed is less than or equal to the frequency set in C5-07 [ASR Gain Switchover
Frequency].
• The drive automatically adjusts C5-01 in ASR Tuning.
■ C5-02: ASR Integral Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(021C) Sets the ASR integral time. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
When you increase the integral time, the responsiveness will decrease. An integral time that is too short can cause
oscillation.
■ C5-03: ASR Proportional Gain 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(021D) Sets the gain to adjust ASR response. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN
A higher gain provides a higher speed response. Usually, the gain increases with larger loads. Too much gain will
cause vibration.
■ C5-04: ASR Integral Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(021E) Sets the ASR integral time. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
Parameter Details
oscillation.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C5-05: ASR Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-05 ASR Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0%
(021F) Set the ASR output limit as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. (0.0 - 20.0%)
If the motor rated slip is high, it is necessary to increase the setting for correct motor speed control. Use U6-04
[ASR Output] to make sure that ASR is operating at the limit set in this parameter. When ASR is operating at the
limit, correctly set the PG signal and these parameters before you make changes to C5-05.
• F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)]
• F1-12 [Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1]
■ C5-06: ASR Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-06 ASR Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0220) Sets the filter time constant of the torque reference output from the speed loop. Usually it is not (0.000 - 0.500 s)
If you have a load with low rigidity or if oscillation is a problem, decrease C5-01 in 2-unit decrements or decrease
C5-06 in 0.001-unit decrements.
■ C5-07: ASR Gain Switchover Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-07 ASR Gain Switchover V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0221) Frequency Sets the frequency where the drive will switch between these parameters: (Determined by A1-02)
C5-01 and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 1/2]
C5-02 and C5-04 [ASR Integral Time 1/2]
Switching the proportional gain and integral time in the low or high speed range can help operation become
stable. A good switching point is 80% of the frequency where oscillation occurs or at 80% of the maximum output
frequency.
Note:
An MFDI set for H1-xx = 77 [MFDI Function Selection = ASR Gain (C5-03) Select] will have priority over the ASR gain switching
frequency.
■ C5-08: ASR Integral Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-08 ASR Integral Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400%
(0222) Set the upper limit of the ASR integral amount as a percentage of the rated load. (0 - 400%)
■ C5-12: Integral Operation @ Accel/Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-12 Integral Operation @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0386) Accel/Decel Sets ASR integral operation during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
When it is necessary for the motor speed to be as near the frequency reference as possible during acceleration or
deceleration, set this parameter to 1.
Note:
If you enable integral control, overshoot or undershoot can occur when acceleration or deceleration complete. If there are problems with
overshooting and undershooting, set this parameter to 0.
0 : Disabled
Integral operation is always enabled during constant speed. The drive will not enable integral operation during
acceleration or deceleration.
1 : Enabled
Integral operation is always enabled.

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C5-17: Motor Inertia

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-17 Motor Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0276) Sets the motor inertia. 01, and E5-01
Expert (0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
Note:
The display units for the default setting and setting range are different for different models:
• 0.0001 kgm2 units (setting range: 0.0001 kgm2 to 6.0000 kgm2): 2004 to 2021, 4002 to 4012
• 0.01 kgm2 units (setting range: 0.01 kgm2 to 600.00 kgm2): 2257 to 2415, 4140 to 4H12
When A1-02 = 3 or 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV or CLV/PM], the drive automatically sets C5-17 to the
value of “Motor Inertia” when you do Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning.
■ C5-18: Load Inertia Ratio

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(0277) Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor inertia. (0.0 - 6000.0)
Expert
When A1-02 = 3 or 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV or CLV/PM], the drive automatically sets C5-18 to the
load inertia ratio when you do Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning.
■ C5-21: Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-21 Motor 2 ASR Proportional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0356) Gain 1 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response for motor 2. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN
A higher gain provides a higher speed response. Usually, the gain increases with larger loads. Too much gain will
cause vibration.
Note:
• The drive usually sets Motor 2 ASR with C5-21 and C5-22 [Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1]. You can also use C5-23 [Motor 2 ASR
Proportional Gain 2] instead of C5-21 when the speed is less than or equal to the frequency set in C5-27 [Motor 2 ASR Gain
Switchover Freq]. You can switch between C5-21 and C5-23 by setting H1-xx = 77 [MFDI Function Selection = ASR Gain (C5-03)
Select].
• The drive automatically adjusts C5-21 in ASR Tuning.
■ C5-22: Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-22 Motor 2 ASR Integral Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0357) 1 Sets the ASR integral time for motor 2. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
oscillation.
Note:
The drive usually sets Motor 2 ASR with C5-21 [Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1] and C5-22. You can also use C5-24 [Motor 2 ASR
Integral Time 2] instead of C5-22 when the speed is less than or equal to the frequency set in C5-27 [Motor 2 ASR Gain Switchover
Freq].
■ C5-23: Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-23 Motor 2 ASR Proportional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0358) Gain 2 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response for motor 2. (0.00 - 300.00)
RUN
12

12.4 C: Tuning
A higher gain provides a higher speed response. Usually, the gain increases with larger loads. Too much gain
causes vibration.
■ C5-24: Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-24 Motor 2 ASR Integral Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0359) 2 Sets the ASR integral time for motor 2. (0.000 - 60.000 s)
RUN
oscillation.
Note:
The drive usually sets Motor 2 ASR with C5-21 [Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1] and C5-22 [Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1]. You can
also use C5-24 [Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 2] instead of C5-22 when the speed is less than or equal to the frequency set in C5-27
[Motor 2 ASR Gain Switchover Freq].
■ C5-25: Motor 2 ASR Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-25 Motor 2 ASR Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0%
(035A) Set the motor 2 ASR output limit as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. (0.0 - 20.0%)
If the motor rated slip is high, it is necessary to increase the setting for correct motor speed control. Use U6-04
[ASR Output] to make sure that ASR is operating at the limit set in this parameter. When ASR is operating at the
limit, correctly set the PG signal and these parameters before you make changes to C5-25.
• F1-31 [Encoder 2 Pulse Count (PPR)]
■ C5-26: Motor 2 ASR Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-26 Motor 2 ASR Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(035B) Sets the motor 2 filter time constant of the torque reference output from the speed loop. Usually it (0.000 - 0.500 s)
If you have a load with low rigidity or if oscillation is a problem, decrease C5-21 in 2-unit decrements or decrease
C5-26 in 0.001-unit decrements.
■ C5-27: Motor 2 ASR Gain Switchover Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-27 Motor 2 ASR Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0
(035C) Switchover Freq Sets the frequency where the drive will switch between these parameters: (0.0 - 400.0)
C5-21 and C5-23 [Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1/2]
C5-22 and C5-24 [Motor 2 ASR Integral Time 1/2]
Switching the proportional gain and integral time in the low or high speed range can help operation become
stable. A good switching point is 80% of the frequency where oscillation occurs or at 80% of the maximum output
frequency.
Note:
An MFDI set for H1-xx = 77 [MFDI Function Selection = ASR Gain (C5-03) Select] will have priority over the ASR gain switching
frequency.
■ C5-28: Motor 2 ASR Integral Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-28 Motor 2 ASR Integral Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400%
(035D) Set the upper limit of the motor 2 ASR integral amount as a percentage of the rated load. (0 - 400%)

12.4 C: Tuning
■ C5-29: Speed Control Response

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-29 Speed Control Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B18) Sets the level of speed control responsiveness. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
Expert
If a high level of speed control responsiveness is necessary, set C5-29 = 1,then adjust the speed control (ASR)
parameter.
0 : Standard
1 : High Performance 1
■ C5-32: Motor 2 Integral Oper at Acc/Dec

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-32 Motor 2 Integral Oper at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0361) Acc/Dec Sets ASR integral operation during acceleration and deceleration for motor 2. (0, 1)
When it is necessary for the motor speed to be as near the frequency reference as possible during acceleration or
deceleration, set this parameter to 1.
Note:
If you enable integral control, overshoot or undershoot can occur when acceleration or deceleration complete. If there are problems with
overshooting and undershooting, set this parameter to 0.
0 : Disabled
Integral operation is not enabled during acceleration or deceleration. Integral operation is always enabled during
constant speed.
1 : Enabled
Integral operation is always enabled.
■ C5-37: Motor 2 Inertia

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-37 Motor 2 Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0278) Sets the motor inertia for motor 2. 01
Expert (0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
Note:
The drive automatically sets C5-37 to the value of “Motor Inertia” when you do Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning.
■ C5-38: Motor 2 Load Inertia Ratio

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-38 Motor 2 Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(0279) Sets the load inertia ratio for the motor 2 inertia. (0.0 - 6000.0)
Expert
The drive automatically sets C5-38 to the value of [Load Inertia Ratio] when you do Inertia Tuning or ASR
Tuning.
■ C5-39: ASR Primary Delay Time Const 2

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-39 ASR Primary Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000 s
(030D) Const 2 Sets the filter time constant used when the torque reference is output from ASR. Usually it is not (0.000 - 0.500 s)
necessary to change this parameter.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
If you have a load with low rigidity or if oscillation is a problem, increase this setting in 0.01 unit increments.
■ C5-50: Notch Filter Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-50 Notch Filter Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 Hz
(0B14) Sets the machine resonance frequency. (0, or 2 to 100 Hz)
Expert
Machine resonance can cause high-frequency noise and vibration during operation. A notch filter can help prevent
the noise and vibration. Notch filters set the resonant frequency of the machine to remove specific vibrational
frequency components caused by machine resonance.
Note:
• Correctly set the value for the notch filter frequency. If the frequency value is too low for the speed loop response frequency, the speed
control function will not function correctly. Set the frequency to be a minimum of 4 times the speed loop response frequency.
• Set C5-50 = 0 [0 Hz] to disable the notch filter.
■ C5-51: Notch Filter Bandwidth

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C5-51 Notch Filter Bandwidth V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(0B15) Sets the notch width of the notch filter. (0.5 - 5.0)
Expert
Note:
Set C5-50 = 0 [Notch Filter Frequency = 0 Hz] to disable the notch filter.
◆ C6: Duty & Carrier Frequency

C6 parameters are used to set the selection of drive duty rating, selection of carrier frequency, and upper and
lower limits of carrier frequencies.
■ C6-01: Normal / Heavy Duty Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-01 Normal / Heavy Duty V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0223) Selection Sets the drive duty rating. (0, 1)
0 : Heavy Duty Rating

The overload tolerance is 150% of the rated output current for 60 seconds.
1 : Normal Duty Rating
The overload tolerance is 110% of the rated output current for 60 seconds.
There are two types of load ratings for this product depending on the load characteristics of the application: Heavy
Duty Rating (HD) and Normal Duty Rating (ND).
The drive rated output current, overload tolerance, and acceleration stall prevention level change when the duty
rating changes. Set the drive to agree with the duty rating of the selected drive capacity. In HD, the tolerance is
150% overload for 60 seconds. In ND, the tolerance is 110% overload for 60 seconds. The rated output current for
ND drives is higher than the rated output current for HD drives. Refer to “Model-Specific Specifications“ for more
information about the rated output current.
Note:
Duty rating changes when E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] changes. When E1-01 < 460 V, the duty rating is HD1 or ND1. When E1-
01 ≥ 460 V, the duty rating is HD2 or ND2. When E1-01 ≥ 460 V, the load characteristic level automatically changes from HD1 to HD2
or from ND1 to ND2.
Table 12.38 Differences between Heavy Duty Rating and Normal Duty Rating
Item Heavy Duty Rating 1 (HD1) Heavy Duty Rating 2 (HD2) Normal Duty Rating 1 (ND1) Normal Duty Rating 2 (ND2)
200 V ≤ E1-01 ≤ 240 V 200 V ≤ E1-01 ≤ 240 V

E1-01 Setting 460 V ≤ E1-01 < 480 V 460 V ≤ E1-01 < 480 V
380 V ≤ E1-01 < 460 V 380 V ≤ E1-01 < 460 V
C6-01 Setting 0 1

12.4 C: Tuning
Item Heavy Duty Rating 1 (HD1) Heavy Duty Rating 2 (HD2) Normal Duty Rating 1 (ND1) Normal Duty Rating 2 (ND2)
Load
Characteristics
A high overload tolerance is necessary during start up, acceleration, Overload tolerance is not necessary.
deceleration, and equivalent conditions. • Fan
• Extruder • Pump
Application
• Conveyor • Blower
• Cranes and hoists
• Constant torque or high overload capacity are necessary.
Overload
150% - 60 seconds 110% - 60 seconds
Tolerance
Stall Prevent
Level during 150% 110%
Accel
Stall Prevent
150% 110%
Level during Run
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz 2 kHz Swing-PWM
Note:
• Set the stall prevention level during acceleration with L3-02 and the stall prevention level during run with L3-06.
• Changing C6-01 also changes the maximum capacity of applicable drive motors. The drive automatically changes the setting values
E2-xx and E4-xx to applicable values. The drive also automatically changes these parameters that depend on motor output:
–b8-04 [Energy Saving Coefficient Value]
–C5-17 [Motor Inertia]
–C5-37 [Motor 2 Inertia]
–L2-03 [Minimum Baseblock Time]
–L3-24 [Motor Accel Time @ Rated Torque]
–n5-02 [Motor Inertia Acceleration Time]
■ C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-02 Carrier Frequency Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, C6-
(0224) Sets the carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive. 01, and o2-04
(Determined by A1-02)
Changes to the switching frequency will decrease audible noise and decrease leakage current.
Note:
Increasing the carrier frequency to more than the default setting will automatically decrease the drive current rating.
1 : 2.0 kHz
A : Swing PWM4 (Audible Sound 4)
Parameter Details
F : User Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)

Use C6-03 to C6-05 to set detailed setting values.
12

12.4 C: Tuning
Note:
• The carrier frequency for Swing PWM 1 to 4 is equivalent to 2.0 kHz. Swing PWM applies a special PWM pattern to decrease the
audible noise.
• The setting range changes when the A1-02 [Control Method Selection] value changes:
–3, 5, 7, 8 [CLV, OLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV]: You cannot set to 7 to A.
–4 [AOLV]: You cannot set to 6, 7 to A, or F.
–6 [AOLV/PM]: You cannot set to 7 to A, or F.
Table 12.39 Guidelines for Carrier Frequency Parameter Setup
Symptom Remedy
Speed and torque are not stable at low speed. Decrease the carrier frequency.
Speed and torque are not stable at low speed. Decrease the carrier frequency.
Too much leakage current from the drive. Decrease the carrier frequency.
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long. Decrease the carrier frequency.
Note:
If the motor cable is too long, it can be necessary to decrease the carrier frequency. Refer to Table 12.40 for the
wiring distance and decrease the carrier frequency.
Audible motor noise is too loud. Increase the carrier frequency. Use Swing PWM.
Note:
The default carrier frequency in ND is Swing PWM 1 (C6-02 = 7), with a 2 kHz base. You can increase the
carrier frequency in Normal Duty mode, but this will decrease the drive rated current.
Table 12.40 Wiring Distance

Wiring Distance Up to 50 m Up to 100 m Greater than 100 m
C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection] 1 to F (up to 15 kHz) 1 to 2 (up to 5 kHz), 7 1 (up to 2 kHz), 7
Note:
When A1-02 = 5 or 6 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM or AOLV/ PM], the maximum cable length is 100 m (328 ft).
■ C6-03: Carrier Frequency Upper Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02
(0225) Limit Sets the upper limit of the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency Selection = User (1.0 - 15.0 kHz)
Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)] to set this parameter.
Setting a Fixed User-Defined Carrier Frequency

When you cannot use C6-02 to set a carrier frequency between set selectable values, you can set the value in C6-
03. The carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set to C6-03.
When A1-02 = 0, 1 [Control Method Selection = V/f, CL-V/f], set C6-03 = C6-04 [Carrier Frequency Lower
Limit] to fix the carrier frequency.
Setting a Variable Carrier Frequency to Agree with the Output Frequency
When A1-02 = 0, 1, set C6-03, C6-04, and C6-05 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain] as shown in Figure 12.59 to
make the carrier frequency change linearly with the output frequency.
Figure 12.59 Setting a Variable Carrier Frequency to Agree with the Output Frequency

12.4 C: Tuning
Note:
• When C6-05 ≤ 7, the drive disables C6-04. The carrier frequency is fixed to the value set to C6-03.
• The drive detects oPE11 [Carrier Frequency Setting Error] when these conditions are correct at the same time:
–C6-05 ≥ 6
–C6-04 ≥ C6-03
• When A1-02 = 0, 2, 5, 8 [Control Method Selection = v/f, OLV, OLV/PM, EZOLV], in the area where the output frequency is more than
C6-03 and C6-12, the carrier frequency = output frequency × 12, and it will change with the output frequency.
Figure 12.60 Carrier Frequency when C6-03 = 2.0 kHz, E1-04 = 400.0 Hz
■ C6-04: Carrier Frequency Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02
(0226) Limit Sets the lower limit of the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency Selection = User (1.0 - 15.0 kHz)
Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)] to set this parameter.
Set C6-03 [Carrier Frequency Upper Limit], C6-04, and C6-05 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain] to make the
carrier frequency change linearly with the output frequency.
Note:
The drive detects oPE11 [Carrier Frequency Setting Error] when these conditions are correct at the same time:
• C6-04 ≥ C6-03
• C6-05 ≥ 6
■ C6-05: Carrier Freq Proportional Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-05 Carrier Freq Proportional V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-02
(0227) Gain Sets the proportional gain for the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency Selection (0 - 99)
= User Defined (C6-03 to C6-05)] to set this parameter.
Set C6-03 [Carrier Frequency Upper Limit], C6-04 [Carrier Frequency Lower Limit], and C6-05 to make the
carrier frequency change linearly with the output frequency.
■ C6-09: Carrier Freq at Rotational Tune

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
C6-09 Carrier Freq at Rotational V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(022B) Tune Sets the Auto-Tuning carrier frequency. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
If you set C6-09 = 0 for a high-frequency or low-impedance motor, it can cause oC [Overcurrent]. To prevent oC,
set the carrier frequency to a high value and set C6-09 = 1 before you do Auto-Tuning.
The procedure to set the carrier frequency when the A1-02 [Control Method Selection] setting changes.
• When A1-02 = 2, 3 [OLV, CLV], set C6-02 = F [Carrier Frequency Selection = User Defined (C6-03 to C6-
05)] and then increase the value set to C6-03 [Carrier Frequency Upper Limit].
• When A1-02 = 4 to 7 [AOLV, OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, or CLV/PM], use C6-02 to increase the carrier frequency.
0 : 5kHz
Note:
Parameter Details
When A1-02 = 5, 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM], the carrier frequency is 2 kHz.
1 : use C6-03
Note:
When A1-02 = 5, 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM], the carrier frequency is as specified in C6-02.
12

12.5 d: References
12.5 d: References
d parameters [References] set the frequency reference input method and dead band range. They also set torque
control, field weakening, and field forcing functions.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Use fast stop circuits to safely and quickly stop the drive. After you wire the fast stop
circuits, you must check their operation. Test the operation of the fast stop function before you use the drive. If you do not test
the fast stop circuit before you operate the drive, it can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use the drive in a lifting application, you must also install external safety
circuitry. The drive does not have protection against accidental load drops in lifting applications. Install electrical and/or
mechanical safety circuit mechanisms that are isolated from the drive circuitry. If you do not use external safety circuitry, the
drive could drop the load and cause serious injury or death.
◆ d1: Frequency Reference

Figure 12.61 shows the frequency reference input method, command source selection method and priority
descriptions.
Figure 12.61 Frequency Reference Setting Hierarchy
■ Multi-Step Speed Operation

The drive has a multi-step speed operation function that can set many frequency references in advance. Set
frequency references in d1-xx parameters. You can select the set frequency references with MFDI signals from an
external source. Activate and deactivate the digital input to select the frequency reference to change the motor
speed in steps. You can use the 16-step frequency reference and one Jog Frequency Reference (JOG command) to
switch the speed to the maximum 17-step speeds.
Note:
• The Jog Frequency Reference (JOG command) overrides all other frequency references.
• You can use the MFDI to switch the frequency reference when the motor is running. The drive will apply the enabled acceleration and
deceleration times.
• The default settings for Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 (master frequency reference) and Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 (auxiliary
frequency reference) are the analog frequency reference.
Also, voltage command input terminal A1 and current input terminal A2 for Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 (master frequency
reference) are added internally by default. The drive uses Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 when the signal is connected to an analog
input terminal.
■ Setting Procedures for Multi-step Speed Operation

Use an Analog Input as Reference 1 and 2
This section gives information about the procedures to set these examples:
• Multi-Step Speed 6 (6 types of frequency references)
• When you set the voltage input of analog inputs from terminals A1 and A3 to -10 V to +10 V

12.5 d: References
Procedure Configuration Task Contents

Parameter
1 Reference 1 1. Set b1-01 = 1 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Analog Input].

2. Set H3-02 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function Selection = Frequency Reference].
3. Set H3-01 = 1 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select = -10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)].
2 Reference 2 1. Set H3-06 = 2 [Terminal A3 Function Selection = Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1].
2. Set H3-05 = 1 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select = -10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)].
3 Signal type of analog input Set DIP switches S1-1 and S1-3 on the control circuit board to the V-side (voltage).
Note:
Set this before you energize the drive.
4 Reference 3 Set the value of d1-03 [Reference 3].
7 Jog Reference Set d1-17 [Jog Reference] to the jog speed.
8 External digital input (3 Set the Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 to 3 [H1-xx = 3, 4, 5] to one of the MFDI terminals S1 to S8.
inputs)
9 JOG command Set the Jog Reference Selection [H1-xx = 6] to one of the MFDI terminals S1 to S8.
Use the Maximum 17-Step Speed with All Digital Inputs

This section is the procedure to set the 17-step speeds (17 types of frequency references) without an analog input.
Configuration
Procedure Parameter Task Contents
1 Reference 1 1. Set b1-01 = 0 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Keypad].

2. Set the value of d1-01 [Reference 1].
2 Reference 2 1. Set H3-06 = F [Terminal A3 Function Selection = Not Used], and disables the analog reference.
3 Reference 3 1. Set H3-10 = F [Terminal A2 Function Selection = Not Used], and disables the analog reference.
5 Reference 5 to 16 Sets the values of d1-05 to d1-16 [Reference 5 to 16].
6 Jog Reference Set d1-17 [Jog Reference] to the jog speed.
7 External digital input (4 Set Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 to 4 [H1-xx = 3, 4, 5, 32] to one of the MFDI terminals S1 to S8.
inputs)
8 JOG command Set the Jog Reference Selection [H1-xx = 6] to one of the MFDI terminals S1 to S8.
Multi-step Speed Operation Combinations

Refer to Table 12.41 and Figure 12.62 for information about multi-step speed reference combinations. The
selected frequency reference changes when the combination of digital input signals from an external source
changes.
Table 12.41 Multi-step Speed Reference and MFDI Terminal Combinations
Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Jog Reference
Related Parameters Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 Reference 4
H1-xx = 3 H1-xx = 4 H1-xx = 5 H1-xx = 32 H1-xx = 6
Reference 1 (set in b1-01) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Reference 2 (d1-02 or ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

terminals A1, A2, A3)
Reference 3 (d1-03 or
terminals A1, A2, A3) OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
Reference 4 (d1-04) ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Reference 5 (d1-05) OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Reference 6 (d1-06) ON OFF ON OFF OFF
Reference 7 (d1-07) OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Parameter Details
Reference 8 (d1-08) ON ON ON OFF OFF
Reference 9 (d1-09) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Reference 10 (d1-10) ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Reference 11 (d1-11) OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Reference 12 (d1-12) ON ON OFF ON OFF 12

12.5 d: References
Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Multi-Step Speed Jog Reference
Related Parameters Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 Reference 4
H1-xx = 3 H1-xx = 4 H1-xx = 5 H1-xx = 32 H1-xx = 6
Reference 13 (d1-13) OFF OFF ON ON OFF
Reference 14 (d1-14) ON OFF ON ON OFF
Reference 15 (d1-15) OFF ON ON ON OFF
Reference 16 (d1-16) ON ON ON ON OFF
Jog Reference (d1-17) *1 - - - - ON
*1 The Jog Frequency Reference (JOG command) overrides all other frequency references.
Figure 12.62 Time Chart for Multi-step Speed Reference/JOG Reference
■ d1-01: Reference 1
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d1-01 Reference 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz
(0280) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
• The upper limit value changes when the E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] and d2-01 [Frequency Reference Upper Limit] values
change. Calculate the upper limit value with this formula:
Upper limit value = (E1-04) × (d2-01) / 100
• When A1-02 = 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM, CLV/PM], the drive changes o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
• To set d1-01 to 1-step speed parameter in a multi-step speed operation, set b1-01 = 0 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Keypad].
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0281) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN

12.5 d: References
Note:
change.
• To set d1-02 to Multi-Step Speed 2, set H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10 ≠ 2 [MFAI Function Select ≠ Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1].
When the status is the default setting, set H3-06 = F [Terminal A3 Function Selection = Not Used].
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
• To set d1-03 to Multi-Step Speed 3, set H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10 ≠ 3 [MFAI Function Select ≠ Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2].
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
• This parameter sets the frequency reference of Multi-Step Speed 4.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
Parameter Details
12

12.5 d: References
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(028B) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(028C) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
change.

12.5 d: References
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(028D) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(028E) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(028F) Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
change.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
RUN
Note:
change.
12

12.5 d: References
■ d1-17: Jog Reference

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d1-17 Jog Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz
(0292) Sets the Jog frequency reference in the units from o1-03 [Frequency Display Unit Selection]. Set (0.00 - 590.00 Hz)
RUN H1-xx = 6 [MFDI Function Select = Jog Reference Selection] to use the Jog frequency reference.
Note:
change.
• When A1-02 = 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM, CLV/PM], the drive sets o1-03 = 1 [0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
◆ d2: Reference Limits

d2 parameters set the upper and lower frequency limits to control the motor speed. Apply these parameters to for
example, run the motor at low-speed due to mechanical strength concerns, or if the motor should not be run at low
speed because of lubrication issues with the gears and bearings.
The upper frequency limit is set in d2-01 [Frequency Reference Upper Limit] and the lower limit is set in d2-02
[Frequency Reference Lower Limit].
Figure 12.63 Upper and Lower Frequency Limits
■ d2-01: Frequency Reference Upper Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0289) Limit Sets maximum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is 100%. (0.0 - 110.0%)
When the frequency reference is more than the value set in d2-01 the drive will continue to operate at the value set
in d2-01.
■ d2-02: Frequency Reference Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d2-02 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(028A) Lower Limit Sets minimum limit for all frequency references. The maximum output frequency is 100%. (0.0 - 110.0%)
When the frequency reference is less than the value set in d2-02, the drive will continue to operate at the value set
in d2-02. The motor will accelerate to the d2-02 value after the drive receives a Run command and a lower
frequency reference than d2-02 has been entered.
■ d2-03: Analog Frequency Ref Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d2-03 Analog Frequency Ref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0293) Lower Limit Sets the lower limit for the master frequency reference (the first frequency of the multi-step speed (0.0 - 110.0%)
reference) as a percentage. The maximum output frequency is 100%.
This parameter does not change the lower limit of Jog reference, frequency reference for multi-step speed
operation, or the auxiliary frequency reference.
The drive operates at the value set in d2-03 when the frequency reference decreases to less than the value set in
d2-03.

12.5 d: References
Note:
When lower limits are set to parameters d2-02 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit] and d2-03, the drive uses the larger value as the
lower limit.
◆ d3: Jump Frequency

The Jump frequency is a function that sets the dead band to a specified frequency band. If a machine that operated
at constant speed is operated with variable speed, it can make resonance. To operate the machine without
resonance from the natural frequency of the machinery mechanical system, use a frequency band jump.
You can program the drive to have three different Jump frequencies. Set d3-01 [Jump Frequency 1] to d3-03
[Jump Frequency 3] to the center value for the frequency to avoid and set d3-04 [Jump Frequency Width] to be 1/
2 of the total band to avoid.
When you input a frequency reference that is the same as or near the Jump frequency width, the frequency
reference changes automatically.
The drive accelerates or decelerates the motor smoothly until the frequency reference is not in the range of the
Jump frequency band. The drive will use the active accel/decel time to go through the specified dead band range.
If the frequency reference is not in the range of the Jump frequency band, switch to constant speed operation.
Figure 12.64 Jump Frequency

Note:
• When you set Jump Frequencies 1 to 3, make sure that the parameters do not overlap. The drive will not indicate this condition.
• When the drive is in the range of the Jump frequency, the frequency reference changes automatically. When the drive jumps
frequencies, the output frequency changes smoothly as specified by the values set in C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] and C1-02
[Deceleration Time 1].
■ d3-01: Jump Frequency 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
Note:
Set this parameter to 0.0 Hz to disable the Jump frequency.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
Note:
12

12.5 d: References

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:
■ d3-04: Jump Frequency Width

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 Hz
(0297) Sets the width of the frequency band that the drive will avoid. (Determined by A1-02)
◆ d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold

The d4 parameters set the Frequency Reference Hold function and Up/Down and Up/Down 2 commands.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use the drive in a lifting application, you must also install external safety
circuitry. The drive does not have protection against accidental load drops in lifting applications. Install electrical and/or
mechanical safety circuit mechanisms that are isolated from the drive circuitry. If you do not use external safety circuitry, the
drive could drop the load and cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive in a lifting application, you
must close the brake if an input terminal triggers the Baseblock command to stop drive output. If you enter the baseblock
command, the motor will suddenly coast and the load will slip, which can cause serious injury or death.
• Frequency Reference Hold Function Command: This acceleration/deceleration ramp hold command uses an
MFDI to momentarily stop the acceleration/deceleration of the motor, and continues to operate the motor at the
output frequency at which the command reference was input. Turn OFF the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold
command to continue acceleration/deceleration.
With a crane for example, use the function and a 2-stage push button to stop acceleration and operate at low
speed with one of the output frequencies.
• Up/Down command: The Up/Down command is a function to activate and deactivate an MFDI to increase and
decrease the frequency reference. The Up/Down command overrides frequency references from the analog input
terminal, pulse train input terminal, and keypad.
• Up/Down 2 command: The Up/Down 2 command is a function that adds a set bias value to the frequency
reference to accelerate or decelerate. The Up/Down 2 command activates and deactivates the MFDI to add a
bias value.
■ d4-01: Freq Reference Hold Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-01 Freq Reference Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0298) Selection Sets the function that saves the frequency reference or the frequency bias (Up/Down 2) after a (0, 1)
Stop command or when de-energizing the drive.
Set H1-xx [MFDI Function Selection] to one of these values to enable this parameter:
• A [Accel/Decel Ramp Hold]
• 10/11 [Up/Down Command]
• 75/76 [Up/Down 2 Command]
0 : Disabled
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
When you enter a Stop command or de-energize the drive, the hold value is reset to 0 Hz. The drive will use the
active frequency reference when it restarts.
• Up/Down Command
When you enter a Stop command or de-energize the drive, the frequency reference value is reset to 0 Hz. The
drive will start from 0 Hz when it restarts.
• Up/Down 2 Command
When you enter the Stop command or 5 s after you release the Up/Down 2 command, the drive does not save
the frequency bias. The Up/Down 2 function will start with a bias of 0% when the drive restarts.
1 : Enabled

12.5 d: References
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold

When you clear the Run command or de-energize the drive, it will save the last hold value. The drive will use
the saved value as the frequency reference when it restarts.
Note:
When you energize the drive, continuously enable the MFDI terminal set for Accel/Decel Ramp Hold [H1-xx = A]. If the digital input
does not activate, the drive will clear the hold value and set it to 0 Hz.
Figure 12.65 Frequency Reference Hold with Accel/Decel Hold Function

• Up/Down Command
When you clear the Run command or de-energize the drive, it will save the frequency reference value. The drive
will use the saved value as the frequency reference when it restarts.
• Up/Down 2 Command with Frequency Reference from Keypad
When a Run command is active and you release the Up/Down 2 command for longer than 5 s, the drive adds the
Up/Down 2 bias value to the frequency reference and sets it to 0. The drive saves the frequency reference value
to which the bias value was added. The drive will use the new value as the frequency reference when it restarts.
Figure 12.66 Up/Down 2 Example with Reference from Keypad and d4-01 = 1
• Up/Down 2 Command with Frequency Reference from Input Sources Other Than the Keypad
When a Run command is active and you release the Up/Down 2 command for longer than 5 s, the drive will
save the bias value in d4-06 [Frequency Ref Bias (Up/Down 2)]. The drive saves the frequency reference + d4-
06 as a frequency reference value. The drive will use the new value as the frequency reference when it restarts.
Parameter Details
12

12.5 d: References
Figure 12.67 Up/Down 2 Example with Other Reference than Keypad and d4-01 = 1
Note:
To use the combination of the frequency reference hold function and the Up/Down 2 function, configure the Up/Down 2 upper limit
[d4-08] and lower limit [d4-09] correctly.
Remove the Saved Frequency Reference Value
The procedure to remove the saved frequency reference value is different for different functions. Use these
methods to remove the value:
• Release the input programmed for Accel/Decel Ramp Hold [H1-xx = A].
• Set an Up or Down command while no Run command is active.
• Use the Up/Down 2 Command to set d4-06 = 0.0 or set d4-06 = 0.0 during stop.
■ d4-03: Up/Down 2 Bias Step Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-03 Up/Down 2 Bias Step V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz
(02AA) Frequency Sets the bias that the Up/Down 2 function adds to or subtracts from the frequency reference. (0.00 - 99.99 Hz)
RUN
The operation is different for different setting values:

• Setting d4-03 = 0.00 Hz
When the Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75, 76] is active, the drive uses the accel/decel times set in d4-04
[Up/Down 2 Ramp Selection] to increase or decrease the bias value.
Figure 12.68 Up/Down 2 Bias when d4-03 = 0.00 Hz

• Setting d4-03 ≠ 0.00 Hz
When the Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75, 76] is active, the drive increases or decreases the bias in steps for
the value set in d4-03. The drive uses the acceleration and deceleration times set in d4-04.

12.5 d: References
Figure 12.69 Up/Down 2 Bias when d4-03 ≠ 0.00 Hz
■ d4-04: Up/Down 2 Ramp Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-04 Up/Down 2 Ramp Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02AB) Sets the acceleration and deceleration times for the Up/Down 2 function to apply the bias to the (0, 1)
RUN frequency reference.
0 : Use Selected Accel/Decel Time

Use the active acceleration and deceleration times to increase or decrease the bias.
1 : Use Accel/Decel Time 4
Use C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] and C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4] to increase or decrease the bias.
■ d4-05: Up/Down 2 Bias Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-05 Up/Down 2 Bias Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02AC) Selection Sets the function that saves the bias value to the drive when you open or close the two Up/Down 2 (0, 1)
RUN Commands [H1-xx = 75, 76]. Set d4-03 [Up/Down 2 Bias Step Frequency] = 0.00 before you set
this parameter.
0 : Hold when Neither Up/Down Closed

When the two MFDI terminals set for Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75, 76] activate or deactivate, the drive
will hold the bias value.
1 : Reset when Neither / Both Closed
When the two MFDI terminals set for Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75, 76] activate or deactivate, the drive
will reset the bias value to 0. The drive will use the acceleration and deceleration times set in d4-04 [Up/Down 2
Ramp Selection] to accelerate and decelerate the motor to the selected output frequency.
■ d4-06: Frequency Ref Bias (Up/Down 2)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-06 Frequency Ref Bias (Up/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(02AD) Down 2) Saves the bias value from the Up/Down 2 Command where the Maximum Output Frequency is (-99.9 - +100.0%)
100%.
The Up/Down 2 function setting changes the function of d4-06:

Note:
When the keypad sets the frequency reference, you do not usually use parameter d4-06.
• When d4-01 = 0 [Freq Reference Hold Selection = Disabled] and a source other than the keypad sets the
frequency reference, the drive adds the value set in d4-06 to the frequency reference. If the value set in d4-06 is
a negative number, the drive will subtract it from frequency reference.
Parameter Details
• When d4-01 = 1 [Enabled] and a source other than the keypad sets the frequency reference, the drive will store
the bias value adjusted with the Up/Down 2 command in d4-06 5 seconds after you release the Up/Down 2
command. The drive adds or subtracts the value set in d4-06 to the frequency reference.
Conditions that Reset or Disable d4-06
The drive resets and disables the bias value in these conditions:
• d4-01 = 0 and the Run command was cleared. 12

12.5 d: References
• H1-xx = 75, 76 [MFDI Function Select = Up/Down 2 Command] is not set.

• The frequency reference source was changed.
This includes switching LOCAL/REMOTE and multi-step speed reference.
• A digital input changed the frequency reference value.
• d4-03 [Up/Down 2 Bias Step Frequency] = 0 and d4-05 = 1 [Up/Down 2 Bias Mode Selection = Reset when
Neither / Both Closed], and the two MFDI terminals set for Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75/76] are
activated or deactivated.
• The value of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] was changed.
■ d4-07: Analog Freq Ref Fluctuate Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-07 Analog Freq Ref Fluctuate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0%
(02AE) Limit If the frequency reference changes for more than the level set to this parameter, then the bias (0.1 - 100.0%)
RUN value will be held. The value is set as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency.
Handles frequency reference changes while Up/Down 2 Command [H1-xx = 75, 76] is activated. When the
frequency reference changes for more than the level set in d4-07, the drive will hold the bias value, and the drive
will accelerate or decelerate to the frequency reference. When the drive is at the frequency reference, it releases
the bias hold and the bias follows the Up/Down 2 input commands.
This parameter is applicable only when an analog or pulse input sets the frequency reference.
■ d4-08: Up/Down 2 Bias Upper Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-08 Up/Down 2 Bias Upper V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(02AF) Limit Sets the upper limit of the Up/Down 2 bias as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. (0.0 - 100.0%)
RUN
The drive saves the set bias upper limit in d4-06 [Frequency Ref Bias (Up/Down 2)]. Set d4-08 an applicable
value before you use the Up/Down 2 function.
Note:
When d4-01 = 1 [Freq Reference Hold Selection = Enabled] and b1-01 = 0 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Keypad], the drive will
add the bias value to the frequency reference when it does not receive an Up/Down 2 command for 5 s. Then the drive will reset the
value to 0 at which time you can increase the bias to the limit set in d4-08 again.
■ d4-09: Up/Down 2 Bias Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-09 Up/Down 2 Bias Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(02B0) Limit Sets the lower limit of the Up/Down 2 bias as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. (-99.9 - 0.0%)
RUN
The drive saves the set bias lower limit in d4-06 [Frequency Ref Bias (Up/Down 2)]. Set d4-09 to an applicable
value before you use the Up/Down 2 function.
Note:
When d4-01 = 1 [Freq Reference Hold Selection = Enabled] and b1-01 = 0 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Keypad], the drive will
add the bias value to the frequency reference when it does not receive an Up/Down 2 command for 5 s. Then the drive will reset the
value to 0.
If you increase the bias with the Up 2 command and d4-09 = 0, you cannot use a Down 2 command to decrease the frequency reference.
To decrease speed in this condition, set a negative lower limit in d4-09.
■ d4-10: Up/Down Freq Lower Limit Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-10 Up/Down Freq Lower Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02B6) Select Sets the lower frequency limit for the Up/Down function. (0, 1)
0 : Greater of d2-02 or Analog

The higher value between d2-02 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit] and an analog input programmed for
Frequency Reference [H3-02, H3-06, H3-10 = 0] sets the lower frequency reference limit.

12.5 d: References
Note:
When you use External Reference 1/2 Selection [H1-xx = 2] to switch between the Up/Down function and an analog input as the
reference source, the analog value becomes the lower reference limit when the Up/Down command is active. Set d4-10 = 1 to isolate the
Up/Down function and the analog input value.
1 : d2-02
You can only use d2-02 to set the lower limit of the frequency reference.
■ d4-11: Bi-directional Output Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-11 Bi-directional Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02B7) Selection Sets the function that changes the frequency reference to a Bi-Directional internal frequency (0, 1)
reference.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not change the frequency reference or PID output value to Bi-Directional internal frequency
reference.
When the frequency reference or PID output value is 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency, the drive
runs the motor in the set direction.
1 : Enabled
Changes the frequency reference or PID output value to Bi-Directional output.
When the frequency reference or PID output value is 0% to 50%, the drive reverses the motor in the set direction.
When the frequency reference or PID output value is 50% to 100%, the drive operates the motor in the set
direction.
Note:
When you use the Bi-Directional function with PID control, you can use an MFDI terminal set for PID Bi-Directional Enable [H1-xx =
7F] to enable/disable the Bi-Directional function.
Table 12.42 shows how the drive operates when you use the PID control function with the Bi-Directional function
and d4-11 = 1:
Table 12.42 Bi-Directional Function Operation Conditions
Status of MFDI Terminal Set for 7F [PID Bi-Directional Enable]
b5-01 [PID Mode Setting] Setting
ON OFF
b5-01 = 0 [Disabled] Bi-Directional function enabled Bi-Directional function enabled
b5-01 ≠ 0 [Enabled] Bi-Directional function enabled Normal operation (Bi-Directional function disables)
• When PID Control is Disabled or H1-xx = 19 [MFDI Function Select = PID Disable] is Activated
When the frequency reference is 0% to 50%, the drive reverses the motor in the set direction. When the
frequency reference is 50% to 100%, the drive operates the motor in the set direction. Figure 12.70 shows the
frequency reference change at this time. This is an example of operation when the Forward Run command is
input.
Figure 12.70 Frequency Reference Transition when PID Control is Disabled or PID Disable is ON
Note:
When b1-04 = 1 [Reverse Operation Selection = Reverse Disabled], the drive will not run in Reverse. The frequency reference limit is
0 Hz.
• When PID Control is Enabled and H1-xx = 7F [PID Bi-Directional Enable] is Activated
The Bi-Directional function is enabled. When the frequency reference is 0% to 50% after PID control execution,
Parameter Details
the drive runs the motor opposite of the set direction. When the frequency reference is 50% to 100%, the drive
runs the motor in the set direction. Figure 12.71 shows the frequency reference change at this time. This is an
example of the operation when the Forward Run command is input.
12

12.5 d: References
Figure 12.71 Frequency Reference Transition when PID Control and PID Bi-Directional are Enabled
Note:
When b1-04 = 1, the drive will not run the motor in Reverse. The frequency reference limit is 0 Hz.
• When PID Control is Enabled and H1-xx = 7F is Deactivated
The Bi-Directional function is disabled. When the frequency reference is a negative value after PID control
execution, the drive runs the motor opposite of the set direction. The frequency reference value is an absolute
value.
■ d4-12: Stop Position Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d4-12 Stop Position Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(02B8) Sets the gain to adjust the stopping accuracy. Set this parameter when b1-03 = 9 [Stopping (0.50 - 2.55)
Method Selection = Stop with Constant Distance].
If the motor stops before the necessary stop position, increase the setting value. If the length of time for the motor
to stop is too long, decrease the setting value.
◆ d5: Torque Control

d5 parameters set the Torque Control function.
The Torque Control function controls the output torque of the motor. You can use Torque Control for roller drives,
winders, unwinders, conveyors and other machines that use tension control and push/pull applications. When
there is no more material and the machine suddenly has no load, the drive uses Torque Control and the speed limit
function to keep the rotation speed of the motor from increasing.
Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] to one of these values to use Torque Control:
• 3 [Closed Loop Vector]
• 4 [Advanced Open Loop Vector]
• 6 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector]
• 7 [PM Closed Loop Vector]
Note:
When you use Torque Control and A1-02 = 4, use a motor designed for winding applications.
Use one of these methods to enable Torque Control:
• Set d5-01 = 1 [Torque Control Selection = Torque Control].
• Set H1-xx = 71 [Torque Control] ON.
■ Torque Control Operation

Figure 12.72 shows the operation principle of Torque Control.

12.5 d: References
Figure 12.72 Torque Control Block Diagram

The externally input torque reference is the target value for the motor output torque. If the motor output torque
and load torque are not balanced during Torque Control, the motor accelerates or decelerates. To prevent operation
beyond the speed limit, the drive corrects the external torque reference if the motor speed reaches the speed limit.
The speed limit, speed feedback, and the speed limit bias are the values that calculate the compensation value.
When an external torque compensation value is input, the drive adds that value to the speed limit compensated
torque reference value. The values L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] limit the resulting torque reference. The drive
uses the value as the internal torque reference. You can use U1-09 [Torque Reference] to monitor the calculated
torque reference. The torque limit values set in L7-01 to L7-04 are most important. Although you can set a higher
external torque reference from an external source, the motor will not operate a torque output higher than the
values set in L7-01 to L7-04.
■ Setting the Torque Reference, Speed Limit, and Torque Compensation Values
Torque Control Input Value Selection
Table 12.43 lists the method for torque control input signals.
Table 12.43 The Method for Torque Control Input Signals
Configuration Parameter Signal Input Method Parameter Settings Notes
Torque Reference Drive analog input terminals A1, A2, A3 H3-02, H3-10, H3-06 = 13 [MFAI The level of the set input signal must align
Function Select= Torque Reference / with the polarity of the external signals.
Torque Limit] *1
Analog reference option cards AI-A3 • F2-01 = 0 [Analog Input Function H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 settings are
Selection = 3 Independent Channels] enabled for the option card input terminal.
• H3-02, H3-10, and H3-06 = 13 *1 The level of the set input signal must align
with the polarity of the external signals.
MEMOBUS register 0004H • b1-01 = 2 [Frequency Reference

Selection 1 = Memobus/Modbus
Communications]
-
• When register bit 2 of 000FH = 1, the
torque reference and torque limit from
register 0004H is enabled.
Communication option card • b1-01 = 3 [Option PCB]

• F6-06 = 1 [Torque Reference/Limit by
Comm = Enabled]
-
Refer to the communication option card
manual for more information about the
torque reference setting.
Speed Limit Frequency Reference Selection d5-03 = 1 [Speed Limit Selection = Active The drive applies the settings in C1-01 to
(Reference source selected with b1-01) Frequency Reference] C1-08 [Acceleration/Deceleration Times]
The drive gets the speed limit from the and C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve Time @
frequency reference source input in b1-01 Start/End of Accel/Decel] to the speed
or b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection limit.
2]. *1
d5-04 [Speed Limit] d5-03 = 2 [d5-04 Setting] -

Parameter Details
12

12.5 d: References
Configuration Parameter Signal Input Method Parameter Settings Notes
Torque Compensation Drive analog input terminals A1, A2, A3 H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 = 14 [Torque The level of the set input signal must align
Compensation] *1 with the polarity of the external signals.
Analog reference option cards AI-A3 • F2-01 = 0 H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 settings are
• H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 = 14 *1 enabled for the option card input terminal.
The level of the set input signal must align
with the polarity of the external signals.
MEMOBUS register 0005H • b1-01 = 2

• When register bit 3 of 000FH = 1, the -
torque reference and torque limit from
register 0005H is enabled.
Communication option card b1-01 = 3

Refer to the communication option card -
manual for more information about the
torque reference setting.
*1 Sets analog input terminals A1, A2, and A3 to supply the speed limit, torque reference, or torque compensation. If you set the same
function to A1 to A3 terminals with H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06, the drive will detect oPE07 [Analog Input Selection Error].
Input Signal Polarity
The positive and negative torque references set the motor rotation direction. The direction of the Run command
does not set it. The positive and negative torque reference signals and the direction of the Run command have an
effect on the internal torque reference.
Table 12.44 Torque Control Signal Polarity
Run Command Direction Torque Reference Signal Polarity Direction of Motor Rotation Polarity of the Internal Torque
Reference [U1-09]
Forward run + (Positive) Forward direction + (Positive)
- (Negative) Reverse direction - (Negative)
Reverse run + (Positive) Reverse direction - (Negative)
- (Negative) Forward direction + (Positive)
Note:
For Yaskawa motors, the forward run direction is counterclockwise direction when seen from the load shaft.
When you use analog inputs, you can get negative input values with these methods:
• Apply negative voltage input signals.
• Use positive voltage input signals and set the analog input bias to negative values.
• Apply positive voltage input signals and use a digital input programmed for Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert
[H1-xx = 78].
When you use MEMOBUS/Modbus communication or a communication option card, set the positive or negative
signed torque reference.
When the level of the analog signal input is 0 V to 10 V or 4 mA to 20 mA, the torque reference is the forward
direction. To reverse the polarity of the torque reference, use one of these two methods:
• Use a -10 V to +10 V voltage input
• Set H1-xx = 78 [MFDI Function Select = Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert].
■ Speed Limit and Speed Limit Bias

The drive reads the speed limit setting from the input selected in d5-03 [Speed Limit Selection]. You can use d5-
05 [Speed Limit Bias] to add a bias to this speed. Parameter d5-08 [Uni-directional Speed Limit Bias] sets how
the drive applies bias to the speed limit.
Table 12.45 shows the relation between these settings:
Table 12.45 Speed Limit, Speed Bias and Speed Limit Priority Selection
Operating Conditions
Run command Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Torque reference + (Positive) + (Positive) - (Negative) - (Negative) - (Negative) - (Negative) + (Positive) + (Positive)
direction
Speed limit + (Positive) - (Negative) - (Negative) + (Positive) + (Positive) - (Negative) - (Negative) + (Positive)
direction
Direction of Forward Reverse Forward Reverse

motor rotation

12.5 d: References
Operating Conditions
Generated torque
(d5-08 = 0
[Disabled])
*1
Generated torque
(d5-08 = 1
[Enabled])
*1
Application
example
*1 The C5 parameter set the Δn value.
■ Show Speed Limit Operation

When the motor is at the speed limit or more than the speed limit, the drive sends a signal to the PLC or other
such control devices to tell you that an error has occurred. To enable this function, set an MFDO function [H2-01
to H2-03] to 32 [In Speed Limit During Trq Ctrl].
■ Switch Between Torque Control and Speed Control

Use a digital input to switch Torque Control and Speed Control. To enable this function, set H1-xx = 71 [MFDI
Function Select = Torque Control] to enable this function.
When you switch from Speed Control to Torque Control, the torque limit becomes the torque reference and the
speed reference becomes the speed limit. When you switch from Torque Control to Speed Control, the torque
reference becomes the torque limit and the speed limit becomes the speed reference. When you must use a delay
time to switch between Speed Control and Torque Control, set d5-06 [Speed/Torque Changeover Time]. During
this switch delay time, the drive keeps the reference value of the Torque Control and Speed Control when the
switch signal was input. Change the reference values from an external control device during this delay time.
Note:
• When you switch between Torque Control and Speed Control, set d5-01 = 0 [Torque Control Selection = Speed Control]. If d5-01 = 1
[Torque Control] and H1-xx = 71 at the same time, the drive will detect oPE15 [Torque Control Setting Error].
• If the Stop command is input, the drive will not apply the delay time set in d5-06. Torque Control will immediately switch to Speed
Control and ramp to stop.
Parameter Details
12

12.5 d: References
Figure 12.73 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time
■ d5-01: Torque Control Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-01 Torque Control Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(029A) Sets the drive for torque control or speed control. (0, 1)
0 : Speed Control
Enables Speed Control. The drive controls the speed as specified by C5-01 to C5-07 [Speed Control (ASR) Setting
Parameters].
Also use this setting when you use H1-xx = 71 [MFDI Function Select = Torque Control] to change between
Speed Control and Torque Control.
1 : Torque Control
Always enables Torque Control.
■ d5-02: Torque Reference Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-02 Torque Reference Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(029B) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the torque reference filter. (0 - 1000 ms)
This parameter applies a primary delay filter to the torque reference signal to stop oscillation caused by a torque
reference signal that is not stable. This also helps remove electrical interference from the torque reference signal
and helps adjust the responsiveness between host controllers.
If oscillation occurs during Torque Control, increase the setting value. If the setting value is too high,
responsiveness becomes unsatisfactory.
■ d5-03: Speed Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-03 Speed Limit Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(029C) Sets the torque control speed limit method. (1, 2)
1 : Active Frequency Reference

The enabled frequency reference set in b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] or b1-15 [Frequency Reference
Selection 2] will be the speed limit. The drive applies the values set in C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/Deceleration
Times 1 to 4] and C2-01 to C2-04 [S-Curve Time @ Start/End of Accel] as speed limits.
2 : d5-04 Setting
The speed limit is the value set in d5-04.

12.5 d: References
■ d5-04: Speed Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-04 Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(029D) Sets the speed limit during Torque Control as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output (-120 - +120%)
Frequency]. Set d5-03 = 2 [Speed Limit Selection = d5-04 Setting] before you set this parameter.
The speed limit is a positive value when it is in the same direction as the Run command. The speed limit is a
negative value when it is in the opposite direction of the Run command.
■ d5-05: Speed Limit Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-05 Speed Limit Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10%
(029E) Sets the speed limit bias value as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. (0 - 120%)
Adjusts the margin for the speed limit.
■ d5-06: Speed/Torque Changeover Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-06 Speed/Torque Changeover V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms
(029F) Time Sets the delay time to switch between Speed Control and Torque Control. Set H1-xx = 71 [MFDI (0 - 1000 ms)
Function Selection = Torque Control] before you set this parameter.
The analog input (torque reference, speed limit value) holds at the value when the drive switched between Speed
and Torque Control in the time of the Speed/Torque Changeover Timer. During this time, prepare to switch to an
external source.
■ d5-08: Uni-directional Speed Limit Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d5-08 Uni-directional Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(02B5) Bias Sets the direction of the speed limit reference to which Speed Limit Bias [d5-05] applies. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
The drive applies the speed limit bias in the speed limit direction and the opposite direction.
1 : Enabled
The drive applies the speed limit bias in the opposite direction of the speed limit only.
◆ d6: Field Weakening /Forcing

d6 parameters set the field weakening and field forcing functions.
The field weakening function decreases the energy consumption of the motor. It decreases the output voltage of
the drive to a set level. The function decreases the motor excitation current inversely proportional to speed in a
constant output range, and does not let the induced voltage of the motor become more than the power supply
voltage. To enable this function, set Field Weakening [H1-xx = 63] ON.
Note:
Use the Field Weakening function in constant light-load applications. To control the energy consumption of the motor for other load
conditions, use the b8 parameters [Energy Saving].
The Field Forcing function adjusts the delaying influence of the motor time constant when the drive changes the
excitation current reference and it also increases motor responsiveness. This function uses a high motor excitation
current reference for drive start-up only to help develop actual motor excitation current. Enable the Field Forcing
function to increase motor responsiveness.
Parameter Details
Note:
You cannot use Field Forcing during DC Injection Braking.
12

12.5 d: References
■ d6-01: Field Weakening Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-01 Field Weakening Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80%
(02A0) Sets the drive output voltage as a percentage of E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage] when H1-xx = (0 - 100%)
63 [Field Weakening] is activated.
■ d6-02: Field Weakening Frequency Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-02 Field Weakening Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
(02A1) Limit Sets the minimum output frequency to start field weakening. (0.0 - 590.0 Hz)
Make sure that these two conditions are correct to enable the Field Weakening command:
• The output frequency ≥ d6-02.
• There is a speed agreement status.
■ d6-03: Field Forcing Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-03 Field Forcing Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02A2) Sets the field forcing function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ d6-06: Field Forcing Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d6-06 Field Forcing Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 400%
(02A5) Sets the limit value for field forcing to increase the motor excitation current reference as a (100 - 400%)
percentage of E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Note:
You cannot use Field Forcing during DC Injection Braking.
◆ d7: Offset Frequency

The drive will use 3 digital signal inputs to add or subtract the set frequency (offset frequency) to/from the
frequency reference and correct the speed. The drive uses the terminal set in H1-xx = 44 to 46 [MFDI Function
Selection = Add Offset Frequency 1 (d7-01) to Add Offset Frequency 3 (d7-03)] to set the offset frequency. When
you close more than one input at the same time, the drive adds the selected offset values together.
Figure 12.74 shows the Offset frequency function:
Figure 12.74 Offset Frequency Operation

12.5 d: References
■ d7-01: Offset Frequency 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
d7-01 Offset Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(02B2) Uses H1-xx = 44 [MFDI Function Select = Add Offset Frequency 1 (d7-01)] as a percentage of (-100.0 - +100.0%)
RUN the Maximum Output Frequency to add or subtract the set frequency to/from the frequency
reference.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
reference.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
reference.
Parameter Details
12


E parameters cover drive input voltage, V/f pattern, and motor parameters.

E1 parameters set the drive input voltage and motor V/f characteristics. To switch drive operation from one motor
to another motor, set the V/f characteristics for motor 1.
■ V/f Pattern Settings

The drive uses a V/f pattern to adjust the output voltage relative to the frequency reference.
This product has been preconfigured with 15 voltage/frequency (V/f) patterns. Use E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection]
to select the V/f pattern that is appropriate for the application.
Additionally, one custom V/f pattern is available. Set E1-03 = F [Custom] and then manually set parameters E1-
04 to E1-10.
Table 12.46 Predefined V/f Patterns
Setting
Specification Characteristic Application
Value
0 Const Trq, 50Hz base, 50Hz max Constant torque For general purpose applications. This pattern is used when the load torque is constant without
any rotation speed such as that used for linear conveyor systems.
1 Const Trq, 60Hz base, 60Hz max
4 VT, 50Hz, 65% Vmid reduction Derated Torque This pattern is used for torque loads proportional to 2 or 3 times the rotation speed, such as is
characteristics the case with fans and pumps.
5 VT, 50Hz, 50% Vmid reduction
8 High Trq, 50 Hz, 25% Vmin boost High starting torque This pattern is used when strong torque is required during startup.
9 High Trq, 50 Hz, 65% Vmin boost
A High Trq, 60 Hz, 25% Vmin boost
B High Trq, 60 Hz, 65% Vmin boost
C High Freq, 60Hz base, 90Hz max Constant output This pattern is used to rotate motors at greater than 60 Hz. Output voltage is constant when
operating at greater than 60 Hz.
D High Freq, 60Hz base, 120Hz max
E High Freq, 60Hz base, 180Hz max
Custom Constant torque Enables a custom V/f pattern by changing E1-04 to E1-13 [V/f Pattern for Motor 1]. The
F default settings for E1-04 to E1-13 are the same as Setting Value 1 [Const Trq, 60Hz base,
60Hz max].

Note:
When you manually set V/f patterns, note these items:
• To set linear V/f characteristics at frequencies lower than E1-06 [Base Frequency], set E1-07 = E1-09 [Mid Point A Frequency =
Minimum Output Frequency]. In this application, the drive ignores E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage].
• Set the five frequencies as specified by these rules: Incorrect settings will cause oPE10 [V/f Data Setting Error].
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04 [Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Mid Point A Frequency < Base Frequency ≤ Mid Point B
• Setting E1-11 = 0 [Mid Point B Frequency = 0 Hz] disables E1-12 [Mid Point B Voltage]. Ensure that the four frequencies are set
according to the following rules;
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-04
• When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, it will not reset E1-03.
Figure 12.75 V/f Pattern
■ E1-01: Input AC Supply Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-01 Input AC Supply Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 230 V,
(0300) Sets the drive input voltage. 400 V Class: 400 V
(200 V Class: 155 to 255 V,
400 V Class: 310 to 510 V)
NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Set E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] to align with the drive input voltage (not motor voltage). If
this parameter is incorrect, the protective functions of the drive will not operate correctly and it can cause damage to the drive.
Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage
The value set in E1-01 is the base value that the drive uses for the motor protective functions in Table 12.47. With
a 400 V class drive, the detection level changes for some motor protective functions.
Table 12.47 Values Related to the Drive Input Voltage
Approximate Values
BTR Operation
Voltage E1-01 Setting Level L2-05 L2-11 L3-17
ov Detection Level [Undervoltage [KEB DC Bus [DC Bus Regulation
(rr Detection Level) Detection Lvl (Uv1)] Voltage Setpoint] Level]
*1
200 V Class All settings 410 V 394 V 190 V 260 V 375 V
Setting value ≥ 400 V 820 V 788 V 380 V 500 V 750 V

400 V Class
Setting value < 400 V 820 V 788 V 350 V 460 V 750 V
*1 This is the protection function enabled in drives with built-in braking transistors. These values show the level that will trigger the
built-in braking transistor. Refer to “YASKAWA AC Drive Series Option Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual
(TOBPC72060001)” for more information.
■ E1-03: V/f Pattern Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0302) Sets the V/f pattern for the drive and motor. You can use one of the preset patterns or you can (Determined by A1-02)
make a custom pattern.
Parameter Details
Note:
• When A1-02 = 2 [Control Method Selection = OLV], settings 0 to E are not available.
• Set the correct V/f pattern for the application and operation area. An incorrect V/f pattern can decrease motor torque and increase
current from overexcitation.
• Parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] will not reset the value of E1-03.
12


Use this constant torque pattern for general applications. This pattern is used when the load torque is constant
without any rotation speed such as that used for linear conveyor systems.
Note:
The voltage values in the figures are for 200 V class drives. Multiply the values by 2 for 400 V class drives.
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Note:

HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Use this derated torque pattern for torque loads proportional to three times the rotation speed. For example, fans
and pumps.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Use this derated torque pattern for torque loads proportional to two times the rotation speed. For example, fans
and pumps.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12

Use this derated torque pattern for torque loads proportional to three times the rotation speed. For example, fans
and pumps.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
Parameter Details
7 : VT, 60Hz, 50% Vmid reduction 12

Use this derated torque pattern for torque loads proportional to two times the rotation speed. For example, fans
and pumps.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
8 : High Trq, 50 Hz, 25% Vmin Boost

Use this pattern when moderate torque is necessary during start up.
Select this pattern only in these conditions:
• The wiring distance between the drive and motor is 150 m (492.1 ft) minimum
• There is an AC reactor connected to the drive output.
• For more conditions, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
9 : High Trq, 50 Hz, 65% Vmin Boost

Use this pattern when high torque is necessary during start up.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
A : High Trq, 60 Hz, 25% Vmin Boost

Use this pattern when moderate torque is necessary during start up.


Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
B : High Trq, 60 Hz, 65% Vmin Boost

Use this pattern when high torque is necessary during start up.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
C : Const Trq, 60Hz base, 90Hz max

Use this constant output pattern to rotate motors at more than 60 Hz. Output voltage is constant when you operate
at more than 60 Hz.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
D : Const Trq, 60Hz base, 120Hz max

Parameter Details
at more than 60 Hz.

Note:
12

HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
E : Const Trq, 60Hz base, 180Hz max

at more than 60 Hz.
Note:
HD: 2004 - 2021, 4002 - 4012 HD: 2030 - 2211, 4018 - 4103 HD: 2257 - 2415, 4140 - 4H12
ND: 2004 - 2018, 4002 - 4009 ND: 2021 - 2169, 4012 - 4089 ND: 2211 - 2415, 4103 - 4H12
F : Custom
Set E1-04 to E1-13 [V/f Pattern for Motor 1] to set the values for this custom pattern.
The default settings are the same as Setting Value 0 [Const Trq, 50Hz base, 60Hz max].
■ E1-04: Maximum Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-04 Maximum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 and
(0303) Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V/f pattern. E5-01
(Determined by A1-02 and
E5-01)
■ E1-05: Maximum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200.0
(0304) Sets the maximum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ E1-06: Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-06 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 and
(0305) Sets the base frequency for the V/f pattern. E5-01
(0.0 - E1-04)
■ E1-07: Mid Point A Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-07 Mid Point A Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0306) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - E1-04)

■ E1-08: Mid Point A Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-08 Mid Point A Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02，C6-
(0307) Sets a middle output voltage for the V/f pattern. 01 and o2-04
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
Note:
Default setting is determined by A1-02 [Control Method Selection], C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection], and o2-04 [Drive Model
Selection].
■ E1-09: Minimum Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-09 Minimum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 and
(0308) Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the V/f pattern. E5-01
(Determined by A1-02, E1-
04, and E5-01)
■ E1-10: Minimum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-10 Minimum Output Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0309) Sets the minimum output voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 to 255.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 to 510.0
V)
■ E1-11: Mid Point B Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-11 Mid Point B Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
(030A) Sets a middle output frequency for the V/f pattern. (0.0 - E1-04)
Expert
Note:
■ E1-12: Mid Point B Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-12 Mid Point B Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V
(030B) Sets a middle point voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 to 255.0
Expert V, 400 V Class: 0.0 to 510.0
V)
Note:
■ E1-13: Base Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E1-13 Base Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V
(030C) Sets the base voltage for the V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0
Expert V,400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0
V)
Note:
• After Auto-Tuning, the value of E1-13 = E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage].
Parameter Details
• When E1-13 = 0.0, use the value of E1-05 to control the voltage.

E2 parameters [Motor 1 Parameters] set induction motor data. To switch drive operation from one motor to
another motor, configure the first motor (motor 1).
12

If you cannot do Auto-Tuning, set the E2-xx parameters manually. Performing Auto-Tuning automatically sets the
E2 parameters to the optimal values.
Note:
If A1-02 [Control Method Selection] is set to the following control modes, the keypad does not display E2-xx.
• 5 [PM Open Loop Vector]
• 6 [PM Advanced Open Loop Vector]
• 7 [PM Closed Loop Vector]
• 8 [EZ Vector Control]

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-01 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(030E) Sets the motor rated current in amps. 01
rated current)
Note:
• If E2-01 < E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current], the drive will detect oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error].
–0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
–0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
Enter the motor rated current written on the motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E2-01
to the value input for “Motor Rated Current”.
■ E2-02: Motor Rated Slip

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(030F) Sets motor rated slip. 01
(0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
This parameter value becomes the base slip compensation value. The drive automatically sets this parameter
during Auto-Tuning. When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, calculate the motor rated slip with the information on the
motor nameplate and this formula:
E2-02 = f - (n × p) / 120
• f: Motor rated frequency (Hz)
• n: Rated motor speed (min-1 (r/min))
• p: Number of motor poles
■ E2-03: Motor No-Load Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-03 Motor No-Load Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0310) Sets the no-load current for the motor in amps when operating at the rated frequency and the no- 01
load voltage. (0 to E2-01)
Note:
When the drive model changes, the display units for this parameter also change.
• 0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
The drive automatically sets this parameter during Auto-Tuning. When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, you can also
use the motor no-load current on the motor test report to enter this value manually. Get the test report from the
motor manufacturer.
Note:
The default setting of the no-load current is for a 4-pole motor recommended by Yaskawa.

■ E2-04: Motor Pole Count

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-04 Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
Note:
• When A1-02 = 0, 1, 3 [Control Method Selection = V/f, CL-V/f, CLV], the maximum value is 120.
• When A1-02 = 2, 4 [OLV, AOLV], the maximum value is 48.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Number of Motor Poles].
■ E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0312) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. 01
(0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
• This value is the motor line-to-line resistance. Do not set this parameter with the resistance per phase.
• On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the unit is mΩ, and the setting range is 0.000 mΩ to 65.000 mΩ.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter. If you cannot do Auto-Tuning, use the test report from the motor
manufacturer to configure the settings. Use one of these formulas to calculate the motor line-to-line resistance:
• E-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 75 °C] × 0.822
• B-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 75 °C] × 0.822
• F-type insulation: [the resistance value (Ω) shown on the test report at 115 °C] × 0.728
■ E2-06: Motor Leakage Inductance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0313) Sets the voltage drop from motor leakage inductance when the motor is operating at the rated 01
frequency and rated current. This value is a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage. (0.0 - 60.0%)
The drive automatically sets this parameter during Auto-Tuning.

Note:
The motor nameplate does not usually show the quantity of voltage drop. If you do not know the value of the motor leakage inductance,
contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report.
■ E2-07: Motor Saturation Coefficient 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-07 Motor Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.50
(0314) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)
The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output. The drive uses this coefficient when it
operates the motor in the constant output range.
■ E2-08: Motor Saturation Coefficient 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-08 Motor Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.75
(0315) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E2-07 - 0.75)
The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output. The drive uses this coefficient when it
Parameter Details
operates the motor in the constant output range.
12

■ E2-09: Motor Mechanical Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0316) Sets the mechanical loss of the motor. It is set as a percentage of E2-11 [Motor Rated Power]. (0.0 - 10.0%)
Adjust this parameter in these conditions. The drive adds the configured mechanical loss to the torque reference
value as a torque compensation value:
• There is a large quantity of torque loss from motor bearing friction.
• There is a large quantity of torque loss in fans and pumps.
■ E2-10: Motor Iron Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-10 Motor Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0317) Sets the motor iron loss. 01
(0 - 65535 W)
■ E2-11: Motor Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E2-11 Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0318) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. 01
(0.00 - 1000.0)
Note:
On drive models 2xxx, and 4002 to 4675, the setting unit is 0.01 kW. The setting range is 0.00 kW to 650.00 kW (0.00 HP to 650.00
HP).
On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the setting unit is 0.1 kW. The setting range is 0.0 kW to 1000.0 kW (0.0 HP to 1340.5 HP).
The drive automatically sets this parameter to the value input for “Motor Rated Power” during Auto-Tuning.

E3 parameters [V/f Pattern for Motor 2] set the control mode and V/f pattern used for motor 2.
Note:
V/f preset patterns equivalent to those set with E1-03 [V/f Pattern Selection] are not available for E3 parameters. Use E3-04 [Motor 2
Maximum Output Frequency] to E3-10 [Motor 2 Minimum Output Voltage] to manually set the V/f pattern.
■ Notes on Manually Setting V/f Patterns
Figure 12.76 Motor 2 V/f Pattern Diagram

• To configure a linear V/f pattern at frequencies lower than E3-06 [Motor 2 Base Frequency], set E3-07 = E3-09
[Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency = Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency]. In this application, the drive ignores
E1-08 [Mid Point A Voltage].
• Set the five frequencies as specified by these rules:
E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-11 ≤ E3-04 [Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency ≤ Motor 2 Mid Point A
Frequency < Motor 2 Base Frequency ≤ Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency ≤ Motor 2 Maximum Output
Frequency]
Incorrect settings will trigger oPE10 [V/f Data Setting Error].

• If E3-11 = 0.0 Hz, the drive will ignore the V/f pattern settings.
• When you use A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, the drive will reset the manually set values
for E3-04 to E3-13 [Motor 2 Base Voltage] to default values.
■ E3-01: Motor 2 Control Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-01 Motor 2 Control Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0319) Selection Sets the control method for motor 2. (0 - 3)
Note:
• When you change this setting, the drive will set all parameters that are dependent on this parameter to their default settings.
• Parameter L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] sets the protection operation of oL1 [Motor Overload] the same as Motor 1.
• When you use parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] to initialize the drive, this parameter is not reset.
0 : V/f Control
■ E3-04: Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-04 Motor 2 Maximum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031A) Frequency Set the maximum output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (40.0 - 590.0 Hz)
■ E3-05: Motor 2 Maximum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-05 Motor 2 Maximum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031B) Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ E3-06: Motor 2 Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031C) Sets the base frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
■ E3-07: Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Point A V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031D) Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
■ E3-08: Motor 2 Mid Point A Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Point A V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031E) Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ E3-09: Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(031F) Frequency Sets the minimum output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (0.0 - E3-04)
12

■ E3-10: Motor 2 Minimum Output Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E3-01
(0320) Voltage Sets the minimum output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ E3-11: Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-11 Motor 2 Mid Point B V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 Hz
(0345) Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust the V/f (0.0 - E3-04)
Expert pattern for the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
Note:
• Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the function.
• When you initialize the drive, this parameter is reset to the default value.
■ E3-12: Motor 2 Mid Point B Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-12 Motor 2 Mid Point B V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V
(0346) Voltage Sets a middle output voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust the V/f (200 V Class: 0.0 to 255.0
Expert pattern for the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. V, 400 V Class: 0.0 to 510.0
V)
Note:
• Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the function.
• The setting value changes automatically when you do Auto-Tuning (rotational and stationary 1 or 2).
■ E3-13: Motor 2 Base Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E3-13 Motor 2 Base Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 V
(0347) Sets the base voltage for the motor 2 V/f pattern. Set this parameter to adjust the V/f pattern for (200 V Class: 0.0 to 255.0
Expert the constant output range. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. V, 400 V Class: 0.0 to 510.0
V)
Note:
• The setting value changes automatically when you do Auto-Tuning (rotational and stationary 1 or 2).

E4 parameters [Motor 2 Parameters] set induction motor data. To switch drive operation from one motor to a
different motor, configure motor 2.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets the E4 parameters to the best values for the application. If you cannot do Auto-
Tuning, set the E4 parameters manually.
Note:
E3-xx and E4-xx are available when H1-xx = 16 [MFDI Function Select = Motor 2 Selection].
■ E4-01: Motor 2 Rated Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0321) Sets the motor rated current for motor 2 in amps. 01
rated current)

Note:
• If E4-01 ≤ E4-03 [Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current], the drive will detect oPE02 [Parameter Range Setting Error].
–0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
–0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
Enter the motor rated current written on the motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning automatically sets the value of E4-01
to the value input for [Motor Rated Current].
■ E4-02: Motor 2 Rated Slip

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0322) Sets the motor rated slip for motor 2. 01
(0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
The value set in E4-02 becomes the base slip compensation value. The drive sets this parameter during Rotational
Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning. If you cannot do Auto-Tuning, use the information written on the
motor nameplate and this formula to calculate the motor rated slip:
E4-02 = f - (n × p) / 120
• f: Motor rated frequency (Hz)
• n: Rated motor speed (min-1 (r/min))
• p: Number of motor poles
■ E4-03: Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0323) Current Sets the no-load current for motor 2 in amps when operating at the rated frequency and the no- 01
load voltage. (Less than 0 - E4-01)
Note:
• 0.01 A: 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
You can also manually enter the motor no-load current shown on the motor test report to E4-03. Contact the motor
manufacturer for the motor test report.
Note:
The default setting of the no-load current is for a 4-pole motor recommended by Yaskawa.
■ E4-04: Motor 2 Motor Poles

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
(0324) Sets the number of poles for motor 2. (2 - 120)
Auto-Tuning automatically sets E4-04 to the value input for [Number of Motor Poles].
■ E4-05: Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0325) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor 2 stator windings. 01
(0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Parameter Details
Note:
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter. If you cannot do Auto-Tuning, use the test report from the motor
manufacturer to configure the settings. To calculate the motor line-to-line resistance, use the information shown
on the motor nameplate with one of these formulas: 12

■ E4-06: Motor 2 Leakage Inductance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0326) Inductance Sets the voltage drop from motor 2 leakage inductance as a percentage of Motor Rated Voltage 01
when motor 2 operates at the rated frequency and rated current. (0.0 - 60.0%)
The drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning.
Note:
You cannot usually find the quantity of voltage drop on the motor nameplate. If you do not know the value of the motor 2 leakage
inductance, get the test report from the motor manufacturer.
■ E4-07: Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-07 Motor 2 Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.50
(0343) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor 2 iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. (0.00 - 0.50)
The drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto-Tuning. The drive uses this value when it operates the motor
in the constant output range.
■ E4-08: Motor 2 Saturation Coefficient 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-08 Motor 2 Saturation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.75
(0344) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor 2 iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. (E4-07 - 0.75)
The drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto-Tuning. The drive uses this value when it operates the motor
in the constant output range.
■ E4-09: Motor 2 Mechanical Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-09 Motor 2 Mechanical Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(033F) Sets the mechanical loss of motor 2. It is set as a percentage of E4-11 [Motor 2 Rated Power]. (0.0 - 10.0%)
Adjust this parameter in these conditions. The drive adds the configured mechanical loss to the torque reference
value as a torque compensation value:
• There is a large quantity of torque loss from motor bearing friction.
• There is a large quantity of torque loss in fans and pumps.
■ E4-10: Motor 2 Iron Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-10 Motor 2 Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0340) Sets the motor iron loss for motor 2. 01
(0 - 65535 W)
■ E4-11: Motor 2 Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E4-11 Motor 2 Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0.00 - 1000.0)

Note:
HP).
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value input for [Motor Rated Power].
◆ E5: PM Motor Settings

E5 parameters are used to set PM motor data.
Set E5-01 to the motor code when using PM motors recommended by Yaskawa. E5 and other related motor
parameters will be automatically set to the optimal values.
Perform Auto-Tuning for all other PM motors. If information from motor nameplates or test reports is available,
the E5 parameters can be manually entered.
Note:
• The keypad displays E5-xx only when A1-02 = 5, 6, 7 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM].
• E5-xx parameters are not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters].
■ E5-01: PM Motor Code Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-01 PM Motor Code Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV FFFF
(0329) Sets the motor code for Yaskawa PM motors. The drive uses the motor code to automatically set (0000 - FFFF)
some parameters to their correct settings.
Note:
If the drive hunts or shows an alarm after you enter a motor code, use the keypad to enter the value shown on the nameplate to E5-xx.
■ E5-02: PM Motor Rated Power (kW)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-02 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01
(032A) Sets the PM motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.10 - 1000.0)
Note:
HP).
These Auto-Tuning methods will automatically set this parameter:
■ E5-03: PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-03 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01
(032B) Sets the PM motor rated current (FLA). (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
Note:
• 0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
The drive automatically sets E5-03 to the value input for “PM Motor Rated Current” after you do these types of
Parameter Details
Auto-Tuning:
• Stationary (R Only)
12

■ E5-04: PM Motor Pole Count

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-04 PM Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01
(032C) Sets the number of PM motor poles. (2 - 120)
Note:
• When A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], the maximum value is 120.
• When A1-02 = 5, 6 or 8 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM or EZOLV], the maximum value is 48.
These types of Auto-Tuning will automatically set this parameter to the value of [Number of Motor Poles]:
■ E5-05: PM Motor Resistance (ohms/phase)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-05 PM Motor Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.100 Ω
(032D) (ohms/phase) Sets the resistance per phase of a PM motor. Set 50% of the line-to-line resistance. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
PM motor Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [PM Motor Stator Resistance].
Note:
• Do not change the setting calculated by Auto-Tuning unless it is necessary.
■ E5-06: PM d-axis Inductance (mH/phase)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-06 PM d-axis Inductance (mH/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 mH
(032E) phase) Sets the PM motor d-axis inductance. (0.00 - 300.00 mH)
PM motor Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [PM Motor d-Axis Inductance].
Note:
Do not change the setting calculated by Auto-Tuning unless it is necessary.
■ E5-07: PM q-axis Inductance (mH/phase)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-07 PM q-axis Inductance (mH/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 mH
(032F) phase) Sets the PM motor q-axis inductance. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)
PM motor Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [PM Motor q-Axis Inductance].
Note:
Do not change the setting calculated by Auto-Tuning unless it is necessary.
■ E5-09: PM Back-EMF Vpeak (mV/(rad/s))

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-09 PM Back-EMF Vpeak (mV/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 mV/(rad/sec)
(0331) (rad/s)) Sets the peak value of PM motor induced voltage. (0.0 - 2000.0 mV/(rad/s))
Set this parameter when you use an IPM motor with derated torque or an IPM motor with constant torque.
PM motor Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Back-EMF Voltage Constant (Ke)].
When E5-01 = FFFF, only set E5-09 or E5-24 [PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms (mV/rpm)] as the induced voltage
constant.
Note:
When you set this parameter, also set E5-24 = 0.0. The drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error] in these conditions:
• E5-09 = 0.0 and E5-24 = 0.0
• E5-09 ≠ 0.0 and E5-24 ≠ 0.0

■ E5-11: Encoder Z-Pulse Offset

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-11 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 degrees
(0333) Sets the encoder Z-pulse offset. (-180.0 - +180.0 degrees)
The drive uses the PM motor parameter settings and PM Stationary Auto-Tuning to set E5-11 to the value input
for “Encoder Z-Pulse Offset” automatically. The drive uses Z Pulse Offset Tuning or the Rotational Auto-Tuning
to set E5-11.
■ E5-24: PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms (mV/rpm)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-24 PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class:
(0353) (mV/rpm) Sets the RMS value for PM motor line voltage. 100.0 mV/min-1
400 V Class:
200.0 mV/min-1
(0.0 - 6500.0 mV/min-1)
Set this parameter when you use an SPM motor.

PM motor Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Back-EMF Voltage Constant (Ke)].
When E5-01 = FFFF, only set E5-09 [PM Back-EMF Vpeak (mV/(rad/s))] or E5-24 as the induced voltage
constant.
Note:
When you set this parameter, also set E5-09 = 0.0. The drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error] in these conditions:
• E5-09 = 0.0 and E5-24 = 0.0
• E5-09 ≠ 0.0 and E5-24 ≠ 0.0
■ E5-25: Polarity Estimation Timeout

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E5-25 Polarity Estimation Timeout V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(035E) Sets the function that switches polarity for initial polarity estimation. Usually it is not necessary to (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
◆ E9: Motor Setting

E9 parameters are used to configure induction motors, PM motors, and SynRM motors. Configure these
parameters only for derating torque applications in which a high level of responsiveness and accurate speed
control are not required.
E9 parameters are automatically configured with values input by the Auto-Tuning process for motor parameter
settings. E9 parameters can be manually configured when the EZ Tuning process cannot be performed.
■ E9-01: Motor Type Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-01 Motor Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11E4) Sets the type of motor. (0 - 2)
EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Motor Type Selection].
0 : Induction (IM)
Parameter Details

12

■ E9-02: Maximum Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-02 Maximum Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01
(11E5) Sets the maximum speed of the motor. (40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Note:
The unit of measure changes when the setting of o1-04 [V/f Pattern Display Unit].
EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Motor Max Revolutions].
■ E9-03: Rated Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-03 Rated Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01
(11E6) Sets the rated rotation speed of the motor. (100 - 7200 min-1)
EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Rated Speed].

Note:
Set E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction (IM)] before you set this parameter.
■ E9-04: Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-04 Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01
(11E7) Sets the rated frequency of the motor. (40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Note:
The unit of measure changes when the setting of o1-04 [V/f Pattern Display Unit].
EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Base Frequency].
■ E9-05: Base Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-05 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V,
(11E8) Sets the rated voltage of the motor. 400 V Class: 400.0 V
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
EZ Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Base Voltage].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-06 Motor Rated Current (FLA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 and
(11E9) Sets the motor rated current in amps. o2-04
rated current)
Note:
• 0.01 A: models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023
• 0.1 A: models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12
The setting value of E9-06 is the reference value for motor protection. Enter the motor rated current written on the
motor nameplate. Auto-Tuning the drive will automatically set E9-06 to the value input for “Motor Rated
Current”.
■ E9-07: PM Motor Rated Power (kW)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-07 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-02 and
(11EA) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. o2-04
(0.00 - 1000.0)

Note:
HP).
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Motor Rated Power (kW)].
■ E9-08: Motor Pole Count

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-08 Motor Pole Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
(11EB) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 120)
Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Number of Motor Poles].
■ E9-09: Motor Rated Slip

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-09 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000 Hz
(11EC) Sets the motor rated slip. (0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
The setting value of this parameter is the slip compensation reference value.
The drive uses the setting values of E9-03, E9-04, and E9-08 to calculate this parameter. When Motor Rated Slip
= 0, Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter to the value of [Motor Rated Slip].
Note:
Set E9-01 = 0 [Motor Type Selection = Induction (IM)] before you set this parameter.
■ E9-10: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
E9-10 Motor Line-to-Line V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(11ED) Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor stator windings. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
Stationary Auto-Tuning automatically sets this parameter. If you cannot do Stationary Auto-Tuning, use the test
report from the motor manufacturer. Use one of these formulas to calculate the motor line-to-line resistance:
Parameter Details
12

12.7 F: Options
12.7 F: Options
F parameters are used to set option cards, which function as interfaces for encoders, analog I/O, digital I/O, and
fieldbus communication.
◆ F1: Encoder Option Setup

F1 parameters set the operation of and protective function for the encoder option. Table 12.48 lists the setting
parameters available for each option.
Refer to the instruction manual packaged with the encoder option for more information on how to install, wire,
and set the encoder options.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do test runs and examine the drive to make sure that the command references are
correct. If you set the command reference incorrectly, it can cause damage to the drive or serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that the host controller circuitry has correct safety design that will let you
keep control of the motor if the drive loses speed feedback. If you do not have control of the motor, it can cause serious injury or
death.
Table 12.48 Encoder Option Setting Parameters
Encoder Option
Setting Parameter
PG-B3 PG-X3 PG-F3 PG-RT3
F1-01 x x x -
F1-02 x x x x
F1-03 x x x x
F1-04 x x x x
F1-05 x x x x
F1-06 x x x -
F1-08 x x x x
F1-09 x x x x
F1-10 x x x x
F1-11 x x x x
F1-12 *1 x x - -
F1-13 *1 x x - -
F1-14 x x x x
F1-18 x x x x
F1-19 x x x x
F1-20 - x x -
F1-21 x x - -
F1-30 x x - -
F1-31 *2 *3 x x - -
F1-32 *2 *3 x x - -
F1-33 *1 *2 x x - -
F1-34 *1 *2 x x - -
F1-35 *2 *3 x x - -
F1-36 *3 - x - -
F1-37 *2 *3 x x - -
F1-50 - - x -
F1-51 - - x -
F1-52 - - x -
Number of options that you can 2 2 1 1

install in a drive
*1 Parameters set when A1-02 = 1 [CL-V/f].

*2 Parameters to set an option connected to CN5-B. The drive recognizes the PG option installed to CN5-B as PG2.

12.7 F: Options
*3 When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], you can set the parameters for PG2 without setting H1-xx = 16
[Terminal Sx Function Selection = Motor 2 Selection].
The drive recognizes the PG option installed to CN5-B as PG2. You can use it as a function block (PG CH2, PGP ZP CH2) in
DriveWorksEZ. These are the restrictions:
• Install the PG option for motor control (PG1) to CN5-C.
• The drive detects hardware disconnection of CN5-C (PG1) and CN5-B (PG2), but does not detect Z-phase disconnection of CN5-
B (PG2).
• Do not set H1-xx = 16. When H1-xx = 16, PG2 acts as a motor speed detector.
■ F1-01: Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-01 Encoder 1 Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr
(0380) (PPR) Sets the number of output pulses for each motor revolution. (1 - 60000 ppr)
■ F1-02: Encoder Signal Loss Detect Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-02 Encoder Signal Loss Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0381) Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects PGo (0 - 4)
[Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss].
If the drive does not detect ouput pulses from the encoder for the time set in F1-14 [Encoder Open-Circuit Detect
Time], it will trigger PGo.
Note:
• Motor speed and load conditions can cause ov [Overvoltage] and oC [Overcurrent] faults.
• In AOLV control, set n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With Encoder].
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows PGo and the drive continues operation. Only use this setting in special conditions to prevent
damage to the motor and machinery. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates.
The drive continues operation and does not show PGo on the keypad. Only use this setting in special conditions to
prevent damage to the motor and machinery.
■ F1-03: Overspeed Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-03 Overspeed Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0382) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects oS (0 - 3)
[Overspeed].
When the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-08 [Overspeed Detection Level] for longer than the time
set in F1-09 [Overspeed Detection Delay Time], the drive will detect oS.
0 : Ramp to Stop
Parameter Details
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
12

12.7 F: Options

3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows oS and the drive continues operation. Only use this setting in special conditions to prevent
Note:
When A1-02 = 6 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM], the drive will automatically set F1-03 = 1 [Coast to Stop]. You cannot
change this value.
■ F1-04: Speed Deviation Detection Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-04 Speed Deviation Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(0383) Select Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects dEv (0 - 3)
[Speed Deviation].
When the difference between the frequency reference and the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-10
[Speed Deviation Detection Level] for longer than the time set in F1-11 [Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime], the
drive will detect dEv.
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows dEv and the drive continues operation. Only use this setting in special conditions to prevent
■ F1-05: Encoder 1 Rotation Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0384) Selection Sets the output sequence for the A and B pulses from the encoder, assuming that the motor is (0, 1)
operating in the forward direction.
Refer to the option card installation manual for more information about how to set the encoder pulse output
sequence and make sure that it is correct.
■ F1-06: Encoder 1 Pulse Monitor Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-06 Encoder 1 Pulse Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 001
(0385) Scaling Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of the encoder as a 3-digit number. The (001 - 032, 102 - 132 (1 - 1/
first digit is the numerator and the second and third digits set the denominator. 32))
When the setting value is a 3-digit value (xyz), the dividing ratio is (1 + x)/yz
For example, when F1-06 = 032, the dividing ratio is 1/32.
Note:
When you use a single-pulse encoder, the dividing ratio for the monitor signal is 1:1

12.7 F: Options
■ F1-08: Overspeed Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 115%
(0387) Sets the detection level of oS [Overspeed] as a percentage when the maximum output frequency (0 - 120%)
is 100%.
When the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-08 for longer than the time set in F1-09 [Overspeed
Detection Delay Time], the drive will detect oS.
■ F1-09: Overspeed Detection Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0388) Time Sets the length of time that the speed feedback must be more than the F1-08 level to cause oS (0.0 - 2.0 s)
[Overspeed].
When the motor speed is more than the value set in F1-08 [Overspeed Detection Level] for longer than the time
set in F1-09, the drive will detect oS.
■ F1-10: Speed Deviation Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-10 Speed Deviation Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10%
(0389) Level Sets the detection level of dEv [Speed Deviation] as a percentage when the maximum output (0 - 50%)
frequency is 100%.
When the speed deviation between the frequency reference and the actual motor speed is more than the value set
in F1-10 for longer than the time set in F1-11 [Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime], the drive will detect dEv.
■ F1-11: Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-11 Speed Deviation Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 s
(038A) DelayTime Sets the length of time that the difference between the frequency reference and speed feedback (0.0 - 10.0 s)
must be more than the level in F1-10 to cause dEv [Speed Deviation].
When the speed deviation between the frequency reference and the actual motor speed is more than the value set
in F1-10 [Speed Deviation Detection Level] for longer than the time set in F1-11, the drive will detect dEv.
■ F1-12: Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-12 Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(038B) Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side. This parameter and F1-13 [Encoder 1 Gear Teeth (0 - 1000)
2] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
After you set the number of gear teeth, the drive uses this formula to calculate the motor speed:
Note:
When F1-12 = 0 or F1-13 = 0, the gear ratio is 1.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
(038C) Sets the number of gear teeth on the load side. This parameter and F1-12 [Encoder 1 Gear Teeth (0 - 1000)
1] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
12

12.7 F: Options
Note:
■ F1-14: Encoder Open-Circuit Detect Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-14 Encoder Open-Circuit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s
(038D) Detect Time Sets the length of time that the drive must not receive a pulse signal to cause PGo [Encoder (PG) (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Feedback Loss].
If the drive does not detect output pulses from the encoder for longer than the time set in F1-14, the drive will
detect PGo.
Note:
Motor speed and load conditions can cause ov [Overvoltage] and oC [Overcurrent] faults.
■ F1-16: Deviation 1 Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-16 Deviation 1 Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03AB) Selection Sets the function that enables and disables Deviation 1 Detection Selection. When A1-02 = 7 (0, 1)
Expert [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], this function is always enabled.
Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV) does not use the Z phase for motor control. When it is necessary to monitor
the motor position and you are using the Z phase pulse signal in a host controller, enable it for protection.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03AC) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the number of motor rotations that the drive (0 - 100)
will detect more than one Z pulse per rotation to detect dv2.
When F1-17 = 0, the drive will not detect dv2.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03AD) Selection Sets the number of rotations necessary to detect conditions that invert the torque reference and (0 - 10)
rate of acceleration and cause dv3 [Inversion Detection].
When the drive detects these two conditions at the same time for the number of times set in F1-18, the drive will
detect dv3.
• The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions. For example, torque reference is in forward run
and the acceleration is in a negative direction.
• The difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed is more than 30%.
Note:
• Reference the setting value for E5-11 [Encoder Z-Pulse Offset] and the δθ value found on the motor nameplate. A usual cause for a dv3
fault is an incorrect E5-11 setting.
• Set F1-18 = 0 to disable the function.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03AE) Selection Sets the number of pulses necessary to cause dv4 [Inversion Prevention Detection]. (0 - 5000)
The drive detects a dv4 [Inversion Prevention Detection] faultwhen the pulses in a reverse direction to the speed
reference are input for longer than the time set in F1-19.

12.7 F: Options
Note:
• Refer to the E5-11 [Encoder Z-Pulse Offset] value and the Δθ value shown on the motor nameplate. An incorrect E5-11 value will
frequently be the cause of a dv4 fault.
• When you use the drive in an application that rotates the motor from the load side in the reverse direction of the speed reference, set
F1-19 = 0.
■ F1-20: Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect Detect

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-20 Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03B4) Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected encoder connection cable (0, 1)
to cause PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault].
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ F1-21: Encoder 1 Signal Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-21 Encoder 1 Signal Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03BC) Sets the number of channels for the signal to the encoder option card. (0, 1)
■ F1-30: Motor 2 Encoder PCB Port Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-30 Motor 2 Encoder PCB Port V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03AA) Select Sets the drive port to install the motor 2 encoder option card. (0, 1)
0 : CN5-C
One option card receives the speed feedback signals from motor 1 and motor 2.
1 : CN5-B
Two option cards receive the speed feedback signals from motor 1 and motor 2.
■ F1-31: Encoder 2 Pulse Count (PPR)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-31 Encoder 2 Pulse Count V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr
(03B0) (PPR) Sets the number of output pulses for each motor revolution for motor 2. (1 - 60000 ppr)
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], you can set the number of output pulses without setting H1-xx = 16
[Motor 2 Selection].
■ F1-32: Encoder 2 Rotation Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-32 Encoder 2 Rotation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03B1) Selection Sets the output sequence for the A and B pulses from the encoder for motor 2. This parameter (0, 1)
assumes that the motor is operating in the forward direction.
Refer to the option instruction manual for more information about how to set the encoder pulse output sequence
and make sure that it is correct.
Parameter Details
Note:
When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], you can set this parameter without setting H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2
Selection].
12

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03B2) Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side for motor 2. This parameter and F1-34 [Encoder (0 - 1000)
2 Gear Teeth 2] set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder.
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03B3) Sets the number of gear teeth on the load side for motor 2. This parameter and F1-33 [Encoder 2 (0 - 1000)
Note:
■ F1-35: Encoder 2 Pulse Monitor Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-35 Encoder 2 Pulse Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 001
(03BE) Scaling Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of the encoder as a 3-digit number for (001 - 032, 102 - 132 (1 - 1/
motor 2. The first digit is the numerator and the second and third digits are the denominator. 32))
Note:
Selection].
When the setting value is a 3-digit value (xyz), the dividing ratio is (1 + x)/yz.
For example, when F1-35 = 032, the dividing ratio is 1/32.
Note:
For a single-pulse encoder, the dividing ratio for the monitor signal is 1:1.
■ F1-36: Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-36 Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03B5) Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected encoder connection cable (0, 1)
that causes PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault] for motor 2.
Note:
Selection].
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ F1-37: Encoder 2 Signal Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-37 Encoder 2 Signal Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03BD) Sets the number of channels for the signal to the encoder option for motor 2. (0, 1)

12.7 F: Options
Note:
Selection].
■ F1-46: dv2 Detection Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-46 dv2 Detection Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B98) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the detection method for dv2 [Z Pulse Noise (0, 1)
Fault Detection].
To detect dv2 while a multi-pole motor (for example 24 or more poles) is running at zero speed, set F1-46 = 1
[MechanicalAngle Detection Method].
0 : ElectricalAngle Detection Method
1 : MechanicalAngle Detection Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-47 Deviation 2 Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15°
(1B99) Selection Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the sensitivity of detection for dv2 [Z Pulse (0 - 180°)
Noise Fault Detection]. Increase the value to decrease the sensitivity.
These F1-46 [dv2 Detection Method Selection] settings change the setting units of F1-47:
• F1-46 = 0: F1-47 uses electric angles (deg)
• F1-46 = 1: F1-47 uses mechanical angles (one motor rotation is equivalent to a mechanical angle of 360
degrees)
■ F1-50: PG-F3 Option Encoder Type

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-50 PG-F3 Option Encoder V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D2) Type Sets the type of encoder connected to the PG-F3 option. (0 - 2)
0 : EnDat Sin/Cos
1 : EnDat Serial Only
2 : HIPERFACE
■ F1-51: PG-F3 PGoH Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-51 PG-F3 PGoH Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80%
(03D3) Level The drive will detect PGoH [Encoder (PG) Hardware Fault] if the value of this parameter is (1 - 100%)
smaller than the value of .
The drive will detect PGoH if the value of this parameter is smaller than the value of .
Regarding the expression , Sin θ is the single-track (phase B) output from the encoder and Cos θ
is the single-track (phase A) output from the encoder.
Note:
This function is enabled when F1-20 = 1 [Encoder 1 PCB Disconnect Detect = Enabled].
■ F1-52: Serial Encoder Comm Speed

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F1-52 Serial Encoder Comm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D4) Speed Sets the communication speed between the PG-F3 option and the serial encoder. (0 - 2)
12

12.7 F: Options
Note:
This function is enabled when F1-50 = 1 or 2 [PG-F3 Option Encoder Type = EnDat Serial Only or HIPERFACE].
0 : 1M/9600bps
1 : 500k/19200bps
2 : 1M/38400bps
◆ F2: Analog Input Option

F2 parameters set the operation of the drive when you use analog input option card AI-A3. The AI-A3 card has 3
input terminals that accept voltages of -10 V to +10 V (20 kΩ) or currents of 4 mA to 20 mA (250 Ω). Install the
AI-A3 card to enable setting very accurate analog references with high resolution.
Refer to the AI-A3 option manual for more information about how to install, wire, and set the AI-A3 card.
■ F2-01: Analog Input Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F2-01 Analog Input Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(038F) Selection Sets the input method for the analog reference used with AI-A3. (0, 1)
Note:
When the AI-A3 card is not mounted in the drive, analog input terminals A1 to A3 on the drive are always enabled. The setting of this
parameter does not have an effect.
0 : 3 Independent Channels
Set F2-01 = 0 to increase the precision of A/D conversion when you use the functions for terminals A1 to A3 on
the drive as they are. You can input the MFAI signal from terminals V1 through V3 for AI-A3. The functions for
terminals A1, A2, and A3 on the drive are sent to terminals V1, V2, and V3 for AI-A3. Use gain and bias
adjustment when you input current to set signals to have negative numbers.
Note:
• Set b1-01 = 1 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Analog Input] to set inputs individually.
• If F2-01 = 0 and b1-01 = 3 [Option PCB], the drive will detect oPE05 [Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err].
Figure 12.77 shows the individual input of analog inputs. H3-xx parameters set the function to input the analog
reference received from the AI-A3 card and to adjust the gain and bias of these signals.
Figure 12.77 Analog Input Reference Individual Input Block Diagram

1 : 3 Channels Added Together
Set b1-01 = 3 [Option PCB] to set addition input.
You can input the frequency reference directly. The sum value when you add the input from terminals V1 to V3
becomes the frequency reference.
Set F2-01 = 1 to use the AI-A3 card as addition input.

12.7 F: Options
Figure 12.78 shows addition input. Use F2-02 [Analog Input Option Card Gain] and F2-03 [Analog Input Option
Card Bias] to adjust the analog reference gain and bias for addition input.
Figure 12.78 Analog Input Reference Addition Input Block Diagram

Use F2-02 and F2-03 to Adjust the Input Status
When the bias set in F2-03 is 0%, the gain in F2-02 and the addition input value set the ratio (%) of the maximum
output frequency output as the frequency reference.
Note:
A voltage input of 10 V or a current input of 20 mA is the 100% value for each channel.
The bias set in F2-03 sets the ratio (%) of the maximum output frequency output as the frequency reference when
the addition input value is 0%.
Note:
A voltage input of 0 V or a current input of 4 mA is the 0% value for each channel.
• Example 1:
When the gain set in F2-02 is 50%, the bias set in F2-03 is 0%, and the addition input value is 100%, the
frequency reference is 50% of the maximum output frequency. When the addition input value is 200%, the
frequency reference is 100% of the maximum output frequency.
• Example 2:
frequency reference is equivalent to the maximum output frequency. The frequency reference will not be more
than the maximum output frequency, although the addition input value is 50% or higher.
• Example 3:
frequency reference is 30% of the maximum output frequency. When the addition input value is 70%, the
frequency reference will be equivalent to the maximum output frequency. The frequency reference will not be
more than the maximum output frequency, although the addition input value is 70% or higher.
■ F2-02: Analog Input Option Card Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F2-02 Analog Input Option Card V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0368) Gain Sets the analog reference gain as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is 100%. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
Note:
Set F2-01 = 1 [Analog Input Function Selection = 3 Channels Added Together] to enable this function.
■ F2-03: Analog Input Option Card Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F2-03 Analog Input Option Card V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0369) Bias Sets the analog reference bias as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is 100%. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
Note:
Set F2-01 = 1 [Analog Input Function Selection = 3 Channels Added Together] to enable this function.
Parameter Details
◆ F3: Digital Input Option

F3 parameters set the type of input signal to use with digital input option card DI-A3.
Use these digital inputs to set the frequency reference when you install the DI-A3 card in a drive. Set b1-01 = 3
[Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Option PCB] to use this card as the frequency reference input. The input
signal is isolated input of 24 Vdc and 8 mA. 12

12.7 F: Options
• Binary, 16-bit/BCD, 4-digit input

You can also use the DI-A3 option as an MFDI, if the setting of F3-01 is correct.
On drives with software versions PRG: 01031 and later that do not have a DI-A3 option installed, when you set
F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function Selection = Multi-Function Digital Input], it enables these functions:
• H1-40 [Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 Input Func] to H1-42 [Mbus Reg 15C0h bit2 Input Func]
• H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Input 1 to 4]
■ MFDI for DI-A3

Set F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function Selection = Multi-Function Digital Input] and b1-01 ≠ 3 [Frequency
Reference Selection 1 ≠ Option PCB] to use digital input option DI-A3 as an MFDI.
Use F3-10 to F3-25 [Terminal D0 Function Selection to Terminal DF Function Selection] to set the function for
the DI-A3 terminals.
Note:
• Refer to H1-xx “Multi-function Digital Input Setting Values” for more information about MFDI setting values.
• Values 0 [3-Wire Sequence] and 20 to 2F [External Fault] for F3-10 to F3-25.
• When you do not use DI-A3 as an MFDI, set F3-10 to F3-25 = F [Not Used].
• The drive reads DI-A3 terminal Dx two times as specified by parameter b1-06 [Digital Input Reading].
• Configuring such that F3-01 = 8 when DI-A3 is the frequency reference source (b1-01 or b1-15 = 3 [Frequency Reference Selection 1/
2 = Option PCB]) results in the detection of oPE05 [Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err].
• You can use these functions with the DI-A3 MFDI:
–H1-40 to H1-42 [Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 to bit2 Input Func]
–H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Input 1 to 4]
■ F3-01: Digital Input Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-01 Digital Input Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0390) Selection Sets the data format of digital input signals. This parameter is enabled when o1-03 = 0 or 1 (0 - 8)
[Frequency Display Unit Selection = 0.01 Hz or 0.01% (100% = E1-04)].
Note:
When o1-03 = 2 [min-1 (r/min) unit] or 3 [User Units], the input signal type is BCD. The o1-03 value sets the setting units.
0 : BCD, 1% units
1 : BCD, 0.1% units
2 : BCD, 0.01% units
3 : BCD, 1 Hz units
6 : BCD (5-digit), 0.01 Hz
7 : Binary input
The setting unit and setting range are different for different values of F3-03 [Digital Input Data Length Select].
• F3-03 = 0 [8-bit]: 100%/255 (-255 to +255)
• F3-03 = 1 [12-bit]: 100%/4095 (-4095 to +4095)
• F3-03 = 2 [16-bit]: 100%/30000 (-33000 to +33000)
8 : Multi-Function Digital Input
The DI-A3 option is also used as a multi-function digital input terminal.
When the DI-A3 option is not installed in the drive and F3-01 = 8, these functions are enabled:
• H1-40 [Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 Input Func] to H1-42 [Mbus Reg 15C0h bit2 Input Func]
• H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Input 1 to 4]

12.7 F: Options
■ F3-03: Digital Input Data Length Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-03 Digital Input Data Length V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2
(03B9) Select Sets the number of bits to set the frequency reference with DI-A3. (0 - 2)
0 : 8-bit
1 : 12-bit
2 : 16-bit
Table 12.49 DI-A3 Terminal Function Selection
BCD, Signed BCD, Unsigned Binary, Signed
[F3-01 = 0 to 5] [F3-01 = 6] *1 [F3-01 = 7]
Terminal Terminal
Block Name 8-bit 16-bit
8-bit 12-bit 16-bit 12-bit
[F3-03 = [F3-03 =
[F3-03 = 0] [F3-03 = 1] [F3-03 = 2] 0] [F3-03 = 1] 2]
TB2 D0 1 digit (0 - 1 1 digit (0 - 1 1 digit (0 - 1 1 digit (0, 2 bit 0 bit 0 bit 0

9) 9) 9) 2, 4, 6, 8)
D1 2 2 2 4 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1
D2 4 4 4 8 bit 2 bit 2 bit 2
D3 8 8 8 2 digits (0 - 1 bit 3 bit 3 bit 3

9)
D4 2 digits (0 - 1 2 digits (0 - 1 2 digits (0 - 1 2 bit 4 bit 4 bit 4
15) *2 9) 9)
D5 2 2 2 4 bit 5 bit 5 bit 5
D6 4 4 4 8 bit 6 bit 6 bit 6
D7 8 8 8 3 digits (0 - 1 bit 7 bit 7 bit 7

9)
TB3 D8 - - 3 digits (0 - 1 3 digits (0 - - 2 - bit 8 bit 8
15) *2 9)
D9 - 2 - 4 - bit 9 bit 9
DA - 4 - 8 - bit 10 bit 10
DB - 8 - 4 digits (0 - 1 - bit 11 bit 11

9)
DC - - - - 4 digits (0 - - 2 - - bit 12
15) *2
DD - - - 4 - - bit 13
DE - - - 8 - - bit 14
DF - - - 5 digits (0 - 1 - - bit 15
3)
TB1 SI SIGN (encoded) signal 2 SIGN (encoded) signal
0: Forward run, 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run, 1: Reverse run
SE SET (loaded) signal

1: Loads the value set for D0 to DF and SI.
SP Internal power supply: 24 V ± 5%
SC Input signal common
SN Internal power supply common: 0 V
SD Cable sheath connection terminal (ungrounded)
FE Cable sheath connection terminal (grounded)
*1 Setting F3-03 = 2 [Digital Input Data Length Select = 16-bit] enables F3-01 = 6 [Digital Input Function Selection = BCD (5-digit),
0.01 Hz] and a frequency between 0.00 Hz to 399.8 Hz can be set by the BCD. Note that terminal SI is also used as for data bits.
Negative commands cannot be input as encoding information (positive/negative) cannot be added to the data.
The minimum bit value for the first BCD digit is 2. For this reason, 0.02 Hz is the smallest setting unit available for this frequency
setting. An oPE05 [Run Cmd/Freq Ref Source Sel Err] occurs when F3-03 ≠ 2 while F3-01 = 6.
*2 The most significant digit can be set to a value between 0 to 15 when using “BCD, Signed”. Other digits can be set to a value between
0 to 9.
■ F3-10: Terminal D0 Function Selection

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-10 Terminal D0 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BE3) Selection Sets the function for terminal D0 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
Expert Selection = Multi-Function Digital Input].
12

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0BEA) Selection Sets the function for terminal D7 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0BEB) Selection Sets the function for terminal D8 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0BEC) Selection Sets the function for terminal D9 of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-20: Terminal DA Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-20 Terminal DA Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BED) Selection Sets the function for terminal DA of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-21: Terminal DB Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-21 Terminal DB Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BEE) Selection Sets the function for terminal DB of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-22: Terminal DC Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-22 Terminal DC Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BEF) Selection Sets the function for terminal DC of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-23: Terminal DD Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-23 Terminal DD Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BF0) Selection Sets the function for terminal DD of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-24: Terminal DE Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-24 Terminal DE Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BF1) Selection Sets the function for terminal DE of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
■ F3-25: Terminal DF Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F3-25 Terminal DF Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0BF2) Selection Sets the function for terminal DF of the DI-A3 option when F3-01 = 8 [Digital Input Function (1 - 19F)
◆ F4: Analog Monitor Option

F4 parameters set drive operation when you use analog monitor option card AO-A3. The AO-A3 card has 2
output terminals (terminals V1 and V2) for signals with an Output resolution of 11 bits (1/2048) + encoding and
Parameter Details
that have an output voltage range of -10 V to +10 V. Install the AO-A3 card to a drive to output analog signals
that monitor the output status of the drive (output frequency and output current).
Refer to the AO-A3 card manual for more information about how to install, wire, and set the AO-A3 card.
Use the U monitor number to set the monitor data to be output from terminals V1 and V2 on the AO-A3 card.
Enter the last three digits of Ux-xx as the setting value.
12

12.7 F: Options
• Use Gain and Bias to Adjust the Output Signal Level of Terminal V1
You must stop the drive to adjust the output signal. Use this procedure to calibrate the drive:
1. View the F4-02 [Terminal V1 Gain] value on the keypad.
Terminal V1 will output a voltage = 100% of the monitor set in F4-01 [Terminal V1 Function Selection].
2. View the monitor connected to terminal V1 and adjust F4-02.
3. View the F4-05 [Terminal V1 Bias] value on the keypad.
Terminal V1 will output an analog signal = 100% of the parameter set in F4-01.
• Use Gain and Bias to Adjust the Output Signal Level of Terminal V2
You must stop the drive to adjust the output signal. Use this procedure to calibrate the drive:
1. View the F4-04 [Terminal V2 Gain] value on the keypad.
Terminal V2 will output a voltage = 100% of the monitor set in F4-03 [Terminal V2 Function Selection].
3. View the F4-06 [Terminal V2 Bias] value on the keypad.
The analog signal equal to 0% of the parameter being set in F4-03 will be output from terminal V2.
■ F4-01: Terminal V1 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-01 Terminal V1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set F4-01 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set F4-01 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• You cannot use all of the monitors in all of the control methods.
• When you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to 000 or 031. You can use this setting to adjust the V1 terminal output
from PLC through MEMOBUS/Modbus communications or a communications option.
■ F4-02: Terminal V1 Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-02 Terminal V1 Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0392) Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V1. Sets the analog signal output (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN level from the terminal V1 at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for monitoring items is
100%.
The maximum output voltage output from terminal V1 is ±10 V. Use F4-07 [Terminal V1 Signal Level] to set the
signal level.
Example settings:
When you use these settings, and the monitored output voltage is at 100% (drive rated current), the output voltage
of terminal V1 is 5 V (50% of 10 V). The output current is 200% of the drive rated current when terminal V1
outputs a maximum voltage of 10 V.
• F4-01 [Terminal V1 Function Selection] = 102 (U1-02: Output Frequency)
• F4-02 = 50.0%
• F4-05 [Terminal V1 Bias] = 0.0%
• F4-07 = 0 (0 V to 10 V)
■ F4-03: Terminal V2 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-03 Terminal V2 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103

12.7 F: Options
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set F4-03 = 103 to monitor U1-03 [Output Current].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set F4-03 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• When you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to 000 or 031. You can use this setting to adjust the V2 terminal output
from PLC through MEMOBUS/Modbus communications or a communications option.
■ F4-04: Terminal V2 Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-04 Terminal V2 Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0%
(0394) Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2. Sets the analog signal output (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN level from terminal V2 at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for monitoring items is 100%.
signal level.
Example settings:
When you use these settings, and the monitored output voltage is at 100% (drive rated current), the output voltage
of terminal V2 is 5 V (50% of 10 V). The output current is 200% of the drive rated current when terminal V2
outputs a maximum voltage of 10 V.
• F4-03 [Terminal V2 Function Selection] = 103 (U1-03: Output Current)
• F4-04 = 50.0%
• F4-06 [Terminal V2 Bias] = 0.0%
• F4-08 = 0 (0 V to 10 V)
■ F4-05: Terminal V1 Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-05 Terminal V1 Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0395) Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V1. When an output for monitoring (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN items is 0%, this parameter sets the analog signal output level from the V1 terminal as a
percentage of 10 V or 20 mA.
signal level.
■ F4-06: Terminal V2 Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-06 Terminal V2 Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0396) Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2. Set the level of the analog signal (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN sent from the V2 terminal at 10 V or 20 mA as 100% when an output for monitoring items is 0%.
signal level.
■ F4-07: Terminal V1 Signal Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-07 Terminal V1 Signal Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0397) Sets the output signal level for terminal V1. (0, 1)
0 : 0 to 10 V
1 : -10 to 10 V
Parameter Details
■ F4-08: Terminal V2 Signal Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0398) Sets the output signal level for terminal V2. (0, 1)
12

12.7 F: Options
0 : 0 to 10 V
1 : -10 to 10 V
◆ F5: Digital Output Option

F5 parameters set the output mode and function of output signals when you use digital output option card DO-A3.
When you install a DO-A3 to the drive, you can output isolated digital signals to monitor the drive operation
status.
• 6 points of photocoupler output (48 V, 50 mA or less)
• 2 points of relay contact output (250 Vac, 30 Vdc: 1 A or less)
Refer to the DO-A3 option manual for more information about how to install, wire, and set the DO-A3 card.
■ Use Parameters to Select Output Modes

Use parameter F5-09 [DO-A3 Output Mode Selection] to set signal output from the DO-A3 card.
Table 12.50 Details of F5-09 and the DO-A3 Terminal Output
F5-09 = 0 [Predefined F5-09 = 2 [Programmable
DO-A3 Terminal Block DO-A3 Terminal Name Individual Outputs] (Default) F5-09 = 1 [Binary Output] (F5-01 to F5-08)]
TB1 M1-M2 Zero speed detection in progress During run Depending on the setting of F5-07
[Terminal M1-M2 Function
Select]
M3-M4 During speed agreement Minor fault (excluding bb Depending on the setting of F5-08
[Baseblock]) [Terminal M3-M4 Function
Select]
TB2 P1-PC oC [Overcurrent], GF [Ground Coded output Depending on the setting of F5-01
Fault] Note: [Terminal P1-PC Function Select]
P2-PC ov [Overvoltage] Refer to Table 12.51 for more Depending on the setting of F5-02
information. [Terminal P2-PC Function Select]
P3-PC oL2 [Drive Overload] or oH2 Depending on the setting of F5-03

[External Overheat (H1-XX=B)] [Terminal P3-PC Function Select]
P4-PC Not used Depending on the setting of F5-04

[Terminal P4-PC Function Select]
P5-PC oS [Overspeed] Zero speed detection in progress Depending on the setting of F5-05
[Terminal P5-PC Function Select]
P6-PC oH, oH1 [Heatsink Overheat] or During speed agreement Depending on the setting of F5-06
oL1 [Motor Overload] [Terminal P6-PC Function Select]
Table 12.51 Binary Output [F5-09 = 1]

DO-A3 Terminal Block TB2
Coded Output (Binary) Description
Terminal P1-PC Terminal P2-PC Terminal P3-PC Terminal P4-PC
0 No fault 0 0 0 0
1 oC [Overcurrent], GF 1 0 0 0
[Ground Fault]
2 ov [Overvoltage] 0 1 0 0
3 oL2 [Drive Overload] 1 1 0 0
4 oH, oH1 [Heatsink 0 0 1 0

Overheat]
5 oS [Overspeed] 1 0 1 0
6 Not used 0 1 1 0
7 rr [Dynamic Braking 1 1 1 0
Transistor Fault], rH
[Braking Resistor Overheat]
8 EF1 to EF8 [External Fault 0 0 0 1

(Terminals S1 to S8)]
9 CPFxx, oFAxx, oFbxx, 1 0 0 1

oFCxx [Drive Hardware
Fault] *1
A oL1 [Motor Overload] 0 1 0 1
B Not used 1 1 0 1
C Uv1 [DC Bus 0 0 1 1

Undervoltage], Uv2
[Control Power
Undervoltage], Uv3 [Soft
Charge Answerback Fault]

12.7 F: Options
DO-A3 Terminal Block TB2

Coded Output (Binary) Description
Terminal P1-PC Terminal P2-PC Terminal P3-PC Terminal P4-PC
D dEv [Speed Deviation] 1 0 1 1
E PGo [Encoder (PG) 0 1 1 1

Feedback Loss]
F Not used 1 1 1 1
*1 The “xx” characters are different for different faults.
■ Digital Output Option Terminal Output Selection

Refer to “H2: Multi-function Digital Output” for more information about the functions that output from the
terminals when F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode Selection = Programmable (F5-01 to F5-08)]. Use F5-01 to F5-
08 to set the output items.
No. Name Range Default
F5-01 Terminal P1-PC Function Select 0 - 192 0: During Run
F5-02 Terminal P2-PC Function Select 0 - 192 1: Zero Speed
F5-03 Terminal P3-PC Function Select 0 - 192 2: Speed Agree 1
F5-04 Terminal P4-PC Function Select 0 - 192 4: Frequency Detection 1
F5-05 Terminal P5-PC Function Select 0 - 192 6: Drive Ready
F5-06 Terminal P6-PC Function Select 0 - 192 37: During Frequency Output
F5-07 Terminal M1-M2 Function Select 0 - 192 F: Not Used
F5-08 Terminal M3-M4 Function Select 0 - 192 F: Not Used
■ F5-01: Terminal P1-PC Function Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F5-01 Terminal P1-PC Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0399) Select Sets the function of terminal P1-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
Selection = Programmable (F5-01 to F5-08)] to enable this function.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(039A) Select Sets the function of terminal P2-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(039B) Select Sets the function of terminal P3-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(039C) Select Sets the function of terminal P4-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(039D) Select Sets the function of terminal P5-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
12

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(039E) Select Sets the function of terminal P6-PC on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
■ F5-07: Terminal M1-M2 Function Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F5-07 Terminal M1-M2 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(039F) Select Sets the function of terminal M3-M2 on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
■ F5-08: Terminal M3-M4 Function Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F5-08 Terminal M3-M4 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(03A0) Select Sets the function of terminal M3-M4 on the DO-A3 option. Set F5-09 = 2 [DO-A3 Output Mode (0 - 1A7)
■ F5-09: DO-A3 Output Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F5-09 DO-A3 Output Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03A1) Selection Sets the output mode of signals from the DO-A3 option. (0 - 2)
Refer to Table 12.50 for more information.

0 : Predefined Individual Outputs
1 : Binary Output
2 : Programmable (F5-01 to F5-08)
◆ F6, F7: Communication Options

F6 and F7 parameters set the basic communication settings and method of fault detection for the communication
option. The communication option parameters include common option parameters and communication protocol-
specific parameters.
The following table lists the parameters that you need to set for each communication option.
Refer to the technical manual for each communication option for more information about how to install, wire, and
configure the necessary details before you start communication.
Table 12.52 Correspondence Between Communication Protocols and Parameters (SI-C3, SI-T3, SI-ET3, SI-P3, SI-S3,
and SI-ES3)
CC-Link MECHATROLINK-II MECHATROLINK-III PROFIBUS-DP CANopen EtherCAT
Parameter
SI-C3 SI-T3 SI-ET3 SI-P3 SI-S3 SI-ES3
F6-01 - F6-03 x x x x x x
F6-04 x - - - - -
F6-06 - F6-08 x x x x x x
F6-10, F6-11 x - - - - -
F6-14 x x x x x x
F6-16 x x x x x x
F6-20, F6-21 - x x - - -
F6-22 - x - - - -
F6-23 - F6-26 - x x - - -
F6-30 - F6-32 - - - x - -

12.7 F: Options
CC-Link MECHATROLINK-II MECHATROLINK-III PROFIBUS-DP CANopen EtherCAT

Parameter
SI-C3 SI-T3 SI-ET3 SI-P3 SI-S3 SI-ES3
F6-35, F6-36 - - - - x -
F6-45 - F6-49 - - - - - -
F6-50 - F6-53 - - - - - -
F6-54 - - - - - -
F6-55 to F6-71 - - - - - -
F7-01 - F7-15 - - - - - -
F7-16 - - - - - -
F7-17 - F7-42 - - - - - -
F7-60 - F7-79 - - - x - -
Table 12.53 Correspondence Between Communication Protocols and Parameters (SI-N3, SI-W3, SI-EM3, SI-EP3, and
SI-EN3)
DeviceNet LonWorks Modbus TCP/IP PROFINET EtherNet/IP
Parameter
SI-N3 SI-W3 SI-EM3 SI-EP3 SI-EN3
F6-01 - F6-03 x x x x x
F6-04 - - - - -
F6-06 - F6-08 x x x x x
F6-10, F6-11 - - - - -
F6-14 x x x x x
F6-16 x x x x x
F6-20, F6-21 - - - - -
F6-22 - - - - -
F6-23 - F6-26 - - - - -
F6-30 - F6-32 - - - - -
F6-35, F6-36 - - - - -
F6-45 - F6-49 - - - - -
F6-50 - F6-53 x - - - -
F6-54 x - - - x
F6-55 to F6-71 x - - - -
F7-01 - F7-15 - - x x x
F7-16 - - x - -
F7-17 - F7-42 - - - x x
F7-60 - F7-79 - - - - -
Table 12.54 Correspondence Between Communication Protocols and Parameters (JOHB-SMP3)

EtherNet/IP PROFINET Modbus TCP/IP EtherCAT
Parameter
JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3
F6-01 - F6-03 x x x x
F6-04 - - - -
F6-06 - F6-08 x x x x
F6-10, F6-11 - - - -
F6-14 x x x x
F6-16 x x x x
Parameter Details
F6-20, F6-21 - - - -
F6-22 - - - -
F6-23 - F6-26 - - - -
F6-30 - F6-32 - - - -
F6-35, F6-36 - - - -
12

12.7 F: Options
EtherNet/IP PROFINET Modbus TCP/IP EtherCAT

Parameter
JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3 JOHB-SMP3
F6-45 - F6-49 - - - -
F6-50 - F6-53 - - - -
F6-54 x - - -
F6-55 to F6-71 - - - -
F7-01 - F7-15 x x x -
F7-16 - - x -
F7-17 - F7-42 x x - -
F7-60 - F7-79 - - - -
■ Gateway Mode
Note:
When you use Gateway Mode, do not install the communication option in slave drives. If you install a communication option in a slave
drive, the drive commands and responses will not synchronize.
In gateway mode, you can use one communication option to communicate with more than one drive.
You can use one communication option to connect a maximum of five drives to the field bus communications.
Refer to Figure 12.79 for more information.
When you install a communication option on the master drive, you can use the RS-485 communication card to
transmit data to slave drives that do not have a communication option.
Figure 12.79 Connection Examples in Gateway Mode

Table 12.55 Specification
Item Specification
Applicable options All options that support the MEMOBUS access function (for example, PROFIBUS-DP, PROFINET, EtherNet/IP, EtherCAT)
Number of connected drives Maximum: 5 units
Communication specifications MEMOBUS/Modbus (RTUmode) communications
Commands/responses The controller can send this data to each drive (Drive 0 to Drive 4):
• Control commands: Run commands and frequency references
• Control responses: Output frequency and drive status (during run, faults)
• Read and write parameters
• Read monitors
Synchronous control Not supported
Note:
• The communication speed in gateway mode is slower than the speed in fieldbus communications. Make sure that the speed is
acceptable for your system.
• Response speed with the communication option is slower than with point-to-point communications.
• Set H5-02 [Communication Speed Selection] and H5-03 [Communication Parity Selection] to the same value on the master drive and
slave drives.
WARNING! Injury to Personnel. Separately prepare safety protection equipment and systems, for example fast stop switches. If
the motor does not stop correctly from the disconnection of communications cable or electrical interference, it can cause serious
injury.
Setting Gateway Mode
Table 12.56shows sample settings to connect 4 slave drives:

12.7 F: Options
Table 12.56 Sample Settings for Using Gateway Mode

H5-02
[Communication b1-01
F6-16 H5-01 Speed Selection] H5-06 H5-09 b1-02
[Frequency
[Drive Node [Drive Transmit [CE Detection [Run Command
[Gateway Mode] Address] *1 H5-03 Wait Time] Time] Reference Selection 1]
[Communication Selection 1]
Parity Selection]
Drive 0
1 - 4 *2 1F (Default) *5 5 ms (Default) *6 ≥ 2.0 s *7 3 [Option PCB] 3 [Option PCB]
(Master Drive)
2 [Memobus/ 2 [Memobus/
Drive 1 Modbus Modbus
0 01 *3 *4 *5 5 ms (Default) *6 ≥ 0.9 s *7 Communications] Communications]
(Slave Drive)
*8 *8
0 02 *3 *4 *5 5 ms (Default) *6 ≥ 0.9 s *7
(Slave Drive) Communications] Communications]
*8 *8
0 03 *3 *4 *5 5 ms (Default) *6 ≥ 0.9 s *7
*8 *8
0 04 *3 *4 *5 5 ms (Default) *6 ≥ 0.9 s *7
*8 *8
*1 Re-energize the drive to apply the new settings.

*2 Specify the number of slave drives you will connect.
*3 Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
*4 Set a slave address that is different from other slave devices.
*5 Enter the same value that you use for the master drive.
*6 To correctly detect the response timeout, do not change the value of H5-06 from the default value.
*7 Set H5-09 ≥ 0.9. When H5-09 < 0.9, the drive will detect CE [Modbus Communication Error] before it detects a response timeout.
*8 On each slave drive, set b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1] and b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1] to 2 [Memobus/Modbus
Communications].
An Overview of Gateway Mode
When in gateway mode, the drive will operate as shown in Table 12.57.
A - Controller C - Master Drive (Drive 0)

B - Communication option D - Slave Drives (Drives 1 to 4)
Table 12.57 Operation in Gateway Mode
Master Drive (Drive 0) to Slave Drives (Drives 1 to
Controller to Communication Option Communication Option to Master Drive (Drive 0) 4)
• The controller and card communicate in the format of Field bus communication data is written to and read from • Uses MEMOBUS communications.
each field bus communications protocol. the special registers of Drive 0. • Drive 0 sends data from its special registers to Drives
• Drive 0 sends commands and monitors through normal 1 to 4.
field bus communications.
• The special registers of Drive 0 use read and write to
send commands to and monitor Drives 1 to 4.
Note:
Energize the slave drive before you energize the master drive. If you energize the master drive first, the drive detects CE [Modbus
Communication Error].
Parameter Details
12

12.7 F: Options
Operations at the Time of Communication Error
Error
Communication Error Operation
Codes
• Master drive
Detects bUS [Option Communication Error] and operates as specified by F6-01 [Communication Error Selection].
• Slave drive
Detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] and operates as specified by H5-04 [Communication Error Stop Method].
From controller to bUS Note:
communication option • After error detection, each drive can continue the operation specified by the last received command if the F6-01 and H5-04 settings
agree. Because the controller cannot stop the operation, you must supply a stopping method, for example an emergency stop
switch.
• If you set H5-05 = 0 [Comm Fault Detection Selection = Disabled], the drive will not detect CE. The H5-04 setting does not have
an effect.
• Master drive
From communication Detects oFAxx and coasts to stop.
option to master drive oFAxx
• Slave drive
Detects hLCE [High Level Communication Errors] and coasts to stop.
The master drive stops communicating with the slave drive in these conditions: Reset the fault to restart communication.
The slave drive detects CE after H5-09 [CE Detection Time] is expired.Then it operates in as specified with H5-04 [Communication
From master drive to CE Error Stop Method].
slave drive
• A message error occurred in the send data from the slave drive 10 consecutive times.
• Response from the slave drive timed out 10 consecutive times.
Gateway Special Register Specification

Table 12.58 Command Data
Register
Description
No. (Hex.)
Command source update This flag enables command updates.
To input the Run command and frequency reference at the same time, write all
bit 0 Drive 1 Update Command Enabled commands, then change the bit value from 0 to 1.
bit 1 Drive 2 Update Command Enabled

15C5 bit 2 Drive 3 Update Command Enabled
bit 3 Drive 4 Update Command Enabled
bit 4 Update Register Access Command Enabled
bit 5 - F Reserved
Run Command (Drive 1)
H5-12 = 0: FWD/Stop
0 = Stop
1 = Forward run
bit 0
H5-12 = 1: Run/Stop
0 = Stop
1 = Run
H5-12 = 0: REV/Stop
0 = Stop
1 = Reverse run
15C6 bit 1
H5-12 = 1: FWD/REV
0 = Forward run
1 = Reverse run
bit 2 External fault
bit 3 Fault Reset
bit 4 ComRef
bit 5 ComCtrl
bit 6 - F Reserved
15C7 Frequency Reference (Drive 1) The unit of measure changes when o1-03 changes.
15C8 Run Command (Drive 2) Refer to “15C6: Run Command (Drive 1)” for more information.
15C9 Frequency Reference (Drive 2) The unit of measure changes when o1-03 changes.
15CA Run Command (Drive 3) Refer to “15C6: Run Command (Drive 1)” for more information.
15CB Frequency Reference (Drive 3) The unit of measure changes when o1-03 changes.
15CC Run Command (Drive 4) Refer to “15C6: Run Command (Drive 1)” for more information.
15CD Frequency Reference (Drive 4) The unit of measure changes when o1-03 changes.

12.7 F: Options
Register Description
No. (Hex.)
Slave Address for Reg. Access + Read/Write
Slave address
0: Broadcast Messages (MEMOBUS)
bit 0 1: Drive 1
When bit 0 to 3 = 0, access is enabled for broadcast messages only.
bit 1 2: Drive 2
bit 2 When bit 0 to 3 = 5, access is enabled for Run command and frequency reference
15CE 3: Drive 3 broadcast messages only. Drive 0 is excluded.
bit 3 4: Drive 4
5: Broadcast Messages (run command and frequency
reference)
bit 4 0: Read, 1: Write
bit 5 - F Reserved
15CF Register number
15D0 Data (write register)
Table 12.59 Monitor Data

No. (Hex.)
Drive Status (Drive 1)
bit 0 During Run
bit 1 During Reverse Run
bit 2 Drive ready
bit 3 Fault
bit 4 Frequency Reference Setting Fault 1: Upper/Lower Limit Fault
bit 5 No response from slave 1: Response has timed out.
15E7 bit 6 Communication Error 1: The drive detected a fault from a slave.
bit 7 No response from slave 10 consecutive attempts. 1: Timeout occurred 10 consecutive times.
bit 8 Communication fault occurred 10 consecutive times. 1: Fault has occurred from a slave 10 consecutive times.
bit 9 Receive broadcast command while drive is running 1: Drive operates as specified by the broadcast message command.
bit A Communication error with master drive 1: The slave cannot communicate with the master because of a communication error.
bit B - Reserved
D
bit E ComRef status
bit F ComCtrl status
The unit of measure changes when o1-03 changes.

Output frequency or frequency reference (Drive Status Bit 1: ON) Outputs when:
(Drive 1) • Normal operation: Output frequency
15E8
Drive Status Bit 4 = 0 [Output Frequency] • Drive detects Frequency Reference Setting Fault: Frequency reference when the error
Drive Status Bit 4 = 1 [Frequency Reference] occurs
Clears the value when the drive detects a communication error or communication stops.
15E9 Drive Status (Drive 2) Refer to "15E7: Drive Status (Drive 1)" for more information.

Outputs when:
15EA Output frequency or frequency reference (Drive Status Bit 4: ON) • Normal operation: Output frequency
(Drive 2) • Drive detects Frequency Reference Setting Fault: Frequency reference when the error
occurs
15EB Drive Status (Drive 3) Refer to "15E7: Drive Status (Drive 1)" for more information.

Outputs when:
Output frequency or frequency reference (Drive Status Bit 4: ON) • Normal operation: Output frequency
15EC (Drive 3) • Drive detects Frequency Reference Setting Fault: Frequency reference when the error
Parameter Details
occurs
15ED Drive Status (Drive 4) Refer to "15E7: Drive Status (Drive 1)" for more information.
12

12.7 F: Options
No. (Hex.)

Outputs when:
15EE Output frequency or frequency reference (Drive Status Bit 4: ON) • Normal operation: Output frequency
(Drive 4) • Drive detects Frequency Reference Setting Fault: Frequency reference when the error
occurs
Slave Address for Reg. Access + During MEMOBUS process &

ErrCode
bit 0
00H: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Complete
bit 1
02H: Register number not registered
bit 2
21H: Upper/Lower Limit Fault Note:
bit 3
22H: Write Mode Error If you change the access command before the MEMOBUS/Modbus access flag turns
bit 4
23H: Write performed during Uv on, the drive will not do the command from before.
bit 5
24H: Write performed while writing parameter settings
bit 6
FFH: During MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
bit 7
15EF
Slave address
0: Broadcast Messages (MEMOBUS)
bit 8 1: Drive 1
bit 9 2: Drive 2
bit A 3: Drive 3
4: Drive 4
5: Broadcast Messages (run command and frequency
reference)
bit B - Reserved
F
15F0 Register number
15F1 Data (write register)
■ F6-01: Communication Error Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-01 Communication Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03A2) Selection Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects bUS (0 - 5)
[Option Communication Error].
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows bUS and the drive continues operation at the current frequency reference.
Note:
Separately prepare safety protection equipment and systems, for example fast stop switches.
The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates.
4 : Alarm (Run at d1-04)
The keypad shows bUS and the drive continues operation at the speed set in d1-04 [Reference 4].
Note:
5 : Alarm - Ramp Stop
The drive stops the motor in the deceleration time set in C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1].
After you remove the bUS alarm, the motor will accelerate to the frequency reference you set before.

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-02: Comm External Fault (EF0) Detect

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-02 Comm External Fault (EF0) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03A3) Detect Sets the conditions at which EF0 [Option Card External Fault] is detected. (0, 1)
0 : Always Detected
1 : Detected during RUN Only
■ F6-03: Comm External Fault (EF0) Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-03 Comm External Fault (EF0) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03A4) Select Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects an (0 - 3)
EF0 [Option Card External Fault].
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows EF0 and the drive continues operation.
Note:
■ F6-04: bUS Error Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s
(03A5) Sets the delay time for the drive to detect bUS [Option Communication Error]. (0.0 - 5.0 s)
Note:
When you install an option card in the drive, the parameter value changes to 0.0 s.
■ F6-06: Torque Reference/Limit by Comm

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-06 Torque Reference/Limit by V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03A7) Comm Sets the function that enables and disables the torque reference and torque limit received from the (0, 1)
communication option.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ F6-07: Multi-Step Ref @ NetRef/ComRef

No. Default
Name Description
Parameter Details
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-07 Multi-Step Ref @ NetRef/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03A8) ComRef Sets the function that enables and disables the multi-step speed reference when the frequency (0, 1)
reference source is NetRef or ComRef (communication option card or MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications).
0 : Disable Multi-Step References

12

12.7 F: Options
When NetRef or ComRef are the frequency reference source, the multi-step speed reference (2-step speed to 16-
step speed references) and the Jog Frequency Reference (JOG command) are disabled.
1 : Enable Multi-Step References
When NetRef or ComRef are the frequency reference source, the multi-step speed reference (2-step speed through
16-step speed references) and the Jog Frequency Reference (JOG command) are enabled, and you can change the
■ F6-08: Comm Parameter Reset @Initialize

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-08 Comm Parameter Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(036A) @Initialize Sets the function to initialize F6-xx and F7-xx parameters when the drive is initialized with A1-03 (0, 1)
[Initialize Parameters].
0 : No Reset - Parameters Retained

1 : Reset Back to Factory Default
Note:
When you use A1-03 to initialize the drive, this setting will not change.
■ F6-10: CC-Link Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-10 CC-Link Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03B6) Sets the node address for CC-Link communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 64)
parameter setting.
Note:
Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not set this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings
will cause AEr [Station Address Setting Error] errors and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
When the only drive is connected, you can connect a maximum of 42 nodes. Follow these rules to connect devices
that are not drives:
• {(1 × a) + (2 × b) + (3 × c) + (4 × d)} ≤ 64
(a: number of units that occupies 1 node, b: number of units that occupies 2 nodes, c: number of units that
occupies 3 nodes, d: number of units that occupies 4 nodes)
• {(16 × A) + (54 × B) + (88 × C)} ≤ 2304
(A: number of remote I/O nodes (64 max.), B: number of remote device nodes (42 max.), C: number of local
nodes (26 max.))
■ F6-11: CC-Link Communication Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-11 CC-Link Communication V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03B7) Speed Sets the communication speed for CC-Link communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 4)
parameter setting.
0 : 156 kbps
1 : 625 kbps
2 : 2.5 Mbps
3 : 5 Mbps
4 : 10 Mbps
■ F6-14: BUS Error Auto Reset

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-14 BUS Error Auto Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03BB) Sets the automatic reset function for bUS [Option Communication Errors]. (0, 1)
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-15: Comm. Option Parameters Reload

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-15 Comm. Option Parameters V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B5B) Reload Sets the update method when you change F6-xx, F7-xx [Communication Options]. (0 - 2)
Note:
• Set F6-15 = 0, 1 to reload F6-xx, F7-xx.
• Set F6-15 = 0, 1 to reset the display on the keypad to 0.
Restart the drive to update parameters.
1 : Reload Now
The changed parameters are updated without restarting the drive.
2 : Cancel Reload Request
Cancels CyPo [Cycle Power to Accept Changes].
■ F6-16: Gateway Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-16 Gateway Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B8A) Sets the gateway mode operation and the number of connected slave drives. (0 to 4)
0 : Disabled
■ F6-20: MECHATROLINK Station Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-20 MECHATROLINK Station V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0021h
(036B) Address Sets the station address for MECHATROLINK communication. Restart the drive after you change (MECHATROLINK-II:
the parameter setting. 0020h - 003Fh,
MECHATROLINK-III:
0003h - 00EFh)
Note:
• The setting range changes if using MECHATROLINK-II or MECHATROLINK-III:
–MECHATROLINK-II (SI-T3) range: 20 to 3F
–MECHATROLINK-III (SI-ET3) range: 03 to EF
• Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses. Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr [Station
Address Setting Error] errors and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
• The drive detects AEr errors when the station address is 20 or 3F.
■ F6-21: MECHATROLINK Frame Size

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-21 MECHATROLINK Frame V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(036C) Size Sets the frame size for MECHATROLINK communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0, 1)
parameter setting.
0 : 32byte (M-2) / 64byte (M-3)

1 : 17byte (M-2) / 32byte (M-3)
Parameter Details
■ F6-22: MECHATROLINK Link Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-22 MECHATROLINK Link V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(036D) Speed Sets the communications speed for MECHATROLINK-II. Restart the drive after you change the (0, 1)
parameter setting. 12

12.7 F: Options
Note:
This parameter is only available with the MECHATROLINK-II option.
0 : 10 Mbps
1 : 4 Mbps
■ F6-23: MECHATROLINK Monitor Select (E)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-23 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000h
(036E) Monitor Select (E) Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL (drive operation control (0000h - FFFFh)
command) and INV_I/O (drive I/O control command). Restart the drive after you change the
parameter setting.
To enable the MEMOBUS register set in F6-23, set SEL_MON2/1 to 0EH or set SEL_MON3/4 and SEL_MON
5/6 to 0EH. Bytes of the response data enable the MEMOBUS register content that was set in F6-23.
■ F6-24: MECHATROLINK Monitor Select (F)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-24 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000h
(036F) Monitor Select (F) Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL (drive operation control (0000h - FFFFh)
command) and INV_I/O (drive I/O control command). Restart the drive after you change the
parameter setting.
To enable the MEMOBUS register set in F6-24, set SEL_MON2/1 to 0FH or set SEL_MON3/4 and SEL_MON
5/6 to 0FH. Bytes of the response data enable the MEMOBUS register content that was set F6-24.
■ F6-25: MECHATROLINK Watchdog Error Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-25 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03C9) Watchdog Error Sel Sets the method to stop the motor or let the motor continue operating when the drive detects an E5 (0 - 3)
[MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err].
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows E5, and the drive continues to operate.
Note:
■ F6-26: MECHATROLINK Allowable No of Err

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-26 MECHATROLINK V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2
(03CA) Allowable No of Err Sets the number of times that the option must detect a bUS alarm to cause a bUS [Option (2 - 10 times)
Communication Error].

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-30: PROFIBUS-DP Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-30 PROFIBUS-DP Node V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03CB) Address Sets the node address for PROFIBUS-DP communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 125)
parameter setting.
Note:
• Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses.
• Node addresses 0, 1, and 2 are usually reserved for control, maintenance, and device self-diagnosis.
■ F6-31: PROFIBUS-DP Clear Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-31 PROFIBUS-DP Clear V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03CC) Mode Selection Sets what the drive will do after it receives the Clear Mode command. (0, 1)
0 : Reset
Resets drive settings, for example frequency reference and I/O settings.
1 : Hold Previous State
The drive keeps the same status as before it received the command.
■ F6-32: PROFIBUS-DP Data Format Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-32 PROFIBUS-DP Data V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03CD) Format Select Sets the data format of PROFIBUS-DP communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 5)
parameter setting.
Note:
The H5-11 [Comm ENTER Command Mode] setting makes the RAM enter command necessary or not necessary to write parameters
over network communication. When F6-32 = 0, 1, or 2, the H5-11 setting does not have an effect. The RAM enter command is always
necessary to write parameters.
0 : PPO Type
1 : Conventional
2 : PPO (bit0)
This function operates when bit 0 and bit 4 in the register STW have values of 1 (operate). Refer to the
PROFIBUS-DP communication manual for more information.
3 : PPO (Enter)
4 : Conventional (Enter)
5 : PPO (bit0, Enter)
This function operates when bit 0 and bit 4 in the register STW have values of 1 (operate). Refer to the
PROFIBUS-DP communication manual for more information.
■ F6-35: CANopen Node ID Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-35 CANopen Node ID V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D0) Selection Sets the node address for CANopen communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 126)
parameter setting.
Note:
Be sure to set an address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not set this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings will
cause AEr [Station Address Setting Error] errors and the L.ERR LED on the option will come on.
Parameter Details
■ F6-36: CANopen Communication Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-36 CANopen Communication V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D1) Speed Sets the CANopen communications speed. Restart the drive after you change the parameter (0 - 8)
setting. 12

12.7 F: Options
0 : Auto-detection
The drive detects the network communication speed and automatically adjusts the communications speed.
1 : 10 kbps
2 : 20 kbps
3 : 50 kbps
4 : 125 kbps
5 : 250 kbps
6 : 500 kbps
7 : 800 kbps
8 : 1 Mbps
■ F6-45: BACnet Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-45 BACnet Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(02FB) Sets the node address for BACnet communication. (0 - 127)
■ F6-46: BACnet Baud Rate

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-46 BACnet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(02FC) Sets the BACnet communications speed. (0 - 8)
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps
■ F6-47: Rx to Tx Wait Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-47 Rx to Tx Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms
(02FD) Sets the wait time for the drive to receive and send BACnet communication. (5 - 65 ms)
■ F6-48: BACnet Device Object Identifier0

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-48 BACnet Device Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02FE) Identifier0 Sets the last word of BACnet communication addresses. (0 - FFFF)
■ F6-49: BACnet Device Object Identifier1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-49 BACnet Device Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02FF) Identifier1 Sets the last word of BACnet communication addresses. (0 - 3F)

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-50: DeviceNet MAC Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-50 DeviceNet MAC Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03C1) Sets the MAC address for DeviceNet communication. Restart the drive after you change the (0 - 64)
parameter setting.
Note:
Be sure to set a MAC address that is different than all other node addresses. Do not set this parameter to 0. Incorrect parameter settings
will cause AEr [Station Address Setting Error] errors and the MS LED on the option will flash.
■ F6-51: DeviceNet Baud Rate

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-51 DeviceNet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03C2) Sets the DeviceNet communications speed. Restart the drive after you change the parameter (0 - 4)
setting.
0 : 125 kbps
1 : 250 kbps
2 : 500 kbps
3 : Adjustable from Network
The controller sets the communications speed.
4 : Detect Automatically
The drive detects the network communication speed and automatically adjusts the communications speed.
■ F6-52: DeviceNet PCA Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-52 DeviceNet PCA Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 21
(03C3) Sets the format of data that the DeviceNet communication master sends to the drive. (0 - 255)
Note:
If F6-52 [DeviceNet PCA Setting] and F6-53 [DeviceNet PPA Setting] are not correct, the value is reset to default.
■ F6-53: DeviceNet PPA Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-53 DeviceNet PPA Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 71
(03C4) Sets the format of data that the drive sends to the DeviceNet communication master. (0 - 255)
Note:
If F6-52 [DeviceNet PCA Setting] and F6-53 [DeviceNet PPA Setting] are not correct, the value is reset to default.
■ F6-54: DeviceNet Idle Fault Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-54 DeviceNet Idle Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03C5) Detection If the drive does not receive data from the DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP master, this parameter sets (0 - 4)
the function to detect EF0 [Option Card External Fault].
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled, No Fault Detection
This will not trigger EF0.
2 : Vendor Specific
Parameter Details
3 : RUN Forward
4 : RUN Reverse
12

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-55: DeviceNet Baud Rate Monitor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-55 DeviceNet Baud Rate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03C6) Monitor Sets the function to see the actual DeviceNet communications speed using the keypad. This (0 - 2)
parameter functions as a monitor only.
0 : 125 kbps
1 : 250 kbps
2 : 500 kbps
■ F6-56: DeviceNet Speed Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-56 DeviceNet Speed Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D7) Sets the speed scale for DeviceNet communication. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-57: DeviceNet Current Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-57 DeviceNet Current Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D8) Sets the current scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-58: DeviceNet Torque Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-58 DeviceNet Torque Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03D9) Sets the torque scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-59: DeviceNet Power Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-59 DeviceNet Power Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03DA) Sets the power scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-60: DeviceNet Voltage Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-60 DeviceNet Voltage Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03DB) Sets the voltage scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-61: DeviceNet Time Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-61 DeviceNet Time Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03DC) Sets the time scale of the DeviceNet communication master. (-15 - +15)
■ F6-62: DeviceNet Heartbeat Interval

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-62 DeviceNet Heartbeat V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03DD) Interval Sets the heartbeat for DeviceNet communication. Set this parameter to 0 to disable the heartbeat (0 - 10)
function.

12.7 F: Options
■ F6-63: DeviceNet Network MAC ID

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-63 DeviceNet Network MAC V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03DE) ID Sets the function to see the actual DeviceNet MAC address using the keypad. This parameter (0 - 63)
functions as a monitor only.
■ F6-64 to F6-67: Dynamic Out Assembly 109 Param1 to 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-64 to F6-67 Dynamic Out Assembly V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000H
(03DF - 03E2) 109 Param 1 to 4 Sets Configurable Outputs 1 to 4 written to the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
■ F6-68 to F6-71: Dynamic In Assembly 159 Param 1 to 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-68 to F6-71 Dynamic In Assembly 159 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000H
(03E3, 03E4, Param 1 to 4 Sets Configurable Inputs 1 to 4 read from the MEMOBUS register. (0000H - FFFFH)
03C7, and 03C8)
■ F6-72: PowerLink Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F6-72 PowerLink Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(081B) Sets the node ID for PowerLink communication. (0 - 255)
■ F7-01: IP Address 1
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-01 IP Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 192
(03E5) Sets the first octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. Restart the (0 - 255)
drive after you change this parameter.
Note:
• Use parameters F7-01 to F7-04 [IP Address 1 to 4] to set the IP Address. Be sure to set a different IP address for each drive on the
network.
• Also set parameters F7-05 to F7-12 [Subnet Mask 1 to 4, Gateway Address 1 to 4].
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03E6) Sets the second octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. Restart the (0 - 255)
Note:
network.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
(03E7) Sets the third octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. Restart the (0 - 255)
12

12.7 F: Options
Note:
network.
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03E8) Sets the fourth octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network. Restart the (0 - 255)
Note:
network.
■ F7-05: Subnet Mask 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-05 Subnet Mask 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 255
(03E9) Sets the first octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03EA) Sets the second octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03EB) Sets the third octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03EC) Sets the fourth octet of the subnet mask of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
■ F7-09: Gateway Address 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-09 Gateway Address 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 192
(03ED) Sets the first octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03EE) Sets the second octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03EF) Sets the third octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(03F0) Sets the fourth octet of the gateway address of the connected network. (0 - 255)
Note:
■ F7-13: Address Mode at Startup

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-13 Address Mode at Startup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2
(03F1) Sets the method to set option card IP addresses. (0 - 2)
0 : Static
1 : BOOTP
2 : DHCP
Note:
• The following setting values are available when using the PROFINET communication option card (SI-EP3).
–0: Static
–2: DCP
• When F7-13 = 0, set parameters F7-01 to F7-12 [IP Address 1 to Gateway Address 4] to set the IP Address. Be sure to set a different
IP address for each drive on the network.
■ F7-14: Duplex Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-14 Duplex Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(03F2) Sets the duplex mode setting method. (0 - 8)
0 : Half/Half
1 : Auto/Auto
2 : Full/Full
3 : Half/Auto
Port 1 is set to “Half” and port 2 is set to “Auto”.
Parameter Details
4 : Half/Full
Port 1 is set to “Half” and port 2 is set to “Full”.
5 : Auto/Half
Port 1 is set to “Auto” and port 2 is set to “Half”.
6 : Auto/Full 12

12.7 F: Options
Port 1 is set to “Auto” and port 2 is set to “Full”.

7 : Full/Half
Port 1 is set to “Full” and port 2 is set to “Half”.
8 : Full/Auto
Port 1 is set to “Full” and port 2 is set to “Auto”.
■ F7-15: Communication Speed Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-15 Communication Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10
(03F3) Selection Sets the communications speed. (10, 100 - 102)
10 : 10/10 Mbps
100 : 100/100 Mbps
101 : 10/100 Mbps
102 : 100/10 Mbps
Note:
Set this parameter when F7-14 = 0 or 2 [Duplex Mode Selection = Half/Half or Full/Full].
■ F7-16: Timeout Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-16 Timeout Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(03F4) Sets the detection time for a communications timeout. (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Note:
Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the connection timeout function.
■ F7-17: EtherNet/IP Speed Scaling Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-17 EtherNet/IP Speed Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03F5) Factor Sets the scaling factor for the speed monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
■ F7-18: EtherNet/IP Current Scale Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-18 EtherNet/IP Current Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03F6) Factor Sets the scaling factor for the output current monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
■ F7-19: EtherNet/IP Torque Scale Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-19 EtherNet/IP Torque Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03F7) Factor Sets the scaling factor for the torque monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
■ F7-20: EtherNet/IP Power Scaling Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-20 EtherNet/IP Power Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03F8) Factor Sets the scaling factor for the power monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
■ F7-21: EtherNet/IP Voltage Scale Factor

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-21 EtherNet/IP Voltage Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03F9) Factor Sets the scaling factor for the voltage monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)

12.7 F: Options
■ F7-22: EtherNet/IP Time Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-22 EtherNet/IP Time Scaling V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03FA) Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in the EtherNet/IP Class ID 2AH Object. (-15 - +15)
■ F7-23 to F7-32: Dynamic Out Param 1 to 10 for CommCard

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-23 to F7-27 Dynamic Out Param 1 to 10 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(03FB - 03FF) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Output Assembly 116. The drive writes the values from
F7-28 to F7-32 Output Assembly 116 to the MEMOBUS/Modbus address register that is stored for each
parameter. The drive will not write the values from Output Assembly 116 to the registers when
(0370 - 0374) the MEMOBUS/Modbus address is 0. When you use a ProfiNet option, set F7-23 to F7-27 to
configurable Output 1-5.
■ F7-33 to F7-42: Dynamic In Param 1 to 10 for CommCard

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-33 to F7-42 Dynamic In Param 1 to 10 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0375 - 037E) for CommCard When you use an Ethernet/IP option, sets Input Assembly 166. The drive sends the values from
the MEMOBUS/Modbus address registers stored for each parameter to Input Assembly 166. The
drive returns the default register value for the option card when the MEMOBUS/Modbus address
is 0 and the value sent to Input Assembly 166 is not defined. When you use a ProfiNet option, set
F7-33 to F7-37 to configurable inputs 1-5.
■ F7-60: PZD1 Write (Control Word)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-60 PZD1 Write (Control Word) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0780) When you use a Profibus option, set the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD1 (PPO output).
PZD1 (PPO output) functions as the STW when F7-60 = 0 to 2.
■ F7-61: PZD2 Write (Frequency Reference)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-61 PZD2 Write (Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0781) Reference) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD2 (PPO output).
PZD2 (PPO output) functions as the HSW when F7-61 = 0 to 2.
■ F7-62: PZD3 Write

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-62 PZD3 Write V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0782) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD3 (PPO output). A
value of 0, 1, or 2 will disable the PZD3 (PPO output) write operation to the MEMOBUS/Modbus
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.
12

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0789) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD10 (PPO output).
A value of 0, 1, or 2 will disable the PZD10 (PPO output) write operation to the MEMOBUS/
Modbus register.
■ F7-70: PZD1 Read (Status Word)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-70 PZD1 Read (Status Word) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(078A) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD1 (PPO input).
PZD1 (PPO input) functions as the ZSW when F7-70 = 0.
■ F7-71: PZD2 Read (Output Frequency)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-71 PZD2 Read (Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(078B) Frequency) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD2 (PPO input).
PZD2 (PPO input) functions as the HIW when F7-71 = 0.
■ F7-72: PZD3 Read

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
F7-72 PZD3 Read V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(078C) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD3 (PPO input). A
value of 0 will disable the PZD3 (PPO input) load operation from the MEMOBUS/Modbus
register.

12.7 F: Options

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(078D) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD4 (PPO input). A
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(078E) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD5 (PPO input). A
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(078F) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD6 (PPO input). A
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0790) When you use a Profibus option, sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus address for PZD7 (PPO input). A
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
register.
Parameter Details
12


H parameters are used to assign functions to external input and output terminals.
◆ H1: Digital Inputs

H1 Parameters set the MFDI terminal functions.
■ H1-01 to H1-08 Terminal S1 to S8 Function Selection

The drive has 8 MFDI terminals. Refer to Table 12.60 for drive default settings and functions.
Table 12.60 MFDI Default Settings and Functions
No. Name Default Function
H1-01 Terminal S1 Function Selection 40 (F) *1 Forward RUN (2-Wire)
H1-02 Terminal S2 Function Selection 41 (F) *1 Reverse RUN (2-Wire)
H1-03 Terminal S3 Function Selection 24 External Fault (NO-Always-Coast)
H1-04 Terminal S4 Function Selection 14 Fault Reset
H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Selection 3 (0) *1 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
H1-06 Terminal S6 Function Selection 4 (3) *1 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
H1-07 Terminal S7 Function Selection 6 (4) *1 Jog Reference Selection
H1-08 Terminal S8 Function Selection 8 Baseblock Command (N.O.)
*1 The value in parentheses identifies the default setting when you set A1-03 = 3330 [Initialize Parameters = 3-Wire Initialization].
Refer to the Table 12.61 and use H1-xx [MFDI Function Select] to set the function.
Table 12.61 MFDI Setting Values
Setting Value Function Ref. Setting Value Function Ref.
0 *1 3-Wire Sequence 842 19 PID Disable 850
1 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection 843 1A Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 850
2 External Reference 1/2 Selection 843 1B Programming Lockout 850
3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 843 1E Reference Sample Hold 851
4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 843 20 to 2F *1 External Fault 851
5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 844 30 PID Integrator Reset 852
6 Jog Reference Selection 844 31 PID Integrator Hold 852
7 Accel/Decel Time Selection 1 844 32 Multi-Step Speed Reference 4 852
8 *1 Baseblock Command (N.O.) 844 34 PID Soft Starter Disable 852
9 *1 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 844 35 PID Input (Error) Invert 853
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold 845 3E PID Setpoint Selection 1 853
B Overheat Alarm (oH2) 845 3F PID Setpoint Selection 2 853
C Analog Terminal Enable Selection 845 40 *1 Forward RUN (2-Wire) 853
D Ignore Speed Fdbk (V/f w/o Enc) 845 41 *1 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) 853
E ASR Integral Reset 845 42 *1 Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2) 854
F Not Used 845 43 *1 FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2) 854
10 Up Command 846 44 Add Offset Frequency 1 (d7-03) 854
11 Down Command 847 45 Add Offset Frequency 2 (d7-03) 854
12 *1 Forward Jog 848 46 Add Offset Frequency 3 (d7-03) 854
13 *1 Reverse Jog 848 47 Node Setup (CANopen) 854
14 Fault Reset 848 60 DC Injection Braking Command 855
15 *1 Fast Stop (N.O.) 848 61 Speed Search from Fmax 855
16 Motor 2 Selection 849 62 Speed Search from Fref 855
17 *1 Fast Stop (N.C.) 849 63 Field Weakening 855
18 Timer Function 850 65 *1 KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate (N.C.) 855

66 *1 KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate (N.O.) 856 7B *1 KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.O.) 859
67 Communications Test Mode 856 7C *1 Short Circuit Braking (N.O.) 859
68 High Slip Braking (HSB) Activate 856 7D *1 Short Circuit Braking (N.C.) 860
6A Drive Enable 856 7E Reverse Rotation Identifier 860
71 Torque Control 856 7F PID Bi-Directional Enable 860
72 Zero Servo 857 90 to 97 *1 DWEZ Digital Inputs 1 to 8 860
75 Up 2 Command 857 9F DWEZ Disable 860
76 Down 2 Command 858 101 - 19F Inverse Inputs of 1 to 9F

Sets the function of the selected MFDI to operate 861
77 ASR Gain (C5-03) Select 859 inversely. To select the function for inverse input,
enter two digits 01 to 9F for the “xx” in ”1xx”.
78 Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert 859
7A *1 KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.C.) 859
*1 Inverse input is not available.
■ MEMOBUS/Modbus MFDI 1 to 3 Function Selection

You can set the function for the MFDI to MEMOBUS register bit 0 to 2 of [15C0 (Hex.)]. Use H1-40 to H1-42
[Extend MFDI Function Selection] to select the function.
Note:
• Refer to H1-xx “MFDI setting values” for the setting values of the MFDI.
• You cannot set values 0 [3-Wire Sequence] and 20 to 2F [External Fault] for H1-40 to H1-42.
• When you will not useH1-40 to H1-42, set them to F [Not Used].
• You cannot set MFDI for digital input option DI-A3 at the same time as function selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus MFDI 1 to 3.
■ H1-01: Terminal S1 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H1-01 Terminal S1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40
Note:
The default setting is F when you initialize the drive for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-03 = 3330].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:
The default setting is F when you initialize the drive for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-03 = 3330].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
12


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:
The default setting is 0 when the drive is initialized for 3-Wire Initialization [A1-03 = 3330].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
■ H1-21: Terminal S1 Function Select 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H1-21 Terminal S1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
When MFDI terminal S1 activates, it will operate the function set to H1-01 [Terminal S1 Function Selection] and
the function set to H1-21 at the same time.
When the setting value is F, the function is disabled.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0B71) Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S2. (1 - 19F)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

■ H1-24: Terminal S4 Function Selection 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
the unction set to H1-28 at the same time.
■ H1-40: Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 Input Func

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H1-40 Mbus Reg 15C0h bit0 Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0B54) Func Sets MFDI function to set to bit 0 of the MEMOBUS register 15C0 (Hex.). (1 - 19F)
12


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
◆ Multi-Function Digital Input Setting Values

Selects a function set with H1-01 to H1-08.
■ 0: 3-Wire Sequence
Setting Value Function Description
0 3-Wire Sequence V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the direction of motor rotation for 3-wire sequence.
If the 3-wire sequence is set to a terminal that is not MFDI terminals S1 and S2, these terminals will be the input
terminals for Forward run/Reverse run command. The drive will automatically set terminal S1 to Run command
(RUN) and terminal S2 to Stop command (STOP).
When terminal S1 (Run command) activates for 1 ms minimum, the drive rotates the motor. When terminal S2
(Stop command) deactivates, the drive stops. When terminal Sx that is set in 3-wire sequence deactivates, the
drive operates in the forward direction, and when it activates, the drive operates in the reverse direction.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Set the MFDI parameters before you close control circuit switches. Incorrect Run/Stop
circuit sequence settings can cause serious injury or death from moving equipment.
Figure 12.80 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Example

.
Figure 12.81 3-Wire Sequence Time Chart

Note:
• To input the Run command, activate the terminal for 1 ms minimum.
• The default setting for b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] is 0 [Disregard existing RUN command]. If you enable the Run command
on an energized drive, the protective function activates and the flashes quickly. When the application will let an energized drive
Run, set b1-17 = 1 [Accept Existing RUN Command].
■ 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
1 LOCAL/REMOTE V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Note:
• When the MFDI terminal sets the LOCAL/REMOTE selection, on the keypad is disabled.
• When LOCAL Mode is selected, the green light for comes on.
• When the Run command is ON, you cannot switch between LOCAL Mode and REMOTE Mode.
ON : LOCAL
The keypad is the Frequency reference source and Run command source.
OFF : REMOTE
The frequency reference and Run command settings are set in b1-01, b1-02 [Frequency Reference Selection 1/2]
or b1-15, b1-16 [Run Command Selection 1/2].
■ 2: External Reference 1/2 Selection

2 External Reference 1/2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Note:
The ability to switch the Run command source and frequency reference source depends on the setting of b1-07 [LOCAL/REMOTE Run
Selection].
Table 12.62 Ability to Switch the Run Command Source and Frequency Reference Source when Inputting the Run
Command
b1-07 Run command source Frequency reference source
0 [Disregard Existing RUN Command] (Default) No Yes
1 [Accept Existing RUN Command] Yes Yes
ON : b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2], b1-16 [Run Command Selection 2]

OFF : b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1], b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1]
■ 3: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1

3 Multi-Step Speed Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
1 Uses speed references d1-01 to d1-16 to set a multi-step speed reference.
Note:
Refer to Setting Procedures for Multi-step Speed Operation on page 756 for more information.

Parameter Details
Note:
12


Note:
■ 6: Jog Reference Selection

6 Jog Reference Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the drive to use the JOG Frequency Reference (JOG command) set in d1-17. The JOG Frequency Reference (JOG
command) overrides Frequency References 1 to 16 (d1-01 to d1-16).
■ 7: Accel/Decel Time Selection 1

7 Accel/Decel Time Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
1 Sets the drive to use C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] and C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] or C1-03 [Acceleration Time 2] and C1-04
[Deceleration Time 2].
Note:
Refer to C1: Accel & Decel Time on page 731 for more information.
■ 8: Baseblock Command (N.O.)

8 Baseblock Command (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
O.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input is ON.
WARNING! Incorrect Operation. Yaskawa recommends that you use H1-xx = 9 [Baseblock Command (N.C.)]. If a circuit error
occurs in the MFDI, the drive cannot stop the output when the terminal set to H1-xx = 8 [Baseblock Command (N.O.)] turns ON.
The keypad flashes bb [Baseblock]. If you cancel the baseblock command when the Run command is active, the
drive will restart the motor and use the speed search function.
Figure 12.82 Baseblock Command Time Chart

ON : Baseblock (drive output stop)
■ 9: Baseblock Command (N.C.)

9 Baseblock Command (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
C.) Sets the command that stops drive output and coasts the motor to stop when the input terminal is OFF.
The keypad flashes bb [Baseblock]. If you cancel the baseblock command when the Run command is active, the
drive will restart the motor and use the speed search function.

OFF : Baseblock (drive output stop)

■ A: Accel/Decel Ramp Hold

A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Momentarily pauses motor acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON, retains the output frequency that was
stored in the drive at the time of the pause, and restarts motor operation.
If the terminal is deactivated, the drive restarts acceleration and deceleration.

When the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold terminal is activated and d4-01 = 1 [Freq Reference Retention
Select = Enabled], the drive will store the output frequency in memory. While the acceleration/deceleration ramp
hold command is activated, the drive will always restart the motor at this output frequency.
Note:
Refer to d4-01: Freq Reference Hold Selection on page 764 for more information.
■ B: Overheat Alarm (oH2)

B Overheat Alarm (oH2) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the drive to show an oH2 [External Overheat (H1-XX=B)] alarm when the input terminal is ON. The alarm does not have
an effect on drive operation.
■ C: Analog Terminal Enable Selection

C Analog Terminal Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Selection Sets the command that enables or disables the terminals selected in H3-14 [Analog Input Terminal Enable Sel].
ON : Terminal selected with H3-14 is enabled

OFF : Terminal selected with H3-14 is disabled
■ D: Ignore Speed Fdbk (V/f w/o Enc)

D Ignore Speed Fdbk (V/f w/o V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enc) Sets the command to disable speed feedback control and run the drive in V/f control or use speed feedback from the encoder.
ON : Speed feedback control disable (V/f Control)

OFF : Speed feedback control enable (Closed Loop V/f Control)
■ E: ASR Integral Reset

E ASR Integral Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
ON : P control
OFF : PI control
■ F: Not Used
F Not Used V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Parameter Details
Through Mode uses the signal input to the terminal as a digital input for the upper sequence through a
communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. This input signal does not have an effect on
drive operation.
12

■ 10: Up Command
10 Up Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to use a push button switch to increase the drive frequency reference. You must also set Setting 11 [Down
Command].
ON : Increases the frequency reference.

Note:
• If you set only the Up command or only the Down command, the drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err].
• If you set two or more of these functions at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03:
–Up/Down command
–Accel/Decel Ramp Hold
–Reference Sample Hold
–Offset Frequency 1, 2, 3 addition
–Up/Down 2 Command
• The Up/Down command does not function in these conditions:
–b1-01 = 2, 3 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Memobus/Modbus Communications, Option PCB]
–b1-02 ≠ 1 [Run Command Selection 1 ≠ Control Circuit Terminal]
–Drive is in LOCAL mode
–Set to b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2] by use of H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Select = External Reference 1/2 Selection]
When you enter the UP command, the frequency reference increases.
The Up and Down commands have priority over all other frequency references. When you enable the Up/Down
command, the drive will ignore these frequency references:
• Frequency reference from Keypad [b1-01 = 0]
• Frequency reference from Analog Input [b1-01 = 1]
• Frequency reference from Pulse Train Input [b1-01 = 4]
Table 12.63 shows the Up and Down commands with their operation.
Table 12.63 Up Command and Down Command
Command status
Drive operation
Up command (10) Down command (11)
OFF OFF Keeps the current frequency reference.
ON OFF Increases the frequency reference.
OFF ON Decreases the frequency reference.
ON ON Keeps the current frequency reference.
Combine Frequency Reference Hold Functions and Up/Down Commands

• When you clear the Run command or when d4-01 = 0 [Freq Reference Hold Selection = Disabled], and you
restart the drive, the Up/Down command resets to 0.
• When d4-01 = 1 [Enabled], the drive saves the frequency reference set during the Up/Down command. When
you cycle the Run command or restart the drive, the drive saves the frequency reference value and restarts the
motor at this frequency value. After you clear the Run command, activate the terminal set for the Up command
or Down command to set the saved reference value to 0.
Note:
Combine Upper/Lower Limits of the Frequency Reference and the Up/Down Commands
Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference to d2-01 [Frequency Reference Upper Limit].
Use an analog input or d2-02 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit] to set the lower limit value of the frequency
reference. The configurable values change when the setting for d4-10 [Up/Down Freq Lower Limit Select]
changes. When you input a Run command, these are the lower limits of the frequency reference:
• When the lower limit of the frequency reference is set only for d2-02, the drive accelerates the motor to the
lower limit value of the frequency reference at the same time that you input the Run command.
• When the lower limit of the frequency reference is set only for analog input, the drive accelerates the motor to
the lower limit value of the frequency reference when the Run command, and Up command or Down command
for the drive is enabled. When only the Run command is enabled, the motor does not start.

• When these conditions occur, the drive accelerates the motor to the d2-02 setting value when the Run command
is input. When the motor accelerates to the setting value of d2-02, if the Up/Down command is enabled, the
motor accelerates to the lower limit value of the analog input.
– The lower limit value of the frequency reference is set for the analog input and d2-02
– The lower limit value of the analog input is higher than the setting value of d2-02
Note:
Figure 12.83 shows an example of how Up/Down command operates. In this example, the lower limit value of the
frequency reference is set in d2-02. Figure 12.83 shows the time chart when Freq Reference Retention Select [d4-
01] is enabled and disabled.
Figure 12.83 Up/Down Command Time Chart
■ 11: Down Command

11 Down Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to use a push button switch to decrease the drive frequency reference. You must also set Setting 10 [Up
Command].
ON : Decreases the frequency reference.

Note:
• If you set only the Up command or only the Down command, the drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err].
• If you set two or more of these functions at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03:
–Up/Down command
–Accel/Decel Ramp Hold
–Reference Sample Hold
–Offset Frequency 1, 2, 3 addition
–Up/Down 2 Command
• The Up/Down command does not function in these conditions:
–b1-01 = 2, 3 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Memobus/Modbus Communications, Option PCB]
–b1-02 ≠ 1 [Run Command Selection 1 ≠ Control Circuit Terminal]
–Drive is in LOCAL mode
–Set to b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2] by use of H1-xx = 2 [MFDI Function Select = External Reference 1/2 Selection]
When you enter the UP command, the frequency reference increases. When you enter the Down command, the
Parameter Details
frequency reference decreases.

The Up and Down commands have priority over all other frequency references. When you enable the Up/Down
command, the drive will ignore these frequency references:
• Frequency reference from Keypad [b1-01 = 0]
• Frequency reference from Analog Input [b1-01 = 1]
12

• Frequency reference from Pulse Train Input [b1-01 = 4]
■ 12: Forward Jog

12 Forward Jog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to operate the motor in the forward direction at the Jog Frequency set in d1-17 [Jog Reference].
Note:
• It is not necessary to input the Run command.
• The Forward JOG command has priority over all other frequency references.
• When the Forward JOG and Reverse JOG commands are activated at the same time for 500 ms or longer, the drive will ramp to stop.
Figure 12.84 JOG Operation Pattern
■ 13: Reverse Jog

13 Reverse Jog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to operate the motor in the reverse direction at the Jog Frequency set in d1-17 [Jog Reference].
Note:
• It is not necessary to input the Run command.
• The Reverse JOG command has priority over all other frequency references.
• When the Forward JOG and Reverse JOG commands are activated at the same time for 500 ms or longer, the drive will ramp to stop.
■ 14: Fault Reset

14 Fault Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to reset the current fault when the Run command is inactive.
If the drive detects a fault, the drive will activate the fault relay output, turn off the output, and the motor will
coast to stop.
If the drive detects a fault for which you can set the stopping method, apply the appropriate Stopping Method.
Then push (RESET) on the keypad to turn the Run command OFF, or activate the fault reset terminal to reset
the fault.
Note:
The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active. Remove the Run command before trying to reset a fault.
■ 15: Fast Stop (N.O.)

15 Fast Stop (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is ON while
the drive is operating.
WARNING! Incorrect Operation. Yaskawa recommends that you use H1-xx = 17 [Fast Stop (N.C.)]. If a circuit error occurs in
the MFDI, the drive cannot stop the output when the terminal set to H1-xx = 15 [Fast Stop (N.O.)] turns ON.
If you cancel the fast stop input, the drive will not restart the motor until you meet these conditions:
• Fully stop the motor
• Cancel the Run command
• Cancel the fast stop command

Note:
• To use the N.C. switch to input the fast stop command, set H1-xx = 17 [Fast Stop (N.C.)].
• Refer to C1-09: Fast Stop Time on page 734 for more information.
• Set C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] to a correct deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, it can cause an overvoltage fault, which
will not stop the motor from coasting.
■ 16: Motor 2 Selection

16 Motor 2 Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command for the drive to operate motor 1 or motor 2. Stop the motors before switching.
You can use an external input to switch operation between two induction motors. The drive will save the control
methods, V/f patterns, and motor parameters for the two motors.
When you select motor 2, the drive will switch to motor 2 parameters.
Table 12.64 Parameters that Switch between Motor 1 and Motor 2
Motor 2 Selection
Parameter
OFF (Motor 1) ON (Motor 2)
C1-xx [Accel & Decel Time] C1-01 to C1-04 C1-05 to C1-08
C3-xx [Slip Compensation] C3-01 to C3-04 C3-21 to C3-24
C4-xx [Torque Compensation] C4-01 C4-07
C5-xx [Automatic Speed Regulator C5-01 to C5-08, C5-12, C5-17, C5-18 C5-21 to C5-28, C5-32, C5-37, C5-38
(ASR)]
E1-xx, E3-xx [V/f Patterns] E1-xx, E2-xx E3-xx, E4-xx

E2-xx, E4-xx [Motor Parameters]
F1-xx [Number of PG Pulses per F1-01 to F1-21 F1-02 to F1-04, F1-08 to F1-11, F1-14, F1-31 to F1-37
Revolution]
Note:
• When you use 2 motors, the drive applies the protective function set in L1-01 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection] to motor 1 and motor
2.
• You cannot switch between motors 1 and 2 during run. If you try to switch motors when they are running, it will cause a rUn [Motor
Switch during Run] error.
• After you switch between encoder motors, you must wait 500 ms minimum to input a Run command. You must wait 200 ms minimum
for other control methods.
• If you set H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection] and set different control methods in maximum output frequency to motors 1 and 2, the drive
will apply the lower of the two maximum to the two motors. The upper limit of d1-xx [Frequency Reference] will change. For
example, the upper limit of d1-xx will be 400 when you set these parameters to these values:
–A1-02 = 2 [Control Method Selection = OLV]
–E1-04 = 590 [Maximum Output Frequency = 590 Hz]
–E3-01 = 3 [Motor 2 Control Mode Selection = CLV]
–E3-04 = 400 [Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency = 400 Hz]
■ 17: Fast Stop (N.C.)

Parameter Details
17 Fast Stop (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to ramp to stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] when the input terminal is ON while
the drive is operating.
If you cancel the fast stop input, the drive will not restart the motor until you meet these conditions:
• Fully stop the motor 12

• Cancel the Run command

• Cancel the fast stop command
Note:
• To use the N.O. switch to input the fast stop command, set 15 (Fast Stop (N.O.)).
• Refer to C1-09: Fast Stop Time on page 734 for more information.
• Set C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] to a correct deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, it can cause an overvoltage fault and
failure to stop the motor from coasting.
Figure 12.85 shows an example of how fast stop operates.
Figure 12.85 Fast Stop Time Chart
■ 18: Timer Function

18 Timer Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to start the timer function. Use this setting with Timer Output [H2-xx = 12].
Note:
Refer to “b4: Timer Function” for more information.
■ 19: PID Disable

19 PID Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to disable PID control when b5-01 = 1 to 8 [PID Mode Setting = Enabled].
ON : PID control disabled

OFF : PID control enabled
■ 1A: Accel/Decel Time Selection 2

1A Accel/Decel Time Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
2 Set this function and H1-xx = 7 [Accel/Decel Time Selection 1] together. Sets the drive to use C1-05 [Acceleration Time 3] and
C1-06 [Deceleration Time 3] or C1-07 [Acceleration Time 4] and C1-08 [Deceleration Time 4].
Note:
Refer to C1: Accel & Decel Time on page 731 for more information.
■ 1B: Programming Lockout

1B Programming Lockout V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to prevent parameter changes when the terminal is OFF.
You can continue to view parameter setting values when the terminal is OFF [Parameter Write Prohibit].
ON : Programming Lockout
OFF : Parameter Write Prohibit

■ 1E: Reference Sample Hold

1E Reference Sample Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to sample the frequency reference at terminals A1, A2, or A3 and hold the frequency reference at that
frequency.
When the terminal is active for 100 ms, this function reads a sample of the analog frequency reference and holds
that sample. When you input the sample/hold command again, the function reads a sample of the analog
frequency reference again and holds that sample. When you turn off the power, the drive erases the saved analog
frequency and resets the frequency reference to 0.
Figure 12.86 shows an example of how the function operates.
Figure 12.86 Reference Sample Hold

You cannot set the Reference Sample Hold function at the same time as these functions:
• H1-xx = A [Accel/Decel Ramp Hold]
• H1-xx = 10, 11 [Up Command, Down Command]
• H1-xx = 44 to 46 [Offset Frequency 1 to 3]
• H1-xx = 75, 76 [Up 2 Command, Down 2 Command]
If you set them at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err].
■ 20 to 2F: External Fault

20 to 2F External Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets a command to stop the drive when a failure or fault occurs on an external device.
WARNING! Incorrect Operation. Yaskawa recommends that you use H1-xx = 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 2B, 2D, 2F [External Fault (N.
C.)]. If a circuit error occurs in the MFDI, the drive cannot stop the output when the terminal set to H1-xx = 20, 22, 24, 26, 28,
2A, 2C, 2E [External Fault (N.O.)] turns ON.
If an external fault is input to the drive, the keypad will show EFx [External Fault (Terminal Sx)], where x is the
number of the terminal (terminal Sx) to which the external fault signal is assigned. For example, when an external
fault signal is input to terminal S3, the keypad will show EF3 [External Fault (Terminal S3)].
Use these conditions to select the value to set in H1-xx:
• Signal input method from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Motor stopping method (operation after external fault detection)
Table 12.65 shows the relation between the conditions and the value set to H1-xx.
Table 12.65 Stopping Methods for External Fault
Signal Input Method from External Fault Detection Method Stopping Method
Peripheral Devices *1 *2
Setting
Detected Continuous
Always Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop
N.O. N.C. during RUN Operation
Detected Only (Fault) (Fault) (Fault) (Alarm Only)
Parameter Details
20 x - x - x - - -
21 - x x - x - - -
22 x - - x x - - -
23 - x - x x - - -
24 x - x - - x - -
12

Signal Input Method from External Fault Detection Method Stopping Method
Peripheral Devices *1 *2
Setting
Detected Continuous
N.O. N.C. Always during RUN Ramp to Stop Coast to Stop Fast Stop Operation
Detected (Fault) (Fault) (Fault)
Only (Alarm Only)
25 - x x - - x - -
26 x - - x - x - -
27 - x - x - x - -
28 x - x - - - x -
29 - x x - - - x -
2A x - - x - - x -
2B - x - x - - x -
2C x - x - - - - x
2D - x x - - - - x
2E x - - x - - - x
2F - x - x - - - x
*1 Set the terminal to N.O. (detects external fault when switched ON) or N.C. (detects external fault when switched OFF).
*2 Set the drive to always detect each fault or to detect only during run.
■ 30: PID Integrator Reset

30 PID Integrator Reset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to reset and hold the PID control integral to 0 when the terminal is ON.
Note:
Refer to “PID control block diagram” for more information.
■ 31: PID Integrator Hold

31 PID Integrator Hold V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the command to hold the integral value of the PID control while the terminal is activated.
When you turn off the input terminal, PID control restarts the integral.
Note:

32 Multi-Step Speed Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PMEZOLV
Note:
Refer to "Setting Procedures for Multi-step Speed Operation” in “d: Reference Settings” for more information.
■ 34: PID Soft Starter Disable

34 PID Soft Starter Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
ON : Disabled
Disables b5-17 [PID Accel/Decel Time].
OFF : Enabled
Enables b5-17 [PID Accel/Decel Time].
Note:

■ 35: PID Input (Error) Invert

35 PID Input (Error) Invert V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Note:
■ 3E: PID Setpoint Selection 1

3E PID Setpoint Selection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Set this function and H1-xx = 3F [PID Setpoint Selection 2] together. Sets the function to switch the PID setpoint to b5-58 to
b5-60 [PID Setpoint 2 to 4].
Refer to “b5-58 to b5-60: PID Setpoint 2 to 4” for more information.
■ 3F: PID Setpoint Selection 2

3F PID Setpoint Selection 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Set this function and H1-xx = 3E [PID Setpoint Selection 1] at the same time. Sets the function to switch the PID setpoint to b5-
58 to b5-60 [PID Setpoint 2 to 4].
Refer to b5-58 to b5-60: PID Setpoints 2 to 4 on page 719 for more information.
■ 40: Forward RUN (2-Wire)

40 Forward RUN (2-Wire) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 41 [Reverse RUN (2-Wire)] together.
ON : Forward Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an EF [FWD/REV Run
Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Forward Run command to terminal S1.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2), FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence
2)].
Figure 12.87 2-Wire Sequence Wiring Example
■ 41: Reverse RUN (2-Wire)

41 Reverse RUN (2-Wire) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Parameter Details
Sets the Forward Run command for 2-wire sequence 1. Set this function and H1-xx = 40 [Forward RUN (2-Wire)] together.
ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Stop
12

Note:
• If you turn ON the Forward Run command terminal and the Reverse Run command terminal, it will cause an EF [FWD/REV Run
Command Input Error] alarm and the motor will ramp to stop.
• Initialize the drive with a 2-wire sequence to set the Reverse Run command to terminal S2.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 42, 43 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2), FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence
2)].
■ 42: Run Command (2-Wire Sequence 2)

42 Run Command (2-Wire V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sequence 2) Sets the Run command for 2-wire sequence 2. Set this function and H1-xx = 43 [FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)] together.
ON : Run
OFF : Stop
Note:
This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 40, 41 [Forward RUN (2-Wire), Reverse RUN (2-Wire)].
■ 43: FWD/REV (2-Wire Sequence 2)

43 FWD/REV (2-Wire V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sequence 2) Sets the direction of motor rotation for 2-wire sequence 2. Set this function and H1-xx = 42 [Run Command (2-Wire Sequence
2)] together.
ON : Reverse Run
OFF : Forward Run
Note:
• You must input the Run command to rotate the motor.
• This function will not operate at the same time as H1-xx = 40, 41 [Forward RUN (2-Wire), Reverse RUN (2-Wire)].
■ 44: Add Offset Frequency 1 (d7-01)

44 Add Offset Frequency 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(d7-01) Sets the function to add the offset frequency set in d7-01 [Offset Frequency 1] to the frequency reference when the terminal
activates.
Note:
Refer to d7: Offset Frequency on page 776 for more information.

activates.
Note:

activates.
Note:
■ 47: Node Setup (CANopen)

47 Node Setup (CANopen) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function in CANopen communications to start the Node Setup function to set the drive node address from the host
controller.

■ 60: DC Injection Braking Command

60 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
If you input the Run command or JOG command, it will cancel DC Injection Braking.
Figure 12.88 shows the time chart of the DC Injection Braking function.
Figure 12.88 DC Injection Braking Time Chart

Note:
• When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this function is available with a PM motor.
• Refer to b2: DC Injection Braking and Short Circuit Braking on page 693 for more information.
■ 61: Speed Search from Fmax

61 Speed Search from Fmax V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to use an external reference to start speed search although b3-01 = 0 [Speed Search Selection at Start =
Disabled] to not allow speed search at start.
When the terminal is activated for b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current Detection 2], the drive
starts speed search from the maximum output frequency.
Note:
• The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] if you set H1-xx = 61 and 62 at the same time.
• Refer to “b3: Speed Search” for more information.
■ 62: Speed Search from Fref

62 Speed Search from Fref V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to use an external reference to start speed search although b3-01 = 0 [Speed Search Selection at Start =
Disabled] to not allow speed search at start.
When the terminal is activated for b3-24 = 2 [Speed Search Method Selection = Current Detection 2], the drive
starts speed search from the frequency reference.
Note:
• The drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err] if you set H1-xx = 61 and 62 at the same time.
• Refer to “b3: Speed Search” for more information.
■ 63: Field Weakening

63 Field Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to send the Field Weakening Level and Field Weakening Frequency Limit commands set in d6-01 [Field
Weakening Level] and d6-02 [Field Weakening Frequency Limit] when the input terminal is activated.
Note:
Refer to d6: Field Weakening /Forcing on page 775 for more information.
Parameter Details
■ 65: KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate (N.C.)

65 KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(N.C.) Sets operation of the KEB1 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.C.).
12

When you enable KEB Ride-Thru 1, set L2-29 [KEB Method Selection]. The drive operates with the selected
KEB method.
Note:
• If you set KEB Ride-Thru 1 [H1-xx = 65, 66] and KEB Ride-Thru 2 [H1-xx = 7A, 7B] at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03
[Multi-Function Input Setting Err].
• Refer to KEB Ride-Thru Function on page 917 for more information.
■ 66: KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate (N.O.)

66 KEB Ride-Thru 1 Activate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(N.O.) Sets operation of the KEB1 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 1 (N.O.).

When you enable KEB Ride-Thru 1, set L2-29 [KEB Method Selection]. The drive operates with the selected
KEB method.
Note:
■ 67: Communications Test Mode

67 Communications Test Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Set the function for the drive to self-test RS-485 serial communications operation.
The Self-Diagnostics function connects the transmission terminal of the control terminal block to the reception
terminal. The function transmits the data that the drive sent to make sure that the drive can communicate correctly.
Note:
Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications “Self-Diagnostics” for the self-diagnostics procedure.
■ 68: High Slip Braking (HSB) Activate

68 High Slip Braking (HSB) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Activate Sets the command to use high-slip braking to stop the motor.
Note:
• When you restart the drive after you use high-slip braking, make sure that the drive fully stops the motor then clear the high-slip
braking input.
• Refer to “n3: High Slip/Overex Braking” for more information.
■ 6A: Drive Enable

6A Drive Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to show dnE [Drive Disabled] on the keypad and ignore Run commands when the terminal is OFF.
If you input the Run command before you turn ON the Drive Enable terminal, you must input the Run command
again to operate the drive. When you deactivate the terminal set for Drive Enable while the drive is operating, the
drive will use the stopping method set in b1-03 [Stopping Method Selection] to stop the motor.
ON : Run command is accepted.
OFF : Run command is disabled. When the drive is running, it stops according to b1-03 setting.
■ 71: Torque Control

71 Torque Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to switch between torque control and speed control.

ON : Torque control
OFF : Speed control
Note:
When this function is enabled, set d5-01 = 0 [Torque Control Selection = Speed Control].
Input the Speed/Torque Control Switchover Time
Use parameter d5-06 [Speed/Torque Changeover Time] to set the length of time, in milliseconds, that the drive
will wait to switch between speed and torque control. When the speed/torque control switchover signal changes in
the time set in d5-06, the three analog inputs will keep their present value. Complete the signal switchover with an
external source in this time.
Note:
Refer to “Switch Speed Control and Torque Control” for more information.
■ 72: Zero Servo

72 Zero Servo V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to hold a stopped motor.
This function will hold a stopped motor if an external force is applied or an analog reference is offset.
Note:
• Refer to “b9: Zero Servo” for more information.
• When you use the Zero Servo function, keep the Run command ON. Zero servo stops the motor and if you turn OFF the Run
command, it will not have power.
■ 75: Up 2 Command
75 Up 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to increase the frequency reference bias value to accelerate the motor when the terminal is activated. Set this
function and H1-xx = 76 [Down 2 Command] together.
When you activate the terminal set for Up2 Command, the bias will increase. When you activate the terminal set
for Down 2 Command, the bias will decrease. When you activate or deactivate the two commands, the drive will
hold the frequency reference. Table 12.66 gives information about the relation between operation of the Up/Down
2 Command and d4-01, d4-03, and 4-05.
Note:
• When you use this function, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper Limit/Lower Limit].
• Refer to d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold on page 764 for more information.
Parameter Details
12

Table 12.66 Up 2 Command, Down 2 Command

Func Frequency d4-03 d4-05 d4-01 Operation Storing the Frequency Reference or
tion Reference Source Frequency Bias
1 0 • When the Up 2 Command is active, the drive Not stored.

accelerates the motor (increases the bias value).
• When the Down 2 Command is active, the When the bias value and frequency reference are
drive decelerates the motor (decreases the bias constant for 5 seconds after the frequency
value) reference hold starts, the drive will add the bias
value to the enabled frequency reference, then
• When the Up 2 Command and Down 2 reset.
0 Command are active or not active, the drive
2 1 holds the output frequency. (holds the bias
value).
Multi-step speed • When the frequency changes, it will reset the
0.00 bias.
reference
• For all other statuses, the drive will follow the
• When the Up 2 Command is active, the drive Not stored.

accelerates the motor.
3 1 - • When the Down 2 Command is active, the
drive decelerates the motor.

accelerates the motor to “Frequency Reference
+ d4-03” (the bias value will increase to the When the bias value and frequency reference are
value set in d4-03) constant for 5 seconds after the frequency
• When the Down 2 Command is active, the reference hold starts, the drive will add the bias
drive decelerates the motor to “Frequency value to the enabled frequency reference, then
Reference - d4-03” (the bias value will decrease reset.
Multi-step speed to the value set in d4-03).
reference >0 - • When the Up 2 Command and Down 2
5 1 Command are active or not active, the drive
holds the output frequency. (holds the bias
value).
• When the frequency changes, it will reset the
bias.

• When the Down 2 Command is active, the When the bias value is constant for 5 seconds after
drive decelerates the motor (decreases the bias the frequency reference hold starts, the drive will
value) store the bias value in d4-06. You cannot rewrite
the frequency reference is not possible. The drive
Others • When the Up 2 Command and Down 2 will store only the bias value.
0 0 Command are active or not active, the drive
(Analog input, holds the output frequency (holds the bias
7 transmission) 1
value).
• During acceleration or deceleration, when the
frequency reference increases or decreases
more than d4-07, the drive holds the bias value
until the output frequency and the actual
frequency reference agree (speed agreement).
• When the Up 2 Command is active, the drive Not stored.

• When the Down 2 Command is active, the
8 0 1 - drive decelerates the motor (decreases the bias
value)

Others accelerates the motor to “Frequency Reference
(Analog input, + d4-03” (the bias value will increase to the When the bias value is constant for 5 seconds after
transmission) value set in d4-03) the frequency reference hold starts, the drive will
• When the Down 2 Command is active, the store the bias value in d4-06. You cannot rewrite
drive decelerates the motor to “Frequency the frequency reference is not possible. The drive
>0 - Reference - d4-03” (the bias value will decrease will store only the bias value.
10 1 to the value set in d4-03).
• During acceleration or deceleration, when the
frequency reference increases or decreases
more than d4-07, the drive holds the bias value
until the output frequency and the actual
frequency reference agree (speed agreement).
■ 76: Down 2 Command

76 Down 2 Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to decrease the frequency reference bias value to decelerate the motor when the terminal is activated. Set this
function and H1-xx = 75 [Up 2 Command] together.
When you activate the terminal set for Up2 Command, the bias will increase. When you activate the terminal set
for Down 2 Command, the bias will decrease. When you activate or deactivate the two commands, the drive will
hold the frequency reference.

Note:
• When you use this function, set the optimal bias limit values with d4-08 and d4-09 [Up/Down 2 Bias Upper Limit/Lower Limit].
• Refer to d4: Frequency Ref Up/Down & Hold on page 764 for more information.
■ 77: ASR Gain (C5-03) Select

77 ASR Gain (C5-03) Select V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the function to switch the ASR proportional gain to C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1] or C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain
2].
ON : C5-03
Switches the proportional gain to C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain 2].
OFF : C5-01
Switches the proportional gain to C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1].
Note:
Refer to “C5: Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)” for more information.
■ 78: Analog TorqueRef Polarity Invert

78 Analog TorqueRef Polarity V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Invert Sets the rotation direction of the external torque reference.
ON : External torque reference reverse direction

OFF : External torque reference forward direction
■ 7A: KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.C.)

7A KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(N.C.) Sets operation of the KEB2 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C.).
When KEB Ride-Thru 2 is input, the drive will use Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2 for KEB operation. The L2-29
[KEB Method Selection] setting will not have an effect.
Note:
■ 7B: KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.O.)

7B KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(N.O.) Sets operation of the KEB2 function through the KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.O.).

When KEB Ride-Thru 2 is input, the drive will use Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2 for KEB operation. The L2-29
[KEB Method Selection] setting will not have an effect.
Note:
Parameter Details
■ 7C: Short Circuit Braking (N.O.)

7C Short Circuit Braking (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
O.) Sets operation of Short Circuit Braking (N.O.).
12

WARNING! Incorrect Operation. Yaskawa recommends that you use H1-xx = 7D [Short Circuit Braking (N.C.)]. If a circuit error
occurs in the MFDI, the motor can take longer than expected to stop when the terminal set to H1-xx = 7C [Short Circuit Braking
(N.O.)] turns ON.
The drive will short circuit the three phases of a PM motor to cause braking torque in the spinning motor.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this function is available only when you use a PM motor.
ON : Short Circuit Braking is enabled.
■ 7D: Short Circuit Braking (N.C.)

7D Short Circuit Braking (N. V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
C.) Sets operation of Short Circuit Braking (N.C.).
The drive will short circuit the three phases of a PM motor to cause braking torque in the spinning motor.
Note:
OFF : Short Circuit Braking is enabled.
■ 7E: Reverse Rotation Identifier

7E Reverse Rotation Identifier V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the rotation direction of the motor when in Simple Closed Loop V/f Control method and F1-21, F1-37 = 0 [Encoder
Option Function Selection = A pulse detection], or when in Closed Loop V/f Control method.
ON : Reverse run
The drive knows that the motor is rotating in reverse.
OFF : Forward run
The drive knows that the motor is rotating forward.
■ 7F: PID Bi-Directional Enable

7F PID Bi-Directional Enable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets operation of the PID Bi-Directional function.
ON : Enabled
OFF : Disabled
■ 90 to 97: DriveWorksEZ Digital Inputs 1 to 8

90 - 97 DWEZ Digital Inputs 1 to 8 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets digital inputs used with DriveWorksEZ. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
Note:
You cannot set values 90 to 97 for inverse output.
■ 9F: DWEZ Disable

9F DWEZ Disable V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets operation of the DriveWorksEZ program saved in the drive.
Note:
Set A1-07 = 2 [DriveWorksEZ Function Selection = Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input] to use this function.
ON : Disabled
OFF : Enabled

■ 101 to 19F: Inverse Input of 1 to 9F

101 to 19F Inverse Inputs of 1 to 9F Sets the function of the selected MFDI to operate inversely. To select the function, enter “1xx”, where the “xx” is the function
setting value.
For example, to use the inverse input of E [ASR Integral Reset], set H1-xx = 10E.
Note:
You cannot use inverse input for all functions. Refer to Table 12.61 for more information.
◆ H2: Multi-function Digital Output

H2 parameters set the MFDO terminal functions.
■ H2-01 to H2-03 Terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6 Function Selection

The drive has three MFDO terminals. Table 12.67 shows the default function settings for the terminals.
Table 12.67 MFDO Terminals Default Function Settings
No. Name Default Function
H2-01 Term M1-M2 Function Selection 0 During Run
H2-02 Term M3-M4 Function Selection 1 Zero Speed
H2-03 Terminal M5-M6 Function Select 2 Speed Agree 1
Refer to Table 12.68 to set H2-xx [MFDO Function Select].

Table 12.68 MFDO Setting Values
0 During Run 870 1A During Reverse 877
1 Zero Speed 870 1B During Baseblock (N.C.) 877
2 Speed Agree 1 870 1C Motor 2 Selected 877
3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 871 1D During Regeneration 877
4 Frequency Detection 1 871 1E Executing Auto-Restart 878
5 Frequency Detection 2 872 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) 878
6 Drive Ready 872 20 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH) 878
7 DC Bus Undervoltage 873 21 Safety Monitor Output Status 878
8 During Baseblock (N.O.) 873 22 Mechanical Weakening Detection 878
9 Frequency Reference from Keypad 873 2F Maintenance Notification 878
A Run Command Source 873 30 During Torque Limit 879
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) 873 31 During Speed Limit 879
C Frequency Reference Loss 873 32 In Speed Limit During Trq Ctrl 879
D Braking Resistor Fault 874 33 Zero Servo Complete 879
E Fault 874 37 During Frequency Output 879
F *1 Not Used 874 38 Drive Enabled 880
10 Alarm 874 39 Watt Hour Pulse Output 880
11 Fault Reset Command Active 874 3C LOCAL Control Selected 880
12 Timer Output 874 3D During Speed Search 880
13 Speed Agree 2 874 3E PID Feedback Low 880
14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 875 3F PID Feedback High 881

Parameter Details
15 Frequency Detection 3 875 4A During KEB Ride-Thru 881
16 Frequency Detection 4 876 4B During Short Circuit Braking 881
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) 876 4C During Fast Stop 881
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) 876 4D oH Pre-Alarm Time Limit 881
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) 877 4E *2 Braking Transistor Fault (rr) 881

12

4F *2 Braking Resistor Overheat (rH) 881 69 External Power 24V Supply 883
60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm 881 6A Data Logger Error 883
61 Pole Position Detection Complete 882 90 - 93 DWEZ Digital Output 1 to 4 884
62 Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied 882 A0 - A7 DWEZ Extended Digital Outputs 1 to 8 884
63 Modbus Reg 2 Status Satisfied 882 Inverse output of 0 to A7

Sets an inverse output of the function for the MFDO.
65 Standby Output 882 100 - 1A7 Put a 1 at the front of the function setting to set 884
inverse output. For example, set 138 for inverse
66 Comparator1 882 output of 38 [Drive Enabled].
67 Comparator2 883
*1 Inverse output is not available.

*2 You cannot set this parameter on models 2169 to 2415 and 4089 to 4H12.
■ Extended MFDO1 to MFDO3 Function Selection

You can set MFDO functions to bit 0 to bit 2 [MEMOBUS MFDO1 to 3] of MEMOBUS register 15E0 (Hex.).
Use H2-40 to H2-42 [Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 to bit2 Output Func] to select the function.
Figure 12.89 Functional Block Diagram of MEMOBUS Multi-function Output

Table 12.69 MEMOBUS MFDO Registers
Register number
Name
(Hex.)
bit0 MEMOBUS MFDO 1
15E0 bit1 MEMOBUS MFDO 2
bit2 MEMOBUS MFDO 3
Note:
• Refer to MFDO Setting Values on page 869 for more information about MFDO setting values.
• When you do not set functions to H2-40 to H2-42, set them to F.
■ Output of Logical Operation Results of MFDO

This enables the logical operation results of two MFDOs to be output to one MFDO terminal.
Use H2-60, H2-63, and H2-66 [Term M1-M2 Secondary Function to Term M5-M6 Secondary Function] to set the
function of the output signal for which logical operations are performed.
Use H2-61, H2-64, H2-67 [Term M1-M2 Logical Operation to Term M5-M6 Logical Operation] to set the logical
operation.
Figure 12.90 Functional Block Diagram of Logical Operation Output for MFDO 1
Table 12.70 MFDO Logical Operation Table
Logical Operation Selection
Logical Operation Expression Logical Operation Notation
H2-61, H2-64, H2-67
0 A=B=1
1 A=1 or B=1
2 A=0 or B=0

Logical Operation Selection

Logical Operation Expression Logical Operation Notation
H2-61, H2-64, H2-67
3 A=B=0
4 A=B A=B
5 A != B
6 AND(A, )
7 OR(A, )
8 - On
Note:
• When you use the function to output logical calculation results, you cannot set H2-01 to H2-03 = 1xx [Inverse Output of xx]. If you do,
the drive will detect oPE33 [Digital Output Selection Error].
• When you do not use H2-60, H2-63, and H2-66, set them to F. The through mode function is not supported.
■ H2-01: Term M1-M2 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-01 Term M1-M2 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(040B) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M1-M2. (0 - 1FF)
Note:
When you do not use the terminal or when you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to F.
■ H2-02: Term M3-M4 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(040C) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M3-M4. (0 - 1FF)
Note:
■ H2-03: Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(040D) Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal M5-M6. (0 - 1FF)
Note:
■ H2-06: Watt Hour Output Unit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-06 Watt Hour Output Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0437) Selection Sets the unit for the output signal when H2-01 to H2-03 = 39 [MFDO Function Selection = Watt (0 - 4)
Hour Pulse Output].
This output is input to the Watt hour meter or PLC through a 200 ms pulse signal. This parameter sets the kWh
unit for each pulse output.
Parameter Details
12

Figure 12.91 Example MFDO when Configured for Watt Hours

Note:
• When the power value is a negative value (regenerative state), the drive does not count Watt hours.
• When the control power supply to the drive is operating, the drive will keep the Watt hours. If a momentary power loss causes the drive
to lose control power, the Watt hour count will reset.
0 : 0.1 kWh units
1 : 1 kWh units
2 : 10 kWh units
3 : 100 kWh units
4 : 1000 kWh units
■ H2-07: Modbus Register 1 Address Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-07 Modbus Register 1 Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0001
(0B3A) Select Sets the address of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0001 - 1FFF)
Sets the address of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied [H2-01 to H2-03 = 62] and uses the
bit in H2-08 [Modbus Register 1 Bit Select].
■ H2-08: Modbus Register 1 Bit Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-08 Modbus Register 1 Bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000
(0B3B) Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0000 - FFFF)
Sets the bit of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied [H2-01 to H2-03 = 62] and uses the
address in H2-07 [Modbus Register 1 Address Select].
■ H2-09: Modbus Register 2 Address Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-09 Modbus Register 2 Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0001
(0B3C) Select Sets the address of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0001 - 1FFF)
Sets H2-09 with the address of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 2 Status Satisfied [H2-01 to H2-03 = 63]
and uses the bit in H2-10 [Modbus Register 2 Bit Select].
■ H2-10: Modbus Register 2 Bit Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-10 Modbus Register 2 Bit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0000
(0B3D) Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS/Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal. (0000 - FFFF)
Sets the bit of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 2 Status Satisfied [H2-01 to H2-03 = 63] and uses the
address in H2-09.

■ H2-20: Comparator 1 Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-20 Comparator 1 Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H2-20 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set H2-20 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• Refer to 66: Comparator1 on page 882 and 67: Comparator2 on page 883 for more information about the comparator function.
• The monitors you can set change when the control method changes.
■ H2-21: Comparator 1 Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-21 Comparator 1 Lower Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1541) Sets the lower limit detection level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output for the (0.0 - 300.0%)
monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is the 100% value.
Note:
For information on the comparator function, refer to 66: Comparator1 on page 882 and 67: Comparator2 on page 883.
■ H2-22: Comparator 1 Upper Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-22 Comparator 1 Upper Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1542) Sets the upper limit detection level for comparator 1 when the full scale analog output for the (0.0 - 300.0%)
monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is the 100% value.
Note:
■ H2-23: Comparator 1 Hysteresis

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-23 Comparator 1 Hysteresis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1543) Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 1 as a percentage of the full scale analog output for the (0.0 - 10.0%)
monitor selected in H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection].
Note:
■ H2-24: Comparator 1 On-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-24 Comparator 1 On-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(1544) Time Sets the on-delay time for comparator 1. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
Note:
■ H2-25: Comparator 1 Off-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-25 Comparator 1 Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(1545) Time Sets the off-delay time for comparator 1. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
Parameter Details
Note:
12

■ H2-26: Comparator 2 Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-26 Comparator 2 Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H2-26 = 103 to monitor U1-03 [Output Current].
monitor Ud-01.
• The monitors you can set change when the control method changes.
• When you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to 000 or 031. You can set the terminal output level from the PLC
through MEMOBUS/Modbus communications or the communication option.
• Refer to 66: Comparator1 on page 882 and 67: Comparator2 on page 883 for more information about the comparator function.
■ H2-27: Comparator 2 Lower Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-27 Comparator 2 Lower Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1547) Sets the lower limit detection level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale analog output (0.0 - 300.0%)
Note:
■ H2-28: Comparator 2 Upper Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-28 Comparator 2 Upper Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1548) Sets the upper limit detection level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale analog output (0.0 - 300.0%)
Note:
■ H2-29: Comparator 2 Hysteresis

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-29 Comparator 2 Hysteresis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1549) Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale analog output for the (0.0 - 10.0%)
monitor selected in H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection].
Note:
■ H2-30: Comparator 2 On-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-30 Comparator 2 On-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(154A) Time Sets the on-delay time for comparator 2. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
Note:
■ H2-31: Comparator 2 Off-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-31 Comparator 2 Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(154B) Time Sets the off-delay time for comparator 2. (0.0 - 600.0 s)
Note:

■ H2-32: Comparator 1 Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-32 Comparator 1 Filter Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0s
(159A) Sets the time constant that is applied to the primary delay filter used for the analog output of the (0.0 - 10.0 s)
monitor selected with H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection].
Note:
■ H2-33: Comparator1 Protection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-33 Comparator1 Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
(159B) Selection Sets drive operation when it detects CP1 [Comparator1 Limit Fault]. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows CP1 and the drive continues operation at the current frequency reference.
Note:
■ H2-34: Comparator 2 Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-34 Comparator 2 Filter Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0s
(159C) Sets the time constant that is applied to the primary delay filter used for the analog output of the (0.0 - 10.0 s)
monitor selected with H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection].
■ H2-35: Comparator2 Protection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-35 Comparator2 Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
(159D) Selection Sets drive operation when it detects CP2 [Comparator2 Limit Fault]. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
Parameter Details
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows CP2 and the drive continues operation at the current frequency reference.
Note:
The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates. 12

■ H2-36: Comparator 1 Ineffective Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-36 Comparator 1 Ineffective V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(159E) Time Sets the length of time that CP1 [Comparator1 Limit Fault] is disabled. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
Note:
• After you enter a Run command and wait for the time set in this parameter, the drive will monitor operation and make sure that it is in
the Comparator 1 range until you enter the Stop command.
• When CP1 detection is disabled, the drive will activate the output terminal set for Comparator 1 [H2-xx = 66].
■ H2-37: Comparator 2 Ineffective Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-37 Comparator 2 Ineffective V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(159F) Time Sets the length of time that CP2 [Comparator2 Limit Fault] is disabled. (0.0 - 1000.0 s)
Note:
• After you enter a Run command and wait for the time set in this parameter, the drive will monitor operation and make sure that it is in
the Comparator 2 range until you enter the Stop command.
• When CP2 detection is disabled, the drive will activate the output terminal set for Comparator 2 [H2-xx = 67].
■ H2-40: Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 Output Func

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-40 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0B5A) Output Func Sets the MFDO for bit 2 of MEMOBUS register 15E0 (Hex.). (0 - 1FF)
■ H2-60: Term M1-M2 Secondary Function

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-60 Term M1-M2 Secondary V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(1B46) Function Sets the second function for terminal M1-M2. Outputs the logical calculation results of the (0 - FF)
Expert terminals assigned to functions by H2-01 [Term M1-M2 Function Selection].
■ H2-61: Terminal M1-M2 Logical Operation

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-61 Terminal M1-M2 Logical V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B47) Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-01 [Term M1-M2 Function Selection] and (0 - 8)
Expert H2-60 [Term M1-M2 Secondary Function].
Note:
Refer to Output of Logical Operation Results of MFDO on page 862 for more information about the relation between parameter settings
and logical operations.

■ H2-62: Terminal M1-M2 Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H2-62 Terminal M1-M2 Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s
(1B48) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal M1-M2. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(1B49) Function Sets the second function for terminal M3-M4. Outputs the logical calculation results of the (0 - FF)
Expert terminals assigned to functions by H2-02 [Term M3-M4 Function Selection].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(1B4A) Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-02 [Term M3-M4 Function Selection] and (0 - 8)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(1B4B) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal M3-M4. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(1B4C) Function Sets the second function for terminal M5-M6. Outputs the logical calculation results of the (0 - FF)
Expert terminals assigned to functions by H2-03 [Terminal M5-M6 Function Select].

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(1B4D) Operation Sets the logical operation for the functions set in H2-03 [Term M5-M6 Function Selection] and (0 - 8)
Note:

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
(1B4E) Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal M5-M6. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert
◆ MFDO Setting Values

Selects the function configured to MFDO.
12

■ 0: During Run
0 During Run V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when you input a Run command and when the drive is outputting voltage.
Figure 12.92 Drive Running Time Chart

ON : Drive is running
The drive is receiving a Run command or outputting voltage.
OFF : Drive is stopping
■ 1: Zero Speed
1 Zero Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the output frequency < E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] or b2-01 [DC Injection/Zero
SpeedThreshold].
Note:
A1-02 Setting Control method selection Parameter Used as the Reference
0 V/f Control E1-09
1 V/f Control with Encoder E1-09
2 Open Loop Vector b2-01
3 Closed Loop Vector E1-09
4 Advanced OpenLoop Vector Control E1-09
5 PM Open Loop Vector E1-09
6 PM Advanced Open Loop Vector E1-09
7 PM Closed Loop Vector Control b2-01
8 EZ Open Loop Vector Control E1-09
Figure 12.93 Zero Speed Time Chart

ON : Output frequency < value of E1-09 or b2-01.
OFF : Output frequency ≥ value of E1-09 or b2-01.
■ 2: Speed Agree 1
2 Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal turns on when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection
Width].

Note:
• The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 3, 7 [CLV, CLV/PM]. It also outputs the motor speed status when A1-02 = 4
and n4-72 = 1.
Figure 12.94 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart

OFF : The output frequency does not align with the frequency reference although the drive is
running.
■ 3: User-Set Speed Agree 1

3 User-Set Speed Agree 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] ± L4-02 [Speed Agree
Detection Width] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-02.
Note:
• The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions. The drive uses the L4-01 value as the forward/reverse detection
level.
and n4-72 = 1.
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-01 ± L4-02” or the range of frequency
reference ± L4-02.
Figure 12.95 User-Defined Speed Agree 1 Time Chart
■ 4: Frequency Detection 1
Parameter Details
4 Frequency Detection 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal deactivates when the output frequency > “L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level] + L4-02 [Speed Agree Detection
Width]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency is at the value of L4-01.
12

Note:
level.
and n4-72 = 1.
ON : The output frequency is less than the value of L4-01 or does not exceed the value of L4-01 +
L4-02.
OFF : The output frequency > L4-01 + L4-02.
Figure 12.96 Frequency Detection 1 Time Chart

Note:
Figure 12.96 shows the result of the configuration when L4-07 = 1 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = Detection Always Enabled]. The
default setting of L4-07 is 0 [No detection during baseblock]. When the speed agreement detection selection is “No Detection during
Baseblock”, the terminal is deactivated when the drive output stops.
The terminal activates when the output frequency > L4-01 [Speed Agree Detection Level]. After the terminal activates, the
terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of “L4-01 - L4-02”.
Note:
level.
and n4-72 = 1.
ON : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-01.
OFF : The output frequency < “L4-01 - L4-02”, or ≤ L4-01.
Figure 12.97 Frequency Detection 2 Time Chart
■ 6: Drive Ready
6 Drive Ready V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive is ready and running.
The terminal deactivates in these conditions:

• When the power supply is OFF
• During a fault
• When there is problem with the control power supply
• When there is a parameter setting error and the drive cannot operate although there is a Run command

• When you enter a Run command and it immediately triggers an overvoltage or undervoltage fault because the
drive has an overvoltage or undervoltage fault during stop
• When the drive is in Programming Mode and will not accept a Run command
• When the Safe Disable function is active
■ 7: DC Bus Undervoltage
7 DC Bus Undervoltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply is at the voltage set in L2-05 [Undervoltage
Detection Lvl (Uv1)] or less. The terminal also activates when there is a fault with the DC bus voltage.
ON : The DC bus voltage ≤ L2-05

OFF : The DC bus voltage > L2-05
■ 8: During Baseblock (N.O.)

8 During Baseblock (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching and does not
make DC bus voltage.
■ 9: Frequency Reference from Keypad

9 Frequency Reference from V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Keypad Shows the selected frequency reference source.
ON : The keypad is the frequency reference source.

OFF : b1-01 or b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 or 2] is the frequency reference source.
■ A: Run Command from Keypad

A Run Command Source V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Shows the selected Run command source.
ON : The keypad is the Run command source.

OFF : b1-02 or b1-16 [Run Command Selection 1 or 2] is the Run command source.
■ B: Torque Detection 1 (N.O.)

B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
ON : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque <
L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].
Note:
• When L6-01 ≥ 5, the drive will detect when the output current/torque is less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03.
• Refer to L6: Torque Detection on page 940 for more information.
■ C: Frequency Reference Loss

C Frequency Reference Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Parameter Details
The terminal activates when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference.
Note:
Refer to “L4-05: Fref Loss Detection Selection” for more information.
12

■ D: Braking Resistor Fault

D Braking Resistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the mounting-type braking resistor is overheating or when there is a braking transistor fault.
■ E: Fault
E Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects a fault.
Note:
The terminal will not activate for CPF00 and CPF01 [Control Circuit Error] faults.
■ F: Not Used
Use this setting for unused terminals or to use terminals in through mode. Also use this setting as the PLC contact output via
MEMOBUS/Modbus or the communication option. This signal does not function if you do not configure signals from the PLC.
■ 10: Alarm
10 Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects a minor fault.
■ 11: Fault Reset Command Active

11 Fault Reset Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Active The terminal activates when the drive receives the Reset command from the control circuit terminal, serial communications, or
the communication option.
■ 12: Timer Output

12 Timer Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Sets the terminal as the timer output. Use this setting with the timer input set in H1-xx = 18 [MFDI Function Selection = Timer
Function].
Note:
Refer to Timer Function Operation on page 705 for more information.
■ 13: Speed Agree 2

13 Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04 [Speed Agree Detection
Width (+/-)].
Note:
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “frequency reference ± L4-04”.

Figure 12.98 Speed Agree 2 Time Chart
■ 14: User-Set Speed Agree 2

14 User-Set Speed Agree 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level (+/-)] ± L4-04 [Speed
Agree Detection Width (+/-)] and in the range of the frequency reference ± L4-04.
Note:
ON : The output frequency is in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” and the range of frequency
reference ± L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is not in the range of “L4-03 ± L4-04” or the range of frequency
reference ± L4-04.
Figure 12.99 Example of User-set Speed Agree 2 (L4-03 Is Positive)

The terminal deactivates when the output frequency > “L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)] + L4-04 [Speed Agree
Detection Width(+/-)]”. After the terminal deactivates, the terminal stays deactivated until the output frequency is at the value of
L4-03.
Note:
Parameter Details
ON : The output frequency is less than the value of L4-03 or is not higher than the value of L4-03
+ L4-04.
OFF : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03 + L4-04.
12

Figure 12.100 Example of Frequency Detection 3 (value of L4-03 Is Positive)

Note:
Figure 12.100 shows the time chart when L4-07 = 1 [Speed Agree Detection Selection = Detection Always Enabled]. The default setting
of L4-07 is 0 [No detection during baseblock]. When the speed agreement detection selection is “No Detection during Baseblock”, the
terminal is deactivated when the drive output stops.

The terminal activates when the output frequency > L4-03 [Speed Agree Detection Level(+/-)]. After the terminal activates, the
terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of “L4-03 - L4-04”.
Note:
• The drive outputs the motor speed status if A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM].
ON : The output frequency is higher than the value of L4-03.
OFF : The output frequency is less than the value of “L4-03 - L4-04”, or it is not higher than the
value of L4-03.
Figure 12.101 Example of Frequency Detection 4 (value of L4-03 Is Positive)
■ 17: Torque Detection 1 (N.C.)

17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.
Use the L6 [Torque Detection] parameters to set torque detection.

OFF : The output current/torque > L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1], or the output current/torque
< L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1].
Note:
■ 18: Torque Detection 2 (N.O.)

18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.

ON : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque <
L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].

Note:
■ 19: Torque Detection 2 (N.C.)

19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal deactivates when the drive detects overtorque or undertorque.

OFF : The output current/torque > L6-05 [Torque Detection Level 2], or the output current/torque
< L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].
Note:
■ 1A: During Reverse

1A During Reverse V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the motor operates in the reverse direction.
ON : The motor is operating in the reverse direction.

OFF : The motor is operating in the forward direction or the motor stopped.
Figure 12.102 Reverse Operation Output Time Chart
■ 1B: During Baseblock (N.C.)

1B During Baseblock (N.C.) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal deactivates during baseblock. When the drive is in baseblock, the drive output transistor stops switching and does
not make DC bus voltage.

■ 1C: Motor 2 Selected

1C Motor 2 Selected V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when you select motor 2.
ON : Motor 2 Selected
OFF : Motor 1 Selected
■ 1D: During Regeneration

Parameter Details
1D During Regeneration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates on when the motor is regenerating.
ON : Motor is regenerating.
OFF : Motor is operating or stopped. 12

■ 1E: Executing Auto-Restart

1E Executing Auto-Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the Auto Restart function is trying to restart after a fault.
The terminal deactivates when the Auto Restart function automatically resets a fault. The terminal deactivates
when the Auto Restart function detects the fault again because there were too many restart attempts as specified
by L5-01 [Number of Auto Restart Attempts].
Note:
Refer to L5: Fault Restart on page 937 for more information.
■ 1F: Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)

1F Motor Overload Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(oL1) The terminal activates when the electronic thermal protection value of the motor overload protective function is a minimum of
90% of the detection level.
Note:
Refer to “L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection” for more information.
■ 20: Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm (oH)

20 Drive Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(oH) The terminal activates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8-02 [Overheat Alarm Level].
Note:
Refer to “L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level” for more information.
■ 21: Safe Torque OFF

21 Safety Monitor Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Status The terminal activates (safety stop state) when the safety circuit and safety diagnosis circuit are operating correctly and when
terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF (Open).
Note:
EDM = External Device Monitor
ON : Safety stop state
Terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are OFF or released (safety stop state).
OFF : Safety circuit fault or RUN/READY
Terminal H1-HC or terminal H2-HC is OFF or released (safety circuit fault), or the two terminals are ON or short
circuited (RUN/READY).
■ 22: Mechanical Weakening Detection

22 Mechanical Weakening V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Detection The terminal activates when the drive detects mechanical weakening.
Note:
Refer to “Mechanical Weakening Detection Function” for more information.
■ 2F: Maintenance Notification

2F Maintenance Notification V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when drive components are at their estimated maintenance period.
Tells the user about the maintenance period for these items:
• IGBT
• Cooling fan
• Capacitor


Note:
Refer to “Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors” for more information.
■ 30: During Torque Limit

30 During Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the torque reference is the torque limit set with L7 parameters, H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 [MFAI
Function Selection].
Note:
Refer to “L7: Torque Limit” for more information.
■ 31: During Speed Limit

31 During Speed Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the speed limit is active.
The speed limit activates and the terminal activates in these conditions:
• The frequency reference ≥ d2-01 [Frequency Reference Upper Limit]
• The frequency reference ≤ d2-02 [Frequency Reference Lower Limit] or d2-03 [Analog Frequency Ref Lower
Limit].
• The frequency reference ≤ E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] when b1-05 = 1, 2, or 3 [Operation Below
Minimum Freq = Baseblock (Motor Coasts), Operate at Minimum Frequency, or Operate at Zero Speed].
• The frequency reference ≤ Output Freq Lower Limit Level [H3-xx = 9] through analog input.
■ 32: In Speed Limit During Trq Ctrl

32 In Speed Limit During Trq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Ctrl The motor accelerates in the forward direction or the reverse direction after enabling torque control and the externally input
torque reference is disproportionate to the load. The output terminal activates when this speed is not higher than a constant
speed and the motor speed is at the speed limit. This does not include operation when the drive is stopped.
Note:
Refer to “d5-03: Speed Limit Selection” for more information.
■ 33: Zero Servo Complete

33 Zero Servo Complete V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when positioning in the range set with b9-02 [Zero Servo Completion Window] completes after sending
the Zero-Servo command.
Note:
Refer to “b9: Zero Servo” for more information.
■ 37: During Frequency Output

37 During Frequency Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive outputs frequency.
ON : The drive is outputting frequency.

OFF : The drive is not outputting frequency.
Note:
The terminal deactivates in these conditions:
• During Stop
Parameter Details
• During Baseblock
• During DC Injection Braking (initial excitation)
• During Short Circuit Braking
• Pole Position Detection Complete
12

Figure 12.103 Active Frequency Output Time Chart

Note:
Refer to Notes for Elevator or Lift Applications on page 669 for elevator or lift instructions.
■ 38: Drive Enabled

38 Drive Enabled V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
This terminal activates when the H1-xx = 6A [Drive Enable] terminal activates.
■ 39: Watt Hour Pulse Output

39 Watt Hour Pulse Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Note:
Refer to “H2-06: Watt Hour Output Unit Selection” for more information.
■ 3C: LOCAL Control Selected

3C LOCAL Control Selected V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the Run command source or frequency reference source is LOCAL.
ON : LOCAL
The keypad is the Run command source or the frequency reference source.
OFF : REMOTE
The Run command source or frequency reference source is an external source set with b1-01 [Frequency
Reference Selection 1], b1-15 [Frequency Reference Selection 2], b1-02 [Run Command Selection 1], or b1-16
[Run Command Selection 2].
■ 3D: During Speed Search

3D During Speed Search V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive is doing speed search.
Note:
Refer to “b3: Speed Search” for more information.
■ 3E: PID Feedback Low

3E PID Feedback Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects FbL [PID Feedback Loss].
The drive detects FbL [PID Feedback Loss] when the PID feedback value < b5-13 [PID Feedback Loss Detection
Lvl] for longer than b5-14 [PID Feedback Loss Detection Time].
Note:
Refer to PID Feedback Loss Detection on page 709 for more information.

■ 3F: PID Feedback High

3F PID Feedback High V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects FbH [Excessive PID Feedback].
The drive detects FbH [Excessive PID Feedback] when the PID feedback value > b5-36 [PID High Feedback
Detection Lvl] for longer than b5-37 [PID High Feedback Detection Time].
Note:
Refer to PID Feedback Loss Detection on page 709 for more information.
■ 4A: During KEB Ride-Thru

4A During KEB Ride-Thru V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The activates during KEB Ride-Thru.
Note:
Refer to KEB Ride-Thru Function on page 917 for more information.
■ 4B: During Short Circuit Braking

4B During Short Circuit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Braking The terminal activates during Short Circuit Braking.
Note:
■ 4C: During Fast Stop

4C During Fast Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the fast stop is in operation.
■ 4D: oH Pre-Alarm Time Limit

4D oH Pre-Alarm Time Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when L8-03 = 4 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection = Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)] and oH [Heatsink
Overheat] does not clear after the drive decreases the frequency for 10 cycles.
Note:
Refer to “L8-03: Overheat Pre-Alarm Ope Selection” for more information about drive derating operation.
■ 4E: Braking Transistor Fault (rr)

4E Braking Transistor Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(rr) The terminal activates when the internal braking transistor overheats and the drive detects an rr [Dynamic Braking Transistor
Fault] fault.
■ 4F: Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)

4F Braking Resistor Overheat V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
(rH) The terminal activates when the braking resistor overheats and the drive detects an rH [Braking Resistor Overheat] fault.
The braking resistor overheats when the deceleration time is short and there is too much motor regeneration
Parameter Details
energy.
■ 60: Internal Cooling Fan Failure

60 Internal Cooling Fan V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Failure The terminal activates when the drive detects a cooling fan failure in the drive.
12

■ 61: Pole Position Detection Complete

61 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Complete The terminal activates when drive receives a Run command and the drive detects the motor magnetic pole position of the PM
motor.
■ 62: Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied

62 Modbus Reg 1 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Satisfied The terminal activates when the bit specified by H2-08 [Modbus Register 1 Bit Select] for the MEMOBUS register address set
with H2-07 [Modbus Register 1 Address Select] activates.
■ 63: Modbus Reg 2 Status Satisfied

63 Modbus Reg 2 Status V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Satisfied The terminal activates when the bit specified by H2-10 [Modbus Register 2 Bit Select] for the MEMOBUS register address set
with H2-09 [Modbus Register 2 Address Select] activates.
■ 65: Standby Output

65 Standby Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal deactivates after the drive stops operating and after the time set with b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait Time].
ON : The Run command turns on and the magnetic contactor on the input side turns on.
OFF : The Run command turns off and the drive stops operating. Then, the magnetic contactor
on the input side turns off after the time set with b8-51 [Standby Mode Wait Time] elapses.
■ 66: Comparator1
66 Comparator1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates if the monitor value set with H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor Selection] is in range of the values of H2-21
[Comparator 1 Lower Limit] and H2-22 [Comparator 1 Upper Limit] for the time set in H2-24 [Comparator 1 On-Delay
Time].

A - H2-24 B - H2-25
[Comparator 1 On-Delay Time] [Comparator 1 Off-Delay Time]
Figure 12.104 Comparator 1 Output Time Chart

Note:
The drive compares the monitors set with H2-20 as absolute values.
■ 67: Comparator2
67 Comparator2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates if the monitor value set with H2-26 [Comparator 2 Monitor Selection] is not in the range of the values of
H2-27 [Comparator 2 Lower Limit] and H2-28 [Comparator 2 Upper Limit] for the time set in H2-30 [Comparator 2 On-
Delay Time].
A - H2-30 B - H2-31
[Comparator 2 On-Delay Time] [Comparator 2 Off-Delay Time]
Figure 12.105 Comparator 2 Output Time Chart

Note:
The drive compares the monitors set with H2-26 as absolute values.
■ 69: External Power 24V Supply

69 External Power 24V Supply V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when there is an external 24V power supply between terminals PS-AC.
ON : The external 24V power supply is supplying power.

OFF : The external 24V power supply is not supplying power.
■ 6A: Data Logger Error

Parameter Details
6A Data Logger Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The terminal activates when the drive detects a LoG [Com Error / Abnormal SD card].
12

■ 90 to 93: DWEZ Digital Outputs 1 to 4

90 to 93 DWEZ Digital Outputs 1 to V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
4 Sets the DriveWorksEZ digital output. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more information.
■ A0 to A7: DWEZ Extended Digital Outputs 1 to 8

A0 to A7 DWEZ Extended Digital V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Outputs 1 to 8 Sets the digital output for the DriveWorksEZ DO-A3 option card. Refer to the DriveWorksEZ online manual for more
information.
■ 100 to 1A7: Inverse Outputs of 0 to A7

100 to 1A7 Inverse Outputs of 0 to A7 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Causes inverse output of the function for the selected MFDO. Uses the last two digits of 1xx to select which function to
inversely output.
For example, set H2-xx = 10E for the inverse output of E [Fault].
◆ H3: Analog Inputs

Drives have three analog input terminals, terminals A1, A2, and A3. H3 parameters select the functions set to
these analog input terminals and adjust signal levels.
Table 12.71 shows the functions that you can set to analog input terminals. Use H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10 [MFAI
Function Selection] to set functions.
Table 12.71 MFAI Setting Values
Setting Setting
Value Function Ref. Value Function Ref.
0 Frequency Reference 890 E Motor Temperature (PTC Input) 893
1 Frequency Gain 891 F Not Used 894
2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1 891 10 Forward Torque Limit 894
3 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2 891 11 Reverse Torque Limit 895
4 Output Voltage Bias 891 12 Regenerative Torque Limit 895
5 Accel/Decel Time Gain 892 13 Torque Reference / Torque Limit 895
6 DC Injection Braking Current 892 14 Torque Compensation 895
7 Torque Detection Level 892 15 General Torque Limit 895
8 Stall Prevent Level During Run 892 16 Differential PID Feedback 895
9 Output Frequency Lower Limit 893 1F Not Used 896
B PID Feedback 893 30 DWEZ Analog Input 1 896
C PID Setpoint 893 31 DWEZ Analog Input 2 896
D Frequency Bias 893 32 DWEZ Analog Input 3 896
Note:
All analog input scaling uses gain and bias for adjustment. Set the gain and bias values correctly.

Example
Analog Input Setting of Terminal A1 Frequency Reference
Settings
Frequency • H3-02 = 0 [Terminal A1 Function • When you input a 10 V signal, the frequency reference will be 200%.
reference with the Selection = Frequency Reference] • When you input a 5 V signal, the frequency reference will be 100%.
gain setting • H3-03: 200.0 [Terminal A1 Gain
adjusted When you input a 5 V or more signal, E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] will limit the drive output and the
Setting = 200%] frequency reference will be 100%.
• H3-04 = 0.0 [Terminal A1 Bias
Setting = 0.0%]
Frequency • H3-02 = 0 [Frequency Reference] • When you input a 0 V signal, the frequency reference will be -25%.
reference with the • H3-03 = 100.0 [100.0%] • When H3-01 = 0 [Terminal A1 Signal Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0)]:
negative number
bias set • H3-04 = -25.0 [-25.0%] – When you input a 0 V to 2 V signal, the frequency reference will be 0%.
– When you input a 2 V to 10 V signal, the frequency reference will be 0% to 100%.
• When H3-01 = 1 [-10 to +10V (Bipolar Reference)]:
– When you input a 0 V to 2 V signal, it enables signals of positive and negative polarities and the motor
rotates in reverse.
■ MEMOBUS/Modbus Multi-Function AI1 to 3 Function Selection

Let the MFAI function be assigned to MEMOBUS/Modbus register 15C1 to 15C3 (Hex.) [Mbus Reg 15C1h
through 15C3h Input Function]. Use H3-40 to H3-42 [Mbus Reg 15C1h through 15C3h Input Function] to set the
function and use H3-43 [Mbus Reg Inputs FilterTime Const] to set the input filter.
Table 12.72 MEMOBUS Multi-Function AI Command Register
Register No.
Name Range *1 Parameter
(Hex.)
15C1 Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function -32767 to 32767 H3-40
*1 Set as 100% = 4096.

Parameter Details
Figure 12.106 Functional Block Diagram for MEMOBUS Multi-Function AI Command 1
12

Note:
• Refer to H3-xx “MFAI Setting Values” for the analog input setting values.
• When you will not use the terminal, set H3-40 to H3-42 = F. The through mode function is not supported.
• You cannot use H3-40 to H3-42 to set these MFAI terminals:
H3-xx Setting Value Function
0 Frequency Reference
1 Frequency Gain
2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1
3 Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2
30 DWEZ Analog Input 1
■ H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0410) Select Sets the input signal level for MFAI terminal A1. (0 - 3)

The voltage signal is 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level limit is 0%. The drive will read a negative input
signal caused by gain and bias settings as 0%.
The voltage signal is -10 Vdc to 10 Vdc. Signals of both positive and negative polarities are enabled. When the
drive uses this setting as the frequency reference, a Forward Run command will run the motor in reverse and a
Reverse Run command will run the motor forward. The gain and bias settings will cause the signal to be a
negative number.
2 : 4 to 20 mA
The current signal is 4 mA to 20 mA. The minimum input level limit is 0%. The minimum input level is limited to
0%, so that a negative input signal due to gain and bias settings will be read as 0%.
3 : 0 to 20 mA
Note:
When H3-01 = 0, 1, set DIP switch S1-1 to the V side (voltage). When H3-01 = 2, 3, set DIP switch S1-1 to the I side (current). The
default setting is the V side (voltage).
■ H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-02 Terminal A1 Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
■ H3-03: Terminal A1 Gain Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(0411) Sets the gain of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
This parameter sets the quantity of reference for the function set for terminal A1 as a percentage when 10 V (or 20
mA) is input.
Use this parameter and H3-04 [Terminal A1 Bias Setting] to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to
terminal A1.

■ H3-04: Terminal A1 Bias Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0412) Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A1. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
This parameter sets the bias for the function set for terminal A1 as a percentage when 0 V (4 mA or 0 mA) is
input.
Use this parameter and H3-03 [Terminal A1 Gain Setting] to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to
terminal A1.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

The voltage signal is 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level limit is 0%. The drive will read a negative input
signal caused by gain and bias settings as 0%.
negative number.
2 : 4 to 20 mA
3 : 0 to 20 mA
Note:
When H3-05 = 0, 1, set DIP switch S1-3 to the V side (voltage). When H3-05 = 2, 3, set DIP switch S1-3 to the I side (current). The
default setting is the V side (voltage).

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Note:
When terminal A3 is the PTC input terminal:
• Set H3-06 = E [Motor Temperature (PTC input)]
• Set DIP switch S4 to the PTC side
• Set DIP switch S1-3 to the V side

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
RUN
When 10 V (or 20 mA) is input, this parameter sets the reference quantity for the function set for terminal A3 as a
percentage.
terminal A3.
12


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0416) Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A3. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
When 0 V (4 mA or 0 mA) is input, this parameter sets the bias for the function set for terminal A3 as a
percentage.
terminal A3.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

The voltage signal is 0 Vdc to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal
due to gain and bias settings will be read as 0%.
negative number.
2 : 4 to 20 mA
The current signal is 4 mA to 20 mA. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal
3 : 0 to 20 mA
The current signal is 0 mA to 20 mA. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal
Note:
When H3-09 = 0, 1, set DIP switch S1-2 to the V side (voltage). When H3-09 = 2, 3, set DIP switch S1-2 to the I side (current).

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
When 10 V (or 20 mA) is input, this parameter sets the reference quantity for the function set for terminal A2 as a
percentage.
terminal A2.


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(041A) Sets the bias of the analog signal input to MFAI terminal A2. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
When 0 V (4 mA or 0 mA) is input, this parameter sets the bias for the function set for terminal A2 as a
percentage.
terminal A2.
■ H3-13: Analog Input FilterTime Constant

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-13 Analog Input FilterTime V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.03 s
(041B) Constant Sets the time constant for primary delay filters on MFAI terminals. (0.00 - 2.00 s)
Apply the primary delay filter to the analog input to enable an analog input signal without the use of high-
frequency noise components. An analog input filter prevents irregular drive control. Drive operation becomes
more stable as the programmed time becomes longer, but it also becomes less responsive to quickly changing
analog signals.
■ H3-14: Analog Input Terminal Enable Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-14 Analog Input Terminal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 7
(041C) Enable Sel Sets the enabled terminal or terminals when H1-xx = C [MFDI Function Select = Analog (1 - 7)
Terminal Enable Selection] is ON.
Input signals do not have an effect on terminals not set as targets.

7 : Terminals A1, A2, and A3
Note:
• The ON/OFF operation of terminal Sx set in Analog Terminal Input Selection [H1-xx = C] has an effect on only the analog input
terminal selected with H3-14.
• When H1-xx ≠ C, the functions set to terminals A1 to A3 are always enabled.
■ H3-16: Terminal A1 Offset

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-16 Terminal A1 Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(02F0) Sets the offset level for analog signals input to terminal A1. Usually it is not necessary to change (-500 - +500)
this setting.
Adds the offset value for the analog input value. For voltage input, this parameter will set the offset when a signal
of 0 V is input. For current input, this parameter will set the offset when a signal of 4 mA [H3-01= 2] or 0 mA
[H3-01 = 3] is input.
Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
this setting.
12

of 0 V is input. For current input, this parameter will set the offset when a signal of 4 mA [H3-09 = 2] or 0 mA
[H3-09 = 3] is input.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
this setting.
of 0 V is input. For current input, this parameter will set the offset when a signal of 4 mA [H3-05 = 2] or 0 mA
[H3-05 = 3] is input.
■ H3-40: Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-40 Mbus Reg 15C1h Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(0B5C) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI1 function. (4 - 2F)
You can use the MFAI function from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Use this parameter to set the
function. Sets the function for MEMOBUS/Modbus register 15C1h.
Refer to Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings on page 890 for the setting values.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0B5F) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI2 function. (4 - 2F)
function. Sets the function for MEMOBUS/Modbus register 15C2h.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(0B62) Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI3 function. (4 - 2F)
function. Sets the input for the function in MEMOBUS/Modbus register 15C3.
■ H3-43: Mbus Reg Inputs FilterTime Const

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H3-43 Mbus Reg Inputs V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(117F) FilterTime Const Sets the time constant to apply a primary delay filter to the MEMOBUS analog input register (0.00 - 2.00 s)
values.
◆ Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings

This section gives information about the functions set with H3-02, H3-06, and H3-10.
■ 0: Frequency Reference
0 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The input value from the MFAI terminal set with this function becomes the master frequency reference.

• You can copy the configuration to more than one of the analog input terminals A1 through A3. When you set
more than one analog input terminal with the master frequency reference, the sum value becomes the frequency
bias.
• If you use this function to set the analog input value as the master frequency reference, set b1-01 = 1
[Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Analog Input]. This setting value is the default value for terminals A1 and
A2.
• The frequency reference is the sum of the input values for terminals A1 and A2 when they are used at the same
time. For example, when a 20% bias is input to terminal A2 while a frequency reference of 50% is input from
terminal A1, the calculated frequency reference will be 70% of the maximum output frequency.
■ 1: Frequency Gain
1 Frequency Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
The drive multiplies the analog frequency reference with the input value from the MFAI set with this function.
Example: When you set frequency gain for terminal A2

• H3-10 = 1 [Terminal A2 Function Selection = Frequency Gain]
• A 50% frequency gain is input to terminal A2
• A frequency reference of 80% is input from terminal A1
The calculated frequency reference is 40% of the maximum output frequency.
■ 2: Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1

2 Auxiliary Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Reference 1 Sets Reference 2 through multi-step speed reference to enable the command reference (Auxiliary Frequency Reference 1) from
the analog input terminal set here. This value is a percentage where the Maximum Output Frequency setting is a setting value of
100%.
■ 3: Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2

3 Auxiliary Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Reference 2 Sets Reference 3 through multi-step speed reference to enable the command reference (Auxiliary Frequency Reference 2) from
the analog input terminal set here. This value is a percentage where the Maximum Output Frequency setting is a setting value of
100%.
■ 4: Output Voltage Bias

4 Output Voltage Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Set this parameter to input a bias signal and amplify the output voltage.
The gain (%) for the MFAI terminals A1, A2, and A3 is 100% of the voltage class standard, which is 200 V for
200 V class drives and 400 V for 400 V class drives. The bias (%) for MFAI terminals A1, A2, and A3 is 100% of
the voltage configured for E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage].
Note:
The gain for each terminal A1, A2, and A3 is configured independently with H3-03 [Terminal A1 Gain Setting], H3-11 [Terminal A2
Gain Setting], and H3-07 [Terminal A3 Gain Setting]. The bias for each terminal A1, A2, and A3 is configured independently with H3-
04 [Terminal A1 Bias Setting], H3-12 [Terminal A2 Bias Setting], and H3-08 [Terminal A3 Bias Setting].
Parameter Details
Figure 12.107 Output Voltage Bias through Analog Input
12

■ 5: Accel/Decel Time Gain

5 Accel/Decel Time Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters a signal to adjust the gain used for C1-01 to C1-08 [Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 to 4] and C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]
when the full scale analog signal (10 V or 20 mA) is 100%.
When you enable C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1], the acceleration time is:
Acceleration Time 1 = Setting value of C1-01 × acceleration and deceleration time gain / 100
Figure 12.108 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain through Analog Input
■ 6: DC Injection Braking Current

6 DC Injection Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Current Enters a signal to adjust the current level used for DC Injection Braking when the drive rated output current is 100%.
Note:
When you set this function, it will disable the setting value of b2-02 [DC Injection Braking Current].
Figure 12.109 DC Injection Braking Current through Analog Input
■ 7: Torque Detection Level

7 Torque Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters a signal to adjust the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
When A1-02 = 0, 1, 5 [Control Method Selection = V/f, CL-V/f, OLV/PM], the drive rated current is 100%. When
A1-02 = 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 [OLV, CLV, AOLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV], the motor rated torque is 100%.
Note:
Use this function with L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1]. This parameter functions as an alternative to L6-02 [Torque Detection
Level 1].
■ 8: Stall Prevent Level During Run

8 Stall Prevent Level During V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Run Enters a signal to adjust the stall prevention level during run if the drive rated current is 100%.
Note:
The Stall Prevent Level During Run is based on the smaller of these two values:
• Analog input value of MFAI terminal
• L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run]

Figure 12.110 Stall Prevention Level during Run with Analog Input
■ 9: Output Frequency Lower Limit

9 Output Frequency Lower V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Limit Enters a signal to adjust the output frequency lower limit level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
■ B: PID Feedback
B PID Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enter the PID feedback value as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
When you use this function, set b5-01 = 1 to 8 [PID Mode Setting = Enabled].
■ C: PID Setpoint
C PID Setpoint V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the PID setpoint as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
When you use this function, set b5-01 = 1 to 8 [PID Mode Setting = Enabled].
Note:
Configuring this function disables the frequency reference set with b1-01 [Frequency Reference Selection 1].
■ D: Frequency Bias
D Frequency Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the bias value added to the frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
The drive adds the input value from the MFAI terminal set with this function to the frequency reference as the bias
value.
Note:
When you select d1-01 to d1-16 or d1-17 [Reference 1 to 16 or JOG Frequency Reference] as the frequency reference, it will disable
this function.
■ E: Motor Temperature (PTC Input)

E Motor Temperature (PTC V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Input) Uses the motor Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to prevent heat damage to the motor as a percentage of the
current value when the 10 V analog signal is input.
• You can use the Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor as an auxiliary or alternative detection
function for oL1 [Motor Overload] problems to help prevent heat damage to motors. If the PTC input signal is
more than the overload alarm level, oH3 [Motor Overheat (PTC Input)] will flash on the keypad.
• When the drive detects oH3, the motor stops with the setting in L1-03. When the drive detects oH4, the motor
Parameter Details
stops with the setting in L1-04. When the drive incorrectly detects motor overheating problems, set L1-05.
12

■ F: Not Used
When you set a terminal that is not in use to F, you can use the signal input to the terminal as PLC analog signal
input through MEMOBUS/Modbus communications or the communication option. This input signal does not
have an effect on drive operation. This functions the same as setting 1F (Through Mode).
■ 10: Forward Torque Limit

10 Forward Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the forward torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Set correct torque limits for applications, for example elevator applications. If you set
torque limits incorrectly, motor torque that is not sufficient can cause damage to equipment and cause serious injury or death.
Torque Limit Configuration Method
Use one of these methods to set torque limits:
• Individually set the four torque limit quadrants using L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].
• Use MFAI to individually set the four torque limit quadrants. Set H3-02, H3-06, H3-10 = 10, 11, 12 [MFAI
Function Select = Forward/Reverse/Regenerative Torque Limit].
• Use MFAI to set all four torque limit quadrants together. Set H3-02, H3-06, H3-10 = 15 [General Torque
Limit].
• Use a communication option to set all four torque limit quadrants together.
Figure 12.111 shows the configuration method for each quadrant.
Figure 12.111 Torque Limits and Analog Input Setting Parameters

Note:
• When L7-01 to L7-04 and analog inputs or communication option torque limits set torque limits for the same quadrant, the lower value
is enabled.
In this example of parameter settings, the torque limit for quadrant 1 is 130% and the torque limit for quadrants 2, 3, and 4 is 150%.
Settings: L7-01 = 130%, L7-02 to L7-04 = 200%, and MFAI torque limit = 150%
• The drive output current limits maximum output torque. The torque limit is 150% of the rated output current for HD and to 120% of
the rated output current for ND. The actual output torque is not more than the limits of the drive rated output current when you set the
torque limit to a high value.
If you use drives in applications where the vertical axis can fall, make sure that you know these items:
• Correctly configure drives and motors.
• Correctly set parameters.
• You can change parameter values after you do Auto-Tuning.
• Use a system that will not let the vertical axis fall if the drive fails.
Figure 12.112 shows the relation between torque limits from parameters and torque limits from analog input.

Figure 12.112 Torque Limits from Parameters and Analog Inputs
■ 11: Reverse Torque Limit

11 Reverse Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the load torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
Note:
When you use L7-01 to L7-04 and analog inputs to set torque limits for the same quadrant, it will enable the lower torque limit.
■ 12: Regenerative Torque Limit

12 Regenerative Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the regenerative torque limit if the motor rated torque is 100%.
Note:
■ 13: Torque Reference / Torque Limit

13 Torque Reference / Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Limit Enters the torque reference if the motor rated torque is 100%. This setting is the torque limit for speed control.
Note:
■ 14: Torque Compensation

14 Torque Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the torque compensation value if the motor rated torque is 100%.
■ 15: General Torque Limit

15 General Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the torque limit that is the same for all quadrants for forward, reverse, and regenerative operation if the motor rated
torque is 100%.
Parameter Details
■ 16: Differential PID Feedback

16 Differential PID Feedback V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
Enters the PID differential feedback value if the full scale analog signal (10 V or 20 mA) is 100%.
12

The drive uses the deviation between the PID feedback and the differential feedback value signals to calculate the
PID input.
■ 1F: Not Used

1F Not Used V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV
When you set a terminal that you do not use to 1F, you can use the signal that is input to that terminal as the PLC
analog signal input from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications or the communication option. This input signal
does not have an effect on drive operation. This signal functions the same as F (Through Mode).
■ 30: DWEZ Analog Input 1

30 DWEZ Analog Input 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV


◆ H4: Analog Outputs

H4 parameters set the drive analog monitors. These parameters select monitor parameters, adjust gain and bias,
and select output signal levels.
■ Calibrate Meters Connected to MFAO Terminals FM and AM

To calibrate the meters connected to terminals FM and AM, use these parameters:
• H4-02 [Terminal FM Analog Output Gain]
• H4-03 [Terminal FM Analog Output Bias]
• H4-05 [Terminal AM Analog Output Gain]
• H4-06 [Terminal AM Analog Output Bias]
Set these parameters where the output voltage of 10 V and output current of 20 mA are 100% of the signal level.
Use jumper switch S5 and H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select] or H4-08 [Terminal AM Signal Level Select]
to select the voltage output and current output.
No. Name Range Default
H4-02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain -999.9 - +999.9% 100.0%
H4-03 Terminal FM Analog Output Bias -999.9 - +999.9% 0.0%
H4-05 Terminal AM Analog Output Gain -999.9 - +999.9% 50.0%
H4-06 Terminal AM Analog Output Bias -999.9 - +999.9% 0.0%
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level Select 1: -10 to +10 Vdc 0
2: 4 to 20 mA
0: 0 to 10 Vdc
H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level Select 1: -10 to +10 Vdc 0
2: 4 to 20 mA
Figure 12.113 and Figure 12.114 show the gain and bias.

Figure 12.113 Analog Output Gain/Bias Configuration Example 1

For example, when the parameter value set to analog output is 0, and a 3 V signal is output to terminal FM, H4-03
[Terminal FM Analog Output Bias] is set to 30%.
Figure 12.114 Analog Output Gain/Bias Configuration Example 2

Calibrate Terminal FM
Stop the drive to calibrate meters. Use this procedure to calibrate:
1. Show H4-02 [Terminal FM Analog Output Gain] on the keypad.
Terminal FM outputs the analog signal when the monitor item that you set in H4-01 [Terminal FM Analog
Output Select] is 100%.
2. Adjust H4-02 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal FM.
3. Show H4-03 [Terminal FM Analog Output Bias] on the keypad.
Terminal FM outputs the analog signal when the monitor item that you set in H4-01 is 0%.
4. Adjust H4-03 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal FM.
Calibrate Terminal AM
Stop the drive to calibrate meters. Use this procedure to calibrate:
1. Show H4-05 [Terminal AM Analog Output Gain] on the keypad.
Terminal AM outputs the analog signal when the monitor item that you set in H4-04 [Terminal AM Analog
Output Select] is 100%.
2. Adjust H4-05 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal AM.
3. Show H4-06 [Terminal AM Analog Output Bias] on the keypad.
Terminal AM outputs the analog signal when the monitor item that you set in H4-04 is 0%.
4. Adjust H4-06 while referencing the meter scale connected to terminal AM.
■ H4-01: Terminal FM Analog Output Select

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-01 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
(041D) Output Select Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal FM. (000 - 9999)
12

Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H4-01 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
monitor Ud-01.
• When you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to 000 or 031. You can set the terminal FM output level from the PLC
■ H4-02: Terminal FM Analog Output Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-02 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(041E) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
The analog signal output from the FM terminal is a maximum of ±10 V (or 20 mA). Select the signal level with
H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select].
■ H4-03: Terminal FM Analog Output Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-03 Terminal FM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(041F) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal FM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
The analog signal output from the FM terminal is a maximum of ±10 V (or 20 mA). Select the signal level with
H4-07 [Terminal FM Signal Level Select].
■ H4-04: Terminal AM Analog Output Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-04 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 103
(0420) Output Select Sets the monitoring number (Ux-xx) to be output from MFAO terminal AM. (000 - 9999)
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H4-04 = 103 to monitor U1-03 [Output Current].
monitor Ud-01.
• When you use the terminal in through mode, set this parameter to 000 or 031. You can set the terminal AM output level from the PLC
■ H4-05: Terminal AM Analog Output Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-05 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0%
(0421) Output Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
The analog signal output from the AM terminal is a maximum of ±10 V (or 20 mA). Select the signal level with
H4-08 [Terminal AM Signal Level Select].
Example settings:
When the output current of a monitoring item is 100% (drive rated current) in these examples, the voltage of AM
terminal outputs at 5 V (50% of 10 V). Subsequently, the output current at the time the AM terminal outputs a
maximum voltage of 10 V will be 200% of the drive rated current.
• H4-04 = 103 [Terminal AM Analog Output Select = Output Current]
• H4-05 = 50.0%
• H4-06 = 0.0% [Terminal AM Analog Output Bias = 0.0%]
• H4-08 = 0 [0 to 10 V]

■ H4-06: Terminal AM Analog Output Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-06 Terminal AM Analog V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0422) Output Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from MFAO terminal AM. (-999.9 - +999.9%)
RUN
The analog signal output from the AM terminal is a maximum of ±10 V (or 20 mA). Select the signal level with
H4-08 [Terminal AM Signal Level Select].
■ H4-07: Terminal FM Signal Level Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0423) Select Sets the MFAO terminal FM output signal level. (0 - 2)
Note:
Set jumper S5 on the control circuit terminal block accordingly when changing these parameters.
0 : 0 to 10 Vdc
1 : -10 to +10 Vdc
2 : 4 to 20 mA
■ H4-08: Terminal AM Signal Level Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0424) Select Sets the MFAO terminal AM output signal level. (0 - 2)
Note:
Set jumper S5 on the control circuit terminal block accordingly when changing these parameters.
0 : 0 to 10 Vdc
1 : -10 to +10 Vdc
2 : 4 to 20 mA
■ H4-20: Analog Power Monitor 100% Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H4-20 Analog Power Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 kW
(0B53) 100% Level Sets the level at 10 V when U1-08 [Output Power] is set for analog output. (0.00 - 1000.0 kW)
Note:
• When H4-20 = 0.00 kW, the output power monitor 10 V level = motor rated power. The setting changes when the A1-02 [Control
Method Selection] value changes:
–A1-02 = 0, 1 [V/f, CL-V/f]: E2-11 [Motor Rated Power]
–A1-02 = 2, 3, 4 [OLV, CLV, AOLV]: E2-11 [Motor Rated Power]
–A1-02 = 5, 6, 7 [OLV/PM, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM]: E5-02 [PM Motor Rated Power]
–A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV]: E9-07 [Motor Rated Power]
• On drive models 2xxx, and 4002 to 4675, the setting unit is 0.01 kW. The setting range is 0.00 kW to 650.00 kW.
On drive models 4810 to 4H12, the setting unit is 0.1 kW. The setting range is 0.0 kW to 1000.0 kW.
◆ H5: Memobus/Modbus Communication

H5 parametersconfigure the drive to use MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
You can use the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol over the RS-485 port (terminals D+ and D-) in the drive to use
Parameter Details
serial communication with programmable controllers (PLC).
12

■ H5-01: Drive Node Address

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-01 Drive Node Address V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1FH
(0425) Sets the communication slave address for drives. (0 - FFH)
Note:
• Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
• Setting 0 will not let the drive respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
To enable the drive to communicate with the controller (master) over MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, you
must set the drive with a slave address. Set H5-01 ≠ 0.
Set a node address that is different from the master and other slave devices.
■ H5-02: Communication Speed Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-02 Communication Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(0426) Selection Sets the communications speed for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 8)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19.2 kbps
5 : 38.4 kbps
6 : 57.6 kbps
7 : 76.8 kbps
8 : 115.2 kbps
■ H5-03: Communication Parity Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-03 Communication Parity V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0427) Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. (0 - 2)
Note:
Re-energize the drive or set H5-20 = 1 [Communication Parameters Reload = Reload Now] after you change the parameter setting.
0 : No parity
1 : Even parity
2 : Odd parity
■ H5-04: Communication Error Stop Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-04 Communication Error Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(0428) Method Sets the motor Stopping Method when the drive detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] (0 - 3)
issues.
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.

3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows CE and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
■ H5-05: Comm Fault Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-05 Comm Fault Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0429) Selection Sets the function that detects CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues during MEMOBUS/ (0, 1)
Modbus communications.
If the drive does not receive data from the master during the time set in H5-09 [CE Detection Time], it will detect
a CE error.
0 : Disabled
Does not detect CE. The drive continues operation.
1 : Enabled
Detects CE. If the drive detects CE, it will operate as specified by the setting of H5-04 [Communication Error
Stop Method].
■ H5-06: Drive Transmit Wait Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms
(042A) Sets the time to wait to send a response message after the drive receives a command message (0 - 65 ms)
from the master.
Figure 12.115 Drive Transmit Wait Time
■ H5-09: CE Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-09 CE Detection Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.0 s
(0435) Sets the detection time for CE [Modbus Communication Error] issues when communication (0.0 - 10.0 s)
stops.
■ H5-10: Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-10 Modbus Register 0025H V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0436) Unit Sel Sets the unit of measure used for the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications monitor register (0, 1)
0025H (output voltage reference monitor).
0 : 0.1 V units
1 : 1 V units
■ H5-11: Comm ENTER Command Mode

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-11 Comm ENTER Command V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(043C) Mode Sets the function to make the Enter command necessary to change parameters through (0, 1)
12

0 : ENTER Command Required

You must use the Enter command to enable changes to parameters. Make all parameter changes then input the
Enter command.
1 : ENTER Command Not Required
It is not necessary to input the Enter command to change parameters.
■ H5-12: Run Command Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-12 Run Command Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(043D) Selection Sets the input method for the Run command when b1-02 = 2 [Run Command Selection 1 = (0, 1)
Memobus/Modbus Communications] or b1-16 = 2 [Run Command Selection 2 = Memobus/
Modbus Communications].
0 : FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
The drive uses bit 0 in command data 0001H of the MEMOBUS register in the motor forward Run command (bit
0 = 1) and the stop command (bit 0 = 0). The drive uses bit 1 in the motor reverse Run command (bit 1 = 1) and
the stop command (bit 1 = 0).
1 : Run/Stop, FWD/REV
The drive uses bit 0 in command data 0001H of the MEMOBUS register in the motor Run command (bit 0 = 1)
and the stop command (bit 0 = 0). The drive uses bit 1 in the direction of motor rotation command (Forward run
(bit1 = 0) or Reverse run (bit 1 = 1)).
■ H5-17: ENTER command response @CPU BUSY

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-17 ENTER command response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11A1) @CPU BUSY Sets operation when the EEPROM write command is sent without EEPROM write available. (0, 1)
0 : Ignore Command(No ROM/RAM Write)

1 : Write to RAM Only
■ H5-18: Motor Speed Filter over Comms

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-18 Motor Speed Filter over V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms
(11A2) Comms Sets the filter time constant used when monitoring motor speed during MEMOBUS/Modbus (0 - 100 ms)
communications or with a communication option.
Sets the filter time constant when you monitor the output frequency or motor speed during MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications or use of the communication option.
These are the MEMOBUS registers:
• 003EH (Output Frequency)
• 003FH (Output Frequency)
• 0044H (U1-05: Motor Speed)
• 00ACH (U1-05: Motor Speed)
• 00ADH (U1-05: Motor Speed)
■ H5-20: Communication Parameters Reload

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-20 Communication Parameters V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B57) Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (0, 1)
parameters.

1 : Reload Now

Note:
• The setting value automatically returns to H5-20 = 0 after you enable MEMOBUS/Modbus communications parameter changes.
• The setting values of these parameters are enabled:
–H5-01 [Drive Node Address]
–H5-02 [Communication Speed Selection]
–H5-03 [Communication Parity Selection]
–H5-06 [Drive Transmit Wait Time]
■ H5-22: Speed Search from MODBUS

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-22 Speed Search from V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11CF) MODBUS Enables the MEMOBUS/Modbus communication register Speed Search function (bit0 of (0, 1)
15DFH).
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
If you set H5-22 = 1 and H1-xx = 62 [Speed Search from Fref] at the same time, the drive will detect oPE03
■ H5-25: Function 5A Register 1 Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H5-25 Function 5A Register 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0044H (U1-05)
(1589) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
RUN responding to the master device.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(158A) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(158B) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(158C) Selection Returns the contents of the specified MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register when (0000H - FFFFH)
◆ H6: Pulse Train Input/Output

H6 parameters set the drive pulse train input and pulse train monitor. These parameters select input and monitor
parameters and adjust the pulse train frequency.
A pulse train signal with a maximum single pulse of 32 kHz can be input to the drive input terminal RP. You can
use the pulse train signal as the frequency reference, PID feedback value, PID setpoint value, and speed feedback
Parameter Details
for V/f Control mode.

A pulse train signal with a maximum frequency of 32 kHz can be output from the drive output terminal MP as the
monitor value. Sinking mode and sourcing mode are supported.
12

Figure 12.116 Pulse Train Input Block Diagram
■ H6-01: Terminal RP Pulse Train Function

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-01 Terminal RP Pulse Train V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(042C) Function Sets the function for pulse train input terminal RP. (0 - 3)
0 : Frequency Reference
When b1-01 = 4 [Frequency Reference Selection 1 = Pulse Train Input] or b1-15 = 4 [Frequency Reference
Selection 2 = Pulse Train Input], the drive inputs the frequency reference received from terminal RP.
1 : PID Feedback Value
The drive inputs the PID control feedback value received from terminal RP.
2 : PID Setpoint Value
The drive inputs the PID control target value received from terminal RP.
3 : Speed Feedback (V/F Control)
Select V/f Control method to enable simple encoder feedback.
Use motor speed feedback for better speed control precision. The drive compares the frequency reference to the
motor speed feedback received from the encoder, and uses the ASR function to compensates for motor slip. You
cannot use input terminal RP used for the simple encoder to detect the direction of motor rotation. Use a different
method to detect motor rotation.
Use these methods to detect the direction of motor rotation.
• Use MFDI
Set MFDI H1-xx = 7E [Reverse Rotation Identifier]. When the configured terminal is activated, the motor
operates in Reverse run. When the terminal is deactivated, the motor operates in Forward run.
Use an encoder that outputs 2-tracks (phase A, B) to detect the direction of motor rotation.
• Use the frequency reference
When you do not use the MFDI, the Forward/Reverse run command is the same as the direction of motor
rotation.
Figure 12.117 shows speed control in Simple Closed Loop V/f Mode.
Figure 12.117 Simple Closed Loop Speed Control Block Diagram

Enable Simple Closed Loop V/f Mode
1. Connect the encoder output pulse wiring to terminal RP.

2. Set A1-02 = 0 [Control Method Selection = V/f Control].

3. Set H6-01 = 3.
4. Set H6-02 [Terminal RP Frequency Scaling] to the speed feedback (pulse train input signal) frequency at the
time when the frequency reference is 100%.
Make sure that H6-04 [Terminal RP Function Bias] = 0% and H6-03 [Terminal RP Function Gain] = 100%.
5. Select the detection method for the direction of motor rotation.
When you use an MFDI, set H1-xx = 7E.
6. Set C5 parameters related to ASR gain and integral time to adjust responsiveness.
Note:
• Set A1-02 = 0 and H6-01 = 3 to show C5 parameters.
• You cannot use Simple Closed Loop V/f Mode with the Motor Switch function.
■ H6-02: Terminal RP Frequency Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-02 Terminal RP Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1440 Hz
(042D) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train input signal used when the item selected with H6-01 (100 - 32000 Hz)
RUN [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input at 100%.
■ H6-03: Terminal RP Function Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-03 Terminal RP Function Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(042E) Sets the gain used when the function in H6-01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input to (0.0 - 1000.0%)
RUN terminal RP.
■ H6-04: Terminal RP Function Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-04 Terminal RP Function Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(042F) Sets the bias used when the function in H6-01 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function] is input to (-100.0 - 100.0%)
RUN terminal RP. Sets a value at the time when the pulse train is 0 Hz.
■ H6-05: Terminal RP Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-05 Terminal RP Filter Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s
(0430) Sets the time constant for the pulse train input primary delay filters. (0.00 - 2.00 s)
RUN
■ H6-06: Terminal MP Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-06 Terminal MP Monitor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
(0431) Selection Sets a function for pulse train monitor output terminal MP. Sets the “x-xx” part of the Ux-xx (000, 031, 101, 102, 105,
RUN monitor. 116, 501, 502, 801 - 809,
821 - 825, 831 - 839, 851 -
855)
Note:
To use in through mode or when terminal MP is not used, set this parameter to 000 or 031.
When you use the pulse train monitor, make sure that you connect peripheral devices as specified by these load
conditions:
Incorrect connections can make the characteristics not sufficient or cause mechanical damage.
Parameter Details
• Use the pulse train monitor as the sourcing output.
12

Output Voltage
Load Impedance (kΩ)
VRL(V)
5 V or more 1.5 kΩ or more
8 V or more 4.0 kΩ or more
10 V or more 10 kΩ or more
Figure 12.118 Circuit Diagram When Used as the Sourcing Output

• Use the pulse train monitor as the sinking input
External Power Supply (V) 12 VDC ± 10%, 15 VDC ± 10%
Sinking current (mA) 16 mA or less
Figure 12.119 Circuit Diagram When Used as the Sinking Input
■ H6-07: Terminal MP Frequency Scaling

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-07 Terminal MP Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1440 Hz
(0432) Scaling Sets the frequency of the pulse train output signal used when the monitor set with H6-06 (0 - 32000 Hz)
RUN [Terminal MP Monitor Selection] is 100%.
When H6-06 = 102 [Terminal MP Monitor Selection = Output Frequency] and H6-07 = 0, the pulse train output
terminal MP outputs the same frequency as the drive output frequency.
■ H6-08: Terminal RP Minimum Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-08 Terminal RP Minimum V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 Hz
(043F) Frequency Sets the minimum frequency of the pulse train signal that terminal RP can detect. (0.1 - 1000.0 Hz)
• When you input a pulse train frequency that is less than the value of H6-08, the pulse train input is 0.0 Hz.
• Set H6-01 = 0, 1, or 2 [Terminal RP Pulse Train Function = Frequency Reference, PID Feedback Value, or
PID Setpoint Value] to enable this parameter.
• When H6-01 = 3 [Speed Feedback (V/F Control)], the drive applies the setting of F1-14 [Encoder Open-Circuit
Detect Time] to the minimum frequency.
■ H6-09: Voltage Phase Sync MP Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H6-09 Voltage Phase Sync MP V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(156E) Selection Set whether to output the pulse synchronized with drive output voltage phase from the pulse train (0, 1)
monitor output terminal MP. This parameter is only enabled when H6-06 = 102 [Terminal MP
Monitor Selection = Output Frequency] and H6-07 = 0 [Terminal MP Frequency Scaling = 0
Hz].
0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled
◆ H7: Virtual MFIO Selection

The virtual I/O function performs the following.
• Inputs the result of the output from the MFDO terminal to the MFDI terminal without external wiring.
• Inputs the result of the output from the MFAO terminal to the MFAI terminal without external wiring.
This can simplify the external wiring and reduce the cost.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Before you do a test run, make sure that the setting values for virtual input and output
function parameters are correct. Virtual input and output functions can have different default settings and operation than wired
input and output functions. Incorrect function settings can cause serious injury or death.
Figure 12.120 Virtual Analog I/O Functional Block Diagram
H7-10 H7-11 H7-01

[Virtual Multi-Function [Virtual Output [Virtual Multi-Function
Output 1] 1 Delay Time] Input 1]
Figure 12.121 Virtual Digital I/O Functional Block Diagram

Note:
• Refer to H1-xx Multi-Function Digital Input Setting Values on page 842 for more information on the virtual digital input setting values.
• Refer to H2-xx MFDO Setting Values on page 869 for more information on the virtual digital output setting values.
• Refer to H3-xx Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings on page 890 for more information on the virtual analog input setting
values.
• Refer to H4-xx H4: Analog Outputs on page 896 for more information on the virtual analog output setting values.
• You cannot set 0 [3-Wire Sequence] and 20 or 2F [External Fault] to H7-01 to H7-04 [Virtual Multi-Function Input 1 to 4].
• When you will not use the terminal, set H7-01 to H7-04 = F. The through mode function is not supported.
• You cannot use the virtual I/O function selection and the multi-function input for DI-A3 at the same time.
■ H7-00: Virtual MFIO selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-00 Virtual MFIO selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(116F) Sets the function to enable and disable the virtual I/O function. Set this parameter to 1 to operate (0, 1)
Expert the virtual I/O function.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ H7-01: Virtual Multi-Function Input 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-01 Virtual Multi-Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(1185) Input 1 Sets the function that enters the virtual input set in H7-10 [Virtual Multi-Function Output 1]. (1 - 19F)
Expert
Parameter Details

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert 12


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert
■ H7-10: Virtual Multi-Function Output 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert
■ H7-11: Virtual Output 1 Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-11 Virtual Output 1 Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Expert


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(11AA) Output 4 Sets the function for virtual digital output 4. (0 - 1A7)
Expert

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(11AB) Time Sets the minimum ON time for virtual digital output 4. (0.0 - 25.0 s)
Expert
■ H7-30: Virtual Analog Input Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-30 Virtual Analog Input V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV F
(1177) Selection Sets the virtual analog input function. (0 - 32)
Expert
■ H7-31: Virtual Analog Input Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-31 Virtual Analog Input Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(1178) Sets the virtual analog input gain. (-999.9 - 999.9%)
RUN
Expert
■ H7-32: Virtual Analog Input Bias

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-32 Virtual Analog Input Bias V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1179) Sets the virtual analog input bias. (-999.9 - 999.9%)
RUN
Expert
■ H7-40: Virtual Analog Out Signal Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-40 Virtual Analog Out Signal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1163) Select Sets the signal level of the virtual analog output. (0 - 2)
0 : 0 to 100% (Absolute Value)

1 : -100 to 100%
2 : 0 to 100% (Lower Limit at 0)
■ H7-41: Virtual Analog Output Function

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-41 Virtual Analog Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
(1164) Function Sets the monitor (Ux-xx) to be output from the virtual analog output. (0 - 9999)
Parameter Details
Note:
Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set H7-41 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
monitor Ud-01.
12

■ H7-42: Virtual Analog Output FilterTime

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
H7-42 Virtual Analog Output V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 s
(1165) FilterTime Sets the time constant for a primary filter of the virtual analog output. (0.00 - 2.00 s)


L parameters set the following functions.
• Motor Overload Protection
• Operation During Momentary Power Loss
• Stall Prevention
• Speed Detection
• Auto Restart
• Detection of Overtorque/Undertorque
• Torque Limit
• Hardware Protection
◆ L1: Motor Protection

L1 parameters set the motor overload protection function.
■ Motor Protection Using Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Thermistors

The temperature resistance characteristics of three PTC thermistors in the motor stator winding protect the motor
from overheat.
The PTC thermistor must have the characteristics shown in Figure 12.122 for each motor phase.
Figure 12.122 PTC Thermistor Temperature and Resistance

When the PTC input signal input to the drive is more than the overload alarm level, the drive detects oH3 [Motor
Overheat (PTC Input)]. The drive continues the operation set in L1-03 [Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select]. By
factory default, oH3 flashes on the keypad and the drive continues operation.
The overheat fault level triggers an oH4 [Motor Overheat Fault (PTC Input)] fault, and outputs a fault signal. The
drive outputs a fault signal, and uses the stop method set in L1-04 [Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select] to stop the
motor.
Note:
PTC is an acronym for Positive Temperature Coefficient.
Figure 12.123 shows the configuration procedure when you use terminal A3.
1. Connect the PTC thermistor input from the motor to analog input terminal A3 on the drive.
Parameter Details
Figure 12.123 Connect Motor PTC

2. Set drive DIP switch S1-3 to V (voltage) and set DIP switch S4 to PTC. 12

3. Set these MFAI terminals:

• Set H3-05 = 0 [Terminal A3 Signal Level Select = 0 to 10V (Lower Limit at 0)].
• Set H3-06 = E [Terminal A3 Function Selection = Motor Temperature (PTC input)].
4. Set these L1 parameters:
• L1-03 [Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select]
• L1-04 [Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select]
• L1-05 [Motor Thermistor Filter Time]
■ L1-01: Motor Overload (oL1) Protection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-01 Motor Overload (oL1) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
This parameter enables and disables the motor overload protection with electronic thermal protectors.
The cooling capability of the motor changes when the speed control range of the motor changes. Use an electronic
thermal protector that aligns with the permitted load characteristics of the motor to select motor protection.
The electronic thermal protector of the drive uses these items to calculate motor overload tolerance and supply
overload protection for the motor:
• Output current
• Output frequency
• Motor thermal characteristics
• Time characteristics
If the drive detects motor overload, the drive will trigger an oL1 [Motor Overload] and stop the drive output.
Set H2-01 = 1F [Term M1-M2 Function Selection = Motor Overload Alarm (oL1)] to set a motor overload alarm.
If the motor overload level is more than 90% of the oL1 detection level, the output terminal activates and triggers
an overload alarm.
0 : Disable
Disable motor protection when motor overload protection is not necessary or when the drive is operating more
than one motor.
Refer to Figure 12.124 for an example of the circuit configuration to connect more than one motor to one drive.
Figure 12.124 Protection Circuit Configuration to Connect More than One Motor to One Drive
NOTICE: When you connect more than one motor to one drive or when the motor amp rating is higher than the drive amp
rating, set L1-01 =0 [Motor Overload (oL1) Protection = Disabled] and install thermal overload relays for each motor. The
electronic thermal protection of the drive will not function and it can cause damage to the motor.
1 : Variable Torque

This motor is designed to operate with commercial line If the motor operates at frequencies less than 60 Hz, the
power. Operate at a 60 Hz base frequency to maximize drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay
the motor cooling ability. output and the motor coasts to stop.

Use this setting for drive-dedicated motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:10.
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 10% speed at 100%
speed range (10% base frequency). load will cause motor overload.

Use this setting for vector motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1:100.
temperatures during continuous operation in the low frequency. Operating slower than 1% speed at 100% load
speed range (1% base frequency). will cause motor overload.
Use this setting for PM motors with derated torque characteristics.
Parameter Details
12

This motor is designed to withstand increased If the motor operates continuously at lower speed than
temperatures during continuous operation at rated speed rated rotation speed at more than 100% torque, the drive
and rated torque. will detect oL1. The drive triggers a fault relay output and
the motor coasts to stop.
Use this setting with a PM motor for constant torque that has a speed range for constant torque of 1:500.
The speed control for this motor is 0.2% to 100% when at 100% load. Operating slower than 0.2% speed at 100%
This motor is designed to withstand increased The motor operates continuously at 0.2% to 100% rated
temperatures during continuous operation in the low speed. Operating slower than 0.2% speed at 100% load
speed range (0.2% base frequency). will cause motor overload.

This motor is designed to operate with commercial line If the motor operates at frequencies less than commercial
power. Operate at a 50 Hz base frequency to maximize line power, the drive will detect oL1. The drive triggers a
the motor cooling ability. fault relay output and the motor coasts to stop.
■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-02 Motor Overload Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 min
(0481) Time Sets the operation time for the electronic thermal protector of the drive to prevent damage to the (0.1 - 5.0 min)
motor. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Set the overload tolerance time to the length of time that the motor can operate at 150% load from continuous
operation at 100% load.
When the motor operates at 150% load continuously for 1 minute after continuous operation at 100% load (hot
start), the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector.

Figure 12.125 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time. Motor overload protection
operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start.
This example shows a general-purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1-02 set to 1.0 min.
• Cold start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when the overload occurs immediately after starting
operation from a complete stop.
• Hot start
Shows the motor protection operation time characteristics when overload occurs from continuous operation
below the motor rated current.
Figure 12.125 Protection Operation Time for a General-purpose Motor at Rated Output Frequency
■ L1-03: Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-03 Motor Thermistor oH V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(0482) Alarm Select Sets drive operation when the PTC input signal entered into the drive is at the oH3 [Motor (0 - 3)
Overheat Alarm] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows oH3 and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
■ L1-04: Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-04 Motor Thermistor oH Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0483) Select Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the oH4 [Motor Overheat (0 - 2)
Fault (PTC Input)] detection level.
0 : Ramp to Stop
Parameter Details
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
The output turns OFF and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC turns ON, and MB-MC
turns OFF.
12


■ L1-05: Motor Thermistor Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-05 Motor Thermistor Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.20 s
(0484) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the PTC input signal entered to the drive. This parameter (0.00 - 10.00 s)
prevents accidental motor overheat faults.
■ L1-08: oL1 Current Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-08 oL1 Current Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 A
(1103) Sets the reference current for the motor 1 thermal overload detection. When the current level > 0.0 (0.0 A or 10% to 150% of
A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current. the drive rated current)
When L1-08 = 0.0 A, the drive uses E2-01 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)] to detect the motor overload protection.
In PM control mode, the drive uses E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] to detect the motor overload
protection.
When L1-08 ≠ 0.0 A, the set value is the reference for motor overload protection.
Note:
• The display units are different for different models:
–Models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023: 0.01 A
–Models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12: 0.1 A
• When the current level > 0.0 A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current.
■ L1-09: oL1 Current Level for Motor 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-09 oL1 Current Level for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 A
(1104) Motor 2 Sets the reference current for the motor 2 thermal overload detection. When the current level > 0.0 (0.0 A or 10 to150% of the
A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current. drive rated current)
When L1-09 = 0.0 A, the drive uses E4-01 [Motor 2 Rated Current] to detect the motor overload protection.
When L1-09 ≠ 0.0 A, the set value is the reference for motor overload protection.
Note:
• The display units are different for different models:
–Models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023: 0.01 A
–Models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12: 0.1 A
• When the current level > 0.0 A, you cannot set this value < 10% of drive rated current.
■ L1-13: Motor Overload Memory Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L1-13 Motor Overload Memory V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(046D) Selection Sets the function that keeps the current electronic thermal protector value when the drive stops (0, 1)
receiving power.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Sets if the drive will calculate the motor again when the drive is energized again.
◆ L2: Power Loss Ride Through

L2 parameters set the drive operation during momentary power loss and the KEB Ride-Thru function method of
operation.

■ KEB Ride-Thru Function

KEB is an acronym for Kinetic Energy Backup. If the drive detects a power loss or momentary power loss, it will
quickly decelerate the motor. The drive uses regenerative energy from the motor to keep the main circuit
operating. When you return power during motor deceleration, the drive returns operation to the status before the
power loss. The KEB Ride-Thru function is different than other functions for continuous operation. If the drive
detects momentary power loss, the motor will ramp to stop. It will not coast to stop. This function is applicable for
applications in which it is necessary to prevent materials from running out, for example control for film and fiber
lines.
The KEB Ride-Thru function has 4 methods of operation. Parameter L2-29 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method] sets
the method.
When you use the KEB Ride-Thru function with one drive, set L2-29 = 0, 1 [Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1,
Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2].
If deceleration in coordination with more than one drive is necessary, for example textile machinery line systems,
set L2-29 = 2, 3 [System KEB Ride-Thru 1, System KEB Ride-Thru 2].
Table 12.73 KEB Ride-Thru Function Operation Method
Kinetic Energy
L2-29 Operation Configuration Precautions
Backup Method
0 Single Drive KEB The drive uses regenerative energy from the motor to keep the DC bus • Set C1-09 correctly to prevent Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] and ov
Ride-Thru 1 voltage at the level set in L2-11 [KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint] while [Overvoltage].
it adjusts the rate of deceleration. • If the drive detects Uv1 during the KEB operation, decrease the
The KEB operation continues while the drive adjusts the deceleration value set in C1-09.
rate with the setting of C1-09 [Fast Stop Time]. • If the drive detects ov during the KEB operation, increase the value
set in C1-09.
1 Single Drive KEB The drive uses information about the inertia of the connected • If the drive detects Uv1 during the KEB operation, increase the
Ride-Thru 2 machinery to find the deceleration rate necessary to keep the DC bus setting value of L3-20 [DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Gain] and L3-
voltage at the level set in parameter L2-11. 21 [OVSuppression Accel/Decel P Gain].
The drive uses system inertia to calculate the deceleration time. You • If the drive detects ov during the KEB operation, decrease the
cannot adjust this value. setting values of L3-20 and L3-21.
2 System KEB Ride- The drive does not monitor the DC bus voltage. The drive decelerates Use the dynamic braking option with System KEB Ride-Thru 1.
Thru 1 at the KEB deceleration time set in L2-06.
Use L2-06 to set the time necessary to decelerate from the current
frequency reference to 0 Hz. More than one drive can decelerate and
keep a constant speed ratio between drives.
3 System KEB Ride- The drive uses the KEB deceleration time set in L2-06 to decelerate If you cannot use the dynamic braking option, use System KEB Ride-
Thru 2 and it also monitors the DC bus voltage. Thru 2.
If the voltage level increases, the drive momentarily holds the
frequency to prevent an ov before it continues to decelerate.
■ KEB Ride Thru Start

When L2-01 = 3, 4, 5 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, Kinetic Energy
Backup: CPU Power, Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop], the drive starts the KEB operation immediately after it
detects a momentary power loss. When one of these conditions occur, the drive will activate KEB Ride-Thru:
• KEB Ride-Thru 1 set for the MFDI terminal becomes enabled (terminal is deactivated when H1-xx = 65 or
terminal is activated when H1-xx = 66).
The drive uses the mode selected L2-29 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method] to start KEB operation.
• KEB Ride-Thru 2 set for the MFDI terminal becomes enabled (terminal is deactivated when H1-xx = 7A or
terminal is activated when H1-xx = 7B).
The drive automatically starts Single KEB Ride-Thru 2 and it ignores the setting of L2-29.
• The DC bus voltage is less than the level set in L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)].
The KEB operation will start as specified in L2-29.
Note:
If you try to set KEB Ride-Thru 1 and 2 to the MFDI terminals at the same time, it will trigger oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting
Err].
n this example, the drive detects that the DC bus voltage is less than the level set in L2-05 and starts the KEB
operation. When you return power during KEB operation, the drive will continue KEB operation when the KEB
Ride-Thru is input, although the time set in L2-10 [Minimum KEB Time] expired. The motor accelerates again
Parameter Details
after you cancel the KEB Ride-Thru.
12

Figure 12.126 KEB Operation through KEB Ride-Thru Input
■ KEB Ride-Thru End Detection

Parameter L2-01 [Power Loss Ride Through Select] and a digital input programmed for KEB set the KEB
function end detection.
Use the Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time to Cancel KEB Operation
shows an example with this configuration:
• L2-01 = 3 [Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02] is set.
• KEB Ride-Thru is not used.
The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation. When the time set in L2-10 [Minimum KEB Time] expires,
the drive stops the KEB operation and then it accelerates the motor again until it is at the frequency reference
value used before the power loss.
If you do not return the DC bus voltage in the time set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time], the drive
detects Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] and the drive turns off its output.
Figure 12.127 Cancel the KEB Operation after the Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time Is Expired without KEB
Ride-Thru
*1 When L2-07 = 0.00 [Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time = 0.00 s], the drive accelerates again as specified by
the applicable Acceleration Time [C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07], and usual operation continues.
Use the Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time and KEB Ride-Thru to Cancel KEB Operation
• L2-01 = 3.
• Use KEB Ride-Thru 1 [H1-xx = 65, 66] or KEB Ride-Thru 2 [H1-xx = 7A, 7B].
The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation. The drive decelerates for the time set in parameter L2-10,
then it measures the DC bus voltage and the status of the digital input terminal set for KEB Ride-Thru. When the
DC bus voltage is less than the level set in L2-11 [KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint], or if the KEB digital input is
active, KEB deceleration continues. When the DC bus voltage is more than the level set in L2-11, the drive ends
KEB operation. The drive accelerates the motor to the frequency reference value before the power loss, and usual

operation continues. If the time set in L2-02 is expired, the drive detects Uv1. When you cancel the KEB Ride-
Thru, the motor accelerates again, and usual operation continues.
Figure 12.128 Use the Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time and KEB Ride-Thru to Cancel KEB Operation
*1 When L2-07 = 0.00, the drive accelerates again as specified by the applicable Acceleration Time [C1-01, C1-
03, C1-05, C1-07], and usual operation continues.
Cancel KEB Operation When Restoration of Power Occurs while the Control Power (Power Supply to the
Control Board) is Maintained
• L2-01 = 4 [Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power] is set.
• KEB Ride-Thru is not used.
The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation. The drive decelerates for the time set in parameter L2-10,
and then measures the DC bus voltage level. When the DC bus voltage is lower than the level set in L2-11, the
drive uses the KEB Ride-Thru function to continue deceleration. When the DC bus voltage is more than the level
set in L2-11, usual operation continues. The drive accelerates the motor to the frequency reference value before
the power loss, and usual operation continues.
Figure 12.129 Cancel KEB Operation without Using the KEB Ride-Thru if Restoration of Power Occurs while the
Control Power (Power Supply to the Control Board) is Maintained
*1 When L2-07 = 0.00 s, the drive accelerates again as specified by the applicable Acceleration Time [C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, C1-07], and usual operation continues.
Use the KEB Ride-Thru to Cancel KEB Operation when Restoration of Power Occurs while the Control
Power (Power Supply to the Control Board) is Maintained
Parameter Details
• L2-01 = 4.
• Use KEB Ride-Thru 1 [H1-xx = 65, 66] or KEB Ride-Thru 2 [H1-xx = 7A, 7B].
The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation. When the motor decelerates for the time set in L2-10, the
drive measures the DC bus voltage and the status of the digital input set for KEB Ride-Thru. When the DC bus
voltage is less than the level set in L2-11, or if the digital input set to KEB Ride-Thru is active, deceleration
continues. When the DC bus voltage is more than the level set in L2-11, the drive ends KEB operation. The drive 12

accelerates the motor to the frequency reference value before the power loss, and usual operation continues. When
the KEB Ride-Thru continues to be input after the time set in L2-02 is expired, the drive uses the KEB Ride-Thru
function to continue to decelerate. When you cancel the KEB Ride-Thru, the motor accelerates again, and usual
operation continues.
Figure 12.130 Use the KEB Ride-Thru to Cancel KEB Operation when Restoration of Power Occurs while the Control
Power (Power Supply to the Control Board) is Maintained
*1 When L2-07 = 0.00 s, the drive accelerates again as specified by the applicable Acceleration Time [C1-01,
C1-03, C1-05, C1-07], and usual operation continues.
KEB Operation when L2-01 = 5 [Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop]
The drive starts deceleration through KEB operation. If you do not input the Run command, the motor cannot
restart. The drive will continue to decelerate until the motor comes to the minimum output frequency or a
complete stop. If you return power during deceleration, the drive continues to decelerate.
■ KEB Operation Wiring Example

Figure 12.131 shows an example that uses an undervoltage relay to trigger the KEB Ride-Thru at power loss.
When a power loss occurs, the undervoltage relay triggers KEB Ride-Thru [H1-06 = 65, 66, 7A, 7B] at terminal
S6.
Note:
• Set the drive to activate the Run command while the KEB function is operating. If you turn off the Run command, the drive will not
accelerate back to speed when you return power.
• When you set L2-29 = 2 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = System KEB Ride-Thru 1], install a dynamic braking option.
Figure 12.131 KEB Function Wiring Example

■ Parameters for KEB Ride-Thru

Table 12.74 shows the parameters that adjust the KEB Ride-Thru function. Parameter settings are different for the
different KEB methods set in L2-29 [KEB Energy Backup Method].
Table 12.74 Parameters for KEB Ride-Thru
L2-29 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method]
No. Name Configuring Settings
0 1 2 3
C1-09 Fast Stop Time • If ov [Overvoltage] occurs during KEB deceleration, increase the setting value.
• If Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] occurs during KEB deceleration, decrease the x *1 - - -
setting value.
C2-03 S-Curve Time @ Start of • If ov occurs immediately after you start KEB deceleration, increase the setting
Decel value. x - x x
• If Uv1 occurs immediately after you start operation, decrease the setting value.
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl If Uv1 occurs immediately after you start KEB deceleration, increase the setting
(Uv1) value to detect power loss more quickly. x x x x
L2-06 Kinetic Energy Backup Decel • Does KEB Tuning.

Time • If ov or Uv1 occur during KEB deceleration after the KEB Tuning, set L2-06 in
these conditions:
- - x *2 x *2
– If ov occurs, increase the setting value
– If Uv1 occurs, decrease the setting value.
L2-07 Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Sets the acceleration time to return to the frequency reference value before a
Time power loss, after you cancel the KEB operation. When L2-07 = 0, the drive uses
the standard acceleration times set in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, and C1-07 x x x x
[Acceleration Time].
L2-08 Frequency Gain at KEB Start • If ov occurs immediately after you start operation, decrease the setting value.
• If Uv1 occurs immediately after you start KEB deceleration, increase the x - x x
setting value.
L2-10 Minimum KEB Time • With KEB Ride-Thru

There is Uv1 because you set a digital input for KEB Ride-Thru and the device
that controls the input operated too slowly after power loss.
x x x x
• Without KEB Ride-Thru
If the DC bus voltage overshoots immediately after KEB Ride-Thru starts,
increase L2-10 to longer than the overshoot.
L2-11 KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint • Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2

Set to approximately 1.22 x input voltage.
• Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1, System KEB Ride-Thru 1, or System KEB x x x x
Ride-Thru 2
Set to approximately 1.4 x input voltage.
L3-20 DC Bus Voltage Adjustment • If ov or Uv1 occurs at the start of deceleration when you use KEB operation,
Gain increase this value in 0.1-unit increments.
- x - -
• If there is torque ripple during deceleration when you use KEB Ride-Thru,
decrease the value.
L3-21 OVSuppression Accel/Decel P If there is large speed or current ripple, decrease the value in 0.05 unit increments.
Gain Note:
- x - -
If the setting value is too low, then the drive will have unsatisfactory DC bus
voltage control response. The drive can detect ov or Uv1.
L3-24 Motor Accel Time @ Rated Set the motor acceleration time to the maximum frequency at the motor rated
Torque torque. - x - -
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia. - x *3 - -
*1 When L2-29 = 0 [KEB Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 1] and you do KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will
automatically set C1-09. If you must not change the Fast Stop time, do not do KEB Tuning.
*2 If you do KEB Tuning when L2-29 = 1, 2, or 3 [KEB Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2, System KEB Ride-
Thru 1 or System KEB Ride-Thru 2], the drive will automatically set L2-06 [KEB Decel Time].
*3 The drive sets this value automatically when KEB Tuning completes correctly.
■ L2-01: Power Loss Ride Through Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-01 Power Loss Ride Through V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0485) Select Sets the drive operation after a momentary power loss. (0 - 5)
Parameter Details
The drive detects momentary power loss when the drive DC bus voltage is less than the value set in L2-05
[Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)].
0 : Disable
A momentary power loss triggers Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage].
If you do not restore power in 15 ms, a Uv1 is triggered and the drive shuts off the output. The motor coasts to
stop. 12

1 : Enabled
This setting will enable for the time set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time] or until the CPU is inactive.
When the CPU is inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at power up.
When power returns in the time set in L2-02, the drive will restart. If power does not return in the time set in L2-
02, the drive will detect Uv1.
The drive momentarily turns OFF its output after a power loss. If the power returns in the time set to L2-02, the
drive will do Speed Search and try to continue operation.
If the DC bus voltage is less than or equal to the Uv1 detection level for the time set in L2-02, the drive will detect
Uv1 and output a fault signal.
Note:
• This setting will enable for the time set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time] or until the CPU is inactive. When the CPU is
inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at power up.
• The necessary time for the drive to restart after power returns is different for different drive capacities.
• The upper limit of the possible momentary power loss Ride-Thru time is different for different drive models.
2 : Enabled while CPU Power Active
This setting will enable for the time set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time] or until the CPU is inactive.
When the CPU is inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at power up.
When power returns and the drive control circuit has power, the drive will restart. This will not trigger Uv1.
When there is a momentary power loss, the drive output will turn OFF. If the power returns and the drive control
circuit has power, the drive will do Speed Search and try to continue operation. This will not trigger a Uv1. This
function lets the drive lose power for longer than when L2-01 = 1.
Note:
This setting will enable for the time set in L2-02 [Power Loss Ride Through Time] or until the CPU is inactive. When the CPU is
inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at power up.
3 : Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02
If power does not return in the time set in L2-02, the drive will detect Uv1.
If the drive detects momentary power loss, the drive will use regenerative energy from the motor and ramp to
stop. When you return power in the time set in L2-02, the drive will accelerate to the frequency reference value
that the drive used before the power loss. If you do not return power in the time set to L2-02, the drive will detect
Uv1 and the drive output will turn OFF. L2-29 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method] sets the type of KEB operation.
4 : Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power
When power returns and the drive control circuit has power, the drive will restart.
The drive decelerates using regenerative energy from the motor until the power returns and then restarts when a
momentary power loss is detected. When power is restored during deceleration, the drive accelerates the motor
again to the frequency reference value used before the power loss. If the motor comes to a stop before the power
returns, the drive loses control power and the drive output shuts off. A Uv1 is not triggered when power is restored
while power to the CPU in the drive is maintained. L2-29 sets the type of KEB operation.
5 : Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop
When power returns, the drive will continue to decelerate until the motor fully stops.
If the drive detects momentary power loss, the drive will use regenerative energy from the motor and ramp to
stop. When you return power to the drive, the drive will continue to decelerate until the motor comes to a full
stop. After you return power, the drive will ramp to stop in the set deceleration time. L2-29 sets the type of KEB
operation.

Note:
When you set L2-01, make sure that you know these items:
• You can use a Momentary Power Loss Unit on models 2004 to 2056 and 4002 to 4031 for a longer momentary power loss ride through
time. A Momentary Power Loss Unit makes it possible to continue operation of the drive after a maximum of 2 seconds of power loss.
• When you set L2-01 = 1 to 4, keep the magnetic contactor on the drive input side ON and keep the control signal while the drive does
KEB operation.
• When L2-01 = 1 to 5, Uv [DC Bus Undervoltage] will flash on the keypad while the drive is attempting to recover from a momentary
power loss. The drive will not output a fault signal at this time.
• When you use a magnetic contactor between the motor and the drive, keep the magnetic contactor closed while the drive does KEB
operation or tries to restart with Speed Search.
• Keep the Run command active during KEB operation. The drive cannot accelerate back to the frequency reference when the power
returns.
• When L2-01 = 3 to 5, if the control power supply voltage is less than the CPU operation level during KEB Ride-Thru, it will trigger
Uv1.
• When the CPU is inactive, b1-17 [Run Command at Power Up] sets operation at power up.
■ L2-02: Power Loss Ride Through Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-02 Power Loss Ride Through V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0486) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it tries to restart if the DC bus voltage is less 01
than L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] after a momentary power loss. (0.0 - 25.5 s)
This function is applicable when L2-01 = 1, 3 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Enabled, Kinetic Energy
Backup: L2-02].
After a power loss, if these conditions are satisfied, the drive detects Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage], shuts off the
output, and the motor coasts to stop:
• After the DC bus voltage decreases less than the level of L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)], the time
set in L2-02 is expired.
• The drive does not detect a Uv2 [Control Power Undervoltage].
Depending on use conditions, if the time set in L2-02 is long, the drive may detect Uv2 before Uv1. If this is a
problem, decrease the time set in L2-02 to prevent Uv2.
Note:
• The length of time that the drive can recover after a power loss changes when drive capacity changes.
• The upper limit of the possible momentary power loss Ride-Thru time changes when drive capacity changes.
■ L2-03: Minimum Baseblock Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-03 Minimum Baseblock Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0487) Sets the minimum time to continue the drive output block (baseblock) after a baseblock. 01
(0.1 - 5.0 s)
Sets the length of time that the drive will wait for the residual voltage in the motor to dissipate in estimation to the
secondary circuit time constant of the motor. If oC [Overcurrent] or ov [DC Bus Overvoltage] occur at the start of
Speed Search, after power returns, or during DC Injection Braking, increase this setting.
■ L2-04: Powerloss V/f Recovery Ramp Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-04 Powerloss V/f Recovery V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0488) Ramp Time Sets the time for the drive output voltage to go back to correct voltage after completing speed 01
searches. (0.0 - 5.0 s)
Sets the time for voltage to recover from 0 V to the value set in E1-05 [Maximum Output Voltage].
■ L2-05: Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04 and
(0489) (Uv1) Sets the voltage at which a Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] fault is triggered or at which the KEB E1-01
function is activated. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (200 V Class: 150 - 210 V,
400 V Class: 300 - 420 V) 12

NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. When you set this parameter to a value lower than the default, you must install an AC reactor
on the input side of the power supply. If you do not install an AC reactor, it will cause damage to the drive circuitry.
Note:
If the low voltage detection level is near the lower limit value of L2-05, the drive will detect Uv1 during KEB Ride-Thru operation. Do
not set the value too low when you use the KEB Ride-Thru function.
■ L2-06: Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-06 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(048A) Decel Time Sets the deceleration time during KEB operation used to decrease the maximum output frequency (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
Expert to 0.
Set L2-29 = 2 or 3 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = System KEB Ride-Thru 1 or System KEB Ride-Thru 2] to
enable this function. When L2-29 = 1, 2 , 3 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2,
System KEB Ride-Thru 1, System KEB Ride-Thru 2] and you do KEB Auto-Tuning, the drive will automatically
set this value.
Sets the deceleration time necessary to decelerate from the frequency reference to 0 Hz when the drive detects a
momentary power loss. If a Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] fault occurs during KEB operation, decrease the
deceleration time. If an ov [Overvoltage] fault occurs, increase the deceleration time.
• L2-06 = 0
The drive automatically decreases C1-09 [Fast Stop Time] to the base value to keep the DC bus voltage above
the low voltage detection level. The drive ignores L2-02 [Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time] in this
condition.
• L2-06 ≠ 0
As shown in Figure 12.132, the frequency reference decelerates to the KEB frequency level as specified by the
deceleration rate set in L2-06 and then returns to the initial frequency reference as specified by C1-01
[Acceleration Time 1]. The drive uses the setting value of the KEB frequency rate as shown in the this formula
to set the KEB frequency level:
KEB frequency level = Output frequency before power loss × (1 - (L2-02)/ (L2-06))
Figure 12.132 Kinetic Energy Backup Decel Time
■ L2-07: Kinetic Energy Backup Accel Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-07 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(048B) Accel Time Sets the acceleration time to return the frequency to the frequency reference before a power loss (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
Expert after canceling KEB operation.
Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the function. The drive uses the acceleration time in C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, and
C1-07 to accelerate again after KEB operation completes.
■ L2-08: Frequency Gain at KEB Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-08 Frequency Gain at KEB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100%
(048C) Start Sets the quantity of output frequency reduction used when KEB operation starts as a percentage (0 - 300%)
Expert of the motor rated slip before starting KEB operation.
Decreases the output frequency in steps to quickly set the motor to a regenerative condition. Use this formula to
calculate the value:

Output frequency reduction = Motor rated slip before KEB operation × (L2-08/100 ) × 2
■ L2-09: KEB Minimum Frequency Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-09 KEB Minimum Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20%
(048D) Level Sets the quantity of output frequency reduction used as a percentage of E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] (0 - 100%)
Expert when KEB operation starts.
These conditions set the quantity of decrease:

• Motor rated slip × (L2-09/100)
• The larger value between the value calculated with L2-08 and the value calculated with L2-09
■ L2-10: Minimum KEB Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-10 Minimum KEB Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms
(048E) Sets the minimum length of time to operate the KEB after the drive detects a momentary power (0 - 25500 ms)
Expert loss.
When you return power while KEB is operating, the drive continues KEB operation until the time set in L2-10 is
expired. When the DC bus voltage is less than the level of L2-05 [Undervoltage Detection Lvl (Uv1)] in one of
these conditions, KEB operation continues until the time set in L2-10 is expired:
• L2-01 = 3 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02]
• L2-01 = 4 [Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power]
• L2-01 = 5 [Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop]
• KEB Ride-Thru 1/2 [H1-xx = 65, 66, 7A, or 7B] is input into the drive.
When you input KEB Ride-Thru, KEB operation continues after the time set in L2-10 is expired. When you
cancel KEB Ride-Thru, the motor accelerates again. When you do not input KEB Ride-Thru during the time set in
L2-10, the drive accelerates to the frequency reference that the drive had before power loss in the applicable
acceleration time.
When L2-01 = 3, 4, or 5, and the DC bus voltage is a minimum of the value of L2-11 [KEB DC Bus Voltage
Setpoint], the drive accelerates again after the time set in L2-10 is expired. When the DC bus voltage is less than
the L2-11 value, KEB operation continues after the time set in L2-10 is expired.
Note:
• When L2-01 = 0, 1, or 2 [Disabled, Enabled for L2-02 Time, or Enabled while CPU Power Active], increase the value of L2-10. Set
L2-10 to cancel KEB operation if the KEB Ride-Thru is not input.
• Setting L2-10 to 0 ms disables the function of L2-10.
■ L2-11: KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-11 KEB DC Bus Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E1-01
(0461) Setpoint Sets the target value that controls the DC bus voltage to a constant level in Single Drive KEB (Determined by E1-01)
Expert Ride-Thru 2. Sets the DC bus voltage level that completes the KEB operation for all other KEB
methods.
■ L2-29: Kinetic Energy Backup Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-29 Kinetic Energy Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0475) Method Sets the KEB function operation mode. (0 - 3)
Expert
Parameter Details
Set L2-01 = 3, 4, or 5 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, Kinetic Energy
Backup: CPU Power, or Kinetic Energy Backup: DecelStop] or KEB Ride-Thru 1/2 [H1-xx = 65, 66, 7A, or 7B],
to enable the KEB function.
The drive monitors the DC bus voltage and uses regenerative energy from the motor to hold the DC bus voltage at
the level set in L2-11 [KEB DC Bus Voltage Setpoint]. 12

The KEB operation continues and the deceleration rate changes as specified by C1-09 [Fast Stop Time].
Note:
• If the drive detects Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] during KEB operation, decrease the value of C1-09.
• If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage] during KEB operation, increase the value of C1-09.
The drive does KEB operation and automatically calculates the deceleration rate to make sure that the main circuit
electrical energy and main current voltage from motor regenerative energy is equal to L2-11.
The drive does not monitor the DC bus voltage and decelerates as specified by the KEB deceleration time set in
L2-06.
Use L2-06 to set the time necessary to decelerate from the current frequency reference to 0 Hz. More than one
drive can decelerate and keep a constant speed ratio between drives.
Note:
If you keep constant deceleration rates for more than one drive, it can trigger ov faults. Use the dynamic braking option with System
KEB Ride-Thru 1.
The drive uses the KEB deceleration time set in L2-06 to decelerate and it also monitors the DC bus voltage.
If the voltage level increases, the drive momentarily holds the frequency to prevent an ov before it continues to
decelerate.
Note:
When you cannot use a dynamic braking option, use System KEB Ride-Thru.
■ L2-30: KEB Zero Speed Operation

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-30 KEB Zero Speed Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(045E) Sets the operation when the output frequency decreases below the zero level (DC braking (0, 1)
Expert injection starting frequency) during KEB deceleration when L2-01 = 3 to 5 [Power Loss Ride
Through Select = Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power, or Kinetic
Energy Backup: DecelStop].
0 : Baseblock
1 : DC/SC Braking
Does DC injection braking and short circuit braking as specified by b2-04 [DC Inject Braking Time at Stop] and
b2-13 [Short Circuit Brake Time @ Stop].
■ L2-31: KEB Start Voltage Offset Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L2-31 KEB Start Voltage Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(045D) Level Sets the KEB start voltage offset. (200 V Class: 0 - 100 V,400
Expert V Class: 0 - 200 V)
The drive uses this formula to calculate the KEB start voltage:
KEB start voltage = L2-05 [Undervoltage Detect Level (Uv1)] + L2-31
◆ L3: Stall Prevention

L3 parameters set the Stall Prevention function and overvoltage suppression function.
■ Stall Prevention
If the load is too heavy or the acceleration and deceleration times are too short, the motor can slip too much
because it cannot work at the same rate as the frequency reference. If the motor stalls during acceleration, current
increases as the slip increases to cause an oC [Overcurrent], oL2 [Drive Overload], or oL1 [Motor Overload] and
the drive will stop. If the motor stalls during deceleration, too much regenerative power will flow back into the
DC bus capacitors, and cause the drive to detect an ov [Overvoltage] fault and stop.

The stall prevention function will let the motor get to the set speed without stalling and it is not necessary for you
to change the acceleration or deceleration time settings. You can set a separate stall prevention functions for
acceleration, operating at constant speeds, and deceleration.
■ Overvoltage Suppression Function

Decreases the regenerative torque limit and increases the output frequency when the DC bus voltage increases to
prevent ov. This function can drive loads with cyclic regenerative operation, for example punch presses or other
applications with repeated crank movements. When you use this function, set L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage Suppression
Select = Enabled].
The drive adjusts the regenerative torque limit and the output frequency during overvoltage suppression to make
sure that the DC bus voltage is not more than the level set in L3-17 [DC Bus Regulation Level].
Set these parameters as necessary when you use the overvoltage suppression function:
• L3-20 [DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Gain]
• L3-21 [OVSuppression Accel/Decel P Gain]
• L3-24 [Motor Accel Time @ Rated Torque]
• L3-25 [Load Inertia Ratio]
Note:
• When overvoltage suppression is triggered, the motor speed is more than the frequency reference. Do not use overvoltage suppression
for applications where the frequency reference and the motor speed must align.
• When you use a braking resistor, set L3-11 = 0 [Disabled].
• The overvoltage suppression function is enabled only when you operate immediately below the maximum frequency. Overvoltage
suppression does not increase the output frequency to more than the maximum frequency. Make sure that the motor and machine
specifications are correct for the application, then increase the maximum frequency.
• If there is a sudden increase to a regenerative load, ov can occur.
■ L3-01: Stall Prevention during Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-01 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(048F) Accel Sets the method of the Stall Prevention During Acceleration. (0 - 3)
Note:
When A1-02 = 5 [Control Method Selection = OLV/PM], the setting range is 0 and 1.
Stall prevention during acceleration prevents the stalling and stopping of motors when the drive detects oC
[Overcurrent], oL2 [Drive Overloaded], or oL1 [Motor Overload] when you apply a large load during
acceleration or when you set sudden acceleration times related to load inertia.
0 : Disable
The Stall Prevention function does not operate during acceleration, and acceleration occurs for the set acceleration
time. If the acceleration time is too short, the motor does not fully accelerate during the set time, which causes the
drive to detect oL1 or oL2 and the motor to stop.
1 : Enabled
Enables the Stall Prevention During Acceleration function. Operation is different for different control methods.
• V/f Control, Open Loop Vector Control, or EZ Open Loop Vector Control
When the output current is more than the value set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel], the drive stops
acceleration. The drive stops deceleration when the output current is less than L3-02 - 15%. The Stall
Prevention function level automatically decreases for constant output ranges.
Parameter Details
12

Figure 12.133 Stall Prevention During Acceleration when Using Induction Motors
• Open Loop Vector Control for PM
When the output current is more than L3-02, the drive stops acceleration. When the time set in L3-27 [Stall
Prevention Detection Time] is expired and the output current = L3-02, the drive will start deceleration as
specified by the value set in L3-22 [PM Stall Prevention Decel Time]. The drive starts acceleration again when
the output current is less than L3-02 - 15%. When the time set in L3-27 is expired, the drive starts acceleration
again.
Figure 12.134 Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function in OLV/PM

The drive ignores the acceleration time setting and the drive starts to accelerate in the minimum length of time.
The drive automatically adjusts the acceleration rate to make sure that the output current is not more than L3-02.
3 : Current Limit Acceleration
This function uses the L3-02 value to limit the output current and automatically adjust the acceleration rate. When
the load (output current) increases to more than the current limit level during acceleration, the drive automatically
adjusts the acceleration rate.

Figure 12.135 Current Limit Acceleration
■ L3-02: Stall Prevent Level during Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-02 Stall Prevent Level during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 and
(0490) Accel Sets the output current level to activate the Stall Prevention function during acceleration as a L8-38
percentage of the drive rated output current. (0 - 150%)
Note:
• If you use a motor that is small compared to the drive and the motor stalls, decrease the setting value.
• When you operate the motor in the constant power range, set L3-03 [Stall Prevent Limit during Accel].
• The upper limit of the setting range changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
–150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating].
–110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating].
■ L3-03: Stall Prevent Limit during Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-03 Stall Prevent Limit during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50%
(0491) Accel Sets the lower limit for the stall prevention level used in the constant output range as a percentage (0 - 100%)
of the drive rated output current.
The stall prevention level set in L3-02 [Stall Prevent Level during Accel] is automatically reduced when the motor
is running within the constant output range. Parameter L3-03 is the limit value used to prevent the stall prevention
level during constant output ranges to fall below the minimum required level.
Note:
The function to automatically reduce the stall prevention level does not operate when L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention during Accel =
Current Limit Method].
Figure 12.136 Stall Prevent Level during Accel/Limit
■ L3-04: Stall Prevention during Decel

No. Default
Name Description
Parameter Details
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-04 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0492) Decel Sets the method that the drive will use to prevent overvoltage faults when decelerating. (Determined by A1-02)
12

Note:
1. To connect a dynamic braking option (braking resistor or braking resistor unit) to the drive, set this parameter to 0 or 3. Parameter
values 1, 2, 4, and 5 will enable Stall Prevention function during deceleration, and the dynamic braking option will not function.
2. The setting range changes when the A1-02 [Control Method Selection] value changes:
• When A1-02 = 5 [OLV/PM], the setting range is 0 to 2.
• When A1-02 = 6, 7, 8 [AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV], the setting range is 0, 1.
Stall Prevention during deceleration controls the deceleration as specified by the DC bus voltage and does not let
high inertia or fast deceleration cause ov [Overvoltage] faults.
0 : Disable
The drive decelerates as specified by the deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, the drive can
detect an ov fault.
Note:
If an ov fault occurs, connect a dynamic braking option to the drive. If an ov fault occurs after you connect a dynamic braking option and
A1-02 = 0 or 2 [Control Method Selection = V/f or CLV] and L3-04 = 0, set L3-04 = 3.
1 : General Purpose
The drive decelerates as specified by the deceleration time. When the DC bus voltage is more than the Stall
Prevention level, the drive stops deceleration until the DC bus voltage is less than the Stall Prevention Level. The
drive then starts to decelerate at the set deceleration time. Frequent use of Stall Prevention will help prevent ov
faults when the deceleration time is shorter than the drive can usually accept.
Note:
The Decel Stall Prevention function will increase the deceleration time to stop and the deceleration time will be longer than the setting.
This function is not applicable for conveyor applications because the precision of the stop position is very important. As an alternative,
use a dynamic braking option in these applications.
The input voltage setting of E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] sets the DC bus voltage level for Stall Prevention.
Table 12.75 Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
Drive Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
200 V Class 377 V
400 V Class 754 V
Figure 12.137 shows the Stall Prevention during deceleration function.
Figure 12.137 Stall Prevention Operation during Deceleration

The drive adjusts the deceleration rate to keep the DC bus voltage at the L3-17 [DC Bus Regulation Level] level.
This makes the shortest possible deceleration time and will not let the motor stall. The drive ignores the selected
deceleration time and the possible deceleration time cannot be less than 1/10 of the set deceleration time.
This function uses these parameters to adjust the deceleration rate:
• L3-20 [DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Gain]
• L3-21 [OVSuppression Accel/Decel P Gain]
• L3-24 [Motor Accel Time @ Rated Torque]
• L3-25 [Load Inertia Ratio]
Note:
The deceleration time is not constant. For applications where the precision of the stop position is very important, use a dynamic braking
option and set L3-04 = 0. If an ov occurs, set L3-04 = 3.
3 : General Purpose w/ DB resistor
A braking resistor is necessary for this setting. The braking resistor and the drive work together for the Stall
Prevention during deceleration function.

Enables Overexcitation/High Flux and enables a shorter deceleration time than when L3-04 = 0.
Note:
• If the overexcitation time is long and you decelerate frequently, the drive can detect oL1 [Motor Overload] faults. If the drive detects
oL1, decrease the deceleration time or install a braking resistor to the drive.
• The deceleration time during Overexcitation Deceleration changes when the motor characteristics and machine inertia change. Adjust
the n3-13 [OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain] and n3-23 [Overexcitation Braking Operation] levels. Refer to “n3: HighSlip/
OverexciteBraking” for more information about the overexcitation function.
Enables Overexcitation/High Flux 2. This function decreases the possible deceleration time more than
Overexcitation/High Flux.
The drive decreases motor speed and tries to keep the DC bus voltage at the L3-17 level.
If the drive detects oL1, decrease the values set in n3-13 and n3-21. If the drive detects ov, increase the values set
in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08 [Deceleration Times].
Note:
• During Overexcitation/High Flux 2, the drive disables Hunting Prevention in V/f Control and also disables Speed Control that uses
torque limit in OLV Control.
• Refer to “n3: HighSlip/OverexciteBraking” for more information about the overexcitation function.
■ L3-05: Stall Prevention during RUN

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-05 Stall Prevention during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0493) RUN Sets the function to enable and disable Stall Prevention During Run. (0 - Determined by A1-02)
Stall Prevention function during run prevents the motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when
an oL1 [Motor Overload] occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
Note:
1. An output frequency lower than 6 Hz will disable Stall Prevention during Run. The L3-05 and L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during
Run] settings do not have an effect.
2. The setting range changes when A1-02 [Control Method] changes:
• A1-02 = 0, 1, 5 [V/f, CL-V/f, OLV/PM]: 0 to 2
• A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV]: 0, 3
0 : Disabled
The drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load can cause the drive to detect oC [Overcurrent] or oL1
and stall the motor.
The drive will decelerate for the time set in C1-02 [Deceleration Time 1] when the current is more than the Stall
Prevention level set in L3-06. When the current level is less than the “L3-06 setting value - 2%” for 100 ms, the
drive accelerates again for the acceleration time applicable at that time until it reaches the set frequency.
This setting functions the same as Setting 1 [Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02)]. When the Stall Prevention function is
enabled, the drive decelerates with the value set in C1-04 [Deceleration Time 2].
Available when A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV]. The drive operates with the largest possible output and prevents motor
stalling.
■ L3-06: Stall Prevent Level during Run

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-06 Stall Prevent Level during V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 and
Parameter Details
(0494) Run Sets the output current level to enable the Stall Prevention function during operation as a L8-38
percentage of the drive rated output current. (5 - 150%)
12

Note:
• This parameter is applicable when L3-05 = 1, 2 [Stall Prevention during RUN = Deceleration Time 1 (C1-02), Deceleration Time 2
(C1-04)].
• When L3-23 = 1 [Stall P Reduction at Constant HP = Automatic Reduction @ CHP Region], the drive will automatically decrease the
level in the constant output range.
• The upper limit of the setting range changes when C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
–150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating 1 (HD1) for Constant Torque Applications].
–110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating 1 (ND1) for Variable Torque Applications].
Use an Analog Input to Change the Stall Prevent Level during Run
When H3-xx = 8 [MFAI Function Select = Stall Prevent Level During Run], you can change the stall prevention
level during run through the input gain and bias settings for terminals A1, A2, and A3.
If you set the input level for terminals A1, A2, and A3 [H3-xx = 8] and L3-06, the drive will use the smaller value
for Stall Prevent Level during Run.
Figure 12.138 Stall Prevention Level during Run with Analog Input
■ L3-11: Overvoltage Suppression Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-11 Overvoltage Suppression V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04C7) Select Sets the overvoltage suppression function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
The drive does not adjust the regenerative torque limit or the output frequency. If you apply a regenerative load,
the drive can detect an ov [Overvoltage] fault. Use this setting with a dynamic braking option.
1 : Enabled
When a regenerative load increases the DC bus voltage, the drive decreases the regenerative torque limit and
increases the output frequency to prevent ov
■ L3-17: DC Bus Regulation Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-17 DC Bus Regulation Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 375 V,
(0462) Sets the target value for the DC bus voltage when the overvoltage suppression function and the 400 V Class: 750 V
Decel Stall Prevention function (Intelligent Stall Prevention) are active. (200 V Class: 150 to 400 V,
400 V Class: 300 to 800 V)
Note:
This value is initialized when E1-01 [Input AC Supply Voltage] is changed.
Sets this parameter for any of the following circumstances.
• L3-11 = 1 [OV Suppression Function Select = Enabled].
• L3-04 = 2 [Decel Stall Prevention Selection = Automatic Decel Reduction].
■ L3-20: DC Bus Voltage Adjustment Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-20 DC Bus Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0465) Adjustment Gain Sets the proportional gain used to control the DC bus voltage. (0.00 - 5.00)
Expert
Set one of these parameters to enable L3-20:

• L2-29 = 1 [Kinetic Energy Backup Method = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2]

• L3-04 = 2 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Intelligent (Ignore Decel Ramp)]
• L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Enabled]
• H1-xx = 7A or 7B [MFDI Function Selection = KEB Ride-Thru 2 Activate (N.O./N.C.)]
Note:
• If stall prevention during deceleration function causes ov [Overvoltage] and Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] faults when you start
deceleration and L2-29 = 1, H1-xx = 7A or 7B, or L3-04 = 2, gradually increase this parameter in 0.1-unit increments. If the setting
value is too high, it can cause large speed or current ripples.
• If sudden increases in the regenerative load cause ov faults and L3-11 = 1, gradually increase this parameter in 0.1-unit increments. If
the setting value is too high, it can cause large speed or current ripples.
■ L3-21: OVSuppression Accel/Decel P Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-21 OVSuppression Accel/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0466) Decel P Gain Sets the proportional gain to calculate acceleration and deceleration rates. (0.10 - 10.00)
Expert

Note:
• If stall prevention during deceleration function causes large speed or current ripples and L2-29 = 1, H1-xx = 7A or 7B, or L3-04 = 2,
gradually decrease this parameter in 0.05-unit increments. If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage] or oC [Overcurrent], decrease L3-21. If
you decrease the gain too much, it can cause a delay in control in the DC bus voltage or the deceleration time could be longer than the
best deceleration time.
• If sudden increases in the regenerative load cause ov faults and L3-11 = 1, gradually increase this parameter in 0.1-unit increments. If
there are large speed ripples, gradually decrease this parameter in 0.05-unit increments.
■ L3-22: PM Stall Prevention Decel Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-22 PM Stall Prevention Decel V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 s
(04F9) Time Sets the momentary deceleration time that the drive will use when it tries to accelerate a PM (0.0 - 6000.0 s)
motor and detected motor stalls. This function is applicable when L3-01 = 1 [Stall Prevention
during Accel = Enabled].
Set this parameter to 0.0 s to disable this function. The drive will decelerates in the deceleration time applicable at
the time when a motor stall occurs.
■ L3-23: Stall P Reduction at Constant HP

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-23 Stall P Reduction at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04FD) Constant HP Sets the function to automatically decrease the Stall Prevention Level during Run for Constant (0, 1)
Horse Power (CHP) part of the speed range.
0 : Use L3-06 for Entire Speed Range

The drive uses the level set in L3-06 [Stall Prevent Level during Run] through the full speed range.
1 : Automatic Reduction @ CHP Region
The drive decreases the Stall Prevention level during run in the constant power range. The lower limit is 40% of
the L3-06 value.
■ L3-24: Motor Accel Time @ Rated Torque

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-24 Motor Accel Time @ Rated V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(046E) Torque Sets the motor acceleration time to reach the maximum frequency at the motor rated torque for 01, E2-11, and E5-01
Expert stopped single-drive motors. (0.001 - 10.000 s)
12


Note:
When Auto-Tuning changes the value of E2-11 [Motor Rated Power], the drive will automatically set L3-24 to the value for a Yaskawa
standard motor (4 poles). When you use a PM motor, the drive uses the value in E5-01 [PM Motor Code Selection] to change L3-24.
Automatically Adjust Parameters
When A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM], do Inertia Tuning. Parameters are automatically
adjusted.
Manually Adjust Parameters
Use this formula to find the motor acceleration time:
• JMotor = Moment of inertia of motor (kg m2)

• nrated = Motor rated speed (min-1, r/min)
• Trated = Motor rated torque (N∙m)
The rated torque is calculated using the following expression.
PMotor = Motor Rated Power (kW)
■ L3-25: Load Inertia Ratio

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-25 Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(046F) Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia. (0.1 - 1000.0)
Expert

Note:
• If you set this value incorrectly when L2-29 = 1, H1-xx = 7A or 7B, or L3-11 = 1, it can cause large current ripples and ov
[Overvoltage], Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage], or oC [Overcurrent] faults.
• KEB Tuning will automatically set this value.
Automatically Adjust Parameters
Do Inertia Tuning when A1-02 = 3 or 7 [Control Method Selection = Closed Loop Vector or PM Closed Loop
Vector]. The drive automatically adjusts parameters.
Manually Adjust Parameters
Use this formula to find the load inertia ratio:
■ L3-26: Additional DC Bus Capacitors

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-26 Additional DC Bus V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 μF
(0455) Capacitors Sets the capacity for external main circuit capacitors. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0 to 65000 μF)
Expert setting. Sets this parameter when you use the KEB Ride-Thru function.

■ L3-27: Stall Prevention Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-27 Stall Prevention Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms
(0456) Time Sets a delay time between reaching the Stall Prevention level and starting the Stall Prevention (0 - 5000 ms)
function.
■ L3-34: Torque Limit Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-34 Torque Limit Delay Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(016F) Sets the filter time constant that returns the torque limit to its initial value when KEB operation (0.000 - 1.000 s)
Expert operates in Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru mode.
When vibration occurs during operation of Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2, increase this parameter in 0.010-unit
increments.
Note:
The Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2 mode operates when L2-29 = 1 [KEB Method Selection = Single Drive KEB Ride-Thru 2] and H1-
xx = 7A or 7B [Terminal Sx Function Selection = KEB Ride-Thru 2 (N.C./N.O.)].
■ L3-35: Speed Agree Width for Auto Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-35 Speed Agree Width for V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00 Hz
(0747) Auto Decel Sets the width for speed agreement when L3-04 = 2 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Intelligent (0.00 - 1.00 Hz)
Expert (Ignore Decel Ramp)]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Set this parameter when hunting occurs while you use a frequency reference through an analog input.
■ L3-36: Current Suppression Gain@Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-36 Current Suppression V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(11D0) Gain@Accel Sets the gain to suppress current and motor speed hunting during operation when L3-01 = 3 [Stall (0.0 - 100.0)
Prevention during Accel = Current Limit Method]. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
If there is vibration in the output current during acceleration, increase the setting value.
Note:
Set L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention during Accel = Current Limit Method] to enable this function.
■ L3-37: Current Limit P Gain @Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-37 Current Limit P Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5 ms
(11D1) @Accel Suppresses current hunting during acceleration. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0 - 100 ms)
Expert
Note:
Set L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention during Accel = Current Limit Acceleration] to enable this function.
■ L3-38: Current Limit I Time @ Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-38 Current Limit I Time @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0
Accel
Parameter Details
(11D2) Suppresses current hunting and overshooting that occurs when the drive stalls during acceleration. (0.0 - 100.0)
Note:
12

■ L3-39: Current Limit Filter Time@Accel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-39 Current Limit Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 ms
(11D3) Time@Accel Sets the time constant to adjust the acceleration rate when L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention during (1.0 - 1000.0 ms)
Accel = Current Limit Acceleration]. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Note:
Set L3-01 = 3 [Stall Prevention during Accel = Current Limit Acceleration] to enable this function.
■ L3-40: Current Limit S-Curve @ Acc/Dec

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L3-40 Current Limit S-Curve @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11D4) Acc/Dec Sets the function to enable and disable the best S-curve characteristic used for current-limited (0, 1)
acceleration.
Makes the best motor acceleration rate for start up. If you set this parameter to 1, it will make acceleration
smoother, but it can also increase the acceleration time to be longer than the set time. If the drive detects oC
[Overcurrent] faults immediately after acceleration starts, set this parameter.
0 : Disable
1 : Enabled
Note:
◆ L4: Speed Detection

L4 parameters set the output of signals to the MFDO terminals, for example frequency agree and speed detection.
The drive detects motor speed in CLV or CLV/PM control methods.
■ L4-01: Speed Agree Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L4-01 Speed Agree Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0499) Level Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5 [MFDO (Determined by A1-02)
Function Selection = Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency Detection 1, Frequency
Detection 2].
■ L4-02: Speed Agree Detection Width

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(049A) Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)
Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 2, 3, 4, 5 [MFDO Function Select =
Speed Agree 1, User-set Speed Agree 1, Frequency Detection 1, Frequency Detection 2].
■ L4-03: Speed Agree Detection Level (+/-)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(049B) Level (+/-) Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)
Sets the speed agree detection level or motor speed detection level when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15, 16 [MFDO
Function Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].
■ L4-04: Speed Agree Detection Width (+/-)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(049C) Width (+/-) Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed. (Determined by A1-02)

Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2-01 to H2-03 = 13, 14, 15, 16 [MFDO Function
Selection = Speed Agree 2, User-set Speed Agree 2, Frequency Detection 3, Frequency Detection 4].
■ L4-05: Fref Loss Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L4-05 Fref Loss Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(049D) Selection Sets the operation when the drive detects a loss of frequency reference. (0, 1)
Enables the detection of a loss of an analog frequency reference when the frequency reference is input from the
MFAI terminals (A1, A2, and A3). Set H2-01 to H2-03 = C [MFDO Function Select = Frequency Reference
Loss] for a digital output to trigger when frequency reference loss occurs.
If the frequency reference is less than 10% in 400 ms, the drive detects frequency reference loss.
Figure 12.139 Detection of Frequency Reference Loss

0 : Stop
The drive follows the frequency reference and stops the motor.
1 : Run at (L4-06 x Last Reference)
The drive continues to operate at the frequency reference value set in L4-06 [FreqReference at Reference Loss].
When you return the external frequency reference value, the drive continues to operate with the frequency
reference.
■ L4-06: Frequency Reference @Loss of Ref

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L4-06 Frequency Reference V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80.0%
(04C2) @Loss of Ref Sets the frequency reference as a percentage to continue drive operation after it detects a (0.0 - 100.0%)
frequency reference loss. The value is a percentage of the frequency reference before the drive
detected the loss.
Set L4-05 = 1 [Fref Loss Detection Selection = Run at (L4-06 x Last Reference)] to enable this parameter.
■ L4-07: Speed Agree Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L4-07 Speed Agree Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0470) Selection Sets the condition that activates speed detection. (0, 1)
0 : No Detection during Baseblock

Detects the frequency while the drive is operating. When the drive turns off its output, it will not detect frequency.
1 : Detection Always Enabled
◆ L5: Fault Restart

The Auto Restart function tries to keep machines operating when the drive detects a transient fault.
The drive can do a self-diagnostic check and continue the operation after a fault. If the cause of the fault goes
away, the drive does speed search and restarts. It will not stop and the drive will not record a fault history. Use L5-
Parameter Details
02 [Fault Contact at Restart Select] to select the operation of fault relay signals during Auto Restart operation.
Sets if the drive will do Auto Restart and the number of times the drive will try to do Auto Restart in a set time. If
the number of Auto Restart tries is more than the set value during the set time, drive output shuts off and operation
stops. If this happens, remove the cause of the fault and manually restart the drive.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not use the fault restart function in hoist or lifting applications. Failure to obey can
cause death or serious injury.
12

The drive can do Auto Restart when these faults occur:

Note:
You can disable Auto Restart for some faults if you must not restart the machine after the fault with parameters L5-07 and L5-08.
Table 12.76 List of Faults during which Auto Restart is Available

Parameters to Disable Parameters to Disable
Fault Name Fault Name
Auto Restart Auto Restart
GF Ground Fault L5-08 ov Overvoltage L5-08
LF Output Phase Loss - PF Input Phase Loss -
oC Overcurrent - rH Braking Resistor Overheat -
oH1 Heatsink Overheat L5-08 rr Dynamic Braking -

Transistor Fault
oL1 Motor Overload L5-07
STPo Motor Step-Out Detected -
oL2 Drive Overload L5-07
Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage *1 L5-08
oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L5-07
oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 L5-07
*1 Uv1 is the target for the auto restart process when L2-01 = 1, 2, 3, or 4 [Power Loss Ride Through Select = Enabled for L2-02 Time,
Enabled while CPU Power Active, Kinetic Energy Backup: L2-02, or Kinetic Energy Backup: CPU Power].
■ L5-01: Number of Auto-Restart Attempts

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-01 Number of Auto-Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(049E) Attempts Sets the number of times that the drive will try to restart. (0 - 10 times)
The drive resets the number of Auto Restart attempts to 0 in these conditions:
• The drive operates correctly for 10 minutes after a fault restart.
• When you manually clear a fault after the drive triggers protective functions.
• When you re-energize the drive.
■ L5-02: Fault Contact at Restart Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-02 Fault Contact at Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(049F) Select Sets the function that sends signals to the MFDO terminal set for Fault [H2-xx = E] while the (0, 1)
drive is automatically restarting.
0 : Active Only when Not Restarting

1 : Always Active
■ L5-03: Continuous Method Max Restart T

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-03 Continuous Method Max V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s
(04A0) Restart T Sets the time for which the drive will try to restart. If the drive cannot restart inthe time set in L5- (0.5 - 180.0 s)
03, the drive detects a fault. This is available when L5-05 = 0 [Auto-Restart Method =
Continuous/Immediate Attempts].
■ L5-04: Interval Method Restart Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-04 Interval Method Restart V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 s
(046C) Time Sets the time interval between each Auto Restart attempt. This function is enabled when L5-05 = (0.5 - 600.0 s)
1 [Auto Restart Operation Selection = Use L5-04 Time].
■ L5-05: Auto-Restart Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-05 Auto-Restart Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0467) Sets the count method for the Auto Restart operation. (0, 1)

0 : Continuous/Immediate Attempts
Counts the number of successful fault resets through Auto Restart.
When this value > L5-01, the drive will send a fault signal and fault code to the keypad and the motor will coast to
stop.
1 : Interval/Attempt after L5-04 sec
Counts the number of all fault resets (successful and unsuccessful) through Auto Restart. The drive repeats the
Auto Restart process in the intervals set in L5-04 [Interval Method Restart Time].
When this value > L5-01, the drive will send a fault signal and fault code to the keypad and the motor will coast to
stop.
■ L5-07: Fault Reset Enable Select Grp1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-07 Fault Reset Enable Select V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1111
(0B2A) Grp1 Use these 4 digits to set the Auto Restart function for oL1 to oL4. From left to right, the digits set (0000 - 1111)
oL1, oL2, oL3, and oL4, in order.
0000 : Disabled
0001 : Enabled (—/—/—/oL4)
0010 : Enabled (—/—/oL3/—)
0011 : Enabled (—/—/oL3/oL4)
0100 : Enabled (—/oL2/—/—)
0101 : Enabled (—/oL2/—/oL4)
0110 : Enabled (—/oL2/oL3/—)
0111 : Enabled (—/oL2/oL3/oL4)
1000 : Enabled (oL1/—/—/—)
1001 : Enabled (oL1/—/—/oL4)
1010 : Enabled (oL1/—/oL3/—)
1011 : Enabled (oL1/—/oL3/oL4)
1100 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/—/—)
1101 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/—/oL4)
1110 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/oL3/—)
1111 : Enabled (oL1/oL2/oL3/oL4)
Figure 12.140 Setting Digits and Fault Code
■ L5-08: Fault Reset Enable Select Grp2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L5-08 Fault Reset Enable Select V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1111
(0B2B) Grp2 Use these 4 digits to set the Auto Restart function for Uv1, ov, oH1, and GF. From left to right, (0000 - 1111)
the digits set Uv1, ov, oH1, and GF, in order.
0000 : Disabled
0001 : Enabled (—/–/—/GF)
0010 : Enabled (—/–/oH1/–)
0011 : Enabled (—/–/oH1/GF)
Parameter Details
0100 : Enabled (—/ov/—/–)

0101 : Enabled (—/ov/—/GF)
0110 : Enabled (—/ov/oH1/–)
0111 : Enabled (—/ov/oH1/GF)
1000 : Enabled (Uv1/–/—/–)
12

1001 : Enabled (Uv1/–/—/GF)

1010 : Enabled (Uv1/–/oH1/–)
1011 : Enabled (Uv1/–/oH1/GF)
1100 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/—/–)
1101 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/—/GF)
1110 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/oH1/–)
1111 : Enabled (Uv1/ov/oH1/GF)
Figure 12.141 Setting Digits and Fault Code
◆ L6: Torque Detection

The overtorque/undertorque detection function prevents damage to machinery and loads.
Overtorque is when there is too much load on the machine. If the motor current or output torque is at the
overtorque detection level for the overtorque detection time, the drive will output an alarm and turn off the output.
Undertorque is when a load suddenly decreases. When the motor current or output torque is at the undertorque
detection level for the undertorque detection time, the drive will output an alarm and turn off the output.
You can use the undertorque detection function to detect these conditions, for example:
• Machine belt cuts
• Unusual operation of the electromagnetic contactor on the drive output side
• Clogged output side air filters in fans and blowers
• Damage to blade tips and broken string
Note:
If there is oC [Overcurrent] or oL1 [Motor Overload], the drive can stop during overtorque conditions. Use torque detection to identify
overload conditions before the drive detects oC or oL1 and stops. Use this function to detect issues that occur in the application.
■ Parameter Settings
You can individually set the two overtorque/undertorque detection functions with the drive. Use the information in
Table 12.77 to set the parameters.
Table 12.77 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Parameters
Configuration Parameter Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2
MFDO Function Select H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = B H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 18
• Terminal M1-M2 N.O.: Activated when detected N.O.: Activated when detected
• Terminal M3-M4
H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 17 H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 19
• Terminal M5-M6
N.C.: Deactivated when detected N.C.: Deactivated when detected
Detection conditions and selection of operation after L6-01 L6-04

detection
Detection Level L6-02 L6-05
Analog Input Terminal *1 -

H3-xx = 7
Detection Time L6-03 L6-06
*1 You can also use an analog input terminal to supply the torque detection level. To enable this function, set H3-xx = 7 [MFAI Function
Selection = Overtorque/Undertorque DetectLvl]. If you set L6-02 and H3-xx = 7, the analog input is most important and the drive
disables L6-02.
You cannot use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2 to set the detection level for the analog input terminals.
Note:
The drive sets the Overtorque/Undertorque detection level in these conditions:
• V/f, CL-V/f, OLV/PM: Current level (drive rated current = 100%)
• OLV, CLV, AOLV, AOLV/PM, CLV/PM, EZOLV: Motor torque (Motor rated torque = 100%)
• L6-08 ≠ 0 [Mechanical Fatigue Detect Select ≠ Disabled]: Current level (drive rated output current = 100%)

■ Time Chart for Detection of Overtorque/Undertorque

Overtorque Detection Time Chart
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1, the drive detects overtorque if the motor current or motor
torque is at the detection level set in L6-02 [Torque Detection Level 1] for the time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection
Time 1]. Parameter L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1] sets the operation after detection.
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2, set L6-04 [Torque Detection Selection 2], L6-05 [Torque
Detection Level 2], and L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2].
Use H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select] to set the terminal that outputs the alarm.
Figure 12.142 Overtorque Detection Time Chart

Note:
The drive applies a hysteresis of approximately 10% of the drive rated output current or the motor rated torque to the overtorque/
undertorque detection function.
Undertorque Detection Time Chart
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1, the drive detects undertorque if the motor current or motor
torque is less than or equal to the detection level set in L6-02 for the time set in L6-03. Parameter L6-01 sets the
operation after detection.
When you use Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2, set the operation in L6-04, L6-05, and L6-06.
Use H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select] to set the terminal that outputs the alarm.
Figure 12.143 Undertorque Detection Time Chart

Note:
The drive applies a hysteresis of approximately 10% of the drive rated output current or the motor rated torque to the overtorque/
undertorque detection function.
■ Mechanical Weakening Detection

The Mechanical Weakening Detection function detects the mechanical weakening of a machine that can cause
overtorque or undertorque because of motor speed and total drive operation time.
The drive activates the function if the drive total operation time is longer than the time set in L6-11 [Mech Fatigue
Hold Off Time]. You can use U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] to monitor the total operation time.
Parameter Settings
The drive detects Mechanical Weakening if overtorque or undertorque occur during the speed range set in L6-08
[Mechanical Fatigue Detect Select] and L6-09 [Mech Fatigue Detect Speed Level] for the length of time set in
L6-10 [Mech Fatigue Detect Delay Time]. The drive uses L6-01 to L6-03 [Torque Detection 1 Setting Parameter]
Parameter Details
to detect oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1] or UL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 2]. Parameter L6-
08 sets the operation after detection.
Set the terminal that outputs the fault in H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select].
12

Table 12.78 Mechanical Weakening Detection Settings Parameters

Configuration Parameter Mechanical Deterioration Detection
MFDO Function Select

• Terminals M1-M2
H2-01, H2-02, and H2-03 = 22
• Terminals M3-M4
• Terminals M5-M6
Operation Selection after Detection L6-08
Detection Start Time L6-11
Detection Criteria L6-08
Speed Range Detection Level L6-09
Detection Time L6-10
Detection Criteria L6-01
Overtorque Detection Level L6-02
Detection Time L6-03
■ L6-01: Torque Detection Selection 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04A1) 1 Sets torque detection conditions that will trigger an overtorque or undertorque response from the (0 - 8)
drive.
The drive detects overtorque if the motor current or output torque is more than the level set in L6-02 [Torque
Detection Level 1] for the length of time set in L6-03 [Torque Detection Time 1]. The drive detects undertorque if
the motor current or output torque is less than the level set in L6-02 for the length the time set in L6-03.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect overtorque or undertorque.
The drive detects overtorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL3 [Overtorque Detection 1] and operation
continues.
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects overtorque. The drive outputs an oL3 and
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL3 and operation stops.
operation stops.
The drive detects undertorque when the output frequency aligns with the frequency reference. Detection does not
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL3 [Undertorque Detection 1] and operation
continues.
When the Run command is enabled, the drive constantly detects undertorque. The drive outputs a UL3 and
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL3 and operation stops.
operation stops.

■ L6-02: Torque Detection Level 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150%
(04A2) Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 1. In V/f control, drive rated output (0 - 300%)
current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.
Note:
• Set the torque detection level as a percentage of the drive rated output current in all control methods to set the mechanical weakening
detection level.
• You can also use an analog input terminal to supply the torque detection level. To enable this function, set H3-xx = 7 [MFAI Function
Select = Overtorque/Undertorque DetectLvl]. If you set L6-02 and H3-x = 7, the analog input is most important and the drive disables
L6-02.
■ L6-03: Torque Detection Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s
■ L6-04: Torque Detection Selection 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-04 Torque Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04A4) 2 Sets the speed range that detects overtorque and undertorque and the operation of drives (0 - 8)
The drive detects overtorque if the motor current or output torque is more than the level set in L6-05 [Torque
Detection Level 2] for the length of time set in L6-06 [Torque Detection Time 2]. The drive detects undertorque if
the motor current or output torque is less than the level set in L6-05 for the length the time set in L6-06.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect overtorque or undertorque.
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] and operation
continues.
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs an oL4 [Overtorque Detection 2] and operation stops.
operation stops.
occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL4 [Undertorque Detection 2] and operation
continues.
Parameter Details

occur during acceleration/deceleration. The drive outputs a UL4 and operation stops.
12

operation stops
■ L6-05: Torque Detection Level 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 150%
(04A5) Sets the detection level for Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2. In V/f control, drive rated output (0 - 300%)
current = 100% value. In vector control, motor rated torque = 100% value.
Note:
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection 2 cannot set the detection level for the analog input terminal.
■ L6-06: Torque Detection Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s
■ L6-07: Torque Detection Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-07 Torque Detection Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0 ms
(04E5) Time Sets the time constant for a primary filter to the torque reference or to the output current used to (0 - 1000 ms)
detect overtorque/undertorque.
■ L6-08: Mechanical Fatigue Detect Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-08 Mechanical Fatigue Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0468) Select Sets the speed where the drive detects mechanical deterioration and how the drive operates (0 - 8)
The drive detects mechanical weakening through overtorque or undertorque as specified by the conditions set in
L6-08 to L6-11 [Mechanical Deterioration Detection Settings Parameters]. Set overtorque/undertorque detection
conditions in L6-01 to L6-03 [Torque Detection 1 Settings Parameters]. The drive disables the operation selection
set in L6-01 [Torque Detection Selection 1].
0 : Disabled
The drive does not detect mechanical weakening.
1 : oL5 @ Speed > L6-09 - Alarm
When the speed (signed) ≥ L6-09 [Mech Fatigue Detect Speed Level], the drive detects mechanical weakening.
The drive will detect oL5 [Mechanical Weakening Detection 1] and continue operation.
2 : oL5 @ |Speed| > L6-09 - Alarm
When the speed (absolute value) ≥ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect oL5 and
continue operation.
3 : oL5 @ Speed > L6-09 - Fault
When the speed (signed) ≥ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect oL5 and stop
operation.
4 : oL5 @ |Speed| > L6-09 - Fault
When the speed (absolute value) ≥ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect oL5 and
stop operation.
5 : UL5 @ Speed < L6-09 - Alarm
When the speed (signed) ≤ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect UL5
[Mechanical Weakening Detection 2] and continue operation.
6 : UL5 @ |Speed| < L6-09 - Alarm
When the speed (absolute value) ≤ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect UL5 and
continue operation.
7 : UL5 @ Speed < L6-09 - Fault

When the speed (signed) ≤ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect UL5 and stop
operation.
8 : UL5 @ |Speed| < L6-09 - Fault
When the speed (absolute value) ≤ L6-09, the drive detects mechanical weakening. The drive will detect UL5 and
stop operation.
■ L6-09: Mech Fatigue Detect Speed Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-09 Mech Fatigue Detect Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 110.0%
(0469) Level Sets the speed level where the drive will operate the mechanical deterioration detection function, (-110.0 - 110.0%)
as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency.
Parameters L6-01 to L6-03 [Torque Detection 1 Settings Parameters] set the overtorque/undertorque detection
conditions.
When L6-08 = 2, 4, 6, 8 [Mechanical Fatigue Detect Select = Speed : unsigned], the setting value of L6-09 is the
absolute value. When L6-09 is set to a negative number, the drive processes this value as a positive number.
■ L6-10: Mech Fatigue Detect Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-10 Mech Fatigue Detect Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.1 s
(046A) Time Sets the time for mechanical deterioration detection. (0.0 - 10.0 s)
When the detection conditions set in L6-08 [Mechanical Weakening Detect Ope] continue for the time set in L6-
10, the drive will detect mechanical weakening.
■ L6-11: Mech Fatigue Hold Off Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L6-11 Mech Fatigue Hold Off V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h
(046B) Time Sets the time that the drive will start mechanical deterioration detection triggered by the (0 - 65535 h)
cumulative operation time of the drive.
When the total operation time of the drive is more than the value set in L6-11, the drive will detect mechanical
weakening. Use U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] to monitor the drive total operation time.
◆ L7: Torque Limit

The torque limit function limits the internal torque reference for the drive to limit the quantity of torque generated
by the motor to a constant quantity. This function keeps the torque applied to loads and regenerative torque less
than a set quantity. This function also prevents damage to machinery and increases the reliability of continuous
operation. You can set torque limits individually for the four quadrants, which include torque direction (motoring/
regeneration) and direction of motor rotation (forward/reverse). When the torque reference value is at the set
torque limit, the MFDO terminal set for During Torque Limit [H2-xx = 30] activates.
Note:
• The drive output current limits maximum output torque. The drive limits torque to 150% of the rated output current for Heavy Duty
Rating (HD) and to 110% of the rated output current for Normal Duty Rating (ND). The actual output torque is not more than the limits
of the drive rated output current when you set the torque limit to a high value.
• When you use torque limits for lifting applications, do not lower the torque limit value too much. When the torque limit function is
triggered, falls and rollbacks can occur because of sudden acceleration stops and stalls of the motor.
■ Configuring Settings
Use one of these methods to set torque limits:
• Individually set the four torque limit quadrants using L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].
Parameter Details
• Use MFAI to individually set the four torque limit quadrants. Set H3-02, H3-06, H3-10 = 10, 11, 12 [MFAI
Function Select = Forward/Reverse/Regenerative Torque Limit].
• Use MFAI to set all four torque limit quadrants together. Set H3-02, H3-06, H3-10 = 15 [General Torque
Limit].
• Use a communication option to set all four torque limit quadrants together.
12

Figure 12.144 shows the configuration method for each quadrant.
Figure 12.144 Torque Limits and Analog Input Setting Parameters

Note:
• When L7-01 to L7-04 and analog inputs or communication option torque limits set torque limits for the same quadrant, he drive enables
the lower value.
In this example of parameter settings, the torque limit for quadrant 1 is 130% and the torque limit for quadrants 2, 3, and 4 is 150%.
Settings: L7-01 = 130%, L7-02 to L7-04 = 200%, and MFAI torque limit = 150%
• The drive output current limits maximum output torque. The torque limit is 150% of the rated output current for HD and to 120% of
the rated output current for ND. The actual output torque is not more than the limits of the drive rated output current when you set the
torque limit to a high value.
■ L7-01: Forward Torque Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-01 Forward Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(04A7) Sets the torque limit value for forward motoring as a percentage, where motor rated torque is the (0 - 300%)
RUN 100% value.
Note:
• Use this method to set the torque limit and enable the lower torque limit:
–Set H3-02, H3-06, or H3-10 = 10, 15 [MFAI Function Select = Forward, Reverse/Regenerative Torque Limit].
–Use a communication option to set the torque limits
• You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary. If you set the value too high, the drive can detect oC
[Overcurrent].
• If you set the value too low with large loads, the motor can stall.
■ L7-02: Reverse Torque Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(04A8) Sets the torque limit value for reversed motoring as a percentage, where motor rated torque is the (0 - 300%)
RUN 100% value.
Note:
[Overcurrent].
■ L7-03: Forward Regenerative Trq Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-03 Forward Regenerative Trq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(04A9) Limit Sets the torque limit value for forward regenerative conditions as a percentage of the motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque.

Note:
[Overcurrent].
■ L7-04: Reverse Regenerative Trq Limit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Trq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200%
(04AA) Limit Sets the torque limit value for reversed regenerative conditions as a percentage of the motor rated (0 - 300%)
RUN torque.
Note:
[Overcurrent].
■ L7-06: Torque Limit Integral Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-06 Torque Limit Integral Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 ms
(04AC) Sets the integral time constant for the torque limit function. (5 - 10000 ms)
Decrease the setting value to increase torque limit responsiveness when you use torque limits and L7-07 = 1
[Torque Limit during Accel/Decel = Proportional & Integral control].
If there is hunting when torque limits are active, increase the setting value.
■ L7-07: Torque Limit during Accel/Decel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-07 Torque Limit during Accel/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04C9) Decel Sets the torque limit function during acceleration and deceleration. (0, 1)
0 : Proportional only
The torque limit function works with proportional control during acceleration and deceleration, and switches to
integral control at constant speed. Use this setting when quickly reaching the target speed is more important than
the torque limit during speed changes.
1 : Proportional & Integral control
The torque limit function always uses integral control. Use this setting when a very accurate torque limit is
necessary during speed changes, for example in winding machine applications.
If you make the torque limit the most important, it can:
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Not let the motor speed reach the frequency reference value during run at constant speed.
■ L7-16: Torque Limit Process at Start

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-16 Torque Limit Process at V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
Parameter Details
(044D) Start Assigns a time filter to allow the torque limit to build at start. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
There is torque limit at start without a delay time.
Use this setting to maximize the response time when sudden acceleration or deceleration at start is necessary.
1 : Enabled 12

There is a delay time of 64 ms at start to build the torque limit.
■ L7-35: Low Freq Regen Torque Limit Lvl

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-35 Low Freq Regen Torque V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0%
(1B57) Limit Lvl Sets the torque limit used during low-speed regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.0 - 200.0%)
Reduces the regenerative torque limit to the level set with L7-35 when using low frequencies such that the output
frequency is less than L7-36 [Regen Torque Limit Derate Freq]. The drive does not decrease torque limits during
ramp to stop operation. Decrease the setting of L7-35 when oC [Overcurrent] issues occur while a regenerative
load is input and the speed reference is constant.
Note:
• Reduce the setting value of L7-35 in increments of 10.0% and reduce the setting value of L7-36 in increments of 2.0 Hz when faults
occur during regenerative loads at low speed.
• Setting values that are too high can cause faults.
• The torque limit reduction function does not operate when L7-35 is set with a value larger than L7-03 [Forward Regenerative Trq
Limit] or L7-04 [Reverse Regenerative Trq Limit].
• The motor may rotate slightly faster than the reference when a regenerative load is input at low speeds while L7-35 is set to a low
value.
■ L7-36: Regen Torque Limit Derate Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L7-36 Regen Torque Limit Derate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.0 Hz
(1B58) Freq Sets the frequency width at which L7-35 [Low Freq Regen Torque Limit Lvl] operates. (0.0 - 30.0 Hz)
Expert
If the drive detects oC [Overcurrent] faults when you connect regenerative loads at low speed, increase the setting
value. Decreases the torque limit as specified by the setting of L7-35 in a range of 0 ≤ output frequency < L7-36.
When the torque limit gradually changes as specified by the output frequency until the output frequency = L7-36,
the value changes to the setting of L7-03 [Forward Regenerative Trq Limit] and L7-04 [Reverse Regenerative Trq
Limit].
Note:
If you increase the setting of L7-36, the motor will rotate at a speed higher than specified when a you input a regenerative load. Do not
set the value higher than necessary.
◆ L8: Drive Protection

L8 parameters set protective functions that prevent faults such as overheating, phase loss, and ground faults.
■ L8-01: 3% ERF DB Resistor Protection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-01 3% ERF DB Resistor V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04AD) Protection Sets the function to enable braking resistor protection with a Yaskawa ERF series braking resistor (0, 1)
(3% ED) installed on the heatsink.
0 : Disabled
Disables braking resistor protection. Use this setting for dynamic braking options that are not Yaskawa ERF series
braking resistors.
1 : Enabled
Enables protection for Yaskawa ERF series braking resistors.
Note:
Set L8-01 = 1 and H2-01 to H2-03 = D [MFDO Function Select = Braking Resistor Fault]. Use a sequence to turn OFF power with
MFDO.

■ L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(04AE) Sets the oH detection level in temperature. 01
(50 - 150 °C)
If the heatsink temperature is more than the temperature set in this parameter, the drive detects an overheat pre-
alarm. To enable this function, set one of H2-01 to H2-03 [MFDO Function Select] to 20 [Drive Overheat Pre-
Alarm (oH)].
If the temperature increases to the overheat fault level, the drive will trigger an oH1 [Heatsink Overheat] fault and
stop operation.
■ L8-03: Overheat Pre-Alarm Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(04AF) Selection Sets the operation of drives when an oH alarm is detected. (0 - 4)
0 : Ramp to Stop
MB-MC turns OFF.
1 : Coast to Stop
turns OFF.
3 : Alarm Only
The keypad shows oH and the drive continues operation. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
4 : Operate at Reduced Speed (L8-19)
The drive decelerates to the level set in L8-19 [Freq Reduction @ oH Pre-Alarm] and continues operation. oH
flashes on the keypad.
oH flashes on the keypad. When the alarm is output, the drive decelerates each 10 seconds. If the drive decelerates
10 times and the alarm continues to be output, the output terminal set for oH Pre-Alarm Reduction Limit [H2-01
to H2-03 = 4D] activates. When the alarm is not output during deceleration, the drive accelerates until it is at the
frequency reference that was applicable before the alarm was turned off. Figure 12.145 shows the output of the
alarm and the drive operation at a decreased output frequency.
Parameter Details
12

Figure 12.145 Drive Operation at a Decreased Output Frequency when the Overheat Alarm is Output
■ L8-05: Input Phase Loss Protection Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(04B1) Sel Sets the function to enable and disable input phase loss detection. (0 - 4)
Note:
The default setting and setting range is different for different drive input power supplies.
• Three-phase 200 V and 400 V Input
Default setting: 1
Setting range: Determined by the drive model
–2xxx, 4002 - 4675: 0, 1
–4810 - 4H12: 0 - 4
• 6-Phase/12-Pulse 400 V Input
Default setting: 4
Setting range: 0 - 4
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
The drive measures ripples in DC bus voltage to detect input phase loss.
The drive detects phase loss when power supply phase loss occurs or the main circuit capacitor becomes unusable,
which causes PF [Input Phase Loss] to show on the keypad.
Disable the detection of the input power supply phase loss function in these conditions:
• During deceleration
• The run command is not input
• The output current is less than 30% of the drive rated current.
4 : Enabled, with Hardware Detection
■ L8-07: Output Phase Loss Protection Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-07 Output Phase Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04B3) Protection Sel Sets the function to enable and disable output phase loss detection. The drive starts output phase (0 - 2)
loss detection when the output current decreases to less than 5% of the drive rated current.
Note:
The drive can incorrectly start output phase loss detection in these conditions:
• The motor rated current is very small compared to the drive rating.
• The drive is operating a PM motor with a small load.
0 : Disabled

1 : Fault when one phase is lost

If the drive loses one output phase, it will trigger LF [Output Phase Loss].
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop.
2 : Fault when two phases are lost
If the drive loses more than one output phase, it will trigger LF [Output Phase Loss].
The output turns off and the motor coasts to stop.
■ L8-09: Output Ground Fault Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-09 Output Ground Fault V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(04B5) Detection Sets the function to enable and disable ground fault protection. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect ground faults.
1 : Enabled
If there is high leakage current or a ground short circuit in one or two output phases, the drive will detect GF
[Ground Fault].
Note:
If the ground path impedance is low, the drive can detect oC [Overcurrent], SC [Short Circuit/IGBT Failure], or ov [Overvoltage]
instead of GF.
■ L8-10: Heatsink Fan Operation Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-10 Heatsink Fan Operation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04B6) Selection Sets operation of the heatsink cooling fan. (0 - 2)
0 : During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-Delay

The drive turns on the fan when a Run command is active.
When you release the Run command and the delay time set in L8-11 [Heatsink Fan Off-Delay Time] is expired,
the fan stops. This setting extends the fan lifetime.
1 : Always On
The fan turns on when you supply power to the drive.
2 : Temperature-Dependent Fan Ctrl.
The fan turns on when the drive detects that the main circuit is overheating.
■ L8-11: Heatsink Fan Off-Delay Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-11 Heatsink Fan Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60 s
(04B7) Time Sets the length of time that the drive will wait before it stops the cooling fan after it cancels the (0 - 300 s)
Run command when L8-10 = 0 [Heatsink Fan Operation Selection = During Run, w/ L8-11 Off-
Delay].
■ L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-12 Ambient Temperature V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 °C
The drive automatically adjusts the drive rated current to the best value as specified by the set temperature. Set the
Parameter Details
ambient temperature of the area where you install the drive to a value that is more than the drive rating.
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 474 for information about derating depending on
12

■ L8-15: Drive oL2 @ Low Speed Protection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-15 Drive oL2 @ Low Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(04BB) Protection Sets the function to decrease the drive overload level at which the drive will trigger oL2 [Drive (0, 1)
Overload] during low speed operation (6 Hz or slower) to prevent damage to the main circuit
transistors.
Note:
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before disabling this function at low speeds. If you frequently operate drives with
high output current in low speed ranges, it can cause heat stress and decrease the life span of drive IGBTs.
0 : Disabled (No Additional Derate)
The drive does not decrease the overload protection level.
Note:
When you use drive models 4810 to 4H12, you cannot set L8-05 = 0. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative before
disabling this function at low speed range.
1 : Enabled (Reduced oL2 Level)
When the drive detects oL2 during low speed operation, it automatically decreases the overload detection level.
At zero speed, the drive derates the overload by 50%.
■ L8-18: Software Current Limit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-18 Software Current Limit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04BE) Selection Set the software current limit selection function to prevent damage to the main circuit transistor (0, 1)
caused by too much current.
0 : Disabled
When the output current is at the software current limit value, the drive does not restrict the output voltage.
Note:
The drive may detect an oC [Overcurrent] when loads are particularly heavy or the acceleration time is particularly short.
1 : Enabled
When the output current is at the software current limit value, the drive decreases output voltage to decrease
output current.
When the output current decreases to the software current limit level, the drive starts usual operation.
■ L8-19: Freq Reduction @ oH Pre-Alarm

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-19 Freq Reduction @ oH Pre- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.8
(04BF) Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference during an oH alarm. (0.1 - 0.9)
When these two conditions are correct, this function is enabled:

• L8-03 = 4 [Overheat Pre-Alarm Ope Selection = Run@L8-19 Rate]
• oH alarm is output
■ L8-20: Control Fault & Step Out Detect

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-20 Control Fault & Step Out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(04C0) Detect Sets operation after the drive detects a CF fault when A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = (0 - 2)
Expert Advanced Open Loop Vector].
If you enter a Stop command but it cannot stop drive operation, the drive will detect CF.
0 : Disabled
1 : CF/STPo Detection Enabled
2 : CF ALM/Stop
The drive stops DC injection braking as specified by the value of b2-03 [DC Inject Braking Time at Start].

Note:
• When A1-02 = 4, control will not be stable if you do not do Rotational Auto-Tuning. This can cause CF faults if you ramp to stop. If
the drive detects CF, do Rotational Auto-Tuning and Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning. Also, do Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning.
• If you set A1-02 = 4 and set these parameters, the drive can detect CF because it cannot stop the operation in some load conditions.
Make sure that you do Rotational Auto-Tuning and Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning correctly and then set L8-20 = 0.
–d5-01 = 1 [Torque Control Selection = Torque Control]
–L3-11 = 1 [Overvoltage Suppression Select = Enabled]
–Decreased L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit].
■ L8-27: Overcurrent Detection Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-27 Overcurrent Detection Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 300.0%
(04DD) Sets the PM motor overcurrent detection level as a percentage of the motor rated current value. (0.0 - 1000.0%)
Note:
• The overcurrent detection function detects the lower of these two values:
–Drive overcurrent level
–Motor rated current × L8-27 / 100
• Set L7-xx [Torque Limit] parameters to a smaller value than the setting of L8-27.
• On drives with software versions PRG:1022 and later, this function is disabled when you set L8-27 = 0.0. Under usual circumstances,
do not set L8-27 = 0.0. If the drive rated current is much higher than the motor rated current, PM motor magnets can demagnetize
when current flows at the drive overcurrent detection level. The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies
the software version. You can also use U1-25 [Software Number] to identify the software version.
■ L8-29: Output Unbalance Detection Sel

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-29 Output Unbalance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(04DF) Detection Sel Sets the function to detect LF2 [Output Current Imbalance]. (0, 1)
This function prevents damage to PM motors. Current unbalance can heat a PM motor and demagnetize the
magnets. When the current is unbalanced, the drive will detect LF2 to stop the motor and prevent damage to the
motor.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
You must set E9-01 = 1 [Motor Type Selection = Permanent Magnet (PM)] and A1-02 = 8 [EZOLV] to show L8-29.
■ L8-31: LF2 Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-31 LF2 Detection Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(04E1) Sets the LF2 [Output Current Imbalance] detection time. (1 – 100)
When the output current is unbalanced for longer than the time set in L8-31, the drive detects LF2.
Note:
• Set L8-29 = 1 [Output Unbalance Detection Sel = Enabled] to enable L8-31.
• If the drive incorrectly detects LF2, increase L8-31 in 5-unit increments.
• The keypad shows L8-31 when E9-01 = 1 [Motor Type Selection = Permanent Magnet (PM)] in EZ Vector Control.
■ L8-35: Installation Method Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-35 Installation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by the drive
Parameter Details
Note:
• Parameter A1-03 [Initialize Parameters] does not initialize this parameter.
• This parameter is set to the correct value when the drive is shipped. Side-by-Side installation
–Change the value only in these conditions:
–When you install a UL Type 1 kit on an IP20/UL Open Type drive to convert the drive to an IP20/UL Type 1 drive.
12

The drive automatically adjusts the overload protection detection level to the best value for each setting value.
Refer to Derating Depending on Ambient Temperature on page 474 for information about derating as specified by
Use this setting to install IP00/IP20/UL Open Type drives or when the heatsink (cooling fin) is outside the
enclosure panel.
Make sure that there is 30 mm (1.18 in) minimum of space between drives or between the drive and side of the
enclosure panel.
Use this setting to install more than one drive side-by-side.
Make sure that there is 2 mm (0.08 in) minimum of space between drives.
2 : IP20/UL Type 1
Use this setting to install IP20/UL Type 1 drives.
3 : Finless
Use this setting to install a finless drive.
■ L8-38: Carrier Frequency Reduction

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-38 Carrier Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02, C6-
(04EF) Reduction Sets the carrier frequency reduction function. The drive reduces the carrier frequency when the 01 and o2-04
output current is more than a specified level. (0 - 2)
If you decrease the carrier frequency, it increases the overload tolerance. The overload capacity increases
temporarily for oL2 [Drive Overloaded] and lets the drive operate through transient load peaks and not trip.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not decrease the carrier frequency at high current.
1 : Enabled below 6 Hz
The drive decreases the carrier frequency at speeds less than 6 Hz when the current is more than 100% of the
drive rated current.
When the current is less than 88% or the output frequency is more than 7 Hz, the drive goes back to the usual
carrier frequency.
2 : Enabled for All Speeds
The drive decreases the carrier frequency at these speeds:
• Output current is a minimum of 100% of the drive rated current and the frequency reference is less than 6 Hz.
• Output current is a minimum of 109% of the drive rated current, the drive is in Normal Duty mode, and the
frequency reference is 7 Hz or more.
• Output current is a minimum of 112% of the drive rated current, the drive is in Heavy Duty mode, and the
frequency reference is 7 Hz or more.
When the drive switches the carrier frequency to the set value, it uses the delay time set in L8-40
[CarrierFreqReduct Off DelayTime] and a hysteresis of 12%.
■ L8-40: Carrier Freq Reduction Off-Delay

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-40 Carrier Freq Reduction Off- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(04F1) Delay Sets the length of time until the automatically reduced carrier frequency returns to the condition (0.00 - 2.00 s)
before the reduction.
Set L8-40 ≠ 0.00 to enable the carrier frequency reduction function during start-up. When operation starts, the
drive automatically decreases the carrier frequency. When the time set in L8-40 is expired, the carrier frequency
returns to the value set in C6-02 [Carrier Frequency Selection].

■ L8-41: High Current Alarm Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-41 High Current Alarm V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(04F2) Selection Sets the function to cause an HCA [Current Alarm] when the output current is more than 150% of (0, 1)
the drive rated current.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect HCA [Current Alarm].
1 : Enabled
If the output current is more than 150% of the drive rated current, the drive will detect HCA.
The MFDO terminal set for an alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 = 10] activates.
■ L8-51: STPo I Detection Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-51 STPo I Detection Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(0471) Sets the STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] detection level as a percentage of the motor rated (0.0 - 300.0%)
Expert current.
Note:
The detection level is automatically calculated when L8-51 = 0.
■ L8-52: STPo Integration Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-52 STPo Integration Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(0472) Sets the detection level for STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] related to the ACR integral value. (0.1 - 2.0)
Expert
■ L8-53: STPo Integration Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-53 STPo Integration Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(0473) Sets the length of time until the drive detects STPo after it is more than the value of L8-51 [STPo I (1.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert Detection Level].
■ L8-54: STPo Id Diff Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-54 STPo Id Diff Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0474) Sets the Id deviation detection function for STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected]. (0, 1)
Expert
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ L8-55: Internal DB TransistorProtection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-55 Internal DB V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(045F) TransistorProtection Sets the protection function for the internal braking transistor. (0, 1)
0 : Disable
Parameter Details
Disables braking transistor protection.

Use this setting, if enabling the braking transistor can cause an rF [Braking Resistor Fault] in these conditions:
• With a regenerative converter, for example D1000.
• With a regenerative unit, for example R1000.
• When connecting braking resistor options to the drive, for example CDBR units. 12

• Without an internal braking transistor.

1 : Protection Enabled
Protects internal braking transistor when using a braking transistor or optional braking resistors.
These models have a built-in braking transistor:
• 2004 to 2138
• 4002 to 4168
■ L8-56: Stall P @ Accel Activation Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-56 Stall P @ Accel Activation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5000 ms
(047D) Time Sets the length time that the acceleration stall prevention function can continue to operate before (100 - 5000 ms)
Expert the drive detects an STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
Note:
If this value is too small, it can cause incorrect detection of STPo. If this value is too large, the drive will not detect STPo.
■ L8-57: Stall Prevention Retry Counts

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-57 Stall Prevention Retry V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10
(047E) Counts Sets the number of times the acceleration stall prevention function can operate until speeds agree (1 - 10 times)
Expert before the drive detects an STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
Note:
If this value is too small, it can cause incorrect detection of STPo. If this value is too large, the drive will not detect STPo.
■ L8-90: STPo Detection Level (Low Speed)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-90 STPo Detection Level (Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0175) Speed) Sets the detection level that the control fault must be equal to or more than to cause an STPo (0 - 5000 times)
Expert [Motor Step-Out Detected].
This function detects when PM motors are not synchronized.

The drive cannot detect when motors are not synchronized because the frequency reference is low during start up
and the motor is locked. If fault detection is necessary in these conditions, set the control fault detection level to
enable detection of desynchronization because of motor locking. Increase the setting in 5-unit increments.
■ L8-93: Low Speed Pull-out DetectionTime

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-93 Low Speed Pull-out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(073C) DetectionTime Sets the length of time the drive will wait to start baseblock after detecting LSo [Low Speed Motor (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert Step-Out].
■ L8-94: Low Speed Pull-out Detect Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-94 Low Speed Pull-out Detect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3%
(073D) Level Sets the detection level for LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] as a percentage of E1-04 [Maximum (0 - 10%)
Expert Output Frequency].

■ L8-95: Low Speed Pull-out Amount

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L8-95 Low Speed Pull-out V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10
(077F) Amount Sets the average count of LSo [Low Speed Motor Step-Out] detections. (1 - 50 times)
Expert
◆ L9: Drive Protection 2

L9 parameters are used to configure the protection function used to detect cooling fan faults.
■ L9-16: FAn1 Detect Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
L9-16 FAn1 Detect Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4.0 s
(11DC) Sets the detection time for FAn1 [Drive Cooling Fan Fault]. Yaskawa recommends that you do (0.0 - 30.0 s)
Expert not change this parameter value.
Parameter Details
12


n parameters set these functions:
• Function to prevent hunting
• High-slip braking
• Motor line-to-line resistance online tuning
• Fine-tune the parameters that adjust motor control
◆ n1: Hunting Prevention

The Hunting Prevention function will not let low inertia or operation with a light load cause hunting. Hunting
frequently occurs when you have a high carrier frequency and an output frequency less than 30 Hz.
■ n1-01: Hunting Prevention Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-01 Hunting Prevention V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0580) Selection Sets the function to prevent hunting. (0 to 2)
When drive response is more important than the decrease of motor vibration, disable this function.
If hunting occurs, or if you use a high carrier frequency or SwingPWM, set this parameter to 2 for better hunting
prevention.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled (Normal)
2 : Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)
■ n1-02: Hunting Prevention Gain Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-02 Hunting Prevention Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(0581) Setting Sets the performance of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0.00 - 2.50)
Expert parameter.
Adjust this parameter in these conditions:

• When n1-01 = 1, 2 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled (Normal), Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)]: If
oscillation occurs when you operate a motor with a light load, increase the setting value in 0.1-unit increments.
• When n1-01 = 1, 2, if the motor stalls: Decrease the setting value in 0.1-unit increments.
■ n1-03: Hunting Prevention Time Constant

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-03 Hunting Prevention Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0582) Constant Sets the primary delay time constant of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is not (0 - 500 ms)
Expert necessary to change this parameter.

• Load inertia is large: Increase the setting value. If the setting value is too high, response will be slower. Also,
there will be oscillation when the frequency is low.
• Oscillation occurs at low frequencies: Decrease the setting value.
■ n1-05: Hunting Prevent Gain in Reverse

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-05 Hunting Prevent Gain in V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.00
(0530) Reverse Sets the performance of the hunting prevention function. This parameter adjusts Reverse run. (0.00 - 2.50)
Expert Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.

Note:
When you set this parameter to 0, the value set in n1-02 [Hunting Prevention Gain Setting] is effective when the motor rotates in
reverse.
• When n1-01 = 1, 2 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled (Normal), Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)]: If
oscillation occurs when you operate a motor with a light load, increase the setting value in 0.1-unit increments.
• When n1-01 = 1, 2, if the motor stalls: Decrease the setting value in 0.1-unit increments.
■ n1-08: Current Detection Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-08 Current Detection Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1105) Sets how the drive decreases the motor vibration that is caused by leakage current. Usually it is (0, 1)
Expert not necessary to change this parameter.
0 : 2-Phases
1 : 3-Phases
Note:
Set this parameter to 1 to suppress motor vibrations caused by leakage current when the wiring distance is long.
■ n1-13: DC Bus Stabilization Control

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-13 DC Bus Stabilization V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B59) Control Sets the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus voltage. (0, 1)
Expert
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
If the DC bus voltage does not become stable with light loads and the drive detects ov [Overvoltage], set this parameter to 1.
■ n1-14: DC Bus Stabilization Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-14 DC Bus Stabilization Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 ms
(1B5A) Adjusts the responsiveness of the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus voltage. Set n1- (50.0 - 500.0 ms)
Expert 13 = 1 [DC Bus Stabilization Control = Enabled] to enable this parameter.
Note:
Adjust this parameter in 100 ms increments.
■ n1-15: PWM Voltage Offset Calibration

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-15 PWM Voltage Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0BF8) Calibration Sets the calibration method that the drive uses to decrease torque/current ripple. (0 - 2)
Expert
This calibration function lets the drive suppress the torque ripple of a motor. Usually it is not necessary to change
this setting.
0 : No Calibration
1 : One Time Calibrate at Next Start
2 : Calibrate Every Time at Start
Parameter Details
12

■ n1-16: Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-16 Hunting Prevention High Fc V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0BFB) Gain Sets the gain for the hunting prevention function. This parameter functions best with a high carrier (0.00 - 2.50)
frequency. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
Set n1-01 = 2 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)] to enable this function.
If the motor oscillates, set n1-01 = 2. If that does not have an effect, increase this parameter in 0.2-unit
increments.
■ n1-17: Hunting Prevent High Fc Filter

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-17 Hunting Prevent High Fc V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 500 ms
(0BFC) Filter Sets the responsiveness of the hunting prevention function. Usually it is not necessary to change (0 - 1000 ms)
Expert this parameter.
When n1-01 = 2 [Hunting Prevention Selection = Enabled (High Carrier Frequency)], if the motor stalls when
the load changes, increase the value set in this parameter in 100 ms increments.
If you set n1-01 = 2 and you cannot suppress hunting, increase the value set in this parameter in 100 ms
increments.
■ n1-20: Voltage Calibration Duration

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n1-20 Voltage Calibration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms
(1588) Duration Sets the calibration time at start. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter. (10 - 500 ms)
Expert
◆ n2: Auto Freq Regulator (AFR)

The speed feedback detection reduction function (or AFR: Automatic Frequency Regulator) helps the speed
become stable when you suddenly apply or remove a load.
Note:
Before you change n2-xx parameters, do one of these procedures:
• Set the motor parameters and V/f pattern correctly.
• Do Rotational Auto-Tuning.
■ n2-01: Automatic Freq Regulator Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n2-01 Automatic Freq Regulator V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(0584) Gain Sets the gain of the AFR function as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary to change (0.00 - 10.00)
this setting.

• If hunting or oscillation occurs with light loads, increase the setting value in 0.05-unit increments and examine
the response.
• When torque is not sufficient with heavy loads or to make the torque or speed response better, decrease the
setting value in 0.05-unit increments and examine the response.
■ n2-02: Automatic Freq Regulator Time 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n2-02 Automatic Freq Regulator V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50 ms
(0585) Time 1 Sets the time constant that sets the rate of change for the AFR function. Usually it is not necessary (0 - 2000 ms)

• If there is hunting or oscillation with a light load, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments and examine
the response. If the load inertia is large, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments and examine the
response.
• If torque is not sufficient with a heavy load or if you must increase torque or speed responsiveness, decrease the
setting value in 10 ms increments and examine the response.
Note:
• Set n2-02 ≤ n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2]. If n2-02 > n2-03, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• When you change the value in n2-02, also change the value in C4-02 [Torque Compensation Delay Time] by the same ratio.
■ n2-03: Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n2-03 Automatic Freq Regulator V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 750 ms
(0586) Time 2 Sets the time constant that sets the speed difference of the AFR function. Use this parameter for (0 - 2000 ms)
speed searches or regeneration. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

• If the drive detects ov [Overvoltage] when acceleration stops under high-inertia loads, increase the setting value
in 50 ms increments.
If the drive detects ov when the load changes suddenly, increase the setting value in 50 ms increments.
• To increase the responsiveness of torque and speed, decrease the setting value in 10 ms increments and examine
the response.
Note:
• Set n2-02 ≤ n2-03 [Automatic Freq Regulator Time 2]. If n2-02 > n2-03, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• When you change the value in n2-03, also change the value in C4-06 [Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time] by the same ratio.
◆ n3: High Slip Braking (HSB) and Overexcitation Braking

n3 parameters configure High Slip Braking and Overexcitation Deceleration.
■ High Slip Braking

High slip braking quickly decelerates motors without braking resistors.
This lets you stop a motor more quickly than with the ramp to stop processes. This function is best for
applications that do not frequently stop the motor, for example the fast stop function for high-inertia loads.
Braking starts when the MFDI for High Slip Braking (HSB) Activate [H1-xx = 68] activates.
Figure 12.146 High Slip Braking Time Chart

An induction motor is necessary to use high slip braking. Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] to one of these
values to enable high slip braking:
• 0 [V/f Control]
• 1 [V/f Control with Encoder]
Principles of Operation
HSB increases motor slip by significantly decreasing the frequency supplied to the motor at the same time that
deceleration starts. A large quantity of current flows through the motor to increase the motor loss, and the motor
decelerates while the motor windings consume the regenerative energy.
The drive keeps the motor current at a constant level during deceleration to prevent oC [Overcurrent] and ov
Parameter Details
[Overvoltage] and do automatic braking. It also keeps a slip level that causes the maximum quantity of
deceleration torque.
High Slip Braking Precautions
• Do not use the high slip braking function in these applications:
– Frequent deceleration
12

– Deceleration time differences

– Continuous regenerative loads
– It is necessary to accelerate again during deceleration
• Motor loss increases during high slip braking. Use this function when the duty time factor is 5% ED or less and
the braking time is 90 seconds or less. The load inertia and motor characteristics have an effect on the braking
time.
• The drive ignores the configured deceleration time during high slip braking. To stop motors in the configured
deceleration time, set L3-04 = 4 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Overexcitation/High Flux].
• You cannot use high slip braking to decelerate deceleration at user-defined speeds. To decelerate at user-defined
speeds, use the overexcitation deceleration function.
• You cannot accelerate the motor again during high slip braking until you fully stop the motor and input the Run
command again.
• You cannot use high slip braking and the KEB Ride-Thru function at the same time. If you enable those two
functions, the drive will detect oPE03 [Multi-Function Input Setting Err].
■ Overexcitation Deceleration
Overexcitation deceleration quickly decelerates motors without braking resistors.
This lets you stop a motor more quickly than with the ramp to stop processes.
Overexcitation deceleration increases excitation current during deceleration to cause a large quantity of braking
torque through motor overexcitation. You can set the deceleration speed to adjust the deceleration time for
overexcitation deceleration.
Overexcitation deceleration lets you accelerate the motor again during deceleration.
Enter the Run command during overexcitation deceleration to cancel overexcitation deceleration and accelerate
the drive to the specified speed.
To enable this function, set L3-04 = 4, 5 [Stall Prevention during Decel = Overexcitation/High Flux,
Overexcitation/High Flux 2].
When L3-04 = 4, the motor will decelerate for the deceleration time set in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08. If the
drive detects ov [Overvoltage], increase the deceleration time.
When L3-04 = 5, the drive uses the value in C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, or C1-08 to decelerate and it adjusts the
deceleration rate to keep the DC bus voltage at the level set in L3-17 [DC Bus Regulation Level]. The load inertia
and motor characteristics have an effect on the braking time.
Notes on Overexcitation Deceleration
• Do not use Overexcitation Deceleration with a braking resistor.
• Do not use Overexcitation Deceleration for these applications. Connect a braking resistor to the drive as an
alternative to Overexcitation Deceleration.
– Frequent sudden decelerations
– Continuous regenerative loads
– Low inertia machines
– Machines that have no tolerance for torque ripples
• Motor loss increases during overexcitation deceleration. Use this function when the duty time factor is 5% ED
or less and the braking time is 90 seconds or less. The load inertia and motor characteristics have an effect on
the braking time. You can use overexcitation deceleration in OLV control and CLV control, but those control
methods decrease the precision of torque control and braking efficiency. Use V/f control for the best results.
• The drive disables these functions during braking with Overexcitation Deceleration 2:
– Hunting Prevention Function (V/f Control)
– Torque Limit Speed Control (OLV Control)
■ n3-01: HSB Deceleration Frequency Width

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-01 HSB Deceleration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5%
(0588) Frequency Width Sets the amount by which the output frequency is to be lowered during high-slip braking, as a (1 - 20%)
Expert percentage of E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency], which represents the 100% value.

When you must detect ov [DC Bus Overvoltage] during high-slip braking, set this parameter to a large value.
■ n3-02: HSB Current Limit Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-02 HSB Current Limit Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01 and
(0589) Sets the maximum current output during high-slip braking as a percentage, where E2-01 [Motor L8-38
Expert Rated Current (FLA)] is 100%. Also set the current suppression to prevent exceeding drive (0 - 150%)
overload tolerance.
Note:
The upper limit of the setting range changes when the setting for C6-01 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
• 150% when C6-01 = 0 [Heavy Duty Rating 1 (HD1) for Constant Torque Applications].
• 110% when C6-01 = 1 [Normal Duty Rating 1 (ND1) for Variable Torque Applications].
When you decrease the setting value for current suppression, it will make the deceleration time longer.
• When you must detect ov [DC Bus Overvoltage] during high-slip braking, set this parameter to a low value.
• If the motor current increases during high-slip braking, decrease the setting value to prevent burn damage in the
motor.
• The overload tolerance for the drive is 150% for Heavy Duty Rating (HD) and 110% for Normal Duty Rating
(ND).
■ n3-03: HSB Dwell Time at Stop

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-03 HSB Dwell Time at Stop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0 s
(058A) Sets the dwell time, a length of time when high-slip braking is ending and during which the motor (0.0 - 10.0 s)
Expert speed decreases and runs at a stable speed. For a set length of time, the drive will hold the actual
output frequency at the minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
If there is too much inertia or when the motor is coasting to a stop after high-slip braking is complete, increase the
setting value. If the setting value is too low, machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate after high-slip braking is
complete.
■ n3-04: HSB Overload Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-04 HSB Overload Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 40 s
(058B) Sets the time used to detect oL7 [High Slip Braking Overload], which occurs when the output (30 - 1200 s)
Expert frequency does not change during high-slip braking. Usually it is not necessary to change this
parameter.
If a force on the load side is rotating the motor or if there is too much load inertia connected to the motor, the
drive will detect oL7.
The current flowing to the motor from the load can overheat the motor and cause burn damage to the motor. Set
this parameter to prevent burn damage to the motor.
■ n3-13: OverexcitationBraking (OEB) Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-13 OverexcitationBraking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.10
(0531) (OEB) Gain Sets the gain value that the drive multiplies by the V/f pattern output value during overexcitation (1.00 - 1.40)
deceleration to calculate the overexcitation level.
The V/f pattern output value goes back to its usual level after the motor stops or accelerates again to the frequency
reference speed.
The best value of this parameter changes when the flux saturation characteristics of the motor change.
• Gradually increase the value of n3-13 to 1.25 or 1.30 to increase the braking power of Overexcitation
Parameter Details
Deceleration. If the gain is too much, the motor can have flux saturation and cause a large quantity of current to
flow.
• This can increase the deceleration time. Decrease the setting value if flux saturation causes overcurrent. If you
increase the setting value, the drive can detect oC [Overcurrent], oL1 [Motor Overload], and oL2 [Drive
Overload]. Decrease the value of n3-21 [HSB Current Suppression Level] to prevent oC and oL.
12

• If you use overexcitation deceleration frequently or if you use overexcitation deceleration for an extended
period of time, it can increase motor temperature. Decrease the setting value in these conditions.
• If ov [Overvoltage] occurs, increase the deceleration time.
■ n3-14: OEB High Frequency Injection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-14 OEB High Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0532) Injection Sets the function that injects harmonic signals during overexcitation deceleration. (0, 1)
Expert
Enable this parameter to set a shorter deceleration time.

Note:
• If you frequently use overexcitation deceleration on a motor, the motor loss will increase the risk of burn damage.
• When you set this parameter to 1, the motor can make a loud excitation sound during overexcitation deceleration. If the excitation
sound is unwanted, set this parameter to 0 to disable the function.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
The drive injects harmonic signals at the time of overexcitation deceleration. You can decrease the deceleration
time because motor loss increases.
■ n3-21: HSB Current Suppression Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-21 HSB Current Suppression V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100%
(0579) Level Sets the upper limit of the current that is suppressed at the time of overexcitation deceleration as a (0 - 150%)
percentage of the drive rated current.
If flux saturation during Overexcitation Deceleration makes the motor current become more than the value set in
n3-21, the drive will automatically decrease the overexcitation gain. If oC [Overcurrent], oL1 [Motor Overload],
or oL2 [Drive Overload] occur during overexcitation deceleration, decrease the setting value.
If repetitive or long overexcitation deceleration cause the motor to overheat, decrease the setting value.
■ n3-23: Overexcitation Braking Operation

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n3-23 Overexcitation Braking V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(057B) Operation Sets the direction of motor rotation where the drive will enable overexcitation. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled Only when Rotating FWD
2 : Enabled Only when Rotating REV
Note:
When n3-23 = 1, 2, the drive enables overexcitation only in the direction of motor rotation in which a regenerative load is applied.
Increased motor loss can decrease ov [Overvoltage] faults.
◆ n4: Adv Open Loop Vector Tune

To make special adjustments for Advanced Open Loop [A1-02 = 4] (AOLV) control, note these items:
• Do Rotational Auto-Tuning first.
• When there is a load, applications must stay constant around zero speed in AOLV control. If the application will
not stay constant around zero speed, set A1-02 = 3 [Closed Loop Vector].
• The tolerance of regenerative torque at low speeds decreases in AOLV control. When regenerative torque is
necessary in the low speed range, set A1-02 = 3.
• You cannot use AOLV control in elevators or other lifting applications because there is a risk that the load could
slip.
• If you operate the drive at a frequency lower than n4-70 [Speed Command Comp @ Low Freq] (default setting:
1.00 Hz), the motor can rotate at a frequency that is approximately 1/2 of the n4-70 setting. Set E1-09
[Minimum Output Frequency] > 0 to not let the motor to rotate at a lower frequency than the n4-70 setting.
When the frequency reference ≤ E1-09, the drive output will turn OFF.

■ n4-60: Motoring Low Speed Comp Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-60 Motoring Low Speed Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 %
(1B80) Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for motoring loads in the low speed (50.0 - 200.0%)
range.
Note:
• To improve torque accuracy in the motoring direction when running at low speeds, either perform only Stationary Auto-Tuning for
Line-to-Line Resistance, or increase the setting value in 5% increments. The recommended setting is 100% to 120%.
• If the output frequency changes when you operate at low speeds, do Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance only. If it is
not better, increase this parameter in 10% increments. The recommended setting is 50% to 100%.
■ n4-61: Low Speed Comp Frequency Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-61 Low Speed Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz
(1B81) Frequency Level Sets a frequency at which the settings n4-60 [Motoring Low Speed Comp Gain] and n4-62 [Regen (0.50 - 12.00 Hz)
Low Speed Comp Gain] are enabled. When the output frequency < n4-61, the drive adjusts the
torque to agree with the settings for n4-60 and n4-62. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
■ n4-62: Regen Low Speed Comp Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-62 Regen Low Speed Comp V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0 %
(1B82) Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for regenerative loads in the low speed (50.0 - 500.0%)
range.
Note:
If you do not apply a regenerative load when you operate at low speeds, do stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance only. If
this does not make it better, increase the setting value in 5% increments. The recommended setting is 100% to 150%. If you set this
parameter too high, the drive will detect CF [Control Fault] at stop.
■ n4-63: Speed EstimateResponse@High Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-63 Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60.0
(1B83) EstimateResponse@High Sets the responsiveness of the speed estimation in high speed ranges, where the output frequency (0.1 - 300.0)
Freq is ≥ n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq].
If better response of speed estimation is necessary, or if the motor oscillates, or if there is a large quantity of
torque ripple, increase the setting value in 10.0 unit increments. If this does not make it better, decrease the setting
value in 10.0 unit increments.
Note:
Do rotational Auto-Tuning before you adjust n4-63, n4-64 [Speed Estimate Response@Low Freq], n4-65 [Flux Estimate
Response@High Freq], and n4-66 [Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq].
■ n4-64: Speed Estimate Response@Low Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-64 Speed Estimate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60.0
(1B84) Response@Low Freq Sets the responsiveness of the speed estimation in low speed ranges, where 0 ≤ the output (0.1 - 300.0)
frequency, which is < n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq].
If better response of speed estimation is necessary, or if the motor oscillates, or if there is a large quantity of
torque ripple, increase the setting value in 10.0 unit increments.
Note:
Parameter Details
Do rotational Auto-Tuning before you adjust n4-63 [Speed EstimateResponse@High Freq], n4-64, n4-65 [Flux Estimate
Response@High Freq], and n4-66 [Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq].
12

■ n4-65: Flux Estimate Response@High Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-65 Flux Estimate V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(1B85) Response@High Freq Sets the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation in high speed ranges, where the output (0.50 - 3.00)
frequency is ≥ n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq]. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
If the drive detects oS [Overspeed] in no-load conditions, or if the speed does not become stable in the high speed
range, increase or decrease the setting value in 0.05 unit increments.
■ n4-66: Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-66 Flux Estimate Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50
(1B86) @Low Freq Sets the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation in low speed ranges, where 0 ≤ the output (0.50 - 3.00)
frequency, which is < n4-67 [Estimate Gain Switchover Freq]. Usually it is not necessary to
If the drive detects oS [Overspeed] in no-load conditions, or if the speed does not become stable in the low speed
range, increase or decrease the setting value in 0.05 unit increments.
■ n4-67: Estimate Gain Switchover Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-67 Estimate Gain Switchover V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6.00 Hz
(1B87) Freq Sets the switching frequency for estimation gain for these parameters: (0.00 - E1-04 setting)
n4-63 [Speed EstimateResponse@High Freq]
n4-64 [Speed Estimate Response@Low Freq]
n4-65 [Flux Estimate Response@High Freq]
n4-66 [Flux Estimate Response @Low Freq]
When the output frequency ≥ n4-67, the drive will select n4-63 and n4-65. When the output frequency < n4-67,
the drive will select n4-64 and n4-66.
■ n4-68: Speed Estimation Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-68 Speed Estimation Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.001 s
(1B88) Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the speed estimation value. Usually it is not necessary to (0.001 - 0.010 s)
If the motor speed oscillates in the high speed range, set the value to 0.010 s.
■ n4-69: Flux Control Response

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-69 Flux Control Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(1B89) Unifies control of magnetic flux to make motor vibrations more stable. (0.00 - 60.00)
If step-out occurs when the load changes, decrease the setting value in 1.00 increments.
Note:
If heavy loads decrease motor speed, increase the setting value in 1.00 increments. If it does not get better, increase n4-74 [Limit of Flux
Loop] in 20% increments.
■ n4-70: Speed Command Comp @ Low Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-70 Speed Command Comp @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 Hz
(1B8A) Low Freq Sets the function to make the drive more stable when operating at low speeds. Usually it is not (0.00 - 6.00 Hz)
This function makes the control more stable when you operate at low speeds.
• If the load is light when the drive operates in the low speed range, increase the setting value in 0.3 Hz
increments.

Note:
Increase the setting value to increase the stability when the drive is operating at low speed. It can make the speed control less accurate.
• When the motor rotates faster than the frequency reference at low speed, decrease the setting value in 0.1 Hz
increments.
Note:
If you set the value too low, the motor can rotate in reverse.
■ n4-71: Flux Estimation Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-71 Flux Estimation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B8B) Sets the flux estimation method. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
Expert
0 : Method 1
1 : Method 2
■ n4-72: Speed Feedback Mode

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-72 Speed Feedback Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B8C) Sets the requirement for an encoder option when A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = (0, 1)
Advanced Open Loop Vector].
You can connect a PG-B3 or PG-X3 encoder option in AOLV control. You can use the encoder option for better
speed control precision.
Note:
• When you use an encoder option in AOLV control to operate machinery, specialized tuning of the drive can be necessary. You should
usually set A1-02 = 3 [Control Method Selection = Closed Loop Vector] when you use an encoder option.
• When you set this parameter to 1, also set the number of PG pulses in F1-01 [Encoder 1 Pulse Count (PPR)].
0 : Without Encoder
1 : With Encoder
■ n4-73: PGo Recovery Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-73 PGo Recovery Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1B8D) Sets the restart mode to Without Encoder Mode or the With Encoder Mode when an encoder is (0, 1)
disconnected.
Set A1-02 = 4 [Control Method Selection = AOLV] and n4-72 = 1 [Speed Feedback Mode = With Encoder] to
use this parameter.
Parameter F1-02 [Encoder Signal Loss Detect Sel] sets the drive response when the drive detects a disconnected
encoder. This parameter sets the drive to start up in the Without Encoder Mode or With Encoder Mode if the drive
detects PGo [Encoder (PG) Feedback Loss].
Note:
A PG-B3 encoder option is necessary to use this parameter. When you use a PG-X3 option, it is not necessary to set this parameter.
If the drive detects PGo, de-energize the drive and examine the wiring for the encoder.
0 : Without Encoder
1 : With Encoder
■ n4-74: Limit of Flux Loop

No. Default
Name Description
Parameter Details
(Hex.) (Range)
n4-74 Limit of Flux Loop V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 250%
(1B8E) Sets the control level for flux loop control output. (100 - 500%)
If the torque is not sufficient because of 100% or more loads, increase the setting value in 20% increments. If the
setting is too high, overexcitation could occur and overheat the motor.
12

◆ n5: Feed Forward Control

Feed forward control increases the responsiveness of acceleration and deceleration as specified by the speed
reference.
Increase the values set in C5-01 and C5-03 [ASR Proportional Gain] to apply feed forward control to machines
that have low rigidity and are possible to have hunting and vibration or to machines that have a large quantity of
inertia. When you use this function in CLV control, it also helps prevent overshoot. Refer to Figure 12.147 for
information. Refer to Figure 12.148 for more information about parameters related to feed forward control.
Set A1-02 [Control Method Selection] to one of these values to enable feed forward control:
• 3: Closed Loop Vector Control
• 4: Advanced OpenLoop Vector Control
• 6: PM Advanced Open Loop Vector
• 7: PM Closed Loop Vector Control
Note:
• You cannot use feed forward control to increase responsiveness in applications where you apply loads externally during run at constant
speed.
• When you use the Droop control function, set n5-01 = 0 [Feed Forward Control Selection = Disabled].
• You cannot use feed forward control with motor 2.
Figure 12.147 Suppress Overshooting with Feed Forward Control
Figure 12.148 Configure Feed Forward Control
■ Before You Use Feed Forward Control

Do one of these procedures before you use feed forward control.
• Run Auto-Tuning to set motor parameters.
When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, manually set motor parameters with the information on the motor nameplate
or test reports. Set the E2 parameters for induction motors. Set the E5 parameters for PM motors.
• Set C5 parameters [Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)] individually to adjust the speed control loop (ASR).
• If you can connect a motor to a machine and rotate it during Auto-Tuning, do Inertia Tuning.
The drive automatically adjusts feed forward parameters during Inertia Tuning.
• If you cannot do Inertia Tuning, refer to Figure 12.148 and set the parameters related to feed forward control
individually.

■ n5-01: Feed Forward Control Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n5-01 Feed Forward Control V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(05B0) Selection Sets the feed forward function. (0, 1)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
■ n5-02: Motor Inertia Acceleration Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n5-02 Motor Inertia Acceleration V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by C6-01, E5-
(05B1) Time Sets the length of time for the motor to accelerate from the stopped to the maximum frequency 01, and o2-04
with a single motor at the rated torque. Inertia Tuning automatically sets the motor acceleration (0.001 - 10.000 s)
time.
If you cannot do Inertia Tuning, calculate the motor acceleration time as shown here or measure the motor
acceleration time and set n5-02 to this value.
Calculate the Motor Acceleration Time
Use this formula to find the motor acceleration time:
• JMotor = Moment of inertia of motor (kg m2)

• nrated = Motor rated speed (min-1, r/min)
• Trated = Motor rated torque (N m)
You can also use this formula to find the motor acceleration time:
• frated = Motor rated frequency (Hz)

• P = Number of motor poles
Calculate the Motor Acceleration Time
Use this procedure to calculate the motor acceleration time:
1. Use A1-02 [Control Method Selection] to set the control method.
2. Disconnect the motor and load.
3. Run Auto-Tuning to set motor parameters.
When you cannot do Auto-Tuning, manually set motor parameters with the information on the motor
nameplate or test reports. Set the E2 parameters for induction motors. Set the E5 parameters for PM motors.
4. Set C5 parameters [Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)].
5. Set C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] = 0.
6. Set L7-01 [Forward Torque Limit] to 100%.
7. Set the frequency reference to the same value as the motor rated speed.
8. Measure the length of time for the motor to reach the rated speed.
Show U1-05 [Motor Speed] on the keypad and enter the Run command (forward run).
9. Stop the motor.
10. Set n5-02 to the measured motor acceleration time value.
Reset all of the parameters that you changed to the previous setting values.
■ n5-03: Feed Forward Control Gain

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n5-03 Feed Forward Control Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(05B2) Sets the ratio between load inertia and motor inertia. Inertia Tuning automatically sets the (0.00 - 100.00)
Feedforward Control Gain value.
When you cannot do Inertia Tuning, use this procedure to set n5-03: 12

Set n5-02 [Motor Inertia Acceleration Time].

1. Connect the motor and load.
2. Set C1-01 [Acceleration Time 1] = 0.
3. Use L7-01 to L7-04 [Torque Limit] to set the expected test run torque limit levels.
4. Set the frequency reference as specified by the high speed range of the machine.
5. Measure the length of time for the motor to reach the command reference speed.
Show U1-05 [Motor Speed] on the keypad and enter the Run command.
6. Stop the motor.
7. Replace the values in the this formula and set n5-03 to the value of the formula.
• taccel = Acceleration time (s)

• frated = Motor rated frequency (Hz)
• TLim_Test = Test run torque limit (%)
• fref_Test = Test run frequency reference (Hz)
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Machinery can accelerate suddenly. Do not use this function with machinery that must
not accelerate suddenly. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death.
Reset all of the parameters that you changed to the previous setting values.
Note:
• If response to the speed reference is slow, increase the value set in n5-03.
• Increase the value set in n5-03 when response to the speed reference is slow.
–The speed is overshooting.
–A negative torque reference is output when acceleration ends.
■ n5-04: Speed Response Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n5-04 Speed Response Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(05B3) Sets the response frequency for the speed reference. Usually it is not necessary to change this (0.00 - 500.00 Hz)
RUN parameter.
Expert
If you set n5-03 [Feed Forward Control Gain] too high, the motor speed will momentarily increase to more than
the set frequency.
◆ n6: Online Tuning

n6 parameters are used to set the online tuning function for motor line-to-line resistance.
The Online Tuning for motor line-to-line resistance is used to prevent degradation of speed control accuracy due
to motor temperature fluctuation and motor stalls due to insufficient torque.
■ n6-01: Online Tuning Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n6-01 Online Tuning Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0570) Sets the type of motor data that Online Tuning uses for OLV control. (0 - 2)
0 : Disabled
1 : Line-to-Line Resistance Tuning
The drive adjusts the motor line-to-line resistance during run. This procedure is applicable for speed values 6 Hz
and less. It also adjusts the motor resistance value to increase the overload capacity in the low speed range.
2 : Voltage Correction Tuning
The drive adjusts the output voltage during run to increase overload tolerance and minimize the effects of high
temperatures on speed precision.
Note:
Setting 2 is enabled only when b8-01 = 0 [Energy Saving Control Selection = Disabled].

■ n6-05: Online Tuning Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n6-05 Online Tuning Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(05C7) Sets the compensation gain when n6-01 = 2 [Online Tuning Selection = Voltage Correction (0.1 - 50.0)
Expert Tuning]. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
When you use a motor that has a large secondary circuit time constant, decrease the setting value.
If the drive detects oL1 [Motor Overload], increase the setting value in 0.1-unit increments.
■ n6-11: Online Resistance Tuning

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n6-11 Online Resistance Tuning V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.000
(1B56) Sets the responsiveness for online resistor tuning. Set this parameter to approximately 1.000 to (0.000 - 1.000)
Expert enable the function. The function is disabled when the value is 0.000.
◆ n7: EZ Drive
The n7 parameters provide special adjustments for EZ Vector Control.
■ n7-01: Damping Gain for Low Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-01 Damping Gain for Low V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.0
(3111) Frequency Sets the oscillation suppression gain for the low speed range. (0.1 - 10.0)
Expert
Note:
• If oscillation occurs in the low speed range, increase the acceleration time or increase the setting value in 0.5-unit increments.
• To get starting torque with the setting for C4-01 [Torque Compensation Gain], decrease the setting value in 0.3-unit increments.
■ n7-05: Response Gain for Load Changes

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-05 Response Gain for Load V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100
(3115) Changes Sets the response gain related to changes in the load. (10 - 1000)
Expert
Note:
To make tracking related to load changes better, increase the setting value in 5-unit increments. If oscillation occurs during load
changes, decrease the setting value in 5-unit increments.
■ n7-07: Speed Calculation Gain1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-07 Speed Calculation Gain1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 15.0
(3117) Sets the speed calculation gain during usual operation. Usually it is not necessary to change this (1.0 - 50.0)
Expert setting.
■ n7-08: Speed Calculation Gain2

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-08 Speed Calculation Gain2 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 25.0
(3118) Sets the speed calculation gain during a speed search. (1.0 - 50.0)
Parameter Details
Expert
Note:
When you increase the setting value, you can do a speed search of a motor rotating at a high frequency. If the setting value is too high,
the calculated speed will oscillate and a restart will fail. Decrease the setting value in these conditions.
12

■ n7-10: Pull-in Current Switching Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-10 Pull-in Current Switching V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0%
(311A) Speed Sets the speed range to operate with the pull-in current command. Drive rated frequency = 100% (0.0 - 100.0%)
Expert value. If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low speed range, increase
the setting value.
Note:
–Motor speed ≤ n7-10 + n7-11 [Drv Mode Switch Hysteresis Band]: n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration]
• When the drive decelerates, it enables these settings:
–Motor speed ≤ n7-10: n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration]
–Motor speed > n7-10: b8-01 [Energy Saving Control Selection]
• If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low speed range, increase the setting value.
• When it is most important to save energy in the low speed range, decrease the setting value.
■ n7-11: Drv Mode Switch Hysteresis Band

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-11 Drv Mode Switch V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0%
(311B) Hysteresis Band Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the hysteresis level for Switching Speed set (1.0 - 20.0%)
Expert in n7-10 [Pull-in Current Switching Speed].
When the speed is lower than n7-10 + n7-11 during acceleration, the drive enables pull-in current.
Note:
–Motor speed ≤ n7-10 + n7-11: n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration]
• If there is a large quantity of oscillation when you operate in the low speed range, increase the setting value.
• When it is most important to save energy in the low speed range, decrease the setting value.
■ n7-13: Pull-in Current Switching Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-13 Driving Method Switching V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100 ms
(311D) Time Sets a time to enable the pull-in current commands. (0 - 1000 ms)
Expert
If the motor oscillates near the speed set in n7-10 [Pull-in Current Switching Speed], decrease the setting value by
20 ms.
■ n7-17: Resistance TemperatureCorrection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n7-17 Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(3122) TemperatureCorrection Sets the function to adjust for changes in the motor resistance value caused by changes in the (0 to 2)
temperature.
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid (Only 1 time)
2 : Valid (Every time)
Note:
• For settings 1 and 2, the adjustment time can cause a delay before startup.
• For settings 1 and 2, the drive can set the line-to-line resistance value of E9-10 [Motor Line-to-Line Resistance].
• When the temperature will change at startup, use setting 2.
• To decrease the startup time, set this parameter to 0, then do line-to-line resistance tuning.
• If you will start from coasting, set this parameter to 0, then do line-to-line resistance tuning.

◆ n8: PM Motor Control Tuning

n8 parameters are used to make adjustments when controlling PM motors.
■ n8-01: Pole Position Detection Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-01 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50%
(0540) Current Sets the Initial Rotor Position Estimated Current as a percentage where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated (0 - 100%)
Expert Current (FLA)] = 100%. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
The drive uses the Initial Rotor Position Estimated Current to detect the initial position of rotors.
Use the "Si" value on the motor nameplate, if available.
■ n8-02: Pole Alignment Current Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-02 Pole Alignment Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 80%
(0541) Level Sets the current at the time of polar attraction as a percentage where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated (0 - 150%)
Expert Current (FLA)] = 100%. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
The drive uses the polar pull-in current to attract the rotor after it detects the initial rotor position. When you
increase the value of n8-02, the starting torque also increases.
• If the motor does not track correctly at the time of the polar attraction, increase the value in 10% increments. If
you set the value too high, the drive will detect oL2 [Drive Overload].
• If the motor oscillates at the time of the polar attraction, decrease the value in 10% increments.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], do Rotational Auto-Tuning or Z Pulse Offset Tuning to enable this function.
■ n8-03: Pole Position Detection Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-03 Pole Position Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.5 s
(0542) Time Sets the length of the Current Starting Time, which is used for Z Pulse Offset Tuning. Usually it is (1.5 - 5.0 s)
not necessary to change this setting.
Sets the length of time of pull-in current when the drive detects the motor magnetic pole of the rotors.
Note:
If the motor oscillates at the time of the polar attraction, increase the value in 0.5 s increments. If the value is too high, the drive can
detect oL2 [Drive Overload].
■ n8-04: Pole Alignment Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-04 Pole Alignment Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.5 s
(0543) Sets the length of the Polar Attraction Time, which is used for Z Pulse Offset Tuning. Usually it is (1.5 - 5.0 s)
Expert not necessary to change this setting.
Sets the length of time that the pull-in current flows when the drive detects the motor magnetic pole of the rotors.
Note:
If the motor oscillates at the time of the polar attraction, increase the value in 0.5 s increments. If you set the value too high, the drive
will detect oL2 [Drive Overload].
■ n8-11: Observer Calculation Gain 2

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-11 Observer Calculation Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by n8-72
(054A) 2 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.0 - 1000.0)
Note:
When n8-72 = 0 [Speed Estimation Method Select = Method 1], the default value is 50.0. When n8-72 = 1 [Method 2], the default value
is 150.0. 12

■ n8-14: Polarity Compensation Gain 3

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-14 Polarity Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.000
(054D) Gain 3 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.000 - 10.000)
Expert
■ n8-15: Polarity Compensation Gain 4

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-15 Polarity Compensation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.500
(054E) Gain 4 Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.000 - 10.000)
Expert
■ n8-21: Motor Back-EMF (Ke) Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-21 Motor Back-EMF (Ke) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.90
(0554) Gain Sets the gain for speed estimation. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0.80 - 1.00)
Expert
■ n8-35: Initial Pole Detection Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-35 Initial Pole Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0562) Method Sets how the drive detects the position of the rotor at start. (0 - 2)
When you set A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], the initial motor magnetic pole detection
operates the first time after you energize the drive. After the first time, the drive uses the encoder signal to
calculate the rotor position and the drive saves the value until you de-energize the drive. If you use an absolute
value encoder, the initial motor magnetic pole detection will not operate.
Note:
• When you use an SPM motor, set n8-35 = 0. When you use an IPM motor, set n8-35 = 0 to 2.
• When you set n8-35 = 1, do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
• When you set n8-35 = 0 or 2, always evaluate the drive with the equipment being used for the application. If the drive incorrectly
detects the polarity, the motor can rotate in the direction opposite of the Run command.
0 : Pull-in
Starts the rotor with pull-in current.
Injects high frequency to detect the rotor position. This setting can cause a loud excitation sound when the motor
starts.
Note:
When you set 1, do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
2 : Pulse Injection
Inputs the pulse signal to the motor to detect the rotor position.
■ n8-36: HFI Frequency Level for L Tuning

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-36 HFI Frequency Level for L V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 500 Hz
(0563) Tuning Sets the injection frequency for high frequency injection. (200 - 1000 Hz)
Note:
• Set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High Frequency Injection] or n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] to enable
this parameter.

■ n8-37: HFI Voltage Amplitude Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-37 HFI Voltage Amplitude V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 20.0%
(0564) Level Sets the high frequency injection amplitude as a percentage where 200 V = 100% for 200 V class (0.0 - 50.0%)
Expert drives and 400 V = 100% for a 400 V class drives. Usually it is not necessary to change this
setting.
Note:
this parameter.
■ n8-39: HFI LPF Cutoff Freq

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-39 HFI LPF Cutoff Freq V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 250 Hz
(0566) Sets the low-pass filter shut-off frequency for high frequency injection. (0 - 1000 Hz)
Note:
this parameter.
■ n8-41: HFI P Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-41 HFI P Gain V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 2.5
(0568) Sets the response gain for the high frequency injection speed estimation. (-10.0 - +10.0)
Expert
Note:
this parameter.
• When A1-02= 6 [Control Method Selection = AOLV/PM] and you do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning, the drive automatically
sets this parameter .
• Set n8-41 > 0.0 for IPM motors.
Set this parameter as follows.
• If there is oscillation or hunting, decrease the setting in units of 0.5.
• When it is necessary to track load changes, increase the setting in units of 0.5.
■ n8-42: HFI I Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-42 HFI I Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.10 s
(0569) Sets the integral time constant for the high frequency injection speed estimation. Usually it is not (0.00 - 9.99 s)
Note:
Set n8-35 = 1 [Initial Pole Detection Method = High Frequency Injection] or n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] to enable
this parameter.
■ n8-45: Speed Feedback Detection Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-45 Speed Feedback Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.80
Gain
Parameter Details
(0538) Sets the internal speed feedback detection reduction unit gain as a magnification value. Usually it (0.00 - 10.00)

• If vibration or hunting occur, increase the setting value in 0.05 unit increments.
• If the responsiveness of torque and speed is unsatisfactory, decrease the setting value 0.05 unit increments and
12

■ n8-47: Pull-in Current Comp Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-47 Pull-in Current Comp Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5.0 s
(053A) Time Sets the time constant the drive uses to align the pull-in current reference value with the actual (0.0 - 100.0 s)
current value. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.

• If the time for the reference value of the pull-in current to align with the target value is too long, increase the
setting value.
• If vibration or hunting occur, decrease the setting value in 0.2 unit increments.
• If the motor stalls during run at constant speed, decrease the setting value in 0.2 unit increments.
■ n8-48: Pull-in/Light Load Id Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-48 Pull-in/Light Load Id V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30%
(053B) Current Sets the d-axis current that flows to the motor during run at constant speed as a percentage where (20 - 200%)
E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%.
Adjust in the following situations.

• Slightly reduce this value if there is too much current when driving a light load at a constant speed.
• Increase the setting value in steps of 5% when hunting or vibration occurs during run at constant speed.
• Increase the setting value in steps of 5% if the motor stalls during run at constant speed.
■ n8-49: Heavy Load Id Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-49 Heavy Load Id Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E5-01
(053C) Sets the d-axis current to that the drive will supply to the motor to run it at a constant speed with a (-200.0 - 0.0%)
Expert heavy load. Considers E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] to be 100%. Usually it is not
When you use an IPM motor, you can use the reluctance torque of the motor to make the motor more efficient and
help conserve energy.
When you operate an SPN motor, set this parameter to 0.
• If the load is large and motor rotation is not stable, decrease the setting value.
• If you change the E5 parameters [PM Motor Settings], set n8-49 = 0, then adjust this parameter.
■ n8-51: Pull-in Current @ Acceleration

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-51 Pull-in Current @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(053E) Acceleration Sets the pull-in current allowed to flow during acceleration/deceleration as a percentage of the (0 - 200%)
motor rated current.

• When the motor does not smoothly because of large loads, increase the setting value in 5% increments.
• If too much current flows during acceleration, decrease the setting value.
Note:
When A1-02 = 8 [Control Method Selection = EZOLV], this parameter will always be in effect for speed ranges less than n7-10 [Pull-in
Current Switching Speed].
■ n8-54: Voltage Error Compensation Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-54 Voltage Error V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00 s
(056D) Compensation Time Sets the time constant that the drive uses when adjusting for voltage errors. (0.00 - 10.00 s)
Expert


• If oscillation occurs at the time of start up, increase the setting value.
• If hunting occurs when operating at low speed, increase the setting value.
• If fast changes in the load cause hunting, increase the setting value in 0.1-unit increments. If you cannot stop
hunting, set n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration] to 0% and set n8-54 to 0.00 s, and disable compensation
for voltage errors.
■ n8-55: Motor to Load Inertia Ratio

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-55 Motor to Load Inertia Ratio V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(056E) Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia. (0 - 3)
Sets the ratio between motor inertia and machine inertia to adjust the ACR.
• If torque and speed response are unsatisfactory, gradually increase the setting from 0.
• If the motor does not run smoothly, gradually increase the setting from 0.
• If the motor stalls during run at constant speed, gradually increase the setting from 0.
• If there is vibration or hunting, decrease the setting.
Note:
• If the value too low, the drive will detect STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected].
• If you use one motor or more than motor at low inertia and the value is too high, there can be vibration in the motor.
0 : Below 1:10
Use this setting in these conditions:
• The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is less than 1:10
• There are large current ripples
• The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is approximately 1:10 to 1:30
• Parameter n8-55 = 0 and the drive detects STPo because of an impact load or sudden acceleration/deceleration.
• The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is approximately 1:30 to 1:50
3 : Beyond 1:50
• The ratio between the motor inertia and machine inertia is more than 1:50
■ n8-57: HFI Overlap Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-57 HFI Overlap Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0574) Sets the function that detects motor speed with high frequency injection. (0, 1)
Note:
• When you set n8-57 = 1, do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning.
• When there is high frequency injection, the motor will make an excitation sound.
• When you use Zero Speed Control, set E1-09 = 0.0 [Minimum Output Frequency = 0.0 Hz].
Parameter Details
0 : Disabled
Use this setting with SPM motors. The speed control range is approximately 1:20.
When n8-57 = 0, you cannot set E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency] ≤ 1/20 of the value of E1-06 [Base
Frequency].
1 : Enabled
12

The speed control range is 1:100. It gives sufficient speed detection at low speeds.
Note:
• It is not available with an SPM motor.
• The speed control range 1:100 is the momentary operation area. When you operate the motor continuously, make sure that the drive
capacity and motor capacity are acceptable.
■ n8-62: Output Voltage Limit Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-62 Output Voltage Limit Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V,
(057D) Sets the output voltage limit to prevent saturation of the output voltage. Usually it is not necessary 400 V Class: 400.0 V
Expert to change this parameter. (200 V Class: 0.0 to 230.0
V, 400 V Class: 0.0 to 460.0
V)
Set this parameter lower than the input power supply voltage.
Note:
• When A1-02 = 7, 8 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM, EZOLV], this parameter is available in Expert mode.
■ n8-65: Speed Fdbk Gain @ oV Suppression

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-65 Speed Fdbk Gain @ oV V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.50
(065C) Suppression Sets the gain of internal speed feedback detection suppression while the overvoltage suppression (0.00 - 10.00)
Expert function is operating as a magnification value. Usually it is not necessary to change this
parameter.

• If there is resonance or hunting when you use the overvoltage suppression function, increase the setting value.
• If motor response is low when you use the overvoltage suppression function, decrease the setting value in 0.05-
unit increments.
■ n8-69: Speed Observer Control P Gain

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-69 Speed Observer Control P V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1.00
(065D) Gain Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. Sets the Proportional gain that the drive uses for (0.00 - 20.00)
Expert speed estimation.
■ n8-72: Speed Estimation Method Select

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-72 Speed Estimation Method V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0655) Select Selects the speed estimation method. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting. (0, 1)
Expert
0 : Method 1
1 : Method 2
■ n8-74: Light Load Iq Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-74 Light Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30%
(05C3) Set n8-48 [Pull-in/Light Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis current) that (0 - 255%)
Expert you will apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting value of 100%.
Note:
• If n8-74 > n8-75 [Medium Load Iq Level (low)], the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• The change is linear between n8-74 and n8-75 and the level of the pull-in current from n8-48 to n8-78 [Medium Load Id Current].

■ n8-75: Medium Load Iq Level (low)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-75 Medium Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50%
(05C4) (low) Set n8-78 [Medium Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis current) that you (0 - 255%)
Expert will apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting value of 100%.
Note:
• If n8-74 [Light Load Iq Level] > n8-75, the drive will detect oPE08 [Parameter Selection Error].
• The change is linear between n8-74 and n8-75 and the level of the pull-in current from n8-48 to n8-78 [Medium Load Id Current].
■ n8-77: Heavy Load Iq Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-77 Heavy Load Iq Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90%
(05CE) Set n8-49 [Heavy Load Id Current] to the percentage of load current (q-axis current) that you will (0 - 255%)
Expert apply, where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = a setting value of 100%.
Note:
The change is linear between n8-75 [Medium Load Iq Level (low)] and n8-77 and the level of the pull-in current from n8-78 [Medium
Load Id Current] to n8-49 [Heavy Load Id Current].
■ n8-78: Medium Load Id Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-78 Medium Load Id Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(05F4) Sets the level of the pull-in current for mid-range loads. (0 - 255%)
Expert
■ n8-79: Pull-in Current @ Deceleration

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-79 Pull-in Current @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50%
(05FE) Deceleration Sets the pull-in current that can flow during deceleration as a percentage of the E5-03 [PM Motor (0 - 200%)
Rated Current (FLA)].
If overcurrent occurs during deceleration, slowly decrease the setting in 5% increments.

Note:
When n8-79 = 0, the drive will use the value set in n8-51 [Pull-in Current @ Acceleration].
■ n8-84: Polarity Detection Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-84 Polarity Detection Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100%
(02D3) Sets the current that the drive uses to estimate the initial motor magnetic pole as a percentage (0 - 150%)
Expert where E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)] = 100%.
Note:
The drive automatically calculates this value when High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning completes successfully.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Make sure that the polarity is correct before you send a Run command. If the drive
incorrectly detects the polarity, the drive can rotate in the direction opposite of the Run command and cause serious injury or
death.
When you use a Yaskawa motor, check the motor nameplate for an “Si” value and set this parameter ≥ "Si × 2".
Consult the motor manufacturer for information about maximum setting values.
Find the Polarity of Magnetic Poles
Parameter Details
When you start operation, the drive estimates the magnetic poles and finds the polarity of the magnetic poles.
When A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV/PM], the drive finds the polarity of the magnetic poles only at
the first startup.
Use U6-57 [PolePolarityDeterVal] to make sure that the drive correctly estimated the polarity of the magnetic
poles.
When you do High Frequency Injection Auto-Tuning, the drive automatically sets n8-84.
12

Note:
If the drive detects dv3, dv4, or LSo, increase the setting value.
■ n8-94: Flux Position Estimation Method

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-94 Flux Position Estimation V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by d5-01
(012D) Method Sets the criteria that the drive uses to find changes in speed or load. Usually it is not necessary to (0, 1)
0 : Softstarter
1 : Speed Feedback
Set n8-57 = 1 [HFI Overlap Selection = Enabled] to enable this parameter. Increases the stability when the speed
or load suddenly change, for example with rapid acceleration/deceleration or impact loads.
■ n8-95: Flux Position Est Filter Time

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
n8-95 Flux Position Est Filter V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30 ms
(012E) Time Sets the time constant of the filter used for the recognition criteria value for speed and load (0 - 100 ms)
Expert changes. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
Note:
Enabled when n8-94 = 1 [Flux Position Estimation Method = Speed Feedback].


o parameters set keypad functions.
Note:
You cannot set these parameters with the optional LED keypad.
Table 12.79 Parameters You Cannot Set with the LED Keypad
No. Name No. Name
o1-05 LCD Contrast Adjustment o3-04 Select Backup/Restore Location
o1-24 to o1-35: Custom Monitor 1 to 12 o3-05 Select Items to Backup/Restore
o1-36 LCD Backlight Brightness o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection
o1-37 LCD Backlight ON/OFF Selection o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval
o1-38 LCD Backlight Off-Delay o4-22 Time Format
o1-39 Show Initial Setup Screen o4-23 Date Format
o1-40 Home Screen Display Selection o4-24 bAT Detection Selection
o1-41 to o1-46: 1st to 3rd Monitor Area Selections/Settings o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection
o1-47 to o1-51: Trend Plot 1 or 2 Scale Settings o5-02 Log Sampling Interval
o1-55 to o1-56: Analog Gauge Area Selection/Setting o5-03 to o5-12: Log Monitor Data 1 to 10
o2-27 bCE Detection Selection
◆ o1: Keypad Display Selection

o1 parameters select the parameters shown on the initial keypad screen and to configure the parameter setting
units and display units. These parameters also adjust the backlight and contrast of the LCD display.
■ Home Screen Display Format

o1-40 [Home Screen Display Selection] changes the display of the monitor shown on the Home screen. You can
show numerical values or one of these three displays on the Home screen monitor:
A - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] to o1-24, o1-25, and o1-26. C - Set display ranges to o1-42, o1-44, and o1-46.
B - Set display regions to o1-41, o1-43, and o1-45.
Figure 12.149 Bar Graph Display
A - Set Ux-xx [Monitors] to o1-24. C - Set display ranges to o1-55.

B - Set display regions to o1-56.
Figure 12.150 Analog Gauge Display

Parameter Details
12

A- Set Ux-xx [Monitors] (Monitor 1) to o1-24. E - Set the time scale to o1-51.
B- Set Ux-xx [Monitors] (Monitor 2) to o1-25. F - Set the minimum value of Monitor 1 to o1-47.
C- Set the maximum value of Monitor 2 to o1-50. G - Set the maximum value of Monitor 1 to o1-48.
D- Set the minimum value of Monitor 2 to o1-49.
Figure 12.151 Trend Plot Display
■ o1-01: User Monitor Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-01 User Monitor Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 106
(0500) Sets the U monitor for the Drive Mode. This parameter is only available with an LED keypad. (104 - 855)
RUN
When the drive is in Drive Mode, push on the keypad to cycle through this data: frequency reference →
rotational direction → output frequency → output current → o1-01 selection.
Set the x-xx part of Ux-xx that is shown in the fifth position in Drive Mode. For example, to show U1-05 [Motor
Speed], set o1-01 = 105.
Note:
The monitors that you can select are different for different control methods.
■ o1-02: Monitor Selection at Power-up

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-02 Monitor Selection at Power- V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0501) up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after you energize the drive. Refer to “U: (1 - 5)
RUN Monitors” for information about the monitor items that the keypad screen can show. This
parameter is only available with an LED keypad.
1 : Frequency Reference (U1-01)

2 : Direction
3 : Output Frequency (U1-02)
4 : Output Current (U1-03)
5 : User Monitor (o1-01)
Shows the monitor item selected in o1-01 [User Monitor Selection].
■ o1-03: Frequency Display Unit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-03 Frequency Display Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0502) Selection Sets the display units for the frequency reference and output frequency. (0 - 3)
Note:
• Select the setting unit of these parameters:
–d1-01 to d1-17 [Reference 1 to 16, Jog Reference]
–U1-01 [Frequency Reference]
–U1-02 [Output Frequency]
–U1-05 [Motor Speed]
–U1-16 [SFS Output Frequency]
–U4-14 [PeakHold Output Freq]
–U6-27 [FeedFwd Estimate Spd]
• For monitor 2, the setting value is always 0 [Hz Unit].

0 : 0.01 Hz
1 : 0.01% (100% = E1-04)
The maximum output frequency is 100%.
The drive uses the maximum output frequency and number of motor poles to calculate this value automatically.
Note:
When you set o1-03 = 2, make sure that you set the number of motor poles in these parameters:
• E2-04 [Motor Pole Count]
• E4-04 [Motor 2 Motor Poles]
• E5-04 [PM Motor Pole Count]
3 : User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)
Uses o1-10 [User Units Maximum Value] and o1-11 [User Units Decimal Position] to set the unit of measure. The
value of parameter o1-10 is the value when you remove the decimal point from the maximum output frequency.
Parameter o1-11 is to the number of digits after the decimal point in the maximum output frequency.
To display a maximum output frequency of 100.00, set parameters to these values:
• o1-10 = 10000
• o1-11 = 2 [Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)]
■ o1-04: V/f Pattern Display Unit

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-04 V/f Pattern Display Unit V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0503) Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the V/f pattern frequency. (0, 1)
Note:
• Select the setting unit of these parameters:
–E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]
–E1-06 [Base Frequency]
–E1-07 [Mid Point A Frequency]
–E1-09 [Minimum Output Frequency]
–E1-11 [Mid Point B Frequency]
–E9-02 [Maximum Speed]
–E9-04 [Base Frequency]
• For monitor 2, the setting value is always 0 [Hz Unit].
0 : Hz
When you set o1-04 = 1, make sure that you set the number of motor poles in these parameters:
• E5-04 [PM Motor Pole Count]
■ o1-05: LCD Contrast Adjustment

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-05 LCD Contrast Adjustment V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 5
(0504) Sets the contrast of the LCD display on the keypad. (0 - 10)
RUN
When you decrease the setting value, the contrast of the LCD display decreases. When you increase the setting
value, the contrast increases.
Parameter Details
■ o1-10: User Units Maximum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-10 User Units Maximum Value V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o1-03
(0520) Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency. (1 - 60000) 12

To display a maximum output frequency of 100.00, set parameters to these values:

• o1-10 = 10000
• o1-11 = 2 [User Units Decimal Position = Two Decimal Places (XXX.XX)]
Note:
Set o1-03 = 3 [Frequency Display Unit Selection = User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)] before you set o1-10 and o1-11.
■ o1-11: User Units Decimal Position

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-11 User Units Decimal V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o1-03
(0521) Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values. (0 - 3)

Note:
Set o1-03 = 3 [Frequency Display Unit Selection = User Units (o1-10 & o1-11)] before you set o1-10 [User Units Maximum Value] and
o1-11.
■ o1-24 to o1-35: Custom Monitor 1 to 12

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-24 to o1-35 Custom Monitor 1 to 12 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV o1-24: 101
(11AD - 11B8) Sets a maximum of 12 monitors (Ux-xx) as user monitors. This parameter is only available when o1-25: 102
RUN you use an LCD keypad. o1-26: 103
o1-27 to o1-35: 0
(0, 101 - 9999)
These parameters save the monitor items selected by the LCD keypad [Custom Monitor].
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o1-24 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
When the x part of Ux is a letter, replace the letter (hexadecimal number) with a decimal number. For example, set o1-24 = 1301 to
monitor Ud-01.
• You can show a maximum of three selected monitors on one LCD keypad screen.
–When you select only one monitor, the text size of this monitor increases. For example, when o1-25 to o1-35 = 0, the text size of the
monitor saved in o1-24 increases.
–When you select two monitors, the text size of these monitors increase.
–When you select four or more monitors, the keypad shows the fourth monitor and all additional monitors on the next screens.
• You can show monitors selected with o1-24 to o1-26 as a bar graph, analog gauge, or trend plot.
–Bar graph display: 3 monitors maximum
Select with o1-24, o1-25, and o1-26.
–Analog gauge display: 1 monitor
Select with o1-24.
–Trend plot display: 2 monitors
Select with o1-24 and o1-25.
• You can only set parameters o1-24 to o1-26 with analog output monitors.
• You can set all monitors to parameters o1-27 to o1-35.
■ o1-36: LCD Backlight Brightness

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-36 LCD Backlight Brightness V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(11B9) Sets the intensity of the LCD keypad backlight. (1 - 5)
RUN
When you decrease the setting value, the intensity of the backlight decreases.

■ o1-37: LCD Backlight ON/OFF Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-37 LCD Backlight ON/OFF V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(11BA) Selection Sets the automatic shut off function for the LCD backlight. (0, 1)
RUN
Note:
Use o1-36 [LCD Backlight Brightness] to adjust the intensity of the LCD backlight.
0 : OFF
The backlight will automatically turn off after the time set in o1-38 [LCD Backlight Off-Delay] is expired.
When the backlight is off, push a key on the keypad to temporarily turn the backlight on. After the backlight turns
on, it will turn off automatically after the time set in o1-38 is expired.
Note:
When the backlight is off, push a key on the keypad to temporarily turn the backlight on. Push any key to start keypad operation. Push
to turn the backlight on, then push again to enter a Run command to the drive.
1 : ON
The backlight will always be ON.
■ o1-38: LCD Backlight Off-Delay

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-38 LCD Backlight Off-Delay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 60 s
(11BB) Sets the time until the LCD backlight automatically turns off. (10 - 300 s)
RUN
When o1-37 = 0 [LCD Backlight ON/OFF Selection= OFF], the backlight will automatically turn off after the
time set in o1-38 expires.
When the backlight is off, push a key on the keypad to temporarily turn the backlight on. After the backlight turns
on, it will turn off automatically after the time set in o1-38 is expired.
■ o1-39: Show Initial Setup Screen

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-39 Show Initial Setup Screen V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(11BC) Sets the function to show the LCD keypad initial setup screen each time you energize the drive. (0, 1)
RUN This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
The initial setup screen shows a menu where you can select the display language, set the date, time, and other
basic settings. When you set this parameter to 0, the drive will not show this screen each time you energize the
drive.
0 : No
The drive will not show the initial setup display screen each time you energize the drive. The drive will show the
Home screen.
1 : Yes
When you input the Run command before you energize the drive or when the you turn on the Run command while
the drive shows the initial setup screen, the drive will replace the initial setup screen with the Home screen.
■ o1-40: Home Screen Display Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
o1-40 Home Screen Display V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11BD) Selection Sets the monitor display mode for the Home screen. This parameter is only available with an LCD (0 - 3)
RUN keypad.
0 : Custom Monitor
1 : Bar Graph
2 : Analog Gauge 12

3 : Trend Plot
■ o1-41: 1st Monitor Area Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-41 1st Monitor Area Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11C1) Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as a (0 - 1)
RUN bar graph. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-42 ～ o1-42 )

1 : + Area ( 0 ～ o1-42 )
■ o1-42: 1st Monitor Area Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-42 1st Monitor Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(11C2) Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as a (0.0 - 100.0%)
■ o1-43: 2nd Monitor Area Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-43 2nd Monitor Area Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11C3) Selects the horizontal range used to display the monitor set in o1-25 [Custom Monitor 2] as a bar (0 - 1)
RUN graph. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-44 ～ o1-44 )

1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-44 )
■ o1-44: 2nd Monitor Area Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-44 2nd Monitor Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
■ o1-45: 3rd Monitor Area Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-45 3rd Monitor Area Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11C5) Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1-26 [Custom Monitor 3] as a (0 - 1)
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-46 ～ o1-46 )

1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-46 )
■ o1-46: 3rd Monitor Area Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-46 3rd Monitor Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
■ o1-47: Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-47 Trend Plot 1 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -100.0%
(11C7) Minimum Value Sets the horizontal axis minimum value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor (-300.0 - +299.9%)
RUN 1] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.

Note:
Parameter o1-48 [Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value] sets the upper limit. The upper limit is (o1-48 - 0.1)%.
■ o1-48: Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-48 Trend Plot 1 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(11C8) Maximum Value Sets the maximum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in o1-24 (-299.9 - +300.0%)
RUN [Custom Monitor 1] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
Note:
Parameter o1-47 [Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value] sets the lower limit. The lower limit is (o1-47 + 0.1)%.
■ o1-49: Trend Plot 2 Scale Minimum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-49 Trend Plot 2 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -100.0%
(11C9) Minimum Value Sets the horizontal axis minimum value used to display the monitor set in o1-25 [Custom Monitor (-300.0 - +299.9%)
RUN 2] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
Note:
Parameter o1-50 [Trend Plot 2 Scale Maximum Value] sets the upper limit. The upper limit is (o1-50 - 0.1)%.
■ o1-50: Trend Plot 2 Scale Maximum Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-50 Trend Plot 2 Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(11CA) Maximum Value Sets the maximum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in o1-25 (-299.9 - +300.0%)
RUN [Custom Monitor 2] as a trend plot. This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad.
Note:
Parameter o1-49 [Trend Plot 2 Scale Minimum Value] sets the lower limit. The lower limit is (o1-49 + 0.1)%.
■ o1-51: Trend Plot Time Scale Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-51 Trend Plot Time Scale V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 300 s
(11CB) Setting Sets the time scale (horizontal axis) to display the trend plot. When you change this setting, the (1 - 3600 s)
RUN drive automatically adjusts the data sampling time. This parameter is only available with an LCD
keypad.
■ o1-55: Analog Gauge Area Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-55 Analog Gauge Area V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(11EE) Selection Sets the range used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as an analog gauge. ( 0, 1 )
0 : +/- Area ( - o1-56 ~ o1-56 )

1 : + Area ( 0 ~ o1-56 )
■ o1-56: Analog Gauge Area Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-56 Analog Gauge Area Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 100.0%
(11EF) Sets the value used to display the monitor set in o1-24 [Custom Monitor 1] as an analog meter. (0.0 - 100.0%)
Parameter Details
12

■ o1-58: Motor Power Unit Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o1-58 Motor Power Unit Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(3125) Sets the setting unit for parameters that set the motor rated power. (0, 1)
The drive shows these parameter values in the set units:

• E2-11 [Motor Rated Power]
• E4-11 [Motor 2 Rated Power]
• E5-02 [PM Motor Rated Power]
• E9-07 [Motor Rated Power]
• T1-02 [Motor Rated Power]
• T2-04 [PM Motor Rated Power]
• T4-08 [Motor Rated Capacity]
0 : kW
Shows the motor output in kW units.
1 : HP
Shows the motor output in HP units.
◆ o2: Keypad Operation

■ o2-01: LO/RE Key Function Selection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-01 LO/RE Key Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0505) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function that lets you use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes.
0 : Disabled
You cannot use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes.
1 : Enabled
You can use to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE Modes when the drive is stopped. When LOCAL
Mode is selected, on the keypad will come on.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If you change the control source when b1-07 = 1 [LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection =
Accept Existing RUN Command], the drive can start suddenly. Before you change the control source, remove all personnel from
the area around the drive, motor, and load. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Fully examine all mechanical and electrical connections before you change o2-01 [LO/
RE Key Function Selection] or b1-07 [LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection]. Sudden starts can cause serious injury or death. If b1-
07 = 1 [Accept Existing RUN Command] and there is an active Run command when you switch from LOCAL to REMOTE Mode,
the drive can start suddenly.
Table 12.80 Function Settings with o2-01 and b1-07
LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection Switching from LOCAL Mode to Switching from REMOTE Mode to
Function Selection REMOTE Mode LOCAL Mode
o2-01 = 0 [Disabled] b1-07 = 0 [Disregard Existing RUN The drive will not switch modes. The drive will not switch modes.
Command]
b1-07 = 1 [Accept Existing RUN

Command]
o2-01 = 1 [Enabled] b1-07 = 0 [Disregard Existing RUN The drive will not start operating although The drive cannot operate because the Run
Command] the Run command is active. When you set command is not enabled.
Run command to active again, the drive
will start to run.
b1-07 = 1 [Accept Existing RUN When the Run command is active, the The drive cannot operate because the Run
Command] drive will start to run immediately when command is not enabled.
the mode switches from LOCAL to
REMOTE.

■ o2-02: STOP Key Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
o2-02 STOP Key Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0506) Selection (0, 1)
Sets the function to use on the keypad to stop the drive when the Run command source
for the drive is REMOTE (external) and not assigned to the keypad.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
stays enabled when the Run command source has not been assigned to the keypad.
To start the drive again after you push to stop operation, turn the external Run command OFF and ON
again.
■ o2-03: User Parameter Default Value

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-03 User Parameter Default V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0507) Value Sets the function to keep the settings of changed parameters as user parameter defaults to use (0 - 2)
during initialization.
When you set o2-03 = 1 [Set defaults], the drive saves changed parameter settings as user parameter setting
values in a part of the memory that is isolated from drive parameters.
When you set A1-03 = 1110 [Initialize Parameters = User Initialization] to initialize the drive, the drive resets the
internal parameter setting values to those user parameter setting values.
0 : No change
1 : Set defaults
Saves changed parameter setting values as user default settings.
Set o2-03 = 1 then push to save the user parameter setting values. After the drive saves the setting value, o2-
03 automatically resets to 0.
2 : Clear all
Deletes all of the saved user parameter setting values.
Set o2-03 = 2 then push to clear the user parameter setting values. The drive will automatically reset o2-03 to
0. If you delete the user parameter setting values, you cannot set A1-03 = 1110 to initialize parameters.
■ o2-04: Drive Model (KVA) Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-04 Drive Model (KVA) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by the drive
(0508) Selection Sets the Drive Model code. Set this parameter after replacing the control board. (-)
NOTICE: Set o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection] correctly. If you set this parameter incorrectly, it will decrease drive
performance, cause the protection function to operate incorrectly, and cause damage to the drive.
Note:
When the setting value of o2-04 changes, related parameter setting values also change. Refer to Defaults by Drive Model and Duty
Rating ND/HD on page 637 for more information.
These tables list the relation between o2-04 setting values and drive models.
Drive Model o2-04 Setting Drive Model o2-04 Setting
2004 62 2030 6A
Parameter Details
2006 63 2042 6B
2010 65 2056 6D
2012 66 2070 6E
2018 67 2082 6F
2021 68 2110 70 12

2138 72 2313 76
2169 73 2360 77
2211 74 2415 78
2257 75

4002 92 4140 A4
4004 93 4168 A5
4005 94 4208 A6
4007 95 4250 A7
4009 96 4296 A8
4012 97 4371 A9
4018 99 4389 AA
4023 9A 4453 AC
4031 9C 4568 AD
4038 9D 4675 AE
4044 9E 4810 B0
4060 9F 4930 B1
4075 A1 4H11 B2
4089 A2 4H12 B3
4103 A3
■ o2-05: Home Mode Freq Ref Entry Mode

No. Default
Name Description
o2-05 Home Mode Freq Ref Entry V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0509) Mode (0, 1)
Sets the function that makes it necessary to push to use the keypad to change the frequency
reference value while in Drive Mode.
0 : ENTER Key Required

You must push to use the keypad to change the frequency reference value.
1 : Immediate / MOP-style
The frequency reference changes when you enter it with the keypad. This then changes the output frequency. It is
not necessary to push . The drive keeps the frequency reference for 5 seconds after you use and on
the keypad to change the frequency reference value.
■ o2-06: Keypad Disconnect Detection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-06 Keypad Disconnect V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(050A) Detection Sets the function that stops the drive if you disconnect the keypad connection cable from the drive (0, 1)
or if you damage the cable while the keypad is the Run command source.
This parameter continues to operate if the keypad installed to the drive becomes disconnected.
This parameter is enabled in these conditions:
• When b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad] or b1-16 = 0 [Run Command Selection 2 = Keypad]
• In LOCAL Mode
0 : Disabled
The drive continues operation when it detects a keypad disconnection.
1 : Enabled

The drive stops operation, detects oPr [Keypad Connection Fault], and the motor coasts to stop when the drive
detects a keypad disconnection.
■ o2-07: Keypad RUN Direction @ Power-up

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-07 Keypad RUN Direction @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0527) Power-up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the Run (0, 1)
command source.
This parameter is enabled in these conditions:

• When b1-02 = 0 [Run Command Selection 1 = Keypad] or b1-16 = 0 [Run Command Selection 2 = Keypad]
• In LOCAL Mode
0 : Forward
1 : Reverse
■ o2-09: Reserved
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-09 Reserved - -
(050D)
■ o2-23: External 24V Powerloss Detection

No. Default
Name Description
o2-23 External 24V Powerloss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11F8) Detection Sets the function to give a warning if the backup external 24 V power supply turns off when the (0, 1)
RUN main circuit power supply is in operation.
Note:
The drive will not run when it is operating from one 24-V external power supply.
0 : Disabled
The drive does not detect the loss of the 24-V external power supply.
1 : Enabled
The keypad shows the L24v [Loss of External Power 24 Supply] indicator if the drive detects the loss of the 24-V
external power supply.
Note:
A minor fault signal is not output from H2-xx = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm].
■ o2-24: LED Light Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
o2-24 LED Light Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(11FE) Selection Sets the function to show the LED status rings and keypad LED lamps. (0 - 2)
0 : Enable Status Ring & Keypad LED

1 : LED Status Ring Disable
2 : Keypad LED Light Disable
■ o2-26: Alarm Display at Ext. 24V Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
o2-26 Alarm Display at Ext. 24V V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1563) Power When you connect a backup external 24 V power supply, this parameter sets the function to (0, 1)
trigger an alarm when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
0 : Disabled
The drive will not detect EP24v [External Power 24V Supply] if the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
The [Ready] light on the LED Status Ring flashes quickly to identify that drive operation is not possible. 12

1 : Enabled
The drive detects EP24v when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases.
Note:
A minor fault signal is not output from H2-xx = 10 [MFDO Function Selection = Alarm].
■ o2-27: bCE Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-27 bCE Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3
(1565) Sets drive operation if the Bluetooth device is disconnected when you operate the drive in (0 - 4)
Bluetooth Mode.
0 : Ramp to Stop
1 : Coast to Stop
3 : Alarm Only
■ o2-33: Initial Pole Detection (External 24 V Power Supply)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o2-33 Initial Pole Detection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(1BB6) (External 24 V Power Sets initial pole detection during the first run after an external 24 V power supply energizes the (0, 1)
Supply) main circuit. While the main circuit is energized, the drive does not do initial pole detection from
Expert
the second Run command. Usually it is not necessary to change this setting.
0 : Initial pole detection disabled

1 : Initial pole detection enabled
◆ o3: Copy Function

o3 parameters set the operation of the parameter backup function.
■ o3-01: Copy Keypad Function Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-01 Copy Keypad Function V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0515) Selection Sets the function that saves and copies drive parameters to a different drive with the keypad. (0 - 4)
0 : Copy Select
1 : Backup (drive → keypad)
The parameter setting values are read from the drive and saved in the keypad.
2 : Restore (keypad → drive)
Copies the parameter setting values saved in the keypad to a different drive.
3 : Verify (check for mismatch)
Makes sure that the parameter setting values in the drive agree with the parameters saved in the keypad.
4 : Erase (backup data of keypad)
Deletes the parameter setting values saved in the keypad.
■ o3-02: Copy Allowed Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0516) Sets the copy function when o3-01 = 1 [Copy Keypad Function Selection = Backup (drive → (0, 1)
keypad)].
Note:
When you select [Parameter Backup] on the keypad menu screen to do the backup function, the drive automatically sets o3-02 = 1.
0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled
■ o3-04: Select Backup/Restore Location

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-04 Select Backup/Restore V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0B3E) Location Sets the storage location for drive parameters when you back up and restore parameters. This (0 - 3)
parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad.
You can use the LCD keypad to make a maximum of 4 parameter backup sets.
■ o3-05: Select Items to Backup/Restore

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-05 Select Items to Backup/ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0BDA) Restore Sets which parameters are backed up, restored, and referenced. This parameter is only available (0, 1)
when using an LCD keypad.
0 : Standard Parameters
1 : Standard + DWEZ Parameters
Note:
• Parameters qx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Parameters] and rx-xx [DriveWorksEZ Connections] show when A1-07 = 1 or 2 [DriveWorksEZ
Function Selection = DWEZ Enabled or Enabled/Disabled wDigital Input].
• The password for DriveWorksEZ PC software is necessary to back up qx-xx and rx-xx. If you enter an incorrect password, the drive
detects PWEr [DWEZ Password Mismatch].
■ o3-06: Auto Parameter Backup Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-06 Auto Parameter Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0BDE) Selection Sets the function that automatically backs up parameters. This parameter is only available when (0, 1)
using an LCD keypad.
When you connect the drive and keypad, parameters set to the drive are automatically backed up to the keypad as
specified by the setting of parameters o3-06 and o3-07.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Note:
When you replace the LCD keypad then energize the drive, the keypad shows the restore operation screen automatically to restore the
drive configuration with the parameters backed up to the LCD keypad. If you connect an LCD keypad that does not have parameter
backup data, the keypad will not show the restore operation screen.
■ o3-07: Auto Parameter Backup Interval

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o3-07 Auto Parameter Backup V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0BDF) Interval Sets the interval at which the automatic parameter backup function saves parameters from the (0 - 3)
drive to the keypad.
The drive saves parameter settings to the keypad at these times:

1. After you energize the drive and the auto backup period passes.
Parameter Details
2. When you use ROM enter or the keypad to change parameters, the drive saves those changes in the drive,
waits for the auto backup period to pass, then saves those parameters in the keypad.
Note:
The drive can write data to the keypad a maximum of 100,000 times. If you write data to the keypad more than 100,000 times, you must
replace the keypad.
0 : Every 10 minutes 12

3 : Every 12 hours
◆ o4: Maintenance Mon Settings

o4 parameters set the expected service life to help you know when to replace parts. The drive will show an alarm
to tell you when the replacement part interval is near.
■ o4-01: Elapsed Operating Time Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-01 Elapsed Operating Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h
(050B) Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10-hour units. (0 - 9999 h)
When you select o4-01 on the keypad, it will show the current value of U4-01 in units of 10 hours (h). When you
change the setting of o4-01 through the monitor, the U4-01 count starts again as specified by the setting of o4-01.
Note:
Set this parameter in 10-hour (h) units. When o4-01 = 30, U4-01 [Cumulative Ope Time] = 300 h.
■ o4-02: Elapsed Operating Time Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-02 Elapsed Operating Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(050C) Selection Sets the condition that counts the cumulative operation time. (0, 1)
0 : U4-01 Shows Total Power-up Time

Counts the time from when the drive is energized to when it is de-energized.
1 : U4-01 Shows Total RUN Time
Counts the time that the drive outputs voltage.
■ o4-03: Fan Operation Time Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-03 Fan Operation Time Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0h
(050E) Sets the value from which to start the cumulative drive cooling fan operation time in 10-hour (0 - 9999 h)
units.
Use monitor U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] to view the total operation time of the cooling fan. When you
replace a cooling fan, set o4-03 = 0 to reset U4-03. Select o4-03 on the keypad to show the current value of U4-03
in 10-hour (h) units. If you use the monitor to change o4-03, the recount of U4-03 starts with the o4-03 setting.
Note:
The drive sets o4-03 in 10-hour (h) units. When o4-03 = 30, U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] will show “300 h”.
■ o4-05: Capacitor Maintenance Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(051D) Setting Sets the U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
When you replace a drive, set o4-05 = 0 to reset U4-05. When the o4-05 setting changes, the count of U4-05
starts again as specified by the setting of o4-05. After you complete the configuration, o4-05 automatically resets
to 0.
Note:

■ o4-07: Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-07 Softcharge Relay V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(0523) Maintenance Set Sets the U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
to 0.
Note:
■ o4-09: IGBT Maintenance Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0%
(0525) Sets the U4-07 [IGBT Maintenance] monitor value. (0 - 150%)
to 0.
Note:
■ o4-11: Fault Trace/History Init (U2/U3)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-11 Fault Trace/History Init V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0510) (U2/U3) Resets the records of Monitors U2-xx [Fault Trace] and U3-xx [Fault History]. (0, 1)
Note:
When you initialize the drive with A1-03 [Initialize Parameters], the drive will not reset the records for U2-xx and U3-xx.
0 : Disabled
Keeps the records of Monitors U2-xx and U3-xx.
1 : Enabled
Resets the records for Monitors U2-xx and U3-xx. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-11 to 0.
■ o4-12: kWh Monitor Initialization

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0512) Resets the monitor values for U4-10 [kWh, Lower 4 Digits] and U4-11 [kWh, Upper 5 Digits]. (0, 1)
Note:
When you initialize the drive with A1-03 [Initialize Parameters], the drive will not reset U4-10 and U4-11.
0 : No Reset
Keeps the monitor values for U4-10 and U4-11.
1 : Reset
Resets the values of U4-10 and U4-11. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-12 to 0.
■ o4-13: RUN Command Counter @ Initialize

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-13 RUN Command Counter @ V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0528) Initialize Resets the monitor values for U4-02 [Num of Run Commands], U4-24 [Number of Runs (Low)], (0, 1)
and U4-25 [Number of Runs (High)].
0 : No Reset
Keeps the monitor values for U4-02, U4-24, and U4-25. 12

1 : Reset
Resets the values of U4-02, U4-24, and U4-25. After the reset, the drive automatically resets o4-13 to 0.
■ o4-22: Time Format

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-22 Time Format V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(154F) Sets the time display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 2)
RUN
Sets the display of the time shown in the upper-left of the LCD keypad screen.
0 : 24 Hour Clock
1 : 12 Hour Clock
2 : 12 Hour JP Clock
■ o4-23: Date Format

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-23 Date Format V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1550) Sets the date display format. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 2)
RUN
Sets the date format that the drive uses for the fault history and other records.
0 : YYYY/MM/DD
1 : DD/MM/YYYY
2 : MM/DD/YYYY
Note:
The Fault History in the Monitor Mode shows when faults occurred. Refer to Show Fault History on page 184 for more information.
■ o4-24: bAT Detection Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o4-24 bAT Detection Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(310F) Sets operation when the drive detects bAT [Keypad Battery Low Voltage] and TiM [Keypad Time (0 - 2)
RUN Not Set].
0 : Disable
The drive will not detect bAT or TiM.
1 : Enable (Alarm Detected)
TiM or bAT shows on the keypad, and operation continues. The output terminal set for Alarm [H2-01 to H2-03 =
10] activates.
2 : Enable (Fault Detected)
The drive output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop. Fault relay output terminal MA-MC activates, and MB-
MC deactivates.
◆ o5: Log Function

The data log function saves drive status information as a CSV file in the microSD memory card in the keypad.
Monitors Ux-xx are the source of data log information.
There are two types of data log functions:
• Long-term data log: Saves data continuously over an extended time period.
• Short-term data log: Saves data over a set length of time before and after the drive detects a trigger event with a
short sampling cycle.
You can record a maximum of 10 monitors for long-term data logs and a maximum of four monitors for short-
term data logs.
Table 12.83 shows the keypads that support the short-term data log function.

Note:
• The short-term data log function is available in drive software versions PRG: 01034 and later.
• The “PRG” column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version. You can also use U1-25
[SoftwareNumber Flash] to identify the software version.
Table 12.83 Compatible Keypads with Short-term Data Log Function
Keypad Version *1
LCD Keypad (Model: JVOP-KPLCA04xxx) REV: H or later
Bluetooth LCD Keypad (Model: JVOP-KPLCC04xxx) REV: H or later
*1 Refer to “REV” on the keypad nameplate for the keypad version.

Change the LCD keypad screen from the main menu to the Diagnostic Tools screen and select the data log
function. Set the number of the monitor to record and the sampling time, then start to record the data log.
Table 12.84 Setting Parameters for Data Log Items
No. Name Default Data Log Monitors
o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 101 U1-01 [Frequency Reference]
o5-04 Log Monitor Data 2 102 U1-02 [Output Frequency]
o5-05 Log Monitor Data 3 103 U1-03 [Output Current]
o5-06 Log Monitor Data 4 107 U1-07 [DC Bus Voltage]
o5-07 Log Monitor Data 5 108 U1-08 [Output Power]
o5-08 Log Monitor Data 6 000 Not selected
Note:
• o5-xx is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
• Do not de-energize the drive or disconnect the keypad from the drive during log transfer communication. A loss of connection can
cause the log function to fail after you restore power or connect the keypad.
• You can use a microSDHC card that has a maximum of 32 GB capacity.
• For a short-term data log, the drive enables parameters o5-03 [Log Monitor Data 1] to o5-06 [Log Monitor Data 4] .
■ Log File Specifications

Item Specification
File storage location A folder called [Log_File] is created in the root directory of the microSD card.
Filename • Long-term data log: GLOG0xxx.csv

• Short-term data log: SLOG0xxx.csv
Note:
[xxx] identifies a 3-digit decimal number
Maximum number of files Long-term data log: 999 (GLOG0001.csv to GLOG0999.csv)
Short-term data log: 999 (SLOG0001.csv to SLOG0999.csv)
Character code ASCII code
Line break code <CR><LF>
Separating character [ , ] (Commas)
Header rows First Row: Drive information including the drive model, software version, control method, and sampling time
Second Row: Log data information including the monitor number, number decimal points, and unit code
■ Log File Configuration

The [Log_Files] folder is created in the root directory of the microSD memory card. This is where the log data is
Parameter Details
stored as CSV files. Log data files are created in this configuration. The number of rows changes when the
number of selected monitors change.
First Row Drive information
Second Row Log data information
Third Row Log data 1

12

: Log data 2
: Log data 3
: :
Last Row Log data n
First Row: Drive Information

This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the first row of log data.
Example of generated data for a long-term data log: 00,0012,160107111230,GA700,
VSAA01010,2,62,1000,000001
Example of generated data for a short-term data log: 00,0012,160107111230,GA700,
VSAA01010,2,62,1000,000001
Number
of
No. Item Charac Example Description
ters
1 Attribute 2 00 [00] shows that the record is a drive information record.
2 File number 4 0012 Long-term data log: Log data file name
Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename
Short-term data log: Log data file name
Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [SLOG0xxx.csv] filename + 1000
3 Time stamp *1 12 160107111230 Date file was generated (YYMMDDHHMMSS)

• Date: 20YY/MM/DD
• Time in 24-hour format: HH:MM:SS
Example data of [160107111230]: 11:12:30 on January 7, 2016
4 Model 5 GA700 Drive model information
5 Software number 9 VSAA01010 Drive software number
6 Control Method Selection 1 2 Setting value (Hex.) of A1-02 [Control Method Selection]
7 Drive capacity 2 62 Setting value (Hex.) of o2-04 [Drive Model (KVA) Selection]
8 Sampling time 5 1000 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-02 [Log Sampling Interval]
(Maximum) Unit: ms
9 Log data type *2 1 1 1: Short-term data log (trend log disabled)

2: Short-term log for short-term data log (trend log enabled)
3: Trend log for short-term data log (trend log enabled)
10 Trend log sampling cycle 5 1000 Sampling cycle (Dec.) selected by o5-21 [Trend Log Sampling Time Selection]
*2
(Maximum) Unit: ms
11 Trigger type *2 1 1 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-15 [Trigger Type Selection]
12 Digital trigger target *2 2 E Setting value (Hex.) of o5-16 [Digital Trigger Object]
(Maximum)
13 Analog trigger target *2 3 102 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-17 [Analog Trigger Object]
14 Analog trigger level *2 6 50.0 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-18 [Analog Trigger Level]
(Maximum) Unit: %
15 Trigger condition *2 1 1 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-19 [Trigger Condition]
16 Pre-trigger *2 3 50 Setting value (Dec.) of o5-20 [Pre-Trigger Setting]

(Maximum) Unit: %
17 Offset between data *2 6 5020 Time offset (Dec.) between the trend log and short-term log for short-term data log (trend log
(Maximum) enabled)
Unit: ms
18 Row number 6 000001 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file
*1 If you do not set the time in the keypad, the text string of [000000000000] is generated to show the time.
*2 The drive generates these items for a short-term data log only.
Second Row: Log Data Information
This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the second row of log data.
Example of generated data:
01,0012,160107111230,0101,0201,0102,0201,0103,0206,0107,0005,0108,0209,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0
000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,000002

No. Item Number of Description

Characters
1 Attribute 2 [01] shows that the record is a log data information record.
2 File number 4 Long-term data log: Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename.
Short-term data log: Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [SLOG0xxx.csv] filename + 1000.
3 Time stamp 12 Date file was generated (YYMMDDHHMMSS)
4 Monitor Number 1 *1 4 Monitor number selected by o5-03 [Log Monitor Data 1]

Example: 0101 (Dec.) for U1-01
5 Monitor Unit 1 *2 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-03
Example when U1-01 = 30.00 Hz:
Number of decimal places = 2, Hz unit code = 01, monitor unit 1 = 0201 (Hex.)
6 Monitor number 2 4 Monitor number (Dec.) set to o5-04 [Log Monitor Data10]
7 Monitor Unit 2 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-04
: : : :
22 Monitor number 10 4 Monitor number (Dec.) set to o5-12 [Log Monitor Data10]
23 Monitor Unit 10 4 Unit code and number of decimal places used for the monitor selected with o5-12
24 - 27 Reserved 4 -
28 Row number 6 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file
*1 If there is no data log monitor selected, the text string of [0000] is generated.
*2 Refer to Table 12.85 for information about unit codes.
Table 12.85 Unit Codes
Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit Unit Code (Hex.) Unit
00 – 08 PPR 10 H 18 0H
01 Hz 09 kW 11 V 19 –
02 RPM 0A Ω 12 us 1A –
03 % 0B ms 13 min 1B –
04 VAC 0C kHz 14 °C 1C –
05 VDC 0D PSI 15 W 1D –
06 A 0E MPM 16 kWH 1E –
07 sec 0F FPM 17 MWH 1F –
Third and Subsequent Rows: Log Data

This example shows the data text strings and data generated for the third row of log data.
Example of generated data:
02,0012,160107111239,1770,1770,00BE,0118,0028,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,0000,00000C
Number of
No. Item Description
Characters
1 Attribute 2 [02] shows that the record is a monitor data record for a long-term data log.
[03] shows that the record is a monitor data record for a short-term data log.
[04] shows that the record is a monitor data record for a trend log.
2 File number 4 Long-term data log: Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [GLOG0xxx.csv] filename.
Short-term data log: Shows the [xxx] part (a 3-digit number) of the [SLOG0xxx.csv] filename + 1000.
3 Time stamp 12 Data log data was generated (YYMMDDHHMMSS)

Trigger detection time for a short-term data log (common to all data)
4 Log Monitor Data 1 4 Log monitor data (Hex.) of the monitor selected with o5-03 [Log Monitor Data 1]
: : : :
Parameter Details
14 Reserved 4 -
12

No. Item Number of Description

Characters
15 Encoding data 4 Log Monitor Data 1 to 10 Code Data (Hex.)

Bits 0 to 9 show the encoding of log monitor data 1 to 10. A bit value of 1 shows that the data represents a negative
value. (Log monitor data 1 to 10 is absolute value data without encoding)
Example: When log monitor data 2, 5, and 8 show negative values, bits 1, 4, and 7 have values of 1, and the encoding
data = 0010010010 (Bin.) = 0092 (Hex.)
16 Row number 6 Row number (Hex.) in the data log file
■ o5-00: Log Type

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-00 Log Type V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1E81) Sets the type of data log function. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (0, 1)
RUN
0 : Long Term Log

Saves data continuously over a long time period.
1 : Short Term Log
Saves data over a set length of time before and after the drive detects a trigger event with a short sampling cycle.
■ o5-01: Log Start/Stop Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-01 Log Start/Stop Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1551) Sets the data log function. This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad. (0 - 1)
RUN
0 : OFF
Stops the data log.
1 : ON
Starts the data log as specified by the sampling cycle set in o5-02 [Log Sampling Interval].
■ o5-02: Log Sampling Interval

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-02 Log Sampling Interval V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o5-00
(1552) Sets the data log sampling cycle. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (Determined by o5-00)
RUN
Note:
The default setting and setting range change when o5-00 [Normal / Heavy Duty Selection] changes.
• o5-00 = 0 [Long Term Log]
• o5-00 = 1 [Short Term Log]
■ o5-03: Log Monitor Data 1

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-03 Log Monitor Data 1 V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 101
(1553) Sets the data log monitor (Ux-xx). This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 9999)
RUN
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o5-03 = 101 to monitor U1-01 [Frequency Reference].
monitor Ud-01.


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o5-04 = 102 to monitor U1-02 [Output Frequency].
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
• Set the x-xx part of the Ux-xx [Monitor]. For example, set o5-05 = 103 to monitor U1-03 [Output Current].
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Parameter Details
Note:
monitor Ud-01.
• When it is not necessary to set a data log monitor, set o5-08 = 000.
12


No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(155A) Sets the data log monitor (Ux-xx). This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 9999)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(155B) Sets the data log monitor (Ux-xx). This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 9999)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
(155C) Sets the data log monitor (Ux-xx). This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad. (000, 101 - 9999)
RUN
Note:
monitor Ud-01.
■ o5-15: Trigger Type Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-15 Trigger Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1E82) Sets the type of trigger for the short-term data log. This parameter is only available when you use (0, 1)
RUN an LCD keypad.
0 : Digital Trigger
A digital signal inside the drive will act as the trigger.
1 : Analog Trigger
An analog signal inside the drive will act as the trigger.

Note:
There are no detection width and detection time settings for the analog trigger in the data log function. If variations in the analog signal
are a problem, set o5-15 = 0 and o5-16 = 66, 67 [Digital Trigger Object = Comparator 1, 2]. Use H2-20 [Comparator 1 Monitor
Selection] to H2-32 [Comparator 1 Filter Time] to set the conditions for the comparator function.
■ o5-16: Digital Trigger Object

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-16 Digital Trigger Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV E
(1E83) Sets the function for the digital trigger target from the setting values for multi-function digital (0 - FF)
RUN outputs. This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
■ o5-17: Analog Trigger Object

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-17 Analog Trigger Object V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 102
(1E84) Sets the monitor for the analog trigger target. This parameter is only available when you use an (0 - 9999)
RUN LCD keypad.
Note:
monitor Ud-01.
■ o5-18: Analog Trigger Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-18 Analog Trigger Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0%
(1E85) Sets the level to compare with the analog trigger target. This parameter is only available when you (-999.9% - +999.9%)
RUN use an LCD keypad.
■ o5-19: Trigger Condition

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-19 Trigger Condition V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1E86) Sets the condition with which to detect the trigger. This parameter is only available when you use (0, 1)
RUN an LCD keypad.
0 : Rising Edge
• Digital trigger: The drive detects the trigger when the digital trigger target switches from OFF to ON.
• Analog trigger: The drive detects the trigger when the analog trigger target changes from “less than” to “equal or
more than” the trigger level set in o5-18 [Analog Trigger Level].
1 : Falling Edge
• Digital trigger: The drive detects the trigger when the digital trigger target switches from ON to OFF
• Analog trigger: The drive detects the trigger when the analog trigger target changes from “equal to or more than”
to “less than” the trigger level set in o5-18 [Analog Trigger Level].
■ o5-20: Pre-Trigger Setting

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-20 Pre-Trigger Setting V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 90%
(1E87) Sets the percentage of data to save before the drive detects the trigger for the short-term data log. (0% - 100%)
RUN This parameter is only available when you use an LCD keypad.
Parameter Details
12

■ o5-21: Trend Log Sampling Time Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
o5-21 Trend Log Sampling Time V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1E88) Selection Sets the sampling cycle for the trend log to save data before the drive detects the trigger. The (0 - 4)
RUN trend log works at the same time as the short-term data log. This parameter is only available when
you use an LCD keypad.
0 : Trend Log Disabled

The drive does not save the trend log.
1 : 0.1 s (About 1 hour)
Saves a trend log with a sampling cycle of 0.1 s. The drive saves a maximum of approximately one hour of data
before it detects the trigger.
Saves a trend log with a sampling cycle of 1 s. The drive saves a maximum of approximately 10 hours of data

12.12 T: Auto-Tuning
Numbers identifying the T parameters are displayed when an LED keypad is used. The names of the parameters
are displayed on the LCD screen of the LCD keypad. Set the following.
• Induction Motor Auto-Tuning
• PM Motor Auto-Tuning
• ASR and Inertia Tuning
◆ T0: Tuning Mode Selection

■ T0-00: Tuning Mode Selection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T0-00 Tuning Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1197) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (0, 1)
When you use an LED keypad to do Control Tuning, set the tuning mode in this order:
1. Set T0-00 = 1.
2. Set T3-00 [Control Loop Tuning Selection] to set the tuning mode.
Note:
The available tuning modes are different for different control methods.
0 : Motor Parameter Tuning
1 : Control Tuning
◆ T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning

T1 parameters set the Auto-Tuning input data for induction motor tuning.
Note:
• The base frequency of drive dedicated motors and special motors for use with vector control may be lower than the base frequency of
general-purpose motors, which is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. In such cases, this lower frequency is used as the value for E1-06 [Base Frequency]
and E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency] after Auto-Tuning completes. If the maximum output frequency is too low and causes
problems, change the setting of E1-04 after Auto-Tuning completes.
• The following induction motor parameters are set automatically.
–E1-xx [V/f Pattern for Motor 1]
–E2-xx [Motor Parameters]
–E3-xx [V/f Pattern for Motor 2]
–E4-xx [Motor 2 Parameters]
–F1-xx [Encoder Options] (only with Closed Loop Vector Control)
■ T1-00: Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-00 Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0700) Sets which motor to tune when motor 1/2 switching is enabled. (1, 2)
Note:
This parameter is available when H1-xx = 16 [Motor 2 Selection]. The keypad will not show this parameter when H1-xx ≠ 16.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E1-xx and E2-xx for motor 1.
Auto-Tuning automatically sets parameters E3-xx and E4-xx for motor 2. Make sure that you connect motor 2 to
Parameter Details
the drive for Auto-Tuning.
12

■ T1-01: Auto-Tuning Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02
(0701) Selection Sets the type of Auto-Tuning. (Determined by A1-02)
0 : Rotational Auto-Tuning
1 : Stationary Auto-Tuning 1
2 : Stationary Line-Line Resistance
■ T1-02: Motor Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-02 Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0.00 - 1000.0)
Note:
HP).
■ T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0703) Sets the rated voltage (V) of the motor. Enter the base speed voltage for constant output motors. 01
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.5 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 511.0 V)
If you do Auto-Tuning on a drive-dedicated motor or a specialized motor for vector control, the voltage or
frequency can be lower than that of a general-purpose motor. Always compare the data from the nameplate or test
report with the Auto-Tuning results and check for differences. Enter the voltage necessary to operate the motor in
no-load conditions at rated speed for better control precision around rated speed. If the motor test report or the
motor nameplate is not available, enter approximately 90% of the motor rated voltage.
If the drive input power supply voltage is low, enter approximately 90% of the input voltage. When the input
power supply voltage is low, the current will increase. Make sure that the main power supply capacity is correct
and use a molded-case circuit breaker for the drive.
■ T1-04: Motor Rated Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-04 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0704) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
Set the motor rated current between 50% and 100% of the drive rated current for the best performance. Enter the
current at the motor base speed.
■ T1-05: Motor Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-05 Motor Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 50.0 Hz
When Auto-Tuning is carried out, the value of T1-05 is set to E1-04 [Maximum Output Frequency]. If T1-05 < 40
Hz, E1-04 = 40 Hz. If you operate the drive at a speed that is higher than the base frequency, or if you operate in
the field weakening range, set E1-04 (E3-04 for motor 2) to the maximum output frequency after you complete
Auto-Tuning.

■ T1-06: Number of Motor Poles

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-06 Number of Motor Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 4
(0706) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 to 120)
■ T1-07: Motor Base Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-07 Motor Base Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1450 min-1 (r/min)
(0707) Sets the motor base speed for Auto-Tuning (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 35400 min-1 (r/min))
■ T1-08: Encoder Pulse Count (PPR)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-08 Encoder Pulse Count (PPR) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr
(0708) Sets the number of PG (pulse generator, encoder) pulses. (0 - 60,000 ppr)
Set the actual number of pulses for one full motor rotation.
■ T1-09: Motor No-Load Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-09 Motor No-Load Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -
(0709) Sets the no-load current of the motor. (0 A - T1-04; max. of
2999.9)
Note:
• Models 2004 - 2042, 4002 - 4023: 0.01 A
• Models 2056 - 2415, 4031 - 4H12: 0.1 A
The value shown is the no-load current that the drive automatically calculates from the values set in T1-02 [Motor
Rated Power] and T1-04 [Motor Rated Current]. Set the no-load current shown on the motor test report. If the
motor test report is not available, do not change this parameter.
■ T1-10: Motor Rated Slip Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-10 Motor Rated Slip V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -
(070A) Frequency Sets motor rated slip. (0.000 - 20.000 Hz)
Shows 0.000 Hz as the default value. Set the rated slip shown on the motor test report. If the motor test report is
not available, do not change this parameter.
■ T1-11: Motor Iron Loss

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-11 Motor Iron Loss V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E2-10 or
(070B) Sets the iron loss to calculate the energy-saving coefficient. E4-10
(0 - 65535 W)
Note:
The default setting is different for different motor codes and motor parameter settings.
The value shown is E2-10 [Motor Iron Loss] or E4-10 [Motor 2 Iron Loss] for the motor output set in T1-02
Parameter Details
[Motor Rated Power]. If the motor test report is available, enter the motor iron loss value to T1-11.
12

■ T1-12: Test Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-12 Test Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0BDB) Sets the function to enable Test Mode after Stationary Auto-Tuning. When you can operate the (0, 1)
motor with a light load attached after Stationary Auto-Tuning is complete, enable this parameter.
0 : No
1 : Yes
After Auto-Tuning, the drive automatically sets E2-02 [Motor Rated Slip] and E2-03 [Motor No-Load Current]
when you operate the motor for the first time in Drive Mode.
Note:
After Auto-Tuning is complete and you set the drive to Drive Mode, operate the motor in these conditions:
• Make sure that you connect all wiring between the drive and motor
• Make sure that a mechanical brake on the motor shaft is not locked
• Keep the motor-load ratio at 30%
• Hold constant speed for longer than 1 second at a minimum of 30% of the speed set in E1-06 [Base Frequency] (the default setting is
the same as the maximum frequency).
■ T1-13: No-load voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T1-13 No-load voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV T1-03 × 0.85
(0BDC) Sets the no-load voltage of the motor. When the no-load voltage at rated speed is available, for (200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
example on the motor test report, set the voltage in this parameter. If the no-load voltage is not 400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
available, do not change this parameter.
Note:
To get the same qualities as a Yaskawa 1000-series drive or previous series drive, set this parameter = T1-03 [Motor Rated Voltage].
◆ T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning

T2 parameters set the Auto-Tuning input data for PM motor tuning.
Note:
The drive automatically sets these PM motor parameters:
• E1-xx [V/f Pattern for Motor 1]
• E5-xx [V/f Pattern for Motor 1]
• F1-xx [Encoder Option Setup]
Only when A1-02 = 7 [Control Method Selection = PM Closed Loop Vector]
■ T2-01: PM Auto-Tuning Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-01 PM Auto-Tuning Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(0750) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning for PM motors. (Determined by A1-02)
Note:
Yaskawa recommends Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF) for specialized motors. Rotational Auto-Tuning rotates the motor to measure
the actual induction voltage constants for more accurate control than Stationary Auto-Tuning.
0 : Manual Entry w/ Motor Data Sheet
1 : Stationary (Ld, Lq, R)
2 : Stationary (R Only)
3 : Z-Pulse Offset (Pole Position)
4 : Rotational (Ld, Lq, R, back-EMF)

■ T2-02: PM Motor Code Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-02 PM Motor Code Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by A1-02 and
(0751) Enter the PM motor code as specified by the rotation speed and motor output. o2-04
(0000 - FFFF)
Enter the motor code in this parameter to automatically set parameters T2-03 to T2-14. When you are operating a
specialized motor or a non-Yaskawa motor, set this parameter to FFFF and enter the data from the motor
nameplate or the motor test report.
You can only enter the permitted PM motor codes. Different drive control methods will accept different PM motor
codes.
■ T2-03: PM Motor Type

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-03 PM Motor Type V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0752) Sets the type of PM motor the drive will operate. (0, 1)
0 : IPM motor
IPM motors have magnets in the rotor, and Ld ≠ Lq.
1 : SPM motor
SPM motors have magnets attached to the surface of the rotor with adhesive material, and Ld = Lq.
■ T2-04: PM Motor Rated Power

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-04 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0730) Sets the PM motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. 01
(0.00 - 1000.0)
Note:
HP).
■ T2-05: PM Motor Rated Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-05 PM Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V,
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ T2-06: PM Motor Rated Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-06 PM Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04
(0733) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. (10% to 200% of the drive
rated current)
■ T2-07: PM Motor Base Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
Parameter Details
T2-07 PM Motor Base Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 87.5 Hz
12

■ T2-08: Number of PM Motor Poles

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-08 Number of PM Motor Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 6
■ T2-09: PM Motor Base Speed

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-09 PM Motor Base Speed V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1750 min-1 (r/min)
(0731) Sets the motor base speed (min-1 (r/min)). (0 - 34500 min-1 (r/min))
■ T2-10: PM Motor Stator Resistance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-10 PM Motor Stator Resistance V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02
(0754) Sets the stator resistance for each motor phase. (0.000 - 65.000 Ω)
Note:
• This parameter does not set line-to-line resistance.
■ T2-11: PM Motor d-Axis Inductance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-11 PM Motor d-Axis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02
(0735) Inductance Sets the d-axis inductance of the motor on a per phase basis. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)
■ T2-12: PM Motor q-Axis Inductance

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-12 PM Motor q-Axis V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-02
(0736) Inductance Sets the q-Axis inductance of the motor on a per phase basis. (0.00 - 600.00 mH)
■ T2-13: Back-EMF Units Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-13 Back-EMF Units Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1
(0755) Sets the units that the drive uses to set the induced voltage constant. (0, 1)
0 : mV/(rev/min)
1 : mV/(rad/s)
Note:
• When T2-13 = 0, the drive will use E5-24 [PM Back-EMF L-L Vrms (mV/rpm)] and will automatically set E5-09 [PM Back-EMF
Vpeak (mV/(rad/s))] = 0.0.
• When T2-13 = 1, the drive will use E5-09 and will automatically set E5-24 = 0.0.
■ T2-14: Back-EMF Voltage Constant (Ke)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-14 Back-EMF Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by T2-13
(0737) Constant (Ke) Sets the motor induced voltage constant (Ke). (0.0 - 2000.0)
■ T2-15: Pull-In Current Level

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-15 Pull-In Current Level V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 30%
(0756) Sets the level of the pull-in current as a percentage of E5-03 [PM Motor Rated Current (FLA)]. (0 - 120%)

If the load inertia is high, increase the setting value.
■ T2-16: Encoder Pulse Count (PPR)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-16 Encoder Pulse Count (PPR) V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 1024 ppr
(0738) Sets the number of PG (pulse generator, encoder) pulses. (1 - 15000 ppr)
Set the actual number of pulses for one full motor rotation.
■ T2-17: Encoder Z-Pulse Offset

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T2-17 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.0 °
(0757) Sets the encoder Z-pulse offset (Δθ) (pulse generator, encoder) that is listed on the motor (-180.0 - +180.0°)
nameplate.
If you do not know the quantity of encoder (pulse generator, encoder) Z-pulse offset, or if you replaced the
encoder, do Z Pulse Offset Tuning and correct for the offset (Δθ) from the Z phase.
◆ T3: ASR and Inertia Tuning

■ T3-00: Control Loop Tuning Selection
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-00 Control Loop Tuning V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(1198) Selection Sets the type of Control Auto-Tuning. (0 - 3)
0 : Inertia Tuning
1 : ASR (Speed Regulator)
2 : Deceleration Rate Tuning
3 : KEB Tuning
Note:
Settings 0 and 1 are available only when A1-02 = 3, 7 [Control Method Selection = CLV, CLV/PM].
■ T3-01: Test Signal Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-01 Test Signal Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 3.0 Hz
(0760) Sets the frequency of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning. Usually it is not (0.1 - 20.0 Hz)
If the load inertia is too large and the drive detects a fault after Inertia Tuning, decrease the setting.
■ T3-02: Test Signal Amplitude

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-02 Test Signal Amplitude V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0.5 rad
(0761) Sets the amplitude of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning. Usually it is not (0.1 - 10.0 rad)
If the load inertia is too large and the drive detects a fault after Inertia Tuning, decrease the setting. If the drive
detects a fault when T3-01 [Test Signal Frequency] is set to a low value, adjust this parameter.
■ T3-03: Motor Inertia

Parameter Details
No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-03 Motor Inertia V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(0762) Sets the inertia of the motor. This value uses the test signal response to calculate the load inertia. 01, and E5-01
(0.0001 - 600.00 kgm2)
12

The default setting is for a Yaskawa standard motor as shown in the motor inertia table. Actual values will be
different when you use induction motors or PM motors.
Note:
■ T3-04: System Response Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T3-04 System Response V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 10.0 Hz
(0763) Frequency This parameter uses the load inertia value from the Inertia Tuning process to automatically (0.1 - 50.0 Hz)
calculate and set C5-01 [ASR Proportional Gain 1].
If this input value is too high, it can cause oscillation.
◆ T4: EZ Tuning
Use T4 parameters to input the data necessary for motor parameter Auto-Tuning when A1-02 = 8 [Control
Method Selection = EZ Vector Control]. These two modes are available:
T4-01 Setting Operational overview Items input for tuning Items tuned
0 Follow the instructions in the setup wizard on the keypad to • T4-02 [Motor Type Selection] • E9-01 [Motor Type Selection]
manually enter the necessary motor parameters. • T4-03 [Motor Max Revolutions] • E9-02 [Maximum Speed]
• T4-04 [Motor Rated Revolutions] • E9-03 [Rated Speed]
• T4-05 [Motor Rated Frequency] *1 • E9-04 [Base Frequency]
• T4-06 [Motor Rated Voltage] • E9-05 [Base Voltage]
• T4-07 [Motor Rated Current] • E9-06 [Motor Rated Current (FLA)]
• T4-08 [Motor Rated Capacity] • E9-07 [Motor Rated Power]
• T4-09 [Number of Poles] • E9-08 [Motor Pole Count]
• E9-09 [Motor Rated Slip]
• E9-10 [Motor Line-to-Line Resistance]
1 Do only line-to-line resistance tuning. Motor Rated Current E9-10 [Motor Line-to-Line Resistance]
*1 When you use a PM motor or a synchronous reluctance motor, it is not necessary to enter the rated frequency. The drive will use the
rated rotation speed and number of motor poles to automatically calculate the rated frequency.
■ T4-01: EZ Tuning Mode Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-01 EZ Tuning Mode Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(3130) Sets the type of Auto-Tuning for EZOLV control. (0, 1)
0 : Motor Parameter Setting

1 : Line-to-Line Resistance
■ T4-02: Motor Type Selection

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-02 Motor Type Selection V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 0
(3131) Sets the type of motor. (0, 1, 2)
0 : Induction (IM)
■ T4-04: Motor Rated Revolutions

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-04 Motor Rated Revolutions V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV -
(3133) Sets rated rotation speed (min-1) of the motor. ((40 Hz to 120 Hz) × 60 ×
2/E9-08)

■ T4-05: Motor Rated Frequency

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-05 Motor Rated Frequency V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01 and
(3134) Sets the rated frequency (Hz) of the motor. o2-04
(40.0 - 120.0 Hz)
Note:
When T4-02 = 1, 2 [Motor Type Selection = Permanent Magnet (PM), Synchronous Reluctance (SynRM)], input is not necessary
because it assumes: Motor Rated Revolutions/60 × Number of Motor Poles/2.
■ T4-06: Motor Rated Voltage

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-06 Motor Rated Voltage V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV 200 V Class: 200.0 V,
(200 V Class: 0.0 - 255.0 V,
400 V Class: 0.0 - 510.0 V)
■ T4-07: Motor Rated Current

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-07 Motor Rated Current V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by o2-04, C6-
(3136) Sets the rated current (A) of the motor. 01
rated current)
Note:
The value set here becomes the base value for motor protection, the torque limit, and torque control.
■ T4-08: PM Motor Rated Power (kW)

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-08 PM Motor Rated Power V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-10
(3137) Sets the motor rated output in the units from o1-58 [Motor Power Unit Selection]. (0.10 - 1000.0)
Note:
HP).
■ T4-09: Number of Poles

No. Default
Name Description
(Hex.) (Range)
T4-09 Number of Poles V/f CL-V/f OLV CLV AOLV OLV/PM AOLV/PM CLV/PM EZOLV Determined by E9-01
(3138) Sets the number of motor poles. (2 - 120) Parameter Details
12

Stationary Auto-Tuning Precautions .......................... 213
Index Stator resistance Auto-Tuning precautions................... 213
Auto-Tuning Error ............................................. 336, 387
Symbols B
Backlight
Numerics Timing of shut-off ............................................... 199
24 V power supply
Backup
Power supply input terminals .................................. 107
Parameters (drive to keypad)................................... 177
A Backup function ...................................................... 992
AC reactor Bar graph
Wiring ............................................................. 133 Monitors .......................................................... 166
Acceleration and deceleration times Base frequency
Switching by external input .................................... 731 Parameter ......................................................... 784
Switching by output frequency ................................ 732 Base Frequency
Switcing by Motor 2 Selection commands ................... 732 Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789
Acceleration time Base voltage
Parameter ......................................................... 731 Motor 2 parameters.............................................. 790
Unit of measurement setting ................................... 734 Parameter ......................................................... 785
Adjustment of control functionality................................ 217 Basic operation
AEr ..................................................................... 371 Get started ........................................................ 157
AFR bAT
Parameter ......................................................... 960 Fault ............................................................... 342
Alarm ............................................................ 336, 371 Minor Fault ....................................................... 371
ALM indicator .................................................. 149, 151 Battery
ALM/ERR Disposal ........................................................... 453
LED status ........................................................ 155 Replacement...................................................... 447
Altitude Specifications .................................................... 447
Derating ........................................................... 475 bb ....................................................................... 371
Environment....................................................... 34 bCE
Ambient humidity ..................................................... 34 Fault ............................................................... 342
Ambient Temperature Setting ....................................... 34 Minor Fault ....................................................... 371
Derating ........................................................... 474 Bi-Directional function ........................................ 768–769
Parameter ................................................... 474, 951 boL
Analog gauge Fault ............................................................... 342
Monitors .......................................................... 168 Minor Fault ....................................................... 371
Analog input Braking Resistor
Function selection for terminals A1 through A3 ............ 884 Protective function .............................................. 948
Analog Output Wiring ............................................................. 121
Gain/Bias Adjustment........................................... 896 bUS
Monitor Parameter Selection................................... 896 Detection condition settings.................................... 826
Signal Level Selection .......................................... 896 Detection conditions ............................................ 823
Terminal AM Monitor Selection............................... 898 Fault ............................................................... 342
Terminal FM Monitor Selection ............................... 897 Minor Fault ....................................................... 371
Application Preset .................................................... 663 Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 822
Operation ......................................................... 204 bUSy ................................................................... 372
ASR C
Closed Loop V/f Control adjustment procedure............. 744
CALL .................................................................. 372
Fine tuning........................................................ 746
Capacitor Maintenance Setting ..................................... 994
Parameter ......................................................... 743
Carrier frequency
Vector Control Adjustment Procedure ........................ 745
Derating ........................................................... 470
ASR tuning ............................................................ 210
Diminish .......................................................... 954
Precautions ....................................................... 213
Parameter ......................................................... 752
Auto-Tuning........................................................... 206
CDBR type braking unit
ASR and Inertia Tuning Parameters..........................1011
Connect multiple units .......................................... 128
ASR tuning ....................................................... 210
Wiring ............................................................. 122
Induction Motor.................................................. 206
CE
Induction Motor Parameters.................................. 1005
Detection Selection .............................................. 901
Inertia Tuning .................................................... 210
Detection Time................................................... 901
PM Motor Parameters......................................... 1008
Fault ............................................................... 342
PM motors ........................................................ 207
Minor Fault ....................................................... 372
Precautions ....................................................... 211
Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 900
Precautions to Note before ASR Tuning...................... 213
CF ...................................................................... 343
Precautions to Note before Inertia Tuning ................... 213
Checklist
Procedure ......................................................... 184
Test run............................................................ 224
Rotational Auto-Tuning Precautions .......................... 212
Circulation Fan
Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Replacement...................................................... 410
precautions ................................................. 213

CoF ..................................................................... 343 CyC..................................................................... 373
Communication option CyPo ................................................................... 373
Parameter ......................................................... 816 D
Control circuit terminal block Data log ................................................................ 193
Replacement...................................................... 442 Data log type ................................................... 1000
Control circuit terminals Monitor selection .......................................... 193, 196
Configuration of terminal block ............................... 110 Sampling time .............................................. 194–195
I/O terminals function selection switches .................... 114 Start procedure ................................................... 191
Terminal functions............................................... 105 Stop procedure ................................................... 191
Wire gauge........................................................ 110 Trigger ................................................... 1002–1003
Wiring ............................................................. 104 DC Injection Braking
Wiring procedure for terminal block .......................... 111 Parameter ......................................................... 693
Control method DC reactor
Selection .......................................................... 660 Wiring ............................................................. 133
Cooling Fan Deceleration time
Activation Conditions Setting.................................. 951 Parameter ......................................................... 731
Estimated Lifespan .............................................. 408 Unit of measurement setting ................................... 734
Off Delay Timer ................................................. 951 Delete
Replacement...................................................... 410 Delete Backed-up Parameters.................................. 180
Copy Function Error ........................................... 336, 392 Derating
CP1 Altitude............................................................ 475
Fault ............................................................... 343 Ambient Temperature Setting............................ 474, 951
Minor Fault ....................................................... 372 Carrier frequency ................................................ 470
CP2 Enclosure Type............................................. 474, 953
Fault ............................................................... 343 External Cooling Fin ...................................... 474, 953
Minor Fault ....................................................... 373 Finless ....................................................... 474, 953
CPF00.................................................................. 344 Side-by-side ................................................ 474, 953
CPF01.................................................................. 344 dEv
CPF02.................................................................. 344 Detection level ................................................... 801
CPF03.................................................................. 344 Detection time.................................................... 801
CPF06.................................................................. 344 Fault ............................................................... 348
CPF07.................................................................. 344 Minor Fault ....................................................... 373
CPF08.................................................................. 344 Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 800
CPF10.................................................................. 344 dFPS.................................................................... 392
CPF11 .................................................................. 345 DI-A3
CPF12.................................................................. 345 Parameter ......................................................... 807
CPF13.................................................................. 345 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults ................................... 393
CPF14.................................................................. 345 Digital input option
CPF16.................................................................. 345 Parameter ......................................................... 807
CPF17.................................................................. 345 Digital output option
CPF18.................................................................. 345 Parameter ......................................................... 814
CPF19.................................................................. 345 DIP switch............................................................. 114
CPF20.................................................................. 345 Disposal
CPF21.................................................................. 346 Battery............................................................. 453
CPF22.................................................................. 346 Drive............................................................... 453
CPF23.................................................................. 346 microSD card..................................................... 453
CPF24.................................................................. 346 Packing material ................................................. 453
CPF26.................................................................. 346 dnE ..................................................................... 373
CPF27.................................................................. 346 DO-A3
CPF28.................................................................. 346 Parameter ......................................................... 814
CPF29.................................................................. 346 Down 2 command
CPF30.................................................................. 346 Parameter ................................................... 764, 768
CPF31.................................................................. 347 Down command ................................................ 846–847
CPF32.................................................................. 347 Parameter ................................................... 764, 768
CPF33.................................................................. 347 Drive
CPF34.................................................................. 347 Control Circuit Terminal Block Replacement ............... 442
CPF35.................................................................. 347 Disposal ........................................................... 453
CPF36.................................................................. 347 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP00/UL Open
CPF37.................................................................. 347 Type) ........................................................ 486
CPF38.................................................................. 347 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP20/UL Open
CPF39.................................................................. 347 Type) .................................................. 477–485
CPyE ................................................................... 392 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP20/UL Type 1) ... 487–
Crimp ferrule.......................................................... 110 494
CrST.................................................................... 373 Exterior Dimensions Diagram (IP20) ................... 496–500
CSEr.................................................................... 392 Initialization ...................................................... 661
Cumulative Operation TimeSetting ................................ 994 Initialize Parameters............................................. 661
Current Detection Speed Search.................................... 697 Inspection ......................................................... 406

Long-Term Storage .............................................. 449 Change to IP20/UL Type 1 ...................................... 55
Rating (200 V) ................................................... 458 Derating ..................................................... 474, 953
Rating (400 V) ................................................... 461 Encoder option
Drive Mode Unit Monitor Select ................................... 982 Parameter ......................................................... 798
Drive Model Selection ............................................... 989 End1.................................................................... 387
Drive watt loss ..................................................... 40–41 End2.................................................................... 387
Droop Control End3.................................................................... 387
Parameter ......................................................... 723 End4.................................................................... 387
dv1...................................................................... 348 End5.................................................................... 387
dv2...................................................................... 348 End6.................................................................... 387
Detection condition settings.................................... 802 End7.................................................................... 387
Detection level ................................................... 805 End8.................................................................... 388
Detection method settings ...................................... 805 End9.................................................................... 388
dv3...................................................................... 348 Energy-saving control
Detection condition settings.................................... 802 Parameter ......................................................... 724
dv4...................................................................... 349 Enter command ....................................................... 309
Detection condition settings.................................... 802 EP24v .................................................................. 375
dv7...................................................................... 349 Er-01 ................................................................... 388
dWA2 .................................................................. 373 Er-02 ................................................................... 388
dWA3 .................................................................. 373 Er-03 ................................................................... 388
dWAL .................................................................. 373 Er-04 ................................................................... 389
Dwell function Er-05 ................................................................... 389
Parameter ......................................................... 722 Er-08 ................................................................... 389
dWF1................................................................... 349 Er-09 ................................................................... 389
dWF2................................................................... 349 Er-10 ................................................................... 389
dWF3................................................................... 349 Er-11 ................................................................... 389
dWFL .................................................................. 349 Er-12 ................................................................... 390
E Er-13 ................................................................... 390
E5 Er-14 ................................................................... 390
Fault ............................................................... 350 Er-15 ................................................................... 390
Minor Fault ....................................................... 373 Er-16 ................................................................... 390
Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 826 Er-17 ................................................................... 390
EF....................................................................... 374 Er-18 ................................................................... 390
EF0 Er-19 ................................................................... 390
Detection conditions ............................................ 823 Er-20 ................................................................... 390
Detection conditions setting (DeviceNet) .................... 829 Er-21 ................................................................... 390
Fault ............................................................... 350 Er-25 ................................................................... 391
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 ERF type braking resistor
Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 823 Protective function .............................................. 948
EF1 Wiring ............................................................. 121
Fault ............................................................... 350 Err ...................................................................... 351
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 Error Code List ....................................................... 337
EF2 Exterior and mounting dimensions
Fault ............................................................... 350 Installation dimensions .......................................... 56
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 Panel cut out dimensions ........................................ 56
EF3 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP00/UL Open Type)
Fault ............................................................... 350 Drive............................................................... 486
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP20/UL Open Type)
EF4 Drive......................................................... 477–485
Fault ............................................................... 350 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions (IP20/UL Type 1)
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 Drive......................................................... 487–494
EF5 Exterior Dimensions Diagram (IP20)
Fault ............................................................... 350 Drive......................................................... 496–500
Minor Fault ....................................................... 374 External 24 V power supply
EF6 Power supply input terminals .................................. 107
Fault ............................................................... 351 External Cooling Fin
Minor Fault ....................................................... 375 Derating ..................................................... 474, 953
EF7 F
Fault ............................................................... 351 FAn
Minor Fault ....................................................... 375 Fault ............................................................... 351
EF8 Minor Fault ....................................................... 375
Fault ............................................................... 351 Fan Operation Time Setting......................................... 994
Minor Fault ....................................................... 375 FAn1.................................................................... 351
Elapsed Operating Time Selection ................................. 994 Fast Stop Time
Electrolytic Capacitor Parameter ......................................................... 734
Estimated Lifespan .............................................. 408 Fault .............................................................. 336, 342
Enclosure Type Fault code

MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 328 Auto-Tuning ...................................................... 206
Fault Code List ....................................................... 337 Induction motors
Fault history Motor Parameters ................................................ 785
Display procedure ............................................... 184 Inertia Tuning ......................................................... 210
Fault Reset............................................................. 393 Precautions ....................................................... 213
Fault Restart Input Phase Detection
Parameter ......................................................... 937 Protection Functions ............................................ 950
FbH Input voltage
Fault ............................................................... 352 Parameter ......................................................... 779
Minor Fault ....................................................... 375 Inspection
FbL Drive............................................................... 406
Fault ............................................................... 352 Installation
Minor Fault ....................................................... 375 Front cover ........................................................ 50
Feed Forward Control Keypad ............................................................. 44
Parameter ......................................................... 968 Terminal cover .................................................... 50
Field Forcing UL Type 1 protective cover...................................... 55
Parameter ......................................................... 775 Installation dimensions ............................................... 56
Field weakening Installation environment.............................................. 34
Parameter ......................................................... 775 Interlock
Fine tuning ............................................................ 217 Circuit example .................................................. 120
Finless Internal Drive Braking Transistor
Derating ..................................................... 474, 953 Protection Functions ............................................ 955
Firmware update lock................................................ 678 IP20/UL Type 1
Freq Ref Setting Method Select .................................... 990 Attach protective cover .......................................... 55
Freq reference bias J
Parameter ......................................................... 768 Jog command ......................................................... 762
Frequency Agreement Jog operation .......................................................... 163
Parameter ......................................................... 936 JOG operation......................................................... 163
Frequency reference Jump frequency
Command source correlation diagram ........................ 756 Parameter ......................................................... 763
LOCAL/REMOTE Run selection ....................... 680, 756 Jumper switch......................................................... 114
Making changes using keypad ................................. 163
Offset frequency addition....................................... 776 K
Switching between LOCAL/REMOTE........... 680, 689, 756 KEB ride-thru function
Upper and lower frequency limits ............................. 762 Compensation Time ............................................. 923
Frequency reference bias KEB Method Selection ......................................... 925
Parameter ......................................................... 764 Operation during momentary power loss..................... 921
Frequency reference hold function Parameter ......................................................... 917
Parameter ................................................... 764, 768 Single Drive KEB Method ..................................... 925
Fuse rating............................................................. 137 System KEB Method............................................ 925
Keypad
G Application Preset ............................................... 204
Gateway Mode........................................................ 818 Backlight setting ................................................. 199
Getting set up ......................................................... 157 Battery Replacement ............................................ 447
GF ...................................................................... 352 Data log setting ............................................ 193, 196
Protection Functions ............................................ 951 Display communication option information ................. 201
Ground Display drive information ...................................... 200
Drive................................................................ 90 Display software version ....................................... 200
Ground Fault Detection External dimensions .............................................. 45
Protection Functions ............................................ 951 HOME screen .................................................... 163
H Installation ......................................................... 44
HCA.................................................................... 376 Installation on control panel..................................... 45
Alarm Settings ................................................... 955 Language selection ........................................ 186, 659
HD...................................................................... 457 LED status ........................................................ 149
Heavy Duty Rating................................................... 457 Method of operation............................................. 149
High-Slip Braking Remove ............................................................ 44
Parameter ......................................................... 961 Set date and time................................................. 187
HLCE .................................................................. 352 Set time ........................................................... 187
HOME screen ......................................................... 163 Setup Wizard ..................................................... 189
Horsepower ........................................................... 988 Start/stop data logging .......................................... 191
How to read the model number...................................... 23 Keypad Display....................................................... 981
Humidity Keypad Display Selection........................................... 982
Environment....................................................... 34 Keypad Operation .................................................... 988
I Keypad-related settings.............................................. 981
iFEr..................................................................... 392 kWh Monitor Initialization.......................................... 995
IGBT Maintenance Setting.......................................... 995 L
Induction Motor L24v.................................................................... 376

Language selection ................................................... 659 Parameter ......................................................... 785
Procedure ......................................................... 186 Mid point B voltage
LCD contrast adjustment ............................................ 983 Motor 2 parameters.............................................. 790
LED Light Function Selection...................................... 991 Parameter ......................................................... 785
LED status ring Middle Output Frequency
ALM/ERR ........................................................ 155 Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789
Ready.............................................................. 155 Parameter ......................................................... 784
RUN ............................................................... 155 Middle Output Frequency Voltage
LF....................................................................... 352 Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789
Protective function .............................................. 950 Parameter ......................................................... 785
LF2 ..................................................................... 353 Minimum output frequency
Protection Functions ............................................ 953 Parameter ......................................................... 785
LKEB type braking resistor unit Minimum Output Frequency
Wiring ............................................................. 121 Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789
Load Inertia Ratio Minimum Output Voltage
Parameter ......................................................... 934 Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 790
LoG..................................................................... 376 Parameter ......................................................... 785
LO/RE Key Function Selection .................................... 988 Minor Fault...................................................... 336, 371
LOCAL/REMOTE indicator.................................. 149, 151 Minor fault code
LSo ..................................................................... 353 MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 330
Protective function ........................................ 956–957 Minor Fault Code List ............................................... 337
LT-1 .................................................................... 376 Modbus
LT-2 .................................................................... 376 Broadcast Messages ............................................. 327
LT-3 .................................................................... 377 Command data ................................................... 311
LT-4 .................................................................... 377 Communication error code ..................................... 331
M Communication specifications ................................. 300
Main circuit terminals Enter command .................................................. 309
Configuration of terminal block ................................ 72 Fault code ......................................................... 328
Line voltage drop ................................................. 78 Loopback test .................................................... 306
Wire gauge......................................................... 78 Minor fault code ................................................. 330
Wiring .............................................................. 71 Monitor data ...................................................... 314
Wiring procedure for terminal block ........................... 96 Register reading.................................................. 305
Main menu Register writing .................................................. 306
Display procedure ............................................... 163 Self-diagnosis .................................................... 310
Maintenance Period .................................................. 994 Wiring ............................................................. 300
Maximum Output Frequency Molded-case circuit breaker ........................................ 130
Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789 Momentary Power Loss
Parameter ......................................................... 784 KEB Compensation Time ...................................... 923
Maximum Output Voltage Monitors
Motor 2 Parameters.............................................. 789 Data log setting ...................................... 193–194, 196
Parameter ......................................................... 784 Display analog gauge ........................................... 168
MCCB ................................................................. 130 Display bar graph ................................................ 166
Mechanical Weakening Detection Display procedure ............................................... 164
Parameter ......................................................... 941 Set custom monitors............................................. 165
MEMOBUS Show custom monitors.......................................... 166
Broadcast Messages ............................................. 327 Start/stop data logging .......................................... 191
Command data ................................................... 311 Trend Plot Display............................................... 170
Communication error code ..................................... 331 Motor
Communication specifications ................................. 300 Change direction of motor rotation............................ 163
Enter command .................................................. 309 Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Thermistor ....... 911
Fault code ......................................................... 328 Wiring .............................................................. 71
Loopback test .................................................... 306 Wiring distance ................................................... 90
Minor fault code ................................................. 330 Motor 2
Monitor data ...................................................... 314 Base Frequency .................................................. 789
Register reading.................................................. 305 Base voltage ...................................................... 790
Register writing .................................................. 306 Control mode settings ........................................... 789
Self-diagnosis .................................................... 310 Leakage Inductance ............................................. 792
Wiring ............................................................. 300 Line-to-Line Resistance ........................................ 791
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Maximum Output Frequency .................................. 789
Parameter ......................................................... 899 Maximum Output Voltage ...................................... 789
Serial communication terminals ............................... 109 Mid point B frequency .......................................... 790
Setting for termination resistor ................................ 118 Mid point B voltage ............................................. 790
microSD card Middle Output Frequency ...................................... 789
Disposal ........................................................... 453 Middle Output Frequency Voltage ............................ 789
Insertion slot...................................................... 149 Minimum Output Frequency ................................... 789
Mid point B frequency Minimum Output Voltage ...................................... 790
Motor 2 parameters.............................................. 790 Motor Iron Loss.................................................. 792

Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1.................... 792 oFA13 .................................................................. 356
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2.................... 792 oFA14 .................................................................. 356
Motor rated power (kW) ........................................ 792 oFA15 .................................................................. 356
No-load Current.................................................. 791 oFA16 .................................................................. 356
Number of motor poles ......................................... 791 oFA17 .................................................................. 356
Rated current ..................................................... 790 oFA30 .................................................................. 356
Rated Slip ......................................................... 791 oFA31 .................................................................. 356
V/f Pattern ........................................................ 788 oFA32 .................................................................. 356
Motor Code Selection................................................ 793 oFA33 .................................................................. 356
Motor Overheating oFA34 .................................................................. 357
Operation During Detection of Alarms ................. 286, 915 oFA35 .................................................................. 357
Operation During Detection of Faults (PTC Input) ... 287, 915 oFA36 .................................................................. 357
Motor Overload oFA37 .................................................................. 357
Electric Thermal Protection Operation Time .......... 286, 914 oFA38 .................................................................. 357
Protection Functions ...................................... 283, 912 oFA39 .................................................................. 357
Motor parameters oFA40 .................................................................. 357
Motor 2............................................................ 790 oFA41 .................................................................. 357
Motor 2 Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1.................. 792 oFA42 .................................................................. 357
Motor 2 Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2.................. 792 oFA43 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 number of motor poles ............................... 791 oFb00 .................................................................. 358
Motor Parameters............................................... 778, 785 oFb01 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 Iron Loss ............................................... 792 oFb02 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 Leakage Inductance ................................... 792 oFb03 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance .............................. 791 oFb04 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 No-load Current ....................................... 791 oFb05 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 rated Current ........................................... 790 oFb06 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 rated power (kW)...................................... 792 oFb10 .................................................................. 358
Motor 2 Rated Slip .............................................. 791 oFb11................................................................... 359
Motor parameters (induction motors).............................. 785 oFb12 .................................................................. 359
Leakage Inductance ............................................. 787 oFb13 .................................................................. 359
Line-to-Line Resistance ........................................ 787 oFb14 .................................................................. 359
Motor Iron Loss.................................................. 788 oFb15 .................................................................. 359
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1.................... 787 oFb16 .................................................................. 359
Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2.................... 787 oFb17 .................................................................. 359
Motor rated power (kW) ........................................ 788 oFC00 .................................................................. 359
No-load Current.................................................. 786 oFC01 .................................................................. 359
Number of motor poles ......................................... 787 oFC02 .................................................................. 360
Rated current ............................................... 282, 786 oFC03 .................................................................. 360
Rated Slip ......................................................... 786 oFC04 .................................................................. 360
Motor Power Unit Selection ........................................ 988 oFC05 .................................................................. 360
MotorDirect@PowUpWhenUsingKeypad........................ 991 oFC06 .................................................................. 360
Multi-step speed operation .......................................... 756 oFC10 .................................................................. 360
Setting procedure ................................................ 756 oFC11 .................................................................. 360
Multiple-unit connection ............................................ 818 oFC12 .................................................................. 360
N oFC13 .................................................................. 361
Nameplate .............................................................. 23 oFC14 .................................................................. 361
ND...................................................................... 457 oFC15 .................................................................. 361
ndAT ................................................................... 392 oFC16 .................................................................. 361
Noise filter oFC17 .................................................................. 361
Wiring ............................................................. 135 oFC50 .................................................................. 361
Normal Duty Rating ................................................. 457 oFC51 .................................................................. 361
nSE ..................................................................... 353 oFC52 .................................................................. 361
NumOfRunCommands Counter Initial ............................ 995 oFC53 .................................................................. 361
oFC54 .................................................................. 361
O oFC55 .................................................................. 361
oC....................................................................... 353 Off-Delay Timer ...................................................... 705
Overcurrent Detection Gain .................................... 953 Offset frequency
oFA00 .................................................................. 354 Parameter ......................................................... 776
oFA01 .................................................................. 355 oH
oFA02 .................................................................. 355 Alarm Settings ................................................... 949
oFA03 .................................................................. 355 Fault ............................................................... 362
oFA04 .................................................................. 355 Minor Fault ....................................................... 377
oFA05 .................................................................. 355 oH1 ..................................................................... 362
oFA06 .................................................................. 355 oH2 ..................................................................... 377
oFA10 .................................................................. 355 Alarm Settings ................................................... 949
oFA11 .................................................................. 355 oH3
oFA12 .................................................................. 355 Fault ............................................................... 362

Minor Fault ....................................................... 377 Checking modified parameters ................................ 181
Operation During Detection of Alarms ................. 286, 915 Checking user custom parameters ............................. 176
oH4 ..................................................................... 363 Delete Backed-up Parameters.................................. 180
Operation During Detection of Faults (PTC Input) ... 287, 915 Restore (Auto Backup).......................................... 202
oL1 ..................................................................... 363 Restore (keypad to drive) ....................................... 178
oL2 ..................................................................... 364 Restoring default settings....................................... 182
Protection Functions ............................................ 952 User-set ........................................................... 679
oL3 Verify (keypad and drive) ...................................... 179
Fault ............................................................... 364 Parameter Setting Errors ...................................... 336, 382
Minor Fault ....................................................... 378 PASS ................................................................... 379
oL4 Password
Fault ............................................................... 364 Setting ............................................................. 663
Minor Fault ....................................................... 378 Verification ....................................................... 662
oL5 PC
Fault ............................................................... 364 Connection procedure ........................................... 119
Minor Fault ....................................................... 378 PE1 ..................................................................... 366
oL7 ..................................................................... 365 PE2 ..................................................................... 366
On-Delay Timer ...................................................... 705 Peripheral Devices ................................................... 501
Ope Select @Keypad is Disconnect ............................... 990 PF................................................................. 367, 379
oPE01 .................................................................. 382 Protection Functions ............................................ 950
oPE02 .................................................................. 382 PGo
oPE03 .................................................................. 382 Detection time.................................................... 802
oPE05 .................................................................. 383 Fault ............................................................... 367
oPE06 .................................................................. 384 Minor Fault ....................................................... 379
oPE07 .................................................................. 384 Operation Selection after Detection ........................... 799
oPE08 .................................................................. 384 PGoH
oPE09 .................................................................. 385 Detection level ................................................... 805
oPE10 .................................................................. 385 Fault ............................................................... 367
oPE11 .................................................................. 385 Level detection (PG1)........................................... 803
oPE13 .................................................................. 385 Minor Fault ....................................................... 379
oPE15 .................................................................. 386 Phase Order Selection ............................................... 689
oPE16 .................................................................. 386 PID control ............................................................ 707
oPE18 .................................................................. 386 control block diagram ........................................... 709
oPE20 .................................................................. 386 Feedback value input............................................ 708
oPE33 .................................................................. 386 fine tuning ........................................................ 710
Operation During Momentary Power Loss Parameter ......................................................... 712
KEB ride-thru function ......................................... 917 PID feedback loss detection .................................... 709
Operation method selection .................................... 921 PID Sleep ......................................................... 710
Parameter ......................................................... 921 Setpoint input .................................................... 708
Speed Search function .......................................... 696 PM motor parameters
oPr ...................................................................... 365 d-Axis inductance ............................................... 794
Option card Encoder Z pulse offset .......................................... 795
Parameter ......................................................... 798 Induced voltage constant 1 ..................................... 794
Options................................................................. 501 Induced voltage constant 2 ..................................... 795
oS Motor rated current ........................................ 283, 793
Detection level ................................................... 801 Motor rated power (kW) ........................................ 793
Detection time.................................................... 801 Number of motor poles ......................................... 794
Fault ............................................................... 365 q-Axis inductance ............................................... 794
Minor Fault ....................................................... 378 Stator resistance.................................................. 794
Operation Select at Overspeed ................................. 799 PM Motor Parameters ............................................... 793
Output Phase Loss Detection PM motors
Protective function .............................................. 950 Auto-Tuning ...................................................... 207
ov Motor Code Selection ........................................... 793
Fault ............................................................... 365 PM Motors
Minor Fault ....................................................... 378 Fine Adjustment ................................................. 973
ovEr .................................................................... 379 Motor Parameters ................................................ 793
Overexcitation deceleration Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Thermistor ............ 911
Parameter ......................................................... 962 Power loss .......................................................... 40–41
Overtorque detection Protection Functions
Parameter ......................................................... 940 DC bus undervoltage ............................................ 923
P Drive Overheating ............................................... 949
Panel cut out dimensions ............................................. 56 GF.................................................................. 951
Parameter Ground Fault Detection ......................................... 951
Access Level Selection ......................................... 659 Input Phase Detection ........................................... 950
Automatic selection ............................................. 679 Internal Drive Braking Transistor ............................. 955
Backup (drive to keypad) ....................................... 177 LF2 ................................................................ 953
Changing setting values......................................... 174 Motor Overheating ........................................ 286, 915

Motor Overload ............................................ 283, 912 Run Command at Power Up ........................................ 692
oC .................................................................. 953 Run Command Selection 2
oH2 ................................................................ 949 Switching between LOCAL/REMOTE....................... 691
oH3 .......................................................... 286, 915 RUN indicator .................................................. 149, 151
oL2................................................................. 952 RUN key............................................................... 149
Overcurrent ....................................................... 953 S
Overload .......................................................... 952 S-curve characteristics
PF .................................................................. 950 Parameter ......................................................... 736
rr ................................................................... 955 Sampling time setting
Uv1 ................................................................ 923 Data log ..................................................... 194–195
Protective function Trend log........................................................ 1004
Desynchronization............................................... 956 SC ...................................................................... 368
Drive Overheating ............................................... 949 SCF..................................................................... 368
HCA ............................................................... 955 SE....................................................................... 379
LF .................................................................. 950 SEr...................................................................... 368
Low Speed Desynchronization .......................... 956–957 Serial communication terminals
LSo .......................................................... 956–957 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications ...................... 109
Motor Overheating (PTC Input) ......................... 287, 915 Set date and time
oH.................................................................. 949 Operation ......................................................... 187
oH4 .......................................................... 287, 915 Set time
Output Current Overload ....................................... 955 Operation ......................................................... 187
Output Phase Loss Detection .................................. 950 Setup Wizard
Software Current Limit Selection ............................. 952 Operation ......................................................... 189
PSE ..................................................................... 367 Short Circuit Braking
Pulse Train Input Parameter ......................................................... 693
Terminal RP Function Selection ............................... 904 Side-by-side
Pulse Train Input/Output Derating ..................................................... 474, 953
Parameter ......................................................... 903 Simple Positioning Stop ............................................. 768
Pulse train output Slip compensation
Terminal MP function selection ............................... 905 Parameter ......................................................... 737
Wiring specifications............................................ 115 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set................................. 995
PWEr................................................................... 392 Software Current Limit Selection
R Protective function .............................................. 952
Rating (200 V) Software version
Drive............................................................... 458 Display procedure ............................................... 200
Rating (400 V) Speed Agreement
Drive............................................................... 461 Parameter ......................................................... 936
rdEr ..................................................................... 392 Speed Detection
Ready Parameter ......................................................... 936
LED status ........................................................ 155 Speed Estimation Speed Search .................................... 698
Remove Speed limit
Front cover ........................................................ 50 Parameter ......................................................... 771
Keypad ............................................................. 44 Speed Search function
Terminal cover .................................................... 50 Operation during momentary power loss..................... 921
RESET key ............................................................ 149 Parameter ......................................................... 696
Residual Current Monitor/Residual Current Device Stall Prevention function
RCM/RCD........................................................ 130 Parameter ......................................................... 926
Wiring ............................................................. 130 Stationary Auto-Tuning
Restore Induction Motor.................................................. 206
Parameters (Auto Backup) ..................................... 202 PM motors ........................................................ 207
Parameters (keypad to drive)................................... 178 Precautions ....................................................... 213
Reverse Operation Selection ........................................ 686 Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance............ 206
rF ....................................................................... 367 Precautions ....................................................... 213
rH ....................................................................... 367 Stator resistance Auto-Tuning ...................................... 207
RJ-45 connector ...................................................... 149 Precautions ....................................................... 213
Rotational Auto-Tuning STo ..................................................................... 380
Induction Motor.................................................. 206 SToF.................................................................... 380
PM motors ........................................................ 207 Stop command
Precautions ....................................................... 212 LOCAL/REMOTE Run selection ............................. 682
rr ........................................................................ 368 STOP key.............................................................. 149
Protection Functions ............................................ 955 STOP Key Function Selection...................................... 989
rUn ..................................................................... 379 Stop Position Gain ................................................... 770
RUN Stopping Method Selection ......................................... 682
LED status ........................................................ 155 STPo ................................................................... 368
Run command Surge protective device
LOCAL/REMOTE Run selection ............................. 682 Connection........................................................ 134
Switching between LOCAL/REMOTE....................... 682 SvE ..................................................................... 369

T Parameter ......................................................... 940
Temperature Unit of measurement setting
Environment....................................................... 34 Acceleration and deceleration times .......................... 734
Terminal block ........................................................ 110 Unit selector........................................................... 988
Configuration of main circuit terminal block ................. 72 Up 2 command
Control circuit terminal block functions...................... 105 Parameter ................................................... 764, 768
I/O terminals function selection switches .................... 114 Up command .................................................... 846–847
Terminal function selection ......................................... 116 Parameter ................................................... 764, 768
Terminal A1 ................................................ 114, 116 USB port............................................................... 149
Terminal A2 ................................................ 114, 116 Connecting a PC ................................................. 119
Terminal A3 ................................................ 114, 117 User Monitor Select afterPowerUp ................................ 982
Terminal AM ............................................... 114, 117 User Parameter Default Value ...................................... 989
Terminal FM................................................ 114, 117 User-Set Display Units Max Value ................................ 983
Terminal screw User-SetDisplayUnits Dec Display ................................ 984
Screwdriver........................................................ 14 Uv ...................................................................... 380
Termination resistor Speed Search Selection at Start ................................ 704
Setting switch .................................................... 118 Uv1 ..................................................................... 369
Test run Detection level settings ......................................... 923
Checklist .......................................................... 224 Uv2 ..................................................................... 370
Fine tuning........................................................ 217 Uv3 ..................................................................... 370
Procedure ......................................................... 157 V
Procedure for no-load test run ................................. 215 vAEr.................................................................... 392
Procedure for test run with actual load ....................... 215 V/f Pattern ............................................................. 778
Thermal overload relay Second Motor .................................................... 788
Connection........................................................ 131 V/f Pattern Display Unit............................................. 983
Tightening torque Verify
Control circuit terminals ........................................ 110 Parameters (keypad and drive)................................. 179
Main circuit terminals............................................ 78 vFyE.................................................................... 392
TiM Vibration-resistant..................................................... 34
Fault ............................................................... 369
Minor Fault ....................................................... 380
W
WEEE.................................................................. 453
Timer function
Wire gauge
Parameter ......................................................... 705
Control circuit terminals ........................................ 110
Torque compensation
Main circuit terminals............................................ 78
Parameter ......................................................... 771
Voltage drop ....................................................... 78
Torque Compensation
Wiring.................................................................. 130
Parameter ......................................................... 741
AC reactor ........................................................ 133
Torque Control
Braking Resistor ................................................. 121
Parameter ......................................................... 770
Checklist .......................................................... 141
Switching to/from Speed Control ............................. 773
Control circuit terminal block.................................. 111
Torque limit function
Control circuit terminals ........................................ 104
Parameter ......................................................... 945
DC reactor ........................................................ 133
Torque reference
Main circuit terminal block ..................................... 96
Parameter ......................................................... 771
Main circuit terminals............................................ 71
Trend log
MEMOBUS/Modbus............................................ 300
Data log setting .................................................. 195
Motor ............................................................... 71
Sampling time setting ......................................... 1004
Noise filter ........................................................ 135
Trend Plot
Thermal overload relay ......................................... 131
Monitors .......................................................... 170
Wiring distance
Troubleshooting
Drive and motor................................................... 90
Code Displayed .................................................. 337
No Code Displayed.............................................. 394 Z
Troubleshooting without Fault Display ........................... 394 Z pulse Auto-Tuning ................................................. 207
TrPC.................................................................... 380 Zero Servo function
Tuning.................................................................. 731 Parameter ......................................................... 729
U
U2, U3 Initialization ................................................. 995
UL3
Fault ............................................................... 369
Minor Fault ....................................................... 380
UL4
Fault ............................................................... 369
Minor Fault ....................................................... 380
UL5
Fault ............................................................... 369
Minor Fault ....................................................... 380
Undertorque detection

Revision History
Date of Revision
Publication Number Section Revised Content
October 2023 8 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01034, 01035, and
01037.
Addition: Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data.
• Three-Phase 400 V: CIPR-GA70x4810 to 4H12
January 2022 7 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.
10 Revision: Reviewed and corrected “Estimated Weight”.
March 2020 6 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01029.
October 2017 5 1, 11 Revision: Reviewed and corrected the contents.
September 2017 4 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation.
2 Revision: Reviewed and corrected “Drive Watt Loss”.
February 2017 3 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01020.
• Three-Phase 200 V: CIPR-GA70x2360 and 2415
• Three-Phase 400 V: CIPR-GA70x4371 to 4675
2, 4 Addition: IP20 Applicable Gauge added to “Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques”.
November 2016 2 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01018.
June 2016 1 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded drive software version to PRG: 01011.
April 2016 – – First Edition

GA700 Series
Technical Manual
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)
Philipp-Reis-Str. 6, 65795 Hattersheim 2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan, 2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi,
am Main, Germany IL 60085, U.S.A. Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: +49-6196-569-300 +1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) Phone: +81-930-25-2548
E-mail: support@yaskawa.eu.com www.yaskawa.com www.yaskawa.co.jp
www.yaskawa.eu.com
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the
manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules,
regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
Original instructions.
© 2016 YASKAWA Electric Corporation
SIEPC71061705
Revision: I <8>-0
October 2023
Published in Japan
*SIEPC71061705* 23-2-11_YEU
YASKAWA AC Drive GA700
Supplemental Technical Manual
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing YASKAWA AC Drive GA700.
This supplemental technical manual describes the functions added or changed with a GA700 software
upgrade, and should be read to ensure proper usage. Read this manual together with the manual
(TOEP C710617 xx) included with the product and the GA700 Technical Manual (SIEP C710617 xx)
that can be found on our documentation website. Observe the safety messages and precautions to
ensure correct application of the product.
Applicable Software Version

This manual applies to GA700 for software versions S1038 or later.
The software version is indicated on the nameplate affixed to the side of the product, and also can be
viewed by using monitor parameter U1-25.
Modified Contents
This supplemental manual explains about these modifications:
1. A parameter that is not initialized by A1-03=2220, 3330 [2-Wire Initialization, 3-Wire
Initialization] has been added
2. The C6-05 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain] setting range has been changed
3. Support of Ethernet/IP protocol Forward Close command operation (F7-43 [PLC Communication
Disconnect Selection] has been added)
4. CE [Modbus Communication Error] detection function has been expanded (H5-05=2 [CE
Detection: Enabled During Run])
5. Operation of the output voltage limit operating range when PM motor energy-saving control
is disabled has been improved (nA-04 [Output Voltage Limit q-Axis Current Command
Reference Switch Hysteresis] has been added)
6. Adjustment parameters for PM motor control have been added (E5-08 [PM q-Axis
Inductance (at Flux Saturation)], n8-71 [Speed Observer Control D Gain], n8-91 [Id Limit
at Output Voltage Limit])
7. Parameter description details used in fine-tuning during test run have been changed
8. Troubleshooting description details when the power supply for the fan and inrush current
prevention circuit fails have been changed
Document No.: EZZ024701
Prepared in August 2023
1
1. A parameter that is not initialized by A1-03=2220, 3330 [2-Wire
Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization] has been added
A1-12 [Bluetooth ID] has been added to parameters that are not initialized by A1-03=2220, 3330 [2-Wire
Initialization, 3-Wire Initialization]. (Underlined parts are added items)
No. Name
A1-00 Language Selection
A1-02 Control Method Selection
DriveWorksEZ Function
A1-07
Selection
A1-12 Bluetooth ID
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
... ...
2. The C6-05 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain] setting range has been changed
The upper limit value of C6-05 [Carrier Freq Proportional Gain] which is the gain to linearly change the
carrier frequency depending on the output frequency has been changed to 300. (Underlined parts are
changed items)
Default
No.
Name Description Setting
(Hex.)
(Range)
C6-05 Carrier Freq Determined by
(0227) Proportional Gain Sets the proportional gain for the carrier frequency. Set C6-02 C6-02
= F [Carrier Frequency Selection = User Defined (C6-03 to (0 - 300)
C6-05)] to set this parameter.
3. Support of Ethernet/IP protocol Forward Close command operation

Operation stop/run continuous operation when the Forward Close command in the EtherNet/IP protocol is
received while the drive is running can be selected at F7-43 [PLC Communication Disconnect Selection].
Default
No.
(Hex.)
(Range)
F7-43 PLC 0
(1BCE) Communication (0 - 2)
Sets the operation when the Forward Close command (PLC
Disconnect
communication disconnect command) in the Ethernet/IP
Selection
protocol is received from the network during run.
0: Operation continued
1: Clear Run command from communication option
2: bUS [Option Communication Error]
Document No. EZZ024701
2
4. CE [Modbus Communication Error] detection function has been expanded
Option 2 [Enabled during Run] has been added to H5-05 [Comm Fault Detection Selection] and the
detection function of CE [MEMOBUS Communication Error] has been expanded. (Underlined parts are
changed items)
Default
No.
(Hex.)
(Range)
H5-05 Comm Fault 1
(0429) Detection (0 - 2)
Sets the function that detects CE [Modbus Communication
Selection
Error] issues during MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
0: Disabled
Does not detect CE. The drive continues operation.
1: Enabled
Detects CE. If the drive detects CE, it will operate as
specified by the setting of H5-04 [Communication Error
(MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error) Stop Method].
2: Enabled during Run
If the drive detects CE during Run, it will operate as
specified by the setting of H5-04 [Communication Error
(MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error) Stop
Method]. If the drive detects CE while it is stopped, it
will detect a CE minor fault.
5. Operation of the output voltage limit operating range when PM motor

energy-saving mode is disabled has been improved
A function for suppressing shock has been added as shock sometimes occurs on some PM motors at the
output voltage limit with b8-01=0 [Energy Saving Control Disabled] set. Sets the switch hysteresis of the
q-axis current command referenced to the d-axis current command at nA-04 [Output Voltage Limit q-Axis
Current Switch Hysteresis]. Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter.
Default
No.
(Hex.)
(Range)
nA-04 Output Voltage -10%
(1BF5) Limit q-Axis (-20% - 0%)
Sets the switch hysteresis of the q-axis current command
Expert Current
referenced to the d-axis current command to suppress shock at
Command
the output voltage limit. Sets the switch hysteresis of the q-axis
Reference Switch
current command as a percentage of motor rated current.
Hysteresis
3
6. Adjustment parameters for PM motor control have been added
E5-08 [PM q-Axis Inductance (at Flux Saturation)], n8-71 [Speed Observer Control D Gain], and n8-91 [Id
Limit at Output Voltage Limit] have been added as adjustment parameters for PM motor control. The
adjustment procedure is given in "7. Parameter description details used in fine-tuning during test run have
been changed."
Default
No.
(Hex.)
(Range)
E5-08 PM q-Axis 0.00 mH
(0330) Inductance (Lq (0.00 mH –
Sets the q-axis inductance (Lq at flux saturation) that the drive
Expert at Flux 600.00 mH)
uses for speed estimation.
Saturation)
Adjust this parameter when STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] or
OC [Overcurrent] occurs.
n8-71 Speed Observer 5.00
(065F) Control D Gain (0.00 - 10.00)
Sets the derivative gain that the drive uses for speed
Expert
estimation. Adjust this parameter when STPo [Motor Step-Out
Detected] or OC [Overcurrent] occurs.
n8-91 Id Limit at -50%
(02F7) Output Voltage (-200% - 0%)
Sets the Id limit value at output voltage limit. Adjust this
Expert Limit
parameter when STPo [Motor Step-Out Detected] or OC
[Overcurrent] occurs.
7. Parameter description details used in fine-tuning during test run have been
changed
Because of "3. Adjustment parameters for PM motor control have been added," n8-91 [Id Limit at Output
Voltage Limit], n8-71 [Speed Observer Control D Gain] and E5-08 [PM q-Axis Inductance (Lq at Flux
Saturation)] have been added to the parameters that are used for fine -tuning during a test run in the
"Open Loop Vector Control for PM" and "Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Method for PM Motors"
modes. N8-69 [Speed Observer Control P Gain], n8-39 [HFI LPF Cutoff Freq] and n8-11 [Observer
Calculation Gain 2] have also been added to enable flexible fine -tuning during test run. (Underlined parts
in the table below are added items)
◆A1-02=5 [OLV/PM: Open Loop Vector Control for PM Mode]

Parameter Recommended
Issue Possible Solutions Default
Number Setting
The drive detected N8-62 [Output Set to a value lower • 200.0V Set this parameter
stalling, STPo [Motor Voltage Limit Level] than the actual input • 400.0V lower than the input
Step-Out Detected] voltage. power supply
or OC [Overcurrent] voltage.
at high speed and n8-91 [Id Limit at Decrease the -50% -150% to -50%
maximum output Output Voltage setting in -5%-unit
voltage. Limit] *1 decrements.
*1 n8-91 [Id Limit at Output Voltage Limit] is enabled on drives with software versions PRG:01038 and
later.
4
◆A1-02=6 [AOLV/PM: Advanced Open Loop Vector Control for PM Mode]
Parameter Recommended
Issue Possible Solutions Default
Number Setting
Hunting or fault n8-69 [Speed • If torque or 1.00 0.20 - 5.00
occurs when the Observer Control P speed response are
load/speed Gain] slow, increase the
fluctuates. (Fault is setting value in
detected at impact 0.20 increments.
load) • If hunting or
oscillation occurs,
decrease the
setting value in
0.20 decrements.
n8-71 [Speed Decrease the 5.00 1.00 - 5.00
Observer Control D setting in 0.50-unit
Gain]*2 decrements.
E5-08 [PM q-Axis • Set the q-axis 0.00 mH E5-06 and E5-07
Inductance (Lq at inductance value at
Flux Saturation)]*2 flux saturation
shown on the
motor nameplate or
test report.
• Set the value of
E5-06 [PM q-Axis
Inductance] and
increase the setting
value until vibration
is suppressed. (Set
E5-08 within the
range of values of
E5-06 and E5-07.
The function is
disabled when the
value is set to
0.00.)
Hunting, vibration n8-39 [HFI LPF Set the setting 250 Hz 50% of n8-36 [HFI
or abnormal noise Cutoff Freq] value to 50% of the Frequency Level for
from the motor setting value of L Tuning]
occurs when n8-36 [HFI
n8-57=1 [High Frequency Level for
Frequency Injection L Tuning].
Function: Enabled]
Speed drops when n8-11 [Observer Decrease the Determined by 50.0 - 300.0
a load is applied. Calculation Gain 2] setting in 10-unit n8-72
(When a torque decrements.
limit state has not
occurred)
*2 n8-71 [Speed Observer Control D Gain] and E5-08 [PM q-Axis Inductance (Lq at Flux Saturation)] are
enabled on drives with software versions PRG:01038 and later.
5
8. Troubleshooting description details when the power supply for the fan and
inrush current prevention circuit fails have been changed
The troubleshooting description details for when the power supply for the fan and inrush current
prevention circuit has failed have been added. (Underlined parts are changed items)
One of the FAn1 [Drive Cooling Fan Failure], Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage] and Uv3 [Soft Charge
Answerback Fault] faults or a Uv [DC Bus Undervoltage] minor fault is detected when the power supply for
the fan and inrush current prevention circuit has failed.
Faults
◆FAn1 [Drive Cooling Fan Fault]
FAn1 Drive Cooling Fan Fault The cooling fan stopped operating • Examine cooling fan operation.
correctly. • Re-energize the drive.
• Examine U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] and
U4-04 [Cool Fan Maintenance]. If the
performance life of the cooling fan is expired or if
there is damage to the fan, replace the fan.
The circulation fan is damaged. • Examine circulation fan operation.
• Examine U4-03 [Cooling Fan Ope Time] and
U4-04 [Cool Fan Maintenance]. If the
performance life of the circulation fan is expired or
if there is damage to the circulation fan, replace
the circulation fan.
The power supply for the fan and • Re-energize the drive and check to see if the
inrush current prevention circuit fault stays.
has failed. • If the fault stays, replace the control board
(Models 2257 to 2415, 4208 to 4H12) or the drive. For information about replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or your
◆Uv1 [DC Bus Undervoltage]

Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage There is a phase loss in the drive Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit
input power. drive input power.
There is loose wiring in the drive Tighten the terminal screws to the correct
input power terminals. tightening torque.
The drive input power voltage is • Examine the input power for problems.
changing too much. • Make the drive input power stable.
The main circuit capacitors have Examine the capacitor maintenance time in
become unserviceable. monitor U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance]. If U4-05
is more than 90%, replace the control board or
the drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest
The relay or contactor on the U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte] shows the
soft-charge bypass relay is performance life of the soft-charge bypass relay.
damaged. If U4-06 is more than 90%, replace the control
board or the drive. For information about
replacing the board, contact Yaskawa or your
The power supply for the fan and • Re-energize the drive and check to see if the
inrush current prevention circuit fault stays.
has failed. • If the fault stays, replace the control board
(Models 2257 to 2415, 4208 to 4H12) or the drive. For information about replacing
the control board, contact Yaskawa or your
6
◆Uv3 [Soft Charge Answerback Fault]
Uv3 Soft Charge Answerback Fault There is damage to the relay or • Re-energize the drive.
contactor on the soft-charge • If the fault stays, replace the control board
bypass relay. or the drive.
• Monitor U4-06 [PreChargeRelayMainte]
shows the performance life of the
soft-charge bypass relay. If U4-06 is more
than 90%, replace the control board or the
drive. For information about replacing the
control board, contact Yaskawa or your
The power supply for the fan • Re-energize the drive and check to see
and inrush current if the fault stays.
prevention circuit has failed. • If the fault stays, replace the control
(Models 2257 to 2415, 4208 to board or the drive. For information about
4H12) replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.
Minor fault
◆Uv [Undervoltage]
Uv Undervoltage The drive input power voltage • Examine the input power for problems.
is changing too much. • Make the drive input power stable.
• If the input power supply is good, examine
the magnetic contactor on the main circuit
side for problems.
There is a phase loss in the Correct errors with the wiring for main
drive input power. circuit drive input power.
There is loose wiring in the Tighten the terminal screws to the correct
drive input power terminals. tightening torque.
The main circuit capacitor Examine the capacitor maintenance time in
circuit has become monitor U4-05 [CapacitorMaintenance]. If
unserviceable. U4-05 is more than 90%, replace the control
board or the drive. For information about
replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa
or your nearest sales representative.
The drive input power • Check for an alarm when a molded-case
transformer is too small, and circuit breaker, leakage breaker (ELCB,
voltage drops when the power GFCI, or RCM/RCD) (with overcurrent
is switched on. protective function), or magnetic contactor
is ON.
• Check the capacity of the drive power
supply transformer.
Air inside the drive is too hot. Check the ambient temperature of the drive.
The Charge LED is broken. Replace the board or the entire drive. For
information about replacing the control
board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest
The power supply for the fan • Re-energize the drive and check to see
and inrush current if the fault stays.
prevention circuit has failed. • If the fault stays, replace the control
(Models 2257 to 2415, 4208 to board or the drive. For information about
4H12) replacing the control board, contact
Yaskawa or your nearest sales
representative.

Siep C710617 05i Ga700 TM en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siep C710617 05i Ga700 TM en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siep C710617 05i Ga700 TM en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GA700 Series

AC Drive for Industrial Applications

2 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 3

4 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

4. Startup Procedure and Test Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 5

6. Network Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

6 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

8. Periodic Inspection and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 7

10. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

8 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 9

12. Parameter Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

10 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 11

12 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 13

AOLV Advanced Open Loop Vector Control

CLV Closed Loop Vector Control

CL-V/f Closed Loop V/f Control

CLV/PM Closed Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors

Drive YASKAWA AC Drive GA700

EDM External Device Monitor

EZOLV EZ Open Loop Vector Control

IPM motor Interior Permanent Magnet Motor

MFAI Multi-Function Analog Input

MFAO Multi-Function Analog Output

MFDI Multi-Function Digital Input

MFDO Multi-Function Digital Output

OLV Open Loop Vector Control

OLV/PM Open Loop Vector Control for Permanent Magnet Motors

SIL Safety Integrity Level

SPM motor Surface Permanent Magnet Motor

V/f V/f Control

■ Icons to Identify Screw Shapes

Phillips/slot combo (+/-) Hex self-locking nut

Slotted (-) Hex socket cap (WAF: 5 mm)

Minus (-) Hex socket cap (WAF: 6 mm)

Hex bolt (cross-slotted) Hex socket cap (WAF: 8 mm)

Hex bolt (slotted)

◆ About Registered Trademarks

14 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

• Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA.

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 15

i.2 Using the Product Safely

16 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 17

◆ Warning Label Content and Location

Figure i.1 Warning Label Content and Location

18 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

i.3 Warranty Information

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 19

20 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual

1.1 Section Safety ........................................................................................................... 22

YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual 21

1.1 Section Safety

22 YASKAWA SIEPC71061705I GA700 Series Technical Manual